ἿΠΙ LOLt '€
"11
ΟΙΝΟΒΟΙ JO ALISHAAINN Yair
Lc eaataants | τε poatibe Dade s Aten tek le ©
De gee eaetetene celactle
HUNC LIBRUM
CUM ALIIS
COLLEGIO JUVENTUTIS SUAE ET JUVENTUTI COLLEGII
DONO LEGAVITI
ALFREDUS GULIELMUS STRATTON, M.A., PH.D.
HUJUS UNIVERSITATIS ET COLLEGII
IN LITTERIS GRAECIS ET LATINIS OLIM ALUMNUS,
NIVERSITATIS JOHNS HOPKINS SCHOLARIS ET SOCIUS,
UNIVERSITATIS CHICAGO PRAELECTOR,
UNIVERSITATIS LAHORE APUD INDOS
LINGUAE SANSCRITICAE PROFESSOR ET REGISTRARIUS:
ANTE DIEM OBIIT FEBRI MELITENSI IN MONTIBUS KASHMIR
AUGUSTO MENSE A.D. 1902 TRIGINTA SEX ANNOS NATUS.
‘* Dulces exuviae dum fata deusque sinebant.
Respiciebat nos antiquo flumine Gangi transito:
respexit, flumen majus magisque antiquum transiturus.’
‘* After life's fitful fever he sleeps well.
rie le
SSS Tt ei
ERD prec:
ET Hi,
PE ann
<TR τον
DEPARTMENTAL |
LIBRARY
μέν οὁὌὋὔ ctgate |
near,
SYNTAX
OF
THE GREEK LANGUAGE,
ESPECIALLY OF THE ATTIC DIALECT, |
For the Use of Schools :
BY
DR. σὰ ΝΟ“ MADVIG,
PROFESSOR IN THE UNIVERSITY OF COPENHAGEN.
TRANSLATED FROM THE GERMAN
HENRY BROWNE, M.A.
|
| BY THE REV.
AND EDITED BY THE REV.
THOMAS KERCHEVER ARNOLD, M.A. |
| LATE RECTOR OF LYNDON,
ν | AND FORMERLY FELLOW OF TRINITY COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE.
Α TOGETHER WITH AN
APPENDIX ON THE GREEK PARTICLES, BY THE TRANSLATOR.
SECOND EDITION. | Y a \7
ie RIVINGTONS, aT. 20 -
London, Oxford, anv Cambridge.
] : 1879.
kote
ne ἣν
eel nail "τ eat
rptiererss bins ae eee
ν »
wee Penner nen SS eee
See COS
ee leks a δ Leg, Saher irae
Bice hy τιον τάδ φράσας
τος τηφαυνοσων ---- ὁ
υδῆννος" υνήμὸς ον τ ον ζωήτοτι
em ak ἘΜ 7
ee ἀκα πα΄
ee ES rite ae :
- --- se lh ὦ ὠν“'
δας nes aoe Seen ts
ao See cele rv beanct?
aang
ies Nae oe
5 Heese ἣν
“σ΄ te i gmat ls ate
bare ill tage oye ὧν
et O™
ae
ah Pere Wetton -
a cee,
: Sa τὰ
amma are τς,
fe Rican pap eat
»- ε .
ee aon
er th Pe
2 ENE ROR A
a ΡΥ Se EO Rr Ss oy
” 7a os
nee
~ ν
“ΔΚ ὡς "
a 3 7~
" Ὧν τις -᾽ἰννΖ !
(age sO main J
᾿ 2 noe ὡς
ἘΝ ΡΣ οοπτὰ
nen
ino
https: s://archi ive. org/details/syntaxofgreeklan00m
we πον
ae
Hakan on -
a> Foy - οἰ.
“ =
fe ἃ.
wares τῶν ul Adjective and oy tho Tmparsnel foun of Bxptenon ae
Sg Ub δὲ δ Usp ct the λέως. Seen Ξε
ae Pn, Sa ἃ
ew ae
Ω
ἘΣ τὰ 2
SaaS τος Ὁ aes poet ~.
ΝΣ ᾿
hk
hiaritucs ἢ
i mi ways SS ety /
nae Ὁ
317 ikea Ang Sing,
W esd Arties Ὡς
CS er ν᾿
nephew ΕἾ
ben eet
ρους
, ᾿ς Ne αν 4: ew eee
IS αν, nig OS erg a
- ἃ..." > F Dre:
. ‘
"
" 2 =* .
- e
ve?” “ον...
κι νσ 0
- “ys
. ᾿ υ - τς Αι a tageage eae
; ᾿ ὦ δ poate nen ἄκος ἢ
ν = ᾿ ares -
- “΄ by “an
——— . =
a = od ψο τι - -
exry Ps;
piers tyy Ss
pant φῦ, es
Fe) ρον ee
δ NN Peta te Mey ee li a
mer aete chdeeintieines ta vee
fer Poy een towne ald, ba)
CONTENTS.
PART I.
PAGE
On the Connexion of Words and Sentences 1—86
Chapter I. On the Agreement of the Subject and Bredicate: of the Substan-
tive and Adjective :—and on the Impersonal form of Expression 1
IL. On the Use of the Article 7
III. The Cases. Nominative and ἜΤ ΕΤΕΙ 19
IV. Dative 31
V. Genitive 40
VI. Appendix to the Dictrine of Gent of the Prepon, especially
such as govern several cases - . : - ey |
VII. The Verb and its kinds, and the τ : : : οτθῦ
VIII. The relations of Adjectives (and Adverbs), especially the degrees
of Comparison - «ἢ
IX. Peculiarities in the edive ἀπε ον of ae πος
and Relative Pronouns, and in their relations to the Sentence ne
PART if.
The relations of Propositions one to another, especially the way of denoting
the mode or manner of Predication, and the time of the thing
Chapter I.
TH:
10a
1g'¢
We
VE:
VIE
The Moods in general, and peal the Indicative and its
Tenses: the Indicative with a .
The Subjunctive (Conjunctive) and its Menges
The Optative and its Tenses: the Optative with ἄν
The Imperative :
The Infinitive and its mene
The Participle
Peculiarities in the Gennesion of Co- ont οί τ and of
Principal and Accessory Sentences. Interrogative Sentences
predicated 87—207
87
98
108
126
127
155
111
vi Contents.
PAGE
Chapter VIII. The Negations . : 189
IX. (Appendix to Parts I. and IL. ) Certain ἜΤΙ Tereoulanites
of Construction . 5 : : ς 5 ; : . 202
PART ΤΠ
The Order and Position of Worcs and Sentences. : : ᾿ . 208—210
APPENDIX (By THE TRANSLATOR).
ON THE USE AND MEANING OF THE PARTICLES.
221. Office of Particles generally ‘ ἃ : : ; : . ΠΣ αἱ
222—226. καί. καὶ γάρ. εἰ καί. : 5 : - - . : «ab.
227, 228. τε Ἢ ὃ : : Η : 5 ; 2 5 : 51}:
229, δέ. καὶ δέ. οὐδέ, μηδέ : 5 AS. i - ς z ; . 314
bo
30. μέν. ᾿ ; : Ξ ᾿ 5 : 5 : Ε Ε . 215
31—233. μήν. καὶ μήν. καὶ μήν γε. καὶ μὴν καί. ἀλλὰ μήν. GAN οὐ μήν.
bo
ye py. : ᾿ : : Ξ : : 3 : . abe
234—236. δή. καὶ δή. μὲν δή. é : 3 : 3 5 ; - 216
237. δῆτα. . : E : : é - : . : : . Hee
238. dai. 5 : : : 5 : : : ὃ : : . 218
299. ---θε, ---θεν. δῆθεν . F : ; : : εξ : 5 ΠΡ
240. δήπουθεν . 5 : : : : : 3 : : : τ Seb
241. θήν. ‘ ι ᾿ F é : : : : ἴ ἢ . ΠΝ
242. ἤδη (δὴν) . : Z : : A z : : : 2 ΒΒ
243, 244. νῦν. νυν, νυ, encl. ἔ : ; p ἃ Ξ : : > ΨΠ0
245. νή. ναί. μά. : δ : : f : : : : «abs
246. 7. ἢ μήν. ἢπου. ἀλλ᾽ ἢ. - < : ς : ἃ δ ὦ:
247. περ (καίπερ) : : ; : : : f : : : . 220
248—251. ye. καί γε. δέ ye. εἴγε, i — γε. ye μῆν. γε δή. γε μὲν δή.
γέ τοι. γέ TOL δή . . . . 2 . . . . . ib.
252—256. τοι. καίτοι. καίτοι γε. μέντοι καὶ μέντοι. γε μέντοι. ἤτοι (from
ἢ), ἦτοι (from ij). οὔτοι, μήτοι. μήτοι --- ye. f : 5 . 222
257—259. pa, ἄρ. ἄρα : : : : : : ᾿ ; : . 224
200, 261. γάρ : : : - : ὃ : . 226
δ
δ
§
δ
δ
§
δ
δ
§
δ
8
δ
§
δ
δ
§
ὃ
ὃ
δ
ὃ
δ
δ
.
262, 263. τ apd γε; ap οὖν; ap οὐ; apa Pen : ὃ : . 227
§ 264—269. οὖν. ἀλλ᾽ οὖν, δ᾽ οὖν. εἴτ᾽ οὖν. γοῦν. γὰρ οὖν. μῶν. οὔκουν,
οὐκοῦν. μὲν ον ο΄, Σ - δ τὴ
§ 270. τοίνυν : : : : ὃ : : : : : . 230
bo ἘΦ LO vO
See es!
CO? CORAL? CO? LOR (Or (2 CO «ον
303. ὅφρα. ὅφρ᾽ av, dpa κεν
804. ἕως. τέως. : ξ
§ 305. ἔστε (μέχρις, ἄχρις)
8 806. πρίν. πρὶν ἄν
§ 307. ὡς (ὡς = εἰς)
§ 308. ὥς
§ 309. ὥστε. : :
§ 310. ὅπως (οὐχ ὅπως ---, ἀλλά)
§ 911. ἵνα (iv ἄν). : :
§ 312. ὅτι (οὐχ dre —, ἀλλά). διότι.
§ 313. ὅτε. τότε. πότε; ὅπότε
§ 914. ὅπου. : :
§ 315. ἐπεί. ἐπειδή. ἐπειδάν
§-316. εἰ. ἐάν. εἴτε. εἴθε.
§ 317. εἴγε. εἴπερ. καὶ εἰ. εἰ καί
§ 318. εἶτα. ἔπειτα
§ 319. ἔτι
Invex I.
ee
Tolyap. τοιγάρτοι. τοιγαροῦν
, 273. που, encl. δήπου. δήπουθεν
—282. ἀλλά. GAN ἄρα. ἀλλ᾽ ἦ; ἀλλὰ --- γάρ. οὐ μὴν ἀλλά, οὐ μέντοι
ποτέ, 610]. (Snore)
Contents.
ἀλλά, οὐ yap ἀλλά. ἀλλ᾽ ἤ (ἄλλ᾽ ἢ).
Inpvex II.
283—285. ἤ (ἤτοι, ἤτοι --- ye) (μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ)
286—296. οὐ and μή. οὐ py. μὴ οὐ.
297—302. ἄν (kev). : :
9
(ὅ, τι τάχιστα)
΄ ᾿ ᾿
Se θα: D> ag
᾿ ἧς ἘΣ aan
= ᾿ % a a |
᾿ a, 4 -π ans σεν
τὰ ᾿ δὲ δ
: 14
΄ " Ν᾿ |
- 3 4
a ni oe ἾΑ j
ἕω:-
ae μὰ ΕΒ; A] γε
7 a? αὐ
; ᾿ ὩΣ ἈΝ δν
‘ off
= Ν i) ¥ 7
= oA - <r te 06 Se FUR oe
? + ᾿ 7 Sea) Fe ᾿" fe; ὦ ἢ 5 a i
Si oF
ek
% 7 8 «9
(ook gr τα ἕ
᾿ . - ΠΡ ᾿ BS ἘΝ Ἂν
ἱ 3 τον ὦ ruts). 3 7
; ; : . ss, eo ΜΑΙ ΣΝ “
7 ΕἾ. eur ae | 8 =
» " -
᾿ law th *. ot.
= °
͵
7 .
= ~ δι =
᾽.. . ~ fe
᾿ Ὁ
i ; ἱ
_ τ
‘ a
"5 ae :
4 =,
a 7 τὶ =
᾿ ᾿ » ΤῊΣ
7 ὦ “: ᾿ Υ
7 6 = i -.
PARA.
ON THE CONNEXION OF WORDS IN SENTENCES.
CHAP TERE
Ox the agreement of the Subject and Predicate ; of the Substantive
and Adjective :—and on the Impersonal form of expression.
a) Tue verb of the predicate conforms to the subject in person § I.
and number. But with a plural swdject of the neuter gender, the ‘
verb stands in the singular. With a dual subject of the masculine or
feminine gender, the verb not unfrequently stands in the plural, when
no stress is laid on the fact of there being precisely two. (The first
person of the dual is not used in prose.) To ξένω τώδε σοφὼ καὶ
φίλω ἐστὸν ἐμώ (Pl. Gorg. 487). °Q Λάχης καὶ Νικία, εἴπατον ἡμῖν,
τίνι δὴ δεινοτάτῳ συγγεγόνατον περὶ τῆς τῶν νεῶν τροφῆς (Pl. Lach.
186). Τένος καὶ μέρος οὐ ταὐτόν ἐστον (Pl. Pol. 305).--“Οπλα οὐ
πάρεστιν. Τὰ καλὰ τὴν ψυχὴν εὐφραίνει.--- Δότε παράδειγμα ἡμῖν, ὦ
Λάχης καὶ Νικία, τίνας ἐκ φαύλων καλούς τε καὶ ἀγαθοὺς ἐποιήσατε
(Pl. Lach.187). Οὕτω διάκεισθον σύ τε καὶ ὁ ἀδελφός, ὥσπερ εἰ τὼ
χεῖρε, ἃς ὁ θεὸς ἐπὶ τῷ συλλαμβάνειν ἀλλήλαιν ἐποίησεν, ἀφεμένω
τούτου τράποειντο ἐπὶ τὸ διακωλύειν ἀλλήλω (Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 18).
Θερσαγόρας καὶ ᾿ξήκεστος ᾧκουν ἐν Λέσβῳ (Dem. 23, 143). Οὐ
χρώμεθα τούτοις ἐγὼ καὶ ὁ ἀδελφός (Pl. Luthyd. 273).
Rem. 1. The occurrence of a plural verb with a plural subject of the neuter
gender is a rare exception: Φανερὰ ἦσαν καὶ ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἴχνη πολλά
(Xen. 4παῦ. 1,7, 11). Τὰ τελη Λακεδαιμονίων (the Lacedemonian authorities) Bpa-
σίδαν ἐξέπεμψαν (Thuc. 4, 88).
Rem. 2. Now and then we meet with the plural of a substantive with reference
to two objects: e.g. Avo ἄνδρας ἔχω (Xen. Anab.4,1,22). Δυοῖν ὀνόμασι χρώμεθα
(Pl. Soph. 244), ἀμφοτέρω τὼ παῖδε and of στρατηγοὶ ἀμφότεροι, and then a plural
CHAP, I.] B
le
211)
2 Agreement of Subject and Predicate. [8 = <q
subject of this kind may take its verb either in the dual or im the plural (or, if it be
of the meuter gender. in the singular}: Avo τμήματά ἐστον (PL. Pol. 282). Ἔστι
δύο ταῦτα κακῶν ἐν τῇ ψυχῆ yn (PI. δορά. 335 ἢ.
Rew. 3. In the poets, the plural of the first person is sometimes used instead of
the singular - in prose this occurs only when a writer speaks of himself as an author:
Οὐ δικαίως, ἣν Gave, θασούμεθα (Helen, Eur. Tr. 904). “Oca ἐπυθόμεθα περὶ Κύρου,
ταῦτα πειρασόμεθα διηγήσασθαι (Xen. Cyr. 1,1, 6). (In the masculme gender,
even of a female, since there is no longer an accurate specification of the indi-
vidual) : Οὐκ ἄρ᾽ ὡς θανουμένους perm Ges μας (Heeuba, Fur. Hee. 511).
δ) The adjective or participle of the predicate conforms to the
subject in number, gender, and case: im the same way every adjective -
(participle) conforms to the substantive to which it 15, whether afin
butively or appositively, attached: Tw ἄνδρε τούτω (Κριτίας καὶ ᾿Αλκε-
βιάδης) φύσει φιλοτιμοτάτω πάντων ᾿Αθηναίων ἐγενέσθην (Xen. Mem.
1, 2, 14). Πάρεσμεν ὡς ἐπιδείξοντε καὶ διδάξοντε, ἐάν τις ἐθέλῃ
μανθάνειν (Pl. Euthyd. 314). Χρήματα avev νοῦ Epa ηίγνεταε.
Ἡάντα καλλίω ηέγνεσθαε φιλεῖ θεραπείας τυγχάνοντα.
Rew. 1. With dual subjects 2 participle. as apposition or predicate (but not
as attributive), sometimes stands in the plural: Ἐγελασάτην ἄμφω βλέψαντες εἰς
ἀλλήλους (Pl. Euthyd. 273).
Rem. 2. With a dual subject of the feminine gender there is sometimes found —
a participle of the masculine: δύο τινὲ ἰδέα ἄρχοντε καὶ ἄγοντε (Pl. Phaed. 2377). ~
Rew. 3. A masculine or feminine subject, or a neuter subject in the plural ~
\number, may take a predicative adjective in the neuter of the singular, when 16
| denotes, in a general way. the essence of acertain class of objects: Ἡονηρὸν o συκο-
| Qavrqs ἀεί (Dem. 15, 242). ᾿Ασθενέστερον γυνὴ ἀνδρός (PI. Rep. 5, 459)- οἱ
ἱτοιοῖτοι ἄνθρωποι χρησιμώτερον νομίζουσι χρήματα ἢ ἀδελφούς (Xen. Mem.2,3, 1). —
Rew. 4. When a neuter adjective with the verb ἐστέ is predicated of an infimi-
tive. it sometimes (especially in the older writers) stands in the plural: Θέρους de —
ἀνυδρίαν ἀδύνατα ἦν ἐπιστρατεύειν ταῖς Αἰόλου νήσοις (Thue. 3, 88). Also nm
impersonal expressions, especially with the gerundives, the adjective is sometmmes”
used in the plural of the neuter gender: πολεμητέα ἐστίν (Thue. 1, 88). γε.
Rea. 5. Instead of a predicative noun with <ipé, γέγνομαι, a demonstrative or
relative pronoun of the neuter gender may also be used, to indicate a ing
predicate : for firo, ἀμφότερον, οὐδέτερον. ἀμφότερα. οὐδέτερα may also be used: “O
μὲν δίκαιος ᾧρόνιμός τε καὶ ἀγαθός, 6 δὲ ἄδικος οὐδέτερα (Pl. Rep. 1, 349). Ὑπὸ
words last mentioned may also be referred to verbs: λέγειν ἢ γράφειν ἢ 5
ἀμφότερα (‘or both’). ᾿ be
- Rem. 6. The verb civar is connected, not only with /ocal adverbs (e. g- paxp 7
εἶναι, to be far off or away, χωρὶς iva, to be apart, by itself), but also with the”
1 Ἔστε καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἄλλαις πόλεσιν ἄρχοντές τε καὶ δῆμος (PI. Rep. 5, 465:
are—). So im a few instances ἔστε. γίγνεται, in the poets also ἦν, 5
culine or feminine subject in the plural. J
* Por the dual forms of the article and certain pronouns that are common to fhe
masculine and feminine gender, see the Accidence. = ee
|
|
|
|
|
ὃ 2.] Agreement of Subject and Predicate. 3
adverb μάτην, 6. g. μάτην ἐστὶ τὸ μεμνῆσθαι περὶ τούτων (Isoer. Paneg.5). (Ads [§ 1]
ἐστίν.) In the one way the impersonal é ἐστίν, tt 1s = it is going on | (well, ill, ἄς.)
is used with adverbs, 6 e.g. καλῶς ἔσται. ὁποτέρως ἔσται. With local adverbs 4 γίγνεσθαι
also is used, 6. g. ἐγγύτερον γίγνεσθαι, to come nearer, χωρὶς y., δίχα γί cate i to
separate (to come into the state of being found at two places).
a) When two or more subjects of different persons are spoken of ὃ
together, they are connected with the first or second person of the ae
plural [with the first, if any one of them is of that person]: Τὴν a
τέχνην ταύτην ἐγώ τε καὶ ὁ πατὴρ ἀσκοῦμεν. Καὶ σὺ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ
παρῆστε, except when peculiar prominence is to be given to the
nearest subject (by making the verb conform to it): Ταῦτα καὶ σὺ καὶ
πάντες οἱ τότε παρόντες ἴσασιν. (Σύ τε “Ἕλλην εἶ καὶ ἡμεῖς. Xen.
Anab. 2, 1, 16.)
&) When several connected subjects of the singular number are
living creatures, especially persons, they usually take the predicate in
the plural; two in the dual: if they are of different genders, the pre-
dicate, if capable of distinction of sex, is masculine: Κριτίας καὶ
᾿Αλκιβιάδης Σωκράτει ὡμιλείτην (Xen. Mem. 1, 2,40). Kai ἡ γυνὴ
καὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ"ἀγαθοί εἰσιν (PZ. Men. 73). The singular, however, is also
used when the predicate is a single verb and precedes the subjects,
only the nearest subject being then regarded: Ἴσως ἀναβήσεται καὶ
tig ἐπ τῇ βουλῇ Φῶλιππος καὶ ᾿Αντιγένης καὶ ὁ ἀντιγραφεύς (Dem.
2, 38). *Heev ὁ Θερσαγόρας καὶ ὁ Ἐξήκεστος εἰς Λέσβον καὶ ὥκουν
Ξε (Dem. 23, 143). (Ex TOV πατρῴων θρέψεται (ὁ τύραννος) αὐτός
τε καὶ οἱ συμπόται τε καὶ ἑταῖροι καὶ ἑταῖραι, Pl. Rep. 8, 568.)
c) If the connected subjects are things and impersonal notions,
then the predicate may either eonform only to the nearest subject (so
that all the subjects are conceived as one, or, it may be, the nearest
is rendered prominent), or be placed in the plural, the plurality and
distinction being both alike regarded. (For several subjects of the
neuter gender, the verb always “stands in the singular, according to
Ἢ i, a.) Τῶν ἡμετέρων κακῶν 7) τῶν πολιτῶν στάσις καὶ ὁ τὸ τ
αἴτιός ἐστιν. Οἱ ἐμοὶ πλάνοι καὶ πὰ καὶ τὰ πολλὰ spp ire
τοῦτο ἀπειργάσατο (Dem. 18,218). Σοφία καὶ νοῦς ἄνευ Ψυχῆς οὐκ
ἄν ποτε γενοίσθην (Pl. Phil. 80). If, in the last case, the predicate is
such a verb as expresses no independent notion, with an adjective or}
- participle, if the subjects are of different genders, the predicate is)
_ always neuter : if they are of the same gender (masculine or feminine) |
_ it is most commonly neuter (the subjects in general being regarded as.
᾿ tinge, vbects), and then the verb also stands in the singular: Πόλε-.
ε- καὶ στάσις ὀλέθρια ταῖς πόλεσίν ἐστιν. Κάλλος καὶ ἰσχὺς δειλᾷ
(ΒΑΡ. I.] B2
[§ 2.}
4 Agreement of Subject and Predicate. [ὃ 3.
καὶ κακῷ ξυνοικοῦντα ἀπρεπῆ φαίνεται (Pl. Men. 246). Devos καὶ
ἔρως ἐναντία ἐστίν. (Less commonly: φθόνος καὶ ἔρως ἐναντίοι. ".)
d) If several plural subjects of different genders are connected,
then, with respect to the gender of the predicate, the rule given under
b and ὁ holds good : Byoer νέους τε καὶ νέας ὁμιλοῦντας φιλοφρόνως
ἀλλήλοις (Pl. Legg. 9, 835). Τῶν δυνατῶν καὶ of φθόνοι καὶ οἱ
ἔρωτες δεινοί. ΤΠ τ καὶ στάσεις ὀλέθρια ταῖς πόλεσιν. Also, when
the subjects are of the same gender (masculine or feminine), the pre-
dicate may be neuter (denoting things; in a general way, according to
ec): Tapayat καὶ στάσεις ὀλέθρια ταῖς πόλεσιν (are ruinous things).
Rem. 1. When of several subjects the zearest (to the verb), is in the singular
(or in the plural, but of the neuter gender), the rest in the plural, then the
predicate may conform either to the nearest alone, or to all of them: ᾿Αθήνησι
καὶ ot πένητες kal ὁ δῆμος πλέον ἔ ἔχει τῶν γενναίων καὶ τῶν πλουσίων (Xen. Ath. Pol.
1, 2). Σάρκες Kal νεῦμα ἐξ αἵματος “γίγνεται (Pe. Tin. 82). Αἱ τῶν Annee ee
ἁμαρτίαι καὶ παρασκευὴ ὑπὸ τῆς ὕλης ov δῆλα ἦν τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις (Thuc. 4, 29).
(Now and then the predicate conforms to a more remote subject, which is at the
same time the most important one: Βασιλεὺς καὶ of σὺν αὐτῷ εἰσπίπτει εἰς TO
Κύρειον στρατόπεδον, Xen. Anab. 1, 10, 1.)
Rem. 2. If the subjects are connected by the disjunctive ἢ, the predicate, as
a ase rule, conforms only to the nearest; sometimes, however, it is referred to
both. With ἡ ij—7, οὔτε---οὔτε, the predicate "nearl ly alwa: ys conforms only to the
nearest subject.
Sometimes the natural quality and character of the predicate is more regarded,
than the grammatical form of the word employed.
a) In the case of a collective, denoting living beings, the predicate sometimes
refers to the ¢wdividuals comprehended under it, and stands im the plural, and in
the natur al gender {. e. that of the objects designated) : ᾿Αθηναίων τὸ πλῆθος
Ἵππαρχον οἴονται ὑφ᾽ ‘Appodiov καὶ ᾿Αριστογείτονος τύραννον ὄντα ἀποθανεῖν (Thue.
1, 20). Πολὺ γένος ἀνθρώπων τοῖς μὲν ἐκ “τῆς γῆς φυομένοις εἰς τροφὴν οὐ χρῶνται,
ἀπὸ δὲ βοσκημάτων γάλακτι καὶ τυρῷ καὶ κρέασι τρεφόμενοι ζῶσι (Xen. Anab. 4, 3, 10).
So also a participle, added | appositively, stands in the » plural : Τὸ στράτευμα ἐπορίζετο
σῖτον, ὅπως ἐδύνατο, ἐκ τῶν ὑποζυγίων, κόπτοντες τοὺς βοῦς καὶ ὄνους (Aen. Anab.
Za 1.6]:
6) If persons are denoted figuratively by neuter substantives, or men by feminine
subst antives, the predicate (or a participle as apposition) is sometimes added i in the
plural: "Edo€e rots Λακεδαιμονίοις, τὰ τέλη (that the authorities) καταβάντας ἐς TO
στρατύπεδον βουλεύειν (Thue. A, 15). Πεντήκοντα. τριήρεις τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πλέουσαι
εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἴσχον (landed) κατὰ τὸ Μενδήσιον κέρας, οὐκ εἰδότες τῶν γεγενημένων
οὐδέν (Lhue.1, 110). ( peas ἑώρα τὴν πόλιν ἑαυτῷ εὔνουν οὖσαν καὶ στρατηγὸν
αὐτὸν ἠρημένους, Xen. Hell. 1, 4, 12, ---- απὰ that they, namely, the Athenians, —.)
ῶ Α subject 1 in the singular, to which another personal name is attached by
σύν OY pera, is sometimes rousidered as a plural subject, when stress is to be laid
1 Ἢ καλλίστη πολιτεία τε καὶ ὁ κάλλιστος ἀνὴρ λοιπά ἐστιν ἡμῖν διελθεῖν, Pl. Rep.
8, 562 (a non-personal notion and a person).
[PART I.
tis
§ 4—6.] Agreement of Subject and Predicate. 5
on the community of action: Δημοσθένης μετὰ τῶν ξυστρατηγῶν σπένδονται [§ 3.]
Μαντινεῦσιν (Thue. 3, 109).
When the predicate consists ofa substantive (or a word used sub-}§ 4.
stantively), with εἰμί, γίγνομαι, or any of the other verbs that cannot (216)
express a complete predicate, the verb nearly always conforms to
the substantive, and is generally placed close by it: Οἱ σοφισταὶ,
φανερά ἐστι λώβη τε Kal διαφθορὰ τῶν συγγυγνομένων (Pl. Men. 91).
Αἴτιον ἐγένετο τῆς ἀποστολῆς τῶν νεῶν οἱ πολλοὶ τῶν Χίων οὐκ!
εἰδότες τὰ πρασσόμενα (Thuc. 8, 9, the reason of the ships being sent
was—). To χωρίον τοῦτο πρότερον ἐννέα ὁδοὶ ἐκαλοῦντο (Thuc. 4, 102).
Πάντα, ὅσα ὑπὸ ποιητῶν λέγεται, διήγησις οὖσα τυγχάνει ἢ γεγονότων
ἢ ὄντων ἢ μελλόντων (Pl. Rep. ὃ, 392). Τὴν ἡδονὴν διώκετε ὡς
ἀγαθὸν ov (Pl. Prot. 354).
A more special distinction by means of the words ἄλλος, ἄλλο (ἄλλοθεν, &e.), ὃ 5.
ὁ μὲν — ὁ δὲ, ἕκαστος (of two, ἑκάτερος) is often attached to a plural subject (217,
without exerting any influence upon the predicate; sometimes, however, the R. 2)
predicate conforms to this apposition (only, however, when it follows 10) : ‘Qs
εἶδόν μ᾽ εἰσιόντα, εὐθὺς, πόῤῥωθεν namagovro ἄλλος ἄλλοθεν (Pl. Charm. 153). ᾿Εγώ
τε καὶ σὺ μακρὸν λόγον ἑκάτερος ἀπετείναμεν (Pl. Prot. 501).---πΠελοποννήσιοι πάντες
ἰσόψηφοι ὄντες καὶ οὐχ ὁμόφυλοι τὸ ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ἕκαστος σπεύδει (Thuc. 1,141). Οὗτοι
ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει (Aen. Anab.2, 1,15). (Cf. on the partitive gen. § 50, a. Rem. 3.)
Rem. When one subject is appended to another by the comparative particle 7,
the predicate often conforms to the appended subject: Τῶν κοινῶν οὐδὲν σὺ μᾶλλον
# τις ἄλλος ἔχει (Pl. Theet. 209).
a) The subject is usually omitted in Greek, when it would be § 6.
the personal pronoun of the first or second person, without any (208,
peculiar emphasis or opposition to other notions (but: ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς <2)
λέγομεν καὶ ὑμεῖς ὁμολογεῖτε") ; so also always, when it is that
third person, who has hitherto been the subject of discourse, and is
sufficiently known from the context (whereas, by the use of a demon-
strative pronoun, the subject is rendered prominent, and distinguished
from other notions in a marked way, or even opposed to them).
Rem. Sometimes, by a less careful mode of expression, the third person of a
verb without a pronoun is so placed, that we must understand it to be spoken of
some other subject (sufficiently implied by the context), than that of another verb
in the third person, which preceded it: Αἰσθόμενοι οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τοὺς Λακεδαιμο-
vious διὰ κατάγνωσιν ἀσθενείας σφῶν (because they considered the Athenians weak)
παρασκευαζομένους, δηλῶσαι βουλόμενοι, ὅτι οὐκ ὀρθῶς ἐγνώκασιν (namely, οἱ Aake-
δαιμόνιοι), ἀλλ᾽ οἷοί τε εἰσί (namely, οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι), μὴ κινοῦντες τὸ ἐπὶ Λέσβῳ ναυτικόν,
καὶ τὸ ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου ἐπιὸν ῥᾳδίως ἀμύνεσθαι, ἐπλήρωσαν ναῦς ἑκατόν (Thue.
3, 10). ᾿Αφανῆ τὸν Τύγην γενέσθαι φασὶν τοῖς παρακαθημένοις καὶ διαλέγεσθαι
(namely, αὐτοὺς, τοὺς παρακαθημένους) ὡς περὶ οἰχομένου (Pl. Rep. 806). Some-
1 Of ἄλλοι σκηνοῦμεν ὑπαίθριοι (Xen. Anab. 5, ὅ, 21,—we others: the rest of us).
Θεμιστοκλῆς ἥκω mapa σέ (Thue. 1, 137).
CHAP. I.]
6 Agreement of Subject and Predicate. Sige
[§ 6.] times, by an inaccuracy, the expression passes over from a whole class, denoted by
a plural substantive, to the singular, denoting one of the individuals contained in
the class: of τύραννοι, and then τίνων γὰρ ἔτι ἄρξει; namely, ὁ τύραννος (Xen.
Mier. 6, 14).
(208, 6) The third person of a verb in the plural is sometimes found
Ἀν 3) without a subject expressed, when it is to be understood of men in
general; especially when the thing spoken of is the common opinion
or common talk of men; or when particular men are intended, who
are easily known from the context: Τοὺς ed παθόντας, ὅταν δυνάμενοι
χάριν ἀποδοῦναι μὴ ἀποδῶσιν, ἀχαρίστους καλοῦσιν (Xen. Mem. 2, 2,1).
‘O Νικίας (ὅπερ πάσχουσιν ἐν τοῖς μεγάλοις ἀγῶσι) πᾶντα τε ἔργῳ ETL
ἐνδεᾶ εἶναι ἐνόμιζε καὶ λόγῳ οὔπω ἱκανὰ εἰρῆσθαι (Thuc. 7,69). (Often.
φασί, they say, people say ; 1έ 15 said.) Te ποταμῷ γέφυραι οὐκ ἔπεισιν,
διαβαίνουσι δὲ ἐπὶ σχεδιῶν (namely, the inhabitants of the country).
a,c) The second person of the verb is used, in some kinds of
sentences, to denote an assumed indefinite subject : Οὐδὲ βουλόμενος
ἂν εὗρες ῥᾳδίως Tov νύκτωρ πορευόμενον (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5,6, would you
have found, 1. 6. would a person, anybody, have found).
tem. The second person stands in this way only in hypothetical sentences
with ἄν, of what would have shown itself to be the case in a certain assumed state
of things; and, in subjunctive subordinate sentences, with ἐάν or a relative word
with ἄν. “Opav ταῦτα ἡγήσαιο ἂν Λακεδαιμονίους μόνους τῷ ὄντι τεχνίτας τῶν
πολεμικῶν εἶναι (Xen. Pol. Lac. 13,5). Οἱ ἀνοήτως φοβούμενοι, ὅσῳ ἂν μᾶλλον
αὐτοῖς θαῤῥεῖν παρακελεύῃ, τοσούτῳ ἐν δεινοτέροις ἡγοῦνται εἶναι (Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 2,
54). (In Herodotus and the poets also the second person of the future in the
indicative, e. g. Herod. 1, 139.)
ὁ γ. a) The third person plural of several active verbs stands without
(207, any substantive (or substantivized word) as subject (cmpersonally),
RD) ee. ὕει, it rains, ἔξεστι (ἰέναι), it is permitted, = one (you, &c.) may
(licet), ἐδήλωσε, i¢ was plain.
In this way are used in Greek :
| 1) Verbs that denote a state of the weather, or certain natural phenomena: as
ὕει, νίφει, βροντᾷ, ἀστράπτει, χειμάζει, συσκοτάζει (it is growing dark), ἔσεισε (there
was an earthquake: ashock was felt). With these verbs some indefinite being is
regarded as the agent who causes the event (ὁ θεὸς ὕει, Herod. 2, 13 ; ἔσεισεν ὁ θεός,
Aen. Hell. 4,7, 4; Ζεὺς βροντᾷ).
2) The verbs which denote generally the propriety or possibility of an action,
and have for their subject an infinitive, or acc. cum infin., as δεῖ, χρή. προσήκει,
πρέπει, ἔξεστι, ἐγχωρεῖ, ἐνδέχεται, and also συμβαίνει, it happens. In certain phrases,
feet stands in the same way, as: φύσιν ἔχει, it is natural, δίκην ἔχει, it ts just.
ι 3) The verbs δοκεῖ (i¢ seems; and with an infinitive; ἠέ seems good, it is resolved),
| Eouxe, and in some eonnexions δηλοῖ and δείκνυσι (ἐδήλωσε, δηλώσει, it was manifest,
|will be manifest, δείξει), with which the thing intended must be mentally supplied.
» 4) Verbs which (in certain connexions) denote generally the state and progress
"ΟΥ̓ circumstances, as εὖ (καλῶς, οὕτως, ἄλλως) ἔχει, δεῖ (πολλοῦ, ὀλίγου), προχωρεῖ
[PART I.
§.8.] The Article. 7
(μοι), it is going on (successfully), I am succeeding (in any thing): εἰς τοῦτ᾽ [8 7.]
ἦλθεν, it has come to this, and a few others. (Of relations of time: Ἦν ape
ἀγορὰν πλήθουσαν, it was about the time when the market-place fills.) Further
μέλει (cure est) and μεταμέλει (μοι, panitet me).
5) Some verbs which denote the action of persons appointed to perform it, when,
the occurrence of the action is the thing contemplated, without any thought of
the personal agent: especially, σημαίνει, a signal is given (ἐπειδὰν σημήνῃ). σαλ-
mite (the trumpet sounds), κηρύττει (proclamation is made): (ἐκηρύξε). (Αναγνώ-
σεται, he shall read, in the orators, of the clerk who was present for the purpose.)
6) In other instances, the action is denoted impersonally by the}
third person singular of intransitive or intransitively-used verbs ;|
Λέγεται, τοὺς θεοὺς ὑπὸ Διὸς βασιλεύεσθαι (Lsocr. Nic. 26). Συρα-
κούσιοι τοὺς Μεγαρεῖς τοὺς ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ ἀνέστησαν, ὥσπερ καὶ πρότερόν
μοι εἴρηται (Thue. 6,94). Οὐκ ἄλλως αὐτοῖς πεπόνηται (Pl. Phed, 232).
Ἐπειδὴ παρεσκεύαστο τοῖς ἹΚορινθίοις, ἀνήγοντο ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίαν
(16. 1, 48). Ὧν ἂν καταψηφισθῇ, ἀποκτείνειν δεήσει (Pl. Pol. 299).
(Δέδοκται; it is resolved).
Rem. 1. This use is, however, for the most part, restricted to verbs that
denote to say (λέγειν, ὁμολογεῖν), and to the perfect and pluperfect of other verbs,
with an appended dative of the agent (see on Dat. § 38, g), of the completed
action, and what has been effected. (On the other hand, the Latin practice, of
using impersonaily in the passive voice verbs which govern the dat., e.g. invidetur,
invidebatur mihi, is not customary in Greek.)
Rem. 2. Now and then we meet with a general impersonal expression (without
a sentence for its subject), with a neuter adjective (sometimes in the plural,
§ 1, b. R. 4), to denote a relation that exists, and a certain state of affairs,
8. δ΄. ἕτοιμά ἐστιν, γίγνεται (Thuc.2,3; it isready = things are in readiness, or all
is ready); βάσιμα ἦν, ἄβατα ἦν (Xen. Anab. 3, 4, 49) ; εὖ ἐπίθετον ἣν ἐνταῦθα
(Xen. Anab. 3, 4,20; here it was easy to attack = here was a convenient
opportunity for attacking). On the Gerundive, see Chap. VII.
Rem. 3. Observe, that the Greeks occasionally use a personal expression with a
definite substantive (or swhstantivized) subject, where in English we use a neuter
adjective with it 7s, &c., having a sentence for its subject: as in the case of the
adjectives φανερός, δῆλος (see on the Participle, § 177, b. R. 2), and δίκαιος (see
on Infin. ὃ 165, a. R.).
CHAP TERI.
On the use of the Article.
Tus Greek article (like the English definite article, ie) represents § ὃ.
the substantive before which it is placed, as the name or designa-
tion of a certain definite and known object (as opposed to a repre-
sentation of some one or other indefinite object amongst several
of the same kind). It stands, therefore, 1) before the generic names
CHAP. II.\
8 The Article. | [ὃ 8.
[$s 8] of objects which are, in their own nature, isolated and definite’; 2)
before substantives which denote the whole class designated by the
substantive (or substantive with its adjective), not any individual
object; 38) before the names of persons or things, a) which are
sufficiently distinguished from others by some appended specification
(adjective, participle, genitive, preposition with its case), or 4) which
have been already mentioned, or follow immediately from what has
been said, or 6) of which it is easily understood, from the circum-
stances under which they are spoken of, that they, and no others, are
the objects intended: “O οὐρανός, ἡ γῆ, ὁ ἥλιος, ἡ θάλασσα.---Οἱ
ἱππεῖς. Τὰ θηρία. Οἱ ἵπποι καλλίους τῶν ὄνων εἰσίν. “Ὃ συκοφάντης
(the sycophant, as a class*). Οἱ σοφοὶ ἄνδρες. Αἱ καλαὶ γυναῖκες.
Οἱ ἄλλοι ἄνθρωποι. (᾿Αγαθοὶ ἄνδρες, good men, ἄλλοι ἄνθρωποι,
other men.) — O πρεσβύτερος ἀδελφός. Οἱ προτεταγμένοι ἱππεῖς. “H ἐπὶ
τῷ ποταμῷ πόλις. Ἢ τοῦ πατρὸς οἰκία.----Ο ἀνὴρ οὔπω ἥκει. ἹἸΠοῦ
οἱ ἵπποι (the horses, which have been spoken of, and are here meant).
Κῦρος ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον τὰ παλτὰ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας ἔλαβεν (Xen.
Anab. 1, 8, 3, the javelins = his javelins, it being supposed a hnown
thing, that javelins made a part of his equipment). Otvos ἐν τῷ πίθῳ
οὐκ ἔστιν (in the cask, the cask in use). Ξέρξης ἀγείρας τὴν avapi-
θμητον στρατιὰν ἦλθεν ἐπὶ τὴν “EXXada (Xen. Anab. 8, 2, 18, the well-
known, numerous army).
Rem. 1. The article stands more frequently than in English, to denote an object |
that is defined by its relation to another (subject, object, or relational-object in the
sentence): in such cases we generally use a possessive pronoun in English:
Οἱ πλούσιοι τοῖς χρήμασιν ἐξωνοῦνται τοὺς κινδύνους (Lys. 24, 17). Τοὺς τοιούτους
πατέρας οὐδὲ οἱ παῖδες αἰδεῖσθαι δύνανται. Ἔσμεν ὑμᾶς εἰθισμένους τοῖς εὐεργέταις
μεγίστην χάριν ἀποδιδόναι (Isocr. Plat. 1).
ὑπν.. 2. With certain words in certain connexions (without an adjective) the
article is occasionally omitted in Greek (as in some similar instances in English),
although a definite notion is denoted, some peculiarity in the nature or conception
of the notion having caused, in particular instances, the retention of the old
manner of expression, when the use of the article was not yet become general,
and firmly established. Such words are: ἧ
a) The names of the large and peculiar portions of external nature (οὐρανός,
Yi, θάλασσα, ὠκεανός, ἥλιος), especially when _a_particular point or_particular
manifestation of them is contemplated: Ἐπὶ θαλάττῃ, on the sea. Ὕδωρ ἐξ
οὐρανοῦ πολύ. Ἥλιος ἀνατέλλει, ἥλιος ἐδύετο, περὶ ἡλίου δυσμάς (at sunset = the
setting of the sun); further, sometimes θεοί and ἄνθρωποι, when it is precisely the
generic term, that is to be made prominent : Ta ἐν ἀνθρώποις (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 7),
human affairs and institutions. Τῶν ὄντων ἀγαθῶν καὶ καλῶν οὐδὲν ἄνευ πόνου καὶ
[1 Bp. Middleton’s ‘monadic nouns.’ —T. K. A.] ¢
[? Where, however, our idiom allows us to say ‘a sycophant,’ taking one as the
type of the class.—T. K. A.]
[PART I.
— κα ιν.
ee Σ ) Ξ- αι υςΝ ΨΨΨΟ ee ae ee |
§ 8.] The Article. 9
ἐπιμελείας θεοὶ διδόασιν ἀνθρώποις (Xen. Mem. 2, 1, 28), and the names of [§ 8.]
naturally-defined times (ἅμα ἕῳ, at day-break ; with the dawn; at the break of:
day; even when a particular day is meant; but also ἅμα τῇ ἕφ).
6) The term βασιλεύς, when the Persian king is intended (βασιλεὺς ὁ μέγας).
Οἱ πρόγονοι οἱ βασιλέως. (Here the article is nearly always omitted.)
c) The names of virtues, vices, sciences, arts, and occupations, when they are
considered as general conceptions, which may be exhibited in a different form in.
different persons: Πάντα τὰ καλὰ καὶ ἀγαθὰ ἀσκητά ἐστιν. οὐχ ἥκιστα δὲ σωφροσύνη
(Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 23, moderation, or temperance). Οὐδέποτ᾽ ἄρα λυσιτελέστερον
ἀδικία δικαιοσύνης (Pl. Rep. 1, 854. but also Λυσιτελέστερον ἡ ἀδικία τῆς δικαιοσύνης, .
Pl. ib. as a single definite notion). ᾿Ανδρὶ καλῷ τε κἀγαθῷ ἐργασία καὶ ἐπιστήμη,
κρατίστη γεωργία (Xen. Chic. 6, 8).
d) Πόλις, ἄστυ, ἀγρός, ἀγορά, τεῖχος, πεδίον, and other local designations, when
they denote oppositions between the parts of a given and presupposed principal
locality, and are governed by prepositions!: Ἑσπέρας γενομένης 7) διαδοχὴ τῇ
πρόσθεν φυλακῇ ἔρχεται ἐκ πόλεως (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 17). Δοκεῖτέ μοι πρὸς ἄστυ
ὡρμῆσθαι (Pl. Rep. 1, 327, to the city, Athens, from the Pireus; but shortly before
ἀπῆμεν πρὸς τὸ ἄστυ). "Eo Ἰσθμοῦ (Thue. 1, 62, beyond the Isthmus of Corinth,
but in the same chap. ἐν τῷ Ἰσθμῷ). ᾿Ἑκτὸς τείχους and ἐκτὸς τοῦ τείχους (of the
wall of the city). In the same way sometimes also στρατός, στρατιά, στράτευμα,
στρατόπεδον (and with adjectives as one word, δεξιὸν κέρας, εὐώνυμον κέρας. the
right, the left wing : Κορινθίοις τὸ μὲν δεξιὸν κέρας ai Μεγαρίδες νῆες εἶχον καὶ αἱ
᾿Αμπρακιώτιδες, εὐώνυμον δὲ κέρας αὐτοὶ οἱ Κορίνθιοι εἶχον, Thuc. 1, 48). (Amo
δεξιᾶς, Ke.)
δ). Names of relationship in certain connexions with an emphatic prominence
giveit to the generic term of the relationship: Οὔτε πατρὸς οὔτε μητρὸς φείδεται.
Οἱ Καρδοῦχοι ἔχοντες γυναῖκας καὶ παῖδας " ἔφευγον ἐπὶ τὰ ὄρη (Xen. Anab. 4, 18,
with their wives and children).
Ff) And in general, the article is sometimes omitted when, by the combination
of two or more opposed members, the expression of the whole is brought out with
a certain emphasis”: Δύσις καὶ χωρισμὸς ψυχῆς ἀπὸ σώματος (Pl. Phed. 67, as in
English, body and soul ; but, 64: ἡ τῆς Ψυχῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ σώματος ἀπαλλαγή. Ilav-
cavias συγκαλέσας πολεμάρχους καὶ πεντηκοστῆρας ἐβουλεύετο (Aen. Hell. 8, 5, 22),
"Ard τελευτῆς ἐπ᾽ ἀρχήν 3 [ct. note 1].) ;
Rem. 3. A superlative (or other adjective) with a predicative noun, or a
superlative standing alone as the predicate, never takes the article in Greek :|
nor does it stand with a substantive and the ‘superlative of eminence’ (denoting
only a very high degree, and therefore not distinguishing any particular object as
belonging to the highest degree of all): ᾿Ανδρὶ καλῷ κἀγαθῷ ἐργασία κρατίστη ἐστὶ
γεωργία (Xen. Cc. 6, 8).. (Οὗτοι φανερά ἐστι διαφθορὰ τῶν συγγιγνομένων, are)
evidently the ruin of —: Pl. Men. 91, 5.) Πάντων φιλομαθέστατος Κῦρος ἦν. Οὗ
΄ , . ΄- i
Φασηλῖταί εἰσι πονηρότατοι ἀνθρώπων καὶ ἀδικώτατοι (Dem. 35, 2). (Τοῦτο βαρύ-
ΝΠ σα τὲ Όσσ 5“ 6“ ὺ ἑ ἑπΦ“ΦῸ-.-8ο-.--.Ῥὁ“ῥ-ςςςς-ς--ς-ς-ςς--.-ςς-ςς---.-ς-ςς-.---ς
[? Bp. Middleton considers government by a preposition to favour the omission
of the article generally.—T. K. A.
[? This belongs to Bp. Middleton’s head of enwmeration,—T. K. A.]
5. Ὃ ὁπλίτης δραχμὴν ἐλάμβανε τῆς ἡμέρας (Thue. 3, 17, received a drachma a day
= every day); but also δέκα, εἷς ἀπὸ φυλῆς (Aen. Hell. 2, 4, 24, ten, one from each
Phyle), εἷς ἀπὸ πόλεως (ib. 4, 2, 8).
CHAP. II.]
§ 9.
ΤΟ The Article. [$ 9.
τατόν ἐστι τοῦ στρατεύματος, Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 37, the most heavily-armed division.
Διὰ βραχυτάτων, in the shortest way I can.)
Rem. 4. The Attic poets often omit the article where it must have stood in
prose, as well before substantives undefined by any added specification, as before
such as have a genitive or adjective (possessive pronoun) with them: 6. g. @vparos
ἐπιστάτης ἐπέστη τοῦδε παῖς ᾿Αχιλλέως (Hur. Hec. 224). Maida σὴν κτενοῦσιν.
Πέμπουσί pe δισσοὶ Ατρεῖδαι (Hur. Πεο. 810). “Ἑκάβη κεῖται κόνει φύρουσα δύστηνον
κάρα (Hur. Hee. 490). In the old poets (Homer, Hesiod) the usage is still more
fluctuating.
a) The adjective or participle by which the substantive is defined,
stands, with any appended notion dependent on it, either between
the article and its substantive, or, with the article repeated, after the
substantive : Ὃ ἀγαθὸς ἀνήρ. Ὃ πάντων κάλλιστος Kai πᾶσι φίλτατος
ἀνήρ. Οἱ στρατηγικοὶ νομιζόμενοι ἄνδρες. Αἱ ἄρισται δοκοῦσαι εἶναι
φύσεις (Xen. Mem.4,1,8).—Aitmai αἱ πολυτικαί. Οἱ στρατηγοὶ οἱ ταῦτα.
βεβουλευκότες. (Τὰς μεγάλας ἡδονὰς καὶ τὰ ἀγαθὰ τὰ μεγάλα ἡ
πειθὼ καὶ ἡ καρτερία καὶ οἱ ἐν καιρῷ πόνοι παρέχονται. Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 8.)
The latter position, that with the article repeated, is, however, the more rare, espe-
cially in the Attic writers, and is usually employed only when the object is first
mentioned, as a notion sufficiently defined in and by itself, and then has a nearer
specification added to it besides: Τὸ τεῖχος περιεῖλον τὸ καινόν (Lhuc. 4, 51). “Emi
τῆς νεὼς τῆς διαφθαρείσης (Dem. 34, 2).
tem. 1. When the participle has itself a specification (by means of dependent
words), it not uncommonly happens, that only this nearer specification, or only the
participle itself, is placed between the article and its substantive: Ai πρὸ τοῦ
στόματος (before the mouth of the harbour) νῆες ναυμαχοῦσαι (Thuc. 7, 25). At ὑπ᾿"
Αἰσχίνου βλασφημίαι εἰρημέναι (Dem. 18, 126). Ὃ κατειληφὼς κίνδυνος τὴν πόλιν
(Dem. 18, 220 ἢ.
tum. 2. The adjective may stand as an apposition, either before the article or
after the substantive, without repetition of the article, see ὃ 12. Otherwise Ὃ
ἀνὴρ καλός or καλὸς ὁ ἀνήρ signifies (with ἐστίν omitted) the man is handsome.
Rem. 3. Sometimes the article makes its first appearance before the following
adjective (participle) or prepositional expression, the object being first placed as
an undefined notion, and then more closely defined: ᾿Αρετῆς ἕνεκα καὶ προθυμίας
τῆς ἐν ἐκείνοις τοῖς κινδύνοις γενομένης (Thuc. 2, 71). Σκεπτέον, πῶς ποτε ἡ
ἄκρατος δικαιοσύνη πρὸς ἀδικίαν τὴν ἄκρατον ἔχει (Pl. Rep. 8, 535, is related to).
6) A preposition with its case is connected attributively with a sub-
stantive by means of an article, in the same way as an adjective :
ς ΘΕῸΝ, lel an ς Ν la) lol £. a ς
Η ἐπὶ τῷ ποταμῷ πόλις. Αἱ ἀπὸ ᾿Αθηνῶν νῆες. Οἱ στρατιῶται οἱ ἐν
1 Μετὰ τὸν ὕστερον πόλεμον τῆς καθαιρέσεως τῶν ᾿Αθήνησι τειχῶν (Aen. Hell. ὅ,1,
35. ‘The specification of an adjective appended to it after the substantive). The
placing of a secondary specification before the article is a rare and poetical construc-
tion: Τούτων ra ἐναντία ἐπιφημίσματα (Thue. 7,75 = τὰ ἐν. τούτων ἐπιφημ.) (Ὅστις
ip ἦν ἐκεῖνον ὁ ow, Saph, did. 1. 139
γὰρ ἢν ἐκεῖνον ὁ κτανῶν, Saph, ΠΕΣ 3!
[PART I.
δ 10.] The Article. II
τῇ πόλει. Τὸ τεῖχος TO παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν. This is also the case with [8 91"
adverbs of time and place, of what manifests itself αὐ the time or place
expressed : Of πάλαι ἄνθρωποι, the men of former days ; of the olden
time. Ἢ τότεταραχή. (Completely : Ἢ τότε ταραχὴ γενομένη.) Ἢ
Αἰσχίνου τότε μισθαρνία (Dem. 18, ὅ0). ἫἪ ἄνω πόλις. Ἢ πρότερον
ἀπραγμοσύνη (your former, or previous, inactivity ; ἡ προτέρα, the
Jormer, of two). Οἱ ἄρχοντες οἱ ᾿Αθήνησι. “H πόλις ἡ ὑπὸ τῷ ὄρει.
In this way ἄγαν and λίαν are also used (ἡ ἄγαν ἐπιθυμία, Thuc. 6, 24) with πάνυ (ὁ
πάνυ Περικλῆς. the celebrated Pericles): as are also a few other isolated adverbs, when
no corresponding adjective exists, or with a peculiar meaning: Τὰ καταλογάδην ovy-
γράμματα (Isocr. ap. Nic. 7, prose writings). Τὸ ἀληθῶς pas (Pl. Phed. 109, the
light which is truly light). (Also γόνῳ πατήρ, Lys. 13, 91, the natural father.)
Rem. Now and then a specification which would be properly attached to the
substantive by an article, is referred less accurately to the verb: ὅσοι τῶν πρα-
γμάτων πρὸς τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους μάλιστα μετέσχον (Thuc. 4, 74).
, The article stands in Greek with substantives that are defined by § 10.
an appended genitive, either of a generic term with the article, or of a
proper name: Ἣ τοῦ πατρὸς οἰκία, ἡ τοῦ ὑπὲρ "τῶν ᾿Ηλείων ὄρους
κορυφή (Xen. Hell. 7, 4, 13), (οἱ Σόλωνος νόμοι), ἡ οἰκία τοῦ πατρός, ἡ
οἰκία ἡ τοῦ πατρός. Of these forms the first (that of the genitive in
the middle) is the most common; the second (the genitive following
the substantive) is also common: the third (the genitive following the
substantive with its article repeated, by means of which the specifica-
tion is, as it were, returned for and appended with emphasis) is less
common. Fourthly, the genitive may also precede, when it stands with
emphasis on account of an opposition, or in a transition: Τῶν πα-
λαιῶν ἡ φιλοσοφία (Pl. Prot. 343). Tod χωρίου ἡ ἀπορία (Thue. 4, 29).
(Τὸ τῆς τοῦ ξαίνοντος τέχνης ἔργον, Pl. Rep. 381, after the first form. Περὶ τοῦ
μισθοῦ τῆς ἀποδόσεως, Thuc. 8, 85, after the fourth 1.)
Rem. 1. The partitive genitive very frequently precedes, and with this genitive
_ the article can never be repeated: cf. ὃ 50, Rem. 1.
Rem. 2. A substantive which governs a genitive with the article, itself stands
without the article, when, in spite of the appended genitive, the object is undefined
(especially in the case of the partitive and objective genitives;: e.g. μέρος τῆς
πόλεως ἐπὶ βλάβῃ τῆς πόλεως (Thuc. 8, 72, for injury to the city (though we should
say, to the injury of the city] μεγάλαι δαπάναι τῶν τε τριηράρχων καὶ τῆς πόλεως
(Thuc. 6, 31), great outlays on the part of the trierarchs and the state): some-
times also, when it is wished to express a notion that in itself is definite, in a general
and indefinite way: ἐν ἀρχῇ τοῦ λόγου (Dem. 37, 28), ὑπὸ πλήθους τῶν ἐπικειμένων
νεῶν (Thuc. 8, 106). The article is always omitted, when the governing substan-
tive is the predicate with εἰμί or γίγνομαι, or belongs to the predicate as an appo-
1 But αἱ ἴδιαι ἡμῶν ἑκάστων πόλεις (Isoer. Plat. 8), and ἡ δοκοῦσα ἡμῶν πρότερον
σωφροσύνη (Thuc. 1, 32), where the genitive attaches itself to another specification
(Rem. 6). ᾿
CHAP. I1.]
[§ 10.]
ΤΙ.
12 The Article. [ὃ τι:
sition!: Ἢ τῶν πολεμίων βλάβη κέρδος τῆς πόλεως γίγνεται. Σωτὴρ γενοῦ τῆς
πατρίδος. Μεγάλων κακῶν ἄγγελοι ἥκομεν. (Νόμοι πόλεως, laws of a state; περὶ
ἀρίστου ὥραν, Thuc. 7, 81.)
Rem. 3. Now and then the article does not stand with the substantive itself, but
is not placed till before the following genitive?: ᾿Επὶ σκηνὴν ἤεσαν τὴν Ξενοφῶν-
τος (Xen. Anab. 9, 2,19). Τισσαφέρνης ἤδει τοὺς Μιλησίους ἐς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα
πορευομένους ἐπὶ καταβοῇ τῇ αὑτοῦ μάλιστα (Thue. 8, 85).
Rem. 4. With respect to the position of the article with the governing sub-
stantive, the genitive of a personal or possessive pronoun has the same effect as
the genitive of a substantive with the article. The genitive of the personal pro-
noun stands either before the article or after the substantive (enclitically). Ἡμῶν
ἡ πόλις, ἡ πόλις ἡμῶν. Τοῦτό σοι δίδωμι ὅτι μου THY μητέρα (THY μητέρα pov) τιμᾷς.
The genitive of a demonstrative or reflexive pronoun either stands in the middle,
or follows with the article repeated: ὁ τούτου ddeAdds, ὁ ἀδελφὸς ὁ τούτου (Dem.
35, 15). Τὴν ἑαυτῶν συκοφαντίαν δηλοῦσιν. Παρὰ τὸν τρόπον τὸν ἑαυτῶν (Thue. 5,
63). (Partitively also: “Eavréyv τοὺς βελτίστους αἱροῦνται, and τοὺς βελτίστους
αἱροῦνται ἑαυτῶν.)
Rem. 5. In the case of substantives with possessive pronouns, the article stands
as in the case of substantives with adjectives: ‘O ὑμέτερος πατήρ. 6 πατὴρ 6 σός.
Τοὺς οἴκους τοὺς ὑμετέρους αὐτῶν, OY τοὺς ὑμετέρους αὐτῶν οἴκους ἀσφαλῶς κεκτῆσθαι
βούλεσθε. (But δοῦλος ὑμέτερος, one of your slaves; a slave of yours. Σοὶ
δοῦλοί ἐσμεν.)
Rem. 6. When two specifications are appended to a substantive (adjective, par-
ticiple, preposition, adverb, or genitive), the one of which bears such a relation to
the other, that the two are blended into one (complex) specification, they are
usually comprehended under one article: when, however, they are taken, each by
itself, as two co-ordinated specifications, the article is used with each: and this is
sometimes done even in the first case, especially if both are adjectives, particularly
in the instance of ἄλλος : Τὰ ἐν ty ἠπείρῳ Δἰολικὰ πολίσματα (Thue. 4,52). ὋὉ
᾿Αλκιβιάδου τούτου νεώτερος ἀδελφός (Pl. Prot. 320). Μέμνησθε τῆς ἐν Σαλαμῖνι
πρὸς τὸν Πέρσην ναυμαχίας (Ζ)5ολ. 2, 74). Eis τὰς ἄλλας ᾿Αρκαδικὰς πόλεις
(Xen. Hell. 7, 4, 38). Αἱ ἀπὸ τῆς Σικελίας Πελοποννησίων ἑκκαίδεκα νῆες (Thue.
8,13). Τὰ ἐκ τῆς Ἰάσου μεγάλα χρήματα διαρπασθέντα (Thuc. 8, 36; the par-
ticiple removed according to § 9, a. Rem. 1).—H σεμνὴ αὕτη, 9 τῆς τραγῳδίας
ποίησις (Pl. Gorg. 502). Ἢ ἄνω ἡ πρὸς τῷ τείχει ἀπόληψις τῶν ὁπλιτῶν (Thue. 7,
δ4). Ai πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι νῆες τῶν Κορινθίων αἱ τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις ἀνθορμοῦσαι (Thue.
7,31). Τὸ ἐν ᾿Αρκαδίᾳ τὸ τοῦ Διὸς τοῦ Λυκαίου ἱερόν (Pl. Rep. 8, 565). Κατὰ τὴν
᾿Αττικὴν τὴν παλαιὰν φωνήν (Pl. Crat.398). Τεκμαίρομαι ἐκ τοῦ ἄλλου τοῦ ὑμετέρου
τρόπου (ΕἸ. Rep. 2, 368). (Also where the other adjective or participle stands
substantively : Of ἄλλοι of παρόντες τῶν στρατιωτῶν, Xen. Anab. 6, 4,7.) (It is
seldom that one of the specifications follows without the repeated article: ἡ τῆς
πόλεως ἀνάλωσις δημοσία, Thuc. 6,31. Μετὰ τὴν τῶν τυράννων κατάλυσιν ἐκ τῆς
“Ἑλλάδος, Thuc. 1, 18. Τὸν πρεσβύτατον υἷον ἑαυτοῦ, Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 1.)
The article stands with substantives (appellatives), that are con-
nected with a demonstrative pronoun, οὗτος, ὅδε, or ἐκεῖνος. The
1 [So, often, αἴτιος, αἴτιον, &c., used substantively in the predicate, = the cause. ]
? {Observe that in both the instances substantives are under the government ot
prepositions. |
[PART I.
§ 11] The Article. 13
demonstrative stands before the article or after the substantive : [ὃ τ.
Οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ. “Hée ἡ πόλις. Kara τοὺς νόμους ἐκείνους. ᾿Εἰκτῶντο
τὴν τιμὴν ταύτην (1506γ. Phil. 107). If, however, besides the pronoun,
an adjective or the like is also added, the pronoun may either attach
itself to this (the more usual case), or retain its own peculiar position :
Ἢ στενὴ αὕτη ὁδός (Xen. Anab. 4, 2, 6). Αἱ πρὸς τοὺς τυράννους
αὗται λίαν ὁμιλίαι (Dem. 6, 21).—Oi ἀλαζόνες λόγοι ἐκεῖνοι (Pl. Rep.
ὃ, 560). ᾿Κκείνη ἡ ὑψηλοτάτη πλάτανος (Pl. Phaed. 339). (Αὐτός,
se/f, has no influence on the use of the article ᾽.)
Rem. 1. The article is omitted, when the substantive is properly a predica-.
tive noun, or an apposition (connected with the predicate) to the pronoun, which
last, instead of standing independently, conforms in gender, according to the
Greek practice, to the substantive (is attracted by it): Αὕτη ἐστὶν ἀνδρὸς ἀρετή
(Pl. Men. 71, this is the virtue of a man). Κίνησις αὕτη μεγίστη τοῖς Ἕλλησιν
ἐγένετο (Thuc. 1, 1). Ταύτην τέχνην ἔχει (Lys. 6, 7). Ταύτῃ ἀπολογίᾳ χρῆται
(Dem. 49, 63, he uses this as an excuse). ‘Qs οἱ περὶ Κλεόμβροτον ἐκράτουν τῇ
μάχῃ. σαφεῖ τούτῳ τεκμηρίῳ γνοίη ἄν τις (Xen. Hell. 6, 4,13; from this as from a
certain indication, or proof); and in the same way, where the pronoun refers to
something following, by which the notion is defined for the first time: Οὗτοι, ots
ὁμᾶτε, βάρβαροι, πολέμιοι ἡμῖν ἔσονται (Xen. Anab. 1,5, 16). Μενεκλῆς ἐδεῖτο
ὑμῶν δοῦναι χάριν ταύτην αὑτῷ, ἐκδοῦναι ἄλλῳ τὴν ἀδελφήν (15Φ. 1, 14; to have
the kindness to —). (In the poets, the article is omitted with demonstratives in
other cases; especially in the case of ὅδε, a thing of rare occurrence in prose, with
a definite pointing out of the object, ‘here’: Φέρε λαβὼν χιτῶνας τουτουσὶ τοῖς τῶν
δορυφόρων ἡγεμόσι, κασᾶς δὲ τούςδε τοὺς ἐφιππείους τοῖς τῶν ἱππέων ἡγεμύσι, Kat
τῶν ἁρμάτων τοῖς ἡγεμόσι ἄλλους τούςδε χιτῶνας, Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 6.)
Rem. 2. In the same way, ἑκάτερος. ἄμφω, ἀμφότεροι are always accompanied by
the article: ᾿Αμφοῖν τοῖν χεροῖν. With ἕκαστος it may be either expressed or
omitted: Kara τὴν ἡμέραν ἑκάστην and καθ᾽ ἡμέραν ἑκάστην. Ἔν ἑκάστῃ τῇ
πόλει and ἐν ἑκάστῃ πόλει.
Rem. 3. With the adjectives τοιοῦτος, τϑιύόςδε, τοσοῦτος (τηλικοῦτος, τηλικόςδε)
the article may stand (before them, as in the case of other adjectives), when the
notion of a definite class of such a kind is to be rendered prominent: Ti οὐκ ἂν
πράξειεν ὁ τοιοῦτος ἀνήρ; (Dem. 34, 29, such a man = the man who acts in this
way.) (Τὸ τοιόνδε λέγω, Pl. Gorg. 476, I mean the following relation.)
Rem. 4. Πᾶς, every, stands without the article (Πᾶσα πόλις. Πᾶς ἀνήρ) ; but
πάντες, all, usually with the article (of a definite class): Πάντα ra ἀγαθά. (Πᾶν
τὸ καλῶς ἔχον, Pl. Rep. 2, 381, all that is good.) ἫἪ Σπάρτη πασῶν τῶν πόλεων
ἀρετῇ διαφέρει (Xen. Pol. Lac. 10, 4). Πᾶσαι ai καλαὶ πράξεις (not atter the
article), but also without it: Πάντα ἀγαθά, all good things. Πασῶν πόλεων
᾿Αθῆναι μάλιστα πεφύκασιν ev εἰρήνῃ αὔξεσθαι (Xen. de Vect. 5,2). (Πάντες θεοί,
πάντες ἄνθρωποι.) Πᾶς, whole, stands with the article, usually on the outside
of the article and its substantive; that is to say, either before the article or after
the substantive (as apposition, cf. ὃ 12): Πᾶσα ἡ πόλις, ἡ πόλις πᾶσα (the whole
1 Ἡμεῖς of στρατηγοΐ, “Ey ἡ τάλαινα.
CHAP, 11.]
14 The Article. [$ 12, 73
[§11-] city, the latter properly, the city, all of it), so also ὅλος (ὅλη ἡ πόλις, ἢ πόλις ὅλη).
(Without the article ὅλη πόλις, πόλις ὅλη, seldom πόλις πᾶσα, an entire city, the
whole of a city.) Tas, however, and especially ὅλος, also stands after the article,
like other adjectives: Ἢ πᾶσα Σικελία (Thue. 4, 61, the whole of Sicily, Sicily as
a whole). Ἢ σύμπασα ‘Eas (1506. Paneg. 8, 3). Τὸ πᾶν πλῆθος τῶν ὁπλιτῶν
(Thuc. 8, 93). Τὸ ὅλον πρόσωπον (Pl. Prot, 329). Τὸ ὅλον γένος (Pl. Crat. 392).
In the same way we also meet with in the plural: Ta πάντα μέρη, all the portions
together, οἱ πάντες ἄνθρωποι (Xen. Anab, 5, 6, 7), μόνη τῶν πασῶν πόλεων (Dem.
8, 64), and always of πάντες, =n all, e.g. δέκα ταῖς πάσαις ναυσίν. (ἘΞύμπαντες
ἑπτακόσιοι ὁπλῖται, in all; together, Thuc. 4, 129.)
Rem. 5. The article also stands with the interrogative pronominal adjective
ποῖος, to denote that the inquiry is made about the property of an object named
or otherwise indicated: Τὴν ποίαν κατάστασιν πολιτείας ὀλιγαρχίαν λέγεις ; (Pl.
Rep. 8, 550). Θέλω σοι πάνυ μεγαλόφρονα τῆς γυναικὸς ἔργα διηγήσασθαι. Ta
ποῖα; (Xen. Hic. 10, 1.)
Rem. 6. Where parts of a whole are stated in numbers, the article is sometimes
prefixed to the numeral (to denote the definiteness of the relation): Αἱ ἑκκαίδεκα.
τῶν νεῶν (Thuc. 1, 116). Ta δύο μέρη. In like manner it is said: ᾿Αμφὶ τοὺς
εἴκοσι, about twenty. (But on the other hand: ὑπὲρ ἥμισυ! τοῦ στρατεύματος,
Xen. Anab. 5, 10, 10, above half, or the half.)
6 12. The article stands in Greek with substantives to which an adjective is added as
an apposition (outside of the article) and belonging to the predicate, to intimate that
the notion of the substantive follows of itself, and is assumed (as something given
and existing), so that the only question is about the property. (In English we
usually put the substantive with the adjective indefinitely: but 1fwe wish toexpress
the definiteness of the substantive, we give the words a different turn, or have _—
recourse to a periphrasis.) Οἱ ἄνθρωποι ὑπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου καταλαμπόμενοι τὰ χρώματα
μελάντερα ἔχουσιν (Xen. Mem. 4. 7,7, acquire a darker hue, or, come to have their
hue darker, ov, their hue becomes darker). Πόσον ἄγει τὸ στράτευμα; (Xen. Cyr.
2,1, 2, how great is the army which he leads?) Τὸ σῶμα θνητὸν ἅπαντες ἔχομεν
(Isoer. Phil. 134). ᾿Απ᾽ ὀρθῆς καὶ δικαίας τῆς Ψυχῆς τὰ πάντα μοι πέπρακται (Dem.
18, 298, with an upright and honest mind ; in the uprightness and integrity of my
mind), (Αὐτὸς ἀγαθὸς σὺν ἀγαθοῖς τοῖς map’ ἐμοί, Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 12, with those
about me good, with good people about me.) Οἱ παρ᾽ ἐμοί, substantively, οἵ, § 14, "3,
(Ὁ λιμὴν τὸ στόμα εἶχε ὀκτὼ σταδίων, Thuc, 7,59, with the descriptive genitive.)
Rem. The same position (outside the article) is also taken by the adjective
and participle in other cases, when they are in apposition (i.e. used, not attri-
butively, but appositively): Ot Κερκυραῖοι ἐνέπρησαν τὰς σκηνὰς ἐρήμους (Thue.
1, 49, left with none to defend them). ‘O ποταμὸς διὰ μέσης τῆς πόλεως pet (Xen.
Cyr.7, 5,8). Ακραις ταῖς χερσίν. “Apa τῷ ἦρι ἀρχομένῳ. On the adjective, see
§ 86, and on the participle, § 181, R. 7.
§ 13. @) Proper names do not require the article (which is accordingly
omitted even where a demonstrative is annexed: οὑτοσὶ ᾿Απα-
touplos, this A. here); but they may take it, if the person or
[? Cf. note 1, p. 9.—T. K. A.]
2 Τίνας λέγεις, Tas τέσσαρας πολιτείας ; (Pl. Rep. 8, 544, what are the four
polities you are speaking of ?)
[PART 1.
§ 14.] The Article. 5
object is made prominent, as having been previously named, and as [ὃ 13-]
being essential to the matter in hand, or as being so generally known
and presupposed, that the scope of the discourse naturally leads one
to expect the mention ; sometimes without any particular emphasis :
Ταῦτα: λαβὼν ὁ Παυσανίας τὰ γράμματα πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἧρτο (Thue. 1,
130, in the continuation of an account of Pausanias.)—Kai ἐκ τοῦ
Βυζαντίου Bia ἐκπολιορκηθεὶς (Ilavoavias) ἐς μὲν τὴν Σπάρτην οὐκ
ἀνεχώρει. ἐς δὲ Κολωνὰς τὰς Τρωϊάδας ἱδρύθη (Lhuc. 1, 131; Byzan-
tium, mentioned before as the place where Pausanias was residing ;
Sparta, his well-known home. But shortly afterwards: ἀνεχώρει és
Σπάρτην). “Ev δὲ τῇ Πύλῳ---ἐν δὲ ταῖς ᾿Αθήναις (Thue. 4, 26, 27,
the narrative now passing on to these before-mentioned cities). ‘H
Θεμιστοκλέους ἀρετή, ἢ ἀρετὴ ἡ Θεμιστοκλέους (by § 10), but not ἡ ἀρετὴ Θεμι-
στοκλέους (though it may be ἡ ἀρετὴ τοῦ Θεμιστοκλέους with the article, and ἡ ἀρετὴ
ἡ τοῦ Θεμ.). Evpnua Θεμιστοκλέους, an invention of Themistocles.
Rem. ‘O μέγας ᾿Δλέξανδρος, Θῆβαι ai ἐν Βοιωτίᾳ, ᾿Αλέξανδρος ὁ Μακεδών, for
distinction from others of the same name. Ὃ Σιλανὸς ὁ ᾿Αμβρακιώτης (Xen. Anab.
6, 4, 13), (the betore-mentioned) S. the Ambraciote (who is recalled to one’s
thoughts here; otherwise uA. 6 ’AuS8p.). When, to describe a person more
exactly, the name of the father is added in the genitive, the governing word may|
take an article after it before the genitive, which makes the addition more!
prominent: Κλέων ὁ Κλεαινέτου, Περίβοια ἡ ᾿Αλκάθου, but also without the article 3]
Κλέων Κλεαινέτου (in the business-style). (With. appended designation of birth-)
place and district: Κάλλιππος 6 Φίλωνος 6 Αἰξωνεύς, or Καλλικλῆς ᾿Επιτρέφους.
Θριάσιος, Dem. 50, 47 *.)
6) For names of nations, the same rule holds good, when they are
used of the whole nation. (But always οἱ “EXAnves, in contradis-
tinction to of βάρβαροι.) Ὃ ᾿Αθηναίων δῆμος, ὁ δῆμος ὁ ᾿Αθηναίων (in public
transactions this is the most usual) and ὁ 6. τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων. (Rarely Ὃ δῆμος ὁ τῶν
᾿Αθηναίων.) When some of a nation are spoken of, it is of ᾿Αθηναῖοι, of Ἕλληνες,
and ᾿Αθηναῖοι, Ἕλληνες, according to the general rules for the article. “Ἑλληνές
ἐσμεν. So ᾿Αθηναῖος and 6 ᾿Αθηναῖος.
a) In the same manner as with substantives, the article stands with § 14.
adjectives or participles when they are used substantively of persons
or things (definite individuals or classes): ‘O καλός, τὸ ἀγαθόν. Οἱ
καλοὶ, τὰ ἀγαθά. Τὰ ἐν ἀνθρώποις ἀγαθά. (Οἱ πολλοί, the many ; the
multitude, the popular party: οἱ ὀλίγοι, the oligarchical party). Οἱ
“πολεμοῦντες. Ὃ βουλόμενος, whoever will. Οἱ πρῶτοι ἐρχόμενοι.
Ὃ ἄκων ἁμαρτάνων. Lav τὸ καλῶς ἔχον (Pl. Rep. 581). Οἱ κινδυνεύειν
1 Ὃ Μαίανδρος ποταμός (with different genders: ἐπὶ τῇ Αἴτνῃ τῷ ὄρει, or ἐπὶ τῷ
ὄρει τῇ Αἴτνῃ), more rarely μέχρι Μαιάνδρου ποταμοῦ.
3 Μόνος “Ἑλλήνων καὶ βαρβάρων, of Greeks and barbarians, § 8, R. 2, f.
CHAP. II. |
16 The Article. [§ 14.
[$ 14.] ἐθέλοντες or οἱ ἐθέλοντες κινδυνεύειν. Ὃ τὸ τεῖχος ἑλών. Ὃ ἑλὼν TO
τεῖχος.
Rem. 1. Where such a participle has a predicate nominative, this is usually
placed between the article and the participle (ὁ φαῦλος νομιζόμενος), more rarely
after the participle (ὁ νομιζόμενος φαῦλος). A case governed by the participle is
rarely (by reason of special emphasis) placed before the article: Kat τὴν σοφίαν
ὡσαύτως τοὺς ἀργυρίου πωλοῦντας σοφιστὰς ἀποκαλοῦσιν (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 12).
Rem. 2. The Greeks sometimes put a participle substantively with the article,
where we say indefinitely people who or people to—, see § 186, b. R. 1.
Rem. 3. Some such substantative expressions formed of the article with a
neuter adjective, and denoting a relation of time, or an extent or amount, are
used (in the accusative) as adverbs, 6. g. τὸ ἀρχαῖον, τὸ. παλαιόν, of old, τὸ πρῶτον
(τὸ δεύτερον, πέμπτον, etc.), for the first time, τὸ τελευταῖον, lastly, at last, τὸ ὅλον, τὸ
ξύμπαν, on the whole, τὸ μέγιστον, for the greatest part, τὰ πολλά, mostly, τὸ
πλέον, TA πλείω, for the more part (in Thucyd. sometimes τὸ πλέον for the mere
adverb πλέον), τὸ λοιπόν, τὰ λοιπά, for the future, τἄλλα, for the rest, τὰ τελευ-
ταῖα (Thuc. 1, 24), lastly.
Ὁ) In the same way, the article without a substantive 15 prefixed to
a preposition and its case, or to an adverb of time or place (§ 9b), to
denote persons or things (definite individuals or elasses), which are in
the situation or relation assigned by the preposition or adverb: Ov
ἐν τῇ πόλει, the people in the city, ot mapa Νικίου (the persons sent
from N.), οἱ ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν, ἐμοῦ (our, my, contemporaries, people im our
times), οἱ ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων (Dem., those over the affairs, 1. 6. those
who are at the head of them). ‘O ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ (the men in the ship, ot a
person lately mentioned). Οἱ νῦν, οἱ ἐνθάδε, οἱ ἐκεῖ. Οἱ ἐγγυτάτω
(γένους), the next of kin. Ta εἰς τὸν πόλεμον, what belongs to war,
the preparations for war. Ta ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, what is m our power. Ta
κατὰ Σικελίαν, the Sicilian affairs. Ta ἐνθάδε, the affairs here’.
eet Ὁ
Rem. 1. In the singular of the neuter gender, some such expressions, governed
by a preposition, serve to mark time and place. Ἔν τῷ τότε, at that time, ev τῷ
πρὸ τοῦ, in the time preceding, ἐκ τοῦ ἐπὶ θάτερα, ἐκ Tod ἐπ᾽ ἀριστερά, from the
opposite side, from the left side, τὰ ἐν τῷ ἐπέκεινα τῆς ἄκρας γιγνόμενα (Thue. 8,.
104), what was doing on the other side of the promontory.
tem. 2. Some such expressions, formed with the neuter article and a prepo-
sition, are used (in the accusative) as adverbs to denote a certain compass or
extent, thus: τὸ ἀπὸ τοῦδε, from this time forth, τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐμοί, as far as it depends on
me, for my part, τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτόν, 707)" his own part, as regards oneself, τὸ πρὸ τούτου,
in former times. The article stands in this way even before adverbs of time, to
denote a certain extent of time: τὸ πρίν, of yore, τὸ τήμερον, TO νῦν, τὰ νῦν
1 Rarely τὸ σφόδρα, τὸ φανερῶς, and the like, with an infinitive understood : the
putting it strongly, the vehement form, the speaking openly.
[PART τ:
§ 15.] The Article. 17
(roviv, τανῦν), now (τὰ νῦν rade), τό τε παραυτίκα καὶ τὸ ἔπειτα (Thuc.), both [§ 14.]
for the instant and for the future. (Τὰ μάλιστα, in the highest degree.)
a general substantive notion of that which belongs to, or arises from,
or concerns a person or thing: Ta τῶν πολεμίων. Ta τῆς πόλεως, the
mee a ς , / \ - > , 5. δ αἹ
concerns or affairs of the city. Ἢ Δίκη πάντα τὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐφορᾷ'
(Dem. 25,11). Τὸ τῆς ἐπιτροπῆς ἐλέλυτο (Dem. 33, 19, the affair of the
guardianship). Ta τῆς τύχης, the dispensations, dealings, of fortune.
Ta τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων φρονεῖν, to think that which is for the interest of the
Athenians, 1. 6. to take part with the Athenians. To τοῦ Θεμιστοκλέους
(Pl. Rep. 1, 329, the expression of Th., what Th. said). Δοκεῖς μοι τὸ
τοῦ ᾿Ιβυκείου ἵππου πεπονθέναι (Pl. Parm. 136, what befell the horse of
Ibycus). (Sometimes little more than a mere periphrasis: Ἦν ἄδηλα τὰ τῆς σωτη-
plas Χαριδήμῳ, Dem. 23,163. Τὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ἡμῶν. Pl. Legg. 2,657, we elders,
as for us elders. Ta βαρβάρων yap δοῦλα πάντα πλὴν ἑνός, Hur. Hel. 276.)
a) The article is put with infinitives to mark that the notion of the § 15.
action is conceived as a substantive (τὸ λέγειν, the speaking, τὸ κολά-
ἕεσθαι, the being punished); see on the Infinitive, § 154 f. Further,
it is put with any other not substantive word which is used mate-
rialiter as substantive; and so, with a set of comnected words. To
ὑμεῖς, the word &. To λέγεται. To γνῶθι σαυτόν. Ὕπερέβη τὸ “ Kai
ἐὰν ἁλῷ φόνου (Dem. 23, 220; he left out the words —). ᾿Ισχόμαχος
ἐγέλασεν ἐπὶ τῷ “Τί ποιῶν καλὸς κἀγαθὸς κέκλησαι ;” (Xen. (710. 7, 3).
6) The article stands before a whole proposition in indefinite form
(ace. with inf.), to denote that the matter cf the proposition is con-
ceived as a substantive ;, the circumstance that—, the fact of—, &e.
See under Inf. § 170.
Rem. 1. Even the substance of a dependent proposition is sometimes put
definitely by the article, and thereby brought into connexion with the primary sen--
tence, especially in dependent interrogative propositions: Οὐ περὶ τοῦ ἐπιτυχόντος
ὁ λόγος, ἀλλὰ περὶ τοῦ, ὅντινα τρόπον χρὴ ζῆν (Pl. Rep. 1, 352, but about the
question, how—). Τὸ γὰρ ὡς τὰ ἄριστά τε ἔπραττον καὶ διὰ παντὸς εὔνους εἰμί, ἱκανῶς
> ~ > / “ , ’ @
ἐκ τῶν εἰρημένων δεδηλῶσθαί μοι νομίζω (Dem.18, 110).
Rem. 2. A short relative expression may be attached to. ἃ. substantive by the
article, even so as to obtain an adjective sense: Οὐ τὴν ὥςπερ ἐπὶ τοῦ δίφρου ἔδραν
ἐπαινοῦμεν (Xen. Hipp. 7, 5, of a rider: a way of sitting upon a horse, as one
would upon a chair). ᾿Ανδροτίων τῆς ὅπου βούλεσθε ὀλιγαρχίας ἀσελγέστερος γέγονεν.
(Dem. 22, 52, more insolent than an oligarchy be it where -you will ;—than any:
- CHAP, IL] e
ὃ 16,
Se
ᾧ τὸ,
(51)
18 The Article. [ὁ 16—18.
oligarchy). Σόλων ἐμίσει τοὺς οἷος οὗτος (ἐστὶν) ἀνθρώπους (Dem. 19, 254. Cf.
§ 106, E. 2).
a) Where the same substantive (or word put substantively) with
the article ought to be put twice (or oftener) with different adjuncts,
it is sufficient merely to repeat the article: Ὃ τῶν ἰδιωτευόντων Bios
αἱρετώτερος ἢ 6 τῶν τυραννευόντων (Isocr. ad Nic. 4). Ἔχομεν Μοῦ-
σαν τῆς τῶν χορῶν καλλίω καὶ τῆς ἐν τοῖς κοινοῖς θεάτροις (Pl. Legg.
2,667). Ὑπὸ τῶν πεττεύειν δεινῶν οἱ μὴ (viz. πεττεύειν δεινοί) τελευ-
τῶντες ἀποκλείονται (Pl. Rep. 6, 487). Καὶ παρὰ τῶν ὑμετέρων στρα-
τιωτῶν καὶ παρὰ τῶν ἐνθάδε. Todd κρείττων ἐστὶν ὁ τῆς ψυχῆς ἢ ὁ τοῦ
σώματος ἔρως (Xen. Symp. 8, 12) *. In like manner: ᾿Ανὴρ δόκιμος ὁμοῖα
τῷ μάλιστα, Viz. δοκίμῳ, Hadt. 7,118. Σέβομαί τι ὁμοῖα τῷ μάλιστα, viz. σεβομένῳ,
Hat. 3, 8.
δὴ) When two notions coupled by ‘and’ so closely cohere that they together make
one notion, or may be comprised under one head, the article is sometimes put only
once : Of στρατηγοὶ καὶ λοχαγοί (Xen, An. 3, 1, 29, (the chief officers, to wit) generals
and captains : in other passages of στρ. καὶ of λοχ.). “O ἥλιος καὶ σελήνη καὶ ἄστρα
(ΡΙ. Phed. 111, the heavenly bodies, to wit). Τό τε δίκαιον καὶ τὸ ἄδικον καὶ καλὸν
καὶ αἰσχρὸν καὶ ἀγαθὸν καὶ κακόν (Pl. Euthyph.7,these moral conceptions, one a nd all).
"Ey τε τοῖς ᾿Αργείοις καὶ τοῖς ξυμμάχοις (Thue. 5, 61). (Τῆς τε Ἰταλίας καὶ Σικελίας,
Thuc. 1, 36, with two proper names, the west, viz. It. and Sic.)
In certain expressions, the article is put elliptically with an ad-
jective or similar defining adjunct, a particular substantive being
understood, from which the article takes its gender. (Usually in the
feminine, because the masculine article suggests only the general notion of a person; |
the neuter, that of a thing.) Ἢ ἡμετέρα (γῆ), ἐν τῇ τῶν πολεμίων, EV TH
βασιλέως (Pl. Alcib.1. 421). Ἢ αὔριον (ἡμέρα). Kara τὴν ἐμήν (γνώ-
μην). Τὴν ἐπὶ Βαβυλῶνος ἰέναι (ὁδόν). Τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ ἄγειν τινά (to
lead one to execution), and similar expressions denoting the direction
of a motion. (Of the Adjectives see the further § 87 b.)
(Appendix to Chap. 2°.) @) The Greeks are more regular than we in their
use of the plural of substantives, in speaking of a number of individuals and of
things which each of these individuals possesses (8. 5. ψυχαί, σώματα).
Rem. Sometimes however the singular is used, so that the notion is given in a
merely general way: Τὸν πηλὸν ἐπὶ τοῦ νώτου ἔφερον (Thuc. 4, 4). Tas πρώρας
καὶ τὴς νεὼς ἄνω ἐπὶ πολὺ (a good bit) κατεβύρσωσαν (Thuc. 7, 65); especially
ptey ihn τις δύναμις ἡ τῶν εὖ λεγόντων, With the substantive drawn over to the
predicate. 1
2 Strictly speaking this does not come under the Syntax.
__ [PART L
ee
§ 19.] Nominative and Accusative. IQ
΄
without the article, distributively : Δώδεκα ψιλοὶ ξὺν ξιφιδίῳ καὶ θώρακι (Thue. [§ 18.]
3, 22).
6) Even substantives denoting abstract and other general conceptions to which
the notion of number does not apply, are put in the plural to mark the occurrence
of the condition, affection, or the like, in different forms, with different subjects or
at different times, or with some special modification, e. g. ψύχη Kat θάλπη, αὐχμοί,
πλοῦτοι. δυναστεῖαι, ἔνδειαι, ταπεινότητες, γέλωτες (γέλωτες ἐξαίσιοι), μέσαι νύκτες,
midnight, κρέα (conceived as pieces), πυροί, κριθαί (wheat, barley, as masses), ἅλες,
c) Conversely, certain words, denoting individual objects which admit of being
numbered, sometimes stand in the singular, to denote the genus and a multitude,
e.g. πλίνθος, bricks, or tiles. Note especially the figurative use of ἀσπίς, to signify
a host of heavy-armed (poetically, λόγχη), and of ἵππος (ἡ) for the cavalry, with the
numerals χιλία and μυρία in the singular: Herodotus has even 7 κάμηλος, denoting
a tvoop of camels.
GHAPTE Rik
The Cases. Nominative and Accusative.
In Greek, an apposition is often attached to the subject or object ᾧ 19.
of a proposition, sometimes even to a case governed by a preposition,
to denote in what quality, to what end, the person or thing appears
in the action: “Hews μοι σωτήρ. Tivos διδάσκαλοι ἥκετε; (PC. Huthyd.
287). Οὐ χείρους βοηθοί σοι παραστησόμεθα ἢ εἰ παῖδας ἐκέκτησο
(Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 19). Τοὺς φίλους μάρτυρας παρέχω. Ta περιττὰ
χρήματα πράγματα ἔχουσιν (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 213 as a burden, 1. 6.
in their superfluous wealth they have only an incumbrance). “lows
τάχα τοὺς Θηβαίους ἄλλους Λακεδαιμονίους εὑρήσετε (Xen. Hell. 7, 1,
84). Σὺν σοὶ φίλῳ καὶ ταῦτα διαπράξομαι".
Rem. 1. Such an apposition is rarely found with objects which are not in the
accusative, except with χρῶμαι (dative: Χρῶμαι τοῖς φίλοις BonGois) and τυγχάνω
(genitive: "Epwrare τοὺς Τραπεζουντίους, ὁποίων τινῶν ἡμῶν ἔτυχον, Xen. An.
δ. , 1ὅ, what sort of people they found us). (Θρασυμήδης οὐδὲν ἤδει, οἵοις θηρίοις
ἐπλησίαζε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις Tovtos, Dem. 35, 8, with what monsters he associated, in
having to do with these men.)
Rem. 2. In a numerical statement of breadth, length, height, weight, or value,
the general term is often put as an apposition (100 feet as dength, i.e. in length) :
and so, in speaking of a sum of money, the more special description of the way in
which it is applied (30 talents as reward = for reward, as we also say, 30 t.
1 On the other hand a relation of time is never denoted (as it is in Latin) by the
apposition of a substantive or adjective (without the participle dv). When, or, as
consul, is ὑπατεύων, as a child, mais dv. See ὃ 174 Ὁ. R.
CHAP. III.] C2
[§ 19.]
eenti Agatloni est.”
20 Nominative and Accusative. T$ 20.
reward). Τὸ ἄγαλμα τεσσαράκοντα τάλαντα σταθμὸν εἶχε χρυσίου ἀπέφθου (Thue.
2,13). ᾿Αρχέβιος καὶ Λυσιθείδης ἔχουσι χρήματα Ναυκρατικὰ, τίμημα τάλαντα ἐννέα
καὶ τριάκοντα μνᾶς (Dem. 24, 11). Ἐπὶ μισθῷ τριάκοντα ταλάντοις (Hdt. 8, 4).
Ἐμοὶ ὁ πατὴρ κατέλιπε τριάκοντα μνᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ἐργαστηρίου τὴν πρόσοδον (Dem.
27, 18, as the produce, the profits, of the workshop).
Rem. 3. An entire proposition may have a description of its purport. or of its
predicate, annexed to it in the form of an apposition. In an active proposition, this
apposition attaches itself to the object ; in a passive one, to the subject; but in prose
it consists only of an adjective or a similar expression in the neuter: To δὲ πάντων
μέγιστον καὶ κάλλιστον, THY μὲν σὴν χώραν αὐξανομένην ὁρᾷς, τὴν δὲ τῶν πολεμίων
, XG GC a 5 5 9A, (ὃ f \ a Ὅ ΄ id cr
μειουμένην (Xen. Cyr. 5, 5, 24). Παρμενίδης μοι φαίνεται, τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου, atdovos
τε ἅμα δεινός τε (Pl. Theat. 183, P. seems to me, Homer’s expression, both—, i. 6.
. ,ὔ , Ν , ‘ -΄" ἣν Lon Ν > ‘ ee
as Homer has it). Πανολεθρίᾳ δή, τὸ λεγόμενον, καὶ πεζὸς καὶ νῆες καὶ οὐδὲν ὅ,τι
οὐκ ἀπώλετο (Lhuc..7, 87, as the saying is). In like manner the nature of the
predicate is premised in the form of an apposition by such expressions as δυοῖν
θάτερον. one or other of these two : (Τοιαῦτα ἐροῦμεν, ἐξ ὧν, δυοῖν θάτερον, ἢ μετα-
΄ Ι ‘A , > cal a \ ΄ y Pp " om ΕΣ p 7 ae ».
στήσομεν τὰς γνώμας αὐτῶν ἢ Tas κατηγορίας ἐλέγξομεν ψευδεῖς οὔσας, 7500)». Antid,
197), ἀμφότερα (τοὺς ἀμφότερα taita, καὶ εὔνους τῇ πόλει καὶ πλουσίους, Dem. 18,
171), οὐδέτερον, ταὐτὸν τοῦτο, πᾶν τοὐναντίον, &e. (Hence ταὐτὸν τοῦτο, in the
sume way, likewise, τοὐναντίον, on the contrary, as adverbs.)
Rem. 4. With the verb λέγω, I mean, either the foregoing case is repeated, or
the more exact specification is attached, as object, to λέγω : Πάντες οἱ στρατηγοὶ
> “Ὁ δ -“ , , cal ‘A > , tf (ὁ ΄ Pp 4 1Y
Tap ὧν ἂν εκαστοι δύνωνται. TOUT@Y τῶν τὴν Ἄσιαν οἰκουντῶν λέγω, χρήματα
λαμβάνουσιν (Dem. 8, 24). Προσέκρουσα ἀνθρώπῳ πονηρῷ, ᾧ τελευτῶσα ὅλη
προσέκρουσεν ἡ πόλις, ᾿Ανδροτίωνα λέγω (Dem. 24, 6).
In the nominative stands (1) the subject; the predicate; and (3)
or ke . rT. ΄ ’ /
an apposition to the subject: Κῦρος πάντων κράτιστος ἐνοωίζετο.
Kdpos στρατηγὸς ἀπεδείχθη. Τωβρύας ψευδὴς φαίνεται (Xen. Cyr.
2,4). Ὃ ἀδελφός μοι ζημία μᾶλλον ἢ ὠφέλειά ἐστιν (Xen. Mem.
, 3, 6). Ὄνομα τῷ μειρακίῳ ᾿Αγάθων ἐστίν *.
Rem. 1. [ Verhs of imperfect predication.] The verbs which in themselves do not
form a complete predicate, and therefore require a predicate noun, are in Greek
(besides edut) ὑπάρχω, γίγνομαι, and certain passives (see ὃ 24), πέφυκα, 1 am by
nuture. (Aayxave, become by lot : Δημοσθένης οὔτ᾽ ἔλαχε τειχοποιὸς οὔτ᾽ ἐχειροτο-
νήθη, Asch. ὃ, 28. Δοκῶ with εἶναι omitted.)
Rem. 2. Whena participle has a predicative-noun or an apposition, the predicate
or apposition follows the case of the subject and of the participle: Ὃ φαῦλος
νομιζόμενος, τῶν φαύλων νομιζομένων (of those who are accounted vile). Tots ἄκουσιν
ἁμαρτάνουσι μέτεστι συγγνώμης (Dem. 24,49). ᾿Αντισθένην ᾿Αθηναῖοι εἵλοντο στρα-
τηγύν, τὸν οὐδὲ ὁπλίτην πώποτε στρατευσάμενον (Xen. Mem. 3, 4,1. who had never
even served as a hoplite). Τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων προτέρων ἐλθόντων, οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
ἀπετράποντο.
Rem. 3. In comparisons with ὡς, ὥσπερ, and καθάπερ, there is often a nominative
to which we must supply a verb in the indicative, which stands in the principal
1 In Latin, “ Damno magis quam utilitati;” and most frequently, “Nomen adoles-
[PART I,
Tee er ts aes A dl eee Pee ee ἥν,
sree fo
wk ee
apa
Sel, 22. | Nominative and Accusative. 21
member of the sentence either as participle in a different case, or as infinitive [§ 20.]
(accusative with infinitive): Λξιον κολάζειν τοὺς παραβαίνειν τολμῶντας τὰς
συνθήκας, ἄλλως τε καὶ τοὺς ὥσπερ Καλλίμαχος βεβιωκότας (Lsoer, Call. 47).
Πέπεισμαί σε μᾶλλον ἀποθανεῖν ἂν ἑλέσθαι ἢ ζὴν ὥςπερ ἐγώ (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 4).
Ἔν ἀνδράσιν οὕτως ἀνοήτοις ὥσπερ οἱ παῖδες (Pl. Gorg. 464, where εἰσίν is under-
stood from the adjective). But the noun after the ὥσπερ may also pass, by
attraction, into the case of the preceding noun, altheugh the verb by which that
case is governed, has nothing to do with the comparative clause: ᾿Αστυάγης τῷ
Κύρῳ ἥδετο οὐ δυναμένῳ σιγᾶν ὑπὸ τῆς ἡδονῆς, GAN ὥσπερ σκύλακι γενναίῳ ava-
κλάζοντι (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 750). (Cf. ὃ 98 on the Comparative.)
Rem. 4. In the vague infinitive sentence, subject and predicate stand in the
accusative: Ἤκουσα ὄνομα αὐτῷ εἶναι ᾿Αγάθωνα (Pl. Prot. 315). See under
Infinitive.
The aceusative is the case of the object of transitive verbs (whether § 2r.
in the active, middle, or passive-deponent form) : Οἱ “EXAqves τοὺς (222)
Πέρσας ἐνίκησαν. (Inthe passive: Οἱ Πέρσαι ἐνικήθησαν ὑπὸ τῶν “ED -
λήνων) Τὴν ἀσπίδα προβάλλομαι. Νικίας τοὺς ἄλλους στρατηγοὺς
μετεπέμψρατο (sent for; in the passive: Παρῆσαν μεταπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ
Νικώυ). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τοὺς τῶν Συρακουσίων ἱππέας ἐφοβήθησαν.
(On the forms of the verb see chap. 7.)
Rem. 1. The active subject is usually expressed in the passive by ὑπό. Of the
use of the dative and of the prepositions πρός, ἐξ, ἀπό, under certain circumstances,
see under Dative (§ 38, g) and the Prepositions.
Rem. 2. In the transitive verbs which take the accusative, the relation of the
action to the object is so conceived, that the object is the passive recipient or the
result of the action. Distinct from these are the verbs in which the action or
state is conceived, as having merely a reference to an object which is expressed by
the dative ; and also those in which the relation is conceived as a connexion with ora
proceeding from an object which is denoted by the gentdive. These latter come
nearest to the properly transitive verbs.
a) In many verbs the view of the relation of the action. to the ἃ 25.
object is somewhat different in the Greek from that which underlies (223)
the corresponding English and Latin words by which they are com-
monly rendered, whence they are construed in a different way, viz.,
transitively. This must be learnt in detail by practice, and from the
Lexicon. For example, these verbs in Greek are transitive: evAa-|
Bodpuad (τι), εὑεργετῶ (τινα). Kakoupy@, ἐπιτροπεύω, δορυφορῶ (Twa), |
λανθάνω (escape the observation of some one), τιμωροῦμαί (Twa, avenge!
myself on some one, and punish him), αἰσχύνομαι (feel myself ashamed, |
or awed, before some One, 6. B. τοὺς στρατιώτας ').
1 The learner must especially be on his guard against supposing that the particular
mode of conception which appears in certain Latin verbs, and the (dative) construc-
CHAP. III.]
22 Nominative and Accusative. ” [5:.
[§22.] 6) Sundry usually intransitive verbs sometimes obtain a transitive
signification in certain connexions, 6. g. θαῤῥῶ (μάχας. θάνατον), δυσ-
᾿χεραίνω (τὴν ἀδικίαν), ὄμνυμι (τοὺς θεούς), πλέω (τὴν θάλασσαν), ἀπο-
διδράσκω (τὸν δεσπότην), εἶμι, πορεύομαι (ὁδόν), εἰσέρχομαι (γραφήν,
A . . " ,
as we say, enter a complaint before the judges), εἴσειμι (τυράννους, act
[the part of] sovereigns on the stage), πρεσβεύω (εἰρήνην, negotiate a
peace as ambassador’).
Rem. 1. The passive, however, of such verbs, is, for the most part, never used.
Rem. 2. The poets often go much greater lengths in ascribing transitive
signification to intransitive verbs: such poetical expressions are, e.g. χορεύω
θεόν (celebrate with dancing), ἀΐσσω χεῖρα, παραβαίνω τὸν ἕτερον πόδα. ἣμαι (κεῖμαι,
θάσσω. πηδῶ) τόπον τινά, διφρηλατῶ τὸν οὐρανόν. Tods εὐσεβεῖς θεοὶ θνήσκοντας οὐ
χαίρουσιν (Eur. Hipp. 1539). (In the passive: Πᾶν μέλαθρον αὐλεῖται, Hur. [ph.
367, is filled with the music of the flute.)
§ 23. Δ) In particular it must be remarked, that many intransitive verbs,
(224) which denote a motion, on composition with a preposition (especiall
FA Te 2
5 j ; Ξ ae ταν Saas
διά, μετα, Tapa, περί, υπέερ; ὑπο) assume a transitive signification,
partly proper, partly metaphorical, e.g. διαβαίνω (ποταμόν), διέρχομαι, δίειμι,
διέξειμι, διεξέρχομαι, go through (in discourse and writing), διαπλέω, μετέρχομαι, Prose-
cute in revenge and punishment, rapaBaivo, transgress, πάρειμι, παρέρχομαι, pass by,
περίειμι (τὴν Ἑλλάδα), περιΐσταμαι (λόφον, ἄνθρωπόν τινα), ὑπερβαίνω, overstep, exceed,
transgress, ὑπέρχομαί (τινα, flatter; we say, come over), ὑφίσταμαι (κινδύνους),
ὑποδύομαι (πόνον, submit to a labour).
Rem. 1. In some verbs, not metaphorically used, the preposition is occasionally
repeated, 6. g. διςπορεύομαι διὰ τῆς χώρας.
Rem. 2. In verbs compounded with other prepositions, the transitive significa-
tion is more rare, and usually is found only in the metaphorical sense, e.g. in
εἴσειμι (εἰσήει pe ἔλεος, Pl. Phed.58; but also εἰσέρχεταί μοι δέος, Pl. Heep. 1,330),
ἐκβαίνω, exceed (ra τριάκοντα ἔτη), ἐξίσταμαι, ὑπεξίσταμαι (κίνδυνον, evade : = de-
clinare) ; or poetical, e. g. εἰσπίπτω συμφοράν. (Cf. ὃ 36, b. R. 1.)
6) Κατά forms from intransitive verbs transitives expressive of
destruction, annihilation, as brought about by the action assigned by
the simple verb, e.g. καταναυμαχῶ, καταπολεμῶ, καταπολιτεύομαί
τινα---κατοψοφωγῶ, καθυπποτροφῶ τὴν οὐσίαν (waste my property by
keeping horses).
tion thence resulting, holds also in the Greek. These verbs, for instance, in Greek,
are simple transitives :
ἀδικῶ, βλάπτω, πείθω, κολακεύω,
οἰκτείρω, ἐλεῶ, ὠφελῶ, ἐνεδρεύω.
1 Τεθνάναι τῷ φόβῳ τοὺς Θηβαίους (Dem. 19, 81), ἔξαρνον εἶναι (γίγνεσθαι) τὴν
δίαιταν (1500. Call. 13, the award of the umpires). ᾿Αστύοχος τὴν χώραν κατα-
Spopais λείαν ἐποιεῖτο (Thue, ὃ, 41). :
[PART I.
.
a υψοΣ
§ 24, 25.] Nominative and Accusative. 23
Some verbs govern, besides the object itself, the accusative of ἃ ὃ 24.
substantive or adjective, which, as apposition or predicate-noun to (227)
the object, serves to complete the notion of the verb. In the passive,
these verbs usually take a predicate-noun in the nominative by § 20.
Such verbs are :
a) Those which denote: fo make (to be) something (elect, nomi-
nate, appoint) ; to have (take, give) as something; to show and exhibit
somewhat in a certain way, as something. Δαρεῖος Κῦρον σατράπην
ἐποίησε καὶ στρατηγὸν ἀπέδειξε πάντων, ὅσοι εἰς ἹζΚαστώλου πεδίον
ἀθροίζονται (Xen. dn. 1, 1,2). Θρασύβουλος ὑμᾶς μὲν πενεστέρους
ἀπέδειξε, τοὺς δὲ κόλακας τοὺς αὐτοῦ πλουσιωτάτους τῶν πολιτῶν ἐποίη-
σεν (Lys. 38,4). Οἱ στρωτιῶται ᾿Αλκιβιάδην στρατηγὸν εἵλοντο (Thue.
8, 82). ᾿Αριαῖον ἠθέλομεν βασιλέα καθιστάναι (Xen. An. 3,2,5). Τῷ
᾿Αλκιβιάδῃ Περικλῆς ἐπέστησε παιδαγωγὸν τῶν οἰκετῶν τὸν ἀχρειότα-
τον ὑπὸ γήρως (Pl. dle. P. 133). Τὰ περιττὰ χρήματα πράγματα
ἔχουσιν (Xen. Cyr. 8, 2,21). Λύσανδρος στεφάνους παρὰ τῶν πόλεων
ἐλάμβανε δῶρα (Xen. Hell. ὃ, 3, 8. See § 19). Τὸν ἰδιώτην χρὴ
ἑαυτὸν παρέχειν εὐπειθῆ τοῖς ἄρχουσιν (Xen. Cyr. 2,1, 33). Λῆρον
ἀποδεικνύασιν ᾿Ενδυμίωνα (Pl. Phad. 72; they make Endymion a
farce ; surpass him so much that he becomes mere child’s-play im com-
parison). Οὐδεὶς ἕξει ψευδῆ ἀποφῆναι, ἃ εἰρήκαμεν (P/.).
Rem. The Greeks even say [proleptically], αὐξάνειν τινὰ μέγαν, αἴρειν τι μέγα,
and the like; where the notion expressed in the apposition is already involved in
the verb, and διδάσκεσθαί τινα σκυτέα, to set a person to learn to be a shoemaker.
6) The verbs which denote to name, call (λέγω, καλῶ, ἀποκαλῶ,
ὀνομάζω, προσαγορεύω, προσεῖπον); and to regard (hold, account, de-
clare) as something (νομίζω, ἡγοῦμαι, κρίνω). Οἱ “Ἕλληνες τοὺς ἄλλους
πάντας. βαρβάρους ὠνόμαζον. Φίλον σε ἡγοῦμαι (Pl. Gorg. 473).
᾿Αθλιωτάτην ταύτην τῶν πόλεων κρίνω (Pl. Hep. 9, 578).
Rem. 1. Instead of the name, title, or denomination itself, a pronoun may stand
in the neuter: Ti σε καλῶμεν ; Τοῦτο καλοῦμαι. ᾿Αντὶ φίλων καὶ ξένων, ἃ τότε
ΕἸ Α -“ , > , O γ - ᾿, ,
. ὠνομάζοντο, viv κόλακες ἀκούουσιν (Dem. 18, 46). Also, καλεῖν τινα ὄνομά τι.
, ᾿Ανακαλοῦσι ταῦτα τὰ ὀνόματα ἑαυτούς, ἀδελφούς, πατέρας, υἱεῖς (Pl. Rep. 5, 471).
Καλεῖν, τίθεσθαι, προσειπεῖν τινι ὄνομά τι, to give a person a name; τίθεσθαί τινι
ΕΣ , εἹ , ay ΄
ὄνομα Σωσίαν (Dem. 48, 74). (Επωνυμίαν ἔχω τύραννος.)
Rem. 2. ἡγοῦμαι, νομίζω, κρίνω, often take an accusative with infinitive (εἶναι),
sometimes even ὀνομάζω : Σοφιστὴν ὀνομάζουσι τὸν ἄνδρα εἶναι (Pl. Prot. 311).
_ ὦ The verbs which denote, to distribute into (to make into somewhat by parting,
διαιρῶ, διανέμω, κατανέμω) : Ὃ Κῦρος τὸ στράτευμα κατένειμε δώδεκα μέρη (Xen. Cyr.
7, ὅ, 13). (In the passive: Ἡ γῆ τὰ αὐτὰ μέρη διανέμεται, Pl. Legg. 5,737.) Also
Περσῶν δώδεκα φυλὰς διαιρεῖν (Xen, Cyr. 1, 2, δ).
A double accusative, to express a nearer and a more remote object § 25.
CHAP. III.]
[§ 25-]
24 Nominative and Accusative. [§ 25.
(the former a person, or something conceived as person) 1 is taken by
verbs which denote, to demand (aire: ἀπαιτῶ, πράττομαι, more rarely
πράττω, εἰςπράττω), to deprive, bereave, make to lose (ἀφαιροῦμαι,
ἀποστερῶ, also συλῶ). clothe and strip, invest and divest (ἐνδύω, ἐκδύω,
ἀωφιέννυμι ᾽ν), teach (διδάσκω, διδάσκομαι, set to learn, have a perso
taught to be somewhat), admonish, make to remember (ἀναμιμνήσκω,
ὑπομιμνήσκω), conceal (κρύπτω, ἀποκρύπτω). In the passive construc-
tion, the nearer object becomes the nominative, while the accusative of
the more remote object remains: Πολλοί pe σῖτον αἰτοῦσι, πολλοὶ δὲ
ἱμάτια (Xen. Cyr. 8. ὃ, 41). Σωκράτης οὐδένα τῆς συνουσίας ἀργύριον
ἐπράττετο (Xen. Mem. 1, 6,11). Μεσσήνην ὑμᾶς οἱ Θηβαῖοι ἐπιχει-
ροῦσιν ἀποστερεῖν (Lsocr. Arch. 16). Ὃ μέγας παῖς τὸν μικρὸν παῖδα
τὸν ἑαυτοῦ χιτῶνα ἠμφίεσεν (Xen. Cyr.1,8,17). Πόθεν Διονυσόδωρος
ἤρξατό σε διδάσκειν τὴν στρατηγίαν; er, Mem. 8, 1,5). ᾿Αναμνήσω
ὑμᾶς καὶ τοὺς τῶν προγόνων κινδύνους (Xen. An, 8, 2 2, 11). Aco-
γείτων τὴν θυγατέρα ἔκρυπτε τὸν θάνατον τοῦ ἀνδρός (Lys. 32 er:
Τισσαφέρνης ὑ ὑπὸ βασιλέως ἐτύγχανε πεπραγμένος τοὺς ἐκ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ
ἀρχῆς φόρους (Thue. 8, 5). Ὅσοι τε τῶν πολεμίων ὅπλα ἀφήρηνται,
ταχὺ ἄλλα ποιήσονται, ὅσοι τε ἵππους ἀπεστέρηνται, ταχὺ" πάλιν ἄλλους
κτήσονται (Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 12). Ἡρακλῆς τὰς βοῦς ὑπὸ Νηλέως καὶ
τῶν παίδων ἐσυλήθη (Isocr. Arch.19). ᾿Αδύνατοί εἰσί τινες ταύτην τὴν
ἐπιμέλειαν διδαχθῆναι (Xen. He. 12, 12).
Rem. 1. Some of these verbs also admit a different construction, especially
ἀποστερεῖν, Viz, τινά twos, to deprive a person of a thing: ἀπούτρῃροι τινα Tor
πατρῴων (Dem. 29, 3), ἀποστερεῖσθαι μεγάλων (Pl. Rep. 1, 329). (Adacpeto Gai
ti twos, to take something ro some one; and so mupaipee Gate Ta ὅπλα τοῦ
πλήθους παρῃροῦντο, Xen. Hell.2, 3,41, ᾿Αφαιρεῖν in the active has τινί τι, to take
something from some one. Kee τῇ παρά τινος. ᾿Αναμιμνήσκειν τινά τινος, 6. δ΄.
Topyiov.)
Rem. 2. Now and then, such a substantive accusative of the remoter object
is found with some other verbs, which otherwise have instead of it a preposi-
tion, e.g. in ap 3 ae and ἐρωτῶ : Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὑμᾶς τὴν “εἰρήνην προκα-
λοῦνται (Arist. Ach. 652. Usually it is: Bee tae τινα εἰς εἰρήνην. Ταῦτά σε
προκαλοῦμαι, with the pronoun in the neuter by § 27). Κῦρος pera τοὺς αὐτο-
μύλους τὰ ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων (Xen. Cyr. 3, 8, 48). Ἔρωτᾶσθαι τὸ ὄνομα (Pl. Legg.
10, 895. Usually περί τινος). With others (ἀναγκάζω, mee we find, as
accusative of the ag, only a neuter adjective or pronoun (see § 27): Τοῦτο μὴ
ἀνάγκαζέ pe (Pl. Rep. 5, 473). ᾿Απέρχομαι πρὶν ὑπὸ σοῦ τι μεῖζον pe
(Pl. Phed. 242),
Rem. 3. The verbs, to make (ποιῶ, ἀντιποιῶ, δρῶ, ἐργάζομαι, poetically, ἔρδω),
and say, speak (λέγω, εἶπον, ἀγορεύω) in the sense, to speak to, or address a person
in a certain manner (especially in an evil manner), sometimes also to make
1 ἐνδύομαι, ἐνέδυν, ἐκδύομαι, ἐξέδυν, ἀμφιέννυμαι χιτῶνα, put on, pu off. “-
PART 1.
§ 26.] Nominative and Accusative. 25
mention of, take the accusative of the person with another accusative, mostly a [§ 25.]
neuter adjective or pronoun, denoting that which i is done to or said of or to the
person : Ἔκ τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν καὶ οἱ τὰ μέγιστα κακὰ ἐργαζόμενοι τὰς πόλεις
γίγνονται καὶ οἱ ἀγαθά: σμικρὰ δὲ φύσις οὐδὲν μέγα οὐδέποτε οὐδένα δρᾷ (Pl. Rep.
6, 405). Οἱ ὑποκριταὶ ἐν ταῖς τραγῳδίαις ἀλλήλους τὰ ἔσχατα λέγουσιν (Xen. Mem.
2, 2,9). Instead of the second accusative we may also have merely the adverbs
εὖ and κακῶς : Κακῶς λέγουσιν οἱ ἀγαθοὶ τοὺς κακούς (PJ. Euthyd. 284).
a) Verbs in themselves incapable of δὴ object-accusative es 26.
nevertheless not unfrequently the accusative of a substantive derived ( ee
from the same root or of corresponding meaning, usually | connected ®
with an adjective or pronoun or similar adjunct serving to define and
characterize the action more closely. (In English, we “usually employ
a verb of general signification, which can take ‘the ‘substantive as its
regular object, in place of the special and intransitive verb m the
Greek.) “Ἥδομαι τὰς μεγίστας ἡδονάς (Pl. Phil. 21; I feel, expe-
rience, enjoy). Χαιρεφῶν ξυνέφυγε τὴν φυγὴν ταύτην (PL Apol. 9.1
took part in ; shared). Οἱ Θρᾷκες, ἐπεὶ εὐτύχησαν τοῦτο TO εὐτύχημα,
συνελέγοντο τῆς νυκτός (Xen. An. 6, 1, 0). Λακεδαιμόνιοι μετὰ ταῦτα
τὸν ἱερὸν καλούμενον πόλεμον ἐστράτευσαν (Thuc. 1, 113). ᾿Απήραμεν
τὴν προτέραν πρεσβείαν (Το. 19. 109: we set out on the first embassy 54}.
Νικᾷν νίκην καλλίστην. Λακεδαιμονίους φασὶν ἐν Πλαταιαῖς πρῶτον
μὲν. φεύγειν, ἔ ἔπειτα δὲ ἀναστρεφομένους ὥςπερ ἱππέας μάχεσθαι καὶ οὕτω
νικῆσαι τὴν ἐκεῖ μάχην͵ (Pl. Lach. ΠΟ eYas μὲν νενικήκατε ναυμαχίας,
τὴν δ᾽ ἐκ τοῦ εἰκότος νῦν νικήσετε (Thue. i; 66)*. Idcas νόσους κάμνω
(PZ. Rep. 3, 408). Νόσον νοσοῦμεν τὴν ἐναντίαν (Arist. Aves, 51}.
Ἤδη ἠσθένει ταύτην τὴν νόσον (Ise. 1; 14). Πρὸς τὸ αὑτοῖς συμφέρον
καὶ τοὺς νόμους τίθενται καὶ τοὺς ἐπαίνους ἐπαινοῦσι καὶ τοὺς ψόγους
ψέγουσιν (Pl. Gorg. 483; praise, when they praise, and blame, when
they blame). Hence sometimes a passive is formed: “O βεβιωμένος
σοι Bios (Dem. 19, 200, the life you have led [so we: the life you have
lived). Οἱ ΠΟΙ, μαι οἱ ἐπὶ Θησέως πολεμηθέντες (Xen. Mem. 3, 5,10).
Rem. 1. The poets eraploy even bolder constructions, 6. g. Tis δῆτ᾽ ἂν εἴη τήνδ᾽
ὁ προσθακῶν ἕδραν ; (Soph. Cid. C. 1166, that sits here in this sort 2).
Rem. 2. In the same manner, some phrases are formed of a verb with a sub-
stantive, elated in signification, but more special, without adjective or pronoun :
νικᾶν Ἴσθμια (to gun an Isthmian victory = νικᾶν τοὺς στεφανίτας ἀγῶνας), θύειν
εὐαγγέλια, θύειν τὰ Λύκαια, ἑστιᾶν γάμους. (Ἑστιᾶν θεσμοφόρια τὰς γυναῖκας, se.
3, 10, see .}.)
1 ἤβξεστιν ὑ ὑμῖν ἄνευ δαπάνης τὰ δίκαια ποιῆσαι τοῖς εὐεργέταις (Dem. 20, 12).
~ Νικᾶν, κρατεῖν τῇ μάχῃ, to conquer in the fight (ἡ ἐς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους δόξα, ἣν
διὰ τὸ αἰσχρὸν δὴ βοηθήσειν ὑμῖν πιστεύετε αὐτούς. Thuc. 5, 105, the confidence you
have in the Lacedemonians, that they of very shame, etc.).
CHAP. III]
[§ 26.]
26 Nominative and Accusative. [§ 27.
Rem. 3. This accusative may also stand with verbs which govern a genitive or
ἘΠΕ Δημοσθένης δέησίν τινα ἰσχυρὰν ἐμοῦ ἐδεήθη μὴ mapahurely τοῦτο (disch.
2,43). (Δεινὰ ἔπη κατηγορεῖν twos, Soph. did. BR. 513.)
6) Such an accusative of the notion contained in the verb, or of
one nearly related to it, together with a defining and characterizing
adjunct, may also stand with a verb which governs a proper object-
accusative : Θρασύβουλος καὶ Θράσυλλος ὥρκωσαν πάντας τοὺς στρα-
τιώτας τοὺς μεγίστους ὅρκους, 7) μὴν δημοκρατήσεσθαι καὶ ὁμονοήσειν
(Thue. 8, 75). Tovs πολίτας μεταδιδόναι ἀλλήλοις χρὴ τῆς ὠφελείας,
ἣν ἂν ἕκαστοι τὸ κοινὸν δυνατοὶ ὦ ὦσιν ὠφελεῖν (Pl. Rep. 7, 519). Μὰ-
τιάδης ὁ τὴν ἐν Μαραθῶνι μάχην τοὺς βαρβάρους νικήσας (Asch. 3,
181)}. Αἰσχίνης Κτησιφῶντα γραφὴν ἱερῶν χρημάτων ἐδίωκεν (Dem.
19, 293). Τιμωρία ὑμῖν ἥξει εὐθὺς μετὰ τὸν ἐμὸν θάνατον πολὺ ya-
λεπωτέρα ἡ ἢ οἵαν ἐμὲ ἀπεκτόνατε (Pl. Apol. 89). ‘This accusative may
remain, when the proposition is expressed passively, and conse-
quently the proper object becomes subject : Τοιοῦτον τμῆμα τέμνεται
TO τεμνόμενον, οἷον τὸ τέμνον τέμνει (δέ. _ Forg. 410; is cut with such a
cut). Οὐδὲν ὄρνεον aber, ὅταν πεινῇ ὴ ῥιγοῖ ἤ τινα ἄλλην λύπην
λυπῆται (Pl. Phed. 85). Tas ἄλλας μάχας, ὅσας Πέρσαι ἡττήθησαν,
ἐῶ (Lsocr. Paneg. 145). Θρασύβουλος ἐδέθη καὶ ἐκρίθη ἀμφοτέρας τὰς
κρίσεις ἐν τῷ δήμῳ (Dem. 24,134). Τύπτεσθαι τῇ δημοσίᾳ μάστιγι
πεντήκοντα πληγάς (Asch. 1, 139).
a) Verbs which in themselves cannot govern an object-accusative,
‘may take the neuter accusative of a pronoun or of a. numeral _adjec-
tive, to denote the contents and compass of the action; and in like
‘manner sometimes another description of adjective which ‘serves to
characterize the measure and extent of the action. (The pronoun
or adjective belongs, properly speaking, to the substantive notion
involved in the verb.) “Ev σοι (τοῦτο, πολλὰ) οὐχ ὁμολογῶ. Tk
διαφέρει ταῦτα; Κῦρος Λυσάνδρῳ ἄλλα τ᾽ το τ καὶ τὸν ἐν Σάρ-
δεσι παράδεισον ἐπέδειξε (Xen. (He. 24). Σμικρόν τι ἀπορῶ (Pe. Theat.
40). αὐτὰ λυποῦμαι καὶ ταὐτὰ ᾿ χαίρω τοῖς πολλοῖς (Dem. 18, 292).
‘O Bones des οὐκ ἐλάσσω πταίει ἢ ὁ εὑοργήτως τοῖς πράγμασιν ΡΣ
(Thue. 1,122). Δέομαι μέτρια καὶ δίκαια ὑμῶν (Dem. 37,3; my request
does not exceed the bounds of moderation and justice). Agus ὑμῶν,
ᾧ ἄνδρες δικασταί, βοηθῆσαι ἡμῖν τὰ δίκαια (Dem. 27,68). Τέχνη ἔσθ᾽
ὅ,τι προςδεῖταί τινος ἀρετῆς; (Pl. Rep. 1, 342 5 is there any respect in
whic ὦ Art requires any additional virtue : Ne “Ὅσα διαγωνίζονται πολ-
λάκις ἥλικες πρὸς ἀλλήλους (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 4; what they contend, 1. 6.
1 Usnally νικᾶν τινα μάχῃ μεγάλῃ.
_[PART I.
§ 28.] Nominative and Accusative, 27
the contests they make). Οὐκ ἀξίως ἐκείνων ὧν (for & by attraction, [§ 27-1
see ch. 9) ἐναυμαχήσαμεν (Arist. Aves, 677; what we fought, 1. 6. the
way we fought in the naval engagement). Hence sometimes the pas-
sive is formed, especially in the participle: Τά cos πεπρεσβευμένα
(Dem. 19, 240; your acts as ambassador = ἃ od πεπρέσβευκας). Ta
ἐν ὅπλοις καὶ κατὰ THY στρατηγίαν ἀτυχηθέντα (Dem. 18, 212; the
mishaps sustained).
Rem. 1. Especially we must remark the use of a pronoun in the accusative neuter
with χρῶμαι (χρῶμαϊΐ τινί τι, make a certain use of an object, use it for [a certain
purpose}): Ti βούλεται Κῦρος ἡμῖν χρῆσθαι; (Xen. An. 1, 3, 28). Ὑμεῖς νυκτί,
ὅσαπερ οἱ ἄλλοι ἡμέρᾳ, δύνασθε χρῆσθαι (Xen. Cyr. 1, 5,12). Πολλὰ χρῆσθαί τινε
(Pl. Theat. 167). Οὐκ ἔχω, ὅ,τι χρήσομαι τούτῳ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ (Pl. Symp. 216;
what I shall do with him: what to do with him). (Χρῆσθαί τινι ἐπὶ πρᾶγμά τι,
χρῆσθαί τοῖς νεύροις εἰς τὰς σφενδόνας).
Rem. 2. Sometimes an adjective thus accompanying the verb acquires almost
_ the force of an adverb; see Adjectives, ch.8. Ti (somewhat, in a certain degree)
and (σμικρόν τι) and οὐδέν are used as complete adverbs even with adjectives (οἱ
ἀρετῆς τι μεταποιούμενοι, Thuc. 2,51, οὐδὲν ὅμοιος, σμικρόν τε ὅμοιος). and with adverbs
(σχεδόν τι, πάνυ τι). Ταῦτα acquires sometimes the sense for this reason, therefore :
Αὐτὰ ταῦτα καὶ viv ἥκω mapa σέ (Pl. Prot. 310, this is the very reason of my now
coming). Ταῦτ᾽ dpa καὶ evedpas por; (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 27). (In the poets also
τάδε, τοιαῦτα = ovTas.)
6) Such an accusative may also stand with a transitive verb which
governs an object-accusative (the adjectives almost always in_ the
plural): Ἐὰν ἐμὲ ἀποκτείνητε, οὐκ ἐμὲ μείζω Brarpere ἢ ὑμᾶς αὐτούς
(Pl. Apol. 30; will bring greater hurts,=will harm more). atta καὶ
ἄλλα τοιαῦτα ἐγκωμιάζουσι τὴν δικαιοσύνην (Pl. Rep. 2,363). ΔΛακε-
δαιμόνιοι πολλὰ τὴν πόλιν ἡμῶν ἠδικήκασι καὶ μεγάλα (Dem. 18, 98).
This accusative may remain with the passive: πολλὰ καὶ δεινὰ ἠδι-
κήθην (Ise. 8, 4). Ov Brayrovta ἄξια λόγου (Thuc. 6, 64; they will
suffer no loss worth mentioning). (Θαυμάζξεσθαι τὰ εἰκότα, Thue. 1, 38, to. enjoy
becoming honours. Τοιαῦτ᾽ ἔπη κλύων, ἃ viv σὺ τήνδ᾽ ἀτιμάζεις πόλιν, Soph. Utd. 1.
40, = ταῦτα, d—, the affront thou puttest upon the city.)
a) The accusative stands with the prepositions ἀνά, up along some- § 28.
thing, alony through something (of space and time), wp to (ava τὸ ὄρος), (3230)
and εἰς, to, into something, together with ὡς, to, and with ἀμφί, διά, ἐπί,
κατά, μετά, παρά, περί, πρός, ὑπέρ, ὑπό, in certain significations (those
which start from the conception of a motion to something, a spreading
round or over something.
Rem. 1. Eis (agreeably with its signification into) is never (in Attic, rarely in
Tonic writers) applied to individual persons ( πρός, ὧς). ‘To persons in the plural
it is applied, when these persons denote an assembly (eis τοὺς δικαστάς, εἰς ὑμᾶς,
into the iad of the people), a definite place (εἰς τοὺς πολεμίους, εἰς τοὺς ὑστάτους
CHAP, ΠῚ.
28 Nominative and Accusative. [ὃ 20, 30.
[§ 28.] ἐμβάλλει), or an extension (land and people) and expansion: (πορεύθησαν εἰς
Tadyous, Xen. An. 4,7, 1. Πέλοψ ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίας χρήματα ἔχων ἦλθεν εἰς ἀνθρώπους
ἀπόρους, Thuc. 1,9. Tapa βασιλέα καὶ ἄλλοσε ἐς τοὺς βαρβάρους, Thue.1, 9. Διαβέ-
βληνται εἰς τοὺς ἄλλους, Pl. Rep. 7,539, in the minds of. Ths πόλεως ἡ δύναμις εἰς
ἅπαντας ἀνθρώπους διαφανὴς ἐγένετο, Pl. Tim. 25). In speaking of disposition
and behaviour towards any one, εἰς is also applied to individuals (εὔνοια ets τινα, ὑβρί-
Cew εἴς twa, λέγειν τι εἴς τινα, of and against him). ‘Qs is used only of persons’.
Rem. 2. The poets use with verbs of motion an accusative without εἰς or πρός τ
Δόμους στείχω ἐμούς (Soph. Gad. C. 643). Πάρειμι (= ἥκω) Δίρκης vapar’ ᾿Ισμηνοῦ
θ᾽ ὕδωρ (Eur. Bacch. 5). In prose we find instead of εἰς, only some names of cities
in the form δὲ (ζε, cf. the Accidence): ἐξελθεῖν ᾿Ελευσίναδε, Ολυμπίαζε.
Rem. 3. Transitive verbs compounded with the prepositions διά and ὑπέρ, in
their proper local signification, sometimes take besides their object-accusative, the
accusative of the name of the place through or over which the motion takes place :
Ὑπερήνεγκαν τὸν Λευκαδίων ἰσθμὸν τὰς ναῦς (Lhuc. 3, 81). (In Herodotus also
τεῖχος περιβάλλεσθαι τὴν πόλιν, Hdt. 1, 163.)
b) Likewise with the particle μά in asseverations: Ναὶ μὰ τὸν Δία.
Ov pa Ala. (In the poets sometimes od without μά: Οὔ, τὸν πάντων θεῶν θεὸν
πρόμον "Ahoy. Soph, Cid. C. 666.)
§ 20. Verbs denoting an extension, motion, or distance, take the name of
(234) the measure in the accusative, so γέγονα, am—old, the specification of
the age. Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Λυδίας σταθμοὺς τρεῖς, παρασάγγας
εἴκοσι καὶ δύο (Xen. An. 1, 2, 5). Βασιλεύς τε καὶ οἱ “Ἕλληνες
διέσχον ἀλλήλων ὡς τριάκοντα στάδια (Xen. An. 1, 2, 4. (Πολλῶν
ἡμερῶν ὁδὸν ἀπέχειν) Θρασύβουλος ἔθετο τὰ ὅπλα ὅσον τρία στάδια
ἀπὸ τῶν φρουρῶν (Xen. Hell. 2,4, 5; took up a position at a distance
of —). Οὔπω εἴκοσιν ἔτη γεγονώς (Xen. Mem. 3, 6, 1).
Ι Rem. In ee donee an extent (Jong, &c.) the pects ab the mea-
| sure is not usual in Greek. It says: μῆκος ἔχων τριῶν ποδῶν (τρεῖς πόδας), τάφρος
| τριῶν ποδῶν τὸ μῆκος. YS: μῆκος ἔχων τριῶν ποδῶν (τρ ) τάφρος.
§ 30. In statements of duration and extent of time (how Jong), the measure
(235) of time is put in the accusative: "Evtad@a Κῦρος ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας πέντε
(ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν) (Xen. An. 1, 2, 6). Οἱ τῶν Περσῶν ἔφηβοι
δέκα ἔτη, ad’ οὗ ἂν ἐκ παίδων ἐξελθῶσι, κοιμῶνται περὶ τὰ ἀρχεῖα (Xen,
Cyr. 1, 2, 9). Τένεσθέ μοι μικρὸν χρόνον τὴν διάνοιαν (1η, imagina=
tion, see § 31) ἐν τῷ θεάτρῳ (Misch. 3, 153). Πολλοῖς καὶ μεγάλοις
κακοῖς Kal πράγμασι THY ἀποδημίαν πᾶσαν συνειχόμην (Dem. 19, 117.
Also παρὰ πᾶσαν τὴν ἀποδ., during the whole journey. Διὰ παντὸς
τοῦ χρόνου, Lys. 7, 8; throughout the whole time). Σπουδὴ ὁμοίως
καὶ νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν ἔσται τῆς ὁδοῦ (Lhuc. 7, 17; through the might
2 *Avd in Epic and lyric poetry with the dative, on, wpon, not implying motion.
[PART I.
3} Nominative and Accusative. 29
and the day: night and day alike. Νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, by night and [§ 30.)
by day, § 66").
Rem. The accusative of a denomination of time with an ordinal number denotes
how long ago (properly, what time it is now, since the thing happened : Ἢ θυγατὴρ
αὐτῷ ἑβδόμην ἡμέραν ἐτετελευτήκει (πολ. 3, 77). Tpirny ἡμέραν ᾿Αστυόχον
ἥκοντος, ai ᾿Αττικαὶ νῆες ἔπλεον ἐς Λέσβον (Thue. 8, 23, (on) the third day after A.
was come). Τὴν μητέρα τρέφων πέπαυμαι τρίτον ἔτος τοῦτο (Lys. 24, 6, now (is
it) the third year (that) —). (More rarely : ᾿Αλκίας τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη, Lys.
7, 10, with the cardinal number.)
a) Where a quality or state is mentioned, expressed either by a § 31.
passive or intransitive verb, or by an attributive adjective, or by αἱ τ
predicate-noun, the accusative is often added, to denote to what part a ἢ
of the subject, or to what side of it, or to what general conception
(e. g. size, number, name, &c.} any thing predicated of the subject
refers (in, in respect of): Ta σώματα πρὸς ὥραν καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς πρὸς
ἀρετὴν εὖ πεφυκότες (Xen. Mem. 4, 1, 2). Οἱ στρατιῶται εὖ μὲν εἴ ἶχον
τὰ σώματα πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι στρατιωτικοὺς πόνους φέρειν, εὖ δὲ τὰς
ψυχὰς πρὸς τὸ καταφρονεῖν τῶν πολεμίων (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 9). ᾿Αλγεῖν
τὸν δάκτυλον, τὰ ὄμματα, κάμνειν τοὺς πόδας. τος μον; μικρὸν
χρόνον τὴν διάνοιαν μὴ « ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τῷ θεάτρῳ (Aisch. 3,
153). Ἢ πενία τοῦ πλούτου βελτίονας ἄνδρας παρέχει καὶ τὴν γνώμην
καὶ αὐ ἰδέαν (4; ist. Pl. 558). τ fo νόσημα, τοιοῦτον ἣν. ἐπὶ. πῶν (in its
general nature) τὴν ἰδέαν (Th we. 2, a1). Πάντας χρὴ καὶ τοὺς εὐφυεστέ-
ρους καὶ τοὺς ἀμβλυτέρους τὴν φύσιν, ἐν οἷς ἂν ἀξιόλογοι βούλωντωι
γενέσθαι, ταῦτα καὶ ἀπ τον καὶ μελετᾶν (Xen. Mem. 9,9, 9). Δίκαιος
τὸν τρόπον (Dem. 56, 2) Δισχίλιοι, ἄπειροι τὸ Deas ᾿Εξακόσιοι
TOV ἀριθμόν (Arist. vee 1251). Eévov ἄγομεν, τὸ μὲν γένος ἐξ
*EXéas, ἑταῖρον δὲ τῶν ἀμφὶ Παρμενίδην καὶ Ζήνωνα (Pl: Soph. 216),
Σκύθης τὸ γένος. Διὰ μέσης τῆς πόλεως ῥεῖ ποταμὸς Κύδνος ὄνομα,
εὖρος δύο πλέθρων (Xen: An. 1, ὁ, 23). ΔΛύσανδρος Πα. tire
πόλει τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ξυμμάχῳ ὄνομα ἱΚεδρείαις (Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 15),
Bd ἔχω τὰ κατὰ τὸ σῶμα, as far as the body is concerned.
Rem. 1. Sometimes κατά is used to denote the part_of the subject: Καθαρὸς
καὶ κατὰ TO σῶμα Kal κατὰ τὴν ψυχήν (Pl. Crat. 405). In, certain connexions we
have the dative (by), e.g. φύσει, γένει. See ὃ 40.
_ Rem. 2. The poets nad to the object-accusative of a person the accusative of a
part of the body (also φρένας), to which the exercise of the action refers: Μέθες
_ με, πρὸς θεῶν, χεῖρα, φίλτατον τέκνον (Soph. Phil. 1301).
1 Οὐκ ἀηδὲς κατὰ τὸ ὑδάτιον ἰέναι ἄλλως τε καὶ τήνδε τὴν ὥραν τοῦ ἔτους τε καὶ τῆς
έ as (Pl. Phedr. 229). Herodotus uses τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον quite in place of
XP }
: τούτῳ τῷ χρόνφ, κατὰ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον, and νύκτα (τὰς νύκτας), instead of
νυκτός.
CHAP. I11.]
30 Nominative and Accusative. [§ 31.
[8.31.1 4) Adjectives denoting cleverness, shilfulness, or knowledge often
take an accusative of the object in which the knowledge or skill is
ascribed to a person, but for the most part only a neuter adjective (in
the plural) or a pronoun (also τέχνην, ἀρετήν). Ὃ πάντα σοφὸς
ποιητής (Pl. Theat. 194). ᾿Ανὴρ ἀγαθὸς (δεινὸς) τὰ πολιτικά. "Kav
τις φῇ ἀγαθὸς αὐλητὴς εἶναι ἢ ἄλλην ἡντινοῦν τέχνην, ἣν μή ἐστιν,
καταγελῶσιν (Pl. Prot. 323). Οἱ στρατιῶται ἐπιστήμονες ἦσαν τὰ
προςήκοντα TH ἑαυτῶν ἕκαστος ὁπλίσει (Xen. Cyr. 3,3, 9). (Also,
"Oca μοι χρήσιμοί ἐστε, οἶδα, Xen. An. 2, 5, 23.)
Ee
—
Rem. Κακὸς πᾶσαν κακίαν (Pi. Rep. 6, 490), with a substantive of the same
origin; as in verbs, § 26. |
c) In certain cases an accusative is used to denote something
external to the subject (a certain extent, range, sphere) to which the
predicate refers (45 regards). In this manner are used the substantive
μέρος (τὸ ἐμὸν μέρος, τὸ σὸν μ., etc.) ; some adjectives with the article
in the neuter, which then for the most part have quite the significa-
tion of adverbs of extent and time; and the neuter article with a _pre-
position or an adverb (in ke manner forming adverbial expressions).
Οἱ παῖδες, TO σὸν μέρος, ὅ TL ἂν τύχωσι, τοῦτο πράξουσι (Pl. Criton.
45). Τὸ Αἰτωλικὸν πάθος διὰ τὴν ὕλην μέρος τι ἐγένετο (Thuc. 4, 30 ;
the defeat in Ait.). Οὐ μόνον τὰ μεγάλα, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὰ μικρὰ πειρῶμαι
ἀεὶ ἀπὸ θεῶν ἄρχεσθαι (Xen. Cyr. 1, 5, 14). Τὰ μὲν παρελθόντα
(hitherto) ὑμεῖς μὲν Κῦρον ηὐξήσατε, ἸΚῦρος δ᾽ εὐκλεεῖς ὑμᾶς ἐποίησεν
(Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 23). To λουπόν, τὸ ξύμπαν, ete. (see The Article,
§ 14 ἃ. Rem. 2). To κατ᾽ ἐμὲ οὐδὲν ἐλλείψει (on my part). To πρίν,
ete. (see id. § 14 b. Rem. 2). Ἢ πόλις εἰρήνην ἄγει Ta περὶ THY χώραν
(Isoer. Areop. 1). Ot στρατηγοὶ σπονδὰς ἐποιήσαντο τὰ περὶ Llvdov
(Thue. 4,15; on account of P., as regarded matters at P.).
d) The accusative τρόπον is put adverbially, and so likewise ὁδόν,
in certain expressions (as ‘ manner, ‘way, in English). Τοῦτον τὸν
τρόπον πράξας ὅλου τοῦ πράγματος ἀπαλλάξομαι (Dem. 30, 22).
(Πάντα τρόπον, ἕτερον τρόπον, ὃν τρόπον, etc. Also τίνι τρόπῳ, τούτῳ
τῷ τρόπῳ. See Dative, § 41.) Κῦρος τὴν ΚΚίλισσαν eis Κιλικίαν ἀπο-
πέμπει τὴν ταχίστην ὁδὸν (Xen. An. 1, 2, 20).
Rem. In this manner several adverbial expressions are formed elliptically by
omission of ὁδόν, 6. g. τὴν ταχίστην, τὴν πρώτην. The accusative of some par-
) ticular substantives is used adverbially without an adjective or pronoun annexed :
| ἀρχήν, τὴν ἀρχήν, at all, τέλος, τὸ τέλος, πέρας, at last, πρόφασιν, in pretence,
| προῖκα, gratis ; δίκην, after the manner of, and χάριν, for the sake of, have the force
1 Φροντιστὴς τὰ μετέωρα (Pl. Apol. 18), as adjective.
[PART I.
§ 32—34.] The Dative. 31
of a preposition with the genitive, thus: ἀγγείου δίκην πεπληρῶσθαι (Pl. Phed. [§ 31.]
235), Tivos χάριν ; τοῦ λόγου χάριν (P/.), the latter also accompanied by ἃ posses-
sive pronoun : ἐμὴν χάριν, σὴν χάριν. In the same way ὅσον, ὅσα (ὅσον ye, ὅσα ye)
are used as adverbs.
e) Of the accusative absolute of a participle (ἐξόν) to denote a cir- § 32-
cumstance, see under Participles, § 182.
The accusative is put elliptically in the phrase μή wor —, come not
to me with —, don’t talk to me of — + μή μοι πρόφασιν (Arist. Ach. 345 ;
no shuffling), and in calling a person: Οὗτος, ὦ σέ τοι (Arist. Aves
274; hark ye, there! you there ἢ).
Rem. 1. In later writers, we sometimes find the article followed by an accusative
in the sense, he with, he that has, e.g.‘O τὴν πορφυρίδα (Lucian). In Hero-
dotus sometimes the name of a part of the object is put with a participle as appo-
sition to the object : Τοὺς βοῦς κατορύσσουσι ἐν τοῖς προαστείοις, τὸ κέρας τὸ ἕτερον
ἢ καὶ ἀμφότερα ὑπερέχοντα, 2, 41, the one horn projecting, i.e. so that —, or,
with —.
Rem. 2. On the particular use of the accusative with the gerundive, see § 85:
on the accusative of a relative changed into the dative or genitive, see Relative,
§ 103: on the subject of a dependent proposition drawn into the primary pro-
position as accusative, § 191.
CHAPTER IV.
Dative.
Tus Dative in Greek denotes generally the relation of a person or § 33.
thing ¢o and i a state or action, in which however it is not the pas- (241,
sive object, and indicates, first, that person or thing for which some-{?>”)
thing has zxterest, and to which it refers; secondly, that which, as!
an_appurtenance or circumstance, belongs to and forms part of the,
predicate *.
Under the first of these heads the dative marks the person, or the αὶ 5 4.
thing conceived of as person, for which something takes place, or has (241)
the predicated quality: Σόλων ᾿Αθηναίοις νόμους ἔθηκεν. Αἱ βάλανοι
| tots δεσπόταις ἀπόκεινται (Xen. An. 2, 3, 15; are reserved for the
masters). Οὐ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ τῇ μητρὶ μόνον γεγενήμεθα, ἀλλὰ καὶ TH
πατρίδι, (1])6ηι. 18, 205). ᾿Ανάγκη μοι ἀπιέναι. Φθόνος μέγιστον κακὸν
τοῖς ἔχουσιν αὐτόν (Isocr. Huag. 6). Μέθη φύλαξιν ἀπρεπέστατον
(Pl. hep. 3, 398). Σωκράτης ἄξιος θανάτου ἐστὶ τῇ πόλει (Xen.
Mem. 1, 1, 1; has deserved death from the city, owes death as his
deserts to the city). Οἷα ἕκαστα ἐμοὶ φαίνεται, τοιαῦτα καὶ ἔστιν ἐμοί
* The Greek dative, therefore, corresponds not only with the Latin dative, but
also, to a great extent, with the Latin ablative. ak
CHAP. IV.]
32 The Dative. ποι.
[8.341 (Pl. Theat. 152). AgoB8os Tas εἰςφορὰς ἐμοὶ λογίζεται (Dem. 27, 46 ;
§ 35.
(242)
debits the taxes to me as expenditure). (Dat. commodi et incom-
modi.)
Rem. 1. Sometimes the dative has directly the meaning in honour of, to the ad- ὦ
aT, Oe Sa TO ee oe Ages. 2, 15), Aa αγχάνειν τοῦ πος se clei
ΠΈΣ cae a dative is sometimes, in Behe of something Fe one has, or
needs, or πατεῖ bring about, immediately attached to a Sobstaniive: to denote for
whom it is had or wanted, etc. : Χρημάτων ᾿Αριστοφάνει προσέδει πρὸς τὸν μισθὸν
τοῖς πελτασταῖς (Lys. 19, 22). Ἑσπάνιζον τροφῆς τοῖς πολλοῖς (Thuc. 4, 6).
Πείσανδρος ἠρώτα ἕνα ἕκαστον, ἥντινα ἐλπίδα ἔχει σωτηρίας τῇ πόλει (Thue. 8, 53).
a) The dative stands with transitive verbs, which either usually (like
δίδωμι), Or in certain phrases (e. θ᾽. πόλεμον ΠΣ ΕΣ to declare war),
denote an action in reference to another person or thing besides the
proper object, as object of reference (both with the active and with
the passive), e.g. μισθὸν διδόναι (ὑπισχνεῖσθαι, τάττειν) τοῖς στρατιώταις,
διανέμειν χρήματα τοῖς πολίταις, ἀσφάλειαν παρέχειν τοῖς φίλοις, ἐπι-
τρέπειν τὰ “πράγματα τοῖς ἐμπειροτώτοις, χρήματα πολλοῖς ὀφείλειν,
βοήθειαν πέμπειν τινί, λέγειν (διηγεῖσθαι, ἀγγέλλειν) τινὶ τὰ πεπραγ-
μένα, ὀνειδίζειν τινὶ δειλίαν, διαλλάττειν τινά tive (to reconcile a per= Ὁ
son with, to, some one) , δίκην λαγχάνειν Twi (fo_commence ὦ law-suit ~
against a person), χεῖρας ἀνέχειν ἐ θεῷ. Βοήθεια ἐπέμφθη Βοιωτοῖς. “A
γεγενημένη μάχη τῷ βασιλεῖ ἀγγέλλεται.
6) Such a reference to something else besides the proper object 15
often denoted by the composition “of the verb with one of the _pre-
positions ἀντί, ἐν, ἐπί, περί, πρός, σύν, ὑπό. For exam ple, ἀντιτάττειν
TOUS ἱππέας τοῖς πολεμίοις. ἐμβάλλειν τινὶ ἔρωτα, ἐμποιεῖν (ἐνεργά- ,
ζεσθαι, ἐμφύειν) ἐπιθυμίαν τῇ ψυχῇ, ἐγχειρίζειν. τινὶ τὰ πράγματα, 4
(ἐντρέφειν, ἐντραφεὶς τῇ βασιλείᾳ), ἐνορᾶν κακόνοιάν τινά τινι, ἐπάγειν, q
αἰτίαν ψευδῆ τινι, τέλος ἐπιθεῖναι πράγματι, ἐπιφέρειν ὅπλα ἀλλήλοις.
ἐπιστέλλειν τινί τι, ἐπιτάττειν φόρον τοῖς συμμάχοις, περιώπτειν τῇ
“πόλει αἰσχύνην (τιμήν, ὄνειδος, δόξαν αἰσχράν), περιτιθέναι τινὶ
στέφανον (ἀτιμίαν), περιβάλλεσθαι: ταῖς πόλεσιν ἐρύματα"), προστιθέναι
Tl τῷ νόμῳ, προσέχειν τὸν νοῦν τῷ λόγῳ, προστάττειν τοῖς δούλοις
ἔργα, προσϑέρειν τῷ σώματι τροφήν, συνιστάναι τινὰ διδασκάλῳ,
ὑποβάλλειν τινὶ λόγον, ὑποτάττεσθαί τινι. The reference, however, is
denoted by a repetition of the preposition, whenever the conception of
place or of a motion is prominent : Περιθεῖναι πιλίδια περὶ τὴν
κεφαλήν (Pl. Rep. 3, 406). Τὸ ἐν Μελήτῳ ἐνῳκοδομημένον φρούριον
* But also περιβάλλεσθαι τὴν νῆσον τείχει, with a wall.
Ἶ [PART I.
——
§ 36.] The Dative. 33
(Thuc. 8, 4). (In some cases the usage of the language somewhat varies: this
must be learnt from the Lexicon.)
Rem. 1. Transitive compounds with παρά are fond of repeating the preposition.
(Also παραβάλλειν τι πρός τι.) (Παραμιγνύναι τί τινι, to mix something with a
thing ; also simply μιγνύναι τί τινι.)
Rem. 2. An object of reference in the dative may also stand with verbs which
govern the genitive, e. 8. ἀμφισβητεῖν τινι τοῦ σίτου, ἀντιποιεῖσθαι τῷ βασιλεῖ τῆς
ἀρχῆς, μεταδιδόναι τινὶ τῶν ἀγαθῶν, μετέχειν τινὶ τῶν κακῶν, ξυλλαμβάνειν τινὶ τοῦ
πόνου.
Rem. 3. With an inaccuracy, peculiar to themselves, some such verbs in the
passive, instead of being predicated of the proper (accusative) object, take for their
subject the object of reference, e.g. those which denote transferring and giving in
charge. The proper object Pe remains in the accusative, as in the ver bs which
have a double accusative in the active (δ 25): Οἱ ἐπιτετραμμένοι τὴν φυλακήν
(Thuc. 1, 126). ἔΑλλο τι μεῖζον ἐπιταχθήσεσθε ΣΝ 1, 140, = ὑμῖν ἐπιταχθήσεται).
So in the passive: ἀποτέμνεσθαι τὴν κεφαλήν, τ τ τς or ἐκκόπτεσθαι τὠφθαλμώ
of the person to whom this is done. (Of ἀποσεσηπότες τοὺς δακτύλους τῶν ποδῶν,
Aen. An. 4,5, 12, = ἐκεῖνοι, ὧν ἀποσεσήπασιν οἱ δάκτυλοι.)
@) The dative stands as object of reference with intransitive verbs
which denote an action, disposition of mind, or situation in reference
to a person or thing, but, in the view of the Greeks, do not imply a
passive attitude on the part of the object, e.g. πείθεσθαι τοῖς
ἄρχουσιν, πολεμεῖν Λακεδαιμονίοις, εὔχεσθαι τοῖς θεοῖς, ὁμιλεῖν τοῖς
ἀγαθοῖς, ἀπαντῶν τοῖς ἀπιοῦσιν. “Kotxas παιδί. So likewise in
phrases which have the signification of such a verb, 6. g. ᾿Αθηναίοις
διὰ πολέμου ἰέναι, ὁμόσε χωρεῖν τινι.
Of such verbs the most important are: those which denote an unfavourable state of
mind, blame, threatening, resistance, strife, together with those which denote obe-
dience and compliance : ὀργίζομαι, θυμοῦμαι, χαλεπαίνω, ἀπεχθάνομαι, φθονῶ, λοιδο-
ροῦμαι", ἐπιτιμῷ, ἐπιπλήττω, ἐγκαλῶ, area, ἐναντιοῦμαι, “πολεμῶ, παρατάττομαι, ἐρίζω,
στασιάζω, ἀμφισβητῶ, πείθομαι, ἀπειθῶ, πειθαρχῶ, ὑπηρετῶ, ὑπουργῶ, δουλεύω, λατρεύω,
εἴκω, ὑπείκω, ὑποχωρῶ. χαρίζομαι, συγγιγνώσκω : further, those which denote help
and assistance, counsel, cheering, and confidence: βοηθῶ, ἀμύνω, ἐπικουρῶ, τιμωρῶ
(poet. ἀρήγω), συμβουλεύω, παραινῶ, ὑποτίθεμαι, παρακελεύομαι, πιστεύω, ἀπιστῶ:
and those which denote meeting, approaching, following, and communing or com-
panionship : ἀπαντῶ, ἐντυγχάνω, πλησιάζω 2, ἀκολουθῶ, ἕ ἕπομαι, ὁμιλῶ, κοινωνῷ : lastly,
some which do not belong to the foregoing classes, viz. ἔοικα (am like), διαλέγομαι
(converse with 5 ἐς λόγους ἔρχομαι), εὔχομαι, λυσιτελῶ, and the impersonals δοκεῖ,
συμφέρει, πρέπει, προσήκει, μέλει 3.
Rem. 1. As in some verbs the mode of viewing the relation wavers between
the notion of a mere reference, and that of a transitive working upon the object,
1 λοιδορῷῶ in the active with the accusative.
2 The poetical words πελάζομαι, ἐμπελάζομαι, προσπελάζομαι have also the genitive,
Active: πελάζειν τινά τινι.
3 Δεῖ μοι (τινός, L have need of, something is needful to me, Dat. commodi),
poetically also δεῖ μέ (and χρή μέ) τινος. Δεῖ pe, χρῆ pe ποιεῖν (rarely δεῖ μοι ποιεῖν,
I must do).
CHAP. IV. ] D
ὥ
5.]
(245)
34 The Dative. [$ 36.
they occur both with the dative and with the accusative, especially ἀρέσκω, please,
ἀπαρέσκω, displease (λυμαίνομαι, φιλοφρονοῦμαι, ἐνοχλῶ), sometimes with a some-
what altered meaning, thus μέμφομαι, blame, with the accusative, μέμφομαί τινί
. ΄ , /
τι, cast up something to a person as a reproach. (Ὑπακούειν τινί and τινός.)
Rem. 2. In some of these verbs, the reference may also be expressed by ἃ pre-
" )* ΄ ΄σ ΄ - ’
position, e.g. διαλέγεσθαι πρός τινα, πολεμεῖν, μάχεσθαι πρός τινα, ἕπεσθαι μετά
τινος, σύν τινι, ἀκολουθεῖν μετά τινος.
Rem. 3. Some of these verbs may also have an object-accusative, either merely
of a neuter pronoun or adjective, e.g. χαρίζομαι, or also of substantives, e.g. mt
στεύω, entrust.
Rem. 4. Occasionally the passive of a verb of this sort also is (less accurately)
predicated of an object of reference as its subject, e.g. Οἱ Κερκυραῖοι οὐκ εἰκότως
πολεμοῦνται ὑπὸ Κορινθίων (Lhuc. 1, 37, are warred upon). Ἐύμπαντες οἱ τῆς
Σικελίας ἔνοικοι ἐπιβουλευόμεθα (Thac. 4, 61), especially in the participle or infinitive,
for the sake of conciseness: Παλαμήδης διὰ σοφίαν φθονηθεὶς ὑπὸ τοῦ ᾽Οδυσσέως
ἀπόλλυται (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 88). Κρεῖττόν ἐστι πιστεύεσθαι ὑπὸ τῆς πατρίδος ἢ
ἀπιστεῖσθαι (Xen. Symp. 4, 29). (In Thucydides, even verbs in which the con-
struction with the dative rests on the composition (b): Αἱ εἴκοσι νῆες τῶν Πελο-
ποννησίων, ἐφορμούμεναι ἴσῳ ἀριθμῷ ὑπὸ ᾿Αθηναίων, ἐπέκπλουν ἐποιήσαντο, 8, 20.)
6) The dative is often put in this manner with intransitive verbs,
which by composition with one of the prepositions ἀντί, ἐν, ἐπί, παρά,
7) . . «ς “ .
περί, πρός, σύν, ὑπό, or with the particle ομοῦ, come to denote a
reference to something else, especially in a figurative sense, e.g. ἀντέχειν
(to hold out against), ἀντιβλέπειν τοῖς πολεμίοις, ἐμμένειν ταῖς συνθήκαις (τοῖς ὅρκοις,
τοῖς δεδογμένοις), ἐπιέναι τοῖς ὁπλίταις, ἐπικεῖσθαι τοῖς φεύγουσιν, ἐφορμεῖν τῷ λιμένι,
ἐφήδεσθαι, ἐπεγγελᾶν τινι (τοῖς κακοῖς τινος). ἐπιστρατεύειν (ἐπιστρατεύεσθαι) τοῖς Ἕλ-
λησιν, παραμένειν τοῖς συμμάχοις, παρακαθῆσθαι Σωκράτει, περιπίπτειν συμφορᾷ (φυγῇ).
περιτυγχάνειν κριτῇ ἀγνώμονι, προσοικεῖν ποταμοῖς καὶ θαλάσσῃ, προσήκειν τινί (to be
yelated to a person), συνεῖναι, συζῆν τινι (συνεῖναι, συνέχεσθαι, συζεύγνυσθαι, συστῆναι
κακοῖς, νόσῳ, πόνῳ), συνεργεῖν τινι, συνοικεῖν γυναικί (συγχαίρειν τοῖς εὐτυχοῦσιν),
ὑποκεῖσθαι τῷ ἄρχοντι, ὁμολογεῖν, ὁμογνωμονεῖν, ὁμονοεῖν τινι. ONAN ἔνεστι TO
γήρᾳ κακά (Arist. Sph. 441). "Epos φιλοσοφίας ἐμπίπτει τοῖς ἀνδράσιν
(Pl. Rep. 6, 499). Ἐπέρχεταί (ἔπεισί) μοι λέγειν. Τῇ Bia πρόσεισιν
ἔχθραι (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 10). Τὰ ἔργα τοῖς λόγοις οὐ συμφωνεῖ.
“Κκάστῳ τῶν ὀνομάτων τούτων ὑπόκειταί τις ἴδιος οὐσία (Pl. Prot. 349).
When the literal signification, and, in general, the notion of space
and motion, is prominent, the preposition is usually repeated :
ἐμμένειν ἐν τῇ τάξει, ἐμπίπτειν εἰς φρέαρ, εἰς ἀνάγκην. “Addit οὐκ
ἔνεστιν ἐν τῷ θυλάκῳ (Arist. P/. 763). In this point, however, the
individual verbs somewhat vary '.
Rem. 1. The compounds of verbs of motion with παρά, περί, ὑπό are transitive,
1 The compounds of ἦμαι and κεῖμαι, even in their literal signification, have, for
the most part, the dative without prepositions; on the other hand, προσφέρεσθαι
πρός Twa μετὰ πραύτητος, to deal with, bear oneself towards, a person.
[PART I.
ὃ 37. The Dative. 35
and have the accusative (§ 23). (More rarely, and chiefly in poetry, certain [§ 36.]
others: ἐπιστρατεύειν τινά, προσπαίζειν τινά: in Thucydid. προσοικεῖν, προσ-
καθέζεσθαι πόλιν instead of πόλει.)
Rem. 2. In some compounds with σύν, the dative denotes another subject who
takes part in the action, e.g. συγκαταγηράσκειν τινί. Οἱ συναναβάντες τῷ Κύρῳ
(also σὺν τῷ Κύρῳ).
Besides the usage assigned to the dat. in § 34 of denoting the person § 37.
Jor whom something has a certain quality, the dative stands as object of (247 >)
reference (a) with the adjectives which denote dikeness (correspondency)
and unlikeness, friendly and hostile disposition, as also (ὁ) with the ad-
jectives which, by composition with ἐν, σύν, or ὁμοῦ, denote a refer-
ence to something, and a community or companionship, or which (c) are
derived from verbs governing the dative, and express the action of the
verb, (¢) also with the adverbs derived from these adjectives, and with
the verbs which signify, to make like, 6. g.”Opotos Φιλίππῳ, ἀνόμοιος
τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς. Γυναῖκα κοινωνὸν ἀγαθὴν οἴκου οὖσαν ἀντίῤῥοπον
εἶναι τῷ ἀνδρὶ νομίζω (Xen. He. 3,15). Τάχος καὶ ὀργὴ εὐβουλίᾳ
3 , ( ” > Ι > AY /
ἐναντία (Thuc. 3, 42). Kuovous ᾿Αθηναίοις, ἐχθρὸς Λακεδαιμονίοις.
Συγγενής, σύντροφός τινι. ᾿Ασύμφωνον ἑαυτῷ. "Evoyos ταῖς μεγί-
σταις αἰτίαις. ““Ομοροι τοῖς ᾿Αρμενίοις. Ὁμώνυμος ἐμοί. ἸΚύνες ἐπι-
θετικαὶ τοῖς θηρίοις (Xen. Mem. 4, 1, 5). --- ᾿Ακολούθως τοῖς εἰρημένοις.
Εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχειν τινί. Συμφερόντως ἑαυτοῖς. ---- -Ο μοιοῦσθαι τῷ θεῷ.
Rem. 1. The adjectives which denote a correspondency, even when they are
compounded with σύν or ὁμοῦ (e.g. ἀκόλουθος, ἀντίστροφος, ἰσόῤῥοπος, ὁμώνυμος,
σύμφωνος), together with ἐναντίος, often also take the genitive, e.g. συμμαχία
τούτων ἀντίῤῥοπος (Dem. 1. 10, evenly balancing, counterpoising, this). Τεῦκρος
Σαλαμῖνα κατῴκισεν ἐν Κύπρῳ, ὁμώνυμον ποιῆσας τῆς πρότερον αὑτῷ πατρίδος
οὔσης (Isocr, Huag. 18). Τὰ ἐναντία τῶν συμφερόντων συμβουλεύειν. (Rarely
ὅμοιος.) Φίλος, ἐχθρός, πολέμιος, ὅμορος, as substantives are used with the genitive
(even in the superlative: οἱ ἐκείνου ἔχθιστοι, Xen. An. 3, 2, 5). d
Rem. 2. When it is denoted by ὅμοιος, ἴσος, παραπλήσιος, or the adverbs
formed from them, that two subjects (or objects) have something equally or
similarly, that something in them is equal or alike, the regular construction is,
that the subjects are coupled by καί (Ὁμοίαν γνώμην ἔχω καὶ ov), or by a relative
word [ἴσος ὅσοςπερ, παραπλήσιος οἷόςπερ); but by a less exact way of putting it,
the Greeks often have the second subject (or object) in the dative, as governed
by the adjective (or adverb): ὋὉμοίαν γνώμην σοι ἔνω. Τοὺς κακοὺς εὖ ποιῶν
ὅμοια πείσει τοῖς τὰς ἀλλοτρίας κύνας σιτίζουσιν (Isocr. Dem. 29). Οὐ καὶ σὺ τύπτει
τὰς ἴσας πληγὰς ἐμοί; (Arist. Ran. 636. On the accusative, see § 26, ".). Ἐπι-
θυμῶ παραπλησίως σοι ( Pl. Phed. 255). Μέθην καὶ ὕπνον ὁμοίως ἐνέδρᾳ φυλάττομαι
(Xen. Hier. 6, 3, = ὁμοίως καὶ ἐνέδραν). In the same manner, 6 αὐτός, the same,
is constructed: Τὰ αὐτὰ φρονῶ Δημοσθένει (Dem. 18, 304, = ἃ Δημοσθένης). Τὸν
δοῦλον τοῖς αὐτοῖς χαίρειν καὶ ἄχθεοθαι τῷ δεσπότῃ χρή (Pl. Gorg. 510, = οἷς ὁ
δεσπότης χαίρει). Ἔν τῷ αὐτῷ κινδύνῳ τοῖς φαυλοτάτοις αἰωροῦμαι (Thuc. 7, 77).
CHAP: τν.] D 2
[§ 37.]
§ 38.
46)
36 The Dative. [ὁ 38.
(Sometimes even where the same verb cannot be repeated: ᾿Απέθανε Σιτάλκης
ὑπὸ τὰς αὐτὰς ἡμέρας τοῖς ἐπὶ Δηλίῳ, Thue. 4, 101, = ais ἐγένετο τὰ ἐπὶ A.)
Rem. 3. (To ὃ 34—37.) Sometimes the dative is used even with a substantive,
when it is derived from a verb or adjective which has an object of reference in
the dative: Μὴ ἐξαμάρτητε περὶ τὴν τοῦ θεοῦ δόσιν ὑμῖν (Pl. Apol. 30). Zvppayor
ἐγενόμεθα οὐκ ἐπὶ καταδουλώσει τῶν λλήνων τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις (Thue. 3,10). Τὴν
αὑτοῖς ὁμοιότητα τῆς διαγωγῆς ἀεὶ ἕξουσιν (Pl. Theat. 111). ‘O τούτους τοὺς νόμους
λύων τοὺς τῷ γήρᾳ βοηθοὺς λυμαίνεται (Dem. 24, 107, usually τοῦ γήρως).
The dative of reference serves in Greek, in some special cases, to
denote a certain particular way and manner, and a certain sense, in
which the thing predicated takes place for, and in reference to, some
person or some thing.
a) The dative with εἰμί, ὑπάρχω, γίγνομαι denotes the person_for
whom something is or comes to be, 1, 6. who has it or comes to have
it: Νῆες οὐκ εἰσὶν ἡμῖν. Τοιαῦτα ἡμῖν εἰς φιλίαν ὑπάρχει (Xeu.).
(Παρύσατις ἡ μήτηρ ὑπῆρχε τῷ Κύρῳ, φιλοῦσα αὐτὸν μᾶλλον ἢ ᾿Δρ-
ταξέρξην (Xen. An. 1,1, 4, was devotedly attached to), ᾿Ἐκ τῶν δούλων
δώδεκα μναῖ ἑκάστου τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ τῷ πατρὶ ἐγίγνοντο (Dem. 27, 24).
Πόθεν αἱ διαβολαί σοι αὗται γεγόνασιν; (Pl. Apol. 20.) (Οὐδὲν ἐμοὲ
καὶ Φιλίππῳ, I and Ph. have nothing to do with each other. Τί ἐμοὶ
Kal σοί;)
6) The dative stands in statements of the time that has elapsed since a paces
has been in a certain state, or since a certain action: Ἡμέρα ἢν πέμπτη ἐπιπλέουσιν
᾿Αθηναίοις (Xen. Hell. 2,1, 27, it was the fifth day on which the Athenians ; the
Athenians had been five days —). Ἡμέραι μάλιστα ἦσαν τῇ Μιτυλήνῃ éadoxvia
ἑπτά, ὅτ᾽ ἐς To” EpBarov of Λακεδαιμόνιοι κατέπλευσαν (Thuc. 3, 29). (Rarely with-
out a participle subjoined : "Ern ταύτῃ τῇ ναυμαχίᾳ ἑξήκοντα καὶ διακόσιά ἐστι μεχρὶ
τῆς τελευτῆς τοῦδε τοῦ πολέμου, Thuc. 1, 13.)
c) The dative of a participle is used to denote when, or in what situation, some-
thing shows itself (especially when a relation of place is assigned): Τὸ μὲν ἔξωθεν
ἁπτομένῳ σῶμα οὐκ ἄγαν θερμὸν ἦν, τὰ δ᾽ ἐντὸς ἐκαίετο (Thuc. 2, 49). (Ἢ διαβάντι
τὸν ποταμὸν πρὸς ἑσπέραν ὁδὸς ἐπὶ Λυδίαν φέρει, Xen. An. 3, 5, 15, the road to
the west, when you have crossed the river.) Πρὸς εὐδοξίαν καὶ ὠφέλειαν σκοπουμένῳ
ὁ μὲν ἐπαινέτης τοῦ δικαίου ἀληθεύει, ὁ δὲ ψέκτης οὐδὲν ὑγιὲς λέγει, Pl. Rep. 9, 589.
Hence συνελόντι (συντέμνοντι) εἰπεῖν, Co speak it briefly, and simply συνελόντι, with-
out the infinitive, in brief; in short. (On εἰπεῖν, see § 151, R. 1.)
d) The dative of a noun with a participle is used with ἐστίν, to denote a person’s
state of mind upon something (especially of inclination or aversion, βουλομένῳ): TO
πλήθει τῶν Πλαταιέων οὐ βουλομένῳ ἢν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ἀφίστασθαι (Lhuc. 2, 3).
᾿Επανέλθωμεν, ὅθεν ἀπελίπομεν, εἴ σοι ἡδομένῳ ἐστίν (Pl. Phed. 78).
e) Often a dative of reference denotes the person in whom, and 7
whose affairs, and, at the same time, in whose interest, something takes
place; so that, instead of the dative referred to the predicate, we
[PART I.
oie ee tee eile | Oy ee κεῖτ...
§ 39.] The Dative. 37
might have, with only a slight modification of the way of conceiving [ὃ 38.1
the relation, a genitive referred to the subject : Of ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀντεῖχον,
μέχρι οἱ τοξόται εἶχόν Te TA βέλη αὐτοῖς καὶ οἷοί τε ἦσαν χρῆσθαι (Thuc.
3,98). Οἱ Περσῶν νόμοι δοκοῦσιν ἄρχεσθαι τοῦ κοινοῦ ἀγαθοῦ ἔπιμε-
λούμενοι (Legin with the care for the common good) οὐκ ἔνθεν ταῖς
πλείσταις πόλεσιν ἄρχονται (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,25; those of most states, in
most states). (ὋὉ αὐτοέντης ἡμῖν πατρός, Soph. Pl. 272, he that slew our father.)
With a participle added, approximating now and then to the signification of a
double genitive: Ξενοφῶντι διὰ τῆς μεσογαίας πορευομένῳ οἱ ἱππεῖς προκαταθέοντες
ἐντυγχάνουσι πρεσβύταις πορευομένοις ποι (Xen. An. 6,3 (1) 10; on Xenophon's
march, his horsemen fall in with —). Eipyopévots οὖν αὐτοῖς (τοῖς Χίοις) τῆς
θαλάσσης καὶ κατὰ γῆν πορθουμένοις ἐνεχείρησάν τινες πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους ἀγαγεῖν τὴν
πόλιν (ἄπο. 8, 24).
7) The dative of the personal pronouns, especially of the first (248)
person, is added in expressions of surprise and of blame, in demands,
expostulations, and the like, to denote a certain participation, and an
interest in the person speaking, spoken to, or spoken οἵ: σωφροσύνης
dpa οὐ δεήσει ἡμῖν τοῖς νεανίαις ; (Pl. Rep. ὃ, 389.) Τούτῳ πάνυ μοι
προςέχετε τὸν νοῦν (Dem. 18, 1718). [This dat. is called the Dativus
LEthicus. |
g) Sometimes the dative of the agent stands with passive verbs (250)
instead of ὑπό with the genitive; but in prose, for the most part, only
with the perfect and pluperfect (to denote what one has complete and
ready): “A ὑπισχνοῦ ποιήσειν ἀγαθὰ ἡμᾶς, ἀποτετέλεσταί σοι ἤδη (Xen.
Cyr. 8, 2, 16). Τὰ σοὶ πεπραγμένα (Dem. 19, 391). (Twes ἂν ὑμῶν
δικαιότερον πᾶσι τοῖς “Ελλησι μισοῖντο; Thuc. 3, 64.)
As the case which denotes circumstance and appurtenance (Lat. § 39.
ablative), the dative stands, partly by itself, used in different ways, (252,
partly with the prepositions ἐν and σύν, together with ἅμα (which in 254)
prose is used, for the most part, only in definitions of time, ἅμα τῇ ἕῳ, ἅμα τῷ σίτῳ
ἀκμάζοντι), and with other prepositions (ἀμφί, ἐπί [μετά], παρά, περί,
πρός, ὑπό) in certain significations which arise out of the signification
on, at, by: Βάλλειν twa λίθοις, ξίφει, ὠθεῖν τινα ταῖς χερσίν (ἐν χειρί,
διὰ χειρῶν ἔχειν τι), φαρμάκῳ ἀποθνήσκειν, γιγνώσκειν τινὰ τῇ σκευῇ
(Thuc. 1, 8), πολέμῳ χώραν προςκτᾶσθαι, καταπλήττειν τοὺς ἄλλους
τῷ ἀξιώματι, ἐκπεπλῆχθαι ταῖς συμφοραῖς, τιμᾶν (κοσμεῖν) τινα
στεφάνοις, ζημιοῦν τινα θανάτῳ, φυγῇ. χρήμασιν (in money), ἀνηκέστῳ
πονηρίᾳ νοσεῖν (Xen. Mem. 3, 5, 18, of, with), οἰκίαι κατεσκευασμέναι
χαλκώμασι παμπόλλοις (provided with), κέρδει καὶ πλούτῳ κρίνειν TL
(Pi. Rep. 9, 582, judge by, according to). Δέχεσθαί τινα πόλει, in the
city (usually εἰς πόλιν, into the city).
Rem. Διά with the genitive denotes the more remote means, by means of:
CHAP. IV.]
§ 40.
(25
neo
aN
- Ὁ
un
2
Ὁ)
“I
)
38 The Dative. [ὃ 40—42.
oceasion, source, etc. (ἐκ τοιᾶςδε προφάσεως, ἐξ ἁπάντων τούτων ἄχθεσθαι, Pl. Rep. 8,
549, ἐξ εὐεργεσιῶν εὐμενῶς διατίθεσθαί τινι, Isocr. Paneg. 28). In certain connexions
sometimes ἐν, 77, i. 6. by, of the distinctive mark by which any thing is recognized :
Ὅτι οἱ θεοί σε εὐμενῶς πέμπουσι, καὶ ἐν ἱεροῖς δῆλον Kal ἐν οὐρανίοις σημείοις (Xen.
Cyr. 1, 0, 2). (Ὁρῶν ἐν ὀφθαλμοῖς, to see before one’s eyes, etc.)
The dative denotes the side, aspect, regard or property, om and 7a
which the predicate shows itself, the notion to which it refers: Téves
“Ἕλλην, φύσει κακός, ἡλικίᾳ νέος, ὑπερβάλλειν (προέχειν, διαφέρειν)
ἀρετῇ, φρονήσει, πλήθει. μεγέθει, πλεονεκτεῖν τινος τιμαῖς καὶ χρήμασιν
(Xew. An. 3,1, 37). "Epyw, τῷ ὄντι, λόγῳ, τῇ ἀληθείᾳ, in deed, im
reality, in word, in truth. To πράττειν τοῦ λέγειν ὕστερον ὃν τῇ τάξει,
πρότερον τῇ δυνάμει ἐστίν (Dem. 3,15). Ναυσὶ καὶ πεζῷ νικᾶσθαι.
Σώμασιν ἰσχύειν. Βλάπτεσθαι τῷ βελτίστῳ τοῦ ὁπλιτικοῦ (Thue.4,73;
to suffer loss in the best part, the flower, of —).
Rem. To denote a part of the subject_itself, the accusative is used, ὃ 31, In
certain general notions to which a term predicated of the subject refers, both cases
are used, partly without any distinction, e. g. πόλις μεγάλη, Θάψακος ὀνόματι and
ὄνομα Θ.; γένει Ἕλλην and τὸ γένος “E. (with the article; but also Κορίνθιος γένος,
Thuc. 1, 24), partly with a slight distinction, 6. g. δισχίλιοι τὸ πλῆθος, but διαφέρειν
(ὑπερβάλλειν, etc.) πλήθει, φύσει ἀγαθός, by nature, naturally, ἀμβλύτερος τὴν
φύσιν, duller in natural gifts; of duller nature or capacity.
The dative denotes the efficient cause from or through which any
thing is done: ᾿Αγνοίᾳ ἁμαρτάνειν, φόβῳ (εὐνοίᾳ) τὰ προςτεταγμένα
\
ποιεῖν. Μέλητος τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην ὕβρει τινὶ καὶ ἀκολασίᾳ καὶ
νεότητι γράψασθαι δοκεῖ (Ρί. Apol. 26).
Rem. The moving cause, or that on account of which any thing is done, is
denoted by διά with the accusative; sometimes, however, the dative approximates
to this signification : Δημοσθένης τοῖς πεπραγμένοις ἐφοβεῖτο τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους (Thue.
3,98). (YP ἡδονῆς, for pleasure, for joy, 6. g. γελᾶν.)
The dative is sometimes used to denote the manner and the accom-
papying circumstance (with): Ilavti τρόπῳ πειρᾶσθαι (also πάντα
, ζ > , ,
τρόπον, § 90, d), ovdert κόσμῳ εἰςπίπτειν (Thuc. 7, 84), βίᾳ εςιέναι,
a fal ΕῚ c a > A ’
κραυγῇ πολλῇ ἐπιέναι (Xen. An.1, 7,4). (Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀτέλει τῇ νίκῃ
5 \ / / ᾽ , > . . .
ἀπὸ Μιλήτου ἀνέστησαν, Thuc. 8, 27; with the victory incomplete.)
Rem. 1. Usually, however, it is only of some particular substantives that the
simple dative is thus used, adverbially, 6. g. δρόμῳ, at a run, at full speed, κύκλῳ,
[PART I,
§ 43—45.] The Dative. 39
round about, ὀργῇ διώκειν, θυμῷ φέρειν τι, σιγῇ ἀκούειν, (σπουδῇ). Otherwise σύν or [§ 42.]
μετά is used, e.g. σὺν δίκη, μετὰ δίκης, and with addition of an adjective, pera
πολλῆς ἀκριβείας (ἀκριβῶς). (With joy, joyfully, ἡδέως, ἀσμένως, etc.)
Rem. 2. To this use of the dative belong also the datives of feminine adjectives
and pronouns, with a substantive notion understood (such as ὁδῷ, or the like), used
as adverbs of manner, 6. g. δημοσίᾳ, ἰδίᾳ, πεζῇ, ταύτῃ, ἐκείνῃ, 7, πῆ, etc,
Rem. 3. The military or naval force with which a movement or enterprise is
conducted, is often put in the dative without a preposition: ᾿Αφικνεῖσθαι εἴκοσι ναυσί.
πολλῷ στύλῳ, χειρὶ πολλῇ. ᾿Αθηναῖοι δισχιλίοις ὁπλίταις ἑαυτῶν καὶ ἱππεῦσι διακο-
σίοις ἐστράτευσαν ἐπὶ Χαλκιδέας (Thue. 2,79). Μνάσιππος κατεστρατοπεδεύσατο
τῷ πεζῷ ἐπὶ λόφῳ ἀπέχοντι τῆς πόλεως ὡς πέντε στάδια (Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 7). But
σύν may be prefixed: Βασιλεὺς σὺν στρατεύματε πολλῷ προςέρχεται (Xen. An. 1,
8, 1). (Suv is also omitted from the dative with αὐτός in the sense, with — self
and all; together with: Ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι πέντε ναῦς ἔλαβον καὶ μίαν τούτων αὐτοῖς
ἀνδράσιν, Thuc. 4,14; men and all, 1. 6. with its crew.)
With comparatives, and with πρό and werd, the measure Jy how § 43.
much something is greater or less, earlier or later, is put in the (270)
dative: Τέτταρσι μναῖς ἔλαττον. ἸΠολλαῖς γενεαῖς ὕστερα τῶν 'ρωι-
κῶν. Δέκα ἔτεσι πρὸ τῆς ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχίας. (Π]ολλῷ, μακρῷ,
ὀλίγω, βραχεῖ, μικρῷ μείζων, ὀλίγῳ τινὶ ἐλάττων. TO παντὶ κρείττων,
infinitely better. 'Τοσούτῳ κρείττων, ὅσῳ πρεσβύτερος.) (Μακρῷ ἄρι-
στος, with the superlative. Πολλῷ προὔλαβον, Thuc. 7, 80, had greatly the advantage.)
Rem. But we also find πολὺ and ὀλίγον (πολὺ μείζων), and always (when no
substantive is added) τί and οὐδέν (μᾶλλόν τι. οὐδὲν μᾶλλον). (Τοσούτῳ δεινότερος,
ὅσῳ καὶ ψεύδεσθαι τολμᾷ, without comparative in the second member: so much
worse, as —.)
a) Verbs which denote an affection of the mind, αὐ and Jecause of § 44.
something, take this object in the dative: thus ἥδομαι, χαίρω, ἄχθο- (264)
μαι, ἀθυμῶ, ἀγάλλομαι, ἐπαίρομαι : "Άχθομαι τοῖς παροῦσιν, τοῖς γεγε-
νημένοις. ᾿Επαιρόμενος ἢ πλούτῳ ἢ ἰσχύϊ ἢ ἄλλῳ τῷ τοιούτῳ (Pl. Rep.
4, 434). But ἐπί is also added: Ἐπὶ τῇ τῶν ᾿Αρκαδίων τύχῃ οὐχ
ἧττον τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων ἥσθησαν οἱ Θηβαῖοι (Xen. Hell. 7, 1, 32).
Rem. Some verbs most frequently take ἐπί (χαίρω), with others it is rare (ἐπαί-
ρομαι). The dative is also found with ἀγαπᾶν and στέργειν, e.g. στέργειν τῇ
ἑαυτοῦ τύχῃ (Pl. Hipp. Maj. 295); but usually the accusative, e. g. στέργειν τὰ
παρόντα. We also find βαρέως (χαλεπῶς) φέρειν τί, ἐπί τινι.
ine, govern the dative: Σωματοφύλαξι χρῶνται βαρβάροις. Χρῶμαί
τινι φίλῳ. Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀγῶσι καὶ θυσίαις διετησίοις ἐνόμιζον (Lhuc.
2, 38).
a) The dative serves to mark the time at which (whew) a thing § 45.
takes place, when a definite point of time (day, night, month, year), (276)
or a festival is assigned (and with ὥρᾳ, 6. g. χειμῶνος dpa): Τῇ αὐτῇ
CHAP. IV. |
b) The verb χρῶμαι, vse, and νομίζω, when it_has_ the same mean- (265)
40 The Genitive. [ὁ 46.
[$ 45-1] ἡμέρᾳ (ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ) ἀπέθανεν. Τῷ τρίτῳ ἔτει οἴκαδε ἀπέπλευσα. Τῇ
ὑστεραίᾳ ὁ Κῦρος τὸ στράτευμα ἀνέπαυεν (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 39). Τοῖς
Παναθηναίοις, τοῖς Διονυσίοις, at [the festival of | the Panathenea, the
Dionysia. (Τῇ νουμηνίᾳ, ταῖς πομπαῖς.) With other words ἐν is added:
Ἔν τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ, ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ. EV τῷ παρόντι; ἐν τῷ τότε,
sometimes also with the words above named: ἐν τῇδε τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, ἐν τῷ
Θαργηλιῶνι μηνί (Dem. 49, 60). (The omission of ἐν is very rare with
words which in themselves do not denote a point of time but an event, e.g. Ἐς τὸ
πεδίον ᾿Δρχίδαμος ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἐσβολῇ οὐ κατέβη, in that invasion. Thue. 2, 20.)
Rem. On the genitive in notes of time, see § 66.
6) To denote the place where a thing takes place, the poets sometimes use the
dative without ἐν, 6. g. ἀγμοῖς τυγχάνειν (Soph. Pl. 313). ἊἙτέοκλος πλείστας
τιμὰς ἔσχεν ᾿Δργείᾳ χθονί (Hur, Suppl. 874), especially of names of cities, 6. g.
Δωδῶνι, Μυκήναις. In prose the name of the city is thus put: Μαραθῶνι (Mapa-
θῶνι καὶ Σαλαμῖνι καὶ Πλαταιαῖς, Pl. Menex. 245), and besides, the adverbial forms
derived from the ancient dative plural, in the sense at the place, 8. σ. ᾿Αθήνησι,
Πλαταιᾶσιν ; see the Accidence. (Ὀλυμπίασι καὶ Δελφοῖς, Thuc. 1, 143.) (So too
Σφηττοῖ, Ἰσθμοῖ, vot.)
Rem. (To ὃ 39 seqq.) A dative, denoting circumstance or appurtenance, may
sometimes be attached to an individual substantive, instead of to the predicate, 6. g.
ὁ γόνῳ πατήρ (Lys. 13, 91); sometimes even without the article: Ἱπποθάλης
λέγει περὶ τῶν προγόνων Λύσιδος πλούτους Te Kal ἱπποτροφίας καὶ νίκας Πυθοῖ καὶ
Ἰσθμοῖ τεθρίπποις τε καὶ κέλησιν (Pl. Lys. 205).
ΘΗ Εν:
Genttive.
THE genitive in Greek denotes, in general, a connexion of depend-
ence between the person or thing which is named in the genitive,
and some other person or thing which is referred to it. The con-
nexion 15 either immediate, between two substantives, one of which is
detined by the other; or it appears in this, that something is referred
to some other thing through an action or quality which goes to, is
directed at, and exerted towards, or enters into, that other; or in this,
that something is ranged under some other thing as the whole, of
which it is the part. Further, the genitive denotes a parting from,
and a going out from something, because this supposes a previously
existing connexion ἡ.
* This latter sense is not possessed by the Latin genitive, where the ablative is
used in this way with prepositions, adjectives, and verbs. The use of the genitive
' to denote a connexion or hanging together, as the result of an action which aims at
[PART I.
.
ὃ 47, 48.] ᾿ The Genitive. 41
In the genitive is put with a substantive the name of the person § 47.
or thing which possesses what the substantive denotes; the person (280)
or thing to which it belongs, and by which therefore it can be
denominated and designated (genitive of connexion and possession) :
Υἱὸς Δαρείου. Κῆποι ᾿Επικούρου. Οἰκέτης Δημοσθένους. Φύλαξ
πόλεως. Σύγγραμμα Πλάτωνος. Ἔργον Πραξιτέλου. “H τῶν
πολεμίων τροπή. Τὸ γένος τῶν ἀνθρώπων. Μισθὸς τεττάρων μηνῶν.
᾿Αριθμὸς πεντακισχιλίων ἐτῶν (Pl. Tim. 23; an amount of —).
Κλήρωσις ἀρχῶν. Αἱ τῶν νεῶν τιμαί (honours which the young enjoy, or
which they show). At τῶν κακῶν συνουσίαι (bad men’s society, intercourse
with bad men). (Ὁ τῆς ἡσυχίας βίοτος, Hur. Bacch. 388, poetical.)
“Ἑκάστου [τούτων τῶν μαθημάτων] ὄργανόν τι ψυχῆς ἐκκαθαίρεται (Pl.
Rep. 7, 527. In the case of each). Ἐϊναί τινος, γίγνεσθαί τινος. Ὃ (289)
λόγος Δημοσθένους ἐστίν (is D.s’s, νομίζεται, is ascribed to D.). Bipt
Ths πόλεως καὶ τῶν τὰ βέλτιστα λεγόντων (Isocr. de Pac. 129. 1
belong to—). Ἑναι τῶν ἐπιτιθεμένων (ί. Pol. 307, to be the prey of —,
at the mercy of —). Oi Πέρσαι τὴν ᾿Ασίαν ἑαυτῶν ποιοῦνται (Xen.
Ages. 1, 33). (Oi Πελοποννήσιοι δύο καὶ εἴκοσι ναῦς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων
ἔλαβον, Thuc. 8,95, two and twenty ships of the Athenians, Athenian
ships.) :
Rem. 1. The usual way of describing the son of such a man, is to put the father’s
name in the genitive without vids: Aéapyos Καλλιμάχου and A. ὁ Καλλιμάχου.
(See the Article, § 13, a. R.) (Τὴν Σμικυθίωνος οὐχ ὁρᾷς Μελιστίχην; Arist. Keel.
46, ΤΠ. the wife of Sm.)
Rem. 2. The prepositions ἐν and ἐς (sometimes ἐξ) in the language of common
life, and in imitations of it, often stand before a genitive with omission of the
governing substantive οἰκία (also ἱερόν) : Περικλῆς Κλεινίαν καταθέμενος ἐν ᾿Αρί-
ῴρονος ἐπαίδευεν (Pl. Prot. 320, placed him in A.’s house). Μανθάνειν ἐν κιθαριστοῦ
(Pl. Theat. 206, at a Sh ΠΡ ΝΟΣ Πότερον τὸ παρὰ σοὶ ὕδωρ θερμότερον πιεῖν
ἐστιν ἢ τὸ ἐν ᾿Ασκληπιοῦ ; (Xen. Mem. 3, 13,3.) Ἐν “Αἰδου. Σωκράτης ἔφη ἰέναι
ἐπὶ δεῖπνον εἰς ᾿Αγάθωνος (Pl. δγηιρ. 174). Φοιτᾶν ἐς διδασκάλου (διδασκάλων),
to attend such a master; πέμπειν εἰς διδασκάλων (PI. Prot. 326). Eisnd@ov
οἴκαδε ἐς ἐμαυτοῦ (Pl. Hipp. Maj. 304). Ἔς Διδου. (Ex διδασκάλων ἀπαλλάτ-
τεσθαι, Pl. Prot. 326, to leave school.)
_Rem. 3. On the genitive under the government of the article, see § 14, c. (A
εἶχον ἀλλήλων, Thuc. 5, 39, what they had of one gnother's, belonging to one
another ; ὁπόσα ἀλλήλων εἶχον, Thuc. 5, 80.)
The genitive is put, as objective genitive, to transitive substantives, § 48.
i.e. such as are derived from transitive verbs, or from verbs or (281)
adjectives which govern the genitive, and such as denote a capacity,
something and enters into it, is in Latin much more circumscribed, especially in}
verbs, so that in this regard also the Greek genitive is much more comprehensive
than the Latin.
_ CHAP. v.]
[§ 48.]
42 The Genitive. [$ 49.
an opportunity, an influence, for and upon something : "Epws (Apa-
oma ἐνέπεσε) τῆς γυναικός. Φόβος τῶν πολεμίων, fear of (1.e. the
being afraid of) the enemies; ὁ τῶν πολεμίων φόβος, the enemy's fear
(of something), 07 (some one’s) fear of the enemy. ἸΠόθος τοῦ ἀπο-
θανόντος. Διὰ Παυσανίου μῖσος (Thuc. 1,96; out of hatred towards
P.). Διδάσκαλος λόγων (= ὁ λόγους διδάσκων). ᾿Επιθυμία χρημά-
των. ᾿πιμέλεια τῶν πραγμάτων. ᾿Αμέλεια γονέων. ᾿Ηγεμονία τῆς
“Ἑλλάδος. Τραφὴ φόνου (γράφεσθαι φόνου). ᾿Εμπειρία τῶν πολεμι-
κῶν. ~Eyxpateva ἡδονῆς καὶ λύπης. Εἰρήνη καὶ ἐλευθερία τῶν τοιού-
των (Pl. Rep. 1, 829; freedom from —). ᾿Αγγείων ἀπορίᾳ (Thue.
4, 4, from lack of vessels). ᾿Αφορμὴν (ἀδειαν) διδόναι τινὶ τοῦ λοιδο-
ῥεῖσθαι. ᾿Αφορμὴ ἔργων (Xen. Mem. 2, 7, 11, as a means of setting
about a work).
Rem. Sometimes an objective genitive is even used with substantives derived
from verbs or adjectives which take a dative or a preposition (especially πρός, eis,
towards) : but it any obscurity might result from the use of the genitive, a prepo-
sition is used: "Eupovy τοῦ κακοῦ (Pl. Gorg. 479, from ἐμμένειν τῷ κακῷ). Πρόβλημα
χειμόνων (Pl. Tim.74, a protection against). ᾿Επικούρημα τῆς χιόνος (Xen. An. 4, 5,
13, also πρός). Οὐ λόγων τοὺς ἀγῶνας προτίθεμεν ἀλλ᾽ ἔργων (Thuc.3, 67). Δῆλον
ἐγένετο. ὅτι οὐ τῆς τῶν “Ἑλλήνων εὐνοίας ἕνεκα 6 ἡγεμὼν ἔλθοι (Xen. An. 4, 7, 20).
Δημοσθένους φιλίᾳ καὶ ᾿Αθηναίων εὐνοίᾳ (Thuc.7,57 ; out of friendship for D., and
goodwill towards the A.). “Havxia ἐχθρῶν (Pl. Rep. 8,566, repose from—). Some-
times the genitive is used even more harshly, instead of περί or a preposition of
place: Τὸ τῶν Μεγαρέων ψήφισμα (Thue, 1, 140). Ἢ τοῦ πηλοῦ ἐρώτησις (PI.
Theat. 147). Μετὰ τὴν τῆς Αἰτωλίας ξυμφοράν (Thue. 3, 114, = τὴν ἐν τῇ Δίτω-
Na). ᾿Απόστασις τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων (Thuc. 8,5, = ἀπὸ τῶν ᾽Αθ.).
a) In the genitive (g. definitivus) is sometimes added that in which the generic
notion expressed by the governing word is in a special manner contained and
denominated (but usually only the genitive of an infinitive): “H τοῦ χαίρειν διά-
θεσις (Pl. Phil. 11, the affection, or mood, of rejoicing), ἣ τοῦ πείθειν τέχνη (Pl. Phil.
58). ᾿Αμαθία αὕτη ἡ ἐπονείδιστος ἡ τοῦ οἴεσθαι εἰδέναι, ἃ οὐκ οἶδεν (Pl. Apol. 29,
that of conceiting oneself to know ---) 1.
6) The genitive with words signifying a measure, number, or
quantity, denotes the kind, the thing measured or numbered (g. gene-
ris): Πλῆθος ἀνθρώπων od σμικρόν, βοῶν ἀγέλη, οἴνου δέκα ἀμφορεῖς,
μέδιμνος σίτου, ἅμαξαι σίτου (Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 18, wagon-loads of corn),
τριάκοντα μυριάδες στρατιᾶς (Xen. An. 1, 4, 5), τριακόσια τάλαντα
φόρου (Thuc. 2, 13, in taxes). "Hv τι στασιασμοῦ ἐν τῇ πόλει (Thue.
4, 130). (Rarely with a neuter adjective as substantive : ᾿Αμήχανον
1 πὸ ὄνομα ὁ Μακάρτατος, the name ΠΥ. (Dem. 43,77). Τὸ τοῦ πατρὸς ἐμοῦ ὄνομα
Σωσίαν τῷ υἱῷ ἐθέμην (Dem. 48, 74). (In apposition, not in the genitive. Very
rarely τῷ ὄρει τῆς Ἰστώνης, Thuc. 4, 46, instead of τῷ ὄρει τῇ Ἰστώνῃ, see in § 19, KR.
Ἰλίου πτολίεθρον, poetic.)
[PART I.
§ 50.] The Genitive. 43
εὐδαιμονίας, Pl. Apol. 41; something inconcewably great in the way [3 49-]
of blessedness ; inconceivable happiness. ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐπὶ μέγα ἐχώρησαν
δυνάμεως, Thuc. 1, 118. Ἐπὶ πλεῖστον ἀνθρώπων, Thuc. 1,1.) (“Ares
τούτων.)
Rem. 1. Especially we may remark the expression ἐν παντὶ κακοῦ (ἀθυμίας, etc.)
εἶναι (ἐς πᾶν κακοῦ ἀφικνεῖσθαι).
Rem. 2. In like manner, a genitive is appended to adverbs (especially πῶς, ὡς,
and ὅπως. ὡςαύτως, εὖ, καλῶς, κακῶς, ἱκανῶς) with the verb ἔχω, in the sense am
qualified, disposed, provided, in regard of — find myself in point of —, have a
certain measure of —: Πῶς ἔχεις δόξης τοῦ τοιοῦδε πέρι; (Pl. Rep. 5, 456.)
Πελοποννήσιοι ἔπλεον, ὡς εἶχε τάχους ἕκαστος (Thue. 2, 90). ἾΔρ᾽ οὖν οὗτος ἱκανῶς
ἐπιστήμης ἕξει; (Pl. Phil. 02.) Συμμέτρως λεπτότητος ἔχειν καὶ πάχους (Pl. Tim.
85). (Ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον, as fast as my legs would carry me, τάχιστα, Hdt. 6, 116.)
(Ἡ Κέρκυρα τῆς ᾿Ιταλίας καὶ Σικελίας καλῶς παράπλου κεῖται, Thuc. 1, 36; lies
exceedingly well for the voyage to S.) In Hat. and the poets also, Πῶς ἀγῶνος
ἥκομεν ; εὖ ἥκειν χρημάτων, etc. (always without article.)
a) The genitive stands with words which denote a part of some- ᾧ 50.
thing, in order to assign the whole (g. partitivus). In this manner (284)
the genitive is governed by substantives and words used substantively,
(pronouns, numerals, adjectives, and participles with the article, the
article with an adverb or with a preposition and its case), by super-
latives and by verbs involving the signification of the superlative :
Μέρος τι (τὰ δύο μέρη) τῆς στρατιᾶς. Τῶν γερόντων τις. Ἔν ἐνίαις
τῶν πόλεων. Τῶν πολιτῶν οἱ μὲν ἀπώλοντο, οἱ δὲ ἔφυγον. Δέκα
(πολλοὶ) τῶν στρατιωτῶν. ὋὉ τέταρτος τῶν παίδων. Οἱ δεινότατον
τῶν ῥητόρων. Τὰ καλὰ τῶν ζώων, οἱ σπουδαῖοι τῶν γονέων (Lsocr.
Dem, 11). Οἱ χρηστοὶ τῶν ἀνθρώπων (Arist. Pl. 490). "Eri πολὺ
τῆς χώρας (Thue. 4, ὃ, over a great part of the land). ᾿Αθηναίων ὁ
βουλόμενος. Ὅ,τι περ ὄφελος ἣν τοῦ στρατεύματος (Xen. Hell. ὅ,
8, 6). Τὸ καταντικρὺ αὐτῶν τοῦ σπηλαίου (Pl. Rep. 7, 515, the part
of the cavern facing them). Oi πολλοὶ χαίρουσι καὶ τῶν ἐδεσμάτων
καὶ τῶν ἐπιτηδευμάτων τοῖς καὶ τὸ σῶμα καὶ τὴν ψυχὴν βλάπτουσιν
(Isocr. Pac. 109). Σύμβουλος ἀγαθὸς χρησιμώτατον ἁπάντων τῶν
κτημάτων ἐστίν (Isocr. Nicocl. ὅ8). Μόνος πάντων φρονεῖς. ᾿᾽Ορ-
θότατα ἀνθρώπων λέγεις (Pl. Theat. 195). “H ναῦς ἄριστα ἔπλει παν-
τὸς τοῦ στρατοπέδου (Lys. 31, 6). Οἱ παλαιότατοι τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πρό-
γονοι τῶν καθ᾽ ἑαυτοὺς ἀνθρώπων ἠρίστευσαν (Xen. Mem. 3, 5, 10).—
Τῷ ὁρῶμεν ἡμῶν αὐτῶν τὰ ὁρώμενα; (Pl. Rep. 6, 507; with what
part of ourselves —?) Ἔν τοιούτῳ τῆς οἰκίας, ὅπου πλειστάκις ὁ
δεσπότης ὄψεται (Xen. Hipp. 4,1; in such a part of the house —). Οἱ
᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐν τούτῳ παρασκευῆς ἦσαν (Thuc. 2, 11).---Εἰς τοῦτό τινες
ἀνοίας ἐληλύθασιν (Isocr. Pac. 81). Eis τοσοῦτο ἀμαθίας ἥκω (Pl.
Apol. 25).
CHAP. V.]
[§ 50.]'
§ 51.
(284,
Ro)
44 The Genitive. [ὃ 51.
Rem. 1. We must note the different positions of the words, when the partitive
genitive is governed by a par ticiple with the article which has with it other defini-
tions (case, ‘adver bs, ete.) : Οἱ ᾿Αρκάδων ἡ ἡμέτεροι ὄντες ξύμμαχοι (Thue. 5, 64, those
of the Are. who —). Αἱ ἄριστα τῶν νεῶν TEova'a(Thuc. 1,48). Οἱ ξυμπροθυμης
θέντες τῶν ῥητόρων τὸν ἔκπλουν (Thue. ὃ, 1).
Rem. 2. With numbers or words of number (μόνος, ὀλίγοι) now and then ἀπό,
ἐξ are added! especially to denote that which is drawn off from, or remains : “Ayvev
ἀπὸ τετρακισχιλίων ὁπλιτῶν χιλίους καὶ πεντήκοντα τῇ νόσῳ ἀπώλεσεν (Thue. 2, 58).
Ἔκ τριῶν ἕν ἂν εἱλόμην (Soph. Tr. 734, I should have chosen one of three).
Rea. 3. Instead of the neuter singular of an adjective denoting magnitude
(πολύς, etc.), or a certain part (6. g. ἥμισυς, λοιπός) with a partitive g genitive, in Greek
the adjective often takes the gender of the genitive: Ὃ ἥμισυς, ὁλοιπὸς τοῦ χρόνου.
Εὐκτήμων ἐβίω ἔτη ἕξ καὶ ἐνενήκοντα, τούτου δὲ τοῦ χρόνου τὸν πλεῖστον ἐδόκει
εὐδαίμων εἶναι (Ise. 6, 18). Κῦρος κατενόει πολλὴν τῆς χώρας τοῖς ᾿Αρμενίοις
ἔρημον καὶ ἀργὸν οὖσαν διὰ τὸν πόλεμον (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2, 2). (Rarely with other
adjectives: Τῆς γῆς ἡ ἀρίστη, Thue. 1, 2.)
Rem. 4. Sometimes a general subject (or object) is put first, and then instead
of the partitive genitive, we have, by way of apposition, a partition with pronouns
or words of number (e. g. οἱ μὲν ---- οἱ δέ, etc.) or a limitation (οἱ πολλοί, partly —,
partly —, for the most part) : Oi τῇ φιλοσοφίᾳ μεμφόμενοι λέγουσι. ὅτι οἱ ξυνόντες
αὐτῇ οἱ μὲν οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι, οἱ δὲ πολλοὶ πολλῶν κακῶν ἄξιοί εἰσιν (Pl. Rep. 6, 495).
Οἶδα ἀδελφούς, of τὰ ἴσα λαχόντες 6 μὲν αὐτῶν τἀρκοῦντα ἔχει, ὁ δὲ τοῦ παντὸς
ἐνδεῖται (Xen. Conv. 4, 35). Πελοποννήσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι, τὰ δύο μέρη, ἐνέβαλον
ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικήν (Thue. 2 , 47). Oi ἐναντίοι τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις δεξιὸν μὲν κέρας οἱ
Μαντινεῖς εἶχον, παρὰ δ᾽ αὐτοῖς οἱ ξύμμαχοι ᾿Αρκάδων ἦσαν, ἔπειτα ᾿Αργείων οἱ χίλιοι
λογάδες (Thuc. 5, 67). Cf. § 5, ἕκαστος and ἄλλος ἄλλο.
ὦ) A partitive genitive is also governed by an adverb of place or time,
denoting a point in and of the whole: ᾿Εξάγγελλε τοῖς πολεμίοις, ἡμᾶς
παρασκευάξεσθαι ἐμβαλεῖν που τῆς ἐκείνων χώρας (Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 42).
Οὐκ οἶσθα, ὅπου γῆς εἶ (Pi. Rep. 3, 403). Πανταχοῦ τῆς γῆς, οὐδαμοῦ
γῆς. (Οὐ βλέπεις, ἵν᾿ εἶ κακοῦ. Soph. Ed. R. 413) "Αλλοι ἄλλῃ
τῆς πόλεως ἀπώλλυντο (Thuc. 2, 4). Οἱ ἄλλοι, ὅσοι ἐνταῦθα ἦλθον
ἡλικίας (Pl. Rep. 1, 329). Οἱ ἄνω τοῦ γένους (Pl. Legg. 9, 378, those
higher up in the race, 1. 6. the ancestors), ἐγγύτατα γένους (Isa. 8, 64).
oppo σοφίας ἐλαύνειν (Pl. Luthyphr. 4, a long way into —). Iloppa
TOV νυκτῶν, πρωὶ τῆς ἡμέρας, ὀψὲ τῆς ὥρας. Τ]ηνίκα τῆς ἡμέρας ;
(Arist. Aves 1498 ; at what time of day ἢ
A partitive genitive not unfrequently stands in Greek without an
expressly governing word, in the following cases :
a) When to an indefinite substantive (w ithout article) there i is added the mention
of a special sort, by an Sana: or participle: Ἔρχεται ὀρχηστρὶς τῶν τὰ θαύματα
δυναμένων. ποιεῖν (Xen. Symp. 2,1, α dancing-girl, of those who = Παταγύας, ἀνὴρ
Πέρσης τῶν ἀμφὶ Κῦρον πιστῶν (Xen. An.1,8,1. Similarly: ᾿Ανὴρ τῶν ῥητόρων,
Arist. ἔφ. 4235. Λνδρες τῶν φυλάκων, Thuc. 6. 48. ᾿Ανήρ almost merely = τίς).
6) When to the whole expressed in the genitive there is immediately annexed the
[PART I.
δ᾽ 51.] The Genitive. 45
special name of the individual (not a general class-notion) : Τῆς ᾿Ιταλίας Λοκροὶ μὲν [8 51.]
Συρακουσίων ἦσαν, Ῥηγῖνοι δέ, κατὰ τὸ ξυγγενές, Λεοντίνων (Thuc. 3, 86, of Italy, in
It., of the Italian cities). Οἱ Δωριῆς ἡμῶν (Thue. 4, 61, = οἱ Δωριῆς ὄντες ἡμῶν).
Λακεδαιμόνιοι τῶν περιοίκων (Thue. 4, 53, Lac. of the class of the Perieci). Espe-
cially in this manner is used the genitive of a country (a place) with the name of a
single point in it: Παραλαβόντες Βοιωτοὺς καὶ Φωκέας ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐστράτευσαν τῆς
Θεσσαλίας ἐπὶ Φάρσαλον (Thue. 1, 111, to Ph.in Th.). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὡρμίσαντο τῆς
Χεῤῥονήσου ev ᾿Ἐλεοῦντι (Xen. Hell. 2, 1,10). (The genitive here has always the
article, the governing word never, the place in itself less known being referred to
the well-known country.)
c) With the verbs εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, to be, become, one of — (1. 8.
to belong to—), and after all verbs denoting the being in one or
another way received into a class, counting or being counted with a
class. But with εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι, and sometimes with other verbs, εἷς
may be prefixed to the genitive, e. g. Κριτίας τῶν τριάκοντα ἣν (Xen.
Mem. 1, 2,31, one of the thirty tyrants). Τῶν ᾿Αλκμαιονιδῶν εἶναι (Dem.
21, 144). ἜἘ ξῆν Ev«pares τῶν τριάκοντα γενέσθαι (Lys.18, 8). ἔστι
τῶν αἰσχρῶν, μᾶλλον δὲ τῶν αἰσχίστων τοὺς ξυμμάχους φαίνεσθαι
προδιδόντα (Dem. 2,2. So ἔστι τῶν λυσιτελούντων, τῶν ἀδίκων, τῶν
καλῶν, nearly = αἰσχρόν, ἄδικον, etc.). But αἶξο [ἔστιν ἕν τῶν αἰσχρῶν,
Tsocr. Arch. 97; ἔστι τῶν φαύλων τι, Pl. Rep. 10, 603; ἕν τε τῶν αἰσχρῶν
ἐστιν, Dem. 20,135. Τῶν εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἀνηλωκότων τὴν οὐσίαν εἷς
ἐγὼ φανήσομαι γεγενημένος (1506). Call. 62). Ὃ Θράσυλος τῶν ἐν
Σικελίᾳ κατελέγη τριηράρχων (|5ώ. 7,5). Σόλων τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφιστῶν ἐκλήθη
(Isocr. Antid. 255). Τράφε με τῶν ἱππεύειν ἐπιθυμούντων (Xen. Cyr. 4, 3, 21). Καὶ
ἐμὲ θὲς τῶν πεπεισμένων (PL. Rep. 4, 424). Οὐδαμοῦ πώποτε Μειδίας τῶν συγχαιρόν-
των ἐξητάσθη τῷ δήμῳ (Dem. 21, 202). Also: Αἰσχίνης τῶν ἐχθρῶν τῶν σῶν εἷς
ἐξητάζετο (Dem. 19, 291). Μειδίας εὔχετο μὴ λαχεῖν τῶν ἐξιόντων (Dem. 21, 133, =
’
στρατευσομενων).
d) With verbs which otherwise govern the accusative (especially in
the sense give or fake), when a certain indefinite portion (somewhat,
some) of a whole is denoted as their object (as in English : (0 eat of this
or that) : Πολὺ μᾶλλον ὑμῖν προςήκει τῶν ὑμετέρων ἐμοὶ διδόναι ἢ τῶν
ἐμῶν ἐμοὶ ἀμφιςβητῆσαι (Lys. 21, 10). ὋὉ Κυαξάρης λαβὼν τῶν
ἐῤῥωμένων ἵππων τε καὶ ἀνδρῶν προςελαύνει (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 30). Ὁ
Κῦρος ἔταξε Τλοῦν καὶ ἸΠίγρητα, λαβόντας τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ στρατοῦ,
συνεκβιβάζειν τὰς ἁμάξας (Xen. An. 1, ὅ, 1). “Ὅσοι ἔφαγον τῶν κηρίων,
πάντες ἄφρονες ἐγίγνοντο (Xen, An. 4, 8, 20, ate of the honeycombs).
Οἱ Συρακούσιοι ἐς τὸ ᾿Ολυμπιεῖον παρέπεμψαν φυλακήν, δείσαντες, μὴ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τῶν
χρημάτων, ἃ ἦν αὐτόθι, κινήσωσιν (Thue. 6, 70, take of the money). ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀφίκοντο
ἐς Πιρασιὰς καὶ τῆς τε γῆς ἔτεμον (ἐδήωσαν) καὶ αὐτὸ τὸ πόλισμα εἷλον (Thue. 2, 56,
laid waste a part of the land. Ibid. ἔτεμον τὴν Τροιζηνίδα γῆν and ἔτεμον τῆς γῆς τὴν
πολλήν). a διελὼν τοῦ παλαιοῦ τείχους μίαν ἐποίησε πόλιν ἐκ δυοῖν (Thue. 5, 2,
CHAP. V.
46 The Genttive. [ὃ 52, 53.
[§ 51.] a. E; B. made a breach in—). Ἁνιέναι ὀργῆς, to abate of (lay aside) his anger,
aH
unr
ios)
Arist. Ran. 700, and τῆς ἐφόδου, to relax in their attack, Thue. 7, 43".
Rem. In like manner (with the notion of part and piece), it is said, ἰέναι τοῦ
πρόσω (Xen. An. 1, 3,1, to go forward), ἐπιταχύνειν τῆς ὁδοῦ τοὺς σχολαίτερον
προσιόντας (Thue. 4, 47, to hasten them on their way), προκόπτειν τινὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς
(Thuc. 4, 60, to further a person's progress to domimon; to pave the way to his
dominion). Karéaya (μέγα) τῆς κεφαλῆς (Pl. Arist.), I have got a (great) hole in
my head (somewhere in my head), συνετρίβην τῆς κεφαλῆς (also συντρίβεσθαι τὴν
κεφαλήν, Lys. 3, 18, by ὃ 31).
Two genitives may stand in different senses with the same substantive: Οἱ ἄνθρω-
ποι διὰ TO αὑτῶν δέος τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τῶν κύκνων καταψεύδονται (Pl. Phed. 85).
Ἵππου δρόμος ἡμέρας (Dem. 19, 273, a day's running of a horse). Διὰ τὴν τοῦ ἀνέμου
a κ , » \ ΄ ς - A ΠΡΟ
ἄπωσιν τῶν ναυαγίων ἐς τὸ πέλαγος (Thue. 7, 34, by the wind’s drifting the wrecks
out to sea). (One genitive is governed by another: μετὰ τῆς συμμαχίας τῆς αἰτήσεως,
Thuc. 1, 32, together with their desire of, or application for, an alliance.)
Instead of a substantive for the governing word, a possessive genitive (§ 47) may
be governed by a neuter pronoun, or by the word é in the sense of something 77 or
on the part of some person, so that the pronoun is often explained by a sentence with
ὅτι annexed, or a dependent interrogative proposition: Τοῦτό μοι ἔδοξε τῶν κατ-
ηγόρων ἀναισχυντότατον εἶναι (Pl. Apol. 17). Μάλιστα τῶν κατηγόρων ἕν ἐθαύμασα
τῶν πολλῶν, ὧν ἐψεύσαντο, τοῦτο, ἐν ᾧ ἔλεγον, ὡς χρῆν ὑμᾶς εὐλαβεῖσθαι, μὴ ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ
ἐξαπατηθῆτε (ΡΙ. Apol. 17, at one thing among many in them). “Ada τέ σου πολλὰ
ἄγαμαι καὶ ὅτι νῦν ἅμα χαριζόμενος Καλλίᾳ καὶ παιδεύεις αὐτόν (Xen. Conv. 8, 12).
Τὸ βραδύ, ὃ μέμφονται μάλιστα ἡμῶν, μὴ αἰσχύνεσθε (Thuc. 1, 84). “A διώκει Αἰσχίνης
τοῦ ψηφίσματος, ταῦτ᾽ ἐστίν (Dem. 18, 56). With verbs denoting to perceive and
remark, when such a sentence is added, the pronoun is often omitted; so that the
genitive is proximately governed by the following sentence: ᾿Εγὼ οὔποτε ἐπαυόμην
βασιλέα καὶ τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ μακαρίζων, διαθεώμενος αὐτῶν, ὅσην μὲν χώραν καὶ οἵαν
ἔχοιεν, ὡς δ᾽ ἄφθονα τὰ ἐπιτήδεια (Xen. An. 3, 1, 19). ᾿Αγνοοῦμεν ἀλλήλων ὅ,τι
λέγομεν (ΡΙ. Gorg. 517, each other's speech and meaning). ᾿Εγὼ μάλιστα ἐθαύμασα
Σωκράτους πρῶτον μὲν τοῦτο, ὡς εὐμενῶς τῶν νεανίσκων τὸν λόγον ἀπεδέξατο, ἔπειτα
ἡμῶν ὡς ὀξέως ἤσθετο, ὃ πεπόνθειμεν ὑπὸ τῶν λόγων (Pl. Phed. 89). Καὶ πρῶτον
μὲν Σωκράτης αὐτῶν (τῶν τὰ μετέωρα ἐρευνώντων) ἐσκόπει, πότερά ποτε νομίσαντες
ἱκανῶς ἤδη τἀνθρώπεια εἰδέναι ἔρχονται ἐπὶ τὸ περὶ τῶν τοιούτων φροντίζειν, ἢ τἀνθρώ-
πεια παρέντες τὰ δαιμόνια σκοποῦσιν (Xen. Mem. 1,1, 12, the first thing that he
considered in them was, whether —).
Rem. From this usage of the language, or from some such way of taking the
relation, it results that the poets use the genitive with the verbs say and hear in
the sense of, about: (Ths μητρὸς ἥκω τῆς ἐμῆς φράσων ἐν οἷς νῦν ἔστιν, Soph. Trach.
1122, in what condition she is, the state of my mother :) and also, that in passing toa
new matter, a genitive is put at the head of a sentence unconnected with the
following construction, in the sense, as touching —: Ti δὲ ἵππων οἴει ἢ τῶν ἄλλων
1 Ἐπιμίγνυσθαι ἔφασαν οἱ ἸΠέρσαι σφῶν τε πρὸς Καρδούχους καὶ ἐκείνων πρὸς αὑτούς
(Xen. An. 8, ὅ, 10. The elliptic genitive as subject). Κατεσκάφη τῶν τειχῶν τῶν
μακρῶν ἐπὶ δέκα στάδια ἑκατέρου (Lys. 13, 8; as if it were, of the long walls there
was thrown down to the extent of ten stadia). ὩΣ δὶ
[PART I.
§ 54.] The Genitive. 47
ζώων; ἢ ἄλλῃ πὴ ἔχειν ; (PL. Rep.5, 459.) Τί δὲ γῆς τε τμήσεως τῆς “Ἑλληνικῆς καὶ
οἰκιῶν ἐμπρήσεως, ποῖόν τί σοι δράσουσιν οἱ στρατιῶται πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους (ibid. 470).
a) The genitive with εἰμί sometimes denotes the person or thing to
which something Jdelongs and is appropriate, becoming, suitable, com-
petent [is his part, duty, &e.|: Ἔστιν ἄρα δικαίου ἀνδρὸς βλάπτειν καὶ
ὁντινοῦν ἄνθρωπον ; (Pl. Rep. 1, 335.) Οἰκονόμου ἀγαθοῦ ἐστιν εὖ
οἰκεῖν τὸν ἑαυτοῦ οἶκον (Xen. ic. 1, 3). Οὐ παντὸς ἀνδρός ἐστιν
ἐκλέξασθαι, ποῖα ἀγαθὰ τῶν ἡδέων ἐστὶ καὶ ὁποῖα κακά ([ί. Gorg. 500).
᾿Απόστασις τῶν βίαιδν τι πασχόντων ἐστίν (Thuc. 38, 39; takes place
only in the case of those who suffer harsh treatment ; is for those who —).
(Νομίσατε εἶναι τοῦ καλῶς πολεμεῖν τὸ αἰσχύνεσθαι καὶ τοῖς ἄρχουσι πείθεσθαι, Thuc.
5, 9, that to the right conduct of war it is essential.) (Εἶναι πρός τινος, see under
the prep. πρός.)
6) A genitive of a substantive with an adjective (pronoun or nume-
ral) is either referred by εἰμί to a subject, or even immediately con-
nected with a substantive, to denote its demands _and_consequence
(what it calls for, and_brings with it), its magnitude, value, also age
(descriptive genitive) : ‘Os μὲν ἐγὼ οὐκ ἀδικῶ κατὰ τὴν Μελήτου γραφήν,
οὐ πολλῆς μοι δοκεῖ εἶναι ἀπολογίας (Pl. Apol.28). Ταῦτα καὶ δαπάνης
μεγάλης καὶ πόνων πολλῶν καὶ πραγματείας εἷναι δοκεῖ (Dem. 8, 48).
Οὐσία τεττάρων καὶ δέκα ταλάντων (Dem. 27,4). Χωρίον δέκα μνῶν
(Isa. 2, 85). Ἐπὶ τὸν Εὐφράτην ποταμόν, ὄντα τὸ εὗρος τεττάρων
πλέθρων (Xen. An. 1, 4,11. Here also without adjective, as the sub-
stantive πλέθρον in itself expresses a definite magnitude: Hotapos
Κέρσος ὄνομα, εὗρος πλέθρου, Xen. An. 1, 4, 4). To τίμημα τῆς χώρας
ἑξακισχιλίων ταλάντων ἐστίν (Dem. 14, 19, comes to). Tod Μαρσύου
ποταμοῦ τὸ εὗρός ἐστιν εἴκοσι Kal πέντε ποδῶν (Xen. An. 1, 2, 8’).
Μανία ἣν ἐτῶν πλέον ἢ τετταράκοντα (Xen. Hell. 3, 1, 14).
Rem. 1. But the descriptive genitive in Greek is not used of properties and
make or nature in general, except in one or two idioms with εἰμί. (Τούτου τοῦ
τρόπου εἰμί, Arist. Pl. 246. Τῆς αὐτῆς γνώμης εἶναι, Thuc. 5, 46, τῶν αὐτῶν λόγων,
Pl. Gorg. 482, to keep to the same tale.)
Rem. 2. Beside mpdsodos δυοῖν μναῖν (Xen. Vectig. 3, 10), we find also δύο μναῖ
mposddov by ὃ 49, b. Likewise apposition is used: τριάκοντα μνᾶς πρόςφοδον ἔχειν
or τὴν mpdsodov (Dem. 27, 9), by § 19, R. 2.
c) The genitive with εἰμί and γίγνεσθαι denotes the extraction and
birth-place, also the material: Βούσιρις πατρὸς μὲν ἦν ἸΠ]οσειδῶνος,
μητρὸς δὲ Λιβύης (Isocr. Bus. 10). Πατρὸς λέγεται Kipos γενέσθαι
Καμβύσου, μητρὸς δὲ ὁμολογεῖται Μανδάνης γενέσθαι (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3,1:
1 But also: Ὁ φόρος ἦν τετρακόσια τάλαντα καὶ ἑξήκοντα (Thuc. 1,96). Τοῦ τείχους
ἦν τὸ εὖρος πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι πόδες (Xen. An. 3, 4, 7).
2 Often γίγνεσθαι ἔκ twos. (Amd τινος γίγν., to be descended from some one)
Poetically φῦναι, βλαστεῖν τινος.
CHAP. V.]
[§ 54-]
§ 55.
48 The Genitive. [ὃ 55, 56.
Ἱπποκράτης ὅδε ἐστὶν ᾿Απολλοδώρου υἱός, οἰκίας μεγάλης τε καὶ εὐδαί-
μονος (Pl. Prot. 316). Τίμαιος ὅδε εὐνομωτάτης ἐστὶ πόλεως τῆς ἐν
Ἰταλίᾳ Λοκρίδος. οὐσίᾳ καὶ γένει οὐδενὸς ὕστερος τῶν ἐκεῖ (PL. Tim. 20).
Ἢ κρηπὶς (the foundation) ἣν λίθου ξεστοῦ κογχυλιάτου (Xen. An. 3,
4,10). (Also without εἶναι and with ποιεῖν : Θεμέλιοι παντοίων λίθων,
Thue. 1, 93. Φοίνικος αἱ θύραι πεποιημέναι ἦσαν, Xen. Cyr. 7, 5, 22".)
The genitive stands with the prepositions ἄνευ, ἀντί, ἀπό, ἕνεκα, ἐξ,
πρό always, and with the prepositions διά, ἐπί, κατά, μετά, παρά, περί,
πρός, ὑπέρ, and ὑπό in certain significations (those which spring from
the conception of a hanging together with, and a going forth from ;
see chap. 6); also with all the adverbs which, as prepositions, serve
to denote a relation to something in regard of place and space (some-
times also of time”); also with πλήν, except, λάθρᾳ (κρύφα), privily from
(λάθρᾳ τῶν στρατιωτῶν), ἐμποδών, in the way of (obstructive : πολλῶν
ἀγαθῶν ἀλλήλοις ἐμποδὼν γίγνεσθαι, Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 24), lastly with
expressions which are compounded with prepositions to denote on ὦ
certain side of : ἐπὶ τάδε Φασήλιδος (Isoer. Areop. 80), τοῦ “Ηρακλείου
ἐπέκεινα (Xen. Hell. 5,1, 10), τὰ πρὸς ἕω τῆς Θηβαίων πόλεως (Xen.
Hell. 5, 4,49; the country to the east of Thebes). (On χάριν, δίκην with
the gen., see ὃ 31, ἃ. R.)
Rem. 1. With ἄγχι, ἐγγύς, and πλησίον, the poets sometimes use the dative, for
the most part so that it can refer to the verb (ἐγγὺς εἶναί τινι). (‘Eyyvrepov τῷ
θανάτῳ, Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 21, of a similarity.) Ἕ Ξξηῆς and ἐφεξῆς have also the dative,
especially in connexion with εἶναι or κεῖσθαι (ἐφεξῆς κεῖσθαί τινι, to follow imme-
diately wpon something).
Rem. 2. How from, out of, is denoted by the genitive without preposition,
see § 60.
The genitive stands as object with a multitude of verbs, which in
their original signification, involve more or less nearly the conception
of a connexion or coherence with, or a coming out (a being parted)
from the same; either as principal object (sometimes with an object
of reference in the dative), or as accessory definition (more remote
object) along with a passive object in the accusative; 6. g. Τυγχάνειν
1 In Herodot. πεποιημένος ἔκ τινος and ἀπό τινος.
ν ἢ Such adverbs are: ἄγχι, ἀγχοῦ (with its degrees of comparison, mostly poetical),
ἐγγύς (with its degrees of comparison: τοῦ καιροῦ ἐγγυτέρω τοῦ τείχους διώξαντες,
(Xen. Ποῖ]. δ, 3, δ, with the genitive of comparison, by § 64 and § 90, R. 4), πλησίον
(the same), πόῤῥω, (poet. σχεδόν, ἑκάς, τῆλε, τηλοῦ, τηλόθε,) χωρίς, (δίχα poet.,) εἴσω,
ἔξω, ἐντός, ἐκτός (with ἔξωθεν, etc.), μεταξύ, πρόσθεν, ὄπισθεν, ἐπίπροσθεν, ὕπερθεν,
ἔνερθεν (poet.), ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, ἀμφοτέρωθεν, ἑκατέρωθεν, πέρα. πέραν (καταντιπέραςῚ),
ἐναντίον (ἄντα, ἀντίον poet. [ἐνώπιον ), καταντικρύ (ἀντικρύ), εὐθύ (ἰθύς), ἄχρις,
μέχρις (in later writers ἕως), ἑξῆς, ἐφεξῆς.
[PART I.
§ 57.] The Genitive. 49
τοῦ σκοποῦ, ἅπτεσθαι τῆς χειρός, τοῦ πράγματος, ἐπιθυμεῖν εἰρήνης, [5 56.]
ἐρᾶν φρονήσεως, μετέχειν τῶν ἀγαθῶν, μεταδιδόναι τοῖς ἄλλοις τῶν
ἀγαθῶν, ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῶν πραγμάτων, ἄρχειν τῶν ᾿λλήνων, παύειν
τινὰ ὕβρεως, αἰτιᾶσθαί τινα τῶν ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ πραχθέντων, καταγιγνώ-
σκεῖν φυγήν τινος (to condemn a man ‘to ea ile).
Rem. 1. In some such verbs the construction is somewhat variable in conse-
quence of a different view of the meaning; for particular instances of this, the
Lexicon must be consulted. Some verbs have the genitive in some one special
sense, but otherwise have different constructions.
Rem. 2. Although the genitive does not denote an object passively recipient. of
the action, yet verbs which govern a genitive (as principal object, not as secondary
definition along with an accusative ) are sometimes Poe in the passive of a
subject which, in the active, would stand in the genitive: Νικήρατος ἐρῶν τῆς γυναι-
Kos ἀντερᾶται (Xen. Conv. 8, 3). ᾿Ασκεῖται ἀεὶ τὸ τιμώμενον, ἀμελεῖται δὲ τὸ ἀτιμα-
ζύμκνον (P27. Rep. 8,551. ᾿Αμελεῖν τινος). Ὅστις ἄρχεται ὑπὸ τῶν διὰ τοῦ σώμα-
Tos ἡδονῶν, οὐκ ἐλεύθερός ἐ ἐστιν (Xen. Mem. 4, ὅ, ὃ. ἤΑλρχειν τινός) ; especially those
compounded with κατά (ὃ 59), as κατακρίνεσθαι. καταφρονεῖσθαι, καταγελᾶσθαι. e.g.
᾿Ἐπειδάν τις ἐγγὺς ἢ τοῦ οἴεσθαι τελευτήσειν, οἱ λεγόμενοι μῦθοι περὶ τῶν ἐν ον ἣν
καταγελώμενοι τέως, τότε δὴ στρέφουσιν αὐτοῦ τὴν ψυχὴν, μὴ πέσε ὦσιν (Pl. Rep.
1, 330). ᾿Ισμηνίας κατεψηφίσθη καὶ ἀποθνήσκει (Xen, Hell. 5, 2, 36, from κατα-
» Ψηφίζομαι, deponent middle).
@) The genitive is governed by the verbs which involve the con- ὃ 57.
ception of attaching to, and adherence to a thing ; viz. such as mean
to seize or lay hold ‘by or upon, to hold to, catch at, get to (hit), aim at,
and de studious of, crave, be in need of, lay claim to, be or make par-
taker of, fill with, be full of and rich in, make a beginning of : thus,
λαμβάνομαι (in the male) ἐπιλαμβάνομαι, ἀντιλαμβάνομαι, συλλαμβάνομαι, ἔ ἔχομαι,
ἀντέχομαι (also figuratively, 6. ο΄. ἐπιλαμβάνομαι τοῦ νόμου, lay hold upon and find
Sault with, τὰ τούτων ἐχύμενα, what hangs together with these and bor ‘ders thereon) *,
oe καθάπτομαι. ψαύω, θιγγάνω, ---- ὀρέγομαι. στοχάζομαι, τυγχάνω (hit — attain,
get), ἐφικνοῦμαι, ἐξικνοῦμαι (κυρῶ), ---- ἐπιθυμῶ, ἐ ἐρῶ ", ἐφίεμαι, γλίχομαι, (dupa, thirst
after, ἐλευθερίας), --- det (μοι, L need), δέομαι (τινύς, of a person : “1 beg of some one),
προςδέομαι (χρήζω) *, ἐλλείπει (μοι, 1 have lack of)s — ἀντιποιοῦμαι (τῆς ἀρχῆς τινι,
contest the g government with some one), μεταποιοῦμαι, ἀμφιςβητῶ (τινός τινι), προςήκει
(μοι τῆς ἀρχῆς, I have a right to, have to do with —), μετέχω, μεταλαγχάνω, μεταλαμ-
βάνω, μέτεστι (τινύς μοι), μεταδίδωμι 4, κοινωνῷ (τινός τινι), συναίρομαι (τινὶ τοῦ κιν-
The actives λαμβάνω, take (not take by), ἔχω, hold, have, govern the accusative.
But φιλῶ τινα, as it does not express desire.
Πολλοῦ δέω, ὀλίγου δέω, Lam far from i within a little of —; ὀλίγου δεῖ, ἐξ wants
little of, or but that —. Τριακοστὸν ἔτος ἑνὸς δέον, not δέοντος, i. 6. the twenty-ninth
year ; δυοῖν δέοντες πεντήκοντα ἄνδρες, forty- eight men. (Οκτὼ ἀποδέοντες τριακύσιοι,
‘Thue. 4, 38; ὀκτώ as genitive.) (Ὀλίγου, μικροῦ without δεῖ, adverbially : within a
little, almost, nearly.)
4 Μετέχω, mereka Adare μέρος, μέτεστί μοι μέρος, as the genitive denotes the whole,
of which the person has part. λΛαγχάνω τι, obtain by lot; in the poets also τινύς.
CHAP. Υ.] E
so =
o
΄
50 The Genitive. [ὃ 58.
[§ 57-] δύνου) }, ᾿κληρονομῶ (τῆς οὐσίας), ἀπολαύω 5, γεύομαι (μέλιτος, μαθήματος, γεύω τοὺς
(259)
(260)
§ 58
(291)
παῖδας αἵματος) : ). ἐμφοροῦμαι, ὀσφραίνομαι, ---- πίμπλημι (ἐμπ.. avar.), πληρῶ, πλήθω,
γέμω, εὐπορῶ, πλουτῶ, --- ἄρχω (ὑπάρχω, κατάρχω), ἄρχομαι 8, and other more special
expressions.
Rem. The verbs to take, to hold, have also the genitive of the part by which one
lays hold: Οἱ παρόντες ἔλαβον τῆς ζώνης τὸν Opbvryy. (Xen. An. 1, 6,10). Καί pov
ἐλάβετο τῆς χειρὸς ὁ ᾿Αδείμαντος (Pl. Ῥαγηι. 120, took me by the hand). So ἕλκειν
τινὰ ποδῶν (by the feet), and the like.
6) Further, the verbs which convey the notion of removal from and
depriving of: viz. such as 70 give up (one’s claim to), forego, miss of,
be and make far from, shut out of, hinder of, deprive of, begrudge, free
Srom, lack, refrain from (spare), desist from, make an end of, together
with be differ ent Jrom ; thus, ἀφίεμαι, μεθίεμαι (τινός) 4 .-- ἀποτυγχάνω, ἁἅμαρ-
τάνω, σφάλλομαι, ψεύδομαι. (ἀπολείπομαι τῶν καιρῶν), ---- ἀπέχω, διέχω, χωρίζω, ἀφ-
ίστημι (Ὀρχομενίους Θηβαίων, move them to revolt from the Th. «ἀφίστασθαι Θηβαίων), --
᾿ς (oe τῆς διόδου), t ἴσχω, κωλύω (ἐναντιοῦμαί τινί τινος), στερῶ, ἀποστερῶ {τινά
τινος) ὕ, φθονῶ (γυμνῶ. μονῶ, strip, make deserted, i.e. ber τε of, καταλύω τινὰ τῆς
ἀρχῆς). ᾿ἐλευθερῶ, ἀπαλλάττω (τινὰ κακῶν, ἀπαλλάττομαι πόνων), ἀφίημι, ἀπολύω (τινὰ
τῆς αἰτίας). — ἀπέχομαι, φείδομαι, — εἴκω, ὑπείκω. “παραχωρῶ (τινί τινος), ὑποχωρῶ,
ἐξίσταμαι (τῆς οὐσίας, τοῦ φρονεῖν), (ἐξανίσταμαι. ὑπανίσταμαί τινι ἕδρας), - παύω
(τινὰ τῆς ἐπιθυμίας, παύομαι τῆς ἐπ.), ἐπέχω (τοῦ λύγου, ὑφίεμαι τοῦ μέγα φρονεῖν), ----
διαφέρω, διέστηκα, and other more special phrases (e.g. λωφῶ ὀδύνης, feel myself
relieved of), or such as are used in a more free sense by the poets (6. g. ἀτιμάζειν
twa ὧν δεῖται, Soph. Cd. Col. 49, to refuse a person something, and “cownt him
unworthy of it, πεφευγέναι νόσου, Soph. Phil. 1044).
Rem. In different verbs the sense which requires the genitive, results from their
composition with ἀπό, or ἐξ, thus (besides the verbs above given) In ἀπελαύνω,
ἀποτρέπω (τινὰ τῆς ἀλαζονείας), ἀποπηδῶ (Σωκράτους, Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 16, desert
him suddenly), ἐκβαίνω (τῆς ἐμαυτοῦ ἰδέας), ἐκβάλλω (τινὰ τιμῆς). ceSiainaptae (τῶν
καθεστώτων νομίμων, Thue. 1, 132), ἐξίστημι (τινὰ τοῦ φρονεῖν, ἐξίσταμαι τῆς
ἀρχῆς). ἐκλύω (τινὰ ἀπορίας). W here the local notion from, out, 1s prominent, we
have (both in these compounds, and in other verbs) ἀπό or ἐξ, 6. g, Ἢ ψυχὴ ἀπὸ
Tov σώματος χωρίζεται. Αἱ ὄχθαι τρία πλέθρα ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ ἀπεῖχον (Xen. An.
4, 35). ᾿Απαλλάττειν τινὰ ἐκ πόνων. (Ἐλευθεροῦν, ἀπαλλάττειν τινὰ ἀπὸ Μήδων,
of persons.)
a) Further, the genitive is governed by the verbs which denote
being careful or neglectful of, mindful or forgetful of (the conception being,
that the mind is directed to something), as ἐπιμελοῦμαι, fs μοι, μεταμέλει μοι
(it repents me of), φροντίζω, κήδομαι, ἐντρέπομαι (have a care of, regard for), προνοῶ,
προθρῶν ἀμελῶ, ὀλιγωρῶ, ---- μέμνημαι, ἐπιμέμνημαι, λανθάνομαι, ἐπιλανθάνομαι, ἀνα-
μιμνήσκω (τινά Twos), sometimes ἐνθυμοῦμαι (usually with the accusative), and the
verb πειρῶμαι (πειρῶ), attempt.
1 Also συναίρομαι τὸν κίνδυνον, share the danger.
2. Also ἀπολαύω ἀγαθόν (φλαῦρον) τί τινος.
3 ἤλρχομαι ἀπό twos, begin with, at something.
* But ἀφίημι, μεθίημί τινα, let a person go, set him at liberty.
5 Also ἀποστερῶ τινά τι,
[PART I.
§ 59.] The Genitive. 51
Rem. 1. The constructions μέλει μοι, φροντίζω περί τινος also occur. (Μέλει μοι
ταῦτα, personally. ἉἙορταὶ καὶ χοροὶ πᾶσι μέλουσιν, Pl. Legg. 8, 835.)
Rem. 2. Μέμνημαι has also the accusative (bear in mind and know: τοὺς
ἀδικοῦντας) ; ἀναμιμνήσκω two accusatives (ὃ 25). Μνημονεύω has usually the
_accusative.
Rem. 3. After the same analogy, the genitive is sometimes found also with
αἰσθάνομαι. have a perception of (by the s senses, 6. @. κραυγῆς), and ἀκούω, hear to
(e.g. τῶν Σειρήνων), different from ἀκούω τινύς, hear fr om a person, § 60. ᾿Ακούω
τινὸς διαλεγομένου, I hear some one speaking.
ὁ) Likewise the verbs which signify to de leader and ruler of, as
ἄρχω, ἡγοῦμαι, κρατῶ, βασιλεύω, δεσπόζω, προστατῶ. τυραννεύω, στρατηγῶ, ἡγεμονεύω,
and the verb ἀκούω (κλύω) in the signification odey (and ἀνηκου-
στῶ)"
Rem. Ἡγοῦμαί τινι, am leader to a person, show him the way, κρατῶ τινα, over-
come a person (μάχῃ). In the poets, the verbs of ruling have also the dative. As
ἀκούω, SO ὑπακούω occurs with the genitive (usually with the dative).
a) The genitive stands with various verbs which are compounded with
a preposition ¢ governing the genitive, as the object of the relation denoted
by the preposition, either alone, or with an object-accusative ; especially
(besides the verbs with ἀπό and ἐξ, § 57 b, R.) those compounds with
κατά which denote an action directed to, or against a person, 6. &. κατα-
γελῶ. καταφρονῶ, καταβοῶ (τῶν στρατηγῶν, Cr γοιἐ against the generals,in OG or
complaint), καταντχλῶ (γέλωτά Twos), καταχέω, καταπροίξομαι, καταψεύδομαι, καθυβρίζω.
In those which denote accusation and condemnation (κατηγορῶ, κατα-
γιγνώσκω, καταδικάζω, κατακρίνω, καταψηφίζομαι), the offence or the
punishment stands as object in the accusative: κατηγορεῖν ἀδικίαν,
μωρίαν τινός (literally, to charge injustice against a person), so that the
Greek construction is often the converse of the English. “Ὅταν Tov καταγνῶτε
ἱεροσυλίαν ἢ κλοπήν, οὐ πρὸς τὸ μέγεθος ὧν ἂν λάβωσι, τὴν τιμωρίαν
ποιεῖσθε, ἀλλ᾽ ὁμοίως ἁπάντων θάνατον κατακρίνετε (Lsocr.in Loch. 6).
(Καταψηφί ζεσθαι δειλίαν, θάνατόν τινος.) In the passive : Ta μου ψευδῆ
κατηγορημένα (ί. Apol. 18). Ὃ κατεψηφισμένος ἡμῶν θάνατος. (πολ-
λὴν δυστυχίαν καταγιγνώσκειν τινός, to pronounce a person to be very unfortunate.)
6) Further, in some verbs compounded with πρό and ὑπέρ (partly
in their proper signification, partly with the sense of a preference or
advantage), e. g ἘΣ “προτιθέναι προοίμιον Ποῦ λόγου (δ. Legg. 4, 723,
prefix), προτιμᾶν σωτηρίαν κέρδους (dnt. 2 "8: ὃ προέχειν τινός τινί
(to surpass a person im something), ὑπερέχειν σκιάδειόν τινος (Arist.
Aves, 1508), ὑπερφρονεῖν twos (to look down upon), ὑπερέχειν πάντων
κάλλει καὶ μεγέθει.
: 1 In Herodotus also πείθομαί τινος.
CHAP: Y.)|) . Riaz
[§ 58.]
ᾧ 50.
52 The Genitive. [ὃ 60, ὅτ.
[8 59-] Rem. Ὑπερορῶ, I overlook, look down upon, and ὑπεραίρω, ὑπερβάλλω, surpass,
have the accusative. In the proper signification, the preposition is usually
- repeated.
c) With ἐπιβαίνω, set foot upon, e.g. τῆς Λακωνικῆς. (Em PBaiv ἐπὶ τὴν ναῦν,
go on board the ship.)
§ 60. a)With the verbs to hear, learn, ask, the name of the person from whom the
thing is heard, &c., is sometimes put in the genitive : Ὑμεῖς ἐμοῦ ἀκούσεσθε πᾶσαν
τὴν ἀλήθειαν (Pl. Apol. 17). λγγελος οὐδεὶς πάρεστιν, ὅτου πευσόμεθα τἀκεῖ
πράγματα (Arist. Aves 1120). It is more usual, however (except with πυνθάνομαι),
to add παρά (πρός, ἐξ).
Rem. 1. ᾿Αποδέχομαί τινος, properly accept from some one and approve of, 6. 5.
Μὴ ταῦτα ἀποδέχεσθε ᾿Αγοράτου (Lys. 13, 83). Οὐκ ἀποδέξομαί σου. ἐὰν τοιαῦτα
φλυαρῇς (Pl. Rep. 1, 337), then usually with participle annexed (ἀποδέχομαί τινος
λέγοντος) : accept willingly, approve that (prop. while, if) a person does so and so}.
Rem. 2. "οζω μύρου, smell of perfume (with the accompanying notion of fulness).
Τῆς κεφαλῆς ὄζω μύρου (Arist. Kecl. 524), in the head (from the head).
Rem. 3. The poets put passive verbs with the genitive, in the sense of, from
(ἂν ἢ θέλουσα, πάντ᾽ ἐμοῦ κομίζεται, Soph. Gid. R. 580, what she will), especially
participles, denoting extraction or origin, e. g. dvs, τραφείς twos. (Cf. ὃ 54, c.)
(269) Rem. 4. The poets sometimes use with verbs which in general denote a motion,
(275, the genitive of the place from which the motion commences : Δόμων ὁρῶ Χρυσόθεμιν
R. 3) ἐντάφια χεροῖν φέρουσαν (Soph. Pl. 324). Παῖδας γῆς ἐλᾶν Κορινθίας (Bur. Med.
70, out of —). The more ancient language had for this sense the particular termi-
nation θεν, which has remained in local adverbs (cf. the Accidence). (Also ἐξ
οὐρανόθεν.)
ὃ 61 a) A genitive stands with verbs and phrases, denoting crimination
593) and impeachment of a person, or conviction and condemnation, to
denote the matter of the crimination (charge, &c.), e.g. Πράφομαι
Φίλιππον φόνου, as with αἰτιῶμαι (also αἰτιῶμαι τοὺς θεοὺς τῶν ἀγαθῶν), ἐπαιτιῶ-
μαι, διώκω, εἰσάγω, ὑπάγω, γράφομαι, αἱρῶ (τινὰ φόνου, κλοπῆς), ἐπέξειμι (τινὶ φόνου),
δίκην λαγχάνω (or simply λαγχάνω), δικάζομαι (τινὶ κλήρου, go to law with a person
because of an inheritance), φεύγω, ἁλίσκομαι, ὀφλισκάνω (ἀσεβείας). (Απολύω, ἀφίημί
τινα τῆς αἰτίας, ὃ 57, Ὁ “ἢ
Rem. 1. With some of these verbs the name of the punishment also stands in
the genitive: Ὑπάγω τινὰ θανάτους Kpivopat θανάτου (am upon my trial for life
and death, but also περὶ θανάτου, Xen. Hell. 5,5, 25). (Τιμῶ τινι τῶν ἐσχάτων.
Τιμᾶταί μοι 6 κατήγορος θανάτου, lays the punishment at, demands that death be
the punishment.)
1 In like manner ἀνέχομαί τινος ποιοῦντός τι, put up with, tolerate that (prop.
when) @ person does so and so. Hence with gen. alone, ἀνέχομαί τινος. 3
2 The conception on which the genitive rests, seems to be either that of a bringing
under a certain notion (on account of, under the head of), or, of a direction to
something (that to which the charge comes).
[PART I~
§ 62, 63.] The Genitive. 53
Rem. 2. On the verbs compounded with κατά, see ὃ 59, a.» ᾿οφλισκάνω stands
also with the accusative of the things one is accounted guilty of, and of the
punishment: ᾿Ωφλήκασι μοχθηρίαν καὶ ἀδικίαν (Pl. Apol. 39), ὀφλεῖν χιλίας δραχμάς,
ὀφλεῖν γέλωτα. (Ἐγκαλεῖν τινι ἀδικίαν.)
6) With some verbs and phrases denoting to praise or count happy,
to compassionate or take revenge for, the object on account of which
one is praised or pitied, or revenge is taken, stands in the genitive :
Εὐδαιμονίζω σε τοῦ τρόπου (Pl. Crit. 43). Νῦν ἔξεστι Λακεδαιμονίους
πάντων, ὧν πεποιήκασιν ἡμᾶς, τιμωρήσασθαι (Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 19);
so with ἄγαμαι, εὐδαιμονίζω, μακαρίζω, ζηλῶ, οἰκτείρω, ἀμύνομαι, τιμωροῦμαι. (With
an adjective: Εὐδαίμων μοι ἁνὴρ ἐφαίνετο τοῦ τρόπου, Pl. Phed. 58.)
Rem. 1. Occasionally some other verbs of kindred meaning are thus used, 6. g.
συγγιγνώσκω τινὶ τῆς ἐπιθυμίας (Pl. Euthyd. 306; as τιμωροῦμαι, otherwise συγγιγ-
νώσκειν τῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ τινός). Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὠργίζοντο Θηβαίοις τῆς ἀντιλήψεως τῆς
τοῦ ᾿Απόλλωνος δεκάτης (Xen. Hell. 3, δ, 5). The poets use this genitive with all
verbs which denote praise, blame, or anger at something, e. g. πατρὶ pnvicas φόνου
(Soph. Ant. 1177). Verbs of wondering are also found with a single genitive of
the person wondered at: Θαυμάζω τῶν ὑπὲρ τῆς ἰδίας δόξης ἀποθνήσκειν ἐθελόντων,
ὑπὲρ δὲ τῆς κοινῆς μὴ τὴν αὐτὴν γνώμην ἐχόντων (1500). Archid. 93).
Rem. 2. In the same manner the genitive is used in crying out at something,
with an adjective, an interjection, or alone: Σχετλία τόλμης (Hur. Ale. 741). Φεῦ
[§ 61.]
τοῦ ἀνδρός (Xen. Cyr.2,1, 39). Τῆς τύχης, τὸ ἐμὲ viv δεῦρο κληθέντα τυχεῖν (Xen.
Cyr. 2, 2, 3, what a misfortune, that I —).
The genitive stands (as possessive) with the adjectives which denote
belonging to, or the contrary, viz. οἰκεῖος, ἴδιος, ἱερός (consecrated to a god), κοινός,
> δὴ las NX , , al lal “ ,
ἀλλότριος. Ta τῶν τὴν πόλιν οἰκούντων οἰκεῖα τῶν καλῶς βασιλευόντων
ἐστίν (Isocr. ad Nic. 21). Ἢ xo ὑπτά δ λ έ
ἐστίν (Lsocr. ad Nic. 21). πόλις ἁπάντων τῶν πολιτευομένων κοινὴ
ἐστιν (Andoc. 2,1). “ἹἹερὸς ὁ χῶρος τῆς Ἀρτέμιδος (Xen. An. ὅ, 3, 19).
Rem. Οἰκεῖος, in the sense inclined and appropriate to, and ἀλλότριος, un-
favourable to, alienated from, have the dative: Ἢ Θάσος τύτε Λακεδαιμονίοις μὲν
οἰκεία, ἡμῖν δ᾽ ἀλλοτρία ἢν (Dem. 20, 61). Κοινός has more frequently the dative
(κοινὸν πᾶσιν, κοινὸς ὁ ἀγὼν ἐμοί τε καὶ GOL).
The genitive stands, as objective genitive, with adjectives denoting ἃ
property which refers to a certain object (transitive adjectives), viz. :
a) With the adjectives denoting full of, deficient in, needy, unpar-
ticipant of, void, or free from (cf. § 57, the genitive with the corre-
sponding verbs), 6. g. Ta κοῖλα τῆς γῆς ὕδατος ἔμπλεά ἐστιν (Pl. Phed.
110). Πόλις μεστὴ ἐμπόρων καὶ ξένων (Isocr. Pac. 31). "ἔρημοι συμ-
μάχων ἐσμέν. Πῶς ἂν θεὸς εἴη ὁ τῶν καλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν ἄμοιρος ;
(Pl. Conv. 202.) Καθαρὸς φόνου (Pl. Legg. 9, 864). Such adjectives
are πλήρης, πλέως, ἔμπλεως, σύμπλεως, μεστύς, πλούσιος, --- ἐνδεής, ἐπιδεής, κενύς,
ἔρημος. πένης, μέτοχος, ἄμοιρος (ἀκέραιος, ἀκέραστος), καθαρύς, ἐλεύθερος, and some in
which the signification is more special, e. g. ὀρφανός (παίδων), γυμνύς (ψυχὴ γυμνὴ
σώματος). ᾿
CHAP. V.]
§ 62.
(288 f.)
L$ 63.]
(287 a)
54 The Genitive. [ὁ 63.
Rem. 1. To an “adjective formed from a substantive with a privativum, and
expressing a notion complete in itself without the addition of an object, the Greeks
. sometimes annex for more exact definition the genitive of a kindred substantive,
so that the adjective expresses no more than the general notion bereft of.,freefrom,
8. &. ἄπαις ἀῤῥένων παίδων (Xen. Cyr. 4, 6,2), ἄτιμος πάσης τιμῆς (Pl. Legg. 6,
774A, also τούτων ἄτιμοι, Andoc. 1,75, deprived of this honour), ἀδωρότατος χρημάτων
(Thue. 2, 65, uncorrupted by), ἀθῶος τῆς Φιλίππου δυναστείας (Dem. 18, 270, free
Srom, unhurt by). But especially in the poets, 6. g. ἀνήνεμος πάντων χειμόνων
(Soph. Cid. C. 677), ἄπεπλος φαρέων (Hur. Phen. 324), ἄφωνος τῆςδε τῆς ἀρᾶς
(Soph. Cid. C. 685, without uttering this curse), ἄλυπος γήρως (Soph. did. C.
1519, untouched by).
Rem. 2. The poets form numerous compound adjectives with the sense of
fulness or abundance of a certain special kind, and give them a genitive, e.g.
πολυστεφὴς δάφνης (Soph. Cid. BR. 83), πολ τι τον βίου (Hur. Ion, 681).
6) With the adjectives which denote /nowledge, experience, care-
fulness, capacity, power, or being guilty (or the cause) of something, 6.
᾿Ἐπιστήμων τῆς θαλάττης. (Thue. 1, ΔἸ) ἐγκρατὴς ὕπνου, γαστρός.
Such adjectives are ἔμπειρος, ἄπειρος, ἐπιστήμων, ἀνεπιστήμων, ἀήθης (τοῦ κακῶς
ἀκούειν), ἐπιμελής, ἀμελής, edna ἐγκρατή ἧς, ἀκρατής, κύριος, αἴτιος, with others of
more special signification, 6. g. φιλομαθής, auabns (ὡραία γάμου, ripe for marriage).
c) With adjectives denieed from verbs which govern the accusative
or genitive, and denoting either the action, or (especially with the
ending txos) the ane, for it, or (ν ith a privativum) the forbearance
of the action, e. g. Κακοῦργος τῶν ἄλλων, KATIKOOS Μήδων, φειδωλὸς
χρημάτων, ἀνατρεπτικὸς πόλεως, ἐξεργαστικώτατοι @ ὧν ἂν (= τούτων,
ἃ ἂν) ἐγχειρῶσιν (Xen. Mem. 4,1, 4), ἄγευστος ἐλευθερίας (Pl. Rep.
9.) Ὁ); “ἀπαθὴς κακῶν (Ρί. Phed. 250), ἄπρακτοι ὧν ἐφίενται (Thue.
6, 33), ἀνήκοος τοῦ πάντων ἡδίστου ἀκούσματος (Xen. Mem. 2, 1, 31).
Φιλόδωρος ( fond of giving) εὐμενείας, ἄδωρος δυσμενείας (Pl. Conv. 197).
Rem. 1. Κατήκοος and ὑπήκοος have also the dative, like the corresponding verbs.
Rem. 2. A genitive is also used with adverbs formed from the adjectives
described under b and e, especially with € ἔχω (instead of εἶναι with the adjective) :
ἐρωτικῶς, ἐμπείρως, ἀνακῶς, ἀμελῶς ἔχειν τινός. (Δπεχώρουν μάλα ὑπεροπτικῶς τῶν
ἐναντίων, Xen, Hell. 7,1, 18.) Likewise with διαφερόντως (τῶν ἄλλων), from δια-
φέρων (τινός).
@) With some which are compounded with a substantive capable of gover ning the
genitive, and contain its notion, 6. g. ὑπεύθυνος (τῆς ἀρχῆς, he who has to give an
account of an office administered by hin), ὑποτελὴς Popov (Thue. 7, 57), ὑπόδικος
φόνου, ἀσεβείας.
Rem. The poets sometimes construct compound adjectives in a harsh manner
with a genitive governed by the substantive contained in the adjective, e. g. Sopa-
των ὑπόστεγος (Soph. El. 1386, who is under the roof of the house). Χρόνος ἡμερῶν
ἀνήριθμος (Soph. Trach, 247, a time consisting of days of which there is no number).
e) With ἄξιος, ἀνάξιος, ἀντάξιος, together with the me
PART I.
§ 64—66. | The Genttive. 55
adverbs, and the verb ἀξιῶ, account worthy, e.g. ἔλξιος ἐπαίνου, [§ 63:}
κολάζειν τινὰ ἀξίως τῶν ἀδικημάτων, ἀξιοῦσθαι τῶν ἴσων.
Rem. 1. "λξιον with the dative denotes it ἐς worth some one’s while, e.g." A& sv
σοι καὶ τῶν εἰς τὸν μέλλοντα χρύνον τοῦ βίου φροντίζειν (Xen. Mem. 2, 1, 34).
Rem. 2. Of the genitive with adjectives which denote something corresponding
with a thing, see the dative, § 37, R. 1.
fo)
The genitive stands with the comparative of adjectives and adverbs, to ὃ 64.
denote thesecond member of the comparison (καλλίων ᾿Αλκιβιάδου, apet- (271)
νον ζῆν τῶν ἄλλων), in the same signification with the adjectives which
denote double of, twice as great, and the like (— πλάσιος, --- πλοῦς),
and sometimes with ἄλλος (see comparative, § 91); further, with
some verbs derived from a comparative and expressing a comparison,
together with one or two others, which, without being so derived,
have a similar signification, as πλεονεκτῷ (τῶν ἐχθρῶν), μειονεκτῶ, ἡσσῶμαι,
(τῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν), ἐλασσοῦμαι, ὑστερῶ and ὑστερίζω (τῆς μάχης), --- περιγίγνομαι,
περίειμι (τινὸς πλήθει, σοφίᾳ) λείπομαι (πλήθει ὑμῶν), ἀπολείπομαι (am left behind,
fall short of, τῆς ἀληθείας).
a) The genitive serves to denote the price at which a thing 15 § 65.
bought, sold, exchanged, given in pledge, for which it is done, or at (255)
which it is set: Πολλῶν χρημάτων (πολλοῦ) ὠνεῖσθαί τι (πρίασθαι,
κτᾶσθαι, πωλεῖν, ἀποδίδοσθαι). Δόξα χρημάτων οὐκ ὠνητή (1506). ad Nic.
32). Καὶ τῆς ψυχῆς ἂν τοῦτο πριαίμην. Οὐδεμιᾶς χάριτος οὐδ᾽ ὠφε-
λείας ἀνταλλάξαισθε ἄν τὴν εἰς τοὺς “λληνας εὔνοιαν (Dem. 6, 10).
“Ὑποτιθέναι (ὑποκεῖσθαι) πέντε μνῶν. Πόσου Binvos διδάσκει; (Pl. Apol.
20.) Μισθοῦ (for pay) Τιμοκράτης νόμους εἰςφέρεν (Dem. 24, 66).
Χρημάτων ἐπικουρεῖν (Pl. Rep. 9, 575, for money). Ottis παρ᾽ ἡμέραν
χάριτος τὰ μέγιστα τῆς πόλεως ἀπολωλεκότες (Den. 8, 10). Τὰ τῶν εὖ
καὶ κακῶς ποιεῖν δυναμένων δῶρα μείζονος τιμῶνται οἱ λαμβάνοντες ἢ
τῶν ἄλλων (Xen. Cyr. 2, 11, 13). Πλοῖα χρημάτων τετιμημένα (Thue.
4, 26).
REM. Ποιοῦμαί τι (τινά) περὶ πολλοῦ (πλείονος, ὀλίγου). With ἀλλάττομαι,
ἀνταλλάττομαι the preposition ἀντί is also added.
6) In the genitive is also set that for which pay is demanded or given : Σωκράτης
οὐδένα τῆς συνουσίας ἀργύριον ἐπράττετο (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 11).
a) The genitive serves to denote the ¢ime within which, or αὖ ἃ ὃ 66.
certain point of which, something takes place (with partitive concep- (276)
tion), therefore partly in specifymg a natural undefined time, or a
time often recurring (as 6. @. νυκτός, at or by night, τῆς ἡμέρας, by
day = per diem) ; partly in specifying the definite period df time ἐν
the course of which something takes place (e. g. τοῦ αὐτοῦ θέρους, in the
CHAP. V.]|
[9 66.]
S 67.
56 The Genttive. [ὁ 67.
same summer, τῆς ἐπιούσης ἡμέρας, in the course of the following day) ;
partly in specifying the time within which something takes place, or
in the course of which something has not taken place (does not take
place) : Δείλης ἀφίκοντο of “EXAnves εἰς τὰς κώμας (Xen. An. 3,3, 11).
“Ere βαθέος ὄρθρου (1). Σωκράτης τὸ αὐτὸ ἱμάτιον ἠμφίεστο Aépous TE
καὶ χειμῶνος (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 2). (More rarely ἐν θέρει, in the poets also
simply θέρει.) Δαρεικὸν ἕκαστος οἴσει, τοῦ μηνὸς ὑμῶν (Xen. An. 1, ὍΣΣ
also τοῦ μηνὸς ἑκάστου). ‘Too αὐτοῦ θέρους ἡ ed Kal eee
ἐστράτευσαν ἐπὶ Χαλκιδέας τοὺς ἐπὶ Θράκης (1; huc. 2,58). Ἔμπράχθη
ταῦτα ᾿ῦλ᾿λαφηβολιῶνος μηνὸς ἐπὶ Θεοφίλου ἄρχοντος (Dem. 37, 6).
Ama (the Delos Sestival) ἣν ἐκείνου τοῦ μηνός (Aen. Mem. 4, 8, 2).
Οἱ ἡμέτεροι πρόγονοι τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρας ἐπύθοντό τε τὴν ἀπόβασιν τὴν
τῶν βαρβάρων καὶ ἐβοήθησαν ἐ ἐπὶ τοὺς ὅρους τῆς χώρας καὶ μάχῃ νική-
σαντες τρόπαιον ἔστησαν τῶν πολεμίων (is socr. Paneg. 81).— Εύλιππος
ἔλεγεν. εἰ βούλονται ἐξιέναι οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας πέντε ἡμερῶν,
ἕτοιμος εἶναι σπένδεσθαι (Lhue. 7, 3). τ} δ ὦ τεττάρων
μηνῶν ἀναγράψαι τοὺς νόμους τοὺς Σόλωνος (Lys. 30, 2). Πολλῶν
ἐτῶν ᾿Αγάθων ἐνθάδε οὐκ ἐπιδεδήμηκεν (Pl. Conv. 179). Οὔπω δὴ
πολλοῦ χρόνου τούτου ἡδίονι οἴνῳ ἐπέτυχον (Xen. An. 1, 9, 25).
Rem. 1. Τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρας, in the course of the same day, yet on the same day, on
one and the same day, τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ (§ 45), the same day, often with small differ-
ence. Tov αὐτοῦ θέρους, ev τῷ αὐτῷ θέρει (Thuc. 4, 133). Τοῦ λοιποῦ, in future
(οὐ βλάψομεν τοῦ λοιποῦ ἑκύντες τὸ ἱερόν, Thuc. 4, 98) and τὸ λοιπόν.
Rem. 2. The time in the pr "Ogress Q which is also denoted by the dative with ev:
Ἔν τεσσαράκοντα Mo ἡμέραις “Ayvov χιλίους καὶ πεντήκοντα ὁπλίτας τῇ νύσῳ
ἀπώλεσεν (Thue. 2,58). Ἔν τρισὶν ἡμέραις καὶ τοσαύταις νυξὶ διακόσια καὶ χίλια
στάδια οἱ een dere: διῆλθον (1500). Paneg. 187) }.
ὁ) 'The genitive of a substantive (or word used substantively) and ἃ
participle serves to denote the time (and the circumstance), and indi-
cates that something goes on while the subject is doing the thing, or
is in the situation, denoted by the participle : Κύρου. βασιλεύοντος,
στρατηγοῦντος, in the reign, under the command, of Cyrus. See Par-
ticiples, § 181.
a) The general (possessive) genitive relation may be denoted in
Greek alike by the possessive pronouns and by the genitive of the
personal pronouns: τὰ ἡμέτερα ὅπλα, Ta ὅπλα ἡμῶν. A possessive
pronoun may have a genitive standing in apposition to it, especially
that of αὐτός : ᾿Εμὸς αὐτοῦ (αὐτῆς), ἡμέτερος αὐτῶν, my own, our own.
* Λακεδαιμονίων βασιλεὺς ἐντὸς τριῶν ἐτῶν ἀφείλετο τὴν ἀρχήν (Lsocr. Euag. 64,
in less than —).
[PART I.
§ 68.] Prepositions. 57
Eidov τὴν σὴν ἀνδρίαν καὶ μεγαλοφροσύνην, ἀναβαίνοντος ἐπὶ τὸν ὀκρί- [5 67.
βαντα (on the stage) μετὰ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν (PL. Conv. 194).
6) The objective genitive relation is sometimes denoted by a pos-
sessive pronoun: Εὐνοίᾳ ἐρῶ τῇ σῇ (Pl. Gorg, 486). Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι
φόβῳ τῷ ὑμετέρῳ πολεμησείουσιν (Thue. 1, 89)".
ΘΠ ΒΕ Wil
Appendix to the doctrine of Cases: Of the Prepositions, especially
such as govern several cases.
up prepositions which govern more than one case, are partial to the § 68.
accusative (a case in itself not conveying the notion of any particular
relation), when they denote a motion to, along, or over any thing; or
when they have a figurative meaning derived from this (of a relation
which is neither local nor corporeal); sometimes even (e. g. διά and
κατά), when the thought of a local relation altogether disappears in the
figurative meaning. The dative they take in the signification 02, αἵ,
by: the genitive, when they call forth the notion either of a going
out from, or of a connexion with, or of an entering into (e g. μετά,
διά), or of a part (a point) of the whole (8. g. ἐπί, upon).
Rem. The different construction, and the difference of meaning therewith
connected, results—apart from the consideration of the way in which it is
influenced by the notion of rest or of motion involved in the relation—from the
circumstance, that some prepositions in themselves originally denote an undefined
relation capable of being put in various ways; which relation is specifically deter-
mined by the verb and the governing word, e.g. ἐπί, by and upon, but especially
παρά and πρός of a relation beside, and in the direction from something. In the
figurative usage of the prepositions, the original signification, from which that
usage is derived, is in many instances not so easy to discover. The particulars
of these figurative senses in the several constructions must be learnt from the
Lexicon; here, only the primary distinctions are assigned, together with some
examples of the manner in which the more special and less proper applications are
1 Of the vocative, we have only to remark, that in prose it has ὦ before it, with
very rare exceptions where there is a forcible brevity in the expression : "Avdpes, °
διαπλεῖν μέν, ἔνθα βουλύμεθα, ᾿Αρίσταρχος ὅδε τριήρεις ἔχων κωλύει (Xen. An. 7, 3, 3) ;
in the poets ὦ is very often omitted. An adjective is put between ὦ and the sub-
stantive, when it is emphatic (ὦ καλὲ παῖ) ; otherwise it is put after it (ὦ Πρώταρχε
φίλε, Pl. Phil. 53), and always in customary forms of address, as ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι.
Instead of the voeative the poets sometimes put the nominative (δύστηνος, ἀντὶ τοῦ ;
Soph. G. R.1155.) In prose only with οὗτος, this person here, which is also used in
the sense ho, there! you there! An adjective or participle may be annexed as appo-
sition in the nominative with the article: Σὺ δέ, 6 ἄρχων τῶν ἐπὶ ταῖς καμήλοις ἀνδρῶν
(Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 33). (2 Ὑστάσπα καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι οἱ παρύντες, Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, V7)
CHAP. VI.]
58 Prepositions. [ὁ 69, 70.
deduced from the primary senses. In some instances, the senses of two construc-
tions border closely upon one another, and the construction varies in different
authors. From the Lexicon and by practice it must also be learnt, how, even in
prepositions governing only one case, the Greeks apprehended this or that
operation or condition under a different view of the relation in space from that
which lies at the foundation of owr constructions: e.g. μάχεσθαι, θηρεύειν ἀφ᾽
ἵππου, from a horse, i.e. on horse-back.
Διά. 1. With the accusative: by reason of (through, of the cause
and the author): διὰ ταύτην τὴν αἰτίαν (διὰ τοῦτο). Διὰ τὸ κάλλος
καὶ τὴν ἀρετὴν φιλεῖσθαι. Διὰ τοὺς ἐπανορθοῦντας ἀεί τι τῶν μὴ καλῶς
ἐχόντων αἱ ἐπιδόσεις γίγνονται ταῖς πόλεσιν (1506. ἤσαψ. 1). Δικαιο-
σύνη αὐτὴ δ ἑαυτὴν τὸν ἔχοντα ὀνίνησιν (Pl. Rep. 2, 367). (In the
poets, but rarely in the Attic poets, through, along: διὰ πόντον
βαίνειν, Pind., διὰ στόμα ἱεὶς λυγνὺν μέλαιναν, Aischyl., διὰ στόμα
ἔχειν, Arist.)
2. With the genitive: a) through (local) : διὰ Συρίας πορεύεσθαι, διὰ
τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἕλκειν τινά. (Διὰ χειρὸς ἔχειν τι, διὰ στόματος ἔχειν τινά,
διὰ φόβου εἶναι, διὰ φιλίας ἰέναι τινί---δι ὀλίγου, within a little of, ata
short distance from, διὰ δεκάτου ἔτους, with an interval of ten years,
διὰ δέκα ἐπάλξεων, Thuc. 3, 21, at every tenth battlement.) b) by
means of, through (of the means): δ ἀγγέλων διαπράττεσθαί τι, dv
ἑρμηνέως διαλέγεσθαί τινι, διὰ γραμμάτων χρηματίξειν τινί. Δί ὧν ἐκ
χρηστῶν φαῦλα τὰ πράγματα τῆς πόλεως γέγονε, διὰ τούτων ἐλπίζετε
τῶν αὐτῶν πράξεων ἐκ φαύλων αὐτὰ χρηστὰ γενήσεσθαι ; (Dem. 2, 26.)
Κατά. 1. With the accusative: a) over along something (of dif-
fusion or expansion over, or of abiding somewhere in), 77, wpon, at, over
against : Μέγα πένθος ἣν κατὰ τὸ Λακωνικὸν στράτευμα (Xen. Hell. 4,
ὅ, 10). Οὐκ ἣν κατὰ πόλιν (Ρί. Theat. 143. ; in town). Kara Μαλέαν,
directly over against. Οἱ κατὰ ταῦτα οἰκοῦντες (Xen. An. 7, 5, 16;
here-abouts, in these parts). Kata γῆν, κατὰ θάλασσαν. Of time: Kara
τοὺς ‘Hpaxneidas, οἱ καθ᾽ ἡμᾶς, κατ᾽ εἰρήνην, in time of peace. b) ac-
cording to, agreeably with, after—in proportion ox relation to, and con-
cerning (of that which belongs to something and points to it) ,—a/ter
the manner of, answering to,—wise (of the sort or manner denoted by
the substantive, especially in distribution, where a certain number
recurs continually): Κατὰ τοὺς νόμους ζῆν (Pl. Prot. 326). Kata
νοῦν ἐμοὶ τὰ πράγματα γέγονεν. Kata Θουκυδίδην, κατὰ τὸν σὸν
λόγον. Πλείω ἢ κατὰ τὸ ἡμέτερον πλῆθος. Κατὰ τὴν χρείαν καλὰ
ταῦτω λέγω (Pl. Gorg. 474.) Ta κατὰ Τ}αυσανίαν (the affair of P., the
account concerning him). Kara τὸ σῶμα, as to or in the body. Ov
κατὰ τούτους ῥήτωρ εἰμί (Pl. Apol. 17, in their manner, after their
measure).—Kata πόλεις, city-wise, city by city, each city by atself,
[PART I.
δ 71—73.] Prepositions. 59
καθ᾽ ἕνα (καθ᾽ ἕνα τῶν Ελλήνων, Dem., the Greeks, man by man), κατ᾽ [§ 7°-]
ὀλίγους. 6) on account of, for (of cause and purpose) : Οἱ πρόγονοι
ἡμῶν τὴν προξενίαν ὑ ὑμῶν κατά τι ἔγκλημα ἀπεῖπον (Thuc. 6, 89). ᾿Αφιγ-
μένοι κατὰ χρημάτων πόρον (Xen. Hell. 5, - 7, with intent to get,—for).
"AvaBaivew κατὰ θέαν τοῦ χωρίου (Thuc. 5, 7, to get a view of —; for
a “8 of —).
. With the genitive: a) down upon or over, also under: κατὰ τῆς
πὸ κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς, μυρίας κατὰ γῆς ὀργυίας γενέσθαι (Xen. An.
7,1, 30). b) against, upon, of (im expressions denoting a complaint
against or a sentence upon, or generally something said of a person).
Mnview κατά τινος, (hue. 6, 60). Λέγω ov καθ᾽ ἁπάντων, ἀλλὰ κατὰ
τῶν ᾿ἐνόχων τοῖς εἰρημένοις ὄντων (Lsocr. ad Nic. 41). Μέγιστον
ἐγκώμιον κατὰ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων. “Ὥςπερ λέγεται κατὰ τῶν μεμυημένων
(Pl. Phed. 81, in the case of).
Ὑπέρ. 1. With the accusative: over, above (of exceeding and sur- ἢ 71.
passing): ὑπὲρ τριάκοντα ἔτη, μεγέθει καὶ ῥώμῃ ὑπὲρ τοὺς ἐν TH νηὶ
πάντας εἶναι (Pl. Rep. 6, 488), ὑπὲρ ἄνθρωπον φρονεῖν. (Rarely beyond,
to denote distance : πέζ) Badivew 4 ὑπὲρ τὰς Πύλας καὶ Φωκέας (Dem. 6, 36; to beyond).
Poetically and in Herodotus, ove, so that the goal lies on the farther side : ῥιπτεῖν
τι ὑπὲρ τὸν δόμον, over the house, to the other side of tt.
2. With the genitive: a) over, above (denoting the where) : Ὃ ὑπὲρ
τῆς κώμης γήλοφος. “Ἥλιος ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν καὶ τῶν στεγῶν πορεύεται
(Xen. Mem. ὅ, ὃ, 9). Οἱ ὑπὲρ Χεῤῥονήσου Θρᾷκες (Xen. An. 2, 0; zie
b) for (ia defence of, for the good Oh ye Aéyew, μάχεσθαι ὑπέρ τινος,
Jor, instead of. "Eye ὑπὲρ σοῦ ἀποκρινοῦμαι.
᾿Αμφί. 1. With the accusative: a) about, of motion, tarrying and ᾧ 72.
surrounding ; mostly poetical ; in prose of ἀμφί τινα, those about, the
train or suit of, a person (οἱ ἀμφὶ Κῦρον), the person himself with his
companions ox those. like him (ot appt’ Fh oe ἀμφί τι ἔχειν (εἶναι),
to be busied about a thing. b) about, towards (of time, or magnitude):
ἀμφὶ δείλην, ἀμφὶ τὰ ἑκκαίδεκα ETN γεγονώς.
2. With the dative: a) on, with, or in a thing about me (ἀμφὶ κλάδοις ἔζεσθαι,
with boughs about me), merely poetical. b) about , for, of : φοβεῖσθαι ἀμφὶ γυναικΐ,
poetical, and in Herodotus.
3. With the genitive: about, around (rare), of, poetical. (Ἢ δίκη ἡ ἀμφὶ τοῦ
πατρός, Xen. Cyr. iii. 1, 8.)
Ἔπί. 1. With the accusative : a) upon (Lat. a with accusative) : ὃ 73.
ἀναβαίνειν ava ἵππον. b) to (towards, to fetch something), against
(persons) : ἰέναι ἐπὶ τὰς TOV πλουσίων θύρας, καταφεύγειν ἐπὶ λόφον
(ἐπὶ δεξιὰ κεῖσθαι), καλεῖσθαι ἐπὶ δεῖπνον, ἄγειν τινὰ ἐπὶ τὰ καλὰ
κἀγαθά, ἐ ἰέναι ἐπὶ πῦρ, ἐφ᾽ ὕδωρ, ἐπὶ ξύλα τὰς ναῦς πέμπειν ποι, συν-
ίστασθαι ἐ ἢ τοὺς ἄρχειν ἐπιχειροῦντας (Xen. (γν».1,1,3). Θρασύμαχος
CHAP. VI
L$ 73.]
60 Prepositions. [ὃ 73.
ἧκεν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς ὡς διαρπασόμενος (Pl. Rep. 1, 336). Μηχανᾶσθαίτι ἐπί
τινα. (Πεφυκέναι ἐπί τι, to be made for something.) ©) over (of expan-
sion in space and time) : ἐπὶ τεσσαράκοντα στάδια διήκειν, ἐ ἐπὶ πᾶσαν
Ἐὐρώπην καὶ ᾿Ασίαν ἐλλόγιμος. Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐδήουν τὴν γῆν ἐπὶ δύο
ἡμέρας, Thuc. 2, 25, for two days, for the space of. (Emi δέκα ἔτη
ἀπομισθοῦν τι, Thuc. 3, 68, to let for ten 3 years.) (πὶ πλέον, ἐπὶ
μεῖζον, adverbially, im greater extent; ἐπὶ πᾶν, Thue. 5, 68, on the
whole, on the average.)
With the dative: a) on, by, beside (of place and of things) :
οἰκεῖν ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάττῃ, εἶναι ἐπὶ ταῖς πύλαις, μένειν ἐπὶ τῷ ἀληθεῖ,
οἱ ἐπὶ ταῖς μηχαναῖς (Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 38, the people with the engines).
b) (more rarely in prose) oz (Lat. im with abl.): κείμενος ἐπὶ
τῇ πυρᾷ (Pi. Rep. 10, 614), ἀλωπεκίδας ἐπὶ ταῖς κεφαλαῖς φορεῖν
(Xen. An. 7, 4, 4). ὦ at, against: τόξα τιταίνειν ἐπί τινι, poetically and
Ionic. 4) besides, in addition to, after (of accompaniment and im-
mediate sequence) : ἐπὶ τῷ σίτῳ ὅψον ἐσθίειν, ἀργύριον ἔχειν ἐπὶ TH
γυναικί (Ise. 3, 28, to get money with his τ: his wife and money
besides ie ᾿Ανέστη € ἐπ᾿ αὐτῷ Φεραύλας (Xen. Cyr. 2, 3,7). Ἢ ἐπὶ τῇ νυκτί,
ἡ ἐξῆλθον, ἡμέρα (Xen, Hell. 4, 4, 9). Οἱ ἐπὶ πᾶσι, the last. 6) upon,
on account of, for (the occasion) : θαυμάζεσθαι ἐπὶ ζωγραφίᾳ, φθονεῖν
τινι ἐπί τινί, λέγειν ἐπί τινι (to speak upon a person, over his grave).
Ent μὲν τοῖς τῶν φίλων ἀγαθοῖς ὑπ ἐπὶ δὲ τοῖς κακοῖς σκυθρωποὶ
γιγνόμεθα (Xen. Mem. ὃ, 10, 4). f) for, with a view to (the condition
on account of which something i is done, with a view to obtain it): : ἐπὶ
μισθῷ, for pay. “Eni πόσῳ ἂν ἐθέλοις τὴν γυναῖκά σου ἀκοῦσαι, ὅτι
σκευοφορεῖς ; ; (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1,43.) Ἐπὶ τούτῳ πέφυκεν (παῤεσικεύσον
ἡ τέχνη. "Ayew τὴν βασιλέως θυγατέρα ἐπὶ γάμῳ (Xen. An. 2, 4, δ).
"Eri τῷ “ἡμετέρῳ ἀγαθῷ ᾿Αράσπας ἐκινδύνευσεν (Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 16).
Δέομαι ἄγειν σχολὴν ἐπὶ τῇ ὑμετέρᾳ παρακελεύσει (ί. Anot. 36, 7
order to exhor ting you. ) g) am the power, at the command (of a person) :
ὋὉπόταν βούλῃ εἰςιέναι ὡς ἐμέ, ἐπὶ σοὶ ἔσται (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3,14). Ta
ἐφ᾽ ἡμῖν, what we have in our own power, what rests with us.
3. With the genitive: a) upon (in answer to the question where ’):
καθῆσθαι ἐ ἐπὶ τον, ὀχεῖσθαι ἐφ᾽ ἁμάξης, περιάγειν τινὰ ἐφ᾽ ἵππου, ἐπὶ
τοῦ αἰγιαλοῦ αὐλίζεσθαι, ἐπ᾿ ἀγκύρας ὁρμεῖν, ἐπὶ τεττάρων. τετάχθαι (ὁ γ
fours, 1. 6. four men deep). Hence b) (close) deside: μένειν ἐπὶ τοῦ
ποταμοῦ (Xen. An. 4, ὃ, 28). Ta ἐπὶ Θράκης. 9) before, by (in pre-
sence of) : ἐπὶ τῶν στρατηγῶν, ἐπὶ μαρτύρων (ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, by themselves
alone). d) by, upon (i. ὃς in the case, or, in the matter of) : ὅπερ ἐπὶ
τῶν δούλων λέγομεν. “A ἐ ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὁρᾶτε, ἐφ᾽ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν ἀγνοεῖτε
(Isoer.). "Ταῦτα τοιαῦτα ὄντα ἐπ᾽ αὐτῆς τῆς ἀληθείας δείκνυται (Dem. 18,
[PART I.
§ 74, 75.] Prepositions. 61
22, in truth itself). 6) with (so that one has and uses something) : [8 73-]
Ἢ 3, 19 , εἴτ ἢ ἐ / μὴ Ly x e , θ /
π᾿ ἐξουσίας, ὁπόσης ἠβούλοντο, ἔπραττον, ὅπως ἡ πόλις ληφθήσεται
(οι. 9, 61). "Ext τοῦ ὀνόματος τούτου πάντα τὸν χρόνον ἣν (Den. 39,
21, have always gone by this name). (Ἐπὶ τῆς τοιαύτης γίγνεσθαι γνώ-
uns, Dem. 4, 6, to keep to this opinion.) f) in the time of: ἐπὶ τῶν
ἡμετέρων προγόνων (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 31). ᾿Ἐπὶ τοῦ Δεκελεικοῦ πολέμου
ΓΞ ρ fe a € 5 ’ ΄ lal “ s "
(Dem. 22,15). Ot ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν.--- ΟἹ (set) over (of office and business) :
οἱ ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων (Dem. 18, 247).—h) towards (in the direction
of): ἀποπλεῖν ἐπ᾽ Αἰγύπτου, ἐπὶ Σαρδέων φεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν ἐπ᾽
οἴκου (homewards).
Μετά. 1. With the accusative : a) after (of time and order) : μετὰ § 74.
ταῦτα, thereupon ; μετὰ τοὺς θεούς, next to the gods. Ὁ) after (to go after
a thing and fetch it): πλεῖν μετὰ χαλκόν, poetical, whence μετέρχομαι, μεταπέμπομαι.
c) MeO ἡμέραν, by day; μετὰ χεῖρας ἔχειν, to have in hand.
2. With the dative: among, amid, poetical: per ᾿Αργείοις, μετὰ φρεσίν.
3. With the genitive: with (following and connected with) : ἰέναι
μετά τινος, καθῆσθαι μετὰ TOV ἄλλων, οἰκεῖν μετὰ θεῶν (among), μετὰ
τοῦ δικαίου (μετ᾽ ἀδικίας) κτᾶσθαί τι, μετὰ πόνων καὶ κινδύνων ἐλευθε-
ροῦν τὴν πατρίδα. (Σύν has partly the same signification ; but σύν
expresses rather a union, μετά participation and companionship, e. g.
in compounds, συνέχω, hold together, μετέχω, share in.)
Tapa. 1. With the accusative: a) along, (past) by, beside, in course § 75.
of (during, of time): παρὰ τὴν θάλατταν ἰέναι (Xen. An.5, 10,18). Κῶμαι
πολλαὶ ἦσαν Tapa Tov ποταμόν (Xen. An.3,5,1). Tapa τὰς ναῦς ἀριστο-
ποιεῖσθαι (Thuc. 7,39). apa τὴν ὁδὸν κρήνη ἣν (Xen. An. 1, 2, 13).
Μεθύοντα ἄνδρα παρὰ νηφόντων λόγους παραβάλλειν (Pl. Conv. 214 ;
to place them side by side with, for comparison). (Seldom precisely with,
εἶναι παρά twa.) Παρὰ τὸν νεὼν ποταμὸς Tapappet. Παρὰ τὴν Βαβυ-
λῶνα παριέναι. apa τὸν πότον, παρὰ πάντα τὸν βίον. Tap’ ἑκάστην
ἡμέραν, παρὰ τὴν ἀρχήν τινος. (Ilap’ αὐτὼ τὰ ἀδικήματα, Dem. 37, 2,
immediately upon, after.) Ὁ) to (mostly of persons): ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμὲ
elsod0s (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 14), ἀπιέναι παρὰ τὸν θεόν (Pl. Phed. 85).
6) In comparison with (im preference to): ᾿Αχιλλεὺς τοῦ κινδύνου
κατεφρόνησε Tapa τὸ αἰσχρόν τι ὑπομεῖναι (Pl. Apol. 28). Διάδηλος
ἣν παρὰ τοὺς ἄλλους εὐτακτῶν (Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 2). ἃ) beside, except :
ἄλλο τι παρὰ ταῦτα (PI. Apol. 6, 406). 6) against (not in accordance with :
otherwise than) : παρὰ φύσιν, παρὰ δόξαν (γνώμην), παρὰ τοὺς νόμους,
παρὰ τὰ σημαινόμενα (contrary to the orders). [) by, with the distinction
of (of the thing which turns the scale, of the magnitude or amount of
the difference, properly, past so much): παρὰ μικρόν, παρ᾽ ὀλίγον
ἀποφεύγειν (barely to escape, with but a little between that and de-
CHAP. VI.]
[8 75-]
62 Prepositions. [ὃ 76.
struction), mapa πολὺ νικᾶν. OvK @ @uny οὕτω παρ᾽ ὀλίγον ἔσεσθαι, ἀλλὰ
παρὰ πολύ (Pl. Apol. 36). Παρ᾽ ὀλίγας ψήφους Φίλιππον ἢ ἠτιμώσατε
§ 76.
(Dem. 24, 138; by a small majority). UWlapa μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν
(Lsoer. Zig. 22; was within a little of —). g) through, by means of (of
that which turns the scale, and on which the result critically depends) :
Ov παρ᾽ ἕν οὐδὲ δύο εἰς τοῦτο τὰ πράγματα ἀφῖκται (Dem. 0..9ὴ: amo
πάντων ὁμολογεῖται, ne τοῦτον γενέσθαι τὴν σωτηρίαν τοῖς πολιορκου-
μένοις (Isocr. Archid. 52). “Exaotos ov Tapa τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀμέλειαν
οἴεται βλάψειν. μέλειν δὲ τινι καὶ ἄλλῳ ὑπὲρ ἑαυτοῦ τι προϊδεῖν (Thue.
171 jor hin, instead of his taking care for himself). ἘΠ) παρ᾽ οὐδὲν
τρεῖς 1; παρ᾽ sibs εἶναι, to make of no account, to go for nothing.
2. With the dative: with (in answer to the question where 2
usually of persons) : Tapa TO βασιλεῖ τιμῆς τυγχάνειν, σιτεῖσθαιν παρὰ
τῇ μητρί. Hapa θεοῖς καὶ παρ᾽ ἀνθρώποις τοῖς νοῦν ἔχουσι δικαιοσύνη
διαφερόντως τετίμηται (Pl. Ale. τι. 150).
3. With the genitive : from, of (a person, or a thine conceived of as
a person), from beside : ᾿Λγγελοι ἦλθον παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως. Παρὰ
Κύρου οὐδεὶς λέγεται αὐτομολῆσαι πρὸς βασιλέα, παρὰ δὲ βασιλέως
πολλαὶ μυριάδες πρὸς Κῦρον (Xen. eon. 4., 18). Οἱ παρὰ Νικίου. ap’
ἑαυτοῦ διδόναι. Evvova rapa θεῶν. Ὁμολογεῖται παρὰ πάντων. ‘Ogel-
λεται παρὰ TOU ἐχθροῦ τῴ ἐχθρῷ κακόν (Pl. Rep. 1, 332). Mavéavew
TL παρά τινος.
Περί. 1. With the accusative : 2) round, about (somewhere among,
in) : Toy ἥλιον ἐνόμιζον ἰέναι περὶ τὴν γὴν: Οἱ περὶ Κῦρον. (Cf.
ἀμφί) [Ὥιμκουν Φοίνικες περὶ πᾶσαν τὴν Σικελίαν (Thuc. 6,2). Hivas
περὶ ᾿Ἑλλήςποντον. Ταύτας τὰς πολιτείας εὕροι ἄν τις οὐκ ἐλάττους
περὶ τοὺς βαρβάρους ἢ περὶ τοὺς “Ἕλληνας (Pl. Rep. 8, ὅ44). Περὶ
τούτους τοὺς χρόνους, περὶ μέσας νύκτας. Llepi τριςχιλίους (some-
where about, more or less). b) about, 1. 6. with regard to, towards (of
that which one is occupied about, or bearing towards) : : εἶναι περὶ τὴν
θήραν, διατρίβειν περὶ τὴν γεωμετρίαν, σπουδάζειν περί τι, εὐσεβεῖν, σω-
φρονεῖν περὶ θεούς, ἄδικος, πονηρός, ἀνὴρ “ἀγαθὸς περί τινα, περὶ τὴν
πόλιν. Αἱ νομοθεσίαν περὶ τὸ μέλλον εἰσίν. Ta περὶ τὴν δίκην (what
belongs to the cause), τὰ περί τινα (but τὰ περὶ τῆς δίκης πυνθάνεσθαι,
Pl. Phed. 58, as in 8).
2. With the dative: a) about, on (a part of the body) : Οἱ Θρᾷκες
χίτωνας φοροῦσιν οὐ μόνον περὶ τοῖς στέρνοις, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ τοῖς
μηροῖς (Xen. An. 7, 4, 4). Ὁ) about, for (of a care) : φοβεῖσθαι περί
τίνι, θαῤῥεῖν περί τινι. (Poetically also of fighting for, in defence of: μάχεσθαι
περὶ τοῖς σκύωνοις.)
[PART I.
§ 77.] _ Prepositions. 63
3. With the genitive: a) about, of (something as matter of dis- [§ 76.]
course, knowledge, treatment, endeavour) : διαλέγεσθαι, βουλεύεσθαι,
πυνθάνεσθαι, πρέσβεις πέμπειν, μάχεσθαι περί τινος, κινδυνεύειν περὶ
τῶν ἐσχάτων. Περὶ τούτων οὕτως ἔδοξεν. Ilepi μὲν δὴ βρώσεως καὶ
πόσεως οὕτω Σωκράτης παρεσκευασμένος ἣν (Xen. Mem. ile 3, 15; as
regards, when one comes to speak of —). Ti ole ποιήσειε αὐτὸν πρὸς
τοὺς νόμους τιμῆς τε πέρι καὶ πειθαρχίας ; (Pl. Rep. 7, 5383; in point
of —.) (Sometimes instead of with the accusative in sense bach περὶ
τῆς ἀρετῆς, especially with reference to the added verb, e.g. Ta
περὶ Kudpovos εἴρηται, Xen. Hell. 7, 4, 1 [which may be said to be
compounded of ta περὶ Evdpova, and εἴρηται περὶ Evdpovos].) b)
Περὶ πολλοῦ, παντὸς, ὀλίγου, οὐδενὸς ποιεῖσθαι, to value much, &e.
(literally, to make to oneself a question about something great), to ac-
count of much importance. (Poetical: about (round, περὶ σπείους γλαφυροῖο,
Od. 5, 68); before, of pre-eminence, περὶ πάντων ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, Il. 1, 287.)
Πρός. 1. With the accusative: a) 70, towards (of persons and § 77.
things) : ἀπελθεῖν πρός τινα. προςάγειν πρὸς τὸ τεῖχος, ἀποβλέπειν
πρὸς τὸν θεόν, παροξύνειν πρὸς τὰ καλώ, σκοπεῖν πρός it. Τ]ρὸς ἕω,
east-ward, τὰ πρὸς βορέαν. (Τ]ρὸς ἕω also towards morning.) )) to,
against, with, of an action in relation to some person who, from the
other side, takes part in the action; of a state of mind towards a
person or thing: διηγεῖσθαί τι πρός τινας, διαγωνίζεσθαι. πρὸς τοὺς
πολεμίους, μάχη Lepoav πρὸς ᾿Αθηναίους, στασιάζειν πρὸς τὸν ἄρχοντα,
σπονδὰς ποιεῖσθαι πρὸς τοὺς στρατηγοὺς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, αἱ πρὸς τοὺς
τυράννους τ (Dem. 6, 21), ἀγυμνάστως ἔχειν πρὸς θάλπη καὶ ψύχ ἢ
(Xen. Mem. 2, 1, 6), Cn ben πρὸς τὴν ἔξοδον (Xen. An. 7, 1, 9), λόγος
πρὸς Λεπτίνην (aoaan st; of an impeachment: κατὰ Nerccon (Οὐδὲν
πρὸς ἐμέ, it is nothing to me.) 0) im relation to; for: καλὸς πρὸς
δρόμον, οὐδενὸς ἄξιος πρὸς σοφίαν. Λέγειν πρὸς τὸ βέλτιστον. Βου-
λεύεσθαι πρὸς τὸ παρόν. Τείχη καὶ τάφροι ταῖς πόλεσι πρὸς φυλακὴν
καὶ σωτηρίαν εὑρημέναι εἰσίν (Dem. 6, 23). Upon (of the occasion) :
Πρὸς τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων μεγάλην κακοπραγίαν εὐθὺς οἱ EXAnves πάν-
τες ἐπηρμένοι ἦσαν, Thuc. 8, 2. Πρὸς τοῦτο, πρὸς ταῦτα, consequentl γ.
4) mn comparison with : Φαῦλοι πρὸς ἡμᾶς. ᾿Αστύοχος πάντα ὕστερα
ἐνόμισε πρὸς τὸ ναῦς τοσαύτας ξυμπαρακομίσαι (Lhuc. 8, 41). Tapopav
Ti πρὸς Ta δίκαια. 9) IIpds βίαν, πρὸς φιλίαν, πρὸς ὀργήν, πρὸς χάριν,
adverbially, violently, &e.
2. With the dative: a) dy, at: IIpos Βαβυλῶνι ἦν ὁ Κῦρος (Xen.
Cyr. 7,5, 1). pos rots κριταῖς (more usually ἐπὶ τῶν κριτῶν, παρὰ
τοῖς 6. Εἶναι πρός τινι, to be at (occupied about) something, to have
one’s mind directed ἐὺ something. b) besides, in addition to: Πρὸς
CHAP. VI.]
[§ 77-]
64 Prepositions. [$ 78.
τοῖς ἄλλοις πᾶσιν καὶ πανοῦργός ἐστιν. ἸΙρὸς τούτοις. (Πρὸς δέ, and
οδιαί65.)
3. With the genitive: a) from, and from the side of a person or
thing (of that which comes ‘from it, is viewed in reference to we "He
πρὸς νότου. Ta ὑποζύγια ἔχειν πρὸς τοῦ ποταμοῦ (Xen. An. 2 2, 2, 4,
on the side turned towards the river). IIpos πατρός, πρὸς μητρός, On
the Sather s, mother’s side. pos μὲν θεῶν ἀσεβές, πρὸς δὲ ἀνθρώπων
αἰσχρόν (Ken. An. 2, 5, 20). b) mm favour φῇ, on the side of ἃ person,
in accordance with : ᾿ ἐν στενῷ ναυμα ia πρὸς Λακεδαιμονίων ἐστίν
(Thuc. 2, 86). ‘O θεὸς πρὸς ἡμῶν ἔσται (Thue. 4, 92). Ta ὅπλα (τὴν
ψῆφον) τίθεσθαι πρός τινος. Οὐκ ἦν πρὸς τοῦ Κύρου πρύπου, ἔχοντα
μὴ ἀποδιδόναι τς An. 1,2,11). "Atoma λέγεις καὶ οὐδαμῶς πρὸς
σοῦ (Xen. Mem. 2, ὅ, 15). ἡ from (of that which proceeds from a person
through an action ; poet. and in Herodot.): Kaxév τι πρὸς θεῶν ἢ ἀνθρώπων λαβεῖν
(Hat.), μανθάνειν τι πρός Twos (Soph., usually παρά). Πρὸς τοῦ διδαχθείς ; (Soph. =
ὑπό.) ᾿Αδικεῖσθαι πρός τινος (Hur. = ὑπό). τιμᾶσθαι πρός τινος (Hdt.). d) by,
in prayer and adjuration by something (on behalf of it) : Πρὸς παίδων
καὶ γυναικῶν ἱκετεύω καὶ ἀντιβολῶ (Lys. 4, 20). Μή, πρὸς θεῶν, ποι-
nons. (With the accusative σέ elliptically : Μή, πρὸς σὲ γονώτων τῆς
τε νεογάμου κόρης, ἔπ». Med. 324.)
Ὑπό. 1. With the accusative: a) 246), in answer to the ques-
tion whither 2 ἰέναι ὑπὸ γῆν, ὑπ᾿ αὐτὰ τὰ τείχη ἄγειν TO στράτευμα,
ὑπὸ ) τειχίον ἀποστῆναι (Pl. 6, 496), and figuratively, of a higher power:
ὑπάγειν τινὰ ὑπὸ τοὺς νόμους, ὑπὸ τὴν ψῆφον ἔρχεσθαι. Αἴγυπτος
ὑπὸ βασιλέα ἐγένετο (Thue. 1,110). Τάδε πάντα ᾿Αθηναῖοι πειράσονται
ὑπὸ σφᾶς ποιεῖσθαι (Lhuc. A, 60). Also ποιεῖσθαι ud ἑαυτῷ). b)
towards, about, of time: ὑπὸ τὴν ψύκτα, ὑπὸ τὴν ἕω. Οἱ Αὐγινῆται
Λακεδαιμονίων εὐεργέται ἦσαν ὑπὸ τὸν σεισμὸν καὶ τῶν αἱλώτων τὴν
ἐπανάστασιν (Thuc. 2, 27). ©) sometimes wader, in answer to the
question where? at ὑπὸ τὸ oaes κῶμαι (Xen. An. 7, 4, 5), ot ὑπὸ
βασιλέα βάρβαροι (Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 11).
2. With the dative e: under (of the place and situation) : ὑπὸ TH
Αἴτνῃ οἰκεῖν, ὑπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλει, ἔχειν τι ὑπὸ τῷ ἱματίῳ, πολλὰς πόλεις
ἔχειν up ἑαυτῷ (ποιεῖσθαι ὑφ᾽ ἑαυτῷ), τρέφεσθαι ὑπὸ τῷ πατρί.
Ἡγοῦμαι τοῦτ᾽ εἶναι τῶν καλῶν ὑπὸ τοιούτοις ἤθεσι τραφῆναι καὶ
παιδευθῆναι (Isocr. de Big. 28; under a man of such character).
3. With the genitive: a) from under, sometimes simply under : Sa
πηγὴ χαριεστάτη ὑπὸ τῆς πλατάνου pet (Pl. Phad. 230). Ta ὑπὸ γῆς
δικαιωτήρια (Pl. Phad. 349). Ὁ) by, of the acting person or efficient
cause with passives: Τιτρώσκεσθαι, αἱρεῖσθαι ὑπό τινος, τείχη ἀνάλωτα
ὑπὸ πολεμίων. Also with neuters, and with phrases in which the
[PART 1.
§ 79, 80.] Prepositions. : 65
subject is passive to the action, and which therefore have a significa- [ς 78.]
tion similar to the passive: εἶναι ἐν μεγάλῳ ἀξιώματι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀστῶν
(Thue. 1. 150), δίκην διδόναι ὑπὸ θεῶν, συμφορᾷ περιπίπτειν, πληγὰς
λαμβάνειν ὑπό τινος, ἐκπίπτειν (to be driven into exile) ὑπὸ τῶν τυράν-
νων. Ὅ,τι ὑμεῖς, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, πεπόνθατε ὑπὸ τῶν ἐμῶν κατηγό-
3 aD > \ ᾿] 3 \ ’ \ id ϑ > an ’ / ’ n 3 ,
ρων, οὐκ οἶδα" ἐγὼ δ᾽ οὖν καὶ αὐτὸς UT αὐτῶν ὀλίγου ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπελαθό-
μην (Pl. Apol. 17). With verbal substantives: Τὰ τοῦ Κρόνου ἔργα
καὶ παθήματα ὑπὸ τοῦ υἱέος (Pl. Rep. 2, 378). 0) from, in consequence
of, of cause and occasion: Καμβύσης μαινόμενος ὑπὸ μέθης τὴν ἀρχὴν
ἀπώλεσεν ὑπὸ Μήδων (Pl. Legg. 3, 695). Δημοσθένης ἡσύχαζεν ὑπ᾿
ἀπλοίας (Thuc. 4, 4). Οὐχ οἷόν τε ἦν ἀποχωρεῖν ὑπὸ τῶν ἱππέων
(Thuc. 7,78). 4) under, to, of an accompaniment (to the sound of),
cheering, quickening, or compulsion: ὑπὸ σάλπιγγος πίνειν, χωρεῖν
UT αὐλητῶν, ὑπὸ μαστίγων τοξεύειν (under the lash, compelled by it).
(In later writers with the dative.)
Rem. The acting person with a passive verb is sometimes denoted by παρά, when
the action is to be conceived as coming from, from the side of, the person: Οἶμαί με
παρὰ Gov πολλῆς καὶ καλῆς σοφίας πληρωθήσεσθαι (Pl. Conv. 175), in the poets and
Herodotus also by πρός (see mpés, genitive, 6) and by ἐξ: Ta γενόμενα ἐξ ἀνθρώπων
(dt. 1, 1), πεισθῆναι ἔκ τινος (Soph. El. 409). (Δημαράτῳ αὕτη ἡ χώρα δῶρον ἐκ
βασιλέως ἐδόθη, Xen. Hell. 3, 1, 6, on the part of the king.) ᾿Από also is occa-
sionally used by some (Thucydid.) in the sense of proceeding from a person, with
the passive of certain verbs, e.g. do, say: Οἱ τύραννοι SC ἀσφαλείας ὅσον ἐδύναντο
μάλιστα τὰς πόλεις ῴκουν, ἐπράχθη τε ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν οὐδὲν ἔργον ἀξιόλογον (Thuc. 1, 17).
a) Sometimes a verb, not in itself denoting any motion, is so conceived as to § 79.
include the notion of an antecedent or accompanying motion, on which accordingly
depends the preposition or a local adverb, especially πάρειμι: παρεῖναι ἐς ἄστυ.
Ἔνταυθοϊ πάρεισιν (Pl. Apol. 33). (Καθέξεσθαι ἐς τὸ Ἡραῖον, ἐπὶ τὴν ἑστίαν, ἄλλοσέ
ποι, to seat, betake, oneself thither.) Conversely, prepositions and adverbs denoting
rest and continuance, stand with verbs which in themselves denote the antecedent
motion, e.g. ἐκ τῆς πόλεως, οὗ κατέφυγεν, Xen. Cyr. 5, 4,15. ᾿Ανέβην ἐνθάδε, Xen.
Hell. 1, 7,16. Ἐνταῦθα ja, Pl. Apol. 36.
6) The prepositions ἀπό and ἐξ, together with παρά, are sometimes (as also
occasionally in English) annexed adjectively with the article to a substantive, where
one should rather expect ἐν or παρά with the dative (denoting residence in or at a
place, or with some one), viz. when a motion of the person or thing to another
place, or a residence at another place is denoted: KAéavdpos, ὁ ἐκ Βυζαντίου ἅρμο-
στής, μέλλει ἥξειν (Xen. An. 6, 4, 18; the governor from Byzantium). Οἱ ἀπὸ
θαλάσσης ᾿Ακαρνᾶνες ἀδύνατοι ἦσαν ξυμβοηθεῖν (Thuc. 2, 80). "Osres ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν
παρὰ βασιλέως πρὸς Κῦρον, πάντας οὕτως διετίθη ὥςθ᾽ ἑαυτῷ μᾶλλον φίλους εἶναι ἢ
βασιλεῖ (Xen. An. 1,1, 16). (Δημοσθένης ἔτι ἐτύγχανεν dv μετὰ τὰ ἐκ τῆς Αἰτωλίας
περὶ Ναύπακτον, Thuc. 3, 102, was still, after the events in Aitolia, about NV.) So
likewise ἐνθένδε, ἐκεῖθεν. ἤΛγγελοι τῶν ἔνδοθεν (Thue. 7, 73).
a) Between a preposition and its case, besides the definitions belonging to this ¢ 80
case (e.g. ἐκ τῶν ἔ jis ἐπιμελείας, Thuc. 3, 46, for ἐκ τῆς ἐπ. τ. ἔργων, ἐπὶ πολλὰς δ΄ ὁ
; -g- PY®V TNS επιμελειας, ue. . HO, LOY εκ τὴς ἐπ. τ. εργῶν, ἐπι πολλᾶς
ναῦς κεκτημένους, Xen. Hell. 5, 1, 19, against people possessed of many ships), there
CHAP. VI. ] F
66 Verb and its kinds. [$ 81, 82.
[§ 80.] may stand a particle of transition or connexion (as τέ, γέ, μέν, δέ, yap, αὖ, οὖν, ἄρα),
‘sometimes several of these, and enclitic cases of the pronouns, e.g. ἐν αὖ τοῖς δημο-
σίοις κινδύνοις (Pl. Rep. 9,577). Πρὸς μὲν ἄρα σοι τὸν πατέρα (Pl. Crit. 50). (EE,
οἶμαι, τῆς ἀκροτάτης ἐλευθερίας, Pl. Rep. 8, 564.)
Rem. An adjective or participle, as apposition to the governed word, stands
sometimes between this and the preposition: ἐν μόνῃ τῶν πασῶν πόλεων TH
ὑμετέρᾳ (Dem. 8, 64). Διὰ φιλίας τῆς Θράκης πορεύομαι (Xen. Hell. 3, 2, 9).
6) Prepositions are often put after their case by the poets (ἀναστροφή). but in
prose only περί is thus put (when the substantive has the emphasis, e. g. Εὐβοίας μὲν
πέρι, sometimes after several words: ὧν ἐγὼ οὐδὲν οὔτε μέγα οὔτε σμικρὸν πέρι ἐπαΐω,
Pl. Apol. 19), and most frequently ἕνεκα. (Ὧν ἄνευ in Xenophon.)
c) The position between the adjective and its substantive is rare in prose (chiefly
with pronouns: τοιᾷδε ev τάξει), in the poets frequent.
4 The preposition may stand between an adjective and an adverb of degree
belonging to the adjective : πολὺ ἐν δεινοτέροις, ὡς διὰ βραχυτάτων.
Rem. Whether the preposition with connected substantives shall be repeated
with each, depends upon the consideration, whether the connected words coalesce
into one notion, or whether they are separated (as with ἀλλά, οὔτε, 7); some-
times, however, the preposition is omitted, where we should have expected it to
be repeated, e.g. with 71. If to the governed substantive there is annexed a
comparison by ὡς (ὥςπερ), in Greek the comparison is often put first, and usually
is immediately followed by the preposition without repeating this with the prin-
cipal substantive: ‘Qs περὶ μητρὸς καὶ τροφοῦ τῆς χώρας. ἐν 7) τεθράμμεθα, Bovdev-
εσθαι δεῖ (Pl. Rep. 8, 414. = περὶ τῆς x. ὡς περὶ μητρός). ‘Qs πρὸς εὖ βουλευομένους
τοὺς ἐναντίους παρασκευάζεσθαι χρή (Thue. 1, 84).
Eis, until, for, is connected with adverbs of time: εἰς ἀεί, εἰς αὖθις, ἐς αὔριον. ἐς
ἔπειτα, ἐς ὁπότ᾽ ἔσται (Adsch. 3, 99), μέχρι with adverbs of place: μέχρι ἐνταῦθα,
μέχρι δεῦρο, βουλεύεσθαι, μέχρι ὅποι τὴν σοφίαν ἀσκητέον ἐστίν (Pl. Gorg. 487).
(Also μέχρι ὀψέ, Thue.)
CHAPTER. Vide
The Verb and its kinds, and the Gerundive’.
§ 52. In point of syntax, it is indifferent, whether the active (transitive or
intransitive) signification is attached to a verb of active form, or to
the middle of an otherwise active verb, or to a deponent, whether it be
only in the middle (form), or have the passive tenses in an active sieni-
fication. Which form is the usual one, must be learnt from the Lexicon.
If of an active verb the middle is also used (not only in the forms
which coincide with the passive, but also in those in which middle
Poetically, Δελφῶν κἀπὸ Δαυλίας for ἀπὸ Δ. καὶ ἀπὸ A.
§ 82 and 89, strictly speaking, do not belong to syntax.
1
2
[PART I.
§ 82.] Verb and its kinds. 67
and passive are distinct, and with difference of meaning), then con- [ὃ 82.]
cerning the signification we must remark :
@) Most commonly, the middle voice denotes the same transitive
action as the verb in the active does, but as undertaken in reference
to the subject itself, and in its interest, or as performed upon some-
thing belonging to or concerning the subject, e. g. αἱροῦμαι, I take me,
choose m yself a — (ἡγεμόνα), παρασκευάξομαι, procure myself (παρα-
σκευάζω, prepare), δουλοῦμαί τινα, make a person my slave (Gove τίνα
τῷ βασιλεῖ), πορίζομαι, get me (πορίζω, bring about), αἰτοῦμαι, ask for
myself, τίθεμαι νόμον, make a law (αὖ the same time also for myself),
ιαμετροῦμαι σῖτον, mete out gi ‘ain to myself, have it meted to me (δια-
μετρῶ, mete out), προβάλλομαι τὰ ὅπλα, hold out before me, couch, lay
in rest, ἀμφιβάλλομαι ἱμάτια, ἀποσείομαι τὸ γῆρας, shake “off old age
Jrom me, περιῤῥήγνυμαι τὸν χιτῶνα, tear of my coat, ἐσπασάμην τὸ
ξίφος, drew my sword. γε ιλαταίῆς παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας ἐκκεκομισμένοι,
ἦσαν ἐς ᾿Αθήνας (Thue. 2,78, had conveyed away their wives and children).
Οἱ στρατιῶται ἠκονῶντο καὶ λόγχας καὶ μαχαίρας καὶ ἐλαμπρύνοντο
τὰς ἀσπίδας (Xen. Hell. 7, ὅ, 20; their spears and swords —).
Rem. 1. Some verbs which, when te are simple, have active forms, Ba com-
position take the form of a middle deponent, with ae a signification, e.g. μετα-
πέμπομαι, send after, for (Thucydides also μεταπέμπω), ἐφελκομαι, drag with me.
Sometimes ἑαυτῷ (ἐμαυτῷ, σαυτῷ) is added to the middle in this sense, to mark it
more strongly, e.g. ἑαυτῷ δύναμιν περιποιεῖσθαι. Sometimes the active and the
middle are, “used with little difference, because the reference to the subject itself
is not necessary to be expressed, 6. g. πράττω, exact, cali in, and πράττομαι (70)
myself), φέρομαι μισθόν, but also simply φέρω, ἀποπέμπω, send away, ἀποπέμπομαι.
send away from me.
Rem. 2. Πιοιοῦμαι ὅπλα, make myself arms, i.e. have them made for me, διδά-
σκομαι, ἐδιδαξάμην τὸν υἱόν, 1 had my son instructed (but ἀποκτείνω, cause to be
killed, without such a reference, &c.).
6) Sometimes the middle denotes an action upon and in the sub-
ject itself; this however is not the case, when the subject is at the
same time plainly conceived as special object of the action, and con-
sequently an express reflexive relation takes place, but where the
action is rather taken as a merely intransitive one, without a definite
external object (in the accusative), e.g. λούομαι (ἐλουσάμην), ἀλεί.
powat (ἠλειψάμην), ἐπιδείκνυμαι (ἐπεδειξάμην), show oneself (my art
and skill), τρέπομαι (ἐτραπόμην), turn oneself to, attend ἴο, a thing
ἔχομαι (ἐσχόμην), keep (myself) close (τινός, to something), ἀπέχομαι.
abstain from, λαμβάνομαι, lay hold upon (τινός, something). With
expressly reflexive signification, the active stands with ἑαυτόν, 6. δ᾽.
σώζειν, ἀποκτείνειν ἑαυτόν, ἀναλαμβάνειν ἑαυτόν, παρέχω ἐμαυτὸν
τέμνειν (to cut), (rarely ἐπισφάττεσθαι ἑαυτόν τινι.) and where the
CHAP. VII.] Ε 2
68 Verb and its kinds. [ὃ 82.
[8 82.1 notion of a condition in which the subject is, or into which it is
brought, or of something that goes on im it, is more strongly promi-
nent, there the passive form (middle with passive aorist) is very fre-
quent, where the English Sones and much oftener the German,
has the reflexive form, e 6. g. φέρομαι (ἠνέχθην), κινοῦμαι (ἐκινήθην, pul
myself in motion, get im ΠΝ am set im motion), ab poifopat (ἠθροί-
σθην, but Aaa in δύναμιν, gather ed me a force, as im a), διεσπτάρην,
ἐπεραιώθην, ὡρμήθην. ἐπλανήθην, ἀπηλλάγην, ΠΣ 2)». διηνέχθην,
ἐμαλθακίσθην, sometimes where the passive view does not seem very
obvious, 6. &. in φαίνομαι (ἐφάνην). (Emavoauny, 1 ceased, ἐπαύσθην,
was made to cease.)
Rem. 1. A similar view lies at the foundation of the form of several verbs as
deponent with middle or passive aorist, e.g. νεανιεύομαι, behave myself like a
young man, ἐνεανιευσάμην, but ὀργίζομαι, become wroth (am wroth), ὠργίσθεν
(ὀργίζω. move to wrath, rare), μαίνομαι, become mad, ἐμάνην. Where the view
wavered between the two, the result was a deponent with alternating form of
middle and passive; cf. the Accidence.
Rem. 2. Sometimes a verb lays aside the transitive signification, and yet keeps
the active mest Originally, this is apt to take place in consequence of an ellipse,
some object, more general or special, being understood, and the verb thereby
acquiring a specific meaning , although in process of time the ellipse quite disap-
pears from the signification, e.g. ἄγω (viz. τὸ στράτευμα), lead on (in war),
ἐλαύνω, ride (τὸν aan). βάλλω λίθοις, pelt with stones, ésBadho, make an attack,
charge, μεταβάλλω, change myself (under. "go a change), ἔχω εἰς Σκιώνην, steer (τὴν
ναῦν), ἐπέχω, hold up, stay, pause, ἀνίημι, leave off, cease, στρέφω, ὑποστρέφω, turn
round, φυλάσσω, keep guard. Sometimes both the active and passive are used
in the same signification, e.g. ὑποφαίνει ἡ ἡμέρα and ὑποφαίνεται.
Rem. 3. In some particular transitive verbs, certain forms have intransitive
signification, especially the perfect, plusquamperfect, and aor. 2, in δύω, pve, and
ἵστημι, then the perf. 2, and its pluperf. in certain verbs, 6. g. ὄλωλα (ef. the Acei-
dence).
c) Sometimes the middle assumes a somewhat different and more
special active signification, in which there les concealed an original
relation to the subject, e.g. φυλάττω, guard, φυλάττομαι, am on my
guard against (τί or τινά), ἀποδίδωμι, give back, pay, ἀποδίδομαι, give
back from me, 1. 6. sell, γράφω, write, wae Baia, indite, lay a charge
against, ἐπαγγέλλω, announce, pass the order for something, ἐπαγγέλλο-
μαι (announce myself), promise, make profession of, ἀμύνω, ward off,
ἀμύνομαι, ward off from myself, defend myself against. (Τιμωρῶ τινι,
help, transitively, τιμωροῦμαί twa, avenge myself upon some one.)
Rem. 1. Sometimes the middle is used, without any ΕἸΤΟΣΕῚΣ marked difference,
but still in certain particular constructions of the verb, e.g. ποιῶ, make, bring
Sorth, but ποιοῦμαι λύγον, θήραν, hold (in periphrases) ; ποιοῦμαι περὶ πολλοῦ, ἐν
ὀργῇ ποιοῦμαί τινα, ποιοῦμαι τὸν ποταμὸν ὄπισθεν, get the river in my rear.
[PART I.
ὃ 83, 84.] Verb and its kinds. 69
Rem. 2. Sometimes out of the purely passive conception (with the passive [§ $2.]
forms) there developes itself a new active signification, as a deponent passive, 6. g.
φοβῶ, I make afraid, φοβοῦμαι, ἐφοβήθην τοὺς πολεμίους, L fear, καταπλήττω, beat
down, dismay, κατεπλάγην τὴν δύναμιν αὐτῶν, was dismayed at, αἰσχύνω, put to
shame, αἰσχύνομαι, ἠσχύνθην (τινά or τί), to be ashamed of; to feel shame at. (Πεί-
θω, persuade, πείθομαι, obey, ἐπείσθην, but with the dative.)
4 In some instances the distinction almost entirely disappears, so
that active and middle of the same verb are used in the same signi-
fication; e.g. this is often the case with παρέχω and παρέχομαι,
afford, supply, exhibit, προτρέπω and προτρέπομαι, put forward, 1η-
stigate, ἀποκρύπτω and ἀποκρύπτομαι, conceal (ἀποκρύπτομαι ἐμαυτόν,
Pl. Rep. 3, 393, but usually ἀποκρύπτομαί twa τι, hide a thing from).
(Compare the use of the fut. middle with the other tenses active, on
which see Accidence.)
Rem. 1. Λοιδορῶ τινα, λοιδοροῦμαί τινι, with change of construction.
Rem. 2. There are also intransitive verbs which have both an active and a
middle with different signification, the middle denoting the action more as referred
to the subject alone, the active in relation to others; e.g. ἄρχω, begin, i.e. am the
Jirst among several (take the lead), ἄρχομαι, begin,i.e. take the first step (of my own
actions), βουλεύω, am counsellor, βουλεύομαι, deliberate, take counsel, συμβουλεύω
τινί, give counsel, συμβουλεύομαί τινι, take counsel with some one (on my own con-
cerns). Some other intransitive verbs have active and middle used with no per-
ceptible difference of meaning; but usually the one form is more frequent than
the other, e. g. πειρῶμαι more frequent than πειρῶς (Ἐτρεψάμην, put to flight,
ἐτραπόμην, turned myself.)
Of the use of the several forms in middle and passive it is to be remarked : ὃ 83
a) The future middle, like the tenses which coincide for act. and pass., is often
used in a purely passive sense, e.g. θρέψομαι = τραφήσομαι, βλάψομαι, ὠφελήσομαι =
βλαβήσομαι, ὠφεληθήσομαι (rarely the future of the verba liquida, φανοῦμαι = φανή-
σομαι), but not of those verbs which to the present active take the future in the
middle (cf. the Accidence), e.g. λήψομαι, γνώσομαι, γελάσομαι. (But aor. 2 middle,
in a passive sense, is very rare and limited to a few verbs; thus κατασχύμενος.)
6) Of transitive deponents the perfect middle is used in the passive beside the
active sense, e. ρ΄. εἴργασμαι, κεκτημένος (κατακέχρηται, is used wp, Isocr. Paneg. 74,
although the verb governs the dative) ; so from transitive medial deponents some-
times the passive aor. and fut. are formed and used as such, e. g. εἰργάσθην (middle
εἰργασάμην), ἐκτήθην (ἐκτησάμην), αἰτιαθείς (ἠτιασάμην), ἐργασθήσομαι. The other
tenses of a transitive deponent in the middle are rarely used passively, e. g. ὠνούμενα
kat πιπρασκόμενα (Pl. Phed. 69).
c) That in Greek there are passives of sundry verbs which are not transitive, or
do not take a proper object-accusative, was noted in ὃ 26, ὃ 27, § 35 b. R. 3,
§ 36 a. R. 4, and § 56, R. 2.
a) The gerundive of transitive verbs (active or middle) is an adjec- § 84,
tive with the signification jit or necessary, and is predicated of the (420)
CHAP. VII. |
(421 b)
tor
[9.0]
Un
70 Adjectives. [ὃ 85, 86.
subject with εἰμί. (The εἰμί is often omitted _in the indicative, some-
times also in the infinitive.) ᾿Ὠφελητέα σοι ἡ πόλις ἐστίν (Xen. Mem.
3, 6, 3). Νικίας ἔλεγεν, ὁπλιταγωγοὺς (ναῦς) ἐκ τῶν ξυμμάχων μετα-
πεμπτέας εἶναι (Thue. 6,25). TLountéa ἃ λέγεις.
6) Of intransitive verbs the gerundive is formed only in the neuter,
and is used with ἐστίν as an impersonal predicate, which is construed
with the dative or genitive when the verb governs these cases. “Ivéov
ἐστίν (ἰτητέα ἐστίν, § 1 Ὁ, R.4). ᾿Επιχειρητέον τῷ ἔργῳ. ᾿Ἄπτέον τοῦ
πολέμου (from ἅπτομαι in middle). ᾿Κπιμελητέον τῶν βοσκημάτων.
c) As from intransitive, so, by analogy, from transitive verbs 4180,
the gerundive is used impersonally with ἐστίν, and governs the accusa-
tive: Θεραπευτέον τοὺς θεούς (Xen. Mem. 2, 1,28). ᾿Ασκητέον τὴν
σοφίαν. Τοὺς παῖδας εἰς τὸν πόλεμον ἀκτέον Kal γευστέον αἵματος
(Pl. Rep. 7, 537, from yevew τινὰ αἵματος, to give one a taste of blood).
Rem. From verbs which are used both in active and middle in different senses,
the gerundive may be used impersonally in both significations, 6. g. γυμναστέον τὸ
σῶμα (γυμνάζω) and γυμναστέον ἐστίν, one must exercise (γυμνάζομαι), πειστέον, one
must obey (πείθομαι).
The name of the person who has to perform the action, is taken
by the gerundive in the dative (of relation, by § 34) : ᾿Ωφελητέα ἡμῖν
ἡ πόλις. “Itnréov cot. But with the impersonally used gerundive
the name of the acting person also stands in the accusative: Ov
δουλευτέον τοὺς νοῦν ἔχοντας τοῖς οὕτω κακῶς φρονοῦσιν (Lsocr. Huag.
7). Τὸν βουλόμενον εὐδαίμονα εἶναι σωφροσύνην διωκτέον καὶ ἀσκη-
τέον (Pl. Gorg. 507). Οὐ δίκαις καὶ λόγοις διακριτέα ἐστίν, μὴ λόγῳ
καὶ αὐτοὺς βλαπτομένους (Thuc. 1, 86; we must not seek to decide by
law and words, not being ourselves injured in words only).
Rem. The acting person was conceived in general, without the special relation
denoted by the dative, and yet not as actual grammatical subject (nominative).
CIEAPTER ὙΠ;
The relations of Adjectives (and Adverbs), especially the degrees of
Comparison.
a) Tue adjectives which express order and sequence, as also those
which denote cnclination, contentment with an action, or a multitude
and vehemence, together with some others (e.g. μόνος), stand in
Greek as apposition to the subject, sometimes also to the object,
where we use an adverb to denote the situation and relation of the
[PART I.
§ 87.] Adjectives. 71
subject (or object) during the action: Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι πρότεροι ἐπήεσαν. [§ 86.]
“Hpodotos πρῶτος τὰ Περσικὰ συνέγραψεν (but πρῶτον τὰ ἹΠερσικά,
jirst the Persian war, then something else). Ὕστατος ἥκω. Ὃ δῆμος
Μιλτιάδῃ συνεχώρησε πρώτῳ γραφῆναι παρακαλοῦντι τοὺς στρατιώτας
(4isch. 3, 186). Ὃ ἐπιβὰς πρῶτος τοῦ τείχους. Τρεψαμένων τῶν
᾿Αθηναίων τοὺς Χίους πρώτους, νικᾶται καὶ τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα (Thue.
8, 55. Tere more usually πρῶτον τοὺς X.).—Exovtes ἁμαρτάνετε.
(Of ἄκοντες ἁμαρτόντες, Dem. 24, 49.) Λύσανδρος τὰς πόλεις ἑκούσας
παρελάμβανεν. “Acpevos (and ἀσμένως) ὑμᾶς εἶδον.---Ο ἄνεμος ἐκπνεῖ
μέγας (Thuc. 6, 104). Κρήνη ἄφθονος ῥέουσα (Xen. An. 6, 2, 4).—
Oi ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὑποσπόνδους τοὺς νεκροὺς ἀπέδοσαν τοῖς Συρακουσίοις.
Μόνοις τοῖς καλῶς τεθραμμένοις σωφροσύνη ἐγγίγνεται (Lsocr. Panath.
198). (Ἄπρακτος ἀποχωρῶ, &c. [= re infecta.})
Rem. In particular, note the use of the adjectives in atos formed from the
numerals, in apposition to the subject, to denote the day on which the thing took
place: Διεφθείροντο οἱ πλεῖστοι ἐναταῖοι καὶ ἑβδομαῖοι (Thuc. 2,49). Τεταρταῖοι
ἐπὶ τοῖς ὁρίοις ἐγένοντο (Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 8, 8). (Σκοταῖος, Xen., ὄρθριος. Pi.) Inthe
poets some other adjectives of place and time are also used instead of adverbs:
Χρόνιος ἐφάνην (Soph.). Θυραῖος οἰχνῶ (Soph.). Ταχὺς ὁρμῶμαι (Soph.).
6) Often where we should put the adjective as attributive to an
indefinite substantive (subject, object, or preposition with its case),
the adjective stands as apposition to the substantive with the definite
article prefixed, the substantive notion being put as something given,
and previously known or presupposed, and the adjective being put
as its predicate; the principal point being to describe the nature,
condition, or circumstances of that thing (see § 12, with the exam-
ples) : Τοὺς στρατηγοὺς ὀλίγους χρὴ ἑλέσθαι (Thuc. 6, 72, it behoves
to choose few generals: the generals to be chosen should be few). Tous
ἀκουσομένους ἑτέρους τοιούτους ἔχουσιν (Pl. Phad. 58; they have other
such hearers). Διαχειμάζειν ἐν ἀφθόνοις τοῖς ἐπιτηδείοις (Xen. An.
05:91). (CE-§ ΤΟθ" δ).
a) Adjectives with the article in the masculine, whether singular § 87.
or plural, are used_as substantives to denote a _certain_class_of (301)
persons: Συμφέρει τοῖς πολίταις, Tov ἀσθενῆ παρὰ τοῦ πλουσίου δίκην,
ἣν ἀδικῆται, δύνασθαι λαβεῖν (Dem. 45,67). In the neuter, the singular
denotes a certain notion in general, something as_a whole; —the
plural, on the other hand, denotes-the-several individuals of a certain
kind: To ἀγαθόν, τὸ δίκαιον, τὸ μέσον (the mean), TO ὑπήκοον τῶν
ξυμμάχων (the obedient portion of the allies\—ta ἀγαθά, τὰ καλά, τὰ
πολιτικά (affairs of the state). The neuter οὗ adjectives in ἐκός
denotes the collective body of persons of a certain kind: τὸ ᾿Ελλη-
CHAP. VIII. |
72 Adjectives. [ὃ 88.
[§ 87.] νικόν (the Grecian race, the Grecian portion of a certain population), τὸ
§ 88,
(302)
βαρβαρικόν, τὸ ξυμμαχικόν, τὸ πελταστικόν. (Τὸ ναυτικόν, the naval
force.) Τῷ 15 more rare, especially in prose, for a masculine adjective
without the article to be used of indefinite persons of a certain kind:
᾿Αγαθῷ οὐδεὶς οὐδέποτε ἐγγίγνεται φθόνος (Pl. Tim. 29). (Usually
ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός. On the other hand, in the neuter: Δεινὰ λέγεις. Ἔν
δεινοτέροις νῦν ἐσμεν ἢ τότε. Even in the singular: [Ἄτοπον λέγεις,
Pl. Conv. 175, = ἄτοπόν τι. Οὐκ ἔχουσι τούτου βέλτιον λέγειν, Pl.
Soph. 247, any thing better.)
Rem. 1. The poets and some prose writers (Thucydides) use a neuter adjective
with the article instead of the corresponding abstract substantive: ἐκ τοῦ περιχα-
povs τῆς νίκης (Thue. 7, 73, from the exceeding joy of victory), διὰ τὸ ἀνθρώπειον
κομπῶδες (Thuc. 5, 68, from the natural boastfulness of man).
tem. 2. From prepositions and adjectives are formed adverbial expressions, 6. g.
διὰ βραχέων, briefly, ἐκ τοῦ φανεροῦ, openly.
6) Certain adjectives are used quite as substantives (with or with-
out the article, with a genitive or possessive pronoun) to denote
ν᾿ . Σ / I (5) \ “ >
persons or things; thus, ἐχθρός, φίλος (οἱ ἐμοὶ δυσμενεῖς, εὖνοι, P/.),
ἀγαθόν, κακόν, a good, an evil. With some, especially in the feminine,
a particular substantive was originally understood, 6. g. ἡ πατρίς, the
Juther-land, country (πόλις, γῆ), δεξιά, ἀριστερά (χείρ), ἡ μουσική, ἡ
γραμματική (τέχνη).
Rem. 1. Especially, there is in some expressions an omission of the following
substantives: γῆ (ἡ ὑμετέρα, ἡ οἰκουμένη, ἡ βασιλέως), ὁδός (τὴν ἐπὶ Βαβυλῶνος
ἰέναι, see ὃ 17, and in adverbial expressions, § 81 d, Rem., μακρὰν ἀπεῖναι),
ἡμέρα (ἡ ἐπιοῦσα, ἡ ὑστεραία, ἡ αὔριον, EhadynBodiavos ἕκτῃ ἱσταμένου), μοῖρα (ἡ
εἱμαρμένη, ἐπ᾿ ἴσῃ καὶ ὁμοίᾳ), and others in particular constructions and phrases, e. Θ᾽.
ἡ ἐμὴ νικᾷ (γνώμη), THY ἐναντίαν τίθεσθαι (ψῆφον), χιλίας λαμβάνειν (δραχμάς),
or in technical terms, 6. g. ἡ ὀρθή, ἡ γενική (πτῶσις), ὁ μέλλων (χρόνος) in Grammar.
Rem. 2. Names of nations are used adjectively of persons: οἱ Μακεδόνες ἱππεῖς.
The words ἀνήρ and ἄνθρωπος have another substantive joined to them as if this
were an adjective to them: ἀνὴρ μάντις, ἄνθρωπος δούλη, ἄνθρωποι πολῖται,
especially ἄνδρες in addresses: ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί. (Poetically, τύχη τις σωτήρ, for
σωτηρία, Soph. did. BR. 80.)
a) Adjectives in the neuter plural, are sometimes used in ‘the
manner indicated under Accusative, § 27, a, to characterize the sub-
stantive notion implied in the verb (where the action admits of a
plural conception, i. e. a number of individual acts of the kind), so
that the adjective is almost used as an adverb : “HAdovto ὑψηλά (Xen.
An. 4, 9, 5, made high leaps). Θαυμαστὰ éxtdyjtTovTar φιλίᾳ τε καὶ
οἰκειότητι καὶ ἔρωτι (Ρί. Conv. 192, are put in wondrous (sorts of)
motion). To παλαιὸν “EXXnvixoy (the ancient Greeks) ὁμοιότροπα τῷ
[PART I.
§ 80, 90.] Adjectives. 73
νῦν βαρβαρικῷ ἐδιαιτᾶτο (Thue. 1, 6). Πολλά (πολλὰ χρῆσθαί τινι) [3 88.]
and πυκνά, frequently, are used quite as adverbs.
Rea. The poets also use other adjectives in the neuter plural quite as adverbs,
e.g. ἄλεκτρα γηράσκειν ἀνυμέναιά te (Soph. Hl. 962). (Φονικὸς ὅμοια τοῖς μάλιστα
τοῦ βαρβαρικοῦ, Thue. 7, 29.)
b) Some adjectives are used adverbially in the neuter singular with
certain intransitive verbs, to denote the sensible quality of the action :
μέγα φθέγγεσθαι, βοᾶν, λέγειν, ἡδὺ (κακὸν) ὄζειν, ὀξὺ ὁρᾶν. (Also
μέγα φρονεῖν.)
Rem. Of certain adjectives with the article used as adverbs, see § 14,8. Rem. 3.
To the comparative of an adjective or adverb, the second member ἃ go,
of the comparison is joined by 4, ¢han, in the same case as the first, (303)
when the same verb or the same governing term also belongs to the
second member, and might be repeated with it: Μείζων εἶ καὶ πλείω
ἔχεις ἢ ἐγώ. Τίνι ἂν μᾶλλον πιστεύσαιμι ἢ σοί; It this is not the
case, then, properly speaking, a new sentence should be formed with
εἰμί, or some other verb, to be taken from the first member ; usually,
however, the verb is dropt, so that the nominative stands alone:
᾿Ανδρὸς πολὺ δυνατωτέρου, ἢ ἐγώ, υἱὸν ὁ ᾿Αρμενίων βασιλεὺς πίνοντα
map ἑαυτῷ συνέλαβεν (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2,28). Tots νεωτέροις Kal μᾶλλον
ἀκμάζουσιν ἢ ἐγώ, παραινῶ ταῦτα ποιεῖν (Isocr. Pac. 145). Τῶν
ἄλλων οἰκετῶν οὐκ ἤθελεν "AdoBos παραλαμβάνειν οὐδένα τῶν ταῦτ᾽
εἰδότων μᾶλλον ἢ Μιλύας (Dem. 29, 56, viz. οἶδεν). But when it
would be necessary to understand εἰμί, the Greeks not unfrequently
retain, by an attraction, the preceding case: Πλουσιωτέρῳ ἄν, εἰ ἐσω-
, A 2 fate Nie λον D7 γ' Υ ΞΟ ΞΕ ΑΡ̓ΕΚΟΥ͂Σ τ τὶ
φρόνεις, ἢ ἐμοί, τὸν ἵππον ἐδίδους (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3, 32, Ξε ἢ ἐγώ εἰμι).
"Hn τινὲς καὶ ἐκ δεινοτέρων ἢ τοιῶνδε ἐσώθησαν (LThuc. 7, 11).
Rem. 1. Occasionally a comparative is followed by the preposition πρό, before,
or παρά (ἀντί).
Rem. 2. For μᾶλλον ἤ (rather than), the Greeks are fond of saying, μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ,
when the principal proposition is negative, or interrogative in the negative sense,
or expressive of censure (so that what is said in the last member, is considered as
the thing which holds, or must be done, &c., to the exclusion of the other): Ov
περὶ τῶν ἐμῶν ἰδίων μᾶλλον τιμωρήσεσθε ἸΤολυκλέα ἢ οὐχ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν (Dem.
δ0, 66). Τί οὖν δεῖ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον ἀναμένειν, ἕως ἂν ὑπὸ πλήθους κακῶν ἀπεί-
πωμεν, μᾶλλον ἢ οὐχ ὡς τάχιστα τὴν εἰρήνην ποιήσασθαι; (Xen. Hell. 6, 3, 15.)
᾿Ωμὸν τὸ βούλευμα πόλιν ὅλην διαφθεῖραι μᾶλλον ἢ οὐ τοὺς αἰτίους (Thuc. 3, 90).
When the first member of the comparison is a nominative or an § go.
accusative, ἤ may be omitted, and the second member put in the (304)
genitive (see § 64). This is also done, not unfrequently, where the
first member is a dative: Μείζων ἐμοῦ εἶ. Οἰκίαν τῆς ἡμετέρας πολὺ
μείζω κέκτησαι. Λυσιτελεῖν οἴεται πᾶς ἀνὴρ πολὺ μᾶλλον ἰδίᾳ τὴν
CHAP. VIII. ]
74 Adjectives. [$ 9I.
[§ 90.] ἀδικίαν τῆς δικαιοσύνης (Pl. ep. 2, 360). Ὑμῖν αἴσχιον τῶν ἄλλων
: ἐστὶ τὸ δοκεῖν ἐξηπατηκέναι τοὺς ἀγαθόν τι ποιήσαντας (Dem. 20, 135,
= ἢ τοῖς ἄλλοις). Τοῦτο καὶ ἡμῖν, τοῖς ἥττοσιν. ἐκείνου, ξυμφέρον (PL.
Leep. 1, 338, = ἢ ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν). ἼΒξεστιν ἡμῖν μᾶλλον ἑτέρων κα
ἡσυχίαν Boudevew ie 8) =) as
= =} ἢ SRA, οἰκίαν μείζω ἢ τὴν ΓΞ or ἢ 7) ὑμετέρα Bo, σὺ oe ἐμοῦ = ἢ
ἐγώ: but by a less exact way of putting the comparison, and from ἃ desire of
brevity, the Greeks also put with the comparative the genitive of a substantive
which is compared with another ἢ in reference to the dogice, or a third object Loom:
paratio compendiar ἴα}: (ἐγὼ μείζω οἰκίαν ἔχω σοῦ = ἢ σύ): Edoke τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἄλλος
μεῖζον ἑ ἑαυτοῦ λαβεῖν, Xen. Cyr. 2, 2 4 Ξξ = ἢ αὐτὸς λάβοι. ee ἔχετε οὐδὲν ἧττον
ἡμῶν ἔντιμον (Xen. Cyr. 3,3, ers = ἢ ἡμεῖς). Οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι πλείοσι ναυσὶ τῶν
᾿Αθηναίων παρῆσαν (Thue. 8, 52, =i) oi’AO.). (With even less exactness the geni-
tive in some other places is put w vith the comparative, 6. 5. ᾿Αθλιώτερόν € ἐστι μὴ ὑγιοῦς
σώματος μὴ ὑγιεῖ ψυχῇ συνοικεῖν, Pl. Gorg. 479, = ἢ ἢ ὑγιεῖ σώματι συνοικεῖν.)
(304, Rem. 2 - Pleonastically, the comparative takes first the genitive of a _ pronoun,
ΚΝ. 1) and ean, with ἢ ἦ, ἃ more particular statement : Ποιήσετε τοὺς πολλοὺς ἐ ἐν ἁπάσαις
ταῖς πόλεσι τοῦτο ποιεῖσθαι σύμβολον τῆς αὑτῶν σωτηρίας. ἐὰν ὑμῖν ὦσι φίλοι, οὗ
μεῖζον οὐδὲν ἂν ὑμῖν γένοιτο ἀγαθὸν ἢ παρὰ πάντων ἑκόντων ἀνυπύπτου τυχεῖν
εὐνοίας (Dem. 15, A). Tis ἂν αἰσχίων em ταύτης δόξα ἢ δοκεῖν χρήματα περὶ
πλείονος ποιεῖσθαι ἢ φίλους ; (Pl. Crit. 44.)
Rem. 3. By attaching to a comparative with αὐτός the genitive of a reflexive
pronoun, or personal pronoun used reflexively, it is expressed, that the subject has
for a certain time or for a certain case a higher degree than usual of the quality
denoted by the adjective : : Πάντα ἄνδρα καὶ θαῤῥαλεώτερον καὶ ἀνδρειότερον ἂν
ποίησειεν αὐτὸν αὑτοῦ οὐκ ὀλίγῳ ἡ ἡ τῆς ὁπλομαχίας € ἐπιστήμη (Pl. Lach. 182). Θαῤ-
ῥαλεώτεροί εἰσιν αὐτοὶ ἑαυτῶν, ἐπειδὰν μάθωσιν, ἢ πρὶν μαθεῖν (Pl. Prot. 350, where
7 annexes a more particular statement).
Rem. 4. (a) To express that something surpasses hope, description, &e., the com-
parative is used with one of the genitives ἐλπίδος (μείζων ἐλπίδος), λύγου (κρείττων
λόγου, better than can be told), . καιροῦ (ποῤῥωτέρω τοῦ καιροῦ), γνώμης, τοῦ δέοντος,
and the like. iC Epv@pdrepos τοῦ ὄντος, than in reality.) (0) Too great for (in
proportion to) 1 15 expressed by the comparative with ἢ κατά: Μείζους ἐπιθυμίαι ἢ
κατὰ τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν οὐσίαν (Lhuc. 6, 15). (Also μεῖζον παρά —, μεῖζον ἢ
πρός ΞΞ) (c) Too great to —, μείζων ἢ (ὥςτε) with the infinitive, see § 150, ὁ
(μέγας ὥςτε, ibid. b).
.or. Like comparatives are constructed ἄλλος (ἄλλα ἢ τὰ γιγνόμενα, and with the
genitive, ἄλλα τῶν δικαίων, different from —), the adjectives in πλάσιος denoting
(many) fold greater, ἄς. than, together with mpotepatos, ὑστεραῖος. To\Xarhdoua
Even pera τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ἡμῶν (PI. Prot. 314), instead of ἢ ἡμῶν, by ὃ 89.
[PAR ste
§ 92, 93.] Adjectives. 76
ἀπέδωκα τῶν ληφθέντων (i) ὅσα εἴληφα). Διπλάσια ᾿Αλκιβιάδῃ ἠξίουν ai πόλεις διδόναι [§ 91.]
ἢ ἄλλῳ τινὶ τῶν στρατηγῶν (Lys. 19, 52). Τῇ προτεραίᾳ τῆς μάχης ".
Rem. 1. H is also used after words denoting an opposition, and after διαφέρω :
τοὐναντίον ἢ τὸ προςδοκώμενον (Pl. Legg. 12, 966). Τὸ τῶν ἀνδρῶν γένος διαφε-
ρόντως ἔχει i) τὸ τῶν γυναικῶν (Pl. Rep. 5, 455). (Δίκαιόν ἐστι ποιεῖν τοὐναντίον ἢ
ὃ σὺ λέγεις, Pl. Rep. 1, 339, and αὐτὸ τοὐναντίον ἐροῦμεν ἢ τὸν Σιμωνίδην ἔφαμεν
λέγειν, Pl. Rep. 1, 334, without pronoun. Οἱ Πλαταιῆς προςέβαλλον τῷ τείχει τῶν
Πελοποννησίων ἐκ τοὔμπαλιν ἢ οἱ ἄνδρες αὐτῶν ὑπερέβαινον, Thuc. 322, or ἢ ἧ.
Also τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἧ, τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ὅτε ἴον ἢ ἧ, ον ἢ ὅτε.)
Rem. 2. With ἄλλος note the expression οὐδεὶς ἄλλος πλήν (αὐτός, none other
but only himself), and the adverbial expression ἄλλ᾽ ἤ (further than, save only),
after a negation or in a question equivalent to a negation: ᾿Βὰν σωφρονῆτε, τοῖς
μαθηταῖς συμβουλεύσετε, μηδέποτε μηδενὶ ἀνθρώπων διαλέγεσθαι ἄλλ᾽ ἢ ὑμῖν τε καὶ
αὑτοῖς (Pl. Euthyd. 304). Ανδρες οὐδαμῆ φυλάττοντες ἡμᾶς φανεροί εἰσιν ἄλλ᾽ ἢ
κατὰ ταύτην τὴν ὁδόν (Xen. An. 4, 6. 11); also with ἄλλος preceding : Τίς ἂν εἰς ἄλλο
τι ἀποβλέψας ἢ δειλὴν ἢ ἀνδρείαν πόλιν εἴποι ἄλλ᾽ ἢ εἰς τοῦτο τὸ μέρος, ὃ προπολεμεῖ
τε καὶ στρατεύεται ὑπὲρ αὐτῆς ; (Pl. Rep. 4, 429.) Often incorrectly written ἀλλ᾽
7}, as if from ἀλλά.)
When a magnitude expressed in numbers is increased by πλέον § 92.
(πλεῖον, πλεῖν), or diminished by ἔλαττον (μεῖον), these words, with (305)
or without ἤ, are attached to the denomination of the magnitude,
without influencing its case. Πλέον ἢ τριάκοντα πλέθρα γῆς κτήσασθαι
(iys. 19, 29). Οὐσία πλέον ἢ πέντε ταλάντων (Lys. 19, 42). Ἔν
πλέον ἢ διακοσίοις ἔτεσιν (Thuc.).—H λεία ἐπράθη ταλάντων οὐκ ἔλατ-
τον πέντε καὶ εἴκοσιν (Τήκο. 6, 95). Οἱ ἱππεῖς ἀποκτείνουσι τῶν ἀνδρῶν
οὐ μεῖον πεντακοσίους (Xen. An. 6, 2, 34). Πέμψω ὄρνις ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν
πλεῖν ἑξακοσίους τὸν ἀριθμόν (Arist. Aves, 1251). When the case is
nominative or accusative, πλέον and ἔλαττον themselves may stand in
the nominative or accusative, and govern the name of the magnitude
in the genitive: Εἰςενήνεκται ὑπὲρ Apiatopdvous καὶ τοῦ πατρὸς οὐκ
ἔλαττον μνῶν τετταράκοντα (Lys. 19, 43). Πολύστρατος οὐ πλέον
ὀκτὼ ἡμερῶν ἦλθεν εἰς τὸ βουλευτήριον (Lys. 20, 14).
Rem. Also frequently πλείους (μείους, ἐλάσσους) ἢ χίλιοι and πλείους χιλίων, 6. σ΄.
Οὐ μεθεκτέον τῶν πραγμάτων πλείοσιν ἢ πεντακιοχιλίοις (Thue. 8, 05). Πλευστέα
τριήρεσι μὲν οὐκ ἔλασσον ἢ ἑκατόν, ὁπλίταις δὲ τοῖς ξύμπασι πεντακιςχιλίων οὐκ ἐλάσ-
σοσιν (Lhuc. 6, 25). Ξενοκλῆς συνοικεῖ τῇ γυναικὶ πλείω ἢ ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἤδη (Ise.
8, 31). (ολίγῳ ἐλάσσους πεντήκοντα, Thue. 4, 44; πεντήκοντα as genitive 32.)
a) A comparison of two properties of the same subject is expressed § 93.
by two comparatives : Φιλόμηλον οἱ πολλοὶ βελτίονα ἡγοῦνται εἶναι ἢ (307)
"πον τσ... i el
1 Tepirra τῶν ἀρκούντων, Xen. Cyr. 8, 2, 22.
U Ψ' + » 9, »” ul
2 Νεώτερος τριάκοντα ἐτῶν (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 35), = γεγονὼς ἔτη ἔλαττον (ἢ)
τριάκοντα.
CHAP. VIII]
76 Adjectives. [ὁ 94—96.
8. 93.} πλουσιώτερον (Lys. 19, 15). (Αγαθὸς μᾶλλον ἢ πλούσιος, rather
(398)
§ 96.
-good —.)
6) The comparative sometimes denotes, without any definite com-
parison, a somewhat (tolerably) high degree, 6. g. αὐθαδέστερόν τι
ἀποκρίνεσθαι (Thuc. ὃ, 84). ᾿Ενθυμοῦμαι, μὴ ἀγροικότερον ἢ λέγειν
(Pl. Gorg. 462). Of some particular adjectives (good, bad, beautiful) the com-
parative is sometimes applied in the neuter to an action or procedure merely to
denote a reference to the opposite procedure: ᾿Εθυόμην (sacrificed in order to consult
the god), εἰ βέλτιον εἴη ὑμῖν τε ἐμοὶ ἐπιτρέψαι ταύτην τὴν ἀρχὴν καὶ ἐμοὶ ὑποστῆναι
(Xen. An. ὅ, 9, 31). Μαλακώτεροι ἢ ὡς κάλλιον αὐτοῖς (Pl. Rep. 3, 410); especially
in negation (οὐ κρεῖττον, βέλτιον, κάλλιον, χεῖρον, κάκιον): Πάλιν ἀναμιμνήσκου" οὐ
γὰρ χεῖρον πολλάκις ἀκούειν (Pl. Phed. 105, it does no harm, one is none the worse
for —). Πρὸς τὸ φυλάττειν οὐ κάκιόν ἐστι φοβερὰν εἶναι τὴν ψυχήν (Xen. icon. 7, 25).
(Νεώτερος and καινότερος with the accessory meaning of an alteration of what pre-
viously existed.)
c) By an irregularity, the comparative takes after it a superfluous μᾶλλον, 6. σ΄.
> , “ a ΄ On c ΄ ΄ > ΄
αἰσχυντηρότερος μᾶλλον τοῦ δέοντος (Pl. Gorg. 487). Αἱρετώτερόν ἐστι μαχομένους
ἀποθανεῖν μᾶλλον ἢ φεύγοντας σώζεσθαι (Xen. Cyr. 8, 3,51). Conversely, in verbs
denoting a wish or choice, μᾶλλον is now and then omitted before ἤ (Ἀγησίλαος
ἡρεῖτο σὺν τῷ γενναίῳ μειονεκτεῖν ἢ σὺν τῷ ἀδίκῳ πλέον ἔχειν, Xen. Ag. 4,5). (Οὐδὲν
7 instead οἵ οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ.)
The comparative is used to denote the highest degree, in speaking
of two persons (also of two sets of persons): Ὁ πρεσβύτερος τῶν
παίδων παρὼν ἐτύγχανεν (Xen. dn. 1,1, 1). Πότεροι μᾶλλον χαίρουσι
καὶ λυποῦνται, οἱ φρόνιμοι ἢ οἱ ἄφρονες ; (Pl. Gory. 498.)
The superlative often denotes merely a very high degree [super-
lative of eminence]: Ἱζάλλιστα λέγεις. Κῦρος φιλομαθέστατος ἣν.
(Without the article, § 8, Rem. 8) The exclusive sense is gathered from
the context, or from a partitive genitive annexed.
Rem. 1. A superlative belonging to the predicate, sometimes governs a partitive
genitive, which refers to the subject of the proposition, or to some other word of
which the predicate holds in the highest degree: Of ᾿Αθηναῖοι πάντων ἀνθρώπων
πλείστῳ σίτῳ χρῶνται ἐπειςάκτῳ (Dem. 18, 87). Φιλοσοφία ἐστὶ παλαιοτάτη τε καὶ
πλείστη τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἐν Κρήτῃ καὶ ἐν Λακεδαίμονι (Pl. Prot. 342). ᾿Αθήναζε
ἀφῖξαι, οὗ τῆς Ἑλλάδος πλείστη ἐστὶν ἐξουσία τοῦ λέγειν (Pl. Gorg. 461). A
genitive with the superlative of an adverb in the predicate, may refer, not only to
the subject, but also to the object or another case: Σωκράτης προετρέπετο πάντων
μάλιστα τοὺς συνόντας πρὸς ἐγκράτειαν (Xen. Mem. 4, 5, 1, above all else to 5617:
command).
Rem. 2. The superlative with the genitive of a reflexive pronoun, or personal
pronoun used reflexively, denotes the highest degree to which the property attains
in one and the same subject at a certain time: Εἴθε σοι, ὦ Περίκλεις, τότε συνεγε-
νόμην, ὅτε δεινύτατος σαυτοῦ ἦσθα (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 40).
For additional force, the superlative takes before it the words
[PART I.
§ 97.] Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. 77
(denoting the excess or distance from others) πολλῷ, μακρῷ (παρὰ [8 96]
πολύ, poet. πολύ), 6. F. μακρῷ εὐνούστατος (Arist. Pac. 673). (Ὅσῳ
μέγιστον τὸ τῶν φυλάκων ἔργον, τοσούτῳ ἂν εἴη τέχνης τε καὶ ἐπιστήμης
μεγίστης δεόμενον, Pl. Rep. 2,374; in the same degree, as—.) The high-
est possible degree 15 denoted by additions such as ὡς (ὅπως) δυνατόν,
ὡς, ὅπως (7) δύναμαι, as—as possible (e. ο". ναῦς ws δύνανται πλείστας
πληροῦσιν, Thuc. 7, 21, ὡς δύναμαι μάλιστα and ὡς μάλιστα δύναμαι),
ὅσος, ὁπόσος with δύναμαι or οἷός τ᾽ εἰμί (6. &. ὁπόσον δύνανται πλεῖστον
σῖτον λαμβάνουσιν, Xen. (ον. 20, 28, δύναμιν ὅσην οἷός τε ἣν πλείστην
συμπαρασκευασάμενος, Isocr. Phil. 101), — or also by simply putting
before the superlative ὡς or ὅτε (ὅ,τι), with adverbs also ὅπως (ἡ), e. g.
ὡς βέλτιστος, ὡς ἄριστα, OTL μάλιστα, ὅτι πλεῖστον χρόνον, ὅπως ἄριστα
(7 ῥᾷστα). [Cf. Lat. quam (quantum, ut) maxime ; alone, or combined
with possum, &e.]
Rem. 1. Expressions such as οἱ μάλιστα ἀνοητότατοι (Pl. Tim. 92) (πλεῖστον
ἔχθιστος, Soph. Phil.631), are rare. Especially we may note the superlative with
οἷος : χωρίον οἷον χαλεπώτατον (Xen. An. 4, 8, 2), literally, a place such as the
most difficult cs (with ἐστίν omitted) ; but by attraction οἷος and the superlative
are treated as-one word: ὄντος πάγου οἵου δεινοτάτου (Pl. Conv. 220).
Rem. 2. A special way of adding force to the superlative, in some writers, is the
prefixing of ἐν τοῖς (without regard to the gender of the superlative), 6. σ᾿. ἐν τοῖς
πρῶτοι (Thue. 1, 6, first of all), ev τοῖς πλεῖσται νῆες (Thuc. 3, 17), ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα
(Pl. Crit. 52, most of all), which perhaps originated in an ellipsis, the original
expression being ἐν rots μάλιστα, with the participle of the verb understood (ἐν
τοῖς μάλιστα ὁμολογῶ, = ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα ὁμολογοῦσιν ὁμολογῶ), whence ἐν τοῖς
came to be used as an adverb.
Rem. 3. Sometimes the superlative may be said to take the place of the com-
parative, by taking (as also does μόνος) to the partitive genitive the word ἄλλων
(or ἄλλων by itself, as the partitive genitive), which, in strictness, is suitable only
to the comparative, 6. g. Μάλιστα τῶν ἄλλων ἀνθρώπων. Ἢ μόνοι ἢ κάλλιστα τῶν
ἄλλων (Pl. Rep. 1, 359). Μόνοι τῶν ἄλλων “Ἑλλήνων (Alsch. 2, 37, alone among,
or of all, the Greeks) ".
Bis Vee IMD MIO.e
Peculiarities in the Adjective construction of the Demonstrative and
Relative Pronouns, and in their relations in the sentence,
a) Tux demonstrative and relative pronouns take their gender and § 97.
number in accordance with the substantive words to which they (312)
refer, or which the speaker has in his thoughts (6. @. ἥδε, this woman).
‘ Μεγίστη στρατεία τῶν πρὸ αὑτῆς (Lhuc, 1, 10), = μεγίστη πασῶν μέχρι ἐκείνου
τοῦ χρίνου καὶ μείζων τῶν πρὸ αὑτῆς.
CHAP. 1Χ.]
78 Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. [ὃ 98.
[8.97.1] When the pronoun refers to several connected substantives of differ-
(315)
ent genders, the rule § 2, ὁ and d, is followed: ἀδελφοὶ καὶ ἀδελφαί,
ods εἶχον. “Exxdnovafouev περὶ πολέμου καὶ εἰρήνης, ἃ μεγίστην ἔχει
δύναμιν ἐν τῷ βίῳ TO τῶν ἀνθρώπων (Isocr. Pac. 3). Likewise a
relative in the neuter may refer to a number of inanimate antecedents,
even when they are all masculine or feminine: Ταῦτα εἶπον οὐ πρὸς
τὴν εὐσέβειαν οὐδὲ πρὸς τὴν δικαιοσύνην οὐδὲ πρὸς τὴν φρόνησιν ἀπο-
βλέψας, ἃ σὺ διῆλθες (Isocr. Παπαΐή. 217).
Rem. The relative to an antecedent in the dual, may stand in the plural: τὼ
χεῖρε, ἃς ὁ θεὸς ἐπὶ τὸ συλλαμβάνειν ἀλλήλαιν ἐποίησεν (Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 18).
6) When a demonstrative or relative pronoun, not referring to a
particular substantive, denotes something comprising a number of
units or individuals, it stands in the neuter plural: Tatra οὔπω ἠκη-
Koew. ᾿Ιἱρῷ σοι, ἃ οἶδα. (Tatra yap καὶ καλὰ καὶ δίκαια, μὴ περιορᾶν
πόλεις ἀρχαίας ἐξανεστώσας, Dem. 16,25, where the pronoun is con-
ceived in a general way : this procedure ’.)
a) A demonstrative pronoun to which a substantive is attached as
predicate-noun by εἰμί, or by a verb denoting to call, consider as, &e.,
is apt to assume the gender and number of the substantive (attrac-
tion) : Οὗτος ὅρος ἐστὶ δικαιοσύνης ἀληθῆ τε λέγειν Kal ἃ ἂν λάβῃ τις,
ἀποδιδόναι (Pl. Rep. 1, 831). Kivnows αὕτη μεγίστη τοῖς “"EXAnow
ἐγένετο (Thuc. 1, 1; different from αὕτη ἡ κίνησις, § 11,R. 1). Αὕτη
πενία ἐστὶ σαφής, TO δεόμενόν τινος μὴ ἔχειν χρῆσθαι (Xen. Leon. 8, 2).
Καὶ ψυχῆς ἄρα καθ᾽ ὅσον ἂν εὑρίσκωμεν κακίας ἀφαίρεσίν τινα, καθαρ-
μὸν αὐτὸν λέγοντες ἐν μέλει φθεγξόμεθα (Pl. Soph. 227).
Rem. The pronoun however stands in the neuter, when the general reference
of the demonstrative is purposely retained, and with a stress upon it: Εὐδαιμονίαν
τοῦτο νομίζω, TO πολλὰ ἔχοντα πολλὰ καὶ δαπανᾶν (Xen.). Τοῦτο πῶς οὐκ ἀμαθία
ἐστίν; (Pl. Apol. 29). Οὐ λόγων κόμπος τάδε μᾶλλον ἢ ἔργων ἐστὶν ἀλήθεια
(Thue.). "Eywyé φημι ταῦτα φλυαρίας εἶναι (Xen, An. 1, 3,18). (Τούτῳ τροφῇ
χρῶνται, Xen. Mem. 3, 11, 6.)
6) A relative pronoun, having an antecedent and also followed by
another substantive as predicate-noun, may conform itself to either :
the latter, when the relative clause merely adds a remark as apposi-
1 In questions the singular τί is applied to such a subject of the neuter plural: Τί
ταῦτά ἐστιν; (Xen. An. 2,1, 22.) Σκεψώμεθα, τί ποτ᾽ ἐστὶν ἃ σὺ ἐμοὶ ὀνειδίζεις (Pl.
Gorg. 508). Σκεπτέον, τί τὰ συμβαίνοντα (Pl. ibid.).
2 ᾿Απόλλων τάδ᾽ ἦν (Soph. Cid. R. 1329, it was A.). Οὐκ Ἴωνες τάδε εἰσὶν οὐδὲ
“Ἑλληςπόντιοι (Thuc. 6,77, these are not Lonians, here are no Ionians). Τοῦτο ἀνάγκη
(Pl. Gorg. 475) = ἀναγκαῖον.
[PART I.
δ 99.] Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. 79
tion to a notion in itself known or defined, so that even without the [8 98.1
relative clause the sense would be complete: ‘H πόλις τοῦ μεγίστου
νοσήματος ov μεθέξει, ὃ στάσις καλεῖται (Pl. Legg. 5, 744, where the
relative clause is essential to the completeness of the notion, “the
disease called faction ”)—iAov, ὃ μέγιστον ἀγαθὸν εἶναί φασιν, ot
πολλοὶ ὅπως κτήσονται, οὐ φροντίζουσιν (Xen. Mem. 2, 4, 2, where the
relative clause might be omitted, without making the notion incom-
plete). ἫἪ τοῦ ῥεύματος ἐκείνου πηγή, ὃν ἵμερον Ζεὺς ὠνόμασεν (Pl.
Phedr. 255). When the antecedent is the predicate of the principal
proposition, or the purport of the entire proposition, the relative may
also, if a predicate-noun be attached, either be put in the neuter, or,
which is more frequent, conform itself to the predicate-noun: Οἱ
αὐτοὶ πολέμιοι ἡμῖν ἦσαν, ὅπερ σαφεστάτη πίστις (Thue. 1,35). Οὐδὲν
ἄδικον διωγεγένημαι ποιῶν, ἥνπερ νομίζω μελέτην εἶναι καλλίστην ἀπο-
λογίας (Xex. Apol. 3).
Sometimes the reference of a pronoun to its antecedent is less exact, the sense of § 99.
the antecedent being considered rather than its grammatical form. (
a) A mase. or fem. antecedent may be followed by a pronoun in the neuter,
which puts the notion as a thing in a general way: Ἐπειδὴ τοίνυν ἡ αὐτὴ ἀρετὴ πάν-
των ἐστί, πειρῶ εἰπεῖν καὶ ἀναμνησθῆναι, τί αὐτό φησι Topyias εἶναι (Pl. Meno, 73,
that it, the thing in question, zs). ᾿Ὡμολογοῦμεν ἐπιστήμης μηδὲν εἶναι κρεῖττον, ἀλλὰ
τοῦτο ἀεὶ κρατεῖν, ὅπου ἂν ἐνῇ, καὶ ἡδονῆς καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἁπάντων (Pl. Prot. 357).
4) A pronoun refers to an antecedent contained in, and to be extracted from, a
previous word, e. g. a relative to the personal pronoun involved in a possessive pro-
noun: Καὶ οἰκία ye πολὺ μείζων ἡ ὑμετέρα τῆς ἐμῆς, οἵ ye οἰκίᾳ χρῆσθε γῇ τε καὶ οὐρανῷ
(Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 2, 15)1. Especially after a collective term, or the name of a city or
country, the pronoun refers to the individuals composing the class, or inhabiting the
place: Συνεφείπετο δὲ τοῖς πελτασταῖς καὶ τὸ ᾿Αρκαδικὸν ὁπλιτικόν, ὧν ἦρχε Κλεάνωρ
(Xen. An. 4, 8, 18). Μελέτω σοι τοῦ πλήθους καὶ περὶ παντὸς ποιοῦ κεχαρισμένως
αὐτοῖς ἄρχειν (Isocr. ad Nic.15). Θεμιστοκλῆς φεύγει ἐκ Πελοποννήσου ἐς Κέρκυραν, ὧν
αὐτῶν εὐεργέτης (Thue. 1, 136). Καὶ ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου παρέσται ὠφέλεια ( = βοή-
θεια), οἱ τῶνδε κρείσσους εἰσὶ τὸ παρὰ πᾶν τὰ πολέμια (Thue. 6, 80).
c) A substantive in the singular is followed by a relative pronoun in the plural,
the thought passing on to more of the same kind, and to the whole genus: Αὐχμηρός
\ , , 3 ᾿ \ > - \
τις Kal ἀπὸ παντὸς περιουσίαν ποιούμενος, θησαυροποιὸς ἀνήρ, ovs δὴ καὶ ἐπαινεῖ τὸ
πλῆθος (Pl. Rep. 8, 554).
d) A preceding εἴ τις (ἤν τις) has sometimes a demonstrative referred to it in the
plural, and in like manner a plural term may be the antecedent of the indefinite rela-
. ε ᾿ ΄ ’ = ,
tive ὅςτις, ds ἄν: Eis ye μὴν δικαιοσύνην εἴ τις Κύρῳ φανερὸς γένοιτο ἐπιδείκνυσθαι
΄σ , ΄ ΄σ cal ~
βουλόμενος, περὶ παντὸς ἐποιεῖτο τούτους πλουσιωτέρους ποιεῖν τῶν EK TOD ἀδίκου φιλο-
δού Aen. An. 1,9, 10) ὰ ταῦτα ἀδικεῖ 1 ἢ, τού ὑρί
κερδούντων (Xen. An. 1, 9, 10). Ἢν παρὰ ταῦτα ἀδικεῖν τις ἐπιχειρῇ, τούτοις Kipcs
1 Ἔρχεται πόλιν τὴν Evputeiay’ τύνδε γὰρ (viz. Εὔρυτον) μεταίτιον μόνον βροτῶν
ἔφασκε τοῦδ᾽ εἶναι πάθους (Soph. Trach. 200).
CHAP. IX.]
[§ 99.]
80 Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. 66 [ὃ 100
τε Kal ἡμεῖς πολέμιοι ἐσόμεθα (Xen. Cyr. 7, 4,5). Αἱ γυναῖκες ἱκέτευον πάντας, ὅτῳ
/
᾿ ἐντυγχάνοιεν, μὴ φεύγειν καταλιπόντας αὐτάς (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 67). Αἱ πύλεις προαγο-
Lu = =n Ca! a
ρεύουσι τοῖς πολίταις τὴν κατάστασιν τῆς πόλεως μὴ κινεῖν, ὡς ἀποθανουμένους, ὃς ἂν
τοῦτο δρᾷ (Pl. fep. 420).
6) Where the antecedent is a neuter term denoting persons, the relative pronoun
sometimes (especially in figurative expressions) resumes the natural gender: τὰ
τοιαῦτα κινάδη, οἱ πεποιήκασιν οὐδὲν οὐδὲ πράξουσιν ἀγαθὸν ὑπὲρ τῆς πόλεως (Dein.
1, 40). (Τέκνον τύδε, ὃν οὐδὲν αἴτιον μέλλουσι σὺν ἐμοὶ τῇ ταλαιπώρῳ κτενεῖν, Hur.
Androm. 570.)
On the construction of the demonstrative pronoun it is to be further remarked :
a) A demonstrative pronoun is put as object, so that it is characterized by an
adjective, or by an indefinite substantive with an adjective, attached by way of apposi-
tion, in which case the demonstrative, by an attraction (as § 98, a), conforms itself to
the attached substantive. (In English we use either a demonstrative adverb, as
herein or the like, or a circumlocution with relative and verb substantive): Ταῦτ᾽,
ἀληθῆ λέγω (PL. Prot. 342, herein I speak truth, or, this that I say,is true). Λέγε pot,
εἴ τί σοι δοκῶ τοῦτο χαλεπὸν ποιῆσαι, ὅτι ἤτησά σε δοῦναί μοι TOY βουλύμενον τῶν Μήδων
μοι ἕπεσθαι (Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 5, 21). Τούτους ἔλεγον οἱ στρατιῶται βαρβαρωτάτους διεὰλ-
θεῖν (Xen. An. 5, 4, 34, these, the soldier said, were the most barbarous that —).
Καλὴν ἐκείνην δωρεὰν αὐτῷ δεδώκατε (Lys.). Οὐκέτι τοῦτο φαῦλον οὐδ᾽ ἁπλοῦν ἔργον
ἐρωτᾷς (Xen. Cyr. 1, 0, 27, what thou here askest, is —). (Ἔθος τι τοῦτο Σωκράτης
ἔχει, Pl. Conv.175. Τί οὖν δὴ τοῦτο λέγεις ; Pl. Gorg. 452, what then meanest thow
by this ?)
6) A demonstrative is attached, as apposition, to an interrogative pronoun (ris οὗτος,
τίς ὅδε), to mark that the thing asked about is something that has been already inti-
mated, or that is at the same time referred to: ᾿Αγγελίαν φέρω χαλεπὴν καὶ βαρεῖαν.
Τίνα ταύτην; (Pl. Crit. 43, what, pray?) (Τίνας ἕδρας τάςδε θοάζετε; Soph. Cid.
10. 2.) ᾿Ἐνδοῦνται ai ψυχαὶ εἰς τοιαῦτα ἤθη ὁποῖ᾽ ἄττ᾽ ἂν καὶ μεμελετηκυῖαι τύχωσιν ἐν
τῷ βίῳ. Τὰ ποῖα δὴ ταῦτα λέγεις, ὦ Σώκρατες; (Pl. Phed. 81, what meanest thou by
these ? what are these, that you speak of ?)
c) Οὗτος and ὅδε are added by way of apposition, in the sense of the adverb here:
Καὶ ἐγὼ ἠρόμην, ὅπου Πολέμαρχος εἴη. Οὗτος, ἔφη, ὄπισθεν προςέρχεται (Pl. Rep.
1, 327).
d) A demonstrative pronoun, when not particularly emphatic, is regularly
omitted in the accusative, and often even in the dative: Eisyjeoay παρὰ Κῦρον τῶν
στρατιωτῶν τινες, ἀξιοῦντες εἰδέναι, τί σφισιν ἔσται, ἐὰν κρατήσωσιν" ὁ δὲ ἐμπιπλὰς
ἁπάντων τὴν γνώμην ἀπέπεμπεν (Xen. An. 1, 7, 8). Τύλιππος μέρος τι πέμψας πρὸς
τὸ φρούριον αἱρεῖ (Lhuc. 7,3). ᾿Επαγγειλαμένου τοῦ ᾿Αγησιλάου τὴν στρατείαν, διδόα-
σιν of Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὅσαπερ ἤτησεν (Aen. Hell. 3, 4, 8). (Πρεσβυτέρῳ νεωτέρων πάν-
τῶν ἄρχειν τε καὶ κολάζειν προςτέτακται, Pl. Rep. 5, 465, without a pronoun to κολά-
ev, although it governs a different case from ἄρχειν.)
δ) Sometimes a demonstrative pronoun is put superfluously to enforce some -
stantive notion preceding in the same sentence; especially οὗτος after substamitives
which are separated by a parenthetic clause from the rest of the sentence : Κλέαρχος
Τολμίδην λεῖον, ὃν ἐτύγχανεν ἔχων παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ, κήρυκα ἄριστον τῶν τύτε, τοῦτον
ἀνειπεῖν ἐκέλευσε. κτλ. (Xen. An. 2, 2,20). Τοῖς ἀγαθοῖς κακῶς χρῶνται καὶ τοῖς ὠφε-
λεῖν δυναμένοις τούτοις βλάπτειν τοὺς συμπολιτευομένους ἐπιχειροῦσιν (Isocr. Nie. 4).
[PART I.
§ ro1, 102.] Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. 81
More rarely and without emphasis αὐτός : Ἦ καί, ὥςπερ τῶν ἄλλων τεχνῶν ἔχοιμεν
ἂν εἰπεῖν ὅ,τι ἔργον ἑκάστης, οὕτω καὶ τῆς οἰκονομίας δυναίμεθ᾽ ἂν εἰπεῖν ὅ,τι ἔργον
αὐτῆς ἐστιν; (Xen. Hic. 1, 2.) In comparisons ἐκεῖνος : Ὃ θεὸς δέδωκεν αὐτοῖς (τοῖς
Λακεδαιμονίοις), ὥςπερ ὑμῖν κατὰ θάλατταν εὐτυχεῖν, οὕτως ἐκείνοις κατὰ γῆν (Xen.
Hell. 7,1, 9).
Rem. Adverbially ταῦτα, therefore (§ 27, a. R. 2), καὶ ταῦτα, and that, and that
too (Μένωνα οὐκ ἐζήτει ὁ ἄνθρωπος, καὶ ταῦτα παρ᾽ ᾿Αριαίου ὧν τοῦ Μένωνος ξένου,
Xen. An. 2, 4, 15), τάδε in the expression τὰ νῦν τάδε (§ 14, b. R. 2).
In the structure of the relative proposition there are various pecu-
liarities, of which we must note the following.
a) The substantive defined by the relative clause, is often drawn
[attracted] into it, in prose most commonly so that the relative clause
precedes the demonstrative : Πολλοὶ τὰ χρήματα καταναλώσαντες, ὧν
πρόσθεν ἀπείχοντο κερδῶν, αἰσχρὰ νομίζοντες, τούτων οὐκ ἀπέχονται
(Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 22). Κῦρος, εἴ τινα ὁρώῃ κατασκευάζοντα, ἧς ἄρχοι
χώρας, καὶ προςόδους ποιοῦντα, οὐδένα ἂν πώποτε ἀφείλετο, GAN ἀεὶ
πλείω προςεδίδου (Xen. An. 1,9,.19). (Withostes: Πᾶν, ὅ,τι πάσχων
τις πάθος ἄνοιαν ἴσχει, νύσον προςρητέον. Pl. Tim. 86.)
Rem. Sometimes the substantive, when separated by the relative clause from
the remainder of the sentence, takes its case from the relative, but without being
. 5 , \ 3 “
drawn into the relative clause: Νικήρατος ἀργύριον μὲν ἢ χρυσίον ovd αὐτὸς ἔφη
Lon > / > \ A 27 > / a ΄ Le Cie > / > , 5 ‘
καταλιπεῖν οὐδέν, ἀλλὰ τὴν ἄλλην οὐσίαν, ἣν κατέλιπε TO υἱεῖ, οὐ πλείονος ἀξία ἐστὶν
ἢ τεττάρων καὶ δέκα ταλάντων (Lys. 19, 47). Ἔν πόλει ἣ ἥκιστα πρόθυμοι ἄρχειν
οἱ μέλλοντες ἄρξειν, ταύτην ἄριστα καὶ ἀστασιαστότατα ἀνάγκη οἰκεῖσθαι (Pl. Rep.
7, 520). This however is an irregularity (anacoluthon) and occurs most fre-
μι \ Buh x a , ἴ Qf. > > /
quently in poets. (Τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον, ὃν πάλαι ζητεῖς, οὗτός ἐστιν ἐνθάδε, Soph.
(id. C. 449.)
6) Especially the substantive is drawn into the relative clause, when
it is a new term annexed to the preceding: ὁ πατήρ, ὃν μόνον εἴχομεν
I? > n id t δ: aA Y ae - ope
βοηθόν, ἀπῆν, = ὁ. μόνος βοηθὸς ov εἴχομεν. An adjective or genitive belong-
ing to the antecedent is also often drawn into the relative clause: Adyous ἄκουσον,
οὕς σοι δυστυχεῖς ἥκω φέρων (Hur. Or. 854). Περὶ ὧν μεγίστων καὶ καλλίστων ἐπι-
χειρεῖ λέγειν “Opnpos, πολέμων τε καὶ στρατηγιῶν καὶ διοικήσεων πόλεων, δίκαιόν που
ἐρωτᾶν αὐτόν (Pl. Rep. 10, 599). Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι τοὺς ἐμπόρους, οὺς ἔλαβον ᾿Αθη-
ναίων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων, ἐν ὁλκάσι πλέοντας, ἀπέκτειναν (πιο. 2, 67). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
τοὺς ὀχετοὺς τῶν Συρακουσίων, οἱ ἐς τὴν πόλιν ὑπονομηδὸν ποτοῦ ὕδατος ἠγμένοι ἦσαν,
διέφθειραν (Thue. 6, 100).
a) A demonstrative pronoun standing alone as antecedent to a rela-
tive, is often omitted, especially in the nominative or accusative :
Οἷς μάλιστα τὰ παρόντα ἀρκεῖ, ἥκιστα τῶν ἀλλοτρίων ὀρέγονται (Xen.
Conv. 4, 42). Τίς μισεῖν δύναιτο ἂν, ὑφ᾽ οὗ εἰδείη καλός τε καὶ ἀγαθὸς
νομιζόμενος ; (Xen.) Sometimes even in other cases: Οὐδεμία πάρ-
ἐστιν, as ἥκειν ἐχρῆν (Arist. Hecl. 19). ᾿Αναγκαῖον αὐτοῖς ἐστι διωλέ-
CHAP, 1X. ] G
[§
100. |
8
ΤΟΖ2.
(324)
102. |
[§
§
82 Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. [$ 103.
γεσθαι παρ᾽ ὧν ἂν λάβωσι τὸν μισθόν (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 6). Οὐ περὶ
ὀνόματος ἡ ἀμφιςβήτησις, οἷς τοσούτων πέρι σκέψις πρόκειται (Pl. hep.
7, 533). Ὅσα πώποθ᾽ ἅπαντες ὑμεῖς ἡβουχήθητε, οὐδὲν πώποθ᾽ ὑμᾶς
ἐξέφυγεν (Dem. 14,15). ᾿Αναλίσκουσιν οὐκ εἰς ἃ δεῖ (Xen. Me. 3, 5;
= εἰς ταῦτα, εἰς &, omission of the demonstrative and of the preposition which should
be repeated before the relative).
Rem. The demonstrative in all cases is frequently omitted, when its place is
supplied by the attraction; see ὃ 103. Before relative adverbs of place demon-
strative adverbs are omitted: Κατατίθημι πάλιν ὅθεν ἂν ἕκαστα λαμβάνω (Xen.).
6) The indefinite pronoun which is the subject to the verb and the
antecedent to the relative in ἔστιν ὅς, εἰσὶν οἵ, &e., 1 15 usually omitted :
Οἱ μὲν πολλοὶ κατέμενον, ἦσαν δὲ, ov ὑπεχώρουν σὺν τῷ βασιλεῖ (Aen.
Cj Ὑ». OG 3). Τῶν συμμάχων ὑμῖν εἰσιν, οἱ διαλέγονται περὶ φιλίας
τοῖς TeNeuiore (Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 24).
ΕΜ. 1. As ἔστιν ὅς, ἔστιν ἅ, 50, without, change of the verb, ἔστιν οἵ (ovs, ὧν,
ois, sometimes even οἵτινες), and Alps) ἃ ἔστιν οἵ, ΠῚ declined through all the cases,
is sometimes treated as a single word, in the sense of some, cer tain, like the word
ἔνιοι thence formed : ἐπ ΤΕΥ, ἔβαλλον ταῖς βώλοις καὶ ἔστιν οἱ ἐτύγχανον καὶ
θωράκων καὶ γέῤῥων (Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 18). Εἰπέ pou "Eotw οὕςτινας ἀνθρώπων
τεθαύμακας ἐ ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ; ( (Xen. Mem. 1, 4, 2.) ΟΥ̓ ith fhe negation: IIpoyévey καλὰ
ἔργα οὐκ ἔστιν οἷς μείζω καὶ πλείω ὑπάρχει ἢ ᾿Αθηναίοις, Xen. Mem. 3, 5, 3. ) Ἦλθε
Τύλιππος στρατιὰν ἔχων ἐκ Πελοποννήσου καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν ἐν Σικελίᾳ πὐκεωῦ e ἔστιν ὧν
(Thuc. 7, 11). Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι τῶν ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων τὸν βουλόμενον ἐκέλευον
ἕπεσθαι ΤῈ Ἰώνων καὶ ᾿Αχαιῶν καὶ ἔστιν ὧν ἄλλων ἐθνῶν (Thue. 3, 92; ἔστιν ἐν
οἷς, Thuc. 5, 2 5, in some things). (But also εἰσὶν ot, Thue. 6, 10.) But the im-
perfect ἢν οἵ ὋΣ ἦσαν οἵ is rare, e.g. Ἦν τούτων τῶν σταθμῶν, ous πάνυ μακροὺς
ἤλαυνεν = AT 1 δ Τὴ
Rem. 2. In the same manner an indefinite pronoun, a pronominal adverb, and
the ee designation of a place, or of a kind andl manner, is omitted before
relative adverbs of place or manner, especially with τὰ Οἱ ἡγεμόνες τοὺς
ἽΝ λληνας ἄξουσιν, ἔνθεν ἕξουσι τὰ ae (Xen. oy , 3, 6). ᾿Αγορὰν οὐδεὶς
ἡμῖν παρέξει οὐδ᾽ ὁπόθεν ἐπισιτιούμεθα (Xen. An. ἢ nach ἔνθα Ha
ὠφελοῦσι σφενδονῆται παρόντες (Xe NAC. sll, 4, Ὡ ‘0 κόσμιος Kal μὴ φιλοχρ
ματος. μηδ᾽ ἀνελεύθερος ἔσθ᾽ ὅπῃ ἂν δυςξύμβολος ἢ ἢ ἄδικος ὙΕΤῸΣ (ΕἾ: Rep. 6, 436.)
Οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως οὐκ ἐπιθήσεται ἡμῖν βασιλεύς (Xen. An. 2, 4, 3, τὲ as not to be
thought that the king will not st i.e. he undoubtedly will —). (Ἔστιν ὅπου,
ἢ. Οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπου.) Also ἔστιν ὅτε, sometimes.
When the relative in its own clause should be an accusative of the
103. object, but the antecedent is a substantive or a demonstrative in the
ative or genitive, the relative often assumes this case by attraction
(τῶν δώρων, ὧν --- τούτοις, οἷς, instead of &). This may even take
place, when the demonstrative follows the relative clause (ois —, τού-
τοις, instead of & —, τούτοις), or so, that the substantive to which the
relative refers, is put in the relative clause (δ 101,a: ais ἔλαβον ναυσίν,
[PART I.
ὁ 103.] Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. 83
περὶ ὧν ἔλαβον νεῶν, for ταῖς ναυσίν, Us—, περὶ τῶν νεῶν, ἃς ---). A
demonstrative, not emphatic and merely introducing the relative clause
(§ 102), is usually omitted, and its place supplied by the relative’s
assuming its case (περὶ ὧν = περὶ ἐκείνων, ods, ἃς or & —, οἷς =
ἐκείνοις, ods, ἃς or ἃ). Τούτων, ὧν νῦν ὑμῖν παρακελεύομαι, οὐδὲν τοῖς
δούλοις προςτάττω (Xen. Cyr. 8, 6, 13). Ev τινος ἄλλου δεῖ πρὸς
τούτοις, οἷς εἶπε Ξενοφῶν, καὶ αὐτίκα ἐξέσται ποιεῖν (Xen. An. 3,2, 33).
Tis ἡ ὠφέλεια τοῖς θεοῖς τυγχάνει οὖσα ἀπὸ τῶν δώρων, ὧν παρ᾽ ἡμῶν
λαμβάνουσιν ; (Pl. Buthyph. 14.) ᾿Απεστέλλετ᾽ αὖθις αὖ τὸ τρίτον
πρέσβεις ὡς τὸν Φίλιππον ἐπὶ ταῖς καλαῖς καὶ μεγάλαις ἐλπίσι ταύταις,
αἷς Αἰσχίνης ὑπέσχητο (Dem. 19, 121). Οἷς ἂν οἱ ἄλλοι ἐργάζωνται,
τούτοις σὺ χρήσῃ (Xen. Mem. 2,1, 25). Ὧν Χαρίδημος κακῶς ὑμᾶς
ποιεῖν ἐπιχειρεῖ, τούτων αὐτῷ ὀργίζεσθαι ὑμᾶς προςήκει (Dem. 23, 184).
Συρακούσιοι μὲν τῆς ναυμαχίας τροπαῖον ἔστησαν, ᾿Αθηναῖοι, δὲ, ἧς οἱ
Τυρσηνοὶ τροπῆς ἐποιήσαντο τῶν πεζῶν ἐς τὴν λίμνην (Thuc. 7, 54).
Τοὺς μὲν ἄλλους νόμους ἐάσω, περὶ δ᾽ οὗ πρότερόν TOT αὐτὸς Τιμοκρά-
της ἔθηκε νόμου, διέξειμι (Dem. 24,61). Καλλικρατίδας πρὸς αἷς παρὰ
Λυσάνδρου ἔλαβε ναυσί, προςεπλήρωσεν ἐκ Χίου καὶ Ῥόδου πεντήκοντα
ναῦς (Xen. Hell. 1, ὃ, 59). Ἢ πόλις ἡμῶν, ὧν ἔλαβε, πᾶσιν μετέδωκεν
(Isocr. Paneg. 39). ᾿Αμελῷ ὧν με δεῖ πράττειν (Xen. Cyr. 5, 1, 8).
Ναυμαχία παλαιτάτη ὧν ἴσμεν (Thue. 1,13). Todrov τὸν οἶνον ἱκῦρος
δεῖταί σου ἐκπιεῖν σὺν οἷς μάλιστα φιλεῖς (Xen. An. 1, 9, 35). Οἱ
Θηβαῖοι οἷς εὐτυχήκεσαν ἐν Λεύκτροις, οὐ μετρίως ἐκέχρηντο (Dem. 18,
18. Because the phrase is, ἃ εὐτύχηκα, the good fortune I have had).
Rem. 1. This attraction, however, can only take place when the relative clause
really serves to assign and define the matter in hand, i.e. is essential to complete
the sense; never, when it is only added in continuation or as a remark, 6. g. Πάν-
Tov, ὧν εἶχον, ἀγαθῶν σοι μετέδωκα, ἃ (not ὧν) σὺ τότε μὲν λόγῳ ἐμεγάλυνες, νῦν δὲ
φαυλίζεις. The attraction is also not unfrequently forborne where it might have
place, both after substantives and after demonstratives standing alone: Οἱ Κορίνθιοι
τὰ σκάφη μὲν οὐχ εἷλκον ἀναδούμενοι TOY νεῶν, ἃς καταδύσειαν, πρὸς δὲ τοὺς
ἀνθρώπους ἐτράποντο (Thue. 1, 50). Μέμνησθε τοῦ νόμου καὶ τοῦ ὅρκου, ὃν ὀμω-
μόκατε (Ise. 2, 47; but Lys. 10, 32: Βοηθήσατε τοῖς νόμοις καὶ τοῖς ὅρκοις οἷς
ὀμωμόκατε). "Ἕνεστιν ἡμῖν τυχεῖν παρὰ τῶν “Ἑλλήνων τῆς τιμῆς ταύτης, ἥνπερ οἱ
ἐν Λακεδαίμονι βασιλεῖς παρὰ τῶν πολιτῶν ἔχουσιν (Lsocr. de Pac. 144). Οὐ συμφέ-
ροντα ἐκείνοις, ois ἐγκωμιάζουσι, ποιοῦσιν (Dem. 14, 1). Τοιαύτης τινὸς ἡμῖν
ἐπιστήμης δεῖ, ἣ ἐπίσταται χρῆσθαι τούτῳ, ὃ ἂν ποιῇ (PL. Euthyd. 289). It is very
unusual for the attraction to be omitted where the relative corresponds with an
omitted demonstrative (Ὄμνυμι ἐμμενεῖν ἃ σοῦ κλύω, Hur. Med. 753).
Rem. 2. It sometimes happens, that a neuter relative which ought to stand in
the nominative (coincident in form with the accusative), passes by attraction into
the dative or genitive: Εἴ σοι δοκεῖ ἐμμένειν οἷς ἄρτι ἔδοξεν ἡμῖν, ἔπου (Pl. Prot.
353). Βλαβήσονται αἱ τῶν πολεμίων νῆες ἀφ᾽ ὧν ἡμῖν παρεσκεύασται (Thuc. 7, 67).
(Avadicxovow οὐκ εἰς ἃ δεῖ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ εἰς ἃ βλάβην φέρει, Xen. He. 3, 5, =
εἰς ταῦτα, ἃ —.) Likewise the dative of a relative now and then passes by attrac-
CHAP. IX. ] G2
[3
103. ]
[§
103. |
84 Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. [ὃ 104.
tion into the genitive: Tap ὧν βοηθεῖς, οὐκ ἀπολήψῃ χάριν (Atsch. 2, 117, =
παρὰ τούτων, ois —)?.
Rem. 3. Sometimes the accusative of the neuter relative which is changed by
attraction, stands, not as object in the proper sense, but to denote the whole ex-
tent of the predicate (by § 27 ), especially i in the plural: ’E€ ὧν τὰ σαυτοῦ ἐπαινεῖς,
τίνι δικαίῳ λόγῳ τοῦ Ἀττι καταφρονεῖς ; (ΕΪ. Gorg. 512, from what thou
sayest in praise of thine own.) Δίκην ἐβούλοντο λαβεῖν ὧν ἐπὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἐτεθέαντο
Μειδίαν θρασὺν ὄντα καὶ βδελυρόν (Dem. 21, 3). By this means, an attracted
relative in the neuter plural sometimes approximates to the signification of a
demonstrative with ὅ ὅτι. (λνθ' ἃ ὧν, in requital, Sor that —, 1. 6. because , forasmuch
as: Οἱ Ἕλληνες τὰ τείχη ἡμῶν καθεῖλον ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ἡμεῖς τἀκείνων ἐκωλύσαμεν πεσεῖν,
Pl. Menex. 244; mostly poetical.) From an attraction, and a coalition of a
demonstr ative and a relative adverb, result the expressions, used as : conjunctions,
ap Οὗ, (= ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνου, OTE —, ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνου τοῦ χρόνου, ὅτε Pe) ἐξ οὗ, ἐν ᾧ, μέχρι
οὗ (μέχρις οὗ, but also simply μέχρι, μέχρι ἄν, without οὗ), ἄχρι οὗ (in Herod: ἐς 8),
together with ed’ ᾧ or ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τε (= ἐπὶ τοῖςδε, ὥςτε, on condition of —).
Rem. 4. When the relative ought to have before it the same preposition as its
antecedent, this preposition is usually dropt, especially when the verb in both
clauses is the same: Tov πλοῦν ἐποιησάμην ἐκ τῆς Μιτυλήνης ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ᾧ
Ἡρώδης | οὗτος (Ant. 5, 20). Ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ, ᾧ ὑμῶν ἀκούω ἀπορούντων, τί τὸ
δίκαιον, ἐν τούτῳ δικαιοτέρους τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ποιῶ (Xen. Conv. 4, 1).
a) When in two connected relative clauses, both referring to the same antecedent,
the relative would stand first in the accusative, dative, or ‘genitive, and then in the
nominative or accusative, the relative is often omitted in the latter clause, and left to
be supplied from the former : Τούτοις ἅπασιν ἐκεῖνοι, οἷς τι μέλει τῆς ἑαυτῶν ψυχῆς
ἀλλὰ μὴ σώματα πλάττοντες ζῶσι, χαίρειν λέγουσιν (Pl. Phed. 82). Τῶν παρόντων
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἀγαθῶν, ¢ ὅσα μὴ παρὰ θεῶν ἔχομεν, ἀλλὰ Ov ἀλλήλους. ἡμῖν γέγονεν,
οὐδὲν ἄνευ τῆς πόλεως τῆς ἡμετέρας γεγένηται (Lsoer. Paneg. 38). Περὶ ὧν δικαστήριον
ἔγνωκε καὶ τέλος ἔσχηκε, πῶς οὐ δεινὰ ποιεῖ Τιμοκράτης νόμον εἰςφέρων, δι’ οὗ ταῦτα
λυθήσεται; (Dem. 24, 73, = καὶ ἃ τέλος ἔσχηκεν.)
6) Sometimes, especially when the relative should stand first in the nominative,
and then in a different case, a demonstrative or personal pronoun is put the second
time instead of the relative: Ποῦ δὴ ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν ὁ ἀνήρ, ὃς συνεθήρα ἡμῖν καὶ σύ μοι
1 Other more rare and anomalous instances ot attraction in the relative: a) ‘O
ἀντειπὼν οἷς ἐκεῖνοι ἐβούλοντο πραχθῆναι (Lys. 12 2,27: the subject-accusative of the
infinitive attracted. Μὴ ὄντων τῶν ὑπηρετῶν, οἵων δεῖ, Xen. Cyr. 8,1, 12, ΞξΞ οἵους
δεῖ εἶναι). ὁ) Δεῖ τοὺς μέλλοντας διοίσειν περί τι πρῶτον πρὸς τοῦτο πε τος καλῶς,
πρὸς ὃ ἂν προῃρημένοι τυγχάνωσιν (71500». Antid. 187: the preposition of the demon-
str ative repeated with the infinitive, to which it does not belong). c) AP ἧς ὠμόσατε
ἡμέρας (Dem. 18, 26, = ἀπὸ τῆς ἡμέρας, ἐν ἣ ὠμόσατε) ; ἡμέρᾳ πέμπτῃ, ap js ἐςέβαλεν
᾿Αγησίλαος (Xen. Hell. 4, 6, 6: the relative attracted by the preposition of the
omitted demonstrative or of the substantive, even when it ought not to have been
governed by it). d) Ἢ Μιλησία ἐκφεύγει πρὸς τῶν “Ἑλλήνων οἱ i ἔτυχον ἐν τοῖς σκευο-
φόροις ὅπλα ἔχοντες (Xen. An. 1, 10, 8, = πρὸς ἐκείνους τῶν Ἑλλήνων, οἵ: the
demonstrative with ἃ partitive genitivé, after a preposition, omitted before a relative
in the nominative). 6) “Διεκομίζοντο εὐθὺς, ὅθεν ὑπεξέθεντο, παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας
(Thue. 1, 89, = ἐκεῖθεν, ὅποι : attraction in relative adverbs of place). f) Τούτων
ds βούλει ἕκαστος (Pl. Gorg. 517, for ὅντινα, quivis; bstis βούλει, Pl. ee 432).
PART I,
§ 105, 106.] Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. $5
μάλα ἐδόκεις θαυμάζειν αὐτόν ; (Xen. Cyr. Ὁ, ily 38). "Ap οὖν ταῦτα ἡγεῖ σὰ εἶναι, ὧν
ἂν ἄρξης καὶ ἐξῇ σοι αὐτοῖς χρῆσθαι ὅ,τι ἂν Cais (PL. Buthyd. 301.) Ὅσοι τὸν
δῆμον πολλὰ καὶ ἀγαθὰ εἰργασμένοι εἰσὶν ὀφείλεται δ᾽ αὐτοῖς “χάριν κομίσασθαι παρ᾽ ὑμῶν
μᾶλλον ἢ δίκην δοῦναι τῶν πεπραγμένων, οὐκ ἄξιον κατὰ τούτων ὑποδέχεσθαι διαβολάς
(Lys. 25, 11).
The indefinite relative ὅςτις (in which no attraction of case takes place) is used in
some connexions as a simple relative, viz. :
a) In denoting a person or thing which can or shall be something, which serves
Sor something, both after an oe substantive and after an indefinite pronoun,
which is usually omitted (§ 102, a) “Hyepova αἰτήσομεν Κῦρον, ὅςτις ἡμᾶς ἀπάξει
(Xen. An. 19} 14). Αἰσχίνης συνεβούλευεν ὑμῖν πέμπειν τινὰς εἰς ᾿Αρκαδίαν, οἵτινες
κατηγορήσουσι τῶν τὰ Φιλίππου πραττόντων (Dem. 19, 306). Οὐκ “ἔχομεν, ὅτου σῖτον
ὠνησόμεθα (Xen. An. 3,-1, 20). Οὐκ ἔστιν, ὅτῳ ἐγὼ καταλείψω τὸν ἐμὸν οἶκον (Xen.
Cyr. 5, 4, 30). Οὐδὲν πρεῶν τὴς οὔτε Ὁμήρου ἐ ἐπαινέτου οὔτε ὅςτις ἔπεσι τὸ αὐτίκα
τέρψει (Thuc. 2, 41).
6) After ἔστιν (without indefinite pronoun, ὃ 102, b. Rem. 1), but mostly after a
negative, orin a question equivalent t to anegation: Oi "EAAyves ὁ ἐπεὶ προΐδοιεν τὰ ἅρματα
φερόμενα, διίσταντο" ἔστι δὲ ὅ ὅςτις καὶ ery OT ὥςπερ ἐν ἱπποδρόμῳ, ἐκπλαγείς (Xen.
“4.1, 8, 20). Εἰπέ pow ἔστιν οὕςτινας ἀνθρώπων τεθαύμακας € ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ; ; (Xen. An.
1, 4, 2; ; with unchanged ἔστιν, as in ἔστιν οἵ.) Ἔστιν ὅτῳ ἄλλῳ πλείω ἐπιτρέπεις ἢ TH
sae 3 (Xen. Gor 9, 12.)
Rem. Especially note the expression οὐδεὶς 6 ὅςτις οὐ (οὐδὲν ὅ ὅ,τι ov), with omitted
ἔστιν, in the sense every, all : Kai πεζὸς καὶ νῆες καὶ οὐδὲν ὅ,τι οὐκ ἀπώλετο (Thue.
7,87). The origin of the phrase being forgotten, it is treated as one wor ἃ, and οὐδείς
conforms itself in case to the following ὁ ὅςτις : ᾿Απολλόδωρος κλαίων καὶ ἀγανακτῶν
οὐδένα 6 ὅντινα οὐ κατέκλασε τῶν παρόντων (Pl. Phed. 117). Οὐδενὸς ὅτου οὐ πάντων
ἂν ὑμῶν καθ᾽ ἡλικίαν πατὴρ εἴην (Pl. Prot. 517). Σωκράτης παρέχει ἑαυτὸν ἐρωτῶν
τῶν Ἕλλήνων τῷ βουλομένῳ καὶ οὐδενὶ ὅτῳ οὐκ ἀποκρίνεται (Pl, Menon. 70) ".
c) After οὕτως in negations, or questions eon ye eon to such : Tis οὕτω “μαίνεται,
ὅςτις οὐ βούλεται σοὶ φίλος εἶναι ; ; (Aen. An. 2,5, 12.) (Also ds: Οὐδεὶς ἂν γένοιτο
οὕτως ἀδαμάντινος, ὃς ἂν μείνειεν ἐν TH δικαιοσύνῃ, Pl. Rep. 2, 360.)
@) In relative sentences which single out, in a definite subject, a particular quality,
or a particular circumstance, as the ground or explanation of what precedes (quippe quit,
a person who —, one who —): Ids οὐ κάκιστος “ἁπάντων ἀνθρώπων͵ δικαίως ἂν νομίζοιο,
ὅςτις, ὦ κατάρατε, περὶ πλείονος φαίνῃ τοὺς κακούργους ποιούμενος τῆς πατρίδος ; 5 (Dem.
24, 107.) Οὔκουν δικαίως (ἔπνιγόν σε καὶ ἐπέτριβον), ὅςτις οὐκ Εὐριπίδην ἐπαινεῖς 5
(Arist. Nub. 1377.) (In the same sense often ὅς, ὅς ye, Xen. Mem. 3,5, 15; Pl.
Phed. 96, &e.)
Rem. Otherwise ὅςτις for ds is found only i in single, in part uncertain, passages
of the poets and Herodotus. Yet ἐξ ὅτου is used as ἐξ οὗ (§ 103, ἘΣ 3) with
attraction (Xen. An. 7, 8, 4).
The relative adjectives οἷος, ὅσος, ἡλίκος in the accusative are -
attracted into the dative or genitive in the same manner as ὅς : Μήδων,
ὅσων ἑώρακα, πολὺ οὗτος ὁ ἐμὸς πάππος κάλλιστος (Aen. Cy yr. Π Ost 2) ie
Τοιαύτας ἐπιδόσεις ai πόλεις οὐ λαμβάνουσιν, ἢν μή τις αὐτὰς See
1 τ 5:8 ores (ὡς) οὐ φήσω (Pl. Rep. 2, 376; Pol. 308).
CHAP. IX.]
[ὃ
104. |
§
105.
106.
[§
106. |
§ 106,
b.
86 Demonstrative and Relative Pronouns. [$ 106.
TOLOUTOLS ἤθεσιν, οἵοις Εὐαγόρας εἶχεν. (Lsoer. Euag. 48). (Yet also:
Τοσαύτης οὐσίας καταλειφθείσης, ὕσην ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἠκούσατε, Dem. 27, 60.)
Rem. 1. The preposition already given with the demonstrative correlative may
be omitted for the relative ( (§ 103, R. 4): Οὐ περὶ ὀνόματος ἡ ἀμφιςβήτησις, οἷς
τοσούτων πέρι σκέψις ὅσων ἡμῖν πρόκειται (Pl. Rep. 7, 599).
Rem. 2. In οἷος (ἡλίκος) note the peculiar ae of the relative and the
following subject into the case preceding, with omission of the verb substantive :
Πολλῷ ἤδων € ἐστι χαρίζεσθαι οἵῳ σοὶ ἀνδρὶ ἡ ἢ ἀπεχθέσθαι (Xen. Mem. 1, 9, 3, =
ἀνδρὶ οἷος σὺ εἶ, which complete expression is BOE rare). Τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ
ὑμῖν χαλεπὴ πολιτεία ἐστὶ δημοκρατία (Xen. Hell. 2 ἊΣ 25). ἊἜ κεῖνο δεινὸν τοῖσιν
ἡλίκοισιν νῷν (Arist. Heel. 406). (Yet also: Σόλων ἐμίσει τοὺς οἷος οὗτος ἀνθρώπους,
Dem. 19, 254..}
Rem. 3. In ὅσος note the elliptical expressions ὅσαι ἡμέραι (viz. εἰσίν), used as
adverb in the form ὁσημέραι (daily), and ὅσοι μῆνες, monthly, ὅσα ἔτη.
Note on Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns”. |
12) Οὗ 15.5 secondary or indirect reflexive: 1. 6.15 used with (ace. 6.) infin. with
participles, and in such secondary sentences as relate the thoughts, &e., of the subject
of the principal sentence (e. g. in object-sentences introduced by ὅτι, ὡς, that, or by
interrogative pronouns or par ticles ; in sentences denoting pw "pose : iva, ὅπως, that ;
μή. lest). Λέγεται ᾿Απόλλων τ τὸ τὸν Μαρσύαν epitorrd οἱ περὶ σοφίας ( (Xen.).
Κελεύει δέ of συμπέμψαι ἄνδρας (Aen). Εἶπεν ὅτι ἐπιδημεῖν. οἱ παρηγγελμένον εἴη
(Xen.). "EykAnpara ἐποιοῦντο, ὅπως σφίσιν mae πρόφασις εἴη (Lh.).— —b) Also in
explanator. y clauses introduced by γάρ : Βραχέα ἀπελογήσαντο, ov yap προὐτέθη σφίσι
λόγος κατὰ τὸν νόμον (Xen.).—e) The dative wswally occurs only as enclitie.
Οὗ, € are not found in Attic prose, except in two or three passages (some of them
poetical) of Plato. Even of is rare in the orators.
2. Sometimes, however, ἑαυτοῦ is used as a secondary reflexive, and even αὐτοῦ, ἄτα. .
the speaker making the statement his own. Νομίζει τοὺς πολίτας ὑπηρετεῖν ἑαυτῷ
(οὐδ᾽. Xen.). “O ones τοῦ Σάκα ἐδεῖτο πάντως σημαίνειν αὐτῷ (to let him [Cyrus ]
know), ὁπότε κτλ. (Xen.).
Ὁ. Now and then, even σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, σφᾶς αὐτούς, are found as (emphatic)
secondary refiexives. ᾿Ἐπισκήπτουσι τιμωρῆσαι σφίσιν αὐτοῖς ἠδικημένοις (Ant.).
4. a) In Thue. and in some late writers οὗ relates to the subject of its own verb,
and (2) sometimes, evenin Attic writers, is used for the simple pron. αὐτοῦ : (1) Τοῖς
λίθοις χρώμενος, ovs οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι προπαρεβάλοντο σφίσιν (Lh.).—2) Συνέφασάν oi,
καὶ κτλ. (Xen.).
5. “Ἑαυτοῦ (αὑτοῦ) sometimes refer to the first or second person. Οὕτω παιδεύεις
τοὺς ἑαυτῆς ae (amicos twos, Xen.). Μηδὲν ἐπιδεικνὺς τῶν ἑαυτοῦ (rerum
mearum : Isocr.).
6. When it is sufficiently understood from the context that the action is mutual,
the cases of the reflewive pronouns (ἑαυτοῦ. &c.) are used for those of the reciprocal
ἀλλήλων (especially when the opposed notion is others). Φθονοῦσιν ἑαυτοῖς μᾶλλον
ἢ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἀνθρώποις (Xen.).
1 Τοιοῦτοί εἰσιν οἱ ποταμοί, δὲ οἵας ἂν καὶ τῆς γῆς ῥέωσιν (Pl. Phed. 112, i.e. as
the land through which). -
> Principally from Kriiger.
[PART 1. CHAP ing
PAOD LT.
Taba REUATIONS, OF PROPOSITIONS ONE TO ANOTHER.
ESPECIALLY THE WAY OF DENOTING THE MODE OR
MANNER OF PREDICATION, AND THE TIME OF THE
ΕΝ PREDICATED.
GHEE he
The Moods in general, and especially the Indicative and its Tenses -
the Indicative with av.
To denote the relations of propositions, the Greeks have four personal
and definite moods: the indicative, the subjunctive (conjunctive), the
optative, and the imperative, of which the subjunctive and optative
are related in point of conception; and besides these, the infinitive
and the participle. '
Both to the indicative (in certain tenses) and to the optative, as
also to the infinitive and the participle, may be annexed the particle
ἄν (Ionic and Epic κέ and κέν), to denote what is predicated upon
the assumption of something being so and so, which is not actually
so and so. The same particle, moreover, attaches itself to relative
words (ὃς ἄν, ὅταν, &e.), and takes the subjunctive to denote an
indefinite contingency.
The Indicative is the mood in which a thing is predicated abso-
lutely, without any accessory modifications, or in which a thing 15
enquired about in the same way. It therefore stands-in all both
principal and accessory propositions, where no special rules, to be
presently described, demand a different mood. Ὃ πατὴρ τέθνηκεν.
Πόθεν ἥκεις ; Λέγουσιν, ὅτι ἡ πόλις ἥρηται ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων. Ἰ]οιη-
Téa ταῦτα. ἐπεὶ ὑμῖν δοκεῖ. 'Γούτου ἕνεκα οὐκ ἦλθον, ὅτι ἤδειν τὰ γενη-
σόμενα. Ki θεοὶ εἰσίν, ἔστι, καὶ ἔργα θεῶν. Εἰ μὲν θεοῦ υἱὸς ἣν ᾿Ασκλη-
PART II. CHAP. I.]
88 The Indicative and its Tenses. [ὃ 109, 110
1 πιός, οὐκ ἦν αἰσχροκερδής, εἰ δὲ αἰσχροκερδής, οὐκ ἦν θεοῦ (Pl. Rep. 8,
708-1 408. A simply conditional proposition, without any accompanying
regard to the condition as actually obtaining or not). Ὀλοίμην, εἰ
τοῦτο πεποίηκα. Ki μηδὲν ἐπεποιήκεις, τί ἐφόβου ;
Rem. In some kinds of dependent. propositions, which, especially in Latin, are
expressed in the subjunctive, the indicative is retained in Greek: on this see ‘at
end of Chapter ITI.
§ The principal ¢mes, together with imperfect, plusquamperfect, and
109. future perf. passive, are expressed in Greek by the simple tenses of
the verbs, and only in some passive forms by corresponding composite
forms. To denote other relations of time, there are periphrastie
combinations of the perf. participle with the tenses of εἰμέ, or of μέλλω,
am about, with the infinitive.
§ a) The Present Tense is used of that which is, or is conceived to be,
10. now present : μολογεῖ τούτοις “Ὅμηρος.
34, Rem. 1. The present is often used of that which has been for some time, and
) still is, going on, especially with πάλαι [where we use our progressive form for the
pert. have been —ing]: ἸΠάλαι τοῦτο σκοπῶ. Οὐ πάλαι σοι λέγω, ὅτι ταὐτόν φημι
εἶναι τὸ βέλτιον καὶ τὸ κρεῖττον ; (Pl. Gorg. 489). πολλὰ ἤδη ἔτη ἐν ᾿Αθήναις οἰκεῖτε.
Rem. 2. The present of certain verbs denotes, by an idiom of the language,
either generally or in certain special senses, the past action as still going on, or
still continued in its result; e.g. ἥκω, am come, φεύγω, am in exile, οἴχομαι, am
gone: Οἶδα, ὅπη οἴχονται (Xen. An. 1, 4,8). (So sometimes: ἀδικῶ, am in the
wrong in what I have done, ἀποστερῶ, am keeping a person out of possession of —,
νικῶ, am conqueror, have conquered : ᾿Απαγγέλλετε ᾿Αριαίῳ, ὅτι ἡμεῖς γε Ψικῶμεν
βασιλέα καὶ οὐδεὶς ἔτι ἡμῖν μάχεται, Xen. An. 2, 1, 4.)
Rem. 3. Sometimes the present is put for the future, in speaking of being about
to do something immediately : Et φησι τοιοῦτόν τι εἶναι, δειξάτω καὶ παρασχέσθω,
> = Sy > ͵ 5») Η
κἀγὼ καταβαίνω (Dem. 19, 32), (Εἶμι, ἰέναι, ἰών, present and future.)
356 6) In lively connected narrative the presens historicum is often
(33 ) — ᾿ XS , a \ , > \ oD
used : ᾿ὐπειδὴ δὲ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος καὶ κατέστη εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν
᾿Αρταξέρξης, Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν, ὡς
> 7 By fol ς \ / / \ / a id >
ἐπιβουλεύοι αὐτῷ" ὁ δὲ πείθεταί τε Kal συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον ὡς ἀποκτε-
vov (Xen. An. 1, 1, 8).
6, Rum. More rarely in the protasis with ἐπειδή : Ἐπειδὴ δὲ Δικαιογένης οὐκέτι
8) ὑμᾶς δύναται ἐξαπατᾶν, πείθει Μενέξενον ἡμᾶς προδοῦναι (Ise. 5, 13), or in stating,
an individual fact : Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο (Xen. An. 1,1,1,
there were born to D. and P.—; D. and P. had two sons). But the poets
often put the present for the aorist even in speaking of a single fact: Tis μ᾽
expvet βροτῶν ; (Soph. (id. R. 437.) Διόνυσος, ὃν τίκτει ποθ᾽ ἡ Κάδμου κόρη (Bur.
Bacch. 2).
---
κ΄)
Los)
[PART II.
δ 111.] The Indicative and its Tenses. 89
In the past the Greek distinguishes two states: the narrative,
denoted by the aorist, and the absolute (in English, ave, am), de-
noted by the perfect’.
The Aorist is used in accounts and narratives of past occurrences,
in historical connexion, or in stating a past occurrence, without rela-
tion to the present and a present result: Tlavoavias ὁ Κλεομβρότου
ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος στρατηγὸς ὑπὸ “Ελλήνων ἐξεπέμφθη μετὰ εἴκοσι
νεῶν ἀπὸ Τ]ελοποννήσου: ξυνέπλεον δὲ καὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τριάκοντα ναυσὶ
καὶ ἐστράτευσαν ἐς Κύπρον καὶ αὐτῆς τὰ πολλὰ κατεστρέ-
ψαντο (Lhuc. 1, 49. Of ξυνέπλεον, see ᾧ 113). ‘Os ἠθροίσθη
Κύρῳ τὸ ᾿“Ελληνικόν (the Grecian troops), ὅτε ἐπὶ τὸν ἀδελφὸν ᾿Αρτα-
ξέρξην ἐστρατεύετο, καὶ ὅσα ἐν τῇ ἀνόδῳ ἐπράχθη καὶ ὡς ἡ μάχη ἐγένετο
καὶ ὡς ὁ Κῦρος ἐτελεύτησεν, ἐν τῷ ἔμπροσθεν λόγῳ δεδήλωται (Xen. An.
2, 1, i On δεδήλωται, see § 112). Ovpos πατὴρ Κέφαλος ἐπείσθη μὲν
ὑπὸ Ilepuxdéous ἐς ταύτην τὴν γῆν ἀφικέσθαι, ἔτη δὲ τριάκοντα ὥκησεν
(Lys. 12,1). ‘Qs (ἐπεὶ) εἶδον τὸν πατέρα, ἠσπασάμην. (See Plus-
quamperf., ᾧ 114. 6.) ἸΠολλοὶ πόλεις ἔπεισαν πόλεμον ἄρασθαι πρὸς
τούτους, ὑφ᾽ ὧν οἱ πεισθέντες ἀπώλοντο (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 45; of that
which has sometimes happened: Many a time (ere now) have states
bet themselves be persuaded —). ᾿Ἤδη δὲ καί τινα οὐκ ἐθέλοντα ἀνίστα-
σθαι ἀλλὰ προϊέμενον αὑτὸν τοῖς πολεμΐοις καὶ ἔπαισα καὶ ἐβιασάμην
πορεύεσθαι (Xen. An. ὅ, 8, 14. Lt has happened now and then that
I—).
Rem. The Aorist is sometimes used in a somewhat peculiar manner :
a) The Aorist is used of that which has often happened, and consequently (in
cases singly occurring) is wont to happen; in which sense it may then be found
coupled with the present (which expresses the general relation absolutely): Tas
τῶν φαύλων συνουσίας ὀλίγος χρόνος διέλυ σ ε, τὰς δὲ τῶν σπουδαίων φιλίας οὐδ᾽
ἂν ὁ πᾶς αἰὼν ἐξαλείψειεν (Lsocr. Dem.1). ‘O τύραννος ταῖς μὲν πρώταις ἡμέραις
προςγελᾷ τε καὶ ἀσπάζεται πάντας ὑπισχνεῖταί τε πολλὰ καὶ ἰδίᾳ καὶ δημοσίᾳ, χρεῶν
τε ἡλευθέρωσε καὶ γῆν διένειμε δήμῳ τε καὶ τοῖς περὶ ἑαυτὸν καὶ πᾶσιν
ἵλεώς τε καὶ πρᾶος εἶναι προςποιεῖται (Pl. Rep.8, 566). “Ὅταν πᾶσι ταὐτὰ συμφέρῃ
τοῖς μετέχουσι τοῦ πολέμου, καὶ συμπονεῖν καὶ φέρειν τὰς συμφορὰς καὶ μένειν ἐθέλου-
σιν οἱ ἄνθρωποι" ὅταν δ᾽ ἐκ πλεονεξίας καὶ πονηρίας τις ὥςπερ Φίλιππος ἰσχύση, ἡ
πρώτη πρόφασις καὶ μικρὸν πταῖσμα ἅπαντα ἀνεχαίτισε καὶ διέλυσεν (Dem. 2, 9).
6) The first person of the aorist is sometimes applied to the expression of
one’s state of mind by words or gestures, occurring at the moment of speaking
(the past tense referring to the preceding emotion which is in the speaker's
thoughts) : Ὦ ᾽γαθέ, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐμαυτοῦ viv δὴ κατεγέλασα (Pl. Legg. 3, 686, I felt
1 The Aorist bears the signification of past time only in the indicative and par-
ticiple, and in some sorts of [subjunctive] optative and infinitive propositions; of the
Aorist in the other moods, see under these in ch. 2, 3, 4, and 5.
CHAP. I.]
(335;
a)
[§
HH ΠΟ,
§
ΕΤ2:
(335,
b)
90 The Indicative and its Tenses. * [δ᾽ 1am
myself forced to laugh). (So ἐγέλασα, ἤνεσα, ἐπήνεσα, ἥσθην, ἐδεξάμην, ἀπέπτυσα,
&c. in the dramatic poets.)
c) Of the Aorist in negative questions which stand in place of a demand or sum-
mons (ri οὐκ), see Imperative, § 141, R. 3.
d) Aor. of first attainment : = came to —] Verbs signifying to have a public
dignity, office, or power, are often used in the aorist in the sense of attaining to
the same: Ἐπειδὴ Θησεὺς ἐβασίλευσεν, εἰς τὴν νῦν πόλιν οὖσαν ξυνῴκισε πάντας
τοὺς ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ (Thuc.2, 15, became king; βασιλεύω, am king). (So ἦρξα, came
to the government, became Archon, ἴσχυσα, ἡγησάμην, ἐταμίευσα, ἐτυράννευσα, ἐβού-
λευσα, became a councillor, &e. So in the participle: Βουλεύσας ποτὲ Σωκράτης,
ἐπιθυμήσαντος τοῦ δήμου παρὰ τοὺς νόμους ἐννέα στρατηγοὺς μιᾷ WHpo ἀποκτεῖναι
πάντας, οὐκ ἠθέλησεν ἐπιψηφίσαι, Xen. Mem. 1, 1, 8.)
The Perfect is used to denote an action as done and finished, not
now going on, but now complete, or subsisting in its consequences :
Ὃ πατήρ μου τέθνηκεν (7s dead: but τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἀπέθανεν,
died in the same year). ᾿ξηπατήμεθα αἴσχιστα ὑπὸ τῶν ῥητορῶν.
Πολλὰ καὶ μεγάλα οἱ θεοὶ τοὺς ἀνθρώπους εὐηργετήκασιν. ὑρήκαμεν
ὃ πάλαι ἐζητοῦμεν. “Ὅμηρος πεποίηκε (has composed) σχεδὸν περὶ πάν-
των τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων. Ὃ πόλεμος ἁπάντων ἡμᾶς τῶν εἰρημένων ἀπ-
εστέρηκε' καὶ γὰρ πενεστέρους πεποίηκε καὶ πολλοὺς κινδύνους ὑπομέ-
ve ἠνώγκασε (compelled us while it lasted), καὶ πρὸς τοὺς “EXAnvas
t \ , t , :
διαβέβληκε Kal πάντας τρόπους τεταλαυπώρηκεν (Lsocr. de Pac. 19).
Ὃ δῆμος τῇ βουλῇ πολλάκις τὴν πολιτείαν ἐγκεχείρικεν (Dein. 1, 9).
Rem. 1. Sometimes it makes little difference, whether a thing is denoted as a
result, in reference to the present (perfect), or whether it is simply represented
as an action and oceurrence of the past (aorist). Φανήσομαι οὐδένα μὲν πώποτε
ἀδικήσας, πλείους δὲ καὶ τῶν πολιτῶν καὶ Tov ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων εὖ πεποιηκὼς ἢ
σύμπαντες οἱ πρὸ ἐμοῦ βασιλεύσαντες (1500). Nic. 35).
Rem. 2. In some verbs, the perfect is used with the accessory signification of
the present, in consequence of a peculiar way of taking its meaning, the present
condition being denoted as produced by a preceding action, and as the result of
the same. Such perfects are δέδοικα (δέδια), ἐγρήγορα, εἴωθα, ἔοικα, ἕστηκα, κέκτημαι
(possess, κτῶμαι, acquire), κέκλημαι (am called), οἶδα, πέφυκα (πεφόβημαι in some
writers = φοβοῦμαι). The plusquamperf. has then the signification of the im-
perfect: ὥςπερ εἰώθεσαν, as they used ; ndew, I knew.
The Imperfect is used of the condition at a certain time, or of
actions which at a certain time were going on (still current, and not
finished), or of that which was a custom at a certain time, the current
or customary view, &c. of a certain person, or often repeating itself:
"Et Κέκροπος καὶ τῶν πρώτων βασιλέων ἡ ᾿Αττικὴ κατὰ πόλεις ὠκεῖτο
\ 5, Ne, > / AyD / » | x \ \ >
καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕκαστοι ἐπολιτεύοντο Kal ἐβουλεύοντο. ᾿πειδὴ δὲ Θησεὺς ἐβα-
Ἷ > \ nr Γ 5 / 7 Thi 9 15 Ὁ
σίλευσεν, ἐς τὴν νῦν πόλιν οὖσαν ξυνῴκισε πάντας (Thuc. 2,15). “Ostes
ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως πρὸς Κῦρον. πάντας οὕτω διατιθεὶς ἀπεπέμ.-
Sie na na 5 3 A A > A
eto ὥςθ᾽ ἑαυτῷ μᾶλλον φίλους εἶναι ἢ βασιλεῖ. Kai τῶν wap ἑαυτῷ
[PART II.
———————— α΄Ὃυὺὸὺς-
δ 114.] The Indicative and tts Tenses. ΟΙ
βαρβάρων ἐπεμελεῖτο, ὡς πολεμεῖν ἱκανοὶ εἴησαν. Τὴν δὲ “Ελληνικὴν δύ-
ναᾶμιν ἤθροιζεν ὡς μάλιστα ἐδύνατο ἐπικρυπτόμενος, κιτιλ. (Xen. 4π.1,1,
5; in the description of Cyrus’s preparations for the war with Arta-
xerxes). Κλέαρχος «Λακεδαιμόνιος φυγὰς ἣν. Τούτῳ συγγενόμενος ὁ
Κῦρος ἠγάσθη τε καὶ δίδωσιν αὐτῷ μυρίους Δαρεικούς": ὁ δὲ λαβὼν τὸ
χρυσίον στράτευμα συνέλεξεν a ἀπὸ τῶν χρημάτων καὶ ἐπ ο λέμει ἐκ
᾿ Π]ελοποννήσου ὁρμώμενος τοῖς Θρᾳξὶ καὶ ὠφέλει τοὺς “Ἕλληνας
(Xen. An. 1,1, 9; was stilt carrying on the war, at the time in ques-
tion). Κριτίας καὶ ᾿Δλκιβιάδης οὐκ ἀρέσκοντος αὐτοῖς Σωκράτους (ΞΞ οὐχ ὅτι ἤρεσκεν
αὐτοῖς Σωκράτης) ὡμιλησάτην, ὃν χρόνον ὡμιλείτην αὐτῷ (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 39).
Σωκράτης τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ ἐπιθυμοῦντας οὐκ ἐπράττετο χρήματα (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, ὅ, but
Σ. οὐδένα πώποτε μισθὸν τῆς συνουσίας “ἐπράξατο, Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 60; never once
demanded). Κορίνθιοι οὐδὲν τούτων ὑπήκουον (Thuc. 1, 29; ἘΠ of their state of
mind as a whole, not of a single determination).
Rem. 1. Sometimes the imperfect denotes something about to be done, what a
person was going or proposing to do: Ἡγέστρατος καταβὰς τῆς νυκτὸς εἰς κοίλην ναῦν
διέκοπτε τοῦ πλοίου τὸ ἔδαφος (Dem. 32,5, was beginning to cut thr qugh —:he was
hindered from doing 10). Φίλιππος “Αλόννησον ἐδίδου, Δημοσθένης δὲ ἀπηγόρευε μὴ
λαμβάνειν (πε. a 3 83, was for giving, offered to give——And so ἐδίδουν is fre-
quently used). ( "BreiOov; L sought to persuade, & ἔπεισα, I per. suaded.) "Hy ἄξιος
ὁ ἀγών, ὅτι οὐχὶ ᾿Αθηναίων μόνον οἱ Συρακούσιοι περιεγίγνοντο ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων
ξυμμάχων (Thue. 7,56, had the prospect of conquer ing—). Διὰ ταῦτα οἱ Aakedat-
μόνιοι ἐποιήσαντο τὴν ξυμμαχίαν καὶ τὸ Πάνακτον εὐθὺς καθηρεῖτο (Thue. 5, 39, and
they immediately were beginning to pull down —, proceeded to pull down).
Rem. 2. Sometimes (especially by Herodot. and Thucyd.) in continued narra-
tive, an fie SUE is used with but little difference from the aorist, the action being
denoted as the beginning of one or more undertakings, or as a proceeding of
longer duration : Todro ποιήσαντες οἱ Πλαταιεῖς ἔς τε τὰς ᾿Αθήνας ἄγγελον ἐ € πεμ-
πον (set about sending) καὶ τοὺς νεκροὺς ὑποσπόνδους ἀπέδοσαν τοῖς Θηβαίοις
τά T ἐν τῇ πόλει καθίσταντο πρὸς τὰ παρόντα, ἧ ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς (Thue. 2, 6). Παρελ-
θόντες οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἔλεγον τοιάδε (Thuc.1, 72; but ch. 67, Παρελθόντες. δὲ οἱ Κορίν-
θιοι εἶπον. τοιάδε). Τοιαῦτα δὴ ἀφίκοντο διαλεγόμενοι μέχρι τῶν ὁρίων τῆς Περσίδος"
ἐπεὶ δὲ αὐτοῖς ἀετὸς δεξιὸς φανεὶς προηγεῖτο, προςευξάμενοι θεοῖς καὶ ἥρωσι τοῖς Περ-
σίδα γῆν κατέχουσιν οὕτω διέβαινον τὰ ὅρια (set about crossing —; proceeded
to cr oss). Ἐπειδὴ ee He aed προςεύχοντο αὖθις θεοῖς τοῖς Μηδίαν γῆν κατ-
ἔχουσιν (Xen. Cyr. 2,1,.1). [So especially verbs yubendi et mittendi : : πέμπειν, ἀπο-
στέλλειν, κελεύειν, ἘΠ ἄο., Schmidt.| The imperfects jew (Πα), ἧκον, and ἔφην
(tnquam) are used at the same time in the aorist sense.
Rem. 3. The imperfect ἦν is sometimes found where we might expect the
present, in reference to an earlier condition, or an earlier appearance : Ei ἄρα τὰ
ὀφειλόμενα ἑκάστῳ ἀποδιδόναι φησί τις δίκαιον εἶναι, τοῦτο δὲ δὴ νοεῖ αὐτῷ (has for
him the meaning), τοῖς μὲν ἐχθροῖς βλάβην ὀφείλεσθαι παρὰ τοῦ δικαίου ἀνδρός, τοῖς
δὲ φίλοις ὠφέλειαν, οὐκ Hv σοφὸς ὁ τοῦτο εἰπών (ΕἸ. ftep. 1, 335; viz. as he before
seemed to us to be). Πολλοὶ ἄνθρωποι ἀποθνήσκουσι πρότερον πρὶν δῆλοι γενέσθαι,
οἷοι ἦσαν (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 9).
a) The Plusquamperfectum is used of that which at a certain past
CHAP. I.]
μι
Ro
[§
114. ]
Ο2 The Indicative and its Tenses. [Sree
time had already taken place: Ἢ Odvon, οὖσα ἐν μεθορίοις τῆς ᾿Αττι-
“ > an , Ca lal lal
κῆς καὶ Βοιωτίας, ἐτετείχιστο Kal αὐτῷ φρουρίῳ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐχρῶντο
(Thue. 2, 18).
6) Instead of the simple plusquamperf. in the active, we have
sometimes a periphrastic expression by the participle perf. with
ἦν: Οὔπω δύο ἢ τρεῖς δρόμους περιεληλυθότε ἤστην ὁ ὐθύδημος Kat
ὁ Διονυσόδωρος, καὶ εἰςέρχεται Krewias (Pl. Luthyd. 273).
c) When by means of the conjunctions ἐπεί, ἐπειδή (Ionic ἐπεί Te),
afler that, or ὡς, when (ὡς τάχιστα), it is denoted that one action fol-
lowed upon another, usually not the plusquamperf. is employed but
the aorist, or, if a state and continued relation be denoted, the imper-
fect : Ἐπειδὴ ἐτελεύτησε Δαρεῖος καὶ κατέστη εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν “Apta-
ξέρξης, Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν (Xen. An.
ΤῊ »3). ‘Eret Κῦρος κατεπέμφθη σατράπης Λυδίας, καὶ Φρυγίας, πρώ-
τον ἐπέδειξεν αὑτόν, ὅτι περὶ πλείστου ποιοῖτο, EL T@ ὑποσχοίτο TL, μηδὲν
͵΄ r c / ς τ \ “
ψεύδεσθαι (Xen. An. 1, 9, 7). Οἱ πολέμιοι ὡς εἶδον τοὺς “EAAnvas,
ἀντυπορεύονται (Xen. An. 4, 8, 17)—Erel ἠσθένει Δαρεῖος καὶ ὑπ-
ώπτευε τὴν τελευτὴν τοῦ βίου, ἐβούλετό οἱ τὼ παῖδε ἀμφοτέρω παρεῖναι
(Xen. An. 1,1, 1). Οἱ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγοί, ὡς αὐτοὺς οἱ Kata-
- 3 7 > Ἢ » ΕΕΡΑΣ \ mm ,ὔ LA 7
ναῖοι οὐκ ἐδέχοντο, ἐκομίσθησαν ἐπὶ τὸν Τηρίαν ποταμόν (Thue. ὃ, 50,
when the Cat. were not for receiving them).— Αλκιβιάδης λύγους ποιησάμενος
πρὸς τοὺς Μεσσηνίους, ὡς οὐκ ἔπειθεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀπεκρίναντο, πόλει μὲν ἂν οὐ
δέξασθαι, ἀγορὰν δ᾽ ἔξω παρέξειν, ἀπέπλει ἐς τὸ Ῥήγιον. (Ibid., when he could not
persuade them, when they were not for letting themselves be persuaded ; ἀπεκρίναντο
single fact.) The plusquamperf., however, may be used with ἐπειδή, where the
thing denoted is the complete ending of the preceding action, or the complete pro-
duction of the state: Πυθόμενος ὁ Κρατῖνος τὰς τούτων ἐπιβουλὰς τὸν μὲν ἄλλον
χρόνον ἡσυχίαν ἦγεν, ἐπειδὴ δὲ ὁ κηδεστὴς μὲν ἢν ὁ Καλλιμάχου κατηγορηκὼς αὐτοῦ
(τοῦ Κρατίνου), Καλλίμακος δὲ μεμαρτυρηκώς, ἢ μὴν τεθνάναι τὴν ἄνθρωπον, ἐλθόντες
εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν, ἵνα ἢν κεκρυμμένη, ἀγαγόντες ἐπὶ τὸ δικαστήριον ζῶσαν ἅπασιν τοῖς
παροῦσιν ἐπέδειξαν (Isocr. Call.54). ᾿Ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐξηπάτησθε μὲν ὑμεῖς ὑπὸ τοῦ Φιλίπ-
που, ἐξηπάτηντο δὲ οἱ ταλαίπωροι Φωκεῖς καὶ ἀνήρηντο αἱ πόλεις αὐτῶν, τί ἐγένετο ;
(Dem. 18, 42.)
Rem. 1. In the same way, the aorist, not the plusquamperf., is used after ἕως
(ἕως περ), ἔστε, μέχρι, πρίν (ov — πρίν) : Εὔδικος καὶ Σῖμος of Λαρισσαῖοι μέχρι
τούτου φίλοι ὠνομάζοντο Φιλίππου, ἕως Θετταλίαν ὑπὸ Φιλίππῳ ἐποίησαν (Dem.
18, 48). Οἱ βάρβαροι οὐ πρόσθεν ἐξενεγκεῖν ἐτόλμησαν πρὸς ἡμᾶς πόλεμον πρὶν τοὺς
στρατηγοὺς ἡμῶν συνέλαβον (Aen. An. 3, 2,29). ᾿Ἐχρῆν τοὺς ῥήτορας μὴ πρότερον
περὶ τῶν ὁμολογουμένων συμβουλεύειν πρὶν περὶ τῶν ἀμφισβητουμένων ἐδίδαξαν
(Lsocr. Paneg. 19).
Rem. 2. Now and then, the special relation of time which should be denoted
by the plusquamperf. is not expressed, but the action is simply set in the past by
the aorist: Οἱ Πελοποννήσιοι ὀλίγον μὲν χρόνον ὑπέμειναν, ἔπειτα δὲ ἐτράποντο ἐς
τὸν Πάνορμον, ὅθενπερ ἀνηγάγοντο (Thue. 2,92; had put to sea).
[PART IL.
215, 116.] The Indicative and its Tenses. 93
Rem. 3. Of the aorist and perfect (not plusquamperf.) of the indicative in pro- [ὃ
positions dependent upon a governing proposition in a preteritum [in an ‘historical 114.]
tense’ |, see Optative, § 130, b. R. 2.
ad) The Future denotes simply a future action or a future state or ἃ
condition : Ei τοῦτο ποιήσομεν, ῥᾳδίως τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἕξομεν, ὅσον χρόνον 1τ1ς͵
Ψ an
ἐν TH πολεμίᾳ ἐσόμεθα.
Rem. Especially note the use of the future indicative in relative clauses
denoting the being intended for, or calculated to serve, a purpose (one who, or, a
thing which, may or shall, &c.; whom or which, one may, &e.): Οὐχ ὅ,τι τις κατ-
ηγορήσει τούτων, χαλεπὸν εὑρεῖν (Dem. 15, 34). Ei οἴει ὁντινοῦν ἀνθρώπων παρα-
δώσειν τέχνην τινὰ τοιαύτην. ἥτις σε ποιήσει μέγα δύνασθαι ἐν τῇ πόλει τῇδε ἀνόμοιον
ὄντα τῇ πολιτείᾳ, οὐκ ὀρθῶς βουλεύῃ (Pl. Gorg. 513). Other examples in § 105, a.
2) The Futurum exactum (in the active, πεποιηκὼς ἔσομαι : in the (349)
deponent, εἰργασμένος ἔσομαι; and in the passive, διεφθαρμένος ἔσομαι,
πεπράξομαι) expresses, that at a certain future instant something will
be finished, and will show itself as finished. Thus it denotes (1) that
which, as the immediate consequence of another action, will there-
with ensue and be ready; (2) that which will be soon accomplished
and done; (3) the future result of a preceding action (it corresponds,
therefore, more to the English than to the Latin /utwrum exactum) :
᾿Εὰν καταψηφισάμενοι τούτων θανάτου τιμήσετε, τῇ αὐτῇ ψήφῳ τούς τε
ἄλλους κοσμιωτέρους ποιήσετε ἢ νῦν εἰσι, καὶ παρὰ τούτων δίκην εἴλη-
φότες ἔσεσθε (Lys. 27,7). Ei παρελθὼν εἷς, ὁςτιςοῦν δύναιτο διδάξαι,
τίς παρασκευὴ χρήσιμος ἔσται τῇ πόλει, πᾶς ὁ παρὼν φόβος λελύσεται
(Dem. 14, 3). Τί γὰρ ποιήσει (6 θεός); Φράζε, καὶ πεπράξεται (Arist.
Pl. 1027). Μάτην μοι κεκλαύσεται (Arist. Nub. 1436 ; in vain shall I
have wept). (Τῆς δυνάμεως ἡμῶν εἰς ἀΐδιον τοῖς ἐπιγιγνομένοις μνήμη καταλελείψεται,
Thuc. 2, 64; of a future action conceived of as an abiding γ68ειέ.}}
Rem. In those verbs in which the perfect middle has the signification of the
present (§ 112, R. 2), the fut. exact. has the signification of the simple future:
μεμνήσομαι, κεκτήσομαι (shall possess, different from κτήσομαι, shall acquire}, κεκλή-
copa (shall have the name). Likewise two others (εἰρήσομαι, δεδήσομαι).
The verb μέλλω with the infinitive of the future or present, rarely ᾧὁ
of the aorist, forms a peculiar mode of denoting the future as some- 116.
thing which one has at this present time in hand, and is about to do
(futurum in presenti), which notation by means of the imperfect
(ἤμελλον) is applied to the past (futurwm in preterito): Μέλλω ὑμᾶς
διδάξειν, ὅθεν μοι ἡ διαβολὴ γέγονεν (Pl. Apol. 21). ᾿Ενεθυμοῦντο οἱ
Ἕλληνες, ὅτι ἀγορὰν οὐδεὶς ἔτι παρέξειν ἤμελλεν (Xen. An. 3, 1, 2).
1 Si fecero, ἐὰν ποιήσω, see Subjunctive.
CHAP. I.]
[§ -
116. ]
¢
ὴ
94 The Indicative and its Tenses. [§ 117.
᾿Ακούω τινὰ διαβάλλειν, ὧς ἐγὼ ἄρα ἐξαπατήσας ὑμᾶς μέλλω ἄγειν εἰς
Φᾶσιν (Xen. An. 5, 7, 5)*
Rem. 1. Especially frequent εἰ μέλλω, of I am to —, and ὁ μέλλων, he that would,
in denoting that which must be done in order to secure some object s Aci στρατιάν.
εἰ μέλλει πράξειν τὰ δέοντα, μηδέποτε παύεσθαι τοῖς πολεμίοις κακὰ πορσύνουσαν
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 17). Tov μέλλοντα εὖ γεωργήσειν δεῖ τοὺς ἐργάτας καὶ προθύμους
παρασκευάζειν. καὶ πείθεσθαι θέλοντας (Xen. (Econ. 5, 15). But also ᾿Ανδρεῖον det
εἶναι τὸν εὐγενῆ νεάνισκον, εἴπερ εὖ μαχεῖται (PI. Rep. 2, 375).
Rem. 2. Of the simple indicative future (not fut. in preterito) instead of the
optative in propositions dependent on a verb in the preterite, see Optative, § 180,
b. R. 2.
a) With the addition of ἄν the imperfect, aorist, and sometimes
117. plusquamperf. of the indicative is used to predicate something which,
(347) under the supposition of a certain condition, would find (or have
found) place, but which does not do so, because the condition does not
exist. The condition is expressed in the indicative with εἰ. Of that
which, as if 7s, does not find place, but would do so, and of a condi-
tion assumed j in opposition to the actual present state of the case, the
imperfect is used (εἰ ἐδυνάμην, ἐποίουν ἄν) ; if the condition and condi-
tional result, under the same e supposition, belong to the past, both of
them stand in the aorist (εἰ ἐκέλευσας, ἐποίησα ἄν, εἰ μὴ ἐκέλευσας, οὐκ
ἂν ἐποίησα). The plusquamperf. with ἄν in conditional propositions, is
used only when an action (then or now) completed, and a state which
has (then or now) ended, is meant to be denoted. (A plusquamperf.
having the sense of the imperf. is used as imperf., e.g. εἰ ἤδειν, ἔλε-
γον av.) ‘The time in the conditional, and that in the principal, Be
position, may differ according’ to the sense. (There can rarely
oceasion to use the plusquamperf. in both clauses.) Ki te God
ἐκήδου, οὐδενὸς ἂν οὕτως μ' ἀποστερεῖν ἐφυλάττου, ὡς ἀξιώματος καὶ
τιμῆς (Xen. Cyr. ὃν ὅ, 94). Οὐχ οὕτως ἂν προθύμως ἐ ἐπὶ τὸν πόλεμον
ὑμᾶς παρεκάλουν, εἰ μὴ τὴν εἰρήνην ἑώρων ἐκ τοῦ πολέμου καλὴν καὶ
βεβαίαν γενησομένην (15οο». Arch. 87) Ei ὁ Φίλιππος τότε ταύτην
ἔσχε τὴν γνώμην, ὡς χαλεπὸν πολεμεῖν ἐστιν ᾿Αθηναίοις, οὐδὲν a ἄν, ὧν
νυνὶ πεποίηκεν, ἔπραξεν (Dem. 4,5). “lows av ἀπέθανον, εἰ μὴ ἡ τῶν
τριάκοντα ἀρχὴ διὰ “ταχέων προ ἢ; (Pl. Ἵ 0: 32).— Ed μὴ ὑμεῖς
ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα (Xen. An. ὁ, 1, 4; had ye not come,
we should now - Ei ἐγὼ ἐτόλμων τοῦτο ποιεῖν, ᾿ ἐπέτρεψας ἄν, ὦ
Δημόσθενες. καὶ οὐκ ἐνέπλησας βοῆς καὶ κραυγῆς τὴν ἀγοράν; (Aisch.
2, 86; had I dared it, wouldst thou have suffered it 2) -- Ei, 6 σε
1 "Hn ἤμελλον ἀλλήλους ἀπολιπεῖν (Thuc. 6, 31). (Ἠμέλλησα ἰέναι.)
[PART II.
τσ τα,
§ 117.] The Indicative and its Tenses. 95
ἠρώτων, ἀπεκρίνω, ἱκανῶς av ἤδη παρὰ σοῦ τὴν ὁσιότητα ἐμεμαθήκειν
(Pl. Euthyph. 14; I should already have finished my task of learning —).
Λοιπὸν ἂν ἣν ἡμῖν περὶ τῆς πόλεως διαλεχθῆναι τῆς ἡμετέρας, εἰ μὴ
προτέρα τῶν ἄλλων εὖ φρονήσασω τὴν εἰρήνην ἐπεποίητο (soer. Phil.
56; were it not the case that it had already concluded a peace). Ki ἐγὼ
πάλαι ἐπεχείρησα πράττειν τὰ πολιτικὰ πράγματα, πάλαι ἂν ἀπολώλειν καὶ οὔτ᾽ ἂν ὑμᾶς
ὠφελήκειν οὐδὲν οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐμαυτόν (Pl. Apol. 31; I should long ago have perished,
without benefiting either you or myself, from ἀπόλωλα) '.
Rem. 1. Sometimes, either in both clauses or in only one of them, the imperfect
is used instead of the aorist, of relations belonging to the past; mostly (yet not
always, especially in the poets) to denote an abiding state or a continued series of
ba , sy 3). , 9: A , ΄ a > , 17
actions: Σωκράτης οὔτ᾽ ἠλίθιος οὔτ᾽ ἀλαζὼν φαίνεσθαι τοῖς συνοῦσιν ἐβούλετο" ἐδόκει
a , a
δ᾽ ἂν ἀμφότερα ταῦτα, ei προαγορεύων ὡς ἀπὸ θεοῦ φαινόμενα ψευδόμενος ἐφαίνετο.
A > a > x ΄ > δ.) > , 3 "
Δῆλον οὖν, ὅτι οὐκ ἂν προέλεγεν, εἰ μὴ ἐπίστευεν ἀληθεύσειν (Xen. Mem. 1, 1, 5).
᾿Εγὼ ἐχθές, εἰ μὴ πολλοῖς διεπύκτευσα, οὐκ ἂν ἐδυνάμην σοι προςελθεῖν (Xen. Cyr. 7,
5, 53). Λιπόντες τὰς τάξεις προθέοντες ἁρπάζειν ἤθελον καὶ ἡμῶν πλεονεκτεῖν" εἶ
δὲ τοῦτο πάντες ἐποιοῦμεν, ἅπαντες ἂν ἀπωλόμεθα (Xen. An. 5, ὃ, 19). The aorist
is put instead of the imperfect in the principal proposition only when, with less
accuracy, the relation is referred to the past or to a different time: Ei μὲν τὸ σῶμα
ἐπιτρέπειν σε ἔδει τῳ, διακινδυνεύοντα ἢ χρηστὸν αὐτὸ γενέσθαι ἢ πονηρόν, πολλὰ ἂν
TEPLETKEWO, εἴτ᾽ ἐπιτρεπτέον εἴτε οὔ, καὶ εἰς συμβουλὴν τούς τε φίλους ἂν παρεκάλεις
καὶ τοὺς οἰκείους, σκοπούμενος ἡμέρας συχνάς, ὃ δὲ περὶ πλείονος τοῦ σώματος ἡγεῖ,
τὴν ψυχήν, περὶ δὲ τούτου οὔτε τῷ πατρὶ οὔτε τῷ ἀδελφῷ ἐπεκοινώσω, εἴτ᾽ ἐπιτρεπτέον
εἴτε καὶ οὐ τῷ ἀφικομένῳ τούτῳ ξένῳ τὴν σὴν ψυχήν (Pl. Prot. 313)
6 μένῳ τουτῷ EEVO τὴν σὴν Ψυχὴν ). £ rot. 6
Rem. 2. Relative and conjunctional clauses which come to be enclosed in such
a conditional or conditionated proposition, are expressed in the indicative. Ei
ξένος ἐτύγχανον ὦν, ξυνεγιγνώσκετε δήπου ἄν μοι, εἰ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ φωνῇ τε καὶ TO
, > > τ > , - > , Ἢ ΄ - 2
τρόπῳ ἔλεγον, ev οἷσπερ ἐτεθράμμην (Pl. Apol. 17). Ei πλούτῳ καὶ κέρδει ἄριστα
, A Ν a is a nN
ἐκρίνετο Ta κρινόμενα, ἃ ἐπήνει ὁ φιλοκερδὴς Kal ἔψεγεν, ἀνάγκη ἂν ταῦτα ἀλη-
θέστατα civat( Pl. Rep. 9, 5982). Ἡδέως ἂν Καλλικλεῖ ἔτι διελεγόμην, Ews αὐτῷ τὴν
ΒΕ ΄, > aN en SUN a A ΄ “ΔΩ > mine \
τοῦ ᾿Αμφίονος ἀπέδωκα ῥῆσιν ἀντὶ τῆς τοῦ Ζηθου (Pl. Gorg. 506). ᾿Εχρῆν τοὺς
ῥήτορας μὴ πρότερον περὶ τῶν ὁμολογουμένων συμβουλεύειν, πρὶν περὶ τῶν ἀμφιςβη-
ae
΄
τουμένων ἡμᾶς ἐδίδαξαν (Isocr. Paneg. 19).
6) The condition which does not obtain, is not always expressed in
‘a proposition of its own, but may be given in a different turn of
expression, or be implied in the context of the passage as a whole :
Boos ἔχοντες σῶμα, ἀνθρώπου δὲ γνώμην, οὐκ av ἠδυνάμεθα ποιεῖν ἃ
ἐβουλόμεθα (Xen. Mem. 1, 4, 14). “Oste ἀπελάσαι Χαλδαίους ἀπὸ
τούτων τῶν ἄκρων (in order to expel), πολλαπλάσια ἂν ἔδωκα χρήματα
ὧν σὺ νῦν ἔχεις παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2,16; [would have given).
Ξένος οὐδεὶς ἀφῖκται χρόνου συχνοῦ ἐξ ᾿Αθηνῶν, ὅςτις ἂν ἡμῖν σαφές
TL ἀγγεῖλαι οἷός τε ἦν περὶ τούτων (Pl. Phad. 57; who would have
1 πότερον τούτων ἐποίησε Διογείτων, οὐδενὸς ἂν ἧττον ᾿Αθηναίων πλούσιος ἦν (Lys.
32, 23).
CHAP. I.]
[ὃ
ED jel
(347,
Re 2)
9
117.]
118.
(348)
96 The Indicative and its Tenses. [ὁ 118.
been in a condition —). ᾿Ἑϊάλωκα οὐ ᾿λόγων ἀπορίᾳ ἀλλ᾽ ἀναισχυντίας
καὶ τοῦ ἐθέλειν λέγειν πρὸς ὑμᾶς τοιαῦτα, of ἂν ὑμῖν ἥδιστα ἣν ἀκούειν,
θρηνοῦντός τέ μου καὶ ὀλοφυρομένου (Pl. Apol. 388; as would have been
to you—). specially note ἄν with the indicative, where in English
we use otherwise with the conditional mood, to fore a relation dif-
ferent from the actual one: ᾿᾿πιστευόμην ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων" οὐ yap
ἄν με ἔπεμπον πάλιν πρὸς ὑμᾶς (Xen. An. 6, 6, 33). (Ἤλπιζόν σε
παρέσεσθαι: ἢ οὐκ ἂν ἦλθον.)
Rem. 1. The hypothetical proposition with ἄν may have an object-proposition
(with ὅτι or ὡς, or as dependent question) subordinated to it, or an inference
(ὥστε), sometimes also 1 in a different way: Ἡδέως ἂν πυθοίμην, τίν᾽ ἄν ποτε γνώμην
περὶ ἐμοῦ εἴχετε, εἰ μὴ ἐτριηράρχησα (Dem. 50, 67). Οὕτω σαφῶς 6 πατὴρ ἐμὸς τοὺς
κατηγύρους ψευδομένους ἐπέδειξεν, ὥςτε ἡδέως ἂν 6 δῆμος δίκην παρ᾽ αὐτῶν ἔλαβεν
(Isocr. de Big. 7; would have been delighted to take —). "Ἔστιν οὖν ὅπως ταῦτ᾽
ἄν, ἐκεῖνα προειρηκώς, ὁ αὐτὸς ἀνὴρ μὴ διαφθαρεὶς ἐτόλμησεν εἰπεῖν ; (Dem. 19, 308.)
Such a proposition may even itself be made the condition : Ei τοίνυν ἂν ἐμοὶ τότε
ὠργίζεσθε, ὅ OTL οὐκ ἐτριηράρχησα. πῶς οὐχὶ νῦν προςήκει ὑμᾶς εἰςπρᾶξαί μοι τὰ ἀναλώ-
ματα; (Dem. 50, 67; of then the case be so, that ye would have been angry with
me —.)
Rem. 2. Sometimes the aorist (rarely the imperfect) with ἄν denotes what
would fare happened at a past time, if the attempt had been made, and therefore
what might, could, or should have taken place: Kat αὐτοὶ ἂν ἐπορεύθησαν, ἡ ἧπερ
οἱ ἄλλοι, τὰ δὲ ὑποζύγια οὐκ ἣν ἄλλῃ ἢ ἢ ταύτῃ ἐκβῆναι (Xen. An. 4, 2, 10). Ἔκ τίνος
ἂν φιλίας ποτ᾽ ἐδάνεισεν ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐμὸς τῷ ναυάρχῳ τὰς χιλίας παι τς ἢ ὃν οὐκ ἐγίγ-
νωσκεν; (Dem. 49, 50; could (or should) my Sather have lent —?) Οἱ Πέρσαι
θᾶττον, ἢ ἢ ὥς τις ἂν ᾧετο, μετεώρους ἐξεκόμισαν τὰς ἁμάξας (Xen. An. 1, 5, 8. Οὐ
γὰρ ἦν, ὅ,τι ἂν ἐποιεῖτε μόνοι (Dem. 18, 48 ; there was nothing that 4 you could
have done alone). Especially note FBaoNG tay av, I should (under other cireum-_
stances) have wished, I could have wished (said | of wishes that are not to be-
fulfilled, , vellem) : Ηβουλόμην ἃ ἂν, ὥςπερ πρόχειρόν ἐστιν ἐπαινέσαι τὴν ἀρετήν, οὕτω
ῥάδιον εἶναι τοὺς ἀκούοντας πεῖσαι ἀσκεῖν αὐτὴν (Isocr. de Pac. 36).
Rem. 3. Sometimes the imperfect or aorist with ἄν is used to denote what in
time past might, upon a given occasion, take place, 1. 6, what was wont to, and
now and then did, take place. (The imperfect more of the recurrence of a state,
or of an operation lasting some time; the aorist, of the repetition and recurrence
of several actions.) Κῦρος, μεταξὺ τῶν ἁρμάτων καὶ τῶν θωρακοφόρων διαπορευό-
μενος, ὁπότε προςβλέψειέ. τινας τῶν ἐν ταῖς τάξεσι, τοτὲ μὲν. εἶπεν ἄν" (would say)
Ὦ ἄνδρες, ὡς ἡδὺ ὑμῶν τὰ πρόςωπα θεάσασθαι: τοτὲ δ᾽ αὖ ἐν ἄλλοις ἔλεξεν "Apa
ἐννοεῖτε, ἄνδρες, K.T.A. (Xen. Cyr. 7. od, 10.) ᾿Αναλαμβάνων οὖν τῶν τραγῳδοποιῶν
καὶ τῶν διθυραμβοποιῶν τὰ πο aenth, ἅ μοι ἐδόκει μάλιστα πεπραγματεῦσθαι, διηρώτων
ἂν αὐτούς, τί λέγοιεν (Pl. Apol. 22).
In some cases, however, the apodosis has the imperfect without ἄν, although
depending on a condition which is intimated as not existing.
a) In speaking of what in a certain case in the past or present would be right,
suitable, allowable, &e., but was not done, or is not done, the imperfects ἐχρῆν,
προςῆκεν, ἔδει, ἥρμοττεν (καλῶς εἶχεν), ἐξῆν (ἦν, ὑπῆρχεν), and adjectives (also
[PART II,
§ 118.] The Indicative and its Tenses. 97
gerundives) with ἦν (κάλλιον, δίκαιον, κρεῖττον), are put without ἄν, in order to denote
the duty or proper conduct unconditionally. Ei ἅπαντες ὡμολογοῦμεν Φίλιππον τὴν
εἰρήνην παραβαίνειν, οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἔδει τὸν παριόντα (an orator, who rose to speak)
λέγειν καὶ συμβουλεύειν ἢ ὅπως ἀσφαλέστατα αὐτὸν ἀμυνούμεθα (Dem. 9, 6). Καλὸν
ἦν τοῖςδε, εἰ καὶ ἡμαρτάνομεν, εἶξαι τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ ὀργῇ (Lhuc. 1, 38). Et αἰσχρόν τι ai
γυναῖκες ἔμελλον ἐργάσεσθαι, θάνατον ἀντ᾽ αὐτοῦ προαιρετέον ἣν (Xen. Mem. 2, 7, 10).
(Εἰ δ᾽ ἣν ἀναγκαῖον ῥηθῆναι, οὐ Δημοσθένους ἢν ὁ λύγος, Aisch. 3, 229; it was not for
D. to say it.) Τῶν ἐμοὶ συγγεγονότων τινὰ ἐχρῆν Μέλητον παρασχέσθαι μάρτυρα (PL.
Apol. 34). But also ἔδει av: Ei ἐγὼ ἔτι ἐν δυνάμει ἢν τοῦ ῥᾳδίως πορεύεσθαι πρὸς τὸ
ἄστυ, οὐδὲν ἄν σε ἔδει δεῦρο ἰέναι (Pl. Rep. 1, 328; thou hadst no need, there would
be no occasion, &e.)}.
6) By a rhetorical mode of expression, the imperfect without ἄν is used to denote
what would be (or have been) an immediate and easily-foreseen consequence of
any thing (instead of the aorist with av.—The consequence or prospective result
denoted as already in the act of taking place). ᾿Ὡρμημένων τῶν ἐν Σάμῳ ᾿Αθηναίων
πλεῖν ἐπὶ σφᾶς αὐτούς (against their countrymen at home), ev 6 σαφέστατα Ἰωνίαν
καὶ Ἑλλήςποντον εὐθὺς εἶχον of πολέμιοι, κωλυτὴς ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἐγένετο (Thue. 8, 86).
Οὔτε ὡς ἀποκτείναιεν οἱ θεοὶ τὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων γένος, εἶχον --- αἱ τιμαὶ γὰρ αὐτοῖς καὶ
AF ἃ: \ ΟὟ A ΄σ > , > , ΖΔ 7 3 “« > ΄
τὰ ἱερὰ τὰ παρὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἠφανίζετο --- οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἐῷεν ἀσελγαίνειν (Pl. Conv. 190).
Ταῦτα πράξας (had I done this—, by such actions), ἃ οὗτός μου κατηγορεῖ, ἐκέρδαινον
μὲν οὐδέν, ἐμαυτὸν δ᾽ εἰς κίνδυνον καθίστην (Lys. 7,32). (Ἦν is also now and then
put, without this meaning, for ἦν ἄν (would have been), the hypothetical being
rhetorically represented as actual: Μετὰ τὴν μάχην εὐθὺς ὁ δῆμος, ἐν αὐτοῖς τοῖς δεινοῖς
ἐμβεβηκώς, ἡνίκ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἀγνωμονῆσαί τι θαυμαστὸν ἢν τοὺς πολλοὺς πρὸς ἐμέ, περὶ σωτη-
ρίας τῆς πόλεως τὰς ἐμὰς γνώμας ἐχειροτόνει, Dem. 18, 248. Other omissions of ἄν
are very questionable 3.)
Rem. 1. Of ἵν᾽ εἶχον (that I might have) without ἄν (hypothetical final sentence)
see Optative, ὃ 131 b. R. 3.
Rem. 2. The aorist with ὀλίγου, within a little, ΠῚ always without ἄν :
*OXlyou ἐξηπάτησάς με (Pl. Meno, 80).
Rem. 3. The present and perfect indicative never take ἄν. In the older
poetical language (Homer, Pindar, Choral Odes) occasionally ἄν (κέν) occurs
with the future indicative by a mixture of a simple mode of assertion with a
dubitative (Pres. or Aor. Optat. with ἄν). In Attic writers (except in Choral
Odes) this usage is very questionable.
Rem. 4. On the place of dy, its repetition, &c., see Optative with ἄν, § 139.
1 Ἠβουλόμην now and then for ἠβουλόμην ἄν (e.g. Arist. Ran. 806).
3 Ἢ πόλις ἐκινδύνευσε πᾶσα διαφθαρῆναι, εἰ ἄνεμος ἐπεγένετο τῇ φλογί, Thuc. 3, 74.
᾿Εκινδύνευσε stands unconditionally (—and would have been ruined, if —). Οὐ γὰρ
δή που σοῦ ye οὐδὲν τῶν ἄλλων περιττότερον Tpaypatevopevov ἔπειτα τοσαύτη φήμη τε
καὶ λύγος γέγονεν, εἰ μή τι ἔπραττες ἀλλοῖον ἢ οἱ ἄλλοι (PL. Apol. 20. A mixture of
an unconditional expression: has not arisen without thy doing —, and a conditional,
47 thou didst not —).
CHAP. I.] H
98 The Subjunctive and its Tenses. [$ 119, 120.
CHAPTER I.
The Subjunctive (Conjunctive) and tts Tenses.
Boru in the Subjunctive and in the Optative an action or state is put
as a conception presented to the speaker’s mind, without his at the
same time enunciating it as real: but the subjunctive denotes the
thing as said in reference to present or future time, and to reality, as
something demanded, or as something purposed and aimed at, or as a
case of possible occurrence; whereas the optative denotes it either in
reference to the past, as something that was once purposed and aimed
at, or a case conceived as having occurred in the past, or also as a
quite indefinite possibility (as a wish, or dubitatively with ἄν). The
Greeks, however, in certain kinds of dependent propositions, not
unfrequently omit to intimate the reference to the past, so that the
subjunctive is put for the optative (but never conversely). In other
kinds of dependent propositions, where the optative should stand, it
not unfrequently happens, that the relation is left unmarked and the
indicative is used.
Rem. The subjunctive and optative are far from being constantly used in all
sorts of dependent propositions which denote something merely conceived and
thought; they are employed only where a need had been felt for denoting this,
while in others the speaker, not caring to denote this, uses the indicative (see
after Optative, at the end of chapter 3). In certain kinds of subordinate proposi-
tions, e.g. in object-sentences with ὅτε and ὡς, or in dependent interrogative
sentences, the modification is not denoted, when they belong to a governing sen-
tence in the present or future (they stand therefore in the indicative, not in the
subjunctive) ; but is denoted, when the tense used in the governing sentence is a
preteritum (then they stand in the optative).. With less exact accuracy, and by
reason of a certain liveliness in the expression, it sometimes happens, that some-
thing which is part of a conception helonging to the past, is put as part of a
conception belonging to the present, and so the optative passes into the subjunc-
tive, or (where this is not used) into the indicative, without in any remarkable
way affecting the thought.
a) The Subjunctive in the first person (in the singular not usually
o. without a preceding φέρε or ἄγε) is used in exhortation and demand,
a, affirmatively, or with the negation μή. Ἴωμεν. Μὴ φοβώμεθα. Φέρε
δή, τὰς μαρτυρίας ὑμῖν ἀναγνῶ (Dem. 18, 267). Φέρε δὴ καὶ ὅσους
αὐτὸς ἐλυσάμην τῶν αἰχμαλώτων, εἴπω πρὸς ὑμᾶς (Dem. 19, 109).
6) In the second and third person, the aorist of the subjunctive
stands with μή in prohibitions: Μὴ ποιήσῃς τοῦτο. See Imperative,
S 142
S we
[PART II.
§ 121.] The Subjunctive and 115 Tenses. 99
Rem. Rarely, and poetically, μή is used with the first person, in praying that
something may not befall the speaker: ᾿Αλλά μ᾽ ἐκ τῆςδε γῆς πύρθμευσον ὡς
τάχιστα μηδ᾽ αὐτοῦ θανῶ (Soph. Trach. 801).
Subj. dubitativus.] The subjunctive is used in simple interrogations
or in doubting questions (expressive of disapprobation, displeasure,
denial), of that which shall come to pass, zs to de done (what one is
challenged to do, what one is required to do by the will of another,
what can and shall be done), both when they are direct, and when
they are dependent on a leading verb in the present or future’: Τί
φῶ; τί δρῶ; Ilds οὖν δὴ περὶ αὐτῶν τούτων λέγωμεν καὶ πῶς ποιῶμεν;
(Pl. Phil. 63.) Δοκεῖ χρῆναι, ὦ eee ἐπιθῶμαι TA ἀνδρὶ Kat
τιμωρήσωμαι ὑμῶν ἐναντίον, (Pl. Conv. 214.) Δέξεσθε ἡμᾶς ἢ ἀπίω-
μεν ; (Pl. Conv. 212. Will ye recewe Us, or are we to go away : ’)
Ἵνα οὖν τριάκοντα ἄνθρωποι ΠΟ ΕΠ ΑΙ ἡμῖν, τοὺς ἁπαντᾶς ἀπίσ-
τως πρὸς ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς διαθῶμεν; (Dem. 20,22.) "Apa, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης,
μὴ αἰσχυνθῶμεν τὸν ἱἱερσῶν βασιλέα μιμήσασθαι; (Xen. Leon. 4, 4.)
ΠΠόθεν οὖν τις ἄρξηται, πολλῆς οὗσης περὶ τὰ ἀμφιςβητούμενα μάχης;
(Pl. Phil. 15.) Tivos ἕνεκα ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν πρῶτον καταδειχθῇ τοιοῦτον
ἔργον ; (Dem. 20, 117; why 18. such a deed to be done for the first time
in our days ?) — neat τήν τ᾽ ἀδελφὴν ὅ ὅπως ἐκδῷ καὶ TAAN ὁπόθεν
διοικῶ (Dem. 27, 66). Βουλεύομαι, πῶς σε ἀποδρῶ (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 13).
Οὐκ ἔχω, ὅπως σοι εἴπω ἃ νοῶ (Pl. Huthyph. de Oi; Cen nage
τίζουσιν, ὅ,τι ἐλάττονος πριάμενοι πλείονος ἀποδῶνται (Xen. Mem. 3,
7,6). Ta ἐκπώματα οὐκ oid εἰ Χρυσάντᾳ τούτῳ δῶ, ἐπεὶ Kal τὴν
ὅδραν σου ὑφήρπασεν (Xen. Cyr. ὃ, 4,10). (χω and οὐκ ἔχω ὅ, τι (6)
with the ne often occur in the sense, have something (nothing)
to —: Οὐδὲν Σωκράτει διοίσει, ἐὰν μόνον. ἔχῃ, ὅτῳ διαλέγηται (Pe.
Conv. 194; somebody to converse with). Ἕκάτεροι ἔχουσιν ἐφ᾽ οἷς
φιλοτιμηθῶσιν. 1506». Paneg. 44.)
Rem. 1. When the speaker is less concerned to mark the notion of requirement
(the zs to be), it is not unfrequently omitted, and such a question, whether direct or
indirect, is put in the indicative future (as a question what will happen) : Ti οὖν
ποιήσομεν; πότερον εἰς τὴν πόλιν πάντας τούτους παραδεξύμεθα ἢ ἢ τοὺς μέν, τοὺς δ᾽ οὔ ;
CET. Keep. 3, 397. ) Ap’ οὖν θησόμεθα νόμον διὰ ταῦτα μηδὲ τὸ λοιπὸν ἐξεῖναι τῇ Rov}
μηδὲ TO δήμῳ μήτε προβουλεύειν μήτε χειροτονεῖν μηδέν; (Dem. 20, 4; shall we
make a law ἢ Οὐκ ἔχετε, οἶμαι,. 0, τι ποιήσετε (Dem. 8, 32). Hence the phrase is
either οὐκ ἔχω, ὅ,τι χρήσωμαι τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ, τῷ ἀργυρίῳ (what to do with —)s or,
sometimes χρήσομαι. (Εἴπωμεν ἢ σιγῶμεν, ἢ τί δράσομεν; Eur. Ton, 168. “Ἀμιὰ-
λῶνται, ὁπότεροι φθήσονται τὴν πόλιν ἀγαθόν τι ποιήσαντες, 1500}. Paneg. 79.)
Rem. 2. In deliberating with oneself or others what to do (say, think) now
immediately, the question is sometimes put in the first person of the present
1 Viz. regularly ; of the subjunctive instead of the optative after a leading verb in
a preteritum (δ 119, R.), see Optative, § 130 b, and also the following §§.
CHAP. II. ] Η 2
100 The Subjunctive and its Tenses. [ὃ 125:
indicative : Πῶς οὖν, ὦ ὦ ᾿Αλκιβιάδη, ποιοῦμεν ; οὕτως οὔτε τι λέγομεν ἐπὶ τῇ κύλικι
οὔτ᾽ ἐπάδομεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀτεχνῶς ὥςπερ οἱ διψῶντες πιόμεθα; SPE Conv. 214. What do
we then, Alcibiades? Directly afterwards we have ᾿Αλλὰ τί ποιῶμεν ;)
Rem. 3. Of the dubitative question in the optative with ἄν, see Optative, ὃ 136.
The subjunctive stands 1 mn propositions of intention (final sentences)
with the conjunctions 4 iva, ὡς (poet. “ὄφρα), ὅπως, in order that (ἵνα μή,
ὡς μή, ὅπως μή, Sometimes simply μή, that—not; lest) after a governing
verb in the present or future. «Ὡς and ὅπως in this sense sometimes
take ἄν, never (va or the simple μή". Ὅπως (without dv) and ὅπως μή,
however, sometimes take, instead of the aor. 1 of the subjunctive, the
future indicative, whereby the thing intended, is brought out more
independently, | as a thing that will occur. (See note at end of following δ)
Βασιλεὺς αἱρεῖται. οὐχ ἵνα ἑαυτοῦ καλῶς ἐπιμελῆ παι, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα καὶ οἱ
ἑλόμενοι δι᾽ αὐτὸν εὖ πράττωσιν (Ken. Mem. 3, 2,9). Δοκεῖ μοι κατα-
καῦσαι τὰς ἁμάξας, ἃ ἃς ἔχομεν, ἵνα μὴ τὰ ζεύγη ἡμῶν στρα ΠΝ: ἀλλὰ
τραπώμεθα, ὅπῃ ἂν τῇ στρατιᾷ συμφέρῃ (Xen. An: 3,5 Ὁ. ΟἿΣ Τισσα-
φέρνης διανοεῖται τὴν γέφυραν λῦσαι τῆς νυκτός, ὡς μὴ διαβῆτε, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν
μέσῳ ἀποληφθῆτε τοῦ ποταμοῦ καὶ τῆς διώρυχος (Xen. An. 2, 4, 17).
Εἰς καιρὸν ἥκεις, ὅπως τῆς δίκης ἀκούσῃς παρὼν τῆς ἀμφὶ τοῦ πατρός
(Xen. C yr 3, 1, 8). “Eay τίς coe το τῶν οἰκετῶν, παρακαλεῖς
ἰατρούς, ὅπως μὴ ἀποθάνῃ (Xen. Mem. 2 2, 10;2). Ratna γίγνεται, οὐχ
ὅπως τοὺς αὐτοὺς αὐλητὰς ἐπαινῶσιν οἱ πολῖται οὐδ᾽ ὅπως τοὺς αὐτοὺς
ποιητὰς ἀἱρώνται, οὐδ᾽ ἵνα τοῖς αὐτοῖς ἥδωνται, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα τοῖς νόμοις
πείθωνται (Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 16). Σύ, ὦ παῖ, ἂν σωφρονῇς, τοὺς θεοὺς
παραιτήσῃ συγγνώμονάς, σοι εἶναι, εἴ τι παρημέληκας τῆς μητρός, μὴ σε
καὶ οὗτοι νομίσαντες ἀχάριστον εἶναι οὐκ ἐθέλωσιν εὖ ποιεῖν (Xen. Mem.
2, 2, 14). — Τουτὶ ue μου TO σκιάδειον U ὑπέρεχε ἄνωθεν, ὡς ἂν μή"
π ὁρῶσιν οἱ θεοί (Arist. Aves 1509). Ὁ τύραννος πολέμους τινὰς ἀεὶ
κινεῖ, ἵν᾽ ἐν χρείᾳ ἡγεμόνος ὁ δῆμος ἢ καὶ, ἐάν τινας ὑποπτεύῃ ἐλεύθερα
φρονήματα ἐ ἔχοντας μὴ ἐπιτρέψειν αὐτῷ ἄρχειν, ὅπως ἂν τούτους μετὰ
προφάσεως ἀπολλύῃ, ἐνδοὺς τοῖς πολεμίοις (εν, ep. 8, 567). — Οἱ
σύμμαχοι οὐδὲ δι’ ἕν ἄλλο τρέφονται ἢ ὅπως μαχοῦνται ὑπὲρ τῶν τρε-
φόντων (Xen. Cyr. 2,1, 31). Χρὴ ἀναβιβάζειν ἐπὶ τὸν τροχὸν τοὺς
ΠΝ fee ἵνα dy occurs, ἵνα means where. With ws and ὅπως, ἄν effects no per-
ceptible change of meaning. [But Hermann, ὡς, or ὅπως, ἂν ἔλθω, ut veniam st
forte venias ; that, if so be, may come. T. K. A.—Rather (comp. Particles, ὃ 302),
the ἄν denotes that the thing intended will ensue ὅπως ἔλθω, that I may come,
such being the intention whether realized or not; but ὅπως ἂν ἔλθω, THAT 7 may
come, as, in the case supposed, I shall: almost = so shall I come. So in the
oo Aristoph. Av. 1509, ὡς ἂν μή μ᾽ ὁρῶσιν ot θεοί, so shall the gods not see
me. H. B.
2 ὡς ἂν μή μ᾽ ὁρῶσιν οἱ θεοί, that, as far as this goes, the gods see me not—so
shall the gods not see me ; without ἄν, merely to the intent that they, &e.
[PART II.
6 123.| The Subjunctive and its Tenses. ΙΟΙ
> 4 ; Ὁ ai /
ἀναγραφέντας (to put the persons denounced upon the rack), ὅπως μὴ προ-
τερον νὺξ ἔσται πρὶν πυθέσθαι τοὺς ἄνδρας ἅπαντας (Andoc. 1, 43).
The subjunctive stands in object-sentences annexed by ὅπως or
ὅπως μή to the present or future of verbs or phrases denoting, to
endeavour (to take care, to work upon others) that something may, or
may not, be done (as ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, σπουδάζειν, παρασκευάζειν, πράττειν,
μηχανᾶσθαι, παραγγέλλειν, πρόνοιαν ἔχειν, περὶ πολλοῦ ποιεῖσθαι, πρὸς
τοῦτο τὸν νοῦν ἔχειν, &e.). But the future indicative is also used, in
order to mark the object prominently as something that will occur,
or as a state that continues in the future, and this is the most usual
form; somewhat less frequent the subjunctive of the present and aor. 2,
while that of the aor. 1 active and middle is even very rare in object-
sentences with ὅπως. Now and then ἄν is added to ὅπως, and then
always the subjunctive: ΓΆλλου του dpa ἐπιμελήσει ἡμῖν ἐλθὼν ἐπὶ τὰ
τῆς πόλεως πράγματα ἢ ὅπως ὅτι βέλτιστοι οἱ πολῖται ὦμεν ; (Pl. Gory.
510.) Σεύθης κελεύει Ξενοφῶντα προθυμεῖσθαι, ὅπως διαβῇ τὸ στρά-
τευμα (Xen. An. ἴ, 1, 5). El τίς σοι τῶν γνωρίμων κινδυνεύει δι᾽
ἔνδειαν ἀπολέσθαι, οὐκ οἴει σοι ἄξιον εἶναι ἐπιμεληθῆναι, ὅπως διασωθῇ;
(Xen. Mem. ἃ, 10,9.) Φίλιππος ὠνεῖται παρὰ τῶν πρέσβεων, ὅπως μὴ
ἀπίωμεν ἐκ Μακεδονίας (Dem. 18, 83).--ὩὭςπερ τὸν ποιμένα δεῖ ἐπι-
μελεῖσθαι, ὅπως σῶαί τε ἔσονται αἱ οἷες καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἕξουσιν, οὕτω
καὶ τὸν στρατηγὸν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι δεῖ, ὅπως σῶοί τε οἱ στρατιῶται ἔσονται
καὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἕξουσιν (Xen. Mem. 8, 2,1). Καλὸν παρασκευάζειν,
ὅπως ὡς βέλτισται ἔσονται τῶν πολιτῶν αἱ ψυχαί (Pl. Gorg. 505). Ov
μικρὰν πρόνοιαν ἔχειν δεῖ, ὅπως κύριος ἔσται ὁ νόμος καὶ μήτε συγχυ-
θήσεται μήτ᾽ ad μεταποιηθήσεται (Dem. 23, 03). Τί μάλιστα ἐν ἅπασι
διεσπούδασται τοῖς νόμοις ; Ὅπως μὴ γενήσονται οἱ περὶ ἀλλήλους
φόνοι (Dem. 20, 157)".---Οἱ ναῦται τῷ ναυκλήρῳ περικέχυνται δεόμενοι
καὶ πάντα ποιοῦντες, ὅπως ἄν σφισι τὸ πηδάλιον ἐπιτρέψῃ (Pl. Kep.
6, 488). (Εἰ τὸν ἐχθρὸν κακῶς ποιητέον ἐστίν, κακὸν δὲ μέγιστον αὐτὴ ἡ ἀδικία ἐστὶν
ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ ἐνοῦσα μηδὲ τιμωρίᾳ ἐκκαθαιρομένη, ἐάν τινα ἀδικῇ ὁ ἐχθρός, παντὶ τρόπῳ
παρασκευαστέον, ὅπως μηδὲ ἔλθῃ παρὰ τὸν δικαστήν" ἐὰν δὲ ἔλθη, μηχανητέον, ὕπως
ἂν διαφύγῃ καὶ μὴ δῷ δίκην, ἀλλ᾽, ἐάν τε χρυσίον ἡρπακὼς ἢ πολύ, μὴ ἀποδιδῷ τοῦτο
ἀλλ᾽ ἔχων ἀναλίσκῃ ἀδίκως καὶ ἀθέως, ἐάν τε αὖ θανάτου ἄξια ἠδικηκὼς ἦ, ὅπως μὴ
ἀποθανεῖται, μάλιστα μὲν μηδέποτε ἀλλ᾽ ἀθάνατος ἔσται πονηρὸς ὦν, εἰ δὲ ph, ἵπως
ὡς πλεῖστον χρύνον βιώσεται, Pl. Gorg. 480.)
Rem. 1. Ὅπως is originally an interrogative particle (Low), in which significa-
tion it is frequently used. Verbs like σκοπεῖν, βουλεύεσθαι, &c., denote therefore,
in the first instance: to consider how a thing may be done (as intention), in which
sense the fut. indic. is exclusively used (Ἀνάγκη σκοπεῖν, ὅπως τὰ πράγματα
! Σινωπεῖς Τιμασίωνα κελεύουσι προστατεῦσαι, Oras ἐκπλεύσῃ ἡ στρατιά (Xen. An.
, 6, 21).
CHAP, 11.]}
§
102 The Subjunctive and its Tenses. [ὃ 124.
σωθήσεται, Dem. 9, 63. Τιμοκράτης τοῖς πονηροῖς, ὅπως μὴ δώσουσι δίκην, ὁδὸν
δείκνυσιν, Dem. 24, 106); consequently, at the same time, to take measures that
it may be done, in which sense the subjunctive | may also be used, (οὐ μόνον
ψηφί Cer bau τὴν εἰρήνην δεῖ, ἀλλὰ καὶ βουλεύεσθαι, ὅπως ἄξομεν αὐτὴν καὶ μὴ πάλιν
εἰς τὰς αὐτὰς καταστησόμεθα ταραχάς, Isocr. de Pae. 25. Τοῦτό μοι δοκεῖ σκεπτέον
εἶναι, ὅπως ὡς ἐλάχιστα μὲν τραύματα λάβωμεν, ἁ ὡς ἐλάχιστα, δὲ σώματα ἀνδρῶν d απο-
βάλωμεν, Xen. An. 4, 6, 10. Σκοπεῖ, ὅπως μὴ ἔξαρνος ἔσει ἃ νῦν λέγεις, Pl.
Hutiyd. 285.}} Then it comes to be used with all verbs which denote an endea-
vouring and an acting in order to a purpose, with loss of the interrogative sense,
and consequently with mixed construction, rarely with aor. 1, which so much
resembles the future. Lastly, it also denotes merely the intention (§ 122), in
which sense the subjunctive predominates, and the fut. indic. is more rare.
Rem. 2. This constr uction of 6 ὅπως must be kept quite distinct from the relative
ὅπως in ΠΕ Sassou οὐκ ἔστιν ὅπως, there is no way in which —, tt is not
possible that (§ 102, b. R. 2), which never has the subjunctive.
Rem. 3. After verbs like σκοπῶ, βουλεύομαι, &e., there may also be attached by
ὅπως a dependent interrogative sentence with (potential) optative and ἄν (see
ὃ 197), of that which may “probably take place: Σκοπῶ, ὅπως ἂν ὁ μὲν παῖς ὅδε ὁ
σὸς καὶ 1) παῖς ἥδε ὡς ῥᾷστα διάγοιεν, ἡμεῖς δ᾽ ἂν μάλιστα εὐφραινοίμεθα θεώμενοι
αὐτούς (Xen. Conv. 2).
Rem. 4. Elliptically ὅπως, ὅπως μή, μηδείς, &e. stand often with the second,
more rarely with the third or first person of the fut. indic. to denote a command,
a prohibition, instead of the imperative (see to τί, that) : "Ores οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες
ἄξιοι τῆς Aaitents, 3 ἣν κέκτησθε (Xen. An. 1,7, 3). Ὅπως ἐπέξει τῷ μιαρῷ καὶ
μὴ διαλύσῃ (Dem. 21, 216. Prosecute the rascal, and make no terms 3. Ὅπως
τοίνυν περὶ τοῦ πολέμου μηδὲν ἐ ἐρεῖς" οὐδεὶς γὰρ οὐδὲν αἰτιᾶται περὶ αὐτοῦ oS (Dem.
19, 92). (Ῥούτοις ἐγὼ ἀποκρινοῦμαι καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ἀκριβῶς" καὶ ὅπως, ὥσπερ ἐρωτῶσι
προθύμως, οὕτω καὶ ποιεῖν ἐθελήσουσιν. Dem. ὃ, 598. Ὅπως δὲ τὸ σύμβολον λαβόντες
ἔπειτα πλησίον καθεδούμεθα, Arist. Eccl. 907. ) (The aorist subjunctive only in
uncertain passages.) (Of another elliptic use of ὅπως pn, see ὃ 124, b. R. 1.)
Rem. 5. After βούλει, βούλεσθε (mostly interrogative) the Aorist subjunctive i is
used with ὅπως omitted (never the fut. indic.) : Βούλεσθ' οὖν ὑμῖν αὐτοὺς παρα-
σχῶμαι μάρτυρας τουτουσί, ὅτι πάντα τἀναντία ἐμοὶ καὶ τούτοις πέπρακται; (Dem.
19, 205.)
Rem. 6. Rarely ¢ ὡς for ὅπως in object-sentences : Οἱ μὲν τούτου ἐπιμελοῦνται, ws
ἔχῃ οὕτως, οἱ δὲ οὐκ ἐπιμελοῦνται (Xen. Cicon. 20, 8).
a) The subjunctive stands in propositions with μή after verbs and
124. phrases denoting fear and apprehension (δέδοικα, φοβοῦμαι, ὀκνῶ,
(3
ten)
| φροντίζω, οὐδὲν δεινόν, there is no danger of, &e.), or taking heed and
precautions against (φυλάττομαι, εὐλαβοῦμαι, ὁρῶ, σκοπῶ), to denote
1 Cf. Σκοποῦσιν, ἐξ ὅτου τρύπου of Μεγαλοπολῖται φίλοι ὕ ὑμῖν μὴ γενήσονται (Dem.
16, 19; shall be hindered that they may not become —). ᾿Αριστεὺς ἔπρασσε, ὅπη
B@enee τις γενήσεται (Lhuc. 1, 65; negotiated how succour should come).
* The present of εἶμι is treated as future.
[PART II.
§ 124.] The Subjunctive and its Tenses. 103
that of which one is afraid, or against which one is on his guard (ve ;
μὴ ov, ne non): ὁρῶ and σκοπῶ, μή often merely denotes a suspicion
or surmise (see whether—nol). Of a fear, in reference to the past, μή
is mostly used with the perfect indicative: Δέδοικα, μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα
τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ (Xen. An. 3, 2, 25). Φροντίζω, μὴ κράτιστον ἢ μοι
σιγᾶν: κινδυνεύω γὰρ ἁπλῶς οὐδὲν εἰδέναι (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 39). Τὰ
περὶ τῆς ψυχῆς πολλὴν ἀπιστίαν (mistrust and fear) παρέχει τοῖς
ἀνθρώποις. μή, ἐπειδὰν ἀπαλλαγῇ τοῦ σώματος, οὐδαμοῦ ἔτι ἡ GAN
ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ διαφθείρηται καὶ ἀπολλύηται, ἣ ἂν ἄνθρωπος ἀποθάνῃ
(Pi. Phad. 10). Τῶν φυλάκων ἐν ἑαυτοῖς βὴ στασιαζόντων, οὐδὲν δέος,
μήποτε ἡ ἄλλη πόλις πρὸς τούτους διχοστατήσῃ (Pl. Phad. 400).
Εὐθύδημος φυλάττεται, μὴ δόξῃ τὸν Σωκράτην θαυμάζειν ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ
(Xen. Mem. 4, 3, 3). “Opa οὖν, μή τι καὶ νῦν ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἐργάσηται (Pl.
Conv. 21 8).---Φδἷλϑὸβούμεθα, μὴ ἀμφοτέρων ἡμαρτήκαμεν (Thuc. 3, 53).
Rem. 1. Now and then μή with the future indicative stands after verbs denoting
a fear, to express rather a mere suspicion of what will happen, and to give
prominence to the notion of futurity : Φοβοῦμαι, μή τινας ἡδονὰς ἡδοναῖς εὑρήσομεν
ἐναντίας (Pl. Phil. 18). Εἰ μαθήσονται οἱ πολέμιοι, χωρὶς γενόμενοι οἱ μὲν κατὰ
πρόςωπον ἡμῖν, ὥςπερ νῦν, ἐναντιοῦσθαι, αἱ δ᾽ ἐκ πλαγίου, αἱ δὲ καὶ ὄπισθεν, ὅρα, μὴ
πολλῶν ἑκάστῳ ἡμῶν καὶ ὀφθαλμῶν καὶ χειρῶν δεήσει (Xen. Cyr. Ay 1,18). Also μή
after ὁρῶ stands with the pres. indic. as a merely interrogative particle (whether) :
Ὃρῶμεν, μὴ Νικίας οἴεταί τι λέγειν καὶ οὐ λόγου ἕνεκα ταῦτα λέγει (Pl. Lach. 196).
Rem. 2. Μή stands elliptically with the pres. subjunctive to express a fear, or
usually merely a suspicion (if only—not ; I fear that): My ἀγροικότερον ἢ τὸ ἀλη-
θὲς εἰπεῖν. ὀκνῶ γὰρ Γοργίου ἕνεκα λέγειν (Pl. Gorg. 402). ᾿Αλλὰ μὴ οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἢ
χαλεπόν, θάνατον ἐκφυγεῖν, ἀλλὰ πολὺ χαλεπώτερον, πονηρίαν" θᾶττον γὰρ θανάτου
θεῖ (Pl. Apol. 39. I fear the difficulty is not —). ᾿Αλλὰ μὴ οὐχ οὕτως ἔχῃ. ὦ
Σώκρατες, ἀλλ᾽ ἀναγκαῖον ἢ εἰδότα τίθεσθαι τὸν τιθέμενον τὰ ὀνόματα (Pl. Crat. 436 ;
that he who gave the names must have given them after knowledge of the things).
See b. Rem.
Rem. 3. From putting οὐκ (οὐδείς, οὐκέτι, οὔκουν) before the elliptic μή (μήποτε)
: : : : : Bra
with the subjunctive, there results the denial of a fear (I am not afraid that = οὐδὲν
δεινόν, μή, there is no danger, no fear, that —, or, of —), which 15 frequently used
merely as a strong denial of the thing itself; a future with strong negation. Instead
of the aor. subjunct. sometimes (cf. R. 1) the fut. indic. is used without percepti-
. . \ ΄ AK κ᾿ , ΕΙ ΄ Ge
ble difference of meaning: Ἐπὶ τούτου τοῦ ἵππου καὶ διώκων, ὃν ἂν θέλῃς, αἱρήσεις
ob) εκ > \ , \ ΄ - oR ΄ uy a
καὶ ἀποχωρῶν ov μὴ Selons τὸν πολέμιον (Xen. An. 7, 3, 20). Σωκράτης, ὁπόσον av
, > A > Ν a y n 914 18 ν > =
κελεύῃ τις, ἐκπιὼν οὐδὲν μᾶλλον μήποτε μεθυσθῇ (Pl. Conv. 214). av aro
n ’ ε ΄ ? . Ν \
γνῶτε τὴν γραφὴν ταύτην, ἅπαντές εἰσιν ἀπηλλαγμένοι καὶ δίκην οὐδεὶς οὐδεμίαν μὴ
- € ΄ ΄ , = ΄ ΄ πο
δῷ (Dem. 22, 39).—Towovtov ἐστέρημαι ἐπιτηδείου, οἷον ὁ ὑδένα μήποτε εὑρησω
. ΄ 5 . , ΄ > 5
(δὲ Crit. 44). Καλλικρατίδας εἶπεν, ὅτι ἡ Σπάρτη οὐδὲν μὴ κάκιον οἰκιεῖται αὐτοῦ
ἀποθανόντος, φεύγειν δ᾽ αἰσχρὸν εἶναι ἔφη (Xen. Hell. 1, 6, 32).
Rem. 4. From the use of οὐ μή, explained in the preceding remark, we must care-
fully distinguish the use of οὐ μή, with the second person of the fut. indic. (never
the subjunctive) in questions expressive of a peremptory and vehement prohibi-
tion, the μή with the verb forming a negative notion (wilt thow not give over doing
at —? wilt ck not not-doit?). A positive command,in the shape of a question, may
CHAD ΤΙ.
[$
124.
[§
£24. |
§
125
104 The Subjunctive and its Tenses. [§ 125.
precede with simple ov, or follow with ἀλλά : Οὐ μὴ ληρήσεις ; (Arist. Nub. 367.)
Οὔκουν καλεῖς αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ ἀφήσεις ; (Pl. Conv.175. Wilt thou not call him, and
not let him go? = call him, do, and don’t let him go!) Οὐ μὴ λαλήσεις ἀλλ᾽
ἀκολουθήσεις ἐμοὶ ἀνύσας τι δευρὶ θᾶττον ; (Arist. Nub. 505.)
6) Instead of μή, verbs denoting to fear, be apprehensive, beware,
take care, take also ὅπως μή with the subjunct. or indie. fut. by § 123.
Likewise ὅπως μή is put after verbs denoting a prohibition (amayo-
pevo). Οὐ φοβεῖ, δικαζόμενος τῷ πατρί, ὅπως μὴ ἀνόσιον πρᾶγμα
τυγχάνῃς πράττων ; (Pl. Huthyph. 4.) Φυλάττου, ὅπως μὴ τοῦ εὐδο-
ξεῖν ἐπιθυμῶν εἰς τοὐναντίον ἔλθης (Xen. Mem. 3, 6, 16). Δέδοικα,
ὅπως μὴ πάνθ᾽ ἅμα, ὅσα οὐ βουλόμεθα, ποιεῖν ἡμῖν ἀνάγκη γενήσεται
(Dem. 9, 15). Ἑὐλαβεῖσθε, ὅπως μὴ ἐγὼ ὑπὸ προθυμίας ἅμα ἐμαυτόν
τε καὶ ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατήσας οἰχήσομαι (Pl. Phed. 91). Ἀπείρηταί μοι,
ὅπως μηδὲν ἐρῶ ὧν ἡγοῦμαι (Pl. Rep. 1, 337).
Rem. 1. Ὅπως μή is often put elliptically (see ἃ. R. 2) with the fut. indie.
(hardly the subjunctive) in the sense, see to zt that — not: Ei τῶν διωκόντων καὶ
κατακαινόντων τοὺς ἡμετέρους πολεμίους δόξομεν ἀμελεῖν, ὅπως μὴ αἰσχροὶ μὲν φανού-
μεθα, ἀσθενεῖς δ᾽ ἐσόμεθα, συμμάχων ἀποροῦντες (Xen. Cyr. 4, 2,39; at is to be
Seared we shall —). “Oras μὴ ἀπολεῖ μαστιγούμενος, ἐπειδὰν οἴκοι ἧς (Xen. Cyr..
1, 3,18). Οἴμοι τάλας, 6 Ζεὺς ὅπως μή μ᾽ ὄψεται (Arist. Aves 1494). With the
indie. of a preterite by a: “ANN ὅπως μὴν τοῖς τρίβωσιν ἐγκάθηνται οἱ λίθοι (Arist.
Ach, 848).
Rem. 2. Verbs denoting a fear rarely take ws (with the indic., as after the verbs
ΠΣ ἢ to think, be of opinion) : Μὴ δείσητε ὡς οὐχ ἡδέως καθευδήσετε (Xen. Cyr.
6, 2, 30).
Rem. 3. (To ὃ 123 and 124.) On the mood in object-sentences after a pre-
teritum, see Optative, § 131.
The subjunctive is used in conditional sentences with ἐάν (ἤν, ἄν,
from εἰ av), which are only used of that which is possible now or
at a future time: “Azras λόγος, ἂν ἀπῇ τὰ πράγματα, μάταιόν TL φαίνε-
ται καὶ κενόν (Dem. 2,12). Ἢν τις ἀνθιστῆται, πειρασόμεθα χειροῦσθαι
(Xen. An. 7, 3, 11}
Rem. 1. ᾿Εάν carries with it in a more marked way than εἰ, the notion that the
supposition is an indefinite, single case, of (merely) possible occurrence ἢ: f=
should it turn out to be the fact that ; but the difference is sometimes scarcely
perceptible: "Edy μὲν οὖν (ὁ "AdoBos) ἀργὸν bh γενέσθαι τὸ ἐργαστήριον, λόγον
αὐτὸς ἀπενήνοχεν ἀναλωμάτων εἰς ἔργα" εἰ δ᾽ αὖ γενέσθαι ἐργασίαν φήσει, τῶν
sie ἀπρασίαν εἶναι, δεῖ δήπου τά γ᾽ ἔργα αὐτὸν ἀποδεδωκότα φαίνεσθαι (Dem.
27, 20).
Rem. 2. In the Ionie and Dorie poets the subjunctive sometimes follows εἰ
without dy (κέν): in the Attic poets (except in the Choral Odes), or in prose
(except in the archaic phraseology of law) there are no sure examples of this.
' [According to Buttmann, ἐάν puts the case as uncertain, but possible, and to be
determined by subsequent experience.—T. K. A.]
[PART. II.
© £20, 127.| The Subjunctive and its Teises. 105
The subjunctive stands with relative words (pronouns, adjectives,
adverbs) which take ἄν (ὃς ἄν, ὅςτις ἄν, οἷος ἄν, ὅσος ἄν, ὡς ἄν, ὅπου
ἄν, &e.). Hereby, in reference to the present or future, an individual
contingency among’ several that are possible, is put more prominently
than by the simple relative (whoever, whosoev er 5 Such 3/8. a8). Συμ-
μαχεῖν τούτοις ἐθέλουσιν ἅπαντες, ods ἂν ὁρῶσι παρεσκευασμένους
καὶ πράττειν ἐθέλοντας ἃ χρή (Dem. 4, 6). Οἱ ἄνθρωποι, ἐν ᾧ ἂν
(so long as) πολεμῶσι, τὸν παρόντα Tene uod ἀεὶ μέγιστον κρίνουσιν
(Lhue. 1,21). “Arr ἄν σοι λογιζομένῳ φαίνηται βέλτιστα, ταῦτα τοῖς
ἔργοις ἐπιτέλει (1500. de Nic. 38). Ὅσῳ ἂν ἀκριβέστερον τὰ πεπρα-
γμένα μάθητε, τοσούτῳ δικαιοτέραν θήσεσθε τὴν ψῆφον (Dem. 29, 4).
lee ὅπῃ ἄν τις ἡγῆται, κόσμον καὶ φυλακὴν περὶ παντὸς ποιούμενοι
(Thue. Ὁ. 11).
Rem. 1. Often the difference between ὅς and ὃς ἄν is very small: Airia ἐστίν,
ὅταν τις ψιλῷ χρησάμενος λόγῳ μὴ παράσχηται πίστιν, ὧν λέγει, ἔλεγχος δέ, ὅταν, ὧν
ἂν εἴπῃ τις, καὶ τἀληθὲς ὁμοῦ δείξῃ (Dem. 22, 22).
Rem. 2. In the sports this subjunctive is found with the relative put indefinitely,
even without av; 6. g. Γέροντα δ᾽ ὀρθοῦν φλαῦρον, ὃς νέος πέσῃ (Soph. Aid. C. 395;
to raise up when old one who fell when young).
Rem. 3. Quite distinct from this use of the subjunctive after the relative with
v (belonging to the relative) is the potential optative with ἄν (δ 137), or the
hypothetical indicative with ἄν (§ 117, Ὁ) in a relative sentence: “Apfoua ἐν-
τεῦθεν, ὅθεν καὶ ὑμεῖς ῥᾷστ᾽ ἂν μάθοιτε κἀγὼ τάχιστ᾽ ἂν διδάξαιμι (Dem. 29, 5; from
the point, from which you may most easily apprehend, and I most speedily unfold
the matter).
The subjunctive stands with all conjunctions of time to which ἄν
is annexed (ὅταν, ὁ ὁπόταν, ἐπειδάν, ἐπάν, ἡνίκ᾽ ἄν, ἕως ἄν, EST ἄν, μέχρις
ἄν, μέχρι οὗ ἄν, πρὶν av); they serve to denote the indefinite point of
time, and contingency in the present or future: Τοῦτο καὶ viv ποιοῦσιν
οἱ βάρβαροι βασιλεῖς, ὁπόταν (whenever ; when) 0 COTE ea
τάφρον περιβάλλονται εὐπετῶς διὰ τὴν πολυχειρίαν (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 26).
Eas ἃ ἂν (80 long as) σώζηται TO σκάφος, TOTE χρὴ καὶ ναύτην καὶ ΠΣ
νήτην καὶ πάντ' ἄνδρα ἑξῆς προθύμους εἶναι: ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἡ θάλαττα
ὑπέρσχηῃ, μάταιος ἡ σπουδή (Dem. 9,69). Nov μὲν ἄπειμι ὡς βασιλέα:
ἐπειδὰν δὲ διαπράξωμαι, ἃ δέομαι, ἥξω ἀπάξων ὑμᾶς εἰς, τὴν ᾿Βλλάδα
(Xen. An. 2,13, 9 ). Οὐκ avapévoper, ἕως av (till) ἡ ἡμετέρα χώρα
κακῶται, ΤῸΝ φθάνοντες ἤδη δηοῦμεν τὴν τῶν πολεμίων γῆν (Xen. Cyr.
3, 3,18). Σπονδαὶ é ἔσονται, μέχρις ἂν βασιλεῖ τὰ παρ᾽ ὑμῶν διαγγελθῇ
(Xen. An. 2,3, 7). "Kav ΠΣ ΠΩ ἀδικεῖν, οὐ χρή μ᾽ ἐνθένδε ἀπελθεῖν,
πρὶν ἂν δῶ ἘΠ (Xen. An. 5, 7, 5).
Rem. 1. Without ἄν these conjunctions stand with the indicative,” partly to denote
the definite present time (Ἕως ἔτι νέος εἰμί, τὴν ψυχὴν γυμνάζω. Ἔν μὲν τῷ στρα-
GHAP; 11.}
aly,
ᾧ
128.
τοῦ The Subjunctive and its Tenses. [ὃ 128.
τοπέδῳ οἱ ἄρχοντες περιεώρων ᾿Αλκιβιάδην ὑπὸ πάντων 'προπηλακιζύμενον, ἐπειδὴ δὲ
ὑμᾶς δεῖ map αὐτοῦ δίκην λαμβάνειν, χαριζόμενοι αὐτῷ ψευδομαρτυροῦσιν, Lys.
15, 6; also ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ὅτε, ὁπότε. in causal signification : since, whereas) ; partly
to denote a past time. Of πρίν with the infinitive, and its difference from (ov —)
πρὶν ἄν, see Infinitive, ὃ 167.
Rem. Σ 2. Πρίν, μέχρι, ἕως, ἔςτε sometimes in the poets take the subjunctive with-
out ἄν (Μὴ στέναζε, πρὶν μάθης, Soph. Phil. 917): πρίν and μέχρι (μέχρι ov)
also i in some individual passages of prose writers; 6. g. Οὐ πρύτερον αὑτὸν ἀποκτιν-
νύναι δεῖ, πρὶν ἀνάγκην τινὰ ὁ θεὸς ἐπιπέμψῃ (Pl. Phed. 02). (Ὅτε and ἐπεί only
in Ionic poets; ἐπεί τε in Hat.)
Rem. 3 (to § 125—127). On the mood, in sentences of the kind here spoken
of in the pve obliqua, after a preeteritum, see Optative, § 132.
(The Tenses of the Subjunctive.) @) The subjunctive has no
narrative tense, and no tense of the relative past, because it never
denotes an action in reference to the past. The subjunctive has also
no separate future, as the reference to the future results from the
construction of the sentence itself, and in some instances is made
prominent by the transition to the future indicative (see § 123 and 124).
The subjunctive of the aorist, as 1t does not at all express the past’,
comes very near in point of signification to the present, and the differ-
ence is only this, that the aorist denotes the action as single and
transient, or as taking place at one definite instant distinct from the
actual present, while the present denotes more in general the action
and the state as gomg on, or at least not as occurring singly and
with limitation to a point of time. Hence the aorist, both im object-
sentences and in final sentences (of intention), contains a reference to
the future (φοβοῦμαι, μὴ γένωμαι, [fear I shall become, μὴ yiyvopat,
lest I become), and denotes, especially in sentences with ἐάν, or with
relatives or temporal conjunctions with ἄν, a single and separate
future action (like the Lat. futurum exactum in temporal and con-
ditional propositions : ὅταν ὁρῶ, quum, quoties video, ὅταν ἴδω, quum
videro). This reference, however, is not always made prominent, so
that the present stands where the aorist might have stood, to mark the
action as less transient ; and conversely the aorist is used of a present
action, to denote it as transient and single. Sometimes the difference
almost entirely disappears. Φέρε, ἴωμεν. ᾿Απορῶ, τὴν ἀδελφὴν ὅπως
ἐκ ὃ ὦ (once for all) καὶ τἄλλ᾽ ὁπόθεν δ ιοικῶῷ (with continuance, and
generally ; Dem. 27, 66). “Eav τις κάμνῃ τῶν οἰκετῶν (is sick; κάμῃ,
should become sick ; should fall sick), mapaxanreis ἰατρούς, ὅπως μὴ ἀπο-
θάνῃ (Xen. “eon. UL, 9). Τοῦτον ἡμεῖς φοβώμεθα ; (Dem. 14, 36 ; are
we to fear ? φοβηθώμεθα, are we to take alarm at?) ᾿ΚΕπισκόπει τοὺς
1 [Of course, when = fut. exactum, it denotes a future action as completed.—T. K. A.]
[PART II.
§ 128.] The Subjunctive and its Tenses. 107
λόγους ἀεὶ τοὺς σαυτοῦ καὶ τὰς πράξεις, ἵν᾿ ὡς ἐλαχίστοις ἁμαρτήμασι
περιπίπτῃς (Isoer. de Nic. 33). “Ὑποδήματα ὑποδοῦνται, ὅπως μὴ διὰ
τὰ λυποῦντα τοὺς πόδας κωλύωνται πορεύεσθαι (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 6).
(Examples with ὁπόταν and ἕως ἄν with the present, see § 127; with
ἐάν ἃ 125, with ὃς dv, &e. ὃ 190.) ---Σοῦ ἀκούσωμεν ; (Arist. Ach. 290,
single, transient act.) Πολλοὶ ἀποθνήσκειν ἐθέλουσιν, ἵνα τελευτήσαν-
τες ἐπαινεθῶσιν (Isocr. de Nic. 36). Σεύθης κελεύει Ἐξενοφῶντα προ-
θυμεῖσθαι, ὅπως διαβῇ τὸ στράτευμα (Xen. An. ἴ,1, 5). Εὐθύδημος
φυλάττεται, μὴ δόξῃ τὸν Σωκράτην θαυμάζειν ἐπὶ σοφίᾳ (Xen. Mem.
4, 2,3; not to get the appearance as though he —). (So usually after
φυλάττομαι, εὐχλαβοῦμαι, ef. on ov μή, § 124, a. R. 3.) ᾿Επειδὰν διαπρά-
ἕξωμαι, ἃ δέομαι, ἥξω ἀπάξων ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Ελλάδα (Xen. An. 2, 3,29).
Εὐκὸς, τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους, ὅταν γνῶσιν ἡμᾶς τετρυχωμένους, πειράσεσθαι
ὑπὸ σφᾶς ποιεῖσθαι (Thuc. 4, 00) .---᾿πειδὰν σὺ βούλῃ διαλέγεσθαι,
ὡς ἐγὼ δύναμαι ἕπεσθαι, τότε σοὶ διαλέξομαι (Pl. Prot. 335, of the
being willing, as a continued state). "Hv τις ἀνθιστῆται, πειρασόμεθα
χειροῦσθαι (Xen. An. 7, 3, 11). Οὐκ ἀναμένομεν ἕως ἂν ἡ ἡμετέρα χώρα
κακῶται, ἀλλὰ φθάνοντες ἤδη δηοῦμεν τὴν ἐκείνων γῆν (Xen. Cyr. 3, 5,
18) —O0i μὴ καλῶς βεβουλευμένοι, ἐὰν καὶ κατορθώσωσι (as single act)
περί τινας TOV πράξεων, μικρὸν διαλιπόντες εἰς TAS αὐτὰς ἀπορίας κατ-
ἔστησαν (Isocr. Areop.11). ᾿Ἐπειδὰν αἱ ἐπιθυμίαι παύσωνται κατατεί-
νουσαι καὶ χαλάσωσι, παντάπασι τὸ τοῦ Σοφοκλέους γίγνεται' δεσποτῶν
πάνυ πολλῶν ἔστι καὶ μαινομένων ἀπηλλάχθαι (Pl. Rep. 1, 329, said of
something that happens to the man at a certain particular point to
which it is confined, Aave come to cease).—'Hv τι σ᾽ ἐγὼ hav ὦ κακὸν
πεποιηκώς, ὁμολογῶ ἀδικεῖν: ἂν μέντοι μηδὲν φαίνωμαι κακὸν πεποιη-
Kas μηδὲ βουληθείς, οὐ καὶ σὺ αὖ ὁμολογήσεις μηδὲν ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἀδικεῖ-
σθαι; (Xen. Cyr. Ὁ; Ὁ. Lde) (In εἰμί, εἶμι, and other verbs which want the
aorist, the distinction falls away.)
6) The subjunctive of the perfect serves to denote the action as past
and completed, in opposition to the present, after ἐών and relatives or
temporal conjunctions with ἄν. In verbs whose perfect has the signifi-
cation of the present, the perfect subjunctive is also used as present :
Ὁ κύων, ὃν ἂν γνώριμον ἴδῃ, ἀσπάζεται, κἂν μηδὲν πώποτε ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ
ἀγαθὸν πεπόνθῃ (Pl. Rep. 2, 510). “Ὅταν οἱ δεσπόται ἐσπουδάκωσι,
κλαύμαθ᾽ ἡμῖν (τοῖς δούλοις) γίγνεται (Arist. Ran, 813).— Τοσούτῳ
πλείω οἱ Θηβαῖοι ποιήσονται θεραπείαν ὑμῶν (will show you so much
the more attention and regard), ὅσωπερ ἂν μᾶλλον περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν
δεδίωσιν (Isocr. Plat. 36). ᾿Απέχεσθε τῶν ἀλλοτρίων, ἵν᾿ ἀσφαλέστερον
τοὺς οἴκους τοὺς ὑμετέρους αὐτῶν κεκτῆσθε (Isocr. Nic. 49, from κέκτη-
μαι, possess).
CHAP. 11.]}
IS
128.]
8
120.
30.
108 The Optative and its Tenses. [ὃ 129, 130.
Rem. Now and then the perf. subjunctive denotes as purpose the complete
finishing of the act: Χρὴ ἀκοῦσαι, ἃ τόν τε δίκαιον καὶ τὸν ἄδικον τελευτήσαντα περι- —
μένει, ἵνα τελέως ἑκάτερος αὐτῶν ἀπειλήφῃ τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ λόγου ὀφειλόμενα (Pl. Rep. 10,
614, may have received).
Cr ARIE Rei:
The Optative and its Tenses: the Optative with av.
Tux Optative (on the meaning of which see § 119) in independent ~
propositions serves only to denote a wish that something may happen, |
or not ΠΩΣ now or in the future: often with prefixed εἰ, εἰ γάρ
if but — ἢ, εἴθε (oh that --- ἢ — (in Homer αἱ γάρ, αἴθε). ᾿Ἐπειδὴ πάντως
τ ὑμᾶς, ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὡρμημένους στρατεύειν, ξυνενέγκοι ταῦτα (Thue.
6, 20). Τούτων ἐ ἐγὼ εἴην (Hur. Were I but one of these ἢ. Σὺ αὐτὸς
ἅπαντα ἐπιστήσει, ἂν ἐγὼ βούλωμαι. ᾿Αλλὰ βουληθείης (Pl. Huthyd.
296. Would that thou mightest will it!). Μήτε Θηβαῖοί ποτε παύ-
σαιντο, εἰ ap εὔξασθαι δεῖ, τοὺς ἑαυτοὺς ἀγαθόν τι ποιοῦντας ἀτιμάζοντες,
μήθ᾽ ὑμεῖς, τὰ ἐναντία τούτοις, τοὺς εὐεργέτας τιμῶντες (Dem. 20, 109).
Εἴθ᾽, ὦ λῷστε, σὺ τοιοῦτος av φίλος ἡμῖν γένοιο (Xen. Hell. 4, 1, 38).
Οὔ v “ ” > lal id r ἊΝ ! / > Mp
ὕτως ὄναισθε τῶν ὄντων ἀγαθῶν ἡμῖν, μὴ περιίδητέ με ἀπολλύμενον —
(Dem. 28, 30 ; so may you enjoy —, as you do not suffer me to —).
Rem. 1. Different from the simple wish is a question about possibility in
the optative with ἄν : Ὦ Zed, πῶς ἂν τὸν αἱμυλώτατον ὀλέσσας τέλος θάνοιμι καὐτός ;
(Soph. 47.988. How may L finda way to destroy that most crafty man, and then
at last myself to die? i.e. Might I but —.) Πῶς ἂν ὀλοίμην; (Hur. Med. 97.))
Rem. 2. A wish relating to the past which can no longer be fulfilled, is ex-—
pressed by εἴθε with, the indicative: Εἴθε σοι τότε συνεγενόμην, ὅτε δεινότατος σαυτοῦ
ἦσθα (Xen. Mem. 1,2,46). By ὥφελον (debebam), εἴθε (εἰ yap) ὥφελον (might L) :
negatively, μὴ ὦφελον, with the infinitive, is expr ἘΠ a wish that cannot be ful-
filled, whether relating to the present or to the past. Εἰ γὰρ ὥφελον οἷοί τε εἶναι οἱ
πολιοῦ τὸ μέγιστα κακὰ ἐξεργάζεσθαι, ἵ ἵνα οἷοί τε ἦσαν αὖ καὶ ἀγαθὰ τὰ μέγιστα (Viz.
ἐξεργάζεσθαι, Pt. Crit. ta) (Ei yap ὥφελον, O, if that could but be! I wish I
might; Pl. Rep. 4, 432, with infinitive understood.) Μήποτ᾽ ὥφελον λιπεῖν τὴν
τ (Soph. Phil. 969 ; oh that I had only never —).
a) The optative (by § 119 with Rem.) is used in dependent sen-
tences which put something merely as a thought, and belong to a
principal sentence in the past (aor., imperf., plusquamp. OF historical
present) ; in this manner it is put first in object-sentences with ὅτι;
1 In the editions often erroneously without the note of interrogation.
[PART Il.
Pe. eS PISS > te ea
ὁ 130.] The Optative and its Tenses. 109
ὡς after verbs denoting an expression, opinion or knowledge (verda
declarand: et sentiend:), and in dependent questions both about
what 7s, and what shal/ be. (After the present and the future,
the indicative is used; in questions of that which shall be, the sub-
junctive or the indic. future by $121.) Περικλῆς προηγόρευε τοῖς
᾿Αθηναίοις ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, ὅτε ᾿Αρχίδαμος μέν οἱ ξένος εἴη, οὐ μέντοι
ἐπὶ κακῷ γε τῆς πόλεως γένοιτο (Lhuc. 2, 13). ἹΠροαγορεύω, ὅτι ---
ἐστὶν ---- ἐγένετο. Κῦρος μεταπεμψάμενος τοὺς στρατηγοὺς τῶν ᾿ Εἰ λλή-
νων ἔλεγεν, ὅτι ἡ ὁδὸς ἔσοιτο πρὸς βασιλέα μέγαν εἰς Βαβυλῶνα (Xen.
4. 1, 4, 11). "Eset ταῦτα ἐκηρύχθη, ἔγνωσαν οἱ στρατιῶται, ὅτι κενὸς
ὁ φόβος εἴη (Xen. An. 2, 3, 31). ᾿Επεὶ ἀφίκοντο οἱ πρέσβεις οἴκαδε,
τὸν Τιμαγόραν ἀπέκτειναν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, κατηγοροῦντος τοῦ Λέοντος, ὅτι,
peta Πελοπίδου πάντα βουλεύοιτο (Xen. Hell. 7, 1,38 = ἐβουλεύετο in
the oratio recta). Οἱ ᾿Ινδοὶ ἔλεξαν, ὅτι πέμψειε σφᾶς ὁ ᾿Ινδῶν βασιλεὺς
καὶ κελεύσειεν ἐρωτᾶν, ἐξ ὅτου ὁ πόλεμος εἴη Μήδοις τε καὶ ᾿Ασσυρίοις
(Xen. Cyr. 2, 4, 7). Τότε ἐγνώσθη. ὅτι οἱ βάρβαροι τὸν ἄνθρωπον
ὑποπέμψαιεν (Xen. An. 2, 4, 22). Τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἧκεν ἄγγελος λέγων,
ὅτι Συέννεσις λελοιπὼς εἴη τὰ ἄκρα (Xen. An. 1, 2,21). Τισσαφέρνης
διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν, ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοι αὐτῷ (Xen. An.
1, 1, 8). --- ΠἩρώτων ἸΠολυκλέα, εἰ ἀναπλεύσειεν (he had put to sea)
ἔχων ἀργύριον (Dem. 50, 55). "Edofev αὐτοῖς πειρᾶσαι, εἰ δύναιντο
ἐπιφλέξαι τὴν πόλιν (Thuc. 2,77). Οἱ ᾿απιδάμνιοι πέμψαντες ἐς Δελ-
φοὺς τὸν θεὸν ἐπήροντο, εἰ παραδοῖεν ἹΚορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν (Thuc. 1, 3 ;
whether they should deliver). ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἀπορῶν, ὅ,τι χρήσαιτο τοῖς
παροῦσι κακοῖς, τελευτῶν ἐπὶ Λακεδαιμονίους ἠναγκάσθη καταφυγεῖν
(Lsocr. de Big. 9).
Rem. As the perfect denotes the past in reference to the present (as a still
existing result), a dependent sentence after the perf. does not take the optative:
‘Qs ἠθροίσθη Κύρῳ τὸ. Ἑλληνικόν, ὅτε ἐπὶ ᾿Αρταξέρξην ἐστρατεύετο, καὶ ὅσα ἐν τῇ
ἀνόδῳ ἐπράχθη, καὶ ὡς ἡ μάχη ἐγένετο, ἐν τῷ ἔμπροσθεν λύγῳ δεδήλωται (Xen. An.
2,1,1). The historical present, in reference to the dependent sentence, may be
treated.as present or as a preteritum. An infinitive with a participle or a pre-
teritum itself acquires the force of a preteritum.
6) Often, however, the speaker, instead of denoting the relation of
the dependent sentence, puts this in a livelier way immediately in the
mood and tense which it would have in the oratio recta ; consequently
in the indicative (in questions of what shadd be, is to be, in the subjunc-
tive or future indicative) : εἶπον, ὅτε ἐλεύθερος εἴην and ὅτι ἐλεύθερός
εἰμι. Where in the oratio recta the present indicative would stand,
‘sometimes the imperfect is put (of that which coincides in time with
the principal sentence), so that the mood, but not the tense, is
retained from the oratio recta : ἤδειν, ὅτι ἐψεύδου. “EXeyov οἱ ἐπιτή-
CHAP. III.]
[9
130.]
IIo The Optative and 115 Tenses. [ὃ 130. |
a δειοί μου, ws ἐλπίζουσι τὴν πόλιν ἕξειν μοι χάριν ὑπὲρ τῶν εἰρημένων
30.] ΕΣ be ΣΕ cages , Re , /
(Isocr. Phil. 23). ἸΠολλάκις ἐθαύμασα, τίσι ποτὲ λόγοις ᾿Αθηναίους
\ ξ : ae, as, ; ; ee
ἔπεισαν οἱ γραψάμενοι Σωκράτην, ws ἄξιος εἴη θανάτου (Xen. Mem. 1,
1,1). Ἔγνω ᾿Αρχίδαμος, ὅτι οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐδὲν ἐνδώσουσιν (Thue.
2, 12). "Hides ᾿Αφοβος σαφῶς, ὅτι ἐξελεγχθήσεται (Dem. 29, 9).
*Heev ἀγγέλλων τις πρὸς τοὺς πρυτάνεις, ὡς ᾿Εἰλάτεια κατείληπται (Dem.
18, 169). ᾿Ανδροτίων ἐτόλμα λέγειν, ὡς ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν καὶ dv ὑμᾶς ἐχθροὺς
ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν εἵλκυσε καὶ νῦν ἐν τοῖς ἐσχάτοις ἐστὶ κινδύνοις (Dem. 22, 59).
Ἠιτιάσατό με ᾿Ανδροτίων, ἃ καὶ λέγειν ὀκνήσειέ τις, τὸν πατέρα ὡς
ἀπέκτονα ἐγὼ τὸν ἐμαυτοῦ (Dem. 22, 2). Πολὺν χρόνον ἠπόρουν, τί
ποτε λέγει ὁ θεός (Pl. Apol. 21). ἹΠΕεριουσίαν χρημάτων οἱ παλαιοὶ οὐκ
εἶχον οὐδὲ γῆν ἐφύτευον, ἄδηλον ὄν, ὁπότε τις ἐπελθὼν ἄλλος ἀφαι-
ρήσεται (Thue. 1,23 since they could not tell when ...). Σιμμίου λέγοντος
πάνυ ἐθαύμαζον, εἴ τι ἕξει τις χρήσασθαι τῷ λόγῳ αὐτοῦ (Pl. Phad. 95).
"Hpopnv "Λφοβον, εἴ τινες παρῆσαν, ὅτε παρελάμβανε τὴν προῖκα (Dem.
30,19, = *Apa παρῆσάν tives — ;). ἸΠελοπίδας εἶχε λέγειν, ὅτι μόνοι
τῶν “᾿ὥλλήνων βασιλεῖ συνεμάχοντο ἐν Πλαταιαῖς (Xen. Hell. 7, 1, 34).
—"Eypadov ἂν διαῤῥήδην ἥλικα ὑμᾶς εὖ ποιήσω, εἰ εὖ ἤδειν καὶ τὴν
συμμαχίαν μοι γενησομένην (Dem. 19, 40) ". --- Οἱ Πλαταιῆς ἐβου-
λεύοντο, εἴτε κατακαύσωσιν [in or. rect. κατακαύσωμεν ; subj. dubitat. |
τοὺς Θηβαίους. ὥςπερ ἔχουσιν, ἐμπρήσαντες TO οἴκημα, εἴτε TL ἄλλο
χρήσωνται (Thue. 2, 4). — Κατανοῶν ὁ Κῦρος, ὡς εὖ μὲν αὐτῷ εἶχον τὰ
σώματα οἱ στρατιῶται πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι πόνους φέρειν, εὖ δὲ τὰς ψυχὰς
πρὸς τὸ καταφρονεῖν τῶν πολεμίων, ἐπεθύμει τι ἤδη πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους
πράττειν (Xen. Cyr. 3, 5,9, = εὖ ἔχουσω).
1
Rem. 1. Now and then the indicative and optative alternate, and are coupled ©
together: Προκλῆς καὶ Γλοῦς ἔλεγον, ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνη κεν, Aptaios δὲ πεφευγὼς
ἐν τῷ σταθμῷ εἴη μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων βαρβάρων (Xen. An. 2, 1, 9). Περὶ τῶν σκευῶν
(concerning the tackling) ἠρώτων ἸΤολυκλῆ, πότερον παραλήψεται παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἢ ἴδια
σκεύη ἔχων ἥκοι ἐπὶ τὴν ναῦν (Dem. 50, 33). Εγνω Φρύνιχος, ὅτι ἔσοιτο περὶ τῆς
τοῦ ᾿Αλκιβιάδου καθόδου λύγος καὶ ὅτι ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐνδέξονται αὐτὴν (Thue. 8, 50) 3.
Rem. 2. In this use of the indicative, the special notation of the presens, prete-
ritum, or futurum in preterito consequently falls away, except where the imperfect
is put for the present of the oratio recta. The beginner must especially notice
how the aor. is retained from the oratio recta where we expect the plusquamperf. :
Ἔγνων, ὅτι Πρωταγόρας οὐκ ἤρεσεν αὐτὸς αὑτῷ ταῖς ἀποκρίσεσι ταῖς ἔμπροσθεν (Pl.
Prot. 835). Ἐπήρου με, εἴ τί μοι ὁ διδάσκαλος ὑγιείας πέρι ἔλεξεν καὶ ῥώμης (Xen.
Cyr. 1,6, 12). ,
x
1 So always after a hypothetical imperfect or aorist (with dy, or in the sentence
with ¢i). ᾿
2 Τότε δῆλον ἐγένετο, οὗ ἕνεκα οἱ Θρᾷκες τὰς ἀλωπεκίδας ἐπὶ ταῖς κεφαλαῖς φοροῦσιν
(Xen. An. 7, 4, 4. Statement in the preteritum ofa relation existing in the present —
time).
a
[PART II.
ae SE ae
§ 131.] The Optative and its Tenses. III
Rem. 3. A hypothetical indicative with ἄν (or an imperf. without ἄν, put hypothe- [8
tically) never passes into the optative when the verb of the principal sentence be- 130. ]
comes a prieteritum, because this would obscure the sense: Θεμιστοκλῆς ἀπεκρίνατο,
ὅτι οὔτ᾽ ἂν αὐτὸς Σερίφιος dv ὀνομαστὸς ἐγένετο οὔτ᾽ ἐκεῖνος, ᾿Αθηναῖος (viz. dv. PL.
Rep. 1, 880). Διονύσιος ἔλεγεν, ὅτι δυστυχεστάτην ἐκείνην εἴημεν στρατείαν ἐστρα-
τευμένοι, κρεῖττον δ᾽ ἢν (would have been) αὐτῷ τότε (viz. ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ) ἀποθανεῖν
ἢ οἴκαδ᾽ ἐλθόντι τοιαύτῃ τύχῃ χρῆσθαι (Lys. 10, 25).
Rem. 4. To an object-sentence with ὅτι or ὡς in the optative, or in the indica-
tive instead of the optative, a continuation may be added in the optative by οὖν, or
ὥςτε (so that —, with indie. in oratio recta; see Infinitive, § 166): ᾿Αποκρίνεται
Toceiéurmos 6 κυβερνήτης, ὅτι τριήραρχός τε ἐγὼ τῆς νεὼς εἴην καὶ τὸν μισθὸν παρ᾽
ἐμοῦ λαμβάνοι πλεύσοιτο οὖν, οἷ ἐγὼ κελεύω, εἰς Θάσον (Dem. 50,50). ᾿Αφικνοῦνταί
τινες ἀπαγγέλλοντες, ὅτι ὁ πατήρ μου ἀφεῖται (was set at liberty) καὶ Σατύρῳ οὕτως
μεταμέλει τῶν πεπραγμένων, ὥςτε πίστεις τὰς μεγίστας δεδωκὼς εἴη (Isocr. Trap. 11).
A continuation of the reported speech or opinion, with γάρ, also stands after an
optative in the optative, after an indicative either in the optative or in the indica-
tive: Ἤκουον ἔγωγε, ὦ Σώκρατες, ἑκάστοτε Topyiov πολλάκις, ὡς ἡ τοῦ πείθειν
(τέχνη) πολὺ διαφέροι πασῶν τεχνῶν" πάντα γὰρ ὑφ᾽ αὑτῇ δοῦλα Ov ἑκόντων (with
people's consent) ἀλλ᾽ οὐ διὰ βίας ποιοῖτο (Pl. Phil. 58). ᾿Ἤιδειν, ὅτι ΠΠολυκλῆς
παραλαβὼν τὴν ναῦν κακῶς ἤμελλε τριηραρχήσειν" οὔτε γὰρ τοῖς ἐπιβάταις οὔτε τῇ
ὑπηρεσίᾳ χρήσοιτο᾽ οὐδεὶς γὰρ αὐτῷ παραμενεῖ (Dem. dV, 44).
a) The optative stands in sentences of intention (jiza/ sentences) with ἃ
iva, ὡς, ὅπως (poet. ὄφρα) «πᾷ in object-sentences with ὅπως and μη after 1.51]
a principal verb of past time (in aorist, imperf., plusquamperf., or histori-
cal present). (After a present or future, the subjunctive is put, or in
certain cases the indic. fut., ὃ 122, 123.) Μένων ὁ Θετταλὸς δῆλος ἣν
ἐπιθυμῶν μὲν πλουτεῖν ἰσχυρῶς, ἐπιθυμῶν δ᾽ ἄρχειν, ὅπως πλείω λαμ-
βάνοι, ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ τιμᾶσθαι, ἵνα πλείω κερδαίνοι: φίλος 7 ἐβούλετο
εἶναι τοῖς μέγιστα δυναμένοις, ἵνα ἀδικῶν μὴ διδοίη δίκην (Xen. An. 2,
6, 21). Κῦρος φίλων ῴετο δεῖσθαι, ὡς συνεργοὺς ἔχοι (Xen. An. 1,
9, 21) .----πεμελεῖτο Κῦρος, ὅπως μήποτε ἀνίδρωτοι οἱ στρατιῶται ἐπὶ
ΒΝ ν᾿ δ + τοὺ νι of 7: Ὁ δὰ K L
τὸ ἄριστον Kal τὸ δεῖπνον eisiove (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 29). Kreapyos
5 Υ / e > a , {τ a » 7: ) 5
ἀπεκρίνατο Ἰζύρῳ, ὅτι αὐτῷ μέλοι, ὅπως καλῶς ἔχοι (Xen. An. 1,8, 13).
ἜἜδεισαν οἱ “EXXnves, μὴ οἱ Πέρσαι προςαγάγοιεν πρὸς τὸ κέρας (Xen.
An. 1,10, 9). Φίλιππος ἐν φόβῳ καὶ πολλῇ ἀγωνίᾳ ἣν, μὴ ἐκφύγοι τὰ
, Ε) Me " « Ξ ΄ Δι 4
πρώγματα αὐτόν (Dem. 18, 89). "ἔδεισαν οἱ ἹΚερασούντιοι, μὴ λύσσα
Tis ὥςπερ κυσὶν ἡμῖν ἐμπεπτώκοι (Xen. An. 5,7, 26. Δέδοικα, μὴ---
2 ff 24. RK > \ ἫΝ θ ἴον werls WA ἐν Ν > f
ἐμπέπτωκε, § 124). Ku μὴ ἤδησθα σαφῶς To τε ὅσιον καὶ TO ἀνοσίον,
τοὺς θεοὺς ἂν ἔδεισας παρακινδυνεύειν, μὴ οὐκ ὀρθῶς ποιήσοις ὑπὲρ
ἀνδρὸς Ontos ἄνδρα πρεςβύτην πατέρα διωκάθων φόνου (Pl. Huthyphr.
15). (After a wish in the optative: Θυμὸν γένοιτο χειρὶ πληρῶσαί ποτε, ἵν᾿ αἱ Μυ-
κῆναι γνοῖεν, ὅτι χῆ Σκῦρος ἀνδρῶν ἀλκίμων μήτηρ ἔφυ, Soph. Phil. 324.)
Rem. Ὅπως with the optative in a sentence of intention or an object-sentence
rarely retains the ἄν (oftenest so in Herodot.): Προεθυμέετο Λοξίας ὅκως ἂν κατὰ
CHAP. 111.]
112 The Optative and its Tenses. [ὃ 131.
TOUS παῖδας TOU Κροίσου γένοιτο τὸ Σαρδίων πάθος (Hdt.1,91). Οἱ Συρακούσιοι τὰς
πρώρας κατεβύρσωσαν, ὅπως ἂν ἀπολισθάνοι ἡ χεὶρ ἘΠ (Thuc. 7, 65).
6) Often, however, after a preteritum, the sentence of intention or an
object-sentence with ὅπως or μή, 1s put in the subjunctive (indie. fut.) as
after a present, the sentence being so put as not to mark that it forms
part of a representation belonging to the past (cf. § 130, b) : Ἔπέε-:
TNOES σε οὐκ ἤγειρον, ἵνα ὡς ἥδιστα διάγης (Pl. Crit. 43). ᾿Αριστεύς,
ἀποτειχισθείσης ἸΤοτιδαίας, ξυνεβούλευε πλὴν πεντακοσίων τοῖς ἄλλοις
(with the rest of the soldiers) ἐκπλεῦσαι, ὃ ὅπως ἐπὶ πλέον ὁ σῖτος ἀντίσχῃ
(Thue. 1, 65). ᾿Αβροκόμας τὰ πλοῖα κατέκαυσεν, ἵνα μὴ Κῦρος διαβῆ
(Xen. An. 1, 4, 18) Tee ἔπρασσεν, ὅπως πόλεμος γένηται ᾿Αθη-
ναίοις “πρὸς Πελοποννησίους (Thue. Ld) Αἰσχίνης τὸ καθ᾽ αὑτόν,
ὅπως ἐπὶ τοῖς ἐχθροῖς ἡ πόλις ἔσται, παρεσκεύασεν (Dem. 19, 250). Ob
Αθηναῖοι τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἐδεδίεσαν σφῶν, μὴ ἀποστῶσιν (Thuc. 5, 14).
Κῦρος δῆλος ἣν πᾶσιν ὅτι ὑπερεφοβεῖτο, μή οἱ ὁ πάππος ἀποθάνῃ (Xen.
Cyr. 1, 4, 3). Ké μὴ ξυνήδειν Σωκράτει τε καὶ ᾿Αγάθωνι δεινοῖς οὖσι
περὶ τὰ ἐρωτικά, πάνυ ἂν ἐφοβούμην, μὴ ἀπορήσωσι λόγων διὰ τὸ πολλὰ
ἤδη εἰρῆσθαι (Pl. Conv. 193) 1
Rem. 1. Occasionally the optative and subjunctive alternate and are coupled
together : Τιμόθεος δανείζεται (hist. pr @s.) χιλίας δραχμὰς, παρ᾽ ᾿Αντιφάνους, ἵνα
διαδιδοίη τοῖς Βοιωτίοις τριηράρχοις καὶ ae ἕως ἂν αὐτῷ ἡ κρίσις
γένηται, (Dem. 49, 14). Παρανίσχον (likewise lifted up) καὶ οἱ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως —
TIA αταιῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ | τείχους φρυκτοὺς πολλοὺς πρότερον παρεσκευασμένους (plusquam-
pert.) em αὐτὸ πρῖνος ὅπως ἀσαφῆ τὰ σημεῖα τῆς φρυκτωρίας τοῖς πολεμίοις ἢ καὶ μὴ
βοηθοῖεν (Thue. 8, 22).
Rem. 2. Some writers, as Thucyd., use the subjunctive (indic. fut.) oftener than
others.
Rem. 3. In stating why something that has πού happened, ought to have taken ~
place, or was to be wished, 2 iva (as, ὅπως) with the indie. imperfect or aorist is put
after a preeteritum : Εἰ γὰρ ὥφελον οἷοί τε εἶναί οἱ πολλοὶ τὰ μέγιστα κακὰ ἐξεργά-
ζεσθαι, ἵ ἵνα οἷοί τ’ ἦσαν αὖ καὶ τὰ ἀγαθὰ τὰ μέγιστα (ἐξεργάζεσθαι, Pl. Crit. 44).
Καὶ μὴν ἄξιόν γ᾽ ἣν ἀκοῦσαι. Ti δέ; ἦν δ᾽ ἐγώ. (How so?) “Iv ἤκουσας [ΞΞ that
you might have heard”) ἀνδρῶν διαλεγομένων, ot viv σοφώτατοί εἰσι τῶν περὶ τοὺς
τοιούτους λόγους (Pl. Euthyd. 304; of those who have to do with —; who oceupy —
themselves with —).
Rem. 4 (to § 130 and 131). When to an object-sentence or sentence of intention Ἵ
dependent on a preteritum, another such sentence is attached and made dependent
on it, the latter, as a general rule, also takes the optative, but may also take the —
indicative or subj unctive : Κῦρος προςκαλῶν τοὺς pious ἐσπουδαιολογεῖτο, ἁ ὡς δηλοίη,
οὗς τιμᾷ (Xen. An. 1, 9, 28). Τὸν σοφιστὴν εἴπομεν, ὅτι ἀποροῖμεν, εἰς ὁπότερον
τοῖν δυοῖν εἰδοῖν δ ποτ (Pl. Soph. 204: we should put); but when the first passes
into the indic. or subjunctive, the latter is also treated as after a present: Ov
So for the most part after a hypothetical imperfect or aorist.
* [Properly (where =) in which case you heard (for conditional, would have heard).} |
[PART II.
132. | The Optative and its Tenses. 113
, ” > , , a 4 ΄, > > wy a3 , > \ ,
τούτου ἕνεκα ἠρχόμεθα διαλεγόμενοι, ἵνα εὕρωμεν, τί TOT οὐκ ἔστ᾽ ἐπιστήμη, ἀλλὰ τί
ἔστιν (Pl. Theet. 186):
@) In dependent sentences with relatives or conjunctions which are
accessory to an object-sentence, or sentence of intention, or infinitive
clause, or single infinitive, and are put as forming part of the object
(the thing said to be spoken, thought, perceived, &e.), or of the thing
intended, : and which in the oratio recta would stand in the indi cative
of the present, future, or perfect, or in the subjunctive (with a av after
the relative or conjunction), the optative is used (without av), when the
principal verb on which the ὅτι, ὅπως, ἕο. , depends is a preteritum,
and so the following verb would regularly bea in the optative by § 130
and $131’: "idee | Κῦρος, ¢ OTL, εἴ TL μάχης δεήσοι, ἐκ τῶν φίλων αὐτῷ καὶ
τος καὶ ἐπιστάτας ληπτέον εἴη (Xen. Cy 7). Op LO = το
δεήσει, λήψομαι). Θηραμένης εἶπεν, ὅτι οὐδὲν αὐτῷ μέλοι τοῦ ὑμετέρου
θορύβου, ἐπειδὴ πολλοὺς μὲν ᾿Αθηναίων εἰδείη τοὺς τὰ ὅμοια πράττοντας
αὑτῷ, δοκοῦντα δὲ Λυσάνδρῳ καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις λέγοι (Lys. 12, 74 =
Οὐδέν μοι μέλει re ἐπειδὴ --- οἶδα --- δοκοῦντα δὲ --- λέγω). ᾿Αναξί-
βιος ἀπεκρίνατο, ὅτι βουλεύσοιτο περὶ τῶν στρατιωτῶν, ὅ,τι δύναυτο
ἀγαθόν (Xen. An. 7,1, 35 = βουλεύσομαι, ὅ,τι ἂν δύνωμαι ἀγαθόν).
1 [These rules have been defended by Madvig in a separate publication, where he
lays them down thus: a) Jn the oratio obliqua, clauses dependent on an historical
tense pass into the optative; but not, if in the oratio recta they would have the
imperfect 07 aorist of the indicative ; for then these forms of the verb are retained ;
ὁ) except in clauses with ὅτι (= because; therein that —, in that [he &c.]), iz which
even these tenses pass into the optative.
a) Thus whilst the sentences δώσω a δυνήσομαι or ἃ ἂν εὕρω, δίδωμ᾽ ἃ ἔχω, πέμψω
ὅταν δυνηθῶ become regularly ἔλεγεν: ὅτι δώσοι (ἔφη δώσειν) a δυνήσοιτο, a εὕροι"
ἔφη διδόναι ἃ ἔχοι, πέμψειν ὅτε δυνηθείη, but may also, from the freedom of
Greek constr wction, be expressed thus: ἔλεγεν ὅτι δώσει ἃ δυνήσεται, ἃ ἃ ἂν εὕρῃ"
ἔφη πέμψειν, ὅταν δυνηθῇ" on the other hand the sentence ἔδωκα ἃ εἶχον can
appear in no other for m than ἔλεγεν, ὁ ὅτι δοίη (ἔδωκεν) ἃ εἶχεν: and so, ὅτε
ἔπεμψα τὸν ἄγγελον, οὔπω ταῦτα ἤδειν, becomes ἔλεγεν, ὅτι ταῦτα οὔπω ἤδη
(εἰδείη), ὅτ᾽ ἔπεμψε τὸν ἄγγελον : or, ἔφη, OT ἔπεμψε τὸν ἄγγελον, οὔπω ταῦτα
εἰδέναι.
b) He has convinced himself, he says, of the Zimitation expressed in ὦ, since the
publication of his Syntax, from a comparison of the two following passages, to
which at present he cannot add a third. Xen. Hell. vii. 1,34: εἶχε γὰρ λέγειν
(Πελοπίδας) ὡς Λακεδαιμόνιοι διὰ τοῦτο πολεμήσειαν αὐτοῖς (τοῖς Θηβαίοις), 6 ὅτι
οὐκ ἐθελήσαιεν μετ᾽ ᾿Αγησιλάου ἐλθεῖν ἐπ᾽ αὐτὸν (τὸν βασιλέα) οὐδὲ θῦσαι ἐάσειεν
αὐτὸν ἐν Αὐλίδι τῇ ᾿Αρτέμιδι. The other passage is Herod. ii. 121, 5: ἀπ-
yyjoac bat αὐτόν (φασιν), ὡς ἀνοσιώτατον μὲν εἴη εἰργασμένος, ὅτι [in our edd.
ὅτε, Which would be against the rule, but Madvig ‘ has no a in reading
ore | τοῦ ἀδελφεοῦ. ες ἀποτάμοι (= in| having cut | cutting Ὁ} Ξ- ) τὴν κεφαλήι,
σοφώτατον δέ, ὅτι τοὺς φυλάκους καταμεθύσας καταλύσε:τε τοῦ ἀδελφεοῦ κρεμά-
μενον τὸν νέκυν.
CHAP. 1Π1.] I
114 The Optative and its Tenses. [Ὁ 175:
Ἰλέανδρος εἶπεν, ὅτε Δέξιππον οὐκ ἐπαινοίη,. εἰ ταῦτα πεποιηκὼς εἴ
a ρ τ » 9. “A ’ / 5 Ἧ; τ
Xen. An. 6, 4,25. Οὐκ ἐπαινῶ, εἰ --- πεποίηκεν). “Eoxotres Μενεκλῆς
2 Z Ui 2 5 U 2 >) v if i) 2
΄“΄ \ li >» > A ε “ ΄ Ν
ὅπως μὴ ἔσοιτο ἄπαις ἀλλ᾽ ἔσοιτο αὐτῷ ὅςτις ζῶντά τε γηροτροφήσοι καὶ
τελευτήσαντα θάψοι (Ise. 2,10. Σκοπῶ. ὅπως ἔσται ὅςτις ---- γηροτρο-
, 7 θυ» lal 3 7 5 ‘ € \ \ id ei \ ’
φήσει — θάψει). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐς βάντες ἐς THY ὁδὸν τὴν ᾿Ιὑλωρινὴν ἔπο-
ρεύοντο, ὅπως, ἐπειδὴ γένοιντο παρὰ τῷ ποταμῷ τῷ Κακυπάρει, παρὰ τὸν
ποταμὸν ἴοιεν ἄνω διὰ μεσογείας (Lhuc. 7, 80 = ὅπως, ἐπειδὰν ---- γενώ-
μεθα, ἴωμεν). Οἱ Πλαταιῆς ἀσαφῆ τὰ σημεῖα τοῖς πολεμίοις ποιεῖν ἐμη-
ανῶντο, ὅπως μὴ βοηθοῖεν, πρὶν σφῶν οἱ ἄνδρες οἱ ἐξιόντες διαφύγοιεν
(Thue. 8, 22 = pnyavopeba, ὅπως μὴ --- βοηθῶσι, πρὶν ἂν --- διαφύ-
γωσιν). Γεωμετρίαν Σωκράτης μέχρι τούτου ἔφη δεῖν μανθάνειν, ἕως
ἱκανός τις γένοιτο, εἴποτε δεήσειε, γῆν μέτρῳ ὀρθῶς ἢ παραλαβεῖν ἢ
παραδοῦναι ἢ διανεῖμαι (Xen. Mem. 4, 7,2; = δεῖ, ἕως ἂν — γένηται,
εἴποτε δεήσει. —). Τισσαφέρνης ὥμοσεν ᾿Αγησιλάῳ, εἰ σπείσαιτο, ἕως
ἔλθ Ν A \ B λέ 2 én. ὃ LE θ τ A >
ἔλθοιεν, ods πέμψειε πρὸς βασιλέα ἀγγέλους, διαπράξεσθαι αὐτῷ, ἀφε-
a > / \ 2) / / 7
θῆναι αὐτονόμους tas ἐν ᾿Ασίᾳ πόλεις ᾿᾿λληνίδας (Xen. Ages. 1, 10.
Rav σπείσῃ, ἕως ἂν ἔλθωσιν, ods πέμψω ---, διαπράξομαι).
Rem. 1. If, on the other hand, the accessory sentence in the oratio recta would
stand in the aor. or imperf. indic., this is retained in the oratio obliqua, because the
optative would not express the proper relation of time. We even find, not
unfrequently, the aorist indicative, where the oratio recta would have the perfect
indicative (and where, consequently, the optative might stand in the oratio obliqua) ;
cf. § 112, R. 1. Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἔλεγον, μὴ ἐπηγγέλθαι πω ἐς Λακεδαίμονα τὰς
, “ ὭΣ \ c , > ΄ Th 5 49 > ΄ ε
σπονδάς, Ore ἐςέπεμψαν τοὺς ὁπλίτας ἐς Λέπρεον (Thuc. 5, 49). “Hpopny, εἴ τινες
εἶεν μάρτυρες. ὧν ἐναντίον ἀπέδοσαν (Dem. 30, 19. ἾΑρά τινες μάρτυρές εἰσιν, ---
> ΄ a “ = \ Sa > ΄, δ > , > r
ἀπέδοτε). Ἤκουσα, ὅτι Περικλῆς πολλὰς ἐπίσταιτο ἐπῳδάς, as ἐπάδων τῇ πόλει
ἐποίει αὐτὴν φιλεῖν αὑτόν (Xen. Mem. 4,7,2). Λέγουσί τινες Θεμιστοκλέα ἑκούσιον
φαρμάκῳ ἀποθανεῖν, ἀδύνατον νομίσαντα εἶναι ἐπιτελέσαι βασιλεῖ ἃ ὑπέσχετο (Thue.
1, 138. ᾿Αδύνατόν ἐστιν ἐπ. ἃ ὑπέσχημαι).
tum. 2. Sometimes the optative stands even in a sentence dependent on an
object-sentence or sentence of intention (one with ὅτι, ὅπως, Ke.), which has itself
not taken the optative: Ἐδήλωσε Κῦρος, ὅτι ἕτοιμός ἐστι μάχεσθαι, εἴ τις ἐξέρχοιτο
(Xen. Cyr. 4,1,1). ᾿Ἐφοβεῖτο Θεμιστοκλῆς, μὴ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι σφᾶς, ὁπότε σαφῶς
ἀκούσειαν τὰ περὶ τὸ τεῖχος, οὐκέτι ἀφῶσιν (Thuc. 1, 91). Usually, however, in
this case the indicative or subjunctive is used.
δὴ) Often in such sentences the same form is retained as the
would have in oratio recta (cf. § 130, b, and § 131, b). But instead
of the indie. present sometimes the imperfect is put (in the same
tense with the governing verb; ef. 8.190, b) : Προὔλεγον, ὦ Σώκρατες,
ὅτι πάντα μᾶλλον ποιήσοις ἢ ἀποκρινοῖο, εἴ Tis TL σε ἐρωτᾷ (Pl. Rep.
|, 381). Ἔλεγον οἱ ἄγγελοι, ὅτι ἥκοιεν ἡγεμόνας ἔχοντες, οἱ αὐτούς,
ἐὰν αἱ σπονδαὶ γένωνται, ἄξουσιν, ἔνθεν ἕξουσι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια (Xen. An.
2, 8, 6. Regularly, οἱ, e¢ — γένοιντο, ἄξοιεν, ἔνθεν ἕξοιεν ἜΣ Κῦρος
PART II.
§ 132.] The Optative and tts Tenses. 115
ἐπηρώτα τὸν Τιγράνην, ποῖα Ὁ τῶν ὀρέων, ὁπόθεν οἱ Χαλδαῖοι κατα-
θέοντες ληΐζονται (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2 2, 1). ΤΠοτιδαιᾶται ἦλθον ἐς Λακεδαί-
μονα μετὰ Κορινθίων, ὅ ὅπως ἑτοιμάσαιντο τιμωρίαν [ΞΞ βοήθειαν), ἣν
δέη (Thue. 1, 58 — 11 δεήσοι). Οἱ στρατιῶται κατασχίσειν τὰς πύλας
ἔφασαν, εἰ μὴ ἑκόντες οἱ ἔνδον ἀνοίξουσιν (Xen. An. (ek, 16). Oi
Τ]λαταιῆς τοῖς Θηβαίοις ἔλεγον τὰ ἔξω τῆς πόλεως μὴ ἀδικεῖν: εἰ δὲ μή,
καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔφασαν αὐτῶν τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀποκτενεῖν, οὺς ἔχουσι ζῶντας
(Thue. 2, 5). Πρήγγειλαν οἱ στρατηγοί, ως δειπνήσειαν, συ-
σκευασαμένους πάντας ἀναπαύεσθαι καὶ ἕπεσθαι, ἡνίκ᾽ ἄν τις παραγ-
γείλῃ (Xen. An. 3,5, 18; observe the alteration of the two forms).
Oi στρατιῶται οὐκ ᾿ἔφασανὶ ἰέναι, ἐὰν μή τις χρήματα διδῷ. ὋὉ δὲ Κῦρος
ὑπέσχετο ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ δώσειν πέντε ἀργυρίου μνᾶς, ἐπὰν εἰς ᾿ Βαβυλῶνα
ἥκωσιν (Xen. An. 1, 4, 12 and 18). Κλέαρχος ἔφη χρῆναι, οἱ ἂν
ἐξελεγχθῶσι διαβάλλοντες (those who should be convicted of ae
calumnious reports), ὡς “προδότας 6 ὄντας τιμωρηθῆναι (Xen. ὃ, ὃ » 31).
Φίλιππος, εἰ τοῦτο τῶν παρ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ πεμπομένων ἱερομνημόνων εἰς-
ἡ γοῖτό τις, ὑπόψεσθαι τὸ πρᾶγμα ἐνόμιζε καὶ τοὺς Θηβαίους καὶ τοὺς
Θετταλούς, ἢν δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖος ἢ ὁ τοῦτο ποιῶν, εὐπόρως λήσειν (Dem. 18,
148). --- Κῦρος ὑπέσχετο τοῖς Μιλησίοις φυγάσιν, εἰ καλῶς κατα-
πράξειεν, ἐφ᾽ ἃ ἐστρατεύετο, ab πρόσθεν παύσεσθαι, πρὶν αὐτοὺς
καταγάγοι οἴκαδε (Xen. An. Lee καταπράξω, ep ἃ στρατεύομαι,
οὐ --- παύσομαι, πρὶν ἂν KaTayayo). Μέγα τὸ δέος ἐγένετο, μὴ οἱ
Πελοποννήσιοι, εἰ καὶ μὴ διενοοῦντο μένειν, πορθῶσιν ἅμα προς-
πίπτοντες τὰς πόλεις (Thuc. 3, 33).
Rem. Iti is a rare gnomaly: when an accessory sentence passes into the optative,
and yet ἄν with the relative or conjunction is retained : Οὐδεὶς ὅςτις οὐχ ἡγεῖτο
δίκην με λήψεσθαι παρὰ τῶν ἐπιτρόπων, ἐπειδὰν τάχιστα ἀνὴρ εἶναι δοκιμασθείην
(Dem. 30, 6 = ἐπειδὰν δοκιμασθῶ or ἐπειδὴ δοκιμασθείην). (Soph. Trach. 687.)
c) The same rule and exception hold for accessory sentences de-
pendent on a participle which has the force of an object-sentence (see
Participles, ὁ 177, b. 178) : Ἢ aitia πρόδηλος Fv ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνους ἥξουσα,
εἴ τι πάθοι Χαρίδημος (Dem. 23, = ἘΞ πρόδηλον 1) ἣν, ὅτι --- HEor).—
Τοῦτο πρόδηλον ἣν ἐσόμενον, εἰ μὴ ὑμεῖς κωλύσετε (Asch. 8, 90).
@) Likewise the optative stands in dependent sentences which
are so immediately attached to a leading sentence whose verb is a
preteritum, that they form part of the thought of the person men-
tioned in the leading sentence (of something then present, or future,
or so past as to be still present in its results—the perfect), , especially
with εἰ, with ὅτι (because, for that’), with ἕως, μέχρι ov (until —
[1 “This mode of expression is usually met with only with reference to what is
“
CHAP. 111.] Ez
116 The Optative and its Tenses. [§ 132.
could) , and with relatives: Οἱ μὲν εὔχοντο, Ξενίαν καὶ ἸΙασίωνα
ὡς δολίους ὄντας ληφθῆναι, οἱ δὲ ὦκτειρον, εἰ ἁλώσοιντο (Xen. An. 1,
4, 7; felt compassion at the thought =): Οὐκ ἦν τοῦ πρὸς ὑμᾶς
πον τ πέρας οὐδ᾽ ἀπαλλαγὴ Φιλίππῳ, εἰ μὴ Θηβαίους καὶ Θετταλοὺς
ἐχθροὺς ποιήσειε τῇ πόλει (Dem. 18, 145 ; Philip had, saw no means of
ending ies Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι πε Ἐπ ΕἾ ὅτι, στρατηγὸς ὦν, οὐκ
ἐπεξάγοι ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους (Thue. 2,21). Δερκυλλίδας καὶ Τισσαφέρνης
σπονδὰς ἀλλήλοις ἐποιήσαντο, ἕως ἀπαγγελθείη τὰ λεχθέντα ἐ ἐς Λακεδαί-
μονα καὶ ἐπὶ βασιλέα (Xen. Hell. 3, 2, 20). ΓΆνδρα οὐδέν᾽ ἔντοπον ἑώρων,
ὅςτις ἀρκέσειεν (Soph. Phil. 280; from whom I could expect help). Ἵπ-
ποκράτης, ὁπότε καιρὸς εἴη, τος στρατεύειν ἐς τοὺς Βοιωτούς (Lhuc.
1, 77; intended, when it should be the fit time). But sometimes
here also, especially with εἰ and in relative sentences, that form (pre-
sent, future, or perfect indicative) is retained, in which the person
mentioned would himself express the thought: "Ewaxdpica τὸν Ἐὔηνον,
εἰ ὡς ἀληθῶς ἔχει ταύτην τὴν τέχνην (Pl. Apol. 20). To μηδὲν € ἑαυτῷ
συνειδότι δεινὸν εἰςήει (it seemed hard), εἰ πονηρῶν ἔργων δόξει
κοινωνεῖν τῷ σιωπῆσαι (Dem. es 99). == (For the indicative present some-
times the imperfect is found: ᾿Εμαυτὸν ἀπωλοφυράμην, ὅςτις τοῦτο μὲν (on the one
hand), ἐν ᾧ ἐδόκει ὁ δῆμος κακοῦσθαι, ἐγὼ ἀντὶ τούτου (therefore) κακὰ εἶχον, τοῦτο
22 ἐπειδὴ ἐφαίνετο εὖ ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ πεπονθώς, πάλιν αὖ καὶ διὰ τοῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ ἀπολοίμην, Andoe.
2, 16.)
Rem. 1. On dependent sentences with a hypothetical imperfect or aorist indica-
tive, see ὃ 117 a. R. 2.
Rem. 2. If the leading sentence contains a wish in, the optative, a sentence
dependent on this also takes the ὁρέθιανα: "Odowo μήπω, πρὶν μάθοιμ᾽, εἰ καὶ πάλιν
γνώμην μετοίσεις (Soph. Phil. 961).
present or future, as compared with the time of the principal action, except in two
cases. (1) One of these is again (cf. note on p. 113) that of clauses introduced by
ὅτι. And since here no change or ambiguity is possible, I assert, without hesita~
tion, though I have not any ‘example at hand, that as Thucyd. 2, 21 says Περικλέα
ἐκάκιζον. ὅτι, οὐκ ἐπεξάγοι ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους, 50 he might have said Gav aie ἐξαγάγοι,
in the sense of because he had not led them out.”
“(2) Then an additional thought, referred to the person spoken of, may be
attached, by means of a relative proncun, to a single definite notion; and in this
added thought, that which would have stood in the aorist of the indicative, if there
were no intimation of its being the thought of another, may be expressed by the
aor ist of the optative, because here, in the case of a principal verb in the present, no
ὃς ἄν with aorist of the subjunctive is conceivable, and therefore no confounding with
an aorist of the optative, as representing an ὃς ἄν 6. aor. subj., can take place. The
only instance if can at_present produce 15 Soph. Ed. Tyr. 1246: μνήμην παλαιῶν
σπερμάτων ἔχουσ᾽, ὑφ᾽ ὧν θάνοι μὲν αὐτός" τὴν δὲ τίκτουσαν λίποι Τοῖς οἷσιν αὐτοῦ
δύστεκνον παιδουργίαν.᾽ Madvig, p. 17. |
1 Occasionally the optative is put, irregularly, in sentences dependent on an
infinitive in general reflexions: Tod αὐτὸν “λέγειν, ἃ μὴ σαφῶς εἰδείη, φείδεσθαι δεῖ
[PART IL.
a δ
“|
3
τὰ
§ 133, 134.] The Optative and its Tenses. 117
The optative (present_or_aorist) stands after conjunctions of time
(without av), relative words (without ἄν), and εἰ (77, 1. e. as often as),
in connexion with a leading sentence whose verb is a preteritum,
when the thing denoted is, not what took place in a certain individual
ease, or with a certain individual person or thing, but what recurred
and was repeated so often as a_case befell, or a person or thing of a
certain kind occurred [opt. of indefinite frequency]. (Οπότε ἀφίκοιτο,
ahen he came, if he did come, whenever he came; ὅτε ἀφίκετο, when he came, ὅταν
ἀφίκηται, when he comes : Ὅσους εἶδον, so many as I saw on the whole; ὅσους ἴδοιμι,
so many as I saw from time to time, so often as I saw any.) Κῦρος, παρελαύνων
τὸν ἵππον εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν ἥσυχος, κατεθεᾶτο τὰς τάξεις" καὶ οὺς μὲν
ἴδοι εὐτάκτως καὶ σιωπῇ ἰόντας, προςελαύνων αὐτοῖς, τίνες τε εἶεν,
ἤρετο Kal, ἐπεὶ πύθοιτο, ἐπήνει" εἰ δέ τίνας θορυβουμένους αἴσθοιτο,
τὸ αἴτιον τούτου σκοπῶν κατασβεννύναι τὴν ταραχὴν ἐπειρᾶτο (Xen.
Cyr. 5, 8, δ). Σόλων ἐν ἅπασιν, οἷς ἐτίθει, νόμοις περὶ τῆς πολιτείας
μᾶλλον ἐσπούδαζεν ἢ περὶ τοῦ πράγματος αὐτοῦ, οὗ τιθείη τὸν νόμον
(Dem. 22, 30; about which, whatever it was —). Οἱ ὄνοι, ἐπεί τις
διώκοι, προδραμόντες ἂν εἱστήκεσαν" καὶ πάλιν, ἐπεὶ πλησιάζοι ὁ ἵππος,
ταὐτὸν ἐποίουν (Xen. An. 1, 5,2. Of ἄν, 566 δ 117 b, R. 3; εἱστήκεσαν
counts as an imperfect). Περιεμένομεν ἑκάστοτε, ἕως ἀνουχθείη τὸ δεσμω-
τήριον (Pl. Phad. 59). (Οπότε ἔλθοιεν, οὗ αὐλίζεσθαι δέοι, φύλακας καθίστασαν,
with the relative sentence necessary to the completion of the notion likewise in the
optative.)
(The Tenses of the Optative.) a) In object-sentences with ὅτι and
@s, and in dependent interrogative sentences, which in their inde-
pendent form would have the indicative, the tenses of the optative
correspond entirely with the same tenses of the indicative (so_that the
aorist is a preeteritum), yet so that the present at the same time com-
prises the imperfect, and the perfect the pluperfect. In connexion,
therefore, with the same leading verb in the preteritum on which the
optative sentence depends, the present acquires the sense of the pre-
sens or imperfectum in preterito, the aorist and the imperfect that of
the preteritum in preterito (but with the same distinction which ap-
-pears in the oratio recta between the aorist and the perfect), and the
future that of the futwrum in preterito. See the examples in § 190, a.
(But in a dependent question which in the oratio recta or after a present might have
the subjunctive, the aorist has not the signification of a preteritum: Οἱ ᾿Επιδάμνιοι
τὸν ἐν Δελφοῖς θεὸν ἐπήροντο, εἰ παραδοῖεν Κορινθίοις τὴν πόλιν. Thue. 1,25 = παραδῶ-
μεν or παραδώσομεν) Xen. 4η. 7, 4, 10. Mem. 4, 2, 10 (σκοπῶν ὅ,τι ἀποκρίναιτο)
and Herod. 5, 67, ἐχρηστηριάζετο εἰ ἐκβάλοι (where even Dobree, with Werfer) would
read ἐκβάλλῃ.
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 6,19; what one does not himself know). Ἑἰκῆ κράτιστον ζῆν, ὅπως
δύναιτό τις (Soph. Cid. FR. 979). (
CHAP. I11.]
[3
134.]
118 The Optative and its Tenses. [ὁ 134.
Rem. As in the indicative. the aorist stands now and then where we should expect
the perfect (§ 112, R. 1), so also in the optative: Οἱ Πλαταιῆς κήρυκα ἐξέπεμψαν παρὰ
τοὺς OnBaious, ὅτι τὰ πεποιημένα οὐχ ὁσίως δράσειαν (Thuc. 2,5; almost = dedpaxare).
6) In the sentences treated of in § 133 (optative of the thing
repeated [indefinite frequency |), the present optative corresponds with
the imperfect indicative, and denotes the action in the dependent sen-
tence to be contemporaneous with that in the leading sentence ; the
aorist with the aorist indicative after conjunctions of time (ὃ 114, ¢),
and therefore denotes the action of the protasis as a single act recur-
ring each time before the action of the apodosis ; often, however, the
differ ence is very slight : “Οπότε οἱ τότε βασιλεύοντες αὐτὸν μὲν Evayo-
ραν ὁρῷεν, ἐξεπλήττοντο καὶ ἐφοβοῦντο περὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς, ὁπότε δὲ εἰς
τοὺς τρόπους aTOBNEWatev, σφόδρα ἐπίστευον (1500). Hvag. 24).
c) In all other sentences the present and perfect of the optative
answer to the present or perfect of the indicative or subjunctive, the
future optative to the future indicative (therefore never in sentences of
intention after ἵνα or ὧς). The aorist answers to the aorist subjunctive,
therefore loses the sense of a preeteritum, and differs from the present
only as giving prominence to the consideration of the action as trans-
ient and occupying a single point of time, usually with more express
reference to the future. (Cf ὃ § 128.) Μένων ἐπεθύμει ἄρχειν, ὅπως
πλείω λαμβάνοι (Aen. An. 2, 6, 21; to get more, in general or for
ever). "ἔδεισαν οἱ “Ἕλληνες, μὴ οἱ Πέρσαι προςαγάγοιεν πρὸς τὸ κέρας
(Xen. An. 1, 10, 9). Ἤιδει Κῦρος, ὃ ὅτι, εἴ τι μάχης ποτὲ δεήσοι, ἐκ τῶν
φίλων αὐτῷ καὶ παραστάτας καὶ ἐπιστάτας ληπτέον εἴη (Xen. Ch Uy. Sy dy
10). Ἔδεισαν οἱ Κερασούντιοι, μὴ λύσσα τις ὥςπερ κυσὶν ἡμῖν ἐμπε-
πτώκοι (Xen. An. 5, 7,26). See further examples in § 131 and 132.
Rem. 1. As in certain sorts of sentences the distinction between future indie.
and aor. subjunctive is but small (with ὅπως in an object-sentence, εἰ δώσω
and ἐὰν δῶ), so in the same sorts of sentences the distinction is also but small
in the optative between the future and the aorist. It should be remarked,
however, that in object-sentences in the optative with ὅπως, the aor. is much
more frequent than the future. (Both tenses in connexion : Tov ἔμπροσθεν
χρόνον ἔζων ὑπὸ πολλῆς ἐπιμελείας ὅπως ὡς ἐλάχιστα μὲν ὀψοίμην, ἐλάχιστα δ᾽
ἀκουσοίμην, ἐλάχιστα δ᾽ ἐροίμην, Xen. Cicon. 7, 5.) Even more rare than.
in such sentences is the optat. future in sentences of intention with ὅπως
ΟΥ μή. (ὑλγαμέμνων ἠγρίαινεν ἐντελλόμενος. Χρύσῃ νῦν τε ἀπιέναι καὶ αὖθις μὴ
ἐλθεῖν, μὴ αὐτῷ τὰ τοῦ θεοῦ στέμματα οὐκ ἐπαρκέσοι, Pl. Rep. 3, 393.) In con-
ditional sentences in the oratio obliqua after a preteritum, εἰ with the aorist rather
denotes the action as a condition going before (εἰ δοίην, sé dedissem = ἐὰν δῶ, st
dedero), the future, on the contrary, denotes it merely as going on at the same
time (εἰ δώσοιμι, si darem = εἰ δώσω, si dabo) ; sometimes; however, the future
(occasionally even the present) is put where the aorist might stand : νόμιζε
Πασίων εἰ μὲν ἐν ᾿Αθήναις μένειν ἐπιχειροίην. (immediately, where I already
was), ἐκδοθήσεσθαί μ᾽ ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως Σατύρῳ, εἰ δ᾽ ἄλλοσέ ποι τραποίμην, οὐδὲν
[PART II.
§ 135.] The Optative and its Tenses. 119
μελήσειν αὐτῷ (τῷ Πασίωνι) τῶν ἐμῶν λύγων, εἰ δ᾽ eismAevooipny εἰς τὸν Πόντον,
ἀποθανεῖσθαί με μετὰ τοῦ πατρὸς ὑπὸ Σατύρου (Lsocr. Trap. 9). Ὃ ἡγεμὼν ἔφη
εἶναι ἄκρον, ὃ εἰ μή τις (One) προκαταλήψοιτο, ἀδύνατον ἔσεσθαι παρελθεῖν (Xen. An.
4. 1, 35). In relative sentences ὃς δώσοι and ὃς δοίη differ, as ὃς δώσει and ὃς ἂν
δᾷ. Therefore, Ἔλεγεν ἄξειν αὐτούς, ἔνθα λήψοιντο τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, and εἰπόν
τινες, ὅτι εἴη ἸΠαγκλέωνι ἀδελφός, ὅςτις ἐξαιρήσοιτο αὐτὸν εἰς ἐλευθερίαν (Lys. 23, 9),
because representing ἄξω, ἔνθα λήψεσθε, and ἔστιν ἀδελῴφύς, ὅςτις ἐξαιρήσεται.
But ἔφη παραμενεῖν, ἕως ἔλθοιεν ots πέμψειεν = ods ἂν πέμψης (§ 192, a, last
example).
[Rem. 2. “In fact the future of the optative is formed and used for the sole
purpose (to which it is most strictly confined) of representing the future indica-
tive in the oratio obliqua after a preteritum.—Hence it appears (1) in clauses with
ὅτι, ὡς, and in dependent questions : (2) in congunctional and relative accessory
sentences of the oratio obliqua after a preteritum; and also in such accessory
clauses as are immediately attached to a principal sentence (im preterito) of the
oratio recta‘, whilst they themselves, as orat. obliqua, form a member of the
thought attributed to the person spoken of: of μὲν (k.7-A.) ... οἱ δὲ ᾧκτειρον, εἰ
ἁλώσοιντο = felt compassion for them at the thought —).—(3) in sentences
with ὅπως (= how, that — [not after ὅπως, as final particle, = ut, cf. (5)], m-
asmuch as here the future of the indicative may follow a present. Here, however,
it does not occur often (usually the aorist): τούτους, ὅπως ὡς βέλτιστοι ἔσοιντο,
αὐτὸς ἐσκόπει (Xen.).—(4) Very seldom with μή (without ὅπως) after verba timendi.
I have only remarked Pl. Huthyphr. 15, D; and Xen. Hellen. vi. 4. 27.—(5) In
final sentences after ὅπως (ὅπως μή), the fut. of the optative must be looked upon
as doubtful.” (Madvig.) |
(Optative with ἄν, and in conditional sentences in the oratzo recta*.)
a) With ἄν the present and the aorist stand in the optative (now and
then also the perfect as denoting the now existing result, besides the
perfects which are present in signification) to express a possible con-
tingency, which will be aetual under a certain condition, which it is
admitted does not at present hold, but is easy to be conceived as
occurring, and which for the moment one chooses to assume and pre-
suppose. The condition is expressed by εἰ, with the optative of the
present or aorist. The apodosis here approximates sometimes to a
simply conditional apodosis in the indie. fature, sometimes to a hypo-
thetical apodosis in the impert. indice. with ἄν, so that the thing put
as contingent is more opposed to the actual state of the case, yet with
a certain reference to what is still possible or probable; sometimes
this form is merely a more delicate mode of expression instead of the
imperf. with ἄν. The aorist differs from the present only in the way
explained above (§ 134, c) : Ὅσον ai μοναρχίαι πρὸς τὸ πρᾶξαί τι τῶν
δεόντων διαφέρουσι τῶν ὀλιγαρχιῶν καὶ τῶν δημοκρατιῶν, οὕτως ἂν
1 Printed obliqua in Schneidewin.
2 Not to be confounded with the optative after εἰ in oratio obliqua after a pree-
teritum (§ 131, 132) and the optat. of recurring acts (§ 133).
CHAP. III. ]
[§
134. |
Wim
120 The Optative and its Tenses. [$ 135.
κάλλιστα θεωρήσαιμεν, εἰ- τὰς μεγίστας τῶν πράξεων Tap ἀλλήλας
τιθέντες ἐξετάζειν ἐπιχειρήσαιμεν (Isocr. Nic. 17; we might perhaps
best see, if —; and therefore we will do $0). Εἰ ἀμελῆσαι δόξαιμεν
Pp Guna, TOU τοσαῦτα ἡμᾶς ὠφεληκότος, ποίοις λόγοις ἄλλους πείθοιμεν
ἂν χαρίξεσθαί τι ἡμῖν ; (Xen. Cyr. 9, 3, 33. And therefore we will
avoid this appearance) . Χρὴ ὑμᾶς, ὦ aA τοιαῦτα φρονεῖν περὶ
τῶν ἀτ τυχούντων δήμων, οἱώπερ ἂν τοὺς ἄλλους ἀξιώσαιτε φρονεῖν περὶ
ὑμῶν, εἴ ποθ᾽, ὃ μὴ γένοιτο, τοιοῦτό τι συμβαίη (Dem. 15, 21: 25 you
might look for Jrom them, of we imagine that —). ᾿Βπιλήσμων ¢ av εἴην,
ὦ ᾿Αγάθων, εἰ, ἰδὼν τὴν σὴν ἀνδρείαν, βλέψαντος ἐναντία τοσούτῳ
θεάτρῳ νῦν οἰηθείην σε θορυβήσεσθαι ἕνεκα ἡμῶν, ὀλίγων ἀνθρώπων
(Pl. Conv. 194. 1] must be Sorgetful, if I were to think ΞΞ Εἰ, ἐπὶ πῦρ
ἐλθόντος σου καὶ μὴ ὄντος παρ᾽ ἐμοί, ἄλλοσε ἡγησάμην, ὁπόθεν σοι εἴη λαβεῖν, οὐκ ἂν
ἐμέμφου μοι. Καὶ εἰ, βουλομένου, μουσικὴν μαθεῖν σου παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ, δείξαιμί σοι πολὺ
δεινοτέρους “ἐμοῦ περὶ μουσικὴν καί σοι χάριν ἂν εἰδότας, εἰ ἐθέλοις παρ᾽ αὐτῶν μαν-
θάνειν, τ ἂν ἔτι μοι μέμφοιο; Οὕτως οὖν καὶ περὶ τῆς οἰκονομικῆς ποιήσω (Xen.
icon. 2, 15).
δ) The condition, instead of being expressed in a sentence of its
own, may be intimated by a single word, or by the context: “Ex τῶν
ἐμπορίων τῆς Χεῤῥονήσου, ἃ ToT ἂν Pssst (which then, ie 6. in
case Kersobleptes should conquer the Chersonese), πλέον ἢ τριακόσια
τάλαντά ἐσθ᾽ ἡ mposodos (Dem. 23, 110).
c) The protasis retains its form, when the apodosis passes into the
infinitive or the participle: Ἐλπίζω, εἰ τὴν πρὸς ἐμὲ ὁδὸν τράποιο,
σφόδρ᾽ ἄν σε τῶν καλῶν καὶ σεμνῶν “ἐργάτην ἀγαθὸν γενέσθαι (Xen.
tee 2, 1, 27 = σφόδρ᾽ av ἀγαθὸς ἐργάτης γένοιο). See Infinitive
and Participle with av.
Rem. 1. As this form of hypothetical declaration differs but little from a simply
conditional statement which refers to the future, it sometimes happens that
both forms are combined :
a2) The condition 15 expressed absolutely in the present or fut. indicative, or in
the subjunctive with ἐάν. but the apodosis nevertheless stands in the optative
with ἄν as something possible and conceivable: Οὐ δεινὰ ἂν ἐγὼ πάθοιμι, εἰ μὴ
ἐξέσται. μοι ἀπιέναι καὶ μὴ ἀκούειν σου; ; (Pl. Gorg. 461. ) Πολλὴ ἄν τις εὐδαιμονία
εἴη περὶ τοὺς “νέους, εἰ εἷς μὲν μόνος αὐτοὺς διαφθείρει, οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ὠφελοῦσιν (P2.
Apol. 25). Ἢν φθάσωμεν, πρὶν τοὺς πολεμίους συλλεγῆναι, ἀναβάντες, ἀμαχεὶ
λάβοιμεν ἂν τὸ ἄκρον (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2,5). The apodosis sometimes expresses, not
a direct consequence of the condition, but something which even then is only
possible, so that the optative with a av is purely potential, as in the following §: Εἰ
θέλετε σκέψασθαι map ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς. τί δοῦλον ἢ ἢ ἐλεύθερον εἶναι διαφέρει, τοῦτο μέγιστον
ἂν εὕροιτε, ὅτι τοῖς μὲν δούλοις τὸ σῶμα τῶν ἀδικημάτων πάντων ὑπεύθυνόν ἐστι (ts
answerable for, must atone for, ὃ 63, d), τοῖς δ᾽ ἐλευθέροις ὕστατον τοῦτο προΞήκει
κολάζειν (Dem. 24, 167). i
6) The apodosis is put in the indicative, as simply conditional, while the pro-
tasis is marked by the optative as an assumed possibility. Often the former is, pro-
[PART II.
δ 136.] The Optative and its Tenses. 121
perly considered, an unconditional and general assertion, and the optative with
ei only assigns a possible case in which the assertion will apply : Twa εὑρήσομεν
τῶν τοῖς Τρωικοῖς χρόνοις γενομένων, εἰ τοὺς μύθους ἀφέντες τὴν ἀλήθειαν σκοποίμεν,
τοιαῦτα διαπεπραγμένον οἷα Evayépay; (Isocr. Evag. 66.) Εἰ ἐθέλοις τρεῖς τοιού-
τους ἀνθρώπους ἐν μέρει ἀνερωτᾶν, τίς τούτων τῶν βίων ἥδιστος. τὸν ἑαυτοῦ ἕκαστος
μάλιστα ἐγκωμιάσεται (Pl. Rep. 9, 581).----Ἐπισκοπῶ, ὦ ξένε, εἴ τι συμβαίνοι γίγνε-
σθαι, πῶς κεῖται τὰ ἐν τῇ νηΐ (Xen. icon. 8, 15; if any thing ; im case of any
thing happening). "Ἔστιν οἰκονομίαν ἐπισταμένῳ. καὶ εἰ μὴ αὐτὸς τύχοι χρήματα
ἔχων, τὸν ἄλλου οἶκον οἰκονομοῦντα μισθοφορεῖν (Xen. con. 1, 4; even if he him-
self should possess no property). (So likewise where the apodosis becomes in-
finitive: Ἡγοῦμαι, εἰ καὶ μηδενὸς ἄλλου μνησθείην ἀλλ᾽ ἐνταῦθα καταλείποιμι τὸν
λόγον, ῥάδιον ἐκ τούτων εἶναι γνῶναι τὴν ἀρετὴν τοῦ Evayépov, Lsocr. Evag. 90.
I take it to be easy, even if I should mention nothing more —.)
Rem. 2. Other quite occasional and isolated deviations from the regular form
of hypothetical statements rest upon an inaccuracy in the expression. On εἰ with
one indicative and one optative, when a judgment is pronounced on the connexion
between a past fact and a possible action which has not yet occurred (Δεινὰ ἂν
εἴην εἰργασμένος, εἰ τότε μὲν ἔμενον, viv δὲ τὴν τάξιν λίποιμι), see Connexion of
Sentences with μὲν --- δέ, § 189, a.
Rem. 3. Ei with the optative, is used in sentences of comparison, which denote
something merely thought, but yet possible: Οἱ τοιούτοι ὅμοιον ἐμοὶ δοκοῦσι πεπον-
θέναι, οἷον εἴ τις εὖ σπείρων καὶ εὖ φυτεύων, ὁπότε καρποῦσθαι ταῦτα δέοι, ἐῴη τὸν
καρπὸν ἀσυγκόμιστον εἰς τὴν γῆν πάλιν καταῤῥεῖν (Xen. Cyr. 1, ὅ, 10). (A direct
opposition to reality is expressed by the imperf. indicative: Οὐδέν τι διάφορον
πάσχει ἢ εἰ μόνος ἐστρατεύετο, Xen. Cyr. 5, 4. 21.)
Without any definite condition either expressed or implied in the
context, the optative with ἄν (present, aorist, sometimes perfect) 15
very frequently used to denote something as what 1s conceivable,
and, under certain circumstances, could and might easily occur, or
to which some person might be inclined; in general, as the form of a
modest expression of opinion on the present or the future. (Opta-
livus potentialis, dubitativus. The aorist, of that which 15 single and
transient.) “Opa ἂν ἡμῖν συσκευάζεσθαι ein (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1,41). Ἴσως
ἂν οὖν τις ἐπιτιμήσειεν τοῖς εἰρημένοις, OTL τὰς μὲν πράξεις ἐπαινῶ, τὰς
δ᾽ αἰτίας οὐ φράζω (Isocr. Areop. 36). Ταῦθ᾽ ὡς οὐ παρὰ τὸν νόμον
ἐστίν, οὔτ᾽ ἂν ᾿Ανδροτίων ἔχοι λέγειν οὔθ᾽ ὑμεῖς πεισθείητε av (Dem.
22,17). Ἡδέως ἂν ἔγωγ᾽ ἐροίμην Λεπτίνην, τίς αὕτη ἡ ἀτέλειά (ex-
emption from taxes) ἐστιν (Dem. 20, 129). (Βουλοίμην ἄν, velim.)
"Ap οὖν ἐθελήσαις av, ὦ Γοργία, ὥσπερ νῦν διαλεγόμεθα, διατελέσαι TO
μὲν ἐρωτῶν, τὸ δ᾽ ἀποκρινόμενος ; (Pl. Gorg. 449. Should you feel
1 Οἱ ἵπποι τοῖς Πέρσαις νυκτὸς ὡς ἐπὶ τὸ πολὺ πεποδισμένοι εἰσί, τοῦ μὴ φεύγειν ἕνεκα,
εἰ λυθείησαν (Xen. An. 8, 4, 35; that they might not run away, if by chance they
should get loose).
CHAP. III. |
122 The Optative and tts Lenses. . ae
inclined ? should you mind (doing it) ?: modest request.) “Apa ἐθελή-
σειεν av Γοργίας ἡμῖν διαλεχθῆναι ; (Pl. Gorg. 447.) ποῖ οὖν, ἔφην ἐγώ,
τραποίμεθ᾽ ἂν ἔτι; (Pl. Επέλγα. 290. Whither then should we (can we, are we to]
turn ourselves? cf. § 121.) Πῶς ἂν ὀλοίμην ; (Hur. Med. 97, expressing, virtually,
awish.) Χωροῖς ἂν εἴσω (Soph. Phil. 674. Thou mightest go in; [you may go in]
approximating to the imperative). λέληθέ σε, ὅτι καὶ of ῥαψῳδοὶ πάντες ἐπίστανται
τὰ Ὁμήρου ἔπη; Καὶ πῶς ἄν, ἔφη, λελήθοι, ἀκροώμενόν γε αὐτῶν ὀλίγου ἀν᾽ ἑκάστην
ἡμέραν; (Xen. Conv. 3, 6.)
The potential optative with ἄν stands, not only in principal sentences
but also in accessory sentences, which admit of such a conception and
mode of expression, especially in declarative object-sentences with ὅτι or
ὡς, in dependent interrogative sentences which would have the same
form in the oratio recta (without reference to the time of the principal
verb), and in relative sentences (with pronoun or relative particles) :
᾿Απεκρίνατο Ἰζλεάνωρ, ὅτι πρόσθεν ἂν ἀποθάνοιεν ἢ τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῖεν
(Xen. An. 2, 1, 10 = Πρόσθεν ἂν ἀποθάνοιμεν ἢ --- παραδοϊμεν).
Ἔννοεῖτε (imperat.), ὅτε ἧττον ἂν --- στάσις εἴη ἑνὸς ἄρχοντος (Xen.
An. 5,9, 39). ᾿Ἑσκόπουν, τίν᾽ ἂν τρόπον ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν ᾿Αθηνόδωρος
5 , ¢ ᾽ ͵ e ͵ \ ΄
ἀνωγκασθείη (Dem. 23,11). ᾿Ηρώτων οἱ πρέσβεις τοὺς στρατηγοῦς,
εἰ δοῖεν ἂν τούτων τὰ πιστά (Xen. An. 4, 8, τε Ap’ ἂν δοίητε --- ;).
Οὐκ οἶδ᾽, ὅ,τι ἄν τις χρήσαιτο στρατιώταις οὕτως ἀθύμως ἔχουσιν (Ken.
An. 3,1, 40). Χρὴ τοὺς μέγα φρονοῦντας μὴ τοῖς τοιούτοις ἐπιχειρεῖν,
ἃ καὶ τῶν τυχόντων ἄν τις καταπράξειεν (Isocr. Phil. 41). Εὔπατέ μοι,
εἴ τινα ἐγὼ νῦν τῶν ἐμῶν ἀποστέλλοιμι πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ινδόν, συμπέμψιαιυτε
ἄν μοι τῶν ὑμετέρων οἵτινες αὐτῷ τὴν ὁδὸν ἡγοῖντο ἄν ; (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2,
28; who could show him the way.) Αφοβος τὴν οὐσίαν μοι οὕτως
διῴκηκεν ὡς οὐδ᾽ ἂν οἱ ἔχθιστοι διοικήσειαν (Dem. 27, 48). Μανία τὸν
Μειδίαν ἠσπάζετο, ὥςπερ ἂν γυνὴ γάμβρον ἀσπάζοιτο (Xen. Hell. 3,
1,14). ὋὉ ᾿Αρμένιος τὰ βασίλεια οἰκοδομεῖν ἤρχετο ὡς ἂν ἱκανὰ ἀπο-
μάχεσθαι εἴη (Xen. Cyr. 8, 1,1; im such wise as they might be; 1. 6.
so that —). Ὑμεῖς, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὡς μὲν ἂν εἴποιτε δικαίους λόγους,
ἄμεινον Φιλίππου παρεσκεύασθε, ὡς δὲ κωλύσαιτ᾽ ἂν ἐκεῖνον πράττειν, ἃ
βούλεται, παντελῶς ἀργῶς ἔχετε (Dem. 6,4. You are prepared for this,
how you might be able; i.e. to be able. So ws frequently with the po-
tential optative, and an accessory signification of a purpose or aim). Ava-
φορόν τι ποιεῖς, εἰ τοὺς τοῖς νόμοις πειθομένους φαυλίζεις, ὅτι καταλυθεῖεν
ἂν οἱ νόμοι, ἢ εἰ... ψέγοις (Xen. Mem. 4,4, 14; because the laws might pos-
sibly be annulled). (Potential optative in a conditional sentence: ᾿Αλλὰ μήν,
εἴ ye μηδὲ δοῦλον ἀκρατῆ δεξαίμεθ᾽ ἄν, πῶς οὐκ ἄξιον αὐτόν ye φυλάξασθαι τοιοῦτον
γενέσθαι ; Xen. Mem. 1, δ, 8: if we should not even receive. Cf. ὃ 117 Ὁ. R. 1.)?
1 Ei δοκοίην, ὅπου δυναίμην, ἄκυρον ποιεῖν τὸ Λακεδαιμονίων ἀξίωμα, ἐννοῶ, μὴ λίαν
ἂν ταχὺ σωφρονισθείην (Xen. An. δ, 9, 28; I fear I should but too soon be brought to
[PART II.
δ 138.] The Optative and its Tenses. 123
Relative and conjunctional sentences which are appended to a sen-
tence in the optative with dv, or to a conditional sentence in the opta-
tive, to define the hypothetical ‘statement more accurately, without
being predicated for themselves as actual, and which belong to present
or future time, are themselves (as denoting something assumed or
possible) put in the optative (as in ratio obliqua after a preteritum,
§ 132). On the other hand, declarative object-sentences and dependent
interrogative sentences stand in the indicative, as after a present or
future indicative (from which the optative with ἄν in a principal sen-
tence, deviates only in form). In object-sentences with ὅπως, and
in sentences of intention, the subjunctive is also usually put, but also
the optative: (a) Πῶς ἄν τις, & ye μὴ ἐπίσταιτο, ταῦτα σοφὸς εἴη ;
(Xen. Mem. 4, 6,7.) Χρημάτων ὁ τοιοῦτος ἀνὴρ νέος μὲν ὧν κατα-
φρονοῖ ἄν, ὅσῳ δὲ πρεσβύτερος γένοιτο, μᾶλλον ἀεὶ ἀσπάζοιτο ἄν (PL.
Rep. 8, ὅ49). Οὕτω γιγνομένων (if such becomes the state of the case)
σαφῶς οἶδα, ὅτι ὁ φρούραρχος δέοιτο ἂν Γαδάτα μένειν, ἕως σὺ ἀπέλ-
θοις (Xen. Cyr. 5, 3, 18). Ei ἀποθνήσκοι μὲν πάντα, ὅσα τοῦ ζῆν
μεταλάβοι, ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀποθάνοι, μένοι ἐν τούτῳ τῷ σχήματι καὶ
μὴ πάλιν ἀναβιώσκοιτο, dp οὐ πολλὴ ἀνάγκη, τελευτῶντα πάντα τεθνά-
ναι καὶ μηδὲν ζῆν; (Pl. Phed. 72.)'\—(b) Οὐδ᾽ ἂν εἷς ἀντείποι, ὡς
οὐ συμφέρει τῇ πόλει, καὶ Λακεδαιμονίους ἀσθενεῖς εἶναι καὶ Θηβαίους
(Dem. 10, 4). Ei τις λέγοι ἄνθρωπον ἑστηκότα, κινοῦντα δὲ τὰς χεῖράς
τε καὶ τὴν κεφαλήν, ὅτι ὁ αὐτὸς ἕστηκέ τε καὶ κινεῖται, οὐκ ἂν ἀξιοῖμεν
οὕτω λέγειν δεῖν, GAN ὅτι τὸ μέν τι αὐτοῦ ἕστηκε, τὸ δέ τι κινεῖται (PL.
Rep. 4, 436). Ὃ πρωρεὺς τῆς νεὼς οὕτως ἐπίσταται ἑκάστων τῶν ἐν
τῷ πλοίῳ τὴν χώραν, ὥςτε καὶ ἀπὼν ἂν εἴποι, ὅπου ἕκαστα κεῖται καὶ
πε 7 > , γ' 7 ; 2 aN enor PLES), ον δ τῷ el, >
ὁπόσα ἐστίν (Xen. (eon. 8, 14). Οὐκ av ἐχοιμὶ γ εἰπεῖν, oTt ov προς-
εἶχον τὸν νοῦν Εὐθυδήμῳ καὶ Διονυσοδώρῳ (Pl. Buthyd. 272).—
(c) Μέγα ἂν ὀνήσαιτε τὸ στράτευμα, εἰ ἐπιμεληθείητε, ὅπως ἀντὶ τῶν
ἀπολωλότων ὡς τάχιστα στρατηγοὶ κατασταθῶσιν (Xen. An. 3, 1, 98).
᾿Οκνοίην ἂν εἰς τὰ πλοῖα ἐμβαίνειν, ἃ Κῦρος ἡμῖν δοίη, μὴ ἡμᾶς αὐταῖς
ταῖς τριήρεσι καταδύσῃ (Xen. An. 1, 3, 17).—H ἐμὴ φυλακὴ τῶν ἔνδον,
ἔφη ἡ γυνή, γελοία τις ἂν φαίνοιτο, εἰ μὴ σύ γε ἐπιμελοῖο, ὅπως ἔξωθέν
τι εἰςφέροιτο (Xen. (Ποοη. 7,39). Αὐτὸς ἂν ἔχων τὴν ἄλλην δύναμιν
πειρώμην μὴ πρόσω ὑμῶν εἶναι, ἵνα, εἴ που καιρὸς εἴη, ἐπιφανείην (Xen.
Π)}. 2, 4, 17).
my senses, for Indic. Fut., § 124 a.R.1; ἐννοῶ μή being inserted without influencing
the hypothetical form of the sentence).
1 Dependent sentences containing a statement of the past in the indicative (δ 192
a. R.1): Tis οὐκ ἂν μισήσειεν Φίλιππον, εἰ φαίνοιτο τούτοις ἐπιβουλεύων, ὑπὲρ ὧν ὁ
πρόγονος αὐτοῦ προείλετο κινδυνεύειν ; (1500). Phil. 77.)
CHAP. 11.]
‘
138.
[§
135. ]
124 The Optative and its Tenses. [δ᾽ 150.
Rem. 1. Now and then, however, a relative or conjunctional sentence has the
subjunctive with a ἄν, as after a condition put simply in the indicative : Μάλιστα ἃ ἂν
αἰσθοίμεθα, ὃ ὃ ζητοῦμεν, εἰ τοιόνδε ποιήσαιμεν τῇ διανοίᾳ δόντες ἐξουσίαν ἑκατέρῳ
ποιεῖν ὅ,τι ἂν βούληται, τῷ τε δικαίῳ καὶ τῷ ἀδίκῳ, εἶτ᾽ ἐπακολουθήσαιμεν θεώμενοι,
ποῖ ἡ ἐπιθυμία ἑκάτερον ἄξει (Pl. Rep. 2, 359). A dependent sentence which
Sm: something independently as matter of fact, has the indicative: Τίνι ἂν θεῷ
εὐχύμενος κἀλλιστ᾽ ἂν ἔλθοιμι THY ὁδόν, ἣν ἐπινοῶ ; and consequently in the oratio
obliqua after a preeteritum: Ξενοφῶν ἐπήρετο Tov Ἀπόλλω, τίνι ἂν θεῷ εὐχόμενος κάλ-
λιστ᾽ ἂν ἔλθοι τὴν ὁδόν, ἣν ἐπινοεῖ (Xen. An.3, 1,6) or ἐπινοοῖ by ὃ 192, a and b.
Rem. 2. (to § 135—188.) Whether ἄν with the potential optative is sometimes
omitted by Attic poets, is uncertain: in prose this is never the case. Av with ©
the fut. of the opt. is found only in doubtful readings.
On the use of ἄν in general, and with the indicative and optative, remark further ;—
a) In the copulative, disjunctive, or adversative connexion of two verbs, ἄν 15.
commonly put only once (with the first), except where the addition of special defini-”
tions to each verb, or the emphasis of the passage, causes the two notions to stand
more apart, and gives more prominence to the hypothetical character of each
severally : Ei 6 Φίλιππος { ὑμᾶς ἐξελθεῖν ἐβουλήθη. οὐκ ἄν ποτε τοὺς χρόνους ἀνελών,
ἐν οἷς ἢδυνήθητ᾽ ἂν ἐξελθεῖν, τηνικαῦτ᾽ ἐκάλει, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἐμέ, ἡνίκα δεῦρο ἀποπλεῖν
ἐβουλόμην, κατεκώλυεν, οὐδὲ τοιαῦτα λέγειν Αἰσχίνῃ προςέταττεν, ἐξ ὧν ἥκισθ᾽ ὑμεῖς
ἡμελλετ᾽ ἐξιέναι (Dem. 19, 51). (It is never repeated, where two predicates are put
comparatively: Ἥδιον ἂν ἀποθάνοιμι ἢ τὰ ὅπλα παραδοίην.) Sometimes ay is left”
to be under stood fr om a preceding clause, rhetorically corresponding with the latter:
4 Ws ἐποίησεν ἄν; 7) δῆλον, ὃ ὅτι ὦμοσεν; (Dem. 31, 9. ) Τί οὖν τῷ θεῷ τὸ ψεῦδος χρήσι-
μον: πότερον διὰ τὸ μὴ εἰδέναι τὰ παλαιὰ ἀπ πῶς ἄν; Τελοῖον μέντ᾽ ἄν, ἔφη. ᾿Αλλὰ
δεδιὼς τοὺς ἐχθροὺς ψεύδοιτο ; Πολλοῦ γε δεῖ (Pl. Rep. 2, 382).
6) Usually ἄν is put before the verb, when the emphasis lies on some defini-
tion of the verb that stands before it (the verb) in the sentence; otherwise
directly after it. In this way, ἄν often comes to stand at some considerable dis-
tance before the verb, being attached to an interrogative word, a negation, or
some other "emphatic word in the opening of the sentence: Ei “μὲν ἐπαινῶ Σεύθην,
δικαίως ἄν με καὶ αἰτιῷσθε καὶ μισοίτε". εἰ δέ, πρόσθεν αὐτῷ πάντων μάλιστα
φίλος ὦν, νῦν πάντων διαφορώτατός εἰμι, πῶς ἂν (or οὐκ ἂν) ἔτι δικαίως, ὑμᾶς
αἱρούμενος ἀντὶ Σεύθου, ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν αἰτίαν ἔχοιμι; (Aen. An. 7, 6; 15) Οὕτω γὰρ
καὶ ἑπόμενοι ἂν φίλοι τῷ Κύρῳ καὶ πρόθυμοι ἑποίμεθα καὶ ἀπιόντες ππ τιν ἢ ἂν ἀπίοιμεν
(Xen. An. 1,3, 19. The ἄν of the principal verb is often put in this way, where a
participle precedes the verb). When é is thus removed to a distance from its
verb, it is sometimes repeated 1 in immediate connexion with the verb : “Osrep ἄν, εἰ
τῷ ὄντι ξένος ἐ ἐτύγχανον ὧν, ξυνεγιγνώσκετε δήπου ὦ ἄν "μοι, εἰ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ Φωνῇ τε
καὶ τῷ τρόπῳ ἔλεγον, ἐ εν οἷσπερ ἐτεθράμμην, καὶ δὴ καὶ νῦν ὑμῶν δέομαι τὸν μὲν τρόπο
τῆς λέξεως ἐ ἐᾶν, τούτῳ δὲ τὸν νοῦν προςέχειν, εἰ δίκαια λέγω (Pl. Apel. 17): Ξενοφῶ
ἐπήρετο τὸν ἸΕΟΝΔΝ τίνι ἂν θεῶν θύων καὶ εὐχόμενος κάλλιστ᾽ ἂν ἔλθοι τὴν ὁδόν, ἣ
ἐπινοεῖ (Xen. An. 3,1, 6). Οἶδα ὑμᾶς ταὐτὰ ἐμοὶ ἐπισταμένους, ὥςτε κἂν ἄλλους
εἰκότως ἂν διδάσκοιτε (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3, 35).)
————
1 "Ὰν repeated where the same verb is put with two single and several definitio
(οὔτε --- οὔτε. μὲν -- δέ): Εἰ ἐγὼ πάλαι ἐπεχείρησα πράττειν τὰ πολιτικά, πάλαι
ἀπολώλειν καὶ οὔτ᾽ ἂν ὑμᾶς ᾿ὠφελήκειν οὐδὲν οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐμαυτόν (Pl. Apol. 31).
Δίκαιος μὲν ἂν εἴης, σοφὸς δ᾽ οὐκ ἄν (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 12).
[PART II,
§ 140.] The Optative ana its Tenses. 125
Rem. An inversion of the place of ἄν is seen in the expression οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ, or
οὐκ ἂν οἷδ᾽ εἰ, for οὐκ οἶδα, ei — ἄν, e.g. ᾿Εγὼ ἃ χθὲς ἤκουσα, ovK ἂν οἶδα εἰ δυναίμην
ἅπαντα ἐν μνήμῃ πάλιν λαβεῖν (PL. Tim. 26). Οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἂν εἰ πείσαιμι, πειρᾶσθαι δὲ
χρή (Bur. Med. 941). We may also notice the connexion of the ἄν belonging
to the verb with the concessive καί, so that εἰ after κἄν follows with the indicative
or optative according to the usual rules (κὰν εἰ = dy — καὶ εἰ) : Nov μοι δοκεῖ κἂν
ἀσέβειαν εἰ καταγιγνώσκοι τις Μειδίου. τὰ προςήκοντα ποιεῖν (Dem. 21, 51, = καὶ εἰ
— καταγιγνώσκοι, τὰ mp. ἂν ποιεῖν). Hence sometimes κἂν εἰ merely for καὶ εἰ in
an appended concession: even if. (Different from κἄν = καὶ ἐάν.)
c) “Ay sometimes stands elliptically, so that a verb immediately preceding is under-
stood in the hypothetical indicative or optative: Οὐδεμία ἐστὶν οὕτω καλὴ παραίνεσις,
ἥτις τοὺς μὴ ὄντας ἀγαθοὺς αὐθήμερον ἀκούσαντας ἀγαθοὺς ποιήσει οὐκ ἂν οὖν τοξότας
ye (Xen. Ογν. ὃ, 3, ὅ0; viz. ποιήσειεν : good archers, at any rate, τ would not make
them). Tada γ᾽ ἀλεκτρυόνος ἤκουσ᾽ ἐγώ" οἱ δ᾽ οἰκέται peyKovow* ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἂν πρὸ τοῦ
(Arist. Nub.5; viz.épeyxor: they would not have done that in time past). "Em οὐδενὶ
βρώματι οὐδὲ πώματι ἀνὴρ Πέρσης οὕτως ἐκπλαγείη ἂν ὥςτε μὴ οὐ προνοεῖν, ἅπερ ἂν
καὶ μὴ ἐπὶ σίτῳ dv (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2,17; viz. προνοοίη). Especially note the elliptical
ὥςπερ ἂν εἰ (ὅσον περ ἂν εἰ), as though (strictly speaking : as one might, or would, have
done, if —): Ei ὁ συμβὰς σκηπτὸς (sudden burst of calamity) μὴ μόνον ἡμῶν ἀλλὰ
πάντων τῶν ἄλλων Ἑλλήνων μείζων γέγονε, τί χρὴ ποιεῖν ; ὥςπερ ἂν εἴ τις ναύκληρον
πάντ᾽ ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ πράξαντα εἶτα, συντριβέντων αὐτῷ τῶν σκευῶν, τῆς ναυαγίας αἰτιῷτο
(Dem. 18, 194).}
(Concluding Remarks to Chap. 1, 2, 3.) With respect to the cases in which the
Greeks do not mark by the mood of the verb, that the thing said is not absolutely
asserted as actual, though there might be occasion so to mark it, but, deviating from
the Latin, and, in some cases, from the English idiom, retain the indicative without ἄν
(besides those cases which have been named as exceptions in the preceding rules
on the optative and subjunctive), the following require to be specially noted: α)
declarative object-sentences (with ὅτι and ὡς) and dependent interrogative sentences
after a present or future (after a preteritum in the optative, see § 130); ὁ) relative
sentences denoting an intention and definition, after a present or future; οἵ. § 115
a. R. (after a preteritum in the optative, see ὃ 132 ἃ); likewise those which
express the consequence of a quality (Lat. Gr. ὃ 364, qui =talis ut, &e.), or a
eause (Lat. Gr. § 366, gui = quum is), or which belong to a negative statement:
Οὐχ ἕξουσι δεῖξαι νόμον, καθ᾽ ὃν ἐξὴν αὐτοῖς ταῦτα πρᾶξαι (Ise. 10, 11). 6) Acces-
sory sentences which belong to a hypothetical sentence in the indicative with ἄν,
or to a condition in the indicative put as not existing; see ὃ 117 a. R. 2. d) Rela-
tive or conjunctional sentences which, as members of a dependent statement, are
necessary to complete the sense of object-sentences, or sentences of intention, or
infinitive sentences (or statements expressed by a single infinitive), where the prin-
cipal sentences have the verb in the present or future: Σκεπτέον, μὴ πρότερον
τούςδε γενέσθαι μεγάλους ἐάσωμεν ἢ ἐκεῖνοι μικροὶ γενήσονται (Dem. 16, 5: except in
the cases where the relative or conjunction is used with ἄν and the subjunctive).
(For inferential (or consecutive) sentences with ὥςτε in the indie. or infin., see Lnji-
nitive, § 166.)
1 "Ocmep ἂν εἰ παῖς, as if one were a child = like a child (Pl. Gorg. 479).
CHAP. III. |
[§
i139-]
140.
126 The Lmperative. [$ 141,
GH AE TR. ΤᾺ
The Imperative.
ὃ Tue Imperative expresses an entreaty, a command, an instruction or
141. exhortation, together with a concession and permission ; in the pre-
sent tense quite generally, or when the action is continued and recur- —
ring; in the aorist, when it is single and transient. Sometimes the —
distinction between the present and the aorist 15 small, and it falls away,
where only the one or the other form is in use. The imperative οὗ.
the perfect middle with passive signification is used where the entreaty, —
command, &e. relates to a completed action. Where the perfect in- —
dicative has the signification of a present, the perfect imperative
(active and middle) is used in the same signification. Θάῤῥει. Τοὺς
μὲν θεοὺς φοβοῦ, τοὺς δὲ γονεῖς τίμα, τοὺς δὲ φίλους αἰσχύνου, τοῖς δὲ
νόμοις πείθου (1500). Demon. 10). Βοώντων (Arist. Ach. 180. Let~
them cry !).—EHimé μοι (tell me; but λέγε, speak ἢ. ᾿Επίσχες (hold ©
a moment!). Λαβὲ tas μαρτυρίας καὶ ἀνάγνωθι (Dem. 27, 17, et
passim, but also λαβέ μοι τὰς μ. καὶ ἀναγίγνωσκε, Id. 27, 26, because ~
the reading, in comparison with the momentary act of taking, forms —
a continued action). Σκοπῶμεν κοινῇ, καὶ εἴ πῃ ἔχεις ἀντιλέγειν ἐμοῦ —
λέγοντος, ἀντίλεγε (frequently and at greater length) καί σοι πείσομαι" ~
εἰ δὲ μή, παῦσαι ἤδη (cease at once, and have done with it) πολλάκις μοι
λέγων τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον (Pl. Crito, 48). "av δοῦλος ἐλεύθερον ἀπο- —
κτείνῃ θυμῷ, παραδιδόντων οἱ δεσπόται τὸν δοῦλον τοῖς προςήκουσι TOD
τελευτήσαντος (Pl. Legg. 9, 868; but Lbid. 819, παραδότω τὸν δοῦλον
ὁ κεκτημένος). “Os ἂν ἱεροσυλῶν ληφθῇ, ἐκτὸς τῶν ὅρων τῆς χώρας
γυμνὸς ἐκβχληθήτω (Pl. Legg. 9, 854). Περὶ τῶν ἰδίων ταῦτά μοι
προειρήσθω (1506». Paneg. 14; let thus much be said by way of preface).
Μέμνησο τῶν λόγων. Kexpayete. Ἴσθι θνητὸς ὦν. .
Rem. 1. Especially note the blending of interrogation and command in the
expression οἷσθ᾽ ὃ (ὡς) δρᾶσον; (knowest thou what thou must do ὁ lit. knowest —
thou what? (how ?)—do it) with command following. (Poetical. In Plato: Τί
οὖν; τετάχθω ἡμῖν κατὰ δημοκρατίαν τοιοῦτος ἀνήρ, ὡς δημοκρατικὸς ὀρθῶς ἂν mpos-—
αγορευύμενος ; Τετάχθω, ἔφη. Rep. 8, 562.)
Rem. 2. Instead of the imperative in the second and sometimes in the third —
person, the older language used also the infinitive, and after this example some- —
times the Attic poets (but only for the second person), and occasionally Plato and
Thucydides (so that the action is presented in quite a general way): Kat ταῦτ᾽
[ἰὼν Εἴσω λογίζου, κἂν λάβῃς μ᾽ ἐψευσμένον, Φάσκειν Ew ἤδη μαντικῇ μηδὲν φρονεῖν
| (Soph. id. R. 462). ᾿Εγὼ ἔχων τοὺς μετ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ, προςπεσοῦμαι δρόμῳ κατὰ μέσον
[PART Il. |
§ 142, 143.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 127
A , e ‘ ΄ (ὃ o a > AD χε HO , A ‘
τὸ στρατόπεδον" σὺ δέ, Κλεαρίδα, ὕστερον. ὅταν ἐμὲ ὁρᾷς ἤδη προςκείμενον. τοὺς μετὰ
~ ’ lal
σαυτοῦ καὶ τοὺς ξυμμάχους ἄγων αἰφνιδίως τὰς πύλας ἀνοίξας ἐπεκθεῖν (Thuc. 5, 9).
(On the accus. with inf. see ὃ 168 a. 1.)
Rem. 3. Instead of the imperative in commands and invitations, we have also
ὅπως (in prohibitions ὃ ὅπως μή) with the future indicative; see § 123, R. 4. (Πρὸς
ταῦτα πράξεις, οἷον ἂν θέλῃς, Soph. Cid. C. 956, thou mayest do — [as we could say :
ow will do as you please’}]. An eager and vehement command is expressed in
the form of a negative question in the future indicative: Παῖδες, οὐ σκέψεσθε ;
(Pl. Conv. 212. Look after it immediately, slaves ἢ Οὐκ ἀποδιώξεις σαυτὸν ἀπὸ τῆς
οἰκίας; (Arist. Nub. 1296. Be off this moment!) Invitation or summons is also
expressed by a negative question with Ti ov in the present, or (more commonly)
the aorist: Ti οὖν οὐ σκοποῦμεν, πῶς ἂν τῶν καλῶν καὶ ἀγαθῶν ἀνδρῶν μὴ διαμαρ-
τάνοιμεν 5 (Xen. Mem. 3,1, 10.) Ti οὖν οὐ διηγήσω μοι τὴν συνουσίαν σοῦ καὶ
Πρωταγόρου, εἰ μή τί σε ran) ΕΣ (Pl. Prot. 610.) (λέγοις ἄν, thou mightest say ;
nearly = say; see § 136.)
A prohibition is expressed by μή (μηδείς) with the imperative of
the present, or where, agreeably with the distinction assigned in the
preceding paragraphs, the aorist is required, with the subjunctive of
the aorist. My φοβοῦ ! Μηδένα φίλον ποιοῦ πρὶν ἂν ἐξετάσῃς, πῶς
κέχρηται τοῖς πρότερον φίλοις (1800. Dem. 24). - Μηδενὶ συμφορὰν
ὀνειδισῃς, κοινὴ γὰρ ἡ τύχη καὶ τὸ μέλλον ἀόρατον. (μ806γ. Dem. 29).
Μηδεὶς ὑπολάβῃ με βούλεσθαι λαθεῖν, ὅτε τούτων ἔνια πέφρακα τὸν
αὐτὸν τρόπον ὅνπερ πρότερον (Us socr. Phil. 93). Μὴ ἀποῦσι μὲν τοῖς
τριάκοντα ἐπιβουλεύετε, παρόντας δ᾽ ἀφῆτε (Lys. 12 , 80). Μὴ
θῆσθε νόμον μηδένα, ἀλλὰ τοὺς εἰς τὸ παρὸν βλάπτοντας ὑ ives λύσατε
(Dem. 3, 10).
Rem. 1. Μή with the imperative of the aorist in the second person is not usual
in Attic writers; with the third _ person, it does now and then occur : Ov κεκο-
σμημένους λόγους ἀλλ᾽ ἀκούσεσθε εἰκῆ λεγόμενα τοῖς ἐπιτυχοῦσιν ὀνόμασι" καὶ μηδεὶς
ὑμῶν προςδοκησάτω ἄλλως (ί. Apol. 17).
Rem. 2. Astern prohibition i is also expressed by a question with ov μή (δ 124 a.
R. 4).
CHAPTER V:
The Infinitive and its Tenses.
Tue Infinitive expresses the notion of the verb in general in its
different tenses. By prefixing the article to the infinitive, the notion
of the verb is brought out as definite, and having a substantive exist-
ence. By this means, the infinitive is at the same time enabled to
enter into relations with the other members of the sentence in the
manner of a substantive in the different cases.
CHAP. V.]
[8
141. ]
143.]
§
145.
(359)
128 The Infinitive and 115 Tenses. [ὃ 144, 145.
Rem. The infinitive in Greek (as partly in English) is sometimes annexed, in a
somewhat lax connexion, to a predicate for the purpose of defining it more nearly,
so that it is difficult to assign the limits of the relation, and sometimes the same
combination may be taken in a different sense in different connexions, 6. g. δυνατὸς
ποιεῖν (see ὃ 149,150; able to do, and in one’s power to do = possible to be done).
In some constructions, instead of the mere infinitive (more or less rarely) with
little or no difference of meaning, the infinitive is used with ὥςτε, which particle
in general denotes an effect or an intention (so that, in order that), though some-
times the definite meaning of the particle almost entirely disappears.
The infinitive may stand, either as subject or as predicate-noun, when ~
an action is characterized in general (e.g. Τοῦτο μανθάνειν καλεῖται).
The infinitive as subject has the article, when it stands out as the
given and first term of the sentence, of which something is to be predi-
cated; but it is without the article, where the predicate-noun with —
ἐστίν coalesces, so to say, into an impersonal expression which stands
forward as the principal term, and is completed by the infinitive (in |
English: rr 7s good, 1 is a sin, to —), or where the predicate con-
sists of a single verb which may be taken in the same way: To δίκην.
διδόναι πότερον πάσχειν τί ἐστιν ἢ ποιεῖν ; (Pl. Gorg. 476.) Οὐχ
οὕτως ἡδύ ἐστι TO ἔχειν χρήματα ὡς ἀνιαρὸν τὸ ἀποβάλλειν (Xen. Cyr. —
8, 3, 42). πολλὰ συμβάλλεται εἰς τὰς πράξεις τὸ εὔνους ἔχειν τοὺς ὑπηρέτας. ~
Μεγίστην ἡγοῦμαι συμμαχίαν εἶναι τὸ τὰ δίκαια πράττειν (1500). Archid. ὅ9). Τοῦτό
ἐστι τὸ ἀδικεῖν, τὸ πλέον τῶν ἄλλων ζητεῖν ἔχειν (Pl. Gorg. 483. So almost always ~
. . “1 Ὁ . . . . ? Ae \ Ay
with an infinitive, which is first intimated by a pronoun). —Ovy ἡδὺ πολλοὺς
3 θ \ " D 19 991 Οἱ , b θ “ 3 5 5 a Ν
ἐχθροὺς ἔχειν (Dem. 19, 221). ἰκονόμου ἀγαθοῦ ἐστιν εὖ οἰκεῖν τὸν
ἑαυτοῦ οἶκον (Xen. Hicon. 1, 3). “Ὥςπερ ἐν ἵπποις, οὕτω καὶ ἐν ἀνθρώποις τισὶν ©
ἐγγίγνεται, ὅσῳ ἂν ἔκπλεω τὰ δέοντα ἔχωσι, τοσούτῳ ὑβριστοτέροις εἶναι (Xen. Hier.”
10, 1; it lies in the nature of some men to be; but τὸ αἰδεῖσθαι ἐν τοῖς τοιούτοις οὐκ.
ἔνεστιν). Νομίσατε ἀσέβημα μηδὲν ἔλαττον εἶναι τῶν μηδὲν ἠδικηκότων καταγνῶναι 7) ©
τοὺς ἠσεβηκότας μὴ τιμωρεῖσθαι (Andoe. 1, 83). (Ἡλίκα ἐστὶ τὰ διάφορα ἐνθάδε ἢ ἐκεῖ.
πολεμεῖν, οὐδὲ λόγου προςδεῖ. Dem. 1, 27; how great the difference 1s — to make
war.)
Rem. 1. Ὥςτε before the infinitive, in this impersonal mode of expression, is
very rare: ᾿Αδύνατον ὑμῖν ὥςτε Πρωταγόρου τοῦδε σοφώτερόν τινα ἑλέσθαι βραβευτὴν
τῶν λόχων (Pla Eons),
Rem. 2. To an infinitive predicated generally (without a definite subject), a
dependent sentence in the third person may be annexed without an expressly —
assigned subject, this being the same as the subject mentally supplied to the
infinitive (one, a person); (but more commonly ris is added.) Τὸ θάνατον δεδιέναξ,
οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἐστὶν i) δοκεῖν σοφὸν εἶναι μὴ ὄντα' δοκεῖν yap εἰδέναι ἐστίν, a οὐκ οἶδεν.
(Pl. Apol. 29). Οὔτ᾽ ἀνταδικεῖν δεῖ οὔτε κακῶς ποιεῖν οὐδένα ἀνθρώπων, οὐδ᾽ ἂν,
ὁτιοῦν πάσχῃ ὑπ᾽ αὐτῶν (Pl. Crito, 49). Likewise αὐτός, ἑαυτοῦ may be referred
to the subject implied in the infinitive: Οὐκ ἄρα τοῦτ᾽ ἐστὶ τὸ μέγα δύνασθαι, τὸ
ποιεῖν, ἃ δοκεῖ αὐτῷ (Pl. Gorg. 469).
The infinitive stands (without article) with verbs, the meaning
which refers directly to a certain action of the same subject, and i
[PART Il,
§ 145.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 129
accomplishment, to indicate that action; likewise with impersonal
verbs which express a similar relation between a subject and an
action (6. g. possibility or duty), and with many phrases which have
the signification of such a personal or impersonal verb. ᾿Ιὑπιθυμῶ
αὐτοκράτωρ γίγνεσθαι ἄρχων (Xen. An. 5, 9, 21). “Eyvou (1 re-
solved) τὸν ποταμὸν διαβῆναι. Ἢ πόλις ἐκινδύνευσε πᾶσα διαφθαρῆναι
(Thue. 3,74). Οὐ πέφυκας δουλεύειν. Αἰσχύνομαι πτωχεύειν. ᾿Οκνῶ
λέγειν. Φοβοῦμαι διελέγχειν σε.----(Δέδοκται ἡμῖν (ἔδοξεν) ἀπιέναι. ᾿Εξῆν
μένειν. Συνέβη μοι πεσεῖν. ὮΙ Ζεῦ, λαβεῖν μοι γένοιτο τοὺς πολεμίους
ὡς ἐγὼ βούλομαι (Xen. Cyr. 6, 3, 11). Ἔκ τοῦ ταῦθ᾽ οὕτως ἔχειν
ὑπάρχει ὑμῖν ἀσφαλῶς οἰκεῖν (Dem. 23, 102).— Ev νῷ ἔχω ἐκπλεῖν.
Οὐχ ὥρα καθεύδειν. “A τυγχάνω ἀκηκοώς, οὐδεὶς φθόνος λέγειν (PU.
Phad. 61; I am quite ready to—).
Rem. 1. Besides the verbs which in general denote a being willing (a require-
ment or demand, ἀξιῶ), an ability (πέφυκα, am naturally qualified to, it is my
nature to), a duty, habit, inclination (φιλῶ), disinclination (οὐ φθονῶ διδάσκειν
ὑμᾶς), fear (αἰσχύνομαι ', eddaBodpa), a beginning, lingering, forgetting; in some
writers verbs, which in themselves have no such meaning, are occasionally used in
a particular connexion with the infinitive; e.g. ξυμβαίνω τινὶ παραδιδόναι ἐμαυτόν
(Thue. 2,4; agree with a person to surrender myself), πιστεύω παρακατατίθεσθαί
τινι χρήματα ἢ υἱοὺς ἢ θυγατέρας (Xen. Mem. 4, 4,17 = τολμῶ), &e. (Poetically :
ἐνίκησε δεῦρο μολεῖν, Soph. Ant. 233, the opinion prevailed = ἔδοξεν. Μένει σε
πυθέσθαι παιδὸς δύσφορον ἄταν, Soph. Ajax, 641, τέ awaits thee.) In particular,
many phrases which govern the infinitive, are formed with a substantive denoting
a state of mind, or circumstances in reference to an action, and by itself capable of
taking an objective genitive, either with ἐστίν, γίγνεται (e.g. φόβος, ὄκνος ἐστὶ τοῖς
Ἕλλησι στρατεύειν ἐπὶ τὸν μέγαν βασιλέα, ἀνάγκη γίγνεταί μοι ἀπιέναι, or merely
ἀνάγκη ἀπιέναι, οὐδεὶς κίνδυνός μοι πάσχειν τι), OF with another verb (Δέδοικα, μὴ
ἃ viv ov βουλόμεθα, ὕστερον εἰς ἀνάγκην ἔλθωμεν ποιεῖν, Dem. 1, 15. ᾿Ανάγκη τίς
μοι ἐκ τύχης παραβάλλει ἐπιμεληθῆναι τῆς πόλεως, Pl. Rep. 6, 499. Τῶν ζώων τινὰ
φύσιν ἔχει τιθασεύεσθαι, Pl. Pol. 264, = πέφυκεν. Ἔν ἀπόρῳ εἴχοντο οἱ ᾿Ἐπιδά-
μνιοι θέσθαι τὸ παρόν, Thuc. 1,25. Τοῖς στρατιώταις ὁρμὴ ἐνέπεσεν ἐκτειχίσαι τὸ
χωρίον, Thuc. 4, 4). Cf. Genitive of Infinitive, § 156, R. 1. Πολλοῦ. μικροῦ δέω
ποιεῖν τι. Σμικροῦ twos ἐνδεής εἰμι πάντ᾽ ἔχειν (Pl. Prot. 329). Βραχὺ ἀπο-
λείπομεν διακόσιοι εἶναι (Lhuc. 7,70). Παρὰ μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν (Isocr, Atgin.
22).
Rem. 2. Some verbs denoting a meditating and endeavouring (μηχανῶμαι,
φροντίζω), are usually followed by ὅπως (ὃ 122, 123) or an interrogative sentence
(εἴ πως, ὡς ἄν).
Rem. 3. With some of these verbs and phrases ὥστε is now and then prefixed to
the infin., the governing verb being conceived more by and for itself. Οἱ Κορίνθιοι
εὐθὺς πρῶτοι ἐψηφίσαντο ὥςτε πάσῃ προθυμίᾳ ἀμύνειν τοῖς Συρακουσίοις (TLhuc. 6, 88 ;
1 Αἰσχύνομαι θεοὺς Kipov προδοῦναι (Xen. An. 2, 3, 22; 1 am ashamed in the
presence of the gods, to betray Cyrus).
CHAP. V.] K
[3
145.]
[
§
145,]
130 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [ὃ 146.
immediately made a decree, the object of which was —). Πάνυ μοι ἐμέλησεν ὥστε
εἰδέναι, ὁπόσον οἱ πολέμιοι κατεῖχον χωρίον (Xen. Cyr. 0, 9, 19; L have taken much
pains in the direction towards, 1. 6. in order to —). Eis ἀνάγκην καθέσταμεν ὥςτε
κινδυνεύειν (Isocr. Archid. 51). (On the insertion of the article, see § 154
b. Rem.)
The infinitive stands after the verbs which denote a working upon
others in order to move them to an action (such as, fo pray, per-
suade, instigate, seduce, accustom, command, permit, constrain,
counsel, teach, &e.), or a forbidding, dissuading, hindering, to denote
the action to which the influence refers ; likewise after phrases which
have the signification of such a verb: Οἱ νόμοι οὐκ εἴων ἄλλως ποιεῖν
(οὐκ εἴων ἡμᾶς ἄλλως ποιεῖν). ᾿Βκέλευσα τὸν κήρυκα περιμεῖναί με.
Δέομαι ὑμῶν συγγνώμην μοι ἔχειν. ΤΠαραινοῦμέν σοι πείθεσθαι τοῖς
βελτίοσιν. ᾿Ἑπήρθην ( felt myself impelled) πάλιν γράφειν περὶ ταύτης
τῆς ὑποθέσεως (Isocr. Phil. 10). Εἷς τῶν στρατιωτῶν εἶπε ( proposed)
στρατηγοὺς ἑλέσθαι ἄλλους ὡς τάχιστα (Xen, An. 1, 3, 14). Οἱ “Ελλη-
ves ἐβόων ἀλλήλοις μὴ θεῖν δρόμῳ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τάξει ἕπεσθαι (Xen. An.
1, 8, 19; called one to another not to—). Οἱ ἰατροὶ πάντες ἀπαγο-
ρεύουσι τοῖς ἀσθενοῦσι μὴ χρῆσθαι ἐλαίῳ (PI. Prot. 884. Of μή, see
Negations, ὃ 210). Τί Φίλιππον κωλύσει Badifew ὅποι βούλεται ;
(Dem. 1, 19.)---Περδίκκας προςέφερε λόγους τοῖς ἐπὶ Θράκης Χαλκι-
δεῦσι ξυναποστῆναι (Thuc. 1, 57; made overtures to the Ch.—).
Ψήφισμα εἶπεν ἐν ὑμῖν Apiotopav ἑλέσθαι ζητητάς (Dem. 24, 11). Ἢ
πόλις ἐν τῷ παρόντι τοῖς πονηροῖς ἐξουσίαν δίδωσι καὶ λέγειν καὶ ποιεῖν
ὅ,τι ἂν βουληθῶσιν (Isoer, Antid. 104). Οὐκ ἐνδώσομεν πρόφασιν
οὐδενὶ κακῷ γενέσθαι (Thue. 2, $7).
Rem. 1. Besides the verbs which in general have such a signification (among 7
them λέγω, εἶπον, I tell a person to), some are more rarely, or in a special and
derived signification, thus used, e.g. δίδωμι, ἀποδίδωμι, allow, ἐξάγω, seduce (ἐπ
ἐκλάσθην τῇ γνώμῃ τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι, Thuc. 4, 37, let myself be swayed, was
induced —), ἀγγέλλω τινὶ παρεῖναι (send a person word to be forthcoming, συγκαλέσας
τοὺς στρατηγοὺς παρεῖναι, Thuc. 2, 10), τῷ ναυτικῷ περιαγγέλλω πλεῖν (send round —
orders to the fleet to sail, Thue. 2, 80), παιδεύω τινὰ στρατηγεῖν (to be commander),
ἐναντιοῦμαί τινι μὴ ποιεῖν τι (oppose a person's doing something), &e. On phrases —
with a substantive in itself capable of governing a genitive, see Genitive of Infinitive, —
§ 156, R.1. On the verbs denoting to hold back from, &c., see § 156, R. 3.
Rex. 2. Some of these verbs, especially those denoting a giving orders (mapay- 3
γέλλω, διακελεύομαι), or a prohibition (ἀπαγορεύω), also take after them a sentence —
itl σ “ , : λ , om / eo > δὰ EAN 4 ,
W1tD o77@s (ὅπως μὴ) : Διακελεῦονται τῷ νεῳ, οπως, €7TTELOAV αν ρ γενηται τιμῶρησε-
ται τοὺς ἀδικήσαντας (PI. Rep. 8, 549). Some verbs denoting instance (e.g. πείθω,
δέομαι) occasionally (Thucyd.) take the infinitive with ὥςτε: Oi ᾿Αμπρακιῶται
ἐλθόντες πρὸς Εὐρύλοχον πείθουσιν ὥςτε μετὰ σφῶν ἤλργει TH ᾿Αμφιλοχικῷ ἐπιχειρῆ-
σαι (Lhuc. 3, 102). ᾿Αφίκετο ἐπιστολὴ πρὸς ᾿Αστύοχον ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος ὥςτε ἀπο- —
κτεῖναι ᾿Αλκιβιάδην (Thue. 8, 35; a letter to, or, that he should —).
[PART II.
§ 147, 148.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 131
The infinitive stands with verbs denoting an opinion or utterance
§
(v. sentiendi et declarandi), when this concerns an action or state of 147.
the same subject (φημὶ εἶναι, ὑπισχνοῦμαι ἐλεύσεσθαι), and likewise
with verbs denoting fo effect (νυ. faciendi), when the thing effected is
an action of the same subject (ΤΠ ύγης διεπράξατο τῶν ἀγγέλων yevé-
σθαι τῶν παρὰ βασιλέα, Pl. Rep. 2, 360). See the more particular
rules under Accusative with Infinitive, § 160 and 164.
The infinitive is added in different ways to some verbs to denote
the cntent of the action :
a) To the verbs signifying ἕο elect or appoint a person to do or
be something; sometimes even to those which denote to érimg or
convey to a place (send, leave behind), or (more rarely), gzve, in order
to be or to do'something, so that the object-accusative (in the passive
the subject-nominative) of the leading verb is the swject of the infi-
nitive. (But with the latter verbs, a participle as apposition is more
usual, which may also be used with the former sort ; see Partzczples.)
Οἱ πρόγονοι τὴν ἐξ Ἀρείου πάγου βουλὴν ἐπέστησαν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῆς
εὐκοσμίας (1506). Areop. 51). Δῆλον, ὅτι κυβερνᾶν κατασταθεὶς ὁ μὴ
ἐπιστάμενος ἀπολέσειεν ἂν οὺς ἥκιστα βούλοιτο (Xen. Mem. 1, 7, 3).
Kai γυναῖκες ἄρα αἱ τοιαῦται τοῖς τοιούτοις ἀνδράσιν ἐκλεκτέαι συνοικεῖν
(Pl. Rep. 5, 456 = αἵτινες συνοικήσουσιν). ἘΞενοφῶν τὸ ἥμισυ τοῦ
στρατεύματος κατέλιπε φυλάττειν τό στρατόπεδον (Xen. An. 5, 2, 1).
Οἱ’ ᾿Αθηναῖοι δέκα τῶν νεῶν προὔπεμψαν ἐς τὸν μέγαν λιμένα (τῶν
Συρακουσίων) πλεῦσαί τε καὶ κατασκέψασθαι, εἴ τι ναυτικόν ἐστι καθειλ-
κυσμένον (Thuc. ὁ, 50. More usually πλευσουμένας καὶ κατασκεψρομέ-
vas). Βοιωτοὶ τοὺς ἱππέας παρείχοντο τοῖς Πελοποννησίοις ξυστρα-
τεύειν (Thuc. 2,12. Usually Evotpatevoortas).
Rem. In the poets also with εἶμι, ἥκω, Baivw, and with εἰμί (am here to —):
Μανθάνειν ἥκομεν ξένοι πρὸς ἀστῶν (Soph. Gd. C.12). Ποῦ δῆτ᾽ ἀμύνειν οἱ κατὰ
στέγας Φρύγες; (Hur. Orest. 1473.)
6) To the verbs which denote to give (sacrifice, offer), and fake, in
order to do something with or to the object given, &c., so that the
object of the governing verb is also the object of the infinitive: Hap-
έχω ἐμαυτὸν τέμνειν καὶ καίειν (Pl. Gorg. 480). Ot Φλιάσιοι τὴν
πόλιν φυλάττειν τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις παρέδωκαν (Xen. Hell. 4, 4, 15).
Ὅσοι περιῆσαν τῶν Θηβαίων, παρέδοσαν σφᾶς αὐτοὺς τοῖς ]λα-
ταιεῦσι χρήσασθαι ὅ,τι ἂν βούλωνται (Thuc. 2,4; to do with them
as they pleased). Ei βουλοίμεθά τῳ ἐπιτρέψαι παῖδας παιδεῦσαι,
ap ἀξιόπιστον εἰς ταῦτα ἡγησαίμεθ᾽ ἂν τὸν ἀκρατῆ; (Xen. Mem.
1, ὅ, 3.) Ὅταν οἱ τύραννοι τοὺς κοσμίους καὶ δικαίους διὰ τὸν φόβον
CHAP. ν.] ἘΠ 2
132 The Infinitive and tts Tenses. [ὃ 149.
᾿ξ ὑπεξαιρῶνται, τίνες ἄλλοι αὐτοῖς καταλείπονται χρῆσθαι ( for use) ἀλλ᾽
148.} Ὁ οἱ ἄδικοι καὶ ἀκρατεῖς ; (Xen. Mier. 5,2.) (Aira πιεῖν, ask to drink ;
αἱ γυναῖκες πιεῖν ἔφερον τοῖς ἀνδράσιν, Xen. Hell. 7. 2, 9.)
Rem. 1. This infinitive rarely stands in the passive, so that the object of the
governing verb is taken as the subject of the infinitive: Μηδείς ce πείσῃ TO
φαρμάκῳ τούτῳ τὴν αὑτοῦ κεφαλὴν θεραπεύειν, ὃς ἂν μὴ τὴν ψυχὴν πρῶτον παράσχῃ
τῇ ἐπῳδῇ ὑπὸ σοῦ θεραπευθῆναι (Pl. Charm. 157).
Rem. 2. Poetical; Στέφεα δίδοτε, φέρετε' πλόκαμος ὅδε καταστέφειν (Hur. Iph.
Aul. 1478, viz. ἐστίν : here is my hair to crown, to be crowned).
Rem. 3. Now and then an infinitive stands with the verbs give, have, am here,
in the sense to do something with (as instrument, means), do something on, or i,
&e.: Οἱ στρατιῶται οὐκ εἶχον ἀργύριον ἐπισιτίζεσθαι (Xen. An. 7,51, 7), ᾿Αρι-
στάρχῳ ἔδοτε ἡμέραν ἀπολογήσασθαι (Xen. Hell. 1, 7,28). Ἐκεῖ σκιά τ᾽ ἐστὶ καὶ
πόα καθίζεσθαι ἤ, ἐὰν βουλώμεθα, κατακλιθῆναι (Pl. Phed. 229). Especially the
infinitive of an intransitive verb compounded with ἐν is often thus used, to
denote that something is given up (is there, &c.) in order that something may be
done thereon (as object), therein (as place): Οὐ πάνυ δέδοκται ἐμαυτόν σοι ἐμμελε-
τᾶν παρέχειν (Pl. Phed. 228). Ta τῶν Ἑλλήνων ἀτυχήματα Αἰσχίνῃ ἐνευδοκιμεῖν
ἀπέκειτο (Dem. 18, 198).
§ The infinitive stands with adjectives denoting ability, cleverness,
149. and capacity, or forwardness and readiness for something, excellence
in something, or the contrary, and with ἄξιος and ἀνάξιος, to define
the adjective more nearly (as with the verbs enumerated § 145, so that
the subject of the adjective is also that of the infinitive) : Θεμιστοκλῆς
ἱκανώτατος ἣν εἰπεῖν Kal γνῶναι καὶ πρᾶξαι (Lys. 2, 48). Τούτου
μεῖζον ἀγαθὸν σωφροσύνη οὐ δυνατὴ πορίσαι ἀνθρώπῳ (Pl. Phed.
256). "Apa δυνατὴ αὕτη ἡ πολιτεία γενέσθαι ; (Pl. Rep. 5, 471.) 10)
δῆμος τὸν Εὐφραῖον ἐπιτήδειον εἶναι ταῦτα παθεῖν ἔφη (Dem. 9, 61;
was fit to be so treated, i. e. deserved —). Ταπεινὴ ὑμῶν ἡ διάνοια
ἐγκαρτερεῖν, ἃ ἔγνωτε (Thuc. 2, 61). Μαλακὸς καρτερεῖν πρὸς ἡδονάς
τε καὶ λύπας (Pl. Rep. 8, 556). Τὴν βουλὴν κυρίαν ἐποίησαν τῆς
εὐταξίας ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, (Isocr. Areop. 59).----τοῖμοι ἦσαν πάντα κίυ-
δῦνον ὑπομένειν. Οὐ πρόθυμός με εἶ διδάξαι (PL. Luthyph. 14).— Ανὴρ
δεινὸς λέγειν. Αἱ εὐπραξίαι δειναὶ συγκρύψαι τὰ τοιαῦτα ὀνείδη (Dem.
2, 20). Πιθανώτατος λέγειν (Pl. Gorg. 419).-- Αξιός εἰμι πληγὰς
λαβεῖν (Arist. Eccl. 324). Ἢ πόλις ἄξιά ἐστι θαυμάζεσθαι (Thue. 2,
40). ᾿Ανάξιος τιμᾶσθαι.
Rem. With the adjectives which denote, not absolutely a capacity but a quality
which comes into consideration on occasion of the action, we have also ὥςτε, so as
to e.g. Πύτερα παῖδές εἰσι φρονιμώτεροι ὥςτε μαθεῖν τὰ φραζύμενα καὶ δεικνύμενα ἢ
ἄνδρες; (Xen. Cyr. 4, 3, 11.) 'Ολίγοι ἐσμὲν ἀμύνειν (Thuc. 1, 50), and ὀλίγοι ἐσμὲν
ὥςτε ἐγκρατεῖς εἶναι τῶν ἀγαθῶν (Xen. Cyr. 4, 5, 15). Also sometimes ixavds
is followed by ὥςτε. “Agios has also an active infinitive in the same sense as the
[PART IL.
§ 150.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 133
passive, by ὃ 150 a: λξιος θαυμάσαι (Thue. 1, 138). (λνάξια ἡ βουλὴ πεποίηκε
τοῦ στεφανωθῆναι, Dem. 22, 36, by § 156.)
a) An infinitive (active in form or signification) stands with adjec-
tives, to denote that the quality is ascribed to its subject in reference
to a certain action conceived as performed upon (and taking place, or
going on in) the subject (so that the subject of the adjective 1s con-
ceived as the object of the infinitive, or as the dative with those verbs
which govern this case): Χρῆσθαι τοῖς ῥάστοις ἐντυγχάνειν (Xen.
Mem. 1, 6,9; what is easiest to meet with). ᾿Ανὴρ χαλεπὸς συζὴν (Εἰ.
Pol. 809). Λόγοι ἐμοὶ μὲν ἀνωγκαιότατοι προειπεῖν, ὑμῖν δὲ χρησιμώ-
τατοι ἀκοῦσαι (Dem. 21, 34). Καλὸς (αἰσχρὸς) ὁρᾶν, ἰδεῖν (to behold).
Λόγος δυνατὸς κατανοῆσαι (Pl. Phad. 90). Oikia ἡδίστη ἐνδιαιτᾶσθαι
(Xen. Mem. 8, 8, 8; to live in. So very often the infinitive of verbs
compounded with ἐν).
Rem. 1. A passive infinitive is rarely used here (so that the subject of the
adj. would also be taken as the subject of the infinitive) : Kuves ἄμορφοι καὶ
αἰσχραὶ ὁρᾶσθαι (Xen. Cyneg. 3, 3).
Rem. 2. In the same manner an infinitive (especially ἀκούειν, ἀκοῦσαι, ὁρᾶν,
ἰδεῖν) is sometimes added to intransitive verbs and phrases denoting a quality:
᾿Ακοῦσαι οὑτωσὶ παγκάλως ἔχει τὸ ψήφισμα (Dem. 19, 47). Οὐδὲν οὗτοι διαφέρουσιν
ἰδεῖν χαλκέως φαλακροῦ καὶ σμικροῦ (Pl. Rep. 6, 495). (Πράγματα οἱ ἵπποι παρέξουσιν
ἐπιμέλεσθαι, Xen. Cyr. 4. 5, 46, will give trouble, 1. 6. will be troublesome, to attend
to. Ἢ στρατιά, πολλὴ, οὖσα, οὐ πάσης ἔσται πόλεως ὑποδέξασθαι, not one for every
city to receive. Thuc. 6, 22.)
i) Sometimes the infinitive with the adjective denotes a reference
to the action of a different subject, whieh action is conceived as going
on, not upon the subject of the adj. as its object, but i, with, or αὐ
the same (as place, instrument, material, &c.), especially with adjec-
tives denoting qualified, adapted, or sufficient, or when the degree ot
the quality is mentioned in reference to the action : Ὃ χρόνος βραχὺς
ἀξίως διηγήσασθαι τὰ πραχθέντα (Pl. Menex. 239). Ἢ ὁδὸς ἡ εἰς
ἄστυ ἐπιτηδεία πορευομένοις καὶ λέγειν καὶ ἀκούειν (Pl. Conv. 115).
Πότερον λούσασθαι ψυχρότερον τὸ παρὰ σοὶ ὕδωρ ἢ τὸ ἐν ᾿Αμφιαράου ;
(Xen. Mem. 3, 13, 3; to bathe in*.) (Also: Ψυχρὸν τὸ ὕδωρ ὥςτε λούσασθαι,
Xen. 1014.) ((O αὐτὸς χρόνος ἀρκεῖ ἑνί τε μέρει καὶ πᾶσι πεποιῆσθαι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, AER.
Cyr. 8, ὅ, 5, for the provisions to be prepared.)
c) After a comparative with 7, the infinitive stands in the sense
too (great, &c.) to.—The infinitive may not only be referred, either
actively or passively, to the subject of the adjective (as in English
‘ But ibid.: πότερον τὸ παρὰ σοὶ ὕδωρ θερμότερον πιεῖν ἢ τὸ ἐν ᾿Ασκληπίου ; (to
drink ; by a.)
CHAP, V.]
134 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [δ 151, ΤΕΣ
[8 too weak to go, i.e. than that he could go; too heavy to bear, i.e.
'5°] than that it could be borne), but also (by 4) so that the subject of
the adj. is neither subject nor direct object of the infinitive: Ἢ
ἀνθρωπίνη φύσις ἀσθενεστέρα ἐστὶν ἢ λαβεῖν τέχνην ὧν ἂν ἢ ἄπειρος
(Pl. Theat. 149). Τὸ νόσημα μεῖζον ἢ φέρειν (Soph. Hd. 1, 1293).
The infinitive may take ὥςτε: Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἤσθοντο “Exéuxov
ἐλάττω δύναμιν ἔχοντα ἢ ὥςτε τοὺς φίλους ὠφελεῖν (Xen. Hell. 4, 8, 28).
Φοβοῦμαι, μή τι μεῖζον ἢ ὥςτε φέρειν δύνασθαι κακὸν τῇ πόλει συμβῇ
(Xen. Mem. ὃ, ὅ, 11). (Also ὡς, § 166 ὁ. R. 2.)
An active infinitive with ὡς (more strongly ὥς ye) is prefixed to an
151. infinitive for limitation, to denote the reference to a certain manner of
treating the thing, or acertain intention ; im general, a certain measure
Ly
in relation to which the predicate is spoken (// we confine ourselves to
this —, if the question be about this, &c.). Tt is not required, that the
infinitive itself should have the given subject as its subj. or obj., but this may happen :
Οἱ πολέμιοι ἄοπλοί εἰσιν ὡς ἐκ χειρὸς μάχεσθαι (Xen. Cyr. 6, 4, 16).
Οὗτοι οἱ ἄνθρωποι ἀτοπώτατοί τινές εἰσιν, ὥς γ᾽ ἐν φιλοσόφοις τιθέναι
(Pi. Rep. 5, 475; when one speaks of reckoning them among the philoso-
phers). Εὖ λέγει 6 ἀνὴρ ὥς γε οὑτωσὶ ἀκοῦσαι (Pl. Huthyph. 3, to listen to
inthis way). Ταῦτ᾽ οὖν, ὡς ὑπομνῆσαι, νῦν ἱκανῶς εἴρηται (Dem. 6, 37).
(Qs ἐπὶ πᾶν εἰπεῖν, Pl. Euthyd. 279, to speak generally, ὡς πρὸς ὑμᾶς εἰρῆσθαι, Pl.
Rep. 10, 595, to be spoken merely to you, i.e. speaking between ourselves ; ws ἔπος
εἰπεῖν, also simply ὡς εἰπεῖν, so to say, ὡς ἁπλῶς εἰπεῖν, ὡς συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, cf. ὃ 38 ε,
lo speak it briefly.) Οὐδ᾽ ἐγὼ ψέγω τούτους τοὺς ἄνδρας, ὥς γε διακόνους
«
εἶναι πόλεως (Pl. Gorg. 517, when the question relates to ther being
servants of a state ; considered as servants of —).
Rem. 1. With ἀκούειν and especially εἰπεῖν in certain current expressions ws
may be dropt, more rarely with other infinitives: "Es τὸ ἀκριβὲς εἰπεῖν (ἀκριβῶς
εἰπεῖν), οὐδὲ ἀδίκως κατεστρεψάμεθα τοὺς Ἴωνας (Thue. 6, 82; strictly speaking).
(Σὺν θεῷ εἰπεῖν, in God's name ; σχεδὸν εἰπεῖν, so to say, almost.) (Cf. § 168 b.)
Rem. 2. The infinitive εἶναι stands in a restrictive sense with the adj. ἑκών in
negative sentences (to be willing, i.e. at least willingly), varely in affirmative sen-
tences (= and that willingly): Οὐκ ὥμην ὑπὸ σοῦ ἑκόντος εἶναι ἐξαπατηθήσεσθαι
(Pl. Gorg. 499). In the same manner εἶναι stands with certain constructions of
a preposition with a case, or of the-article with an adverb, which are used in a
limiting and restrictive sense; thus, κατὰ δύναμιν (εἰς δύναμιν) εἶναι, according to
one’s ability, τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι, as far as concerns him, as far as depends on him,
τὸ ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνοις εἶναι, so far as is in their power, τὸ νῦν εἶναι, τὸ τήμερον εἶναι, for
to-day. (Ὡμόσαμεν εὖ ποιεῖν ἀλλήλους ἐκ τοῦ ἐπιλοίπου χρόνου, κατὰ δύναμιν εἶναι,
καὶ λύγῳ καὶ ἔργῳ, Ise. 2, 32.)
§ The infinitive is used with ὥςτε (οὕτως ὥςτε, so that), to denote the
152. way and manner (degree) and consequence of the principal sentence,
and with ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε (on condition that, or to—). See Accus. with Infinitive, —
[PART II.
§ 153, 154.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 135
§ 166, and ibid. of the infinitive with οἷος for τοιοῦτος ὥςτε. Likewise
the infinitive stands with πρίν, before ; see Accus. with Inf. § 167.
Now and then an infinitive may be said to stand extra structuram, the object
which should be governed by the infinitive, being immediately attached to the verb
or phrase on which the infinitive should depend, while yet the infin., for the
sake of clearness and precision, is brought in immediately afterwards, in order to
assign the action (upon the object) more nearly (suppletory infinitive) : Οὐδ᾽ ἐπιθυμία
σε ἄλλης πόλεως οὐδ᾽ ἄλλων νόμων ἔλαβεν εἰδέναι (Pl. Criton 52 = OW ἐπ. σ᾽ ἔλαβεν
ἄλλην πόλιν εἰδέναι). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τῆς θαλάσσης εἶργον μὴ χρῆσθαι τοὺς Μιτυληναίους
(Thuc. 8, 8 = εἴργον τοὺς Mit. μὴ χρ. τῇ θαλάσσῃ). ᾿Αριστείδης κύριος τῶν φόρων
ἐγένετο τάξαι (Dem. 23, 309). Εὐθὺς ἀρχόμενοι τῆς πόλεως οἰκίζειν κατὰ θεόν τινα εἰς
τύπον τινὰ τῆς δικαιοσύνης κινδυνεύομεν ἐμβεβηκέναι (Pl. Rep. 4, 443, when we began
with our city, to construct it = ἀρχόμενοι οἰκίζειν τὴν πόλιν)."
Rem. On the infinitive instead of the imperative, see § 141, R. 2.
a) With the article, the infinitive (apart from its nominative, of
which see § 144) stands also as a substantive member of the sentence,
and so that the action thereby denoted is to be conceived as predicate
in reference to the subject or object of the sentence, or to a subject
implied in the context. Such a substantive infinitive cannot, how-
ever, agreeably with the nature of its notion and the Greek idiom,
enter into all the relations in which the cases of an actual substantive
can be used.
Rem. The accessory terms belonging to an inf. with the article are inserted
between the article and the infinitive (τὸ τοὺς εὐηργετηκότας ἀεὶ καὶ παντὶ τρόπῳ
ἀντευεργετεῖν) or follow after the infinitive (τὸ ζῆν ἡδέως).
6) The accusative of the infinitive occurs (besides where it stands
as the subject in the acews. 6. infin.) sometimes as the object of transi-
tive verbs (where a corresponding verbal substantive is either wanting, or the
notion of the action, as taking place singly and by itself, is not so clearly expressed,
or does not so well suit the form of the sentence in other respects) : Τὸ τελευ-
τῆσαι πάντων ἡ πεπρωμένη κατέκρινεν, τὸ δὲ καλῶς ἀποθανεῖν ἴδιον τοῖς
ς ΄ Jar ς a ἢ
σπουδαίοις ἡ φύσις ἀπένειμεν (1506. Dem. 43). Ἱειρῶ κατεργάσασθαι
[« ΄ \ 5. 7 ray ΄. ΄ γα, / ς > ‘
ὡς μάλιστα TO εἰδέναι, ἃ βούλει πράττειν (Xen. Mem. 3, 6, 18).- Εἰ τὸ
κωλῦσαι τὴν τῶν Ἑλλήνων κοινωνίαν ἐπεπράκειν ἐγὼ Φιλίππῳ, σοὶ τὸ μὴ σιγῆσαι
λοιπὸν ἦν, ἀλλὰ δηλοῦν τῷ δήμῳ (Dem. 18, 23).
Rem. Now and then the article is found with the inf. after the verbs and adjec-
tives with εἰμί described in §§ 145, 146, 147, and 149, in order to give special
prominence to the notion as opposed to others, or as already mentioned; often
so that the infinitive is emphatically put foremost in the sentence (almost as if it
1 Even more harshly: ᾿Αθηναῖοι μαχούμενοι ἐχώρουν περί τε τῆς ἀλλοτρίας, οἰκείαν
σχεῖν, καὶ τὴν οἰκείαν μὴ βλάψαι ἡσσώμενοι (Thuc. 6, 69 = περί τε τοῦ τὴν ἀλλοτρίαν
οἰκείαν σχεῖν καὶ τὴν οἰκείαν μὴ βλάψαι ἡσσώμενοι. Literally: both for the foreign
land, to win it for themselves, as also not, by sustaining a defeat, to injure their own).
CHAP. V.]
[§
154.]
136 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [ὃ 155, 156.
were, as regards the): To δ᾽ αὖ ξυνοικεῖν τῇδ᾽ ὁμοῦ τίς ἂν γυνὴ δύναιτο; (Soph.
Tr ach. 545.) Καὶ πῶς δή, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, τὸ ἀρχικοὺς εἶναι ἀνθρώπων παιδεύεις
αὐτούς ; (Xen. Uicon. 13, 4; the notion has already occurred in the context.) Τὸ
προςταλαιπωρεῖν τῷ δύξαντι καλῷ οὐδεὶς πρόθυμος ἢν (Thue. 2, 53).
c) Further, the accusative of the infinitive stands with the preposi-
tions, dua, by means of, ἐπί and πρός, to (of goal and object), εἰς and
κατά, im reference to, Tapa, in aA 2507) with : Ava τὸ ξένος εἶναι οὐκ
ἂν οἴει ἀδικηθῆναι; (Xen. Mem. 2,1,15.) Πρὸς τὸ μετρίων δεῖσθαι
καλῶς πεπαίδευμαι (Xen. Mem. i ; 2, 1). Κῦρος πάντων τῶν ἡλίκων
διαφέρων ἐφαίνετο εἰς τὸ ταχὺ μανθάνειν ἃ δέοι (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 1).
Rem. On the infinitive preceded by τὸ μή in certain verbs and phrases, see
§ 156, R. 4.
The dative of the infinitive may be governed by certain verbs and
adjectives (as πιστεύω, ἔοικα, ὅμοιος, pune) and by the prepositions
ἐν, ἐπί, and πρός (besides, in ‘addition to); often it stands alsoas dative
of the means, the cause, or the relation (4y means of, in consequence
of, for) : Πιστεύω τῷ κοσμίως ζῆν (5007. Antid. 34). “Ev τῷ πολίτην
ποιεῖσθαι Χαρίδημον ταῦτ᾽ ἀμφότερα ἐ ἐνῆν (Dem. 23, 188; each of these
was involved), Σωκράτης ἐθαυμάζετο ἐπὶ τῷ εὐθύμως ζῆν (Xen. Mem.
4,8, 2). Οἱ ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις μάχεσθαι διδάσκοντες τὴν τέχνην παρα-
διδο οι ὁ ἐπὶ τῷ δικαίως χρῆσθαι αὐτῇ πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους (PL. Gorg. 456 ;
thereunto that they should — = upon condition, or, on the uniler-
standing that Ξ ἢ": Πρὸς τῷ μηδὲν ἐκ τῆς πρεσβείας λαβεῖν τοὺς αἰχ-
μαλώτους ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων ἐλυσάμην (Dem. 19, 229), Σωκράτης TO pavepos
εἶναι καλὸς καὶ ἀγαθὸς ὧν ἐλπίζειν ἐποίει τοὺς συνδιατρίβοντας ἑ ἑαυτῷ,
μιμουμένους ἐκεῖνον τοιούςδε γενήσεσθαι (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 3). At Karas
πολιτευόμεναι δημοκρατίαι προέχουσι πῷ δικαιότεραι εἶναι (Dem).
The genitive of the infinitive stands as an objective genitive with
substantives, verbs, adjectives, and adverbs, and with the prepositions
ἄνευ, ἀντί, ae ἐξ, ἕνεκα, ὑπέρ, μετά, περί, πρό, and with several of the
ady erbs ain are used as prepositions (ἐμποδών, ἔξω, μέχρι, πλήν,
πόῤῥω, χωρίς), lastly, as definitive genitive (ὃ 49 a): Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
ἠπείγοντο πρὸς τὸν ποταμὸν τοῦ πιεῖν ἐπιθυμίᾳ (Thue. 7, 84). To εὖ
πράττειν παρὰ τὴν ἀξίαν ἀφορμὴ τοῦ es φρονεῖν τοῖς ἀνοήτοις
γίγνεται, (Dem. 1, 33). ἸΠόνους τοῦ ζῆν ἡδέως ἡγεμόνας νομίζετε (Xen.
(7. 1 Ὁ 12). Δ. 7}. τοῦ κατακούειν τινός τε 1,23). ᾿ἜἘπιμελοῦ-
μαι τοῦ ὡς φρονιμώτατος εἶναι (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 90). ᾿Επέσχομεν τοῦ
δακρύειν (Pi. Phed, 117, stopped Jrom ἘΞ ar ἔμποροι τὰ πελάγη
διαπερῶσιν ἕνεκα τοῦ mee ποιῆσαι τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν οὐσίαν (Lsocr,
Dem. 19). (Ἄνευ τοῦ εὐφραίνειν, besides giving pleasure rae ἀντὶ τοῦ ἀποκρί-
νεσθαι, ἐκ τοῦ ταῦτα γνῶναι, in consequence of knowing this —, ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ ποιεῖν τὸ
[PART II,
δ 156.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 137
προςταττόμενον, for the sake of having no orders to execute —, μετὰ τοῦ mposoprety
΄ . . , . . * 4
αἰσχύνην, along with the incurring a disgrace, so that one incurs a disgrace withal —,
~ ~ -~ ΄ > a , A
περὶ τοῦ τιμωρεῖσθαι Φίλιππον ἡ ἀρχὴ τοῦ πολέμου ἢν —, Φίλιππος ὅσα προλάβοι πρὸ
~ \ a > a , o baa? D 18 26 ree, -» Ὡς Ὡς is
Tov τοὺς ὅρκους ἀποδοῦναι, βεβαίως ἕξειν ἐνόμιζεν, Dem. 18, 26. — ἔξω εἰναι Tov κακῶς
,
πάσχειν — &c.)
Rem. 1. When a substantive with a verb (as subject with ἐστίν, γίγνεται, or as
object with a transitive verb, or as case to a preposition with an intransitive or |
passive verb) forms a phrase which corresponds with, or in point of signification
approximates to, one or other of the verbs mentioned in §§ 145, 146, it is followed,
as a general rule, by a simple infinitive, see § 145, R. 1; moreover, σχολὴν διδόναι
or ἀσχολίαν παρέχειν τινὶ ποιεῖν τι, ἄδειαν, ἐξουσίαν διδόναι, ἀσφάλειαν ποιεῖν, πρό-
φασιν παρέχειν τινὶ ποιεῖν τι. &e.), and but rarely the genitive (παράδειγμα ἔσται
τοῦ μὴ ὑμᾶς ἀδικεῖν, Lys. 27, ὅ, but shortly afterwards (§ 6) παράδειγμα ποιήσετε
τοῖς ἄλλοις δικαίοις εἶναι). The poets go still further in the use of the simple
infinitive instead of the genitive: Φόβῳ δ᾽, ἃ μὴ χρῆν, eisopay καθήμεθα συγῇ (Eur.
Iph. T. 1342, from fear of seeing).
Rem. 2. In some few verbs the usage is undecided between the simple infinitive
by ὃ 145 and the genitive of the infinitive, e.g. ἀμελῶ (ἠμέλησεν ἐρωτᾶν τὸν θεόν
and ἤμελησα τοῦ ὀργίζεσθαί vor). But with the rest of the verbs which in point of
signification come under § 145 (ἐπιθυμῶ, μέμνημαι, ἐπιλανθάνομαι, πολλοῦ, μικροῦ
δέω), the simple genitive is almost exclusively used. (Ἐπιμελοῦμαι τοῦ εἶναι and
ὅπως ὦ, ὃ 123.)
Rem. 3. Especially note the interchangeable idiom with verbs denoting to
restrain, exclude, withdraw, deliver, and sometimes escape from (éxpevyew),and with
some kindred phrases (e.g. ἐν ἀδείᾳ, ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ εἶναι, especially ἐμποδὼν εἶναι).
These take either the simple infinitive (by § 146) or its genitive; both,
either in the affirmative form, or with μή prefixed, the idiom of the language
being such, that the negative notion of the verb (e.g. restrain = not allow) is
repeated with the infinitive; see Wegations, ὃ 210, with R.1. a) ἔΑλλως πως
πορίζεσθαι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἢ ὠνουμένους ὅρκοι ἤδη κατέχουσιν ἡμᾶς (Aen. An. 8,1, 20).
Οὐδενὶ ἐμποδὼν γενήσομαι λαβεῖν τὸ διδόμενον ὑπὸ τῆς πόλεως (Lsoer. Antid. 152).
— b) Αἰδὼς τοὺς νεωτέρους τῶν πρεσβυτέρων μὴ ἅπτεσθαι εἴρξει (Pl. Rep. 5, 465).
O ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἐμποδὼν ἣν αὐτοῖς μὴ τοῦ δήμου βεβαίως προεστάναι (Thuc. 6, 28).
— ¢) Τοῦ δραπετεύειν δεσμοῖς οἱ δεσπόται τοὺς οἰκέτας εἴργουσιν (Xen. An. 2,1, 16).
Τὸ ψευδόμενον φαίνεσθαι τοῦ συγγνώμης τινὸς τυγχάνειν ἐμποδὼν μάλιστα ἀνθρώποις
γίγνεται (Xen. Cyr. 8,1. 9). — αὐ Ὃ ἀσκὸς δύο ἄνδρας ἕξει τοῦ μὴ καταδῦναι (Xen.
An.3,5,11). Ἐμποδών τι ἐγένετο τοῦ μὴ εὐθὺς τότε δικάσασθαι (Dem. 85, 25). “H
πόλις μικρὸν ἀπέλιπε TOD μὴ ταῖς ἐσχάταις συμφοραῖς περιπεσεῖν (Isoer. Antid. 122).
(To the simple infinitive sometimes ὥςτε is prefixed: Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι τὸ πρῶτον
ἀπείχοντο ὥςτε μὴ ἐμβάλλειν τινί. Thuc. 1, 49.)'
Rem. 4. Verbs of withholding, restraining, occasionally in affirmative sentences
take the accusative of the infinitive with μή (τὸ μή). so that the action hindered
or forborne may be said to stand loosely in the sentence (almost = so that — not) :
Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἱππεῖς τὸν πλεῖστον ὅμιλον τῶν ψιλῶν εἶργον TO μὴ προεξιόντας τῶν
ὅπλων (= τοῦ στρατοπέδου) τὰ ἐγγὺς τῆς πόλεως κακουργεῖν (Lhuc. 3, 1). Such
1 Κωλύω, with its compounds, very rarely takes the genitive of the infin.
CHAP. V.]
156.]
§
ΤῸ
138 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [ὃ 157) D5ee
an infinitive with τὸ μή is added even to verbs and phrases in themselves incapable
of taking an infinitive, but which denote a hindering or forbearing, in order to —
assign an action forborne: Κίμωνα ᾿Αθηναῖοι παρὰ τρεῖς ἀφεῖσαν ψήφους τὸ μὴ
θανάτῳ ζημιῶσαι (Dem. 23, 205 ; acquitted him by three votes so as not to condemn
him). Lastly, the infinitive with τὸ μή and τὸ μὴ οὐ (to cancel the preceding
negation, see Wegations, § 211), is frequently put after a negation of a leading ~
verb (or phrase) denoting to withhold, hinder, forbear, omit or deny, prove that —
not, to denote the action which is not forborne, &ec., even when the verb or the
phrase is not capable of taking the infinitive or its accusative : "Ewmeodvros ὕστερον
λόγου, ὅτι λυσιτελέστερον ἡ ἀδικία τῆς δικαιοσύνης, οὐκ ἀπεσχόμην τὸ μὴ οὐκ ἐπὶ
τοῦτο ἐλθεῖν ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνου, ὃ πρότερον ἐσκοποῦμεν (Pl. Rep. 1, 864). Οὐδὲν τοὺς
γέροντας ἐπιλύεται ἡ ἡλικία τὸ μὴ οὐχὶ ἀγανακτεῖν τῇ παρούσῃ τύχῃ (Pl. Crito, 43).
Τίς Μήδων ἢ νέος ἢ γέρων σοῦ ἀπελείφθη τὸ μή σοι ἀκολουθεῖν; (Xen. Cyr. ὅ,1, 25;
so that he did not follow thee ?) Οὐδ᾽ ἄρνησίς ἐστιν αὐτοῖς τὸ μὴ ταῦθ᾽ ὑπὲρ Φιλίππου
πράττειν (Dem.19, 108. They cannot deny but that they act in Philip's interest).
Ὃ Ἰσμηνίας ἀπελογεῖτο μέν, ov μέντοι ἔπειθέ ye TO μὴ οὐ μεγαλοπράγμων τε καὶ
κακοπράγμων εἶναι (Xen. Hell. 5, 2, 36).
Rem. 5. On the genitive of the infinitive in the sense of ἕνεκα, see § 170 c. R.
Sometimes a notion is represented first by a demonstrative pronoun, especially τοῦτο
(αὐτὸ τοῦτο, with addition of an adjective, τοῦτο μόνον, sometimes of a substantive, τοῦτο
τὸ πάθος). and then more closely defined by an infinitive [eperegetical infin. | as ap-
position to the pronoun, with or without the article, according as the latter would be —
required or not, if the infinitive were attached immediately to the governing word ;
the article, therefore, is almost always used where the pronoun is dative or genitive:
Δεῖ καὶ τοῦτο προθυμηθῆναι σὴν χάριν, ἀποδεῖξαι, πῇ δυνατὸν ταῦτα γίγνεσθαι (Pl. Rep.
5, 472). (Ἐκέλευσα τοῦτο μόνον ὁρᾶν πάντας τοὺς στρατιώτας, τῷ πρόσθεν ἕπεσθαι,
Xen, Cyr. 2, 2, 8, referred to ἐκέλευσα.) Ὅσοι ἀνδράποδα πολλὰ κέκτηνται, τοῦτό γε
προςύμοιον ἔχουσι τοῖς τυράννοις, τὸ πολλῶν ἄρχειν (PL. Rep. 9, 618). Δοκεῖ μοι
τούτῳ διαφέρειν ἀνὴρ τῶν ἄλλων ζώων, τῷ τιμῆς ὀρέγεσθαι (Xen. Hier. 7, 3). Ti
τούτου μακαριώτερον τοῦ γῇ μιχθῆναι; (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7, 25.) (But ἾΑρα τοῦδε
ἐπιθυμεῖτε, ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ γενέσθαι τόπῳ; Pl. Conv. 192, after ἐπιθυμῶ γενέσθαι.) In
the poets the article is sometimes omitted, contrary to the rule. (Τάδε ποιοῦντες,
δυοῖν ἀγαθοῖν οὐ στερήσομεν τὴν Σικελίαν, ᾿Αθηναίων τε ἀπαλλαγῆναι καὶ οἰκείου πολέμου,
Thue. 404.)
a) An adjective, participle, or substantive which, as predicate-noun
or as apposition belongs to an infinitive with or without the article,
stands in the accusative, when the infinitive is not referred by the go-
verning verb (or phrase) to a definite grammatical subject: Κρεῖττόν.
ἐστι σὺν πολλοῖς οἰκοῦντα ἀσφαλῶς τἀρκοῦντα ἔχειν ἢ μόνον διαιτώμενον.
ἐπικινδύνως πάντα κεκτῆσθαι (Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 2). Τὰ τοιαῦτα ἔξεστιν.
ἀριθμήσαντας ἢ μετρήσαντας εἰδέναι (Xen. Mem. 1, 1, 9. Such things
as these one can get to know by counting or measuring them).
b) If, on the other hand, the infinitive is referred to a definite sub-
stantive word in the sentence, as its subject, then the predicate-noun
or the apposition always conforms itself to the case of that word, if it
be nominative or accusative, usually also if it be dative: but im the
[PART ΤΙ.
7
μὴ
ὁ 159.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 139
last case the accusative also is used, especially of a (predicative) apposi-
tion, e.g. a participle (ἔξεστιν ἡμῖν ἀπιέναι τὰ ὅπλα ἔχοντας). After a
genitive, the predicate with εἶναι or γίγνεσθαι usually stands in the
genitive (after the genitive of a participle of a verb declarandi or sen-
tiendi always so), but an apposition appended to the infinitive stands
in the accusative. 1) (Nominative): "Evrydicacbe ἐξελθεῖν βοηθή-
σοντες. Οὐδέν ἐστιν ὄνειδος, ὅτου ποῤῥωτέρω ἐστὶν ἡ πόλις ἡμῶν ἢ
τοῦ φθονερὰ δοκεῖν εἶναι (Dem. 20, 140). ᾿Αντὶ τοῦ ἐπελθεῖν αὐτοὶ
ἀμύνεσθαι βούλεσθε μᾶλλον ἐπιόντας (Thuc. 1, 69). Σκεπτέον, ὅπως
μὴ Φίλιππος τὴν τοῦ φίλος τοῖς “Ελλησιν εἶναι πίστιν λήψεται (Den.
14, 7). Τιμόθεος τῷ ἤθει τὴν εὔνοιαν τὴν τῶν ἀνθρώπων προςήγετο,
νομίζων τοῦτο μεῖζον στρωτήγημα εἶναι ἢ πολλάκις νικῆσαι μαχόμενος
(1506». Antid, 122. The nominative referred to the leading verb, notwithstand-
ing the intervening τοῦτο μεῖζον στρατήγημα εἶναι). ---- 2) (Dative) : Εὐδαίμοσιν
ὑμῖν ἔξεστι γίγνεσθαι (Dem. 3, 23). Οὐκ ἐνδώσομεν πρόφασιν οὐδενὶ
κακῷ γενέσθαι (Thuc. 2, 871). Κῦρος ἀνεγέλασεν ἐπὶ τῷ κρείττονι τοῦ
ἔρωτος φάσκοντι εἶναι (Xen. Cyr. 6,1, 84). Συνέβη τῷ Χαβρίᾳ ἐκπλεῖν
μίαν ναῦν ἔχοντι (Dem. 23, 171). Τίμιόν ἐστι πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις τὸ
γενέσθαι πολίταις παρ᾽ ὑμῖν (Dem. 23, 200). (Even without a dative ex-
pressly preceding, but with reference to a subject in the dative to be mentally supplied:
Μεγάλων εὐεργεσιῶν οὐκ ἴσως ῥάδιον αἰτίῳ γενέσθαι, Dem. 20, 121.) — 3) (Ac-
cusative for dative) : Lol, ὦ 'Γαναοξάρη, σατράπην εἶναι δίδωμι Μήδων
τε καὶ ᾿Ασσυρίων (Xen. Cyr. 8, 7,11. Examples of this kind with the predi-
cate to εἶναι in the accusative, are rare). Πίξεστιν ὑμῖν, εἰ βούλεσθε, λαβόν-
τας ὅπλα, οἷάπερ ἡμεῖς ἔχομεν, εἰς τὸν αὐτὸν ἐμβαίνειν κίνδυνον (Xen.
Cyr. 2, 1, 15). Οὐ προςήκει ὑμῖν τῆς τῶν Θηβαίων πόλεως πλείω
ποιήσασθαι λόγον ἢ τῶν συνθηκῶν, ἐνθυμουμένους, ὡς οὐ τοὺς κινδύνους,
ἀλλὰ τὰς ἀδοξίας φοβεῖσθαι πάτριον ὑμῖν ἐστιν (1506). Plat. 39).
(λνάγκη μοι ἢν δυοῖν θάτερον ἑλέσθαι, ἢ μὴ βουληθέντι κατειπεῖν τοὺς ταῦτα ποιή-
σαντας καὶ περὶ ἐμοῦ καὶ περὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ὀῤῥωδεῖν, ἢ κατειπόντι τὰ γεγενημένα
αὐτὸν μὲν ἀφεθέντα μὴ τεθνάναι, τοῦ δὲ πατρὸς μὴ φονέα γενέσθαι, Andoe. 2, 7.)—
4) (Genitive) : Ἦλθον ἐπί τινα τῶν δοκούντων σοφῶν εἶναι (Pl. Apol.
22; ibid. 41: τῶν φασκόντων δικαστῶν εἶναι). ᾿Βδέοντο Κύρου ὡς
προθυμοτάώτου πρὸς τὸν πόλεμον γενέσθαι (Xen. Hell. 1, ὅ, 2).—9)
(Accusative after genitive) : ᾿Εδέοντό μου προστάτην γενέσθαι (Xen.
Cyr. 7, 2, 38). Δέομαι ὑμῶν καταψηφίσασθαι Θεομνήστου, ἐνθυμου-
μένους, ὅσος μοι ὁ ἀγών ἐστιν (Lys. 10, 31).
The accusative with the infinitive is used to express a proposition as
the object or subject of another proposition. The accus. with inf. stands
ΠῚ πῶν δοκούντων τι εἶναι (PL. Gorg. 472; εἶναί τι, a phrase not admitting of gram-
matical change, as ἀνδρὶ οἰομένῳ τι εἶναι, Pl. Menex. 247).
CHAP. V.]
[$
159.]
140 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [$ 159.
(primarily) after verbs and phrases denoting an utterance (say, deny,
answer, relate, narrate, concede, assert, declare, judge, &c.) or opinion
(think, assume, make to believe, hope; verla declarandi et sentiendi).
The verbs of utterance sometimes take an object-sentence with ὅτι or
ὡς, the verbs of opinion sometimes one with ὡς. Tov καλὸν κἀγαθόν
ἄνδρα εὐδαίμονα εἶναί φημι (Pl. Gorg. 470). “Ομολογῶ cov τὸ εὕρημα
εἶναι. Ὕπέσχου βοήθειαν μοι ἥξειν. Τί ποτε λέγουσιν οἱ κινεῖσθαι τὰ
πάντα ἀποφαινόμενοι; (Pl. Theat. 168.) Οἱ ἄνθρωποι ὑπολαμβάνουσι,
τοὺς θεοὺς διὰ τῶν ὀρνίθων τὰ συμφέροντα σημαίνειν (Xen. Mem. 1,
1,3). ᾿Ακούω καὶ ἄλλα ἔθνη πολλὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι (Xen. An. 2, 5, 15).
Πέπεισθε ἀδικίαν δικαιοσύνης ἄμεινον εἶναι (Pl. Rep. 2, 868). ᾿Ελπὶς
πάντα καλῶς ἕξειν.
Rem. 1. Of the verbs to know, perceive, see, show, remember, which take a par-
ticiple or a sentence with ὅτι or os, and of the verbs to hear, learn, which take a
participle, an accus. with inf. or ὅτι, see Participles, ὃ 178, a. with R. 6.
Rem. 2. Μετατίθεμαι, εὐδαιμονεστέρους εἶναι τοὺς κοσμίους τῶν ἀκολάστων (Pl.
Gorg. 493), I change my opinion, AND ASSUME. ᾿Ἐλέγχω, refute, AND PROVE. So
the acc. with inf. often to a sense indirectly contained in the verb. (Κατεφρόνουν
οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, διὰ Tas ἔμπροσθεν τύχας, μηδέν᾽ ἂν ἐπιχειρῆσαί σφισιν, Xen. Hell.
4, δ, 12; despised the enemy, AND THOUGHT that nobody would —.)
Rem. 3. Whether, in any given case, the acc. with inf. shall be used, or a
sentence with ὅτι, or one with os, is, for the most part, optional with the writer,
and depends on his view of what is required for perspicuity and suitableness in
reference to the structure of the dependent sentence as a whole, and of the
period. It may be remarked, however, with respect to the difference of these three
constructions, that affirmative verba declarandi (put simply, without secondary
meaning) almost always take the ace. with inf. or ὅτι : but that ὡς is put, when the
thing said is marked as an uncertain or untrue assertion, pretext, or evasion, therefore
also after a negatived verb (οὐ λέγω, ὡς —, or, if the thing uttered itself is nega-
tive, οὐ λέγω, ὡς ov). After verba sentiendi,only ὡς, not ὅτι, is used, and in this also
there is apt to be involved the secondary notion of a false opinion (πείθω, os —,
seek to persuade that —). ἹΠαρέξονται νόμον οὐδὲν προςέχοντα τῇδε τῇ γραφῇ Kat
λέξουσιν, ὡς εἰσὶ τῇ πόλει δύο νόμοι κείμενοι περὶ τῶν κηρυγμάτων (2 )Ξοῆ. 3, 88.
Often τοῦτο ἐρεῖ, ἐκεῖνον ἐρεῖ τὸν λόγον, ὡς —). Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον
πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν, ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοι αὐτῷ (Xen. An. 1,1,3). Οὐ μὲν δὴ οὐδὲ τοῦτ᾽ ἄν
τις εἴποι, ὡς τοὺς κακούργους καὶ ἀδίκους Κῦρος εἴα καταγελᾶν (Xen. An. 1, 9, 15).
Οὐ τοῦτο λέγω. ὡς οὐ δεῖ ἰέναι ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους (Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 20). “Exopev τι
παρὰ ταῦτα λέγειν, ὡς οὐχ οὕτως ἔχει; (Pl. Phed. 80.) — Νομίζουσιν οἱ ἐκείνῃ
ἄνθρωποι, ὡς Ἥφαιστος χαλκεύει (Thuc.3, 88). Οἱ σοφισταὶ πειρῶνται πείθειν τοὺ
νεωτέρους, ὡς, ἢν αὐτοῖς πλησιάζωσιν, ἃ πρακτέον ἐστίν. εἴσονται (Isocr. Sophist. 3).
(Ἔγνωσαν οἱ Μαντινεῖς ὧς, εἰ μὴ ἀποκρούσονται τοὺς μισθοφόρους, ὅτι πολλοὶ σφῶν
κατακοντισθήσονται, Aen. Hell. 6, ὅ, 13.) For ὡς after a negatived verb οἵ utter-
ance or opinion ὅπως is sometimes used: Οὐδέ ye, ὅπως ἄφρων ἔσται ἡ Ψυχή,
ἐπειδὰν Tov ἄφρονος σώματος δίχα γένηται, οὐδὲ τοῦτο πέπεισμαι (Aen. Cyr. 8,7, 20),
"Ores οὐ πάντων τούτων ἐπιμελητέον, ὦ “Ἱέρων, οὐ λέγω (Xen. Hier. . 1). Διότι
PART II. |
ὃ 160, 161.] The Infinitive and tts Tenses. 141
for ὅτι, that, is rare in the older writers (usually, because), in later writers not
infrequent. (The poetical οὕνεκα, ὁθούνεκα, because, sometimes also for ὅτι, that.)
Rem. 4. Sometimes a report of a view or speech, begun with ὅτι or ὡς, is con-
tinued in the accusative (nominative) with the infinitive, or vice versa : Oi Λακεδαι-
μόνιοι εἶπον, ὅτι σφίσι μὲν δοκοῖεν ἀδικεῖν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, βούλεσθαι δὲ καὶ τοὺς πάντας
΄
ξυμμάχους παρακαλέσαντες ψῆφον ἐπαγαγεῖν (Thuc. 1, 87). “Avutos ἔλεγεν, ὅτι
οὐχ οὕτω διακέοιντο (were not in such a condition) ὥςτε τιμωρεῖσθαί τινας τῶν
ἐχθρῶν, ἀλλὰ νῦν μὲν δεῖν αὐτοὺς ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν, εἰ δὲ οἴκαδε κατέλθοιεν, τότε καὶ
τιμωρήσοιντο τοὺς ἀδικοῦντας (Lys. 13, 78). By a negligence (anacoluthia) it
may even happen, that one and the same sentence begins with ὅτι or ὡς, and then,
commonly after a parenthetic sentence, is continued in the ace. with inf.: Λέγεις ov,
ὦ πάτερ, ὡς ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ, ὅτι, ὥςπερ οὐδὲ γεωργοῦ ἀργοῦ οὐδὲν ὄφελος, οὕτως οὐδὲ
στρατηγοῦ ἀργοῦ οὐδὲν ὄφελος εἶναι (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 18). (Conversely, a sentence
begun in ace. with inf. passes into a dependent interrogation : Τοὺς μέντοι Ἕλληνας
τοὺς ἐν τῇ ᾿Δσίᾳ οἰκοῦντας, οὐδέν πω σαφῶς λέγεται, εἰ ἕπονται. Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 5.)
If the subject in the infinitive clause is the same as that of the
governing verb, as a general rule only a simple infinitive follows,
referred to the leading subject (nominative with infinitive, ef. § 147) ;
but the accusative with infinitive also occurs, sometimes with a view
to give prominence to the subject of the infinitive as opposed to
others: ‘Oporoy® ἀδικεῖν. Νομίζω οὐδὲν χείρων εἶναι τῶν ἄλλων.
"Ἑξαρνός ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος μηδ᾽ ἰδεῖν με πώποτε (Arist. Pl. 241 =
ἀρνεῖται). ΤΠιστεύω διαλύσειν τὴν διαβολήν (Thuc. 1, 101). Σωκράτης,
ἔφη ὁ κατήγορος, τοὺς πατέρας προπηλακίζειν διδάσκει, πείθων τοὺς
συνόντας αὑτῷ σοφωτέρους ποιεῖν τῶν πατέρων (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 49 ;
| persuading them that he makes them —). Τιμόθεος τὰς χιλίας δραχμὰς
ἰδίᾳ ἔφη δανεῖσαι τὸν πατέρα ᾿Αντιμάχῳ καὶ οὐκ αὐτὸς λαβεῖν (Dem.
49, 44). Κλέων οὐκ ἔφη αὐτὸς ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖνον (Νικίαν) στρατηγεῖν
(Thuc. 4, 28). — Οἶμαι ἐμὲ παρὰ σοῦ πολλῆς καὶ καλῆς σοφίας πλη-
ρωθήσεσθαι (Pl. Conv. 179). (Αὐτίαν ἔχω μισύδημος εἶναι, Pl. Rep. 8, 566.
Ὑποψίαν παρέξουσι μὴ ἡμέτεροι εἶναι πατέρες, Pl. Menea. 247. Ὕποπτος εἶ φυγεῖν.)
Rem. When φημί, ἡγοῦμαι, οἶμαι ought to be followed. by χρῆναι, δεῖν (δίκαιον
εἶναι), and an accus. with inf. with the subject of the leading verb, sometimes the
ἡγοῦμαι, χρῆναι, &c. is considered as one verb followed by a simple infinitive
(nominative), especially οἶμαι δεῖν, [think I must, think it is necessary for me,
to be, &e.: ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ὑβριστὴς ᾧετο δεῖν εἶναι (Dem. 21, 143).?
When a verb of utterance or opinion should be put impersonally in
the passive, and followed by an accusative with infinitive, the per-
) sonal expression in the nominative with infinitive is frequently used [as
often in English]; but the impersonal form also occurs: Φῦναι ὁ
1 Τύλιππος κήρυκα προπέμπει τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις λέγνοτα (= λέγειν κελεύων), εἰ βούλον-
> ΄ - ΄ « ΄σ > i ind €
| rat ἐξιέναι ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας πέντε ἡμερῶν, ἕτοιμος εἶναι σπένδεσθαι (Thuc. 5, 3).
, ἡμέρων, fa ;
CHAP. ν.]
[§
159.]
OZ)
160,
(401,
I, 2)
Ornm
NS
‘ form, so that the verb is to be supposed repeated: Δυοῖν χρησίμοιν od διαμαρτήσεσθαι
142 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [ὃ 162, ΤΟΙ͂Σ
Κῦρος λέγεται καὶ ἄδεται ἔτι καὶ νῦν ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων εἶδος μὲν κάλ-
λιστος, ψυχὴν δὲ φιλανθρωπότατος (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2, 1). “Ὡμολόγηται
ὁ ἰατρὸς σωμάτων εἶναι ἄρχων (Pl. Rep. 1, 342 5 τέ 15 confessed that —,
or, a physician is confessed to be—). ᾿Αχιλλεὺς “Ομήρῳ πεποίηται
(Achilles is represented by Homer to have —) ἸΤατρόκλῳ ἀποθανόντι
ἐκπρεπέστατα τιμωρῆσαι (Xen. Conv. 8, 91) ες Tov ὑπὸ σοῦ κριθέντος χαλεπώ- ]
rara ζὴν χαλεπώτερον ἔτι ζῆ ὁ τύραννος (Pl. Rep. 9, δ79).----λέγεται, ᾿Αλκι-
βιάδην, πρὶν εἴκοσιν ἐτῶν εἶναι, ἸΤερικλεῖ τοιάδε διαλεχθῆναι περὶ νόμων
(Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 40). Ὁμολογεῖται, τοὺς ἀπὸ Διὸς εὐγενεστάτους τῶν
ἡμιθέων εἶναι, (Lsocr. γα. 13). (Ἤγγελται ἡ μάχη ἰσχυρὰ γεγονέναι καὶ ev
αὐτῇ πολλοὺς τεθνάναι, Pl. Charm. 153.)
Rem. The verb δοκῶ (videor) is usually put personally, of the person or thing
of which something is supposed: εὖ λέγειν μοι δοκεῖτε (even ἀπέπλευσαν, ws τοῖς
πλείστοις ἐδόκουν, ὀργισθέντες, Xen. An. 1, 4, 7, = ὡς τ. 7. ἐδόκει) ; δοκῶ μοι and
simply δοκῶ, I seem to myself to —, it seems to me that I —, I think that I—,
e.g. ἔδοξα ἀκοῦσαι ὄνομα αὐτῷ εἶναι ᾿Αγάθωνα (Pl. Prot. 315); with the infinitive —
of the future (of the aorist with ἄν), 7 believe I shall — f will ; δοκῶ μοι κατακεί-
σεσθαι. Δοκεῖ μοι (reve) impersonally with an aceus. 6. infin. is unusual, except in 7
a clause subsequently annexed: Ἐδόκει Ξενοφῶντι, βροντῆς γενομένης, σκηπτὸς
πεσεῖν εἰς τὴν πατρῴαν οἰκίαν, καὶ ἐκ τούτου λάμπεσθαι πᾶσαν (Xen. An. 3, 1, 11). 7
(Different from this is δοκεῖ, ἠέ ἐς decreed that something shall be, ὃ 104.) Δοκῶ
is also used in the sense J believe, I think. δΔοκεῖς ἂν ἢ ληστὰς ἢ κλέπτας Tpakat ~
ἄν τι δύνασθαι, εἰ ἀδικοῖεν ἀλλήλους ; (Pl. Rep. 1, 351.) Τῷ πατρί, δοκῶ, Πυρι-
λάμπης ὄνομα ἦν (Pl. Parm. 126). (Καὶ τούτους τί δοκεῖτε; Xen. An. 5, 7, 26. 7
Quid hos putatis 2 Lat. Gr. ὃ 395, R. 7, fin.) :
When the word which is the subject of the infinitive is itself governed, as dative |
or genitive, by the verb of utterance or opinion, the infin. attaches itself immediately
to this case (without a separate subject in the accusative): Πιστεύω σοι ποιήσειν, L
trust thee that thou wilt do (and thence οὔ σοι πάνυ πιστεύω ixave εἶναι, Pl. Kuthyd.
296, as πιστεύω τάδε ἀληθῆ εἶναι). Οὐδενὶ ἀνθρώπων ὑφείμην ἂν ἥδιον ἐμοῦ βεβιωκέναι,
(Xen. Mem. 4, 8, 6). Κτησικλέους ὁ δῆμος ἅπας κατεχειροτόνησεν ἀδικεῖν (Dem.
21, 180). Κατέγνωκα ἐμαυτοῦ μή ποτ᾽ ἂν δυνατὸς γενέσθαι τοὺς ἄνδρας ἱκανῶς ἐγκω-,
μιάσαι (PI. Tim. 19. Δυνατός to the subject of the principal verb, § 158 0).
(Passively, by ὃ 56, R. 2: Κατεγνώσθην ἀδικεῖν, Xen. Hell. 1, 7, 20.) (Αἰτιῶμαί twa”
κλέπτην εἶναι. ᾿Ηιτιάθη ᾿Αδείμαντος προδοῦναι τὰς ναῦς, Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 32.)
a) Besides the accus. (or nom.) with inf. immediately dependent on a leading”
verb, the continuation of the utterance or opinion may be carried on in the same
\ ς , , ς - - ’, \ , δ \ ,
τὴν πόλιν ἡγούμην πλευσάντων ἡμῶν (τῶν πρεσβέων πρὸς Φίλιππον): ἢ γὰρ Φίλιππον
ἃ μὲν εἰλήφει τῆς πόλεως, ἀποδώσειν, τῶν δὲ λοιπῶν ἀφέξεσθαι, ἤ, μὴ ποιοῦντος ταῦτα,
ἀπαγγελεῖν ἡμᾶς εὐθέως δεῦρο, ὥςθ᾽ ἐν ἐκείνους τοῖς πόῤῥω τὴν ἀπιστίαν ἰδόντας ὑμᾶς,
περὶ τῶνδε τῶν ἐγγὺς οὐ προήσεσθαι: μὴ προλαβύντος δὲ ἐκείνου ταῦτα μηδ᾽ ὑμῶν ἐξαπα
δ > > oe \ ’ > ¢ ~ ᾿᾿ > Ν A
τηθέντων, ἐν ἀσφαλεῖ Ta πράγμαθ᾽ ὑμῖν ἔσεσθαι (Dem. 19, 151). ᾿Ἐμοὶ δοκοῦσιν ot
ἄνθρωποι παντάπασι τὴν τοῦ ἔρωτος δύναμιν οὐκ ἠσθῆσθαι᾽ ἐπεὶ αἰσθανόμενοί γε μέγιστ᾽
ἂν αὐτοῦ ἱερὰ κατασκευάσαι καὶ βωμοὺς καὶ θυσίας ἂν ποιεῖν μεγίστας (Pl. Conv. 189)...
(For a longer narration continued in this way, see Xen. Cyr. 1, 9, 4 ff Plato de
Rep. x. p. 614 8. ff.; a speech and argument, Thucyd. vi. 49.) .
[PART I,
§ 164.] The Infinitive and tts Tenses. 143
Rem. It is not usual, however, in Greek, in the same degree as in Latin, to
report an entire speech (except it be pure narrative) in such a continued ace.
with inf. Often εἶπεν, ἔφη, ἤρετο, &e. is repeated, or there is a sudden transition
to the oratio recta in the proper person of the speaker. See Connexion of Sentences,
§ 192 b.
δὴ) An ace. (nom.) with inf. sometimes stands without an express verb of utterance
or opinion, when this is intimated in some other way: “Ayes τοὺς πρέσβεις es Aakedai-
μονα ἐκέλευσεν ἰέναι: ov yap εἶναι κύριος αὐτός (Xen. Hell. 2, 2, 12). Σωκράτης ἐθαύ-
μαζεν, εἰ μὴ φανερὸν τοῖς φιλοσόφοις ἐστίν, ὅτι τὰ μετέωρα οὐ δυνατόν ἐστιν ἀνθρώποις
εὑρεῖν: ἐπεὶ καὶ τοὺς μέγιστον φρονοῦντας ἐπὶ τῷ περὶ τούτων λέγειν οὐ ταὐτὰ δοξάζειν
ἀλλήλοις (Xen. Mem. 1, 1, 13). Ὃ ἾΑγις παρῃτεῖτο (τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους) μὴ ζημιῶσαι
αὑτόν: ἔργῳ γὰρ ἀγαθῷ ῥύσεσθαι τὰς αἰτίας στρατευσάμενος (Thue. 5, 09).
Further: the acc. with inf. is put a) with verbs and phrases
denoting a w7// (command, prayer, wish, resolve, agreement, taking
measures for) that something sha// (may) take place (which sha// is not
expressed, but is involved in the construction), or a permzssion and a
prohibition that something should, or should not, take place (verbs of
willing) ; b) with verbs and phrases denoting to effect and cause that
something be, or be not, done (verbs of effecting) (6. g. διαπράττομαι,
κατεργάζομαι, ποιῶ, also διαμάχομαι, contend for it, that ; κατασκευάζω,
σπουδάζω, earnestly endeavour that; more specially ὠνοῦμαι, purchase
to myself that, αἴτιός εἰμι, &e.), and to wait for ; 6) with συμβαίνει,
; ; : ;
συμπίπτει, it happens. When with these verbs of will and of effect
the leading verb and the infinitive have the same subject, a simple
infinitive is put (ὃ 145 and 147): Ilavtas ταῦτα εἰδέναι βούλομαι.
Ἐὔχοντο Beviav καὶ ἸΠασίωνα ὡς δολίους ὄντας ληφθῆναι (Xen. An.
1, 4, 7). ᾿Ἔδοξε, πλεῖν ς τὸν ᾿Αλκιβιάδην (Thue. 6, 29). Ἔγραψα
(I moved that —, also εἶπον, γνώμην εἶπον, ψήφισμα ἐγένετο, &c.), ἀπο-
πλεῖν' τὴν ταχίστην τοὺς πρέσβεις (Dem. 18,25). οἱ ἄρχοντες οἱ ἐν τῇ
Κεφαλληνίᾳ ἔγνωσαν ᾿Αθήναζε τὴν ναῦν καταπλεῖν (Dem. 32,9; settled for the ship
to sail —). Ἔκ τούτου ἀνιστάμενοι πάντες ἔλεγον, τοὺς ἀνομίας ἄρξαντας δοῦναι δίκην
(Xen. An. 5, 7, 84). Ἐύγκειται κρατεῖν βασιλέα τῶν πόλεων, ὧν ποτε οἱ πρόγονοι
ἦρχον (Thuc. 8, 52; it is settled that —). Νόμον θησόμεθα, μηδενὶ ἐξεῖναι ἄρχειν, ὃς
ἂν μὴ στρατεύσηται. ᾿Αστυάγης ἀπηγύρευε μηδένα βάλλειν, πρὶν Kopos ἐμπλησθείη
θηρῶν (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 14). ᾿Ἐγίγνοντο σπονδαὶ τοιαίδε: Λακεδαιμονίους μὲν τὰς ναῦς
τὰς ἐν τῇ Λακωνικῇ πάσας, ὅσαι ἦσαν μακραί, παραδοῦναι κομίσαντας ἐς Πύλον ᾿Αθη-
ναίοις καὶ ὅπλα μὴ ἐπιφέρειν τῷ τειχίσματι: ᾿Αθηναίους δὲ τοῖς ἐν τῇ νήσῳ ἀνδράσι σῖτον
ἐὰν τοὺς ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ Λακεδαιμονίους ἐκπέμπειν τακτόν κιτιλ. (Lhuc. 4, 10.) "--
ν lat ΄ a a
Ei twa τῶν γνωρίμων βούλοιο κατεργάζεσθαι καλεῖν σε ἐπὶ δεῖπνον,
i a ins ; (Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 11 ΠῚ : ἔ ὅτι ὃ
τί ἂν ποιοίης ; (Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 11.) ἱἰσσαφέρνης ἔλεγεν, OTL Ola-
πεπρωγμένος ἥκοι παρὰ βασιλέως, δοθῆναι αὐτῷ σώζειν τοὺς “EXAnvas
ΤΙ The infin. present is common, as in Lat., after verbs of ordering, decreeing, &c.
—T.K.A.] 3
3 Δοκοῦντος τοῦ Θίμβρωνος οὐδὲν ποιεῖν, πέμπουσιν οἱ ἔφοροι, ἀπολιπόντα Λάρισσαν
στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ Καρίαν (Xen. Hell. 3, 1, 8, send him orders to —).
CHAP. V.]
144 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [$ 165..
[8 (Xen: An. 2; 3, 25). ᾿Ωνοῦνται αἱ πόλεις, μὴ ἀδικεῖσθαι τοὺς παρ᾽ αὑτῶν ἐκπλέον-
TOA πες ἐμπόρους (Dem. 8, 25). ᾿Εγὼ αἴτιος, μὴ καλῶς σε ἀποκρίνασθαι, ὅτι οὐ καλῶς
ἠρόμην (Pl. Lach. 191). Φορμίων φυλακὴν εἶχε (ἐφύλαττε), μήτ᾽ ἐκπλεῖν ἐκ Κορίνθου
μηδένα μήτ᾽ εἰςπλεῖν (Thuc. 2, 69). Οὐ περιμενοῦμεν (ἀναμενοῦμεν) ἄλλους.
ἡμᾶς διολέσαι (Pl. Rep. 2, 515). Συνέβη τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους θορυβηθῆναι
(Thuc. 5,10). (Rarely, and for the sake of an antithesis, the acc. with inf,
instead of the simple infinitive: Βουλοίμην ἂν ἐμέ τε τυχεῖν ὧν βούλομαι, τοῦτόν τε
παθεῖν ὧν ἄξιός ἐστιν, Dem. 24, 8.)
Rem. 1. After the verbs under ὦ and ὁ, the ace. with inf. sometimes takes ὥςτε
(so to arrange that —), rarely those under a (cf. ὃ 145, R. 3). Πειράσομαι ποιῆ-
σαι, ὥςτε σε νομίζειν καλῶς βεβουλεῦσθαι (Xen. Cyr.3, 2,29). ᾿Εγὼ κἂν τῆς ψυχῆς
πριαίμην ὥςτε μήποτε λατρεῦσαι τὴν γυναῖκα (Xen. Cyr. 3,1, 36). Ἦ οἴει ψηφί-
σασθαι ἂν τὸ πλῆθος συνελθὸν ὥςτε τοὺς κρατίστους καὶ τιμαῖς καὶ δώροις πλεονεκτεῖν ;
(Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 20.) Ξυνέβη εὐθὺς μετὰ τὴν ἐν ᾿Αμφιπόλει μάχην ὥςτε πολέμου
μηδὲν ἔτι ἅψασθαι μηδετέρους (Thuc. ὅ, 14). (Διαπράττομαι ὥςτε μὴ κολάζεσθαι,
Pl. Gorg. 478.)
Rem. 2. The verbs which denote endeavour (to effect), take an object-sentence
with ὅπως, 6. 5. κατασκευάζω, διασπουδάζω (δ 123). With ἐπιμελεῖσθαι, pnyava-
σθαι the acc. with inf. is rare.
Rem. 3. Sometimes the subject-matter of an agreement, resolution, stipulation,
&e. is expressed by the simple infinitive, as the subject is easily seen from the
context : Ἦσαν ai συγγραφαί. ὥςπερ εἰώθασιν ἅπασαι, σωθείσης τῆς νεὼς ἀποδοῦναι
τὰ χρήματα (Dem. 9:2. δ : were to this effect, that one should pay). Insome cases the
construction may be either acc. with inf., or a dative with simple inf. by ὃ 146.
Προςτάττω τινὶ ποιεῖν (order a person to do) and τινὰ ποιεῖν (that some one should
do). Χαίρειν λέγω τινί and τινά. “Avutos Ayopat@ αἴτιος ἐγένετο μὴ ἀποθανεῖν
(Lys. 13, 82). Τοῦ μὴ λαβεῖν ᾿Αμφίπολιν πάντων οὗτος αἰτιώτατός ἐστιν (Dem.
23, 152; viz. ὑμῖν). (Also αἴτιος τοῦ τι γίγνεσθαι, ὃ 170 5.) Οἱ περὶ τὸν Χάρο-
πον, συνθέμενοι τοῖς ᾿Αρκάσιν ἐπιβοηθεῖν, καταλαμβάνουσι τὴν ἀκρόπολιν (Xen.
Hell.7, 4,15; having agreed with the Arcadians that these should come and help
them).
ὃ a) The accusative with infinitive stands as the object of a mental
165, judgment expressed impersonally (καλόν ἐστι, χρή, &e.). Καλὸν ἀδελ-
φοὺς ἀλλήλοις ἐπικουρεῖν. Tiept πολλοῦ ποιητέον, μηδεμίαν πρόφασιν
δοθῆναι τοῖς διαβάλλουσιν. Σωτηρία ἄλλη οὐδεμία ἣν, ἢ πυθέσθαι᾽ AOn-
ναίους πάντα τὰ πραχθέντα (Andoc. 1,58). (Τίς μηχανὴ μὴ οὐχὶ πάντα
καταναλωθῆναι εἰς τὸ τεθνάναι; Pl. Phed. 72 = ἀδύνατον.) Tposyxet μοι ποιεῖν and
ἐμέπ. Rarely ἔξεστί με ποιεῖν.
Rem. The adjective δίκαιος is usually (instead of the impersonal form δίκαιόν
ἐστι followed by acc. with inf.) put personally, of the person who is bound
(entitled) to do something, with infinitive added: Kat σὺ ἡμῖν δίκαιος (δικαιότατος)
εἶ ἀντιχαρίζεσθαι (Xen. Cyr. 4,1, 20). πολλῷ μειζόνων ἔτι δωρεῶν δίκαιός εἰμι τυγ-
χάνειν (Dem. 18, 53). (Similarly: Ἦν συνιδεῖν τῷ προςέχοντι τὸν νοῦν ἡ βασιλέως
ἀρχὴ τοῖς μήκεσι τῶν ὁδῶν καὶ τῷ διεσπάσθαι τὰς δυνάμεις ἀσθενὴς οὖσα, Xen. An,
1, 5, 9 ΞΞ Ἦν συνιδεῖν τὴν ἀρχὴν ---- οὖσαν.) So sometimes a participle express-
ing something that is becoming, befitting, or a duty, stands personally with the
infinitive, instead of impersonally: Λόγος mposnkoy ῥηθῆναι (Pl. Pol. 283) = ὃν
[PART Il.
%
§ 166.] The 17 gis nitive and its Tenses. 145
προςήκει ῥ. Τὰ ἡμῖν ἐξ ἀρχῆς παραγγελθέντα (προςταχθέντα) διελθεῖν (Pl. Tim.
90) = ἃ ἡμῖν παρηγγέλθη
6) An ace. with inf. is sometimes put as an apposition to a demonstrative pronoun
(τοῦτο, τόδε, sometimes to a pronoun with a substantive )s to denote a conceived rela-
tion of which something is predicated: Τὸ δίκαιον τοῦτ᾽ ἐστί, πλέον € ἔχειν τοὺς ἄρχον-
τας τῶν ἀρχομένων (PZ. Gorg. 491). οὐδενὶ πώποτε δεδώκατε τὴν δωρεὰν ταύτην.
ἐξεῖναι τοὺς ἰδίους ἐχθροὺς ὑβρίζειν, ὁπότ᾽ ἂν βούληται (Dem. 21, 170).
a) The accusative with infinitive stands with ὥςτε, so that, to
ἜΗΝ the way and manner (the degree) and the consequence of what
is predicated in the principal sentence, when the clause with ὥςτε Con-
tains a mere mental representation which is not put by the speaker
as actual. (Where the subject remains unchanged, the simple infini-
tive is used.) Ifthe proposition with ὥςτε zs put as actual, then partly
the indicative (or potential optative) is used, especially almost always
with narrative statements in the aorist : partly the infinitive, whereby
the sentence coalesces more with the leading sentence, and has less
prominence in itself (as ¢o ec. inf., but often, so that). Where ὥςτε ex-
presses merely a consequence or inference (so that consequent! ly, ther 6707 ele
but not the way and manner, or the degree (so that οὕτως or τοσοῦτοι"
could not precede), the infinitive i is rarely used : Todas ἐλπίδας ἔχω
ἀρκούντως ἐρεῖν, ὥςτ᾽ ὑμᾶς μὴ ἀπολειφθῆναι τῶν πραγμώτων (Dem. Ce
oy) 80 that 4 you shall not be left im ignorance of the state of a urs).
Οὔπω οἱ καιροὶ παρεληλύθασιν, ἁ OST ἤδη μάτην εἶναι τὸ μεμνῆσθαι περὶ
τούτων (Isocr.; so that it should be in vain —) : Kai λόγων. καὶ βου-
λευμάτων κοινωνὸν ἄν σε οἱ πολέμιοι ποιοῖντο διὰ τὸ πιστεύειν, ὥςτε
μηδὲ ἕν σε λεληθέναι, ὧν βουλόμεθα εἰδέναι (Xen. (χ». θ,1,.40). Οὕτω
ἀτόπους τινὰς ἐν τῇ πόλει καὶ δυςχερεῖς ἀνθρώπους ΤῊΣ ΟΣ ἔλεγεν
εἶναι. ὥςτε οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθαι λοιδορουμένους. Φιλίππῳ (Dem. 19, 308.
In the oratio recta it might be οὕτως --- εἰσίν, ὥςτε οὐκ αἰσχύνονται,
ΟΥ ὥςτε μὴ αἰσχύνεσθαι" Ὲ Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι εἰς τοῦτο ἀπληστίας ἦλθον,
ὥςτε οὐκ ἐξήρκεσεν αὐτοῖς ἔχειν τὴν κατὰ γῆν ἀρχήν (5007. Panath.
193). Οὕτως ἡ ἡμῖν ταῦτα τἀγαθὰ παντὸς ἄξια εἶναι ee ὥςτε TO κατα-
λιπεῖν αὐτὰ πάντων μάλιστα φεύγομεν (Xen. Mem. 2,2 Ὁ 5} Ξέρξης
τῆς πεζῆς στρατιᾶς οὕτως ἄπειρον τὸ πλῆθος ἦγεν, ὥςτε καὶ τὸ ἔθνη
τὰ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἀκολουθήσαντα πολὺ ἂν ἔργον εἴη καταλέξαι (Lys. 2, 27).
Kai λήθη Kat μανία πολλάκις πολλοῖς διὰ τὴν τοῦ σώματος καχεξίαν εἰς
τὴν διάνοιαν ἐ ἐμπίπτουσιν οὕτως, ὥςτε καὶ τὰς ἐπιστήμας ἐκβάλλειν (Xen.
Mem. 3, 12,6). Ἢ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πόλις ἐμπόριον ἐν μέσῳ τῆς ᾿Ελλά-
δος τὸν Πειραῖα κατεσκευάσατο τοσαύτην ἔχον ὑπερβολήν, ὥςθ᾽, ἃ παρὰ
τῶν ἄλλων ἕν παρ᾽ ἑκάστων χαλεπόν ἐστι λαβεῖν, ταῦθ᾽ ἅπαντα Tap’
1 [It might be ὥςτε οὐκ αἰσχ. (taken as the opp. of αἰσχύνεσθαι) in orat. rect.
Comp. 305, R. 3.—Ep.]
CHAP. V.] i
166. ]
146 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [ὃ 166.
αὐτῆς, ῥάδιον εἶναι πορίσασθαι (1500. Paneg. 43). Eis τὴν ὑστεραίαν
οὐχ ἧκεν ὁ Τισσαφέρνης" ὥςθ᾽ οἱ “Ἑλληνες ἐφρόντιζον (Xen: ΟΣ
24). "Osre (in consequence of the Soregoing explanations) ξὺν᾽ τῷ πρώτῳ πολέμῳ τῷ
δεκαετεῖ καὶ τῇ μετ᾽ αὐτὸν ἐτύπτας ἀνακωχῇ καὶ τῷ ὕστερον ἐξ αὐτῆς 'πολέμῳ εὑρήσει τις
τοσαῦτα ἔτη (Thue. 5, 26). (Suvréraxrat καὶ συνακολουθεῖ τοῖς μὲν πλούτοις καὶ
δυναστείαις ἄνοια καὶ deohacta, ταῖς δ᾽ ἐνδείαις καὶ ταῖς ταπεινότησι σωφροσύνη καὶ
μετριότης" ὥςτε χαλεπὸν εἶναι διαγνῶναι, ποτέραν ἄν τις δέξαιτο τῶν μερίδων τούτων
τοῖς παισὶ τοῖς αὑτοῦ καταλιπεῖν, Isocr. Areop. 5.)
Rem. Even after a condition, or after a question equivalent to a negative (where
therefore the consequence is not a fact), ὥςτε may stand with the modus JSinitus, if
the condition or the question essentially concerns the proposition Ww ith ὥςτε:
Οὕτως ayvopsves EXETE, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὥςτε, δι’ ὧν ἐκ χρηστῶν φαῦλα τὰ πράγ-
ματα τῆς πόλεως γέγονε, διὰ τούτων ἐλπίζετε τῶν αὐτῶν πράξεων ἐκ φαύλων αὐτὰ
χρηστὰ γενήσεσθαι ; (Dem. 2, 261.)
ὁ) Likewise ὥςτε before the accusative with infinitive, οὐ, 1 the sub-
ject be the same, the simple infinitive, denotes a fixed condition (so
that something shall happen, wader the condition that), or the price
and reward (so that im return), sometimes altogether the object and
the means (so that something _may). Just so the ace. with inf. (or
simple inf.) with ἐφ᾽ ©, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τε, on condition that: Ot Μυτυληναῖοι
ὁμολογίαν ποιοῦνται πρὸς Πάχητα, ὥςτε ᾿Αθηναίοις μὲν ἐξεῖναι βου-
λεῦσαι περὶ Μιτυληναίων ὁποῖον ἄν τι βούλωνται, πρεσβείαν δ᾽ ἀπο-
στέλλειν ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας Μιτυληναίους περὶ ἑαυτῶν (Thuc. 3, 28. Also
ἐπὶ τοῖςδε ὥςτε, Thue. 3, 114). Πάχης Ἱππίαν προεκαλέσατο ἐς “λόγους,
ὥςτε, ἢν μηδὲν ἀρέσκον λέγη, πάλιν αὐτὸν καταστήσειν εἰς τὸ τεῖχος
σῶν καὶ ὑγιᾶ (Thue. 3, 54) .-- Ἐξῆν τοῖς ὑμετέροις προγόνοις τῶν λοι-
πῶν ἄρχειν ᾿Βλλήνων, ὥςτε αὐτοὺς ὑπακούειν βασιλεῖ (Dem. 6, 11).
"Oste τὴν γυναῖκα ἀπολαβεῖν, πόσα ἄν μοι χρήματα Soins; (Xen. (ἢ yr
3,1, 35.) Πᾶν ποιοῦσιν, ὥςτε δίκην μὴ διδόναι (Pl. Gorg. 479; ¢
have no punishment to undergo). Ot τριάκοντα ἐβουλήθησαν ἜΧΕΙΣ
ἐξιδιώσασθαι, ὥςτε εἶναι σφίσι καταφυγήν. εἰ δεήσειε (Xen. Hell. 2,
4, 8) °.—TnpiBakos εἶπεν, ὅτι σπείσασθαι βούλοιτο, ἐφ᾽ ὦ μήτε αὐτὸς
\ c/ τ al GS) 5 / / \ eee 7
τοὺς “Ελληνας ἀδικεῖν μήτ᾽ ἐκείνους καίειν Tas οἰκίας (Xen. An. 4, 4,
0) “. *. (The verb can or shal lies in the construction, and is not separately expressed
P ΧἘῈΣΡ
in the Greek.)
For τοιοῦτος ὥςτε we have also τοιοῦτος οἷος, or simply οἷος, so
Ἰ Ta πράγματα ὁρῶ eis τοῦτο προήκοντα ὥςτε, ὅπως μὴ πεισύμεθα αὐτοὶ πρότερον
κακῶς, σκέψασθαι δέον (Dem. 3, 1 ; participle instead of infinitive with ὥςτε after a
participle preceding, by a kind of attraction).
> Mnxavai πολλαί εἰσιν ἐν ἑκάστοις τοῖς κινδύνοις ὥςτε διαφεύγειν θάνατον (Pl. Apol.
39; so ey one can escape, mn order to escape.
3. Ἐφ᾽ ᾧ (ᾧ τε) with fut. indie. in Herodot. and Thucyd.: Οἱ ἐν ᾿Ιϑώμῃ “Μεσσήνιοι
ξυνέβησαν πρὸς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τε ἐξίασιν. ἐκ Πελοποννήσου καὶ μηδέποτε
ἐπιβήσονται αὐτῆς" ἢν δέ τις ἁλίσκηται, τοῦ “λαβόντος εἶναι δοῦλον (Thue. t 103).
PART. II,
§ 167.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 147
that οἷος is put in the case of the τοιοῦτος preceding (or understood),
not only with the simple infinitive where the subject is the same, but
sometimes also with ace. with inf. Likewise (τοσοῦτον) ὅσον (τοσαῦτα
ὅσα) for τοσοῦτον ὥςτε. Οἱ ἹΠερσικοὶ νόμοι ἐπιμέλονται ὅπως τὴν
ἀρχὴν μὴ τοιοῦτοι ἔσονται οἱ πολῖται οἷοι πονηροῦ τινος ἢ αἰσχροῦ
ἔργου ἐφίεσθαι (Xen. Cyr. 1, 2,3). Οὐκ ἣν ὥρα οἵα ἄρδειν τὸ πεδίον
(Xen. An. 2, 3,13; the season to irrigate the plain). Αἴσχιστα ἀπαλ-
λάττονται “λοιδοροῦντές τε καὶ εἰπόντες καὶ ἀκούσαντες περὶ σφῶν αὐτῶν
τοιαῦτα οἷα καὶ τοὺς παρόντας ἄχθεσθαι (Pd. Conv. 311). ᾿Εϊλείτετο
τῆς νυκτὸς ὅσον σκοταίους τοὺς “ὕλληνας διελθεῖν τὸ πεδίον (Xen. An.
A 1, 5).
Rem. 1. From οἷος ἴῃ the sense τοιοῦτος ὥςτε arose the frequent use of ois τε with
εἰμί and an inf. by § 149, in the sense of, iz ὦ condition to (to be able, &e.): Οὐχ
οἷός τέ εἰμι βοηθῆσαι ἐμαυτῷ (I am not able [i.e. am not such a one as to do it).
Pl. Gorg. 408). Impersonally : οὐχ οἷόν τε (ἐστίν), it is not possible; ws οἷόν Te.
Rem. 2. For ὥςτε in the sense 80 that, Herodotus and the Attic poets, some-
times even ‘Xenophon, have ὡς: Ἢ Ῥοδῶπις οὕτω δή τι κλεινὴ ἐγένετο, ὡς καὶ
πάντες οἱ Ἕλληνες “Ῥοδώπιος τοὔνομα ἐξέμαθον (Herod. 1, 135). Ἔνθεν ὄρη ἦν
ὑπερύψηλα, ἔνθεν δὲ ὁ ποταμὸς τοιοῦτος τὸ βάθος, ὡς μηδὲ τὰ δόρατα ὑπερέχειν πει-
ρωμένοις τοῦ βάθους (Xen. An. 8, ὅ, 7). (Also κώθωνα φέρονται, ὡς ἀρύσασθαι € ἐκ
τοῦ ποταμοῦ. Aen. Cyr. 1, 2, 8, in order to. Tas ἀσπίδας μείζους ἔχουσιν ἢ ὡς ποιεῖν
ἢ ὁρᾶν τι. Aen. Cyr. 6, 4, 17.)
An accusative with infinitive, or, for the same subject, a simple
infinitive, stands after πρίν (πρότερον πρίν), when it denotes a simple
relation of time to an action which has taken place, or to one merely
conceived, which is hindered. If πρίν after a negative sentence denotes a
condition which has not yet 1 taken place (before the fulfilment of which something
will not happen), then πρὶν ἄν is used with the subjunctive by § 127, or πρίν with the
optative by § 132. Ofa condition which has already taken place, πρίν is used with
the indicative, ὃ 114. ο. R. 1; likewise where πρίν denotes merely a change w hich
has taken place: wntil. Ἡμεῖς (οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι) Μεσσήνην εἵλομεν πρὶν
Πέρσας λαβεῖν τὴν βασιλείαν καὶ κρατῆσαι τῆς ἠπείρου καὶ πρὶν οἰκι-
σθῆναί τίνας τῶν πόλεων τῶν ᾿Βλληνίδων. (Lsocr. Archid. 26). Οὕτω
τινὲς εὐπειθεῖς εἰσιν, ὥςτε, πρὶν εἰδέναι τὸ προςταττόμενον, πρότερον
πείθονται (Xen. Cyr. ἃ, ἃ, 10). Πρὶν ἔχεσθαι τὰ ἄκρα οὐδὲν ἐδεῖσθε
ion nm. Cyr. ὃ 2 12 TIorr 0 τ
Εὐρήνης (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2, 12). ολλοὶ ἀποθνήσκουσι πρότ eee πρὶν
δῆλοι γενέσθαι, οἷοι 7} eay (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 9). . Aoxeis μοι οὐδαμῶς μ᾽ ἀφήσειν
πρὶν ἂν εἴπω (Pl. Phed. 228). ‘O Κῦρος Emer τοῖς φυγάσι μὴ πρόσθεν παύσεσθαι
πρὶν αὐτοὺς καταγάγοι οἴκαδε (Xen. An. 1, 2, 2). Οὐ πρότερον ἐπαύσαντο πρὶν τὸν
᾿Αλκιβιάδην € ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπέδου μετεπέμψαντο (δοῦν. de Big. 8). Tots Kepky; ραίοις οὐχ
ἑωρῶντο αἱ νῆες, καὶ ἐθαύμαζον τοὺς Κορινθίους πρύμναν κρουομένους" πρίν τινες ἰδοντες
εἶπον, ὅτι νῆες ἐκεῖναι ἐπιπλέουσιν (Thue. 1,51; until at last some saw).
CHAP. V.] L2
Ι
3
166.1
δ
169.
o2) this form when they rather contain a continuation of the infinitive sentence, or a
4) 3
148 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [ὃ 168, 169.
Rem. For πρίν, the poets, Herodot., and sometimes Attic prose-writers, use πρὶν
7. As with πρίν, the infinitive also occurs, but more r: arely with πρότερον vB ὕστερον
{13 ᾿Απαγγελθέντος Ἱππία, ὅτε Ἵππαρχος ἀπέθανεν, ἐπὶ τοὺς ὁπλίτας πρότερον ἢ
αἰσθέσθαι εὐθὺς ἐχώρησεν. (Thuc. 6,58. Usually ἢ ἤσθοντο). (Φθάνω ἡ ἤ with ace.
with inf. for φθάνω πρίν, Xen. Cyr. 1,6, 40.) The infinitive instead of πρὶν ἄν with
the subjunctive is very rare.
a) The ace. with inf. in some places stands without a governing word, expressing
merely the thought present to the mind in the form of an indefinite sentence :
1) In commands (legal language) and communications of orders: Τοὺς Θρᾷκας
ἀπιέναι, παρεῖναι δ᾽ εἰς ἔνην (the day after to-morrow. Arist. Ach. 172. A herald is the
speaker). In laws and treaties containing several regulations, among the direct
commands expressed in the imperative are Blended accusatives with inf., which may
be said to attach themselves dependently to a term of appointment or stipulation, &e.
understood: ἐέ 2s enacted, &c. that —. (See e.g. Pl. Legg. 6, 760. Thuc. 5, 18, and
23. Dem. 24, 20.)
τ entr eaties and wishes: Ἑρμῆ ᾿μπολαῖε, τὴν γυναῖκα τὴν ἐμὴν οὕτω μ᾽ ἀπο-
δώσθαι τήν T ἐμαυτοῦ μητέρα (Arist. Ach. 816; that 1 could but so sell ἢ).
3) In exclamations of wonder at something happening [like our: to think of his
not having, &c.!]: Τοῦτον δ᾽ ὑβρίζειν; ἀναπνεῖν δέ; ὃν εἴ τις ἐᾷ ζῆν, ἀγαπᾶν ἔδει
(Dem. 21, 209). More usually y with the article prefixed: Td δὲ μηδὲ κυνῆν οἴκοθεν
ἐλθεῖν ἐμὲ τὸν ΠΡΌΣ ΤΟΣ ἔχοντα (4» ist. Nub. 268. That I should not even —!).
(Also simple infinitive : Τῆς μωρίας, τὸ Δία νομίζειν, ὄντα τηλικουτονί, Arist. Nub. 819.
For a man of his years to believe in a Zeus ἢ
4) As a simple infinitive, so occasionally an ace, with inf. is added [in a qualifying
or restrictive sense | to a statement with a ὡς or ὅσον (50 fur as —; see§ 161):
ζωγραφικὸς Θεόδωρος ; Οὐχ. ὅσον γ᾽ ἐμὲ εἰδέναι (Pl. Theat. 145). One ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ,
ὦ 1Πῶλε, τέχνη ἡ ῥητορικὴ εἶναι, ὡς πρὸς σὲ τἀληθῆ εἰρῆσθαι (Pl. Gorg. 462; af the truth
must be told you, to tell you the truth). Ἰόλην ἔλεξας, ὥς γ᾽ ἐπεικάζειν ἐμέ : (Soph. Trach.
1220). (Without os: δοκεῖν ἐμοί, ἐέ seems to me, in my opinion, Herodot., Thue. In
like manner seems to have originated the expression πολλοῦ δεῖν, μικροῦ ὃ, ὀλίγου ὃ.,
so that much, or littie, vs wanting ; i.e. far from it, almost.)
Ἦ οὖν
a) Sentences accessory to an acc. with inf. retain the usual form of the oratio
Jinita ; but relative sentences to an acc. with inf. are sometimes themselves put in
remark added for definition of some term in it, or when they are periphrastic expres-
sions with εἰμί and arelative. (In longer reports parentheses, such as ὡς δοκεῖ, ὡς
φαίνεται, also pass into the infinitive.) Ῥύγην φασὶν ἰδόντα τὸ χάσμα καὶ “θαυμάσαντα
καταβῆναι καὶ ἰδεῖν ἄλλα τε θαυμαστὰ καὶ ἵππον χαλκοῦν κοῖλον, θυρίδας ἔ ἔχοντα, καθ᾽
ἃς ἐγκύψαντα ἰδεῖν ἐνόντα νεκρόν, ὡς φαίνεσθαι, μείζω ἢ ἢ κατ᾽ ἄνθρωπον᾽ τοῦτον δὲ ἄλλο
μὲν ἔχειν οὐδέν, περὶ δὲ τῇ χειρὶ 'χρυσοῦν δακτύλιον, ὃν περιελόμενον ἐκβῆναι (BE ftep.
2,359). Καλλίας διελογίζετο, ὅσον ἑκάστους ἔδει συντελεῖν, ᾿ Axatovs μὲν πάντας καὶ
Μεγαρέας ἑξήκοντα τάλαντα, τὰς δ' ἐν Εὐβοίᾳ πόλεις ἁπάσας τετταράκοντα" εἶναι δὲ
πολλοὺς καὶ ἄλλους τῶν Ἑλλήνων, ods βούλεσθαι κοινωνεῖν τῆς συντάξεως (Asch. | 3, 965
to bear their part in the tribute). (Οὐδέν᾽ ἂν νομίζω τοσαῦτ᾽ ἀγαθὰ ποιῆσαι, OC ὃν ὑμῖν
προφήκειν ἐπιορκῆσαι. Dem, 23, 194.}}
* Οἱ Λακεδαιμένιοι δέκα ἄνδρας Σπαρτιατῶν mposeidorto τῷ “Aydt ξυμβούλους, ἄνευ
[PART II.
δ 170.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 140
δ) ΠῚ is not altogether a rare construction, especially in a long report of another
person’s narration or thoughts, for a dependent sentence (protasis) with a conjune-
tion of time (ἐπειδή, ὡς, ὅτε) to be put | in the ace. with inf., instead of the oratio
Jinita in optative or indicative : Tov οὖν Σωκράτη ᾿Αριστόδημος ἔφη κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν
πορεύεσθαι ὑπολειπόμενον καί, περιμένοντος οὗ, κελεύειν προϊέναι εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν" ἐπειδὴ
δὲ γενέσθαι ἐπὶ TH οἰκίᾳ τῇ ᾿Αγάθωνος. ἀνεῳγμένην καταλαμβάνειν τὴν θύραν --- =
εὐθὺς δ᾽ οὖν ὡς ἰδεῖν τὸν ᾿Αγάθωνα, ἢ Q, φάναι, ᾿Δριστόδημε, εἰς καλὸν ἥκεις, ὅπως
συνδειπνήσεις (P7. Conv. 174). (Δέγεται καὶ ᾿Αλκμαίωνι τῷ ᾿Αμφιάρεω, ὅτε δὴ ἀλᾶσθαι *
pace μετὰ τὸν φόνον τῆς μητρός, τὸν ᾿Απύλλω ταύτην τὴν γῆν χρῆσαι οἰκεῖν. Thue.
2, 102.) (In Herodot. and Thucyd. εἰ is likewise so put; in Herodot. also dure,
ἔστε. and ἐς 6.)
Rem. Ἐπεί in the sense for with a sentence in ace. with inf. as in ὃ 163 a. does
not come under this head.
a) An accusative with infinitive is denoted by the article as thereby
comprehended into a definite substantive term (the circumstance
that —). ‘The nominative serves to denote an existing circumstance
(the fact that —, quod) as subject : To χρόνον γεγενῆσθαι μετὰ τὴν
πρεσβείαν πολύν, δέδοικα, μή τινα λήθην ὑμῖν ἐμπεποιήκῃ (Dem. ΠΟΘ
oH εὐεργεσία. αὕτη, τὸ δι ἡμᾶς Πελοποννησίους αὐτοῖς μὴ ΠΕΣ
παρέσχεν ὑμῖν Σαμίων κόλασιν (Thue. 1, 41). The accusative is used
to denote ἃ certain relation (conceived or actual) as the object of a verb,
or with prepositions, especially διά, εἰς, and πρός: Σκοπῶν. TO τε
πλῆθος τῶν πολεμίων καὶ τὸ τὰ χωρία πάντα. ἀπολωλέναι τῇ πόλει.
Διὰ τὸ τοὺς πολεμίους προειςεληλυθέναι. To εἶναι Φίλιυππτον πάντων,
ἕνα ὄντα, κύριον πρὸς τὸ τὰ τοῦ πολέμου τάχυ καὶ κατὰ καιρὸν πράτ-
τεσθαι πολλῷ προέχει (Dem.1, 4). Even witha verb declarandi vel sentiendi
the ace. with inf, may have the aricle to denote it as something known and already
mentioned, but usually only as an apposition to a pronoun or ‘substantive : Tdde γέ
pot δοκεῖ εὖ λέγεσθαι, τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι ἡμῶν τοὺς ἐπιμελουμένους καὶ ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀνθρώπους
ἕν τῶν κτημάτων τοῖς θεοῖς εἶναι (Pl. Phed. 62).
Rem. A circumstance or relation which takes place, and of which something is
said, is also denoted by a sentence with ὅτι: Αἴτιον ἦν τοῦ ταῦτα τοῖς πολλοῖς
ἀρέσκειν, ὅτι μεμαθηκότες ἢ ἦσαν ἐργάζεσθαι καὶ φείδεσθαι (Isoer. Ar ‘cop. 2 24). Eipyke
Δημοσθένης. πρὸς ὑμᾶς παρὰ τοῦτο διαφθαρῆναι τὰ Κερσοβλέπτου πράγματα, ὅτι τῆς
πρεσβείας ὧν ἡγεμὼν ἐγὼ εἰς Θράκην ἰέναι οὐκ ἠθέλησα (Asch. 2, 89. Approxi-
mating to the sense, because). Τὰ μὲν ἄλλα ὀρθῶς ἤκουσας, ὅτι δὲ καὶ ἐμὲ οἴει εἰπεῖν
τοῦτο, παρήκουσας (Pl. Prot. 330; but as to the circumstance that —, but if,
thou thinkest —. Lat. Gram. § 398 b. R. 2).
6) The dative of the accusative with infinitive, like that of the
simple infinitive, is both used of the means and instrument or cause,
ὧν μὴ κύριον εἶναι ἀπάγειν στρατιὰν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως (Thuc. 5, 63; without whom (it
was understood that) he should have no authority, —. The ace. with inf, here ir
dependent on the notion of a decree involved in προςείλοντο).
CHAP. V.|
[3
169. |
170.
NI a
- futurum exactum of the infinitive, correspond with the same tenses
150 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [$ 171.
and also governed by particular adjectives and verbs, or by preposi-
tions: Οὐ τ ρτεῖτε ἕνεκα ταῦτ᾽ Ἢ: Φίλισπος AANA τῷ δικαιότερα
ἀξιοῦν τοὺς Θηβαίους ἢ ὑμᾶς (Dem. 2,13; but by reason of the Thebans
making a more just demand). ἸΠάντα ταῦτα οὐκ ἣν ἐμποδὼν τῷ τοὺς
(Φωκέας σώζεσθαι (Dem. 19, 73).
c) The genitive of the accusative with infinitive stands, as objective
genitive, with the same words which can take the genitive of the
simple infinitive : Οἱ πρόγονοι. τὰ πλήθη καὶ τὰς ἀκριβείας, τῶν νόμων
σημεῖον εἶναι Ξ τον τοῦ κακῶς οἰκεῖσθαι τὴν πόλιν ταύτην (15067.
Areop. 40). Οὐδ᾽ Suen τοῦ διδάσκαλόν μοί τινα γενέσθαι τῶν
ἐπ' τισταμένων (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 4). Αὕτιον ἦν τοῦ ταῦτα τοῖς πολλοῖς
ἀρέσκειν, ὅτι μεμαθηκότες ἢ ἦσαν ἐργάζεσθαι καὶ φείδεσθαι ([soer. Areop.
24. Cf. § 164 with R. 3). Ἄνευ τοῦ τοῖς πράγμασι μὴ συμφέρειν τὸ
ψήφισμα οὐδὲ ies δόξαν συμφέρει τῇ πόλει τοιοῦτον οὐδὲν ἐψηφισμένῃ
PRUE (Dem. 23,138). ‘O ὑπὲρ τοῦ ταῦτα μὴ γενέσθαι ἀγών (Dem.
18, 201—the str nggle that this should not take place; the struggle to
prevent it).
Rem. The genitive of an acc. with inf. stands now and then (especially 1 in
negation) 1 in the sense 77) 07" der that, to the intent that (otherwise ἕνεκα) : ᾿Ετειχίσθη
᾿Αταλάντη ὑπ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων ἡ ἐπὶ Δοκροῖς τοῖς ᾿Οπουντίοις νῆσος, τοῦ μὴ λῃστὰς
ἐκπλεόντας ἐκ τῆς Λοκρίδος κακουργεῖν τὴν “Ἑὔβοιαν (Thue. 2, 32). Φοβοῦμαι διελέγ-
χειν σε, μή με ὑπολάβῃς οὐ πρὸς τὸ πρᾶγμα ΡΣ τς λέγειν. τοῦ καταφανὲς
γενέσθαι, ἀλλὰ πρὸς σέ (Pl. Gorg. 457). (Simple infinitive: Ὃ Χαλκιδεὺς καὶ ὁ
᾿Αλκιβιάδης πλέοντες. ὅσοις ἐπιτύχοιεν, ξυνελάμβανον, τοῦ μὴ ἐξάγγελτοι γενέσθαι,
Thue. 8,14; that the tidings of their approach might be carried.) (The geni- ~
tive, it seems, must be explained from § 65, b.)
(The Tenses of the Infinitive.) a) The present, imperfect, future, and
in the indicative (especially with the same distinction of the perfect ©
and the narrative aorist). Πρὸς τῷ τῆς εἰρήνης αἴτιος γεγενῆσθαι
καὶ ἄλλα πολλὰ τὴν πόλιν ἠδίκηκας (Dem. 18,22). Otpas μὲν εἰρηκέναι
τι καὶ τοιοῦτον, οὐ μὴν ἀλλ᾽ ἔτι πλείω καὶ σαφέστερον “πειράσομαι δια-
λεχθῆναι (Isocr. Areop. 36). Δυοῖν ἢ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ταῦτα πεπράξεσθαί
ΤῊΣ (Dem. 19, 74).
Rem. 1. The infinitive of the perfect is sometimes put where the present might
have been used, to denote the complete accomplishment of the action, or the state —
thereby produced, especially after verbs of willing : Βούλομαι ἀγῶνί μοι καὶ
δικαστηρίῳ διωρίσθαι παρ᾽ ὑμῖν, ὅτι τἀναντία ἐμοὶ καὶ τούτοις πέπρακται (Dem. 19.
223 ; LT wish it decided and ἘΠ —). Ὃ κάμνων ἀξιοῖ παρὰ τοῦ ἰατροῦ καύσει
καὶ τομῇ χρησάμενος ἀπηλλάχθαι τοῦ νοσήματος (Pl. Rep. ὁ, 406). ᾿Εθέλω ὑμᾶς ᾿
συντῆξαι καὶ συμφῦσαι εἰς τὸ αὐτό, ὥςτε δύ᾽ ὄντας ἕνα γεγονέναι καί. ἔως ἂν ζῆτε, ὡς
ἕνα ὄντα κοινῇ ἀμφοτέρους ζῆν (Pl. Conv. 192). Εἶπον οἱ ἄνδρες τὴν θύραν κεκλεῖ-
σθαι (Xen. Hell. 5, 4,7; that the door should be shut). (Βούλομαι, αἱροῦμαι, δεῖ,
μέλλω τεθνάναι for θνήσκειν or θανεῖν.)
[PART II.
ἃ 171.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 151
Rem. 2. After the verbs denoting hope and surmise, promise and undertaking,
the future is used both in the simple inf. and in the acc. with inf.: Ἐλπίδας ἔχω
καὶ σὲ βουλήσεσθαι φίλον ἡμῖν εἶναι (Xen. An. 2, 5, 12). Ὑπισχνοῦμαι χρυσῆν
εἰκόνα ἀναθήσειν (Pl. Phed. 235). Ὥμοσαν ἢ μὴν βοηθήσειν. Ὃ Νυμφόδωρος τὸν
ἐπὶ Θράκης πόλεμον ὑπεδέχετο καταλύσειν (Το. 2, 29). Occasionally, however,
the present is used, where the notion of future time is not meant to be prominent :
‘Quoddyets (ξυνέθου ἡμῖν) κατὰ τοὺς νύμους πολιτεύεσθαι (PL. Crito,52). The verbs
of hoping and surmising are also followed by the inf. of the aorist with ay, see
§ 173. (Of the aorist without ἄν, see § 172 a. R.)?
Rem. 3. Occasionally (especially in Thucydides) the inf. of the future is put
instead of the present after the verbs named in ὃ 145, 146 (e. g. δύναμαι, διανοοῦ-
pat, δέομαι, πείθω, &e.), to mark expressly, that the infinitive action is later and
impending : Οἱ Συρακούσιοι τὸ στόμα ταῦ λιμένος διενοοῦντο κλήσειν (Thue. 7, 56).
Οἱ Κορίνθιοι ἐδεήθησαν τῶν Μεγαρέων ναυσὶ σφᾶς ξυμπροπέμψειν (Thue. 1, 27).
(That the shad7, by which in English we denote what is matter of will, condition,
endeavour, is not expressed by the inf. of the future, but by the construction, has
been already noted, ὃ 164, § 166 b, and § 170 c.)
6) After the prateritum of a verb declarandi vel sentiendi, the present,
perfect, and future infinitive are put of that which at the time of the
principal verb was: present, past, or future, consequently as iper-
fectum, plusquamperf., and futurum in preterito: Οὐκ ἔφασαν τὰς ναῦς
παρεῖναι. Τοὺς στρατιώτας ἥξειν ἐνόμιζον. “Αρμόδιος καὶ ᾿Αριστο-
γείτων ἐνόμισαν μεμηνῦσθαι (Thuc. 6,57). “ApoBos ὡμολόγε: κεκομί-
σθαι τὴν προῖκα (Dem. 27, 14.; to have received = that he had received
the dowry). (Wyeito τὴν μεγίστην πίστιν ἔσεσθαι δεδωκώς. 5007.
Antid, 125.)
Rem. 1. Sometimes, especially after ἔφην, the inf. present is used even of a
more remote past time, where otherwise the aorist is used (see the following §) to
denote continuance, state, and recurrence (answering to the imperfect in the
oratio recta): Mera ταῦτα ᾿Αριστόδημος ἔφη σφᾶς μὲν δειπνεῖν, τὸν δὲ Σωκράτη οὐκ
εἰςιέναι: τὸν οὖν ᾿Αγάθωνα πολλάκις κελεύειν μεταπέμψασθαι τὸν Σωκράτη, — δὲ οὐκ
ἐᾶν (Pl. Conv. 175 = ἐδειπνοῦμεν --- εἰφήει — ἐκέλευεν — εἴων). Συντυχεῖν
ἔφη Αἰσχίνης ᾿Ατρεστίδᾳ παρὰ Φιλίππου πορευομένῳ καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ γύναια καὶ
παιδάρια ὡς τριάκοντα βαδίζειν, αὐτὸς δὲ θαυμάσας ἐρέσθαι τινὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων,
Ψ, ΒΩ , > ἊΝ , a e ? >? “ . ~ ,ὔ > ’
τίς ἄνθρωπός ἐστι καὶ τίς ὄχλος ὁ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ (Dem. 19, 305 = συνέτυχον --- ἐβάδιζεν
— ἠρόμην).
Rem. 2. Even after the present (the future or aorist without preterite significa-
tion, also the perfect) of verbs declarandi vel sentiendi the inf. present 15 used
(simply and in ace. with inf.) with the sense of past time (instead of the aorist, -
(see the following §), to denote, like the imperfect, continuance, state, or recur-
rence: Δακεδαιμονίους φασὶν ἐν Πλαταιαῖς. ἐπειδὴ πρὸς τοῖς γεῤῥοφόροις ἐγένοντο,
οὐκ ἐθέλειν μένοντας πρὸς αὐτοὺς μάχεσθαι, ἀλλὰ φεύγειν, ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐλύθησαν αἱ
τάξεις τῶν ἹΤερσῶν, ἀναστρεφομένους ὥςπερ ἱππέας μάχεσθαι καὶ οὕτω νικῆσαι τὴν
π᾿ ee
ΟΠ οὐκ ἔφη πορεύεσθαι (Xen. An. 1, 3, 7), because, οὐ πορεύομαι, Tam not going,
may be used as = I will not go.
CHAP. V.]
\
We:
17
152 The Infinitive and its Tenses. [§ 172.
ἐκεῖ μάχην (Pl. Lach. 191 = ἤθελον --- ἔφευγον -- “ἐμάχοντο -- ἐνίκησαν). Δύξομεν
τὸν παρελθόντα χρόνον ἀνα ἡ τ οι καὶ τὴν μὲν φύσιν ὅμοιοι τοῖς ἄλλοις εἶναι,
ταῖς δὲ σεμνότησιν πεπλασμέναις κεχρῆσθαι (1506). Arechid 98; people will say of'us:
ἠλαζονεύοντο). “Οἶμαι; καὶ οἴκοι ἡμᾶς τούτου ἕνεκεν ἀσκεῖν καὶ γαστρὸς κρείττους εἶναι
καὶ κερδέων a ἀκαίρων, ἵν᾽, εἴ τι δέοι, δυναίμεθα αὐτοῖς συμφόρως χρῆσθαι (Xen. Cyr. 4,
2,45. Nota aoKovper, but ἠσκοῦμεν, as ἵνα δυναίμεθα shows). Ti © οἱ Θετταλοί;
ap οἴεσθε, ὅτε τοὺς τυράννους Φίλιππος ἐξέβαλλε, προςδοκᾶν τὴν καθεστῶσαν νῦν
δεκαδαρχίαν ἔσεσθαι; (Dem. 6, 22 = οὐ προςεδύκων.)
a) The aorist infinitive (without ἄν) has the signification of a pre-
teritum, as in the indicative, when it is governed by a verb declarandi
vel sentiendi, or by a phrase of the same signification, and likewise in
the ace. with inf. when it has the article, “except where it serves to
denote a purpose: Ilatpos λέγεται ὁ Κῦρος γενέσθαι, Καμβύσου (Xen.
(γ»..1. ὁ, 1). ἸΤ]αλαιότατοι λέγονται ἐν μέρει τινὶ τῆς Σικελίας Κύκλωπες
οἰκῆσαι (Zhuc. 6, 2). ᾿Αθηναίων τὸ πλῆθος ᾿ἣ Ἵππαρχον οἴονται ὑφ᾽
“Αρμοδίου καὶ ᾿Αριστογείτονος τύραννον ὄντα ἀποθανεῖν (Thue. 1, 20).
Peake: ἐξαρνεῖται μὴ λαβεῖν τὴν προῖκα (Dem. 27, 10). Διετεθρύλλητο, ὡς φαίη
Σωκράτης, τὸ δαιμύνιον ἑαυτῷ σημαίνειν: ὅθεν δὴ καὶ βόλιστα μοι δοκοῦσιν αὐτὸν
αἰτιάσασθαι καινὰ δαιμύνια εἰςφέρειν (Xen. Mem. 1, 1,2 2; to have accused him).
To μηδεμίαν τῶν πόλεων ἁλῶναι πολιορκίᾳ, μέγιστόν ἐστι σημεῖον τοῦ
διὰ τούτους πεισθέντας τοὺς Φωκέας ταῦτα παθεῖν (Dem. 19, 61)".
Therefore, after a preteritum of such a verb, the aorist acquires
the signification of a more remote past (as aorist) : ᾿Επύαξα ἐλέγετο
Κύρῳ δοῦναι πολλὰ χρήματα (Xen. An. 1, 2, 12; was said to have
given = it was said that she had given ; ἐλέγετο, ὅτε ἔδωκεν by § 130 b.
R. 2, not ἐδεδώκει). Ot Καμαριναῖοι ὕποπτοι τοῖς Συρακουσίοις ἦσαν
(were suspected by the 8.), μὴ προθύμως σφίσι μηδ᾽ ἐπὶ τὴν πρώτην
μάχην πέμψαι ἃ ἔπεμψαν (Lhuc. 6, 75; the help which they had sent)’.
Rem. In some passages, ἐλπίζειν, ἐλπίς ἐστιν, ev ἐλπίδι εἰμί, ἐλπίδα παρέχω,
προςδοκῶ, also δοκῶ, εἰκός (ἐστιν), consequently the expressions which directiy
denote an expectation, take the inf. aorist (without ἄν) w ithout _ preterite significa-
tion, instead of the future or aorist with dv: ΓἌσμενοι ἐκεῖσε tact, ot ἀφικομένοις
ἐλπίς ἐστιν, οὗ διὰ βίου ἤρων, τυχεῖν (Pl. Phed. 57). Βρασίδας ἔλεγεν ev ἐλπίδι
εἶναι ἀναλαβεῖν Νίσαιαν (Lhue. A, 70). Μῶρος (εἶ), εἰ δοκεῖς με τλῆναι σὴν καθαι-
μάξαι δέρην (Hur. Or. 1527). Οὐκ εἰκός, ἐς νῆσον τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους ἡμῶν vav-
κρατύρων ὄντων περαιωθῆναι (Thuc. ὅ, 109). There are passages here and there
in the common editions, where other verbs declarandi vel sentiendi are followed by
* Where the ace. with inf. with the article denotes a purpose (e. g. after ἐπιμελοῦ-
μαι, after ὑ ὑπέρ or for ἐ ἕνεκα, § 170 c. R.) the aorist is put, without preterite significa-
tion: Ὃ ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ γενέσθαι ταῦτα ἀγών (Dem. 18, 201). Οὐδ᾽ renee τοῦ
ARETE) τινά μοι γενέσθαι (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 4).
᾿Αντειπεῖν τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις ἢ λοιδορήσασθαι δεινότερον ἐνόμιζον ἢ νῦν περὶ τοὺς
γονέας ἐξαμαρτεῖν (Lsocr.). Here ἀντειπεῖν, ὅο., are not governed as verbs by
ἐνόμιζον, but stand as the subject.
[PART II.
δ 173.] The Infinitive and its Tenses. 153
an aorist inf. without ἄν in future sense (6. g. νομίζω κρατῆσαι for κρατήσειν or
κρατῆσαι ἄν, ἔφη δέξασθαι), but these undoubtedly rest upon a false reading, either
ἄν having been accidentally omitted, or the aorist written by mistake for the future
(δέξασθαι for δέξεσθαι).
6) In all other connexions, the aorist infinitive is without preterite
meaning, and differs from the present only as denoting a single
transient action, as in the subjunctive and partly in the optative ; and
even this secondary distinction in many cases falls away, inasmuch
as after the verbs named in § 145, 146, when these as governing
verbs are in the aorist, usually (without any kind of secondary dis-
tinction) the aorist infinitive is put, rarely the present, viz. where
duration, or the notion in its generality is to be expressed. (but after
present and future both present and aorist) : Αἰἱρετώτερόν ἐστι καλῶς
ἀποθανεῖν ἢ Shy αἰσχρῶς (Lsocr. Paneg. 95. The dying as momen-
tary, life as duration): Ἢ γεωργία μαθεῖν τε ῥάστη Rigen ot
ἡδίστη ἐργάξεσθαι (Xen. (con. 6, Ὁ. Μαθεῖν, transient). Οἱ Ἔπι-
δάμνιοι ἐδέοντο τῶν Κερκυραίων μὴ σφᾶς περιορᾶν φθειρομένους ἀλλὰ
τούς τε φεύγοντας ξυναλλάξαι σφίσι καὶ τὸν τῶν βαρβάρων πόλεμον
καταλῦσαι (Thuc. 1, 34, ἹΤ]εριορᾶν generally, ξυναλλάξαι and καταλῦ-
σαι of single acts). ἸΙαρῆλθε ἸΠ]ερικλῆς ὁ ἘΞανθίππου, ἀνὴρ λέγειν καὶ
πράττειν ieee (Thuc. 1, 139; generally). Σωκράτην ἴσως
τινὲς νομίζουσι προτρέψασθαι μὲν ἀνθρώπους ἐπ᾿ ἀρετὴν κράτιστον
γεγονέναι, προαγαγεῖν δ᾽ ἐπ᾽ αὐτὴν οὐχ ἱκανόν (Xen. Mem. 1, 4, 1.
The individual instances are in his thoug ehts). Βούλομαι Soudan Kab
διελθεῖν, ὅσον αὕτη ἡ πολιτεία τῆς τότε διήνεγκεν (1500). Areop. 62.
Transient object). Ὅσα ἐπυθόμεθα περὶ Κύρου, πειρασόμεθα δηλῶσαι
(Xen. Cyr. 1, 1, 6). Βὔχοντο Ξενίαν καὶ Ἰ]ασίωνα ληφθῆναι (Xen,
An. a 4, (Oe Φθησόμεθα, πρὶν τοὺς πολεμίους συλλεγῆναι, ἀναβάντες
εἰς τὰ ὄρη (Xen. Cyr. 3, 2, 4). Οὕτω σφόδρ᾽ ἠπείχθησαν μετασχεῖν
τῶν κινδύνων (5067. Paneg. 87). Αἱ ἐκ τῆς Κορίνθου νῆες ἠναγκά-
σθησαν ναυμαχῆσαι πρὸς Φορμίωνα (Zhue. 2, 89. Shortly afterwards:
οὕτω δὴ ἀναγκάζονται ναυμαχεῖν κατὰ μέσον τὸν πορθμόν). Ody εἷλό-
μην ῥᾳθυμεῖν (Lsocr. Paneg. 3; of the usual manner of lite). Opxeia ba
ἔμαθον, ποῦ ὀρχήσασθαι, of the art om general. Δημοσθένης ἃ ὡς ἅπαξ ἐταράχθη. οὐδ᾽
ἀναλαβεῖν αὑτὸν ἠδυνήθη, PG a SH ἐπιχειρήσας λέγειν ταὐτὸν ἔπαθεν (2 Ποῆ.
2, 35, to speak ; εἰπεῖν τι, to say something) }.
(Infinitive with dv.) The present and aorist infinitive are used with
av to denote what rests on a merely assumed condition, in the
same manner as the indicative and optative, so that the inf. present
with ἄν answers both to the indic. imperfect and the optat. present
1 Of the inf. with μέλλω, see ὃ 116.
- CHAP. ν.]
[§
Ἐ72
173.
154 The Infinitive and 115 Tenses. [ὃ 173.
[$ with ἄν, the inf. aorist with ἄν both to indie. and optat. of aorist
173-] with ἄν. The inf. with ἄν corresponds likewise with the merely
potential and dubitative optative with ἄν (ὃ 136), and the inf. aorist
with ἄν stands therefore after verbs declarandi et sentiendi (hope,
surmise) frequently as a modest expression, instead of the future
(often coupled with a future); sometimes also, especially of some-
thing in the future with duration, the present inf. with av.—The
perfect infinitive with ἄν is used in the not frequent cases where the
plusquamperf. indie. or perfect optative is put with ἄν ( 117 «πᾶ
135, 136). Ed ὑμᾶς ἐβουλόμεθα ἀπολέσαι, χωρίων ἐπιτηδείων ὑμῖν
ἐπιτίθεσθαι ἀπορεῖν ἄν σοι δοκοῦμεν ; (Xen. An, 2, 5, 18 = ἠἡποροῦμεν
ἄν ;)— Αθυμῶ, ὅτι μοι δοκεῖ τὰς τῶν θεῶν εὐεργεσίας οὐδ᾽ ἂν εἷς ποτε
ἀνθρώπων ἀξίαις χάρισιν ἀμείβεσθαι (Xen. Mem. 4, 3, 15 τε οὐδ᾽ ἂν
εἷς ἀμείβοιτο, potentially). Oies ἂν τοὺς θεοὺς τοῖς ἀνθρώποις δόξαν
ἐμφῦσαι, ὡς ἱκανοί εἰσιν (οἱ θεοὶ) εὖ καὶ κακῶς ποιεῖν, εἰ μὴ δυνατοὶ ἦσαν,
καὶ τοὺς ἀνθρώπους ἐξαπατωμένους τὸν πάντα χρόνον οὐδέποτ᾽ ἂν
αἰσθέσθαι; (Xen. Mem. 1, 4, 10 -Ξ- ᾿Ἑνέφυσαν ἂν --- οὐδέποτε av
ἤσθοντο ;)—Apa μικρὰ ἀναλῶσαι ἂν τοῦ μὴ τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν οἱ πλού- —
σιοι δοκοῦσιν; (Dem. 18, 107 = Μικρὰ ἂν ἀνάλωσαν ; think ye they —
would have sacrificed little, not to —?) Δοκεῖτέ μοι πολὺ βέλτιον ἂν
περὶ τοῦ πολέμου βουλεύσασθαι, εἰ τὸν τόπον τῆς χώρας, πρὸς ἣν πολε- —
μεῖτε, ἐνθυμηθείητε (Dem. 4, 51 = βουλεύσαισθε ἄν). Δοκῶ δεκάκις —
ἂν κατὰ τῆς γῆς καταδῦναι ἥδιον ἢ ὀφθῆναι οὕτω ταπεινός (Xen. Cyr. —
5, 5, 9 -- Ἥδιον ἂν ἀποθάνοιμι ἢ ὀφθείην ---). Δημοσθένης τὴν τάξιν
τοῦ πρῶτος λέγειν οὐκ ἂν ἔφη παραλιπεῖν οὐδ᾽ ἐπιτρέψειν τινὶ
προκαταλαβεῖν τὰ τοῦ Φιλίππου ὦτα (A’sch. 2,108). Οἱ “Axapvaves
ἠξίουν Δημοσθένην ἀποτειχίζειν τοὺς Λευκαδίους, νομίζοντες ῥᾳδίως γ᾽
ἂν ἐκπολιορκῆσαι πόλεώς TE ἀεί σφισι πολεμίας ἀπαλλαγῆναι (Thue. 3,
94). Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι οὐ τοσοῦτον ἤλπιζον ἐκπεσεῖν ἂν Llepixdéa,
ὅσον διαβολὴν οἴσειν αὐτῷ πρὸς τὴν πόλιν (Thuc. 1, 127). Kopw-
θιοι καὶ ᾿Αργεῖοι, εἰ Téyea σφισι προςγένοιτο, ἐνόμιζον ἅπασαν ἂν ἔχειν
Πελοπόννησον (Thue. 5, 32) .—Hyodpar, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, οὐδ᾽ εἰ ἀπολογου-.
μένων τούτων μὴ ἐθελήσαντες ἀκοῦσαι καταψηφισάμενοι τῶν ἐσχάτων τιμήσαιτε, οὐκ ἂν
ἀκρίτους αὐτοὺς ἀπολωλέναι, ἀλλὰ τὴν προςήκουσαν δίκην δεδωκέναι (Lys. 27,8. Οὐκ.
ἂν ἄκριτοι ἀπολώλεσαν---, tt could not have been said that they perished—). Τοὺς ταῦτα,
ἀγνοοῦντας Σωκράτης ἀνδραποδώδεις ἂν δικαίως κεκλῆσθαι ἡγεῖτο (Xen. Mem. 1, 1, 163
from κέκλημαι, I am called). (With the inf. with article : Tas ἔχεις πρὸς τὸ ἐθέλειν ἂν
ἰέναι ἄκλητος ἐπὶ δεῖπνον; Pl. Conv. 174. Οὐδεὶς ἀντεῖπε διὰ τὸ μὴ ἀνασχέσθαι ἂν THY —
ἐκκλησίαν, Xen. An. 1, 4,20; because the assembly would not have put up τοἱέλ 11.)
Rem. 1. The ἄν belonging to the inf. is often detached from it, and placed earlier
in the sentence (cf. § 139, b); in this way it comes not unfrequently to stand
with the governing verb (οἴει ἄν, οὐκ ἄν μοι δοκῶ, Ke.) : Ἴσθι ἀνόητος ὦν, εἰ οἴει
ἂν τὴν ὑμετέραν ἀρετὴν περιγενέσθαι τῆς βασιλέως δυνάμεως (Aen. a 2, 1, dag
PART II,
δ᾽ 174:} The Participle. 155
cf. above, Xen. Mem. 1, 4,16). ᾿Ἐμοὶ μὲν οὐδὲν ἂν δοκεῖ τούτου μεῖζον εὑρεθῆναι
τεκμήριον (Dem. 81, 5). Then sometimes ἄν is repeated with the inf. itself, and
. ΓΑ Β ij 3 Ἃ ΄, ΕΣ
so stands twice: Δοκεῖς ἂν ἢ πόλιν ἢ στρατόπεδον ἢ λῃστὰς ἢ κλέπτας ἢ ἄλλο τι
ἔθνος, ὅσα κοινῇ ἐπί τι ἔρχεται ἀδίκως, πρᾶξαι ἄν τι δύνασθαι, εἰ ἀδικοῖεν ἀλλη-
Nous; (Pl. πέρ. ἃ, 351. Cf. § 139 b.)}
Rem. 2. "Ἂν with the fut. inf. in Attic writers, must be regarded as an error of
the editions, the ἄν being either improperly inserted, or the aorist changed by
mistake into the future.
(ΕΓ Ρ ΓΙ ΝΜ
The Participle.
a) A participte in Greek is partly used by way of apposition, to
denote the relation of time and other circumstances in the principal
sentence, partly in nearer connexion with the principal verb, as part
of the predicate ; likewise by way of apposition to the subject or object
(δείκνυμέ τινα ποιοῦντά τι), partly as simple attributive, or, with the
article, as a substantive instead of a relative circumlocution.
6) To denote the relation of time in the principal sentence, its man-
ner or other circumstances, such as cause, occasion, means, condt-
tion, purpose, opposition (by the assignment of a simultaneous, pre-
ceding, or subsequent action belonging to some substantive term
contained in the sentence), the participles in Greek have a wide range,
inasmuch as the language has participles for all the principal tenses
and for the narrative aorist, both active and passive: Ταῦτα εἰπὼν
ἀπήειν. Ταῦτα λέγοντα αὐτὸν οἱ στρατιῶται καταβαίνειν ἐκέλευον.
᾿Απήντησα Φιλίππῳ ἀπιόντι ἤδη. Ἱππίας τρία ἔτη τυραννεύσας ἐξέπεσε
τῆς ἀρχῆς. Σωκράτης προείλετο μᾶλλον τοῖς νόμοις ἐμμένων ἀποθα-
νεῖν ἢ παρανομῶν ζῆν (Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 4). Κῦρος παραγγέλλει
Κλεάρχῳ λαβόντι ἥκειν ὅσον ἣν αὐτῷ στράτευμα (Xen. An. 1, 2, 1).
Τισσαφέρνης πορεύεται ὡς βασιλέα ἱππέας ἔχων ὡς πεντακοσίους (Xen.
4η.1, 3, 4. So, frequently, ἔχων, ἄγων, φέρων, where in English
we should say with: "Od0n ξίφος ἔχων). Καλὸς καὶ ἀγαθὸς νομι-
ζόμενος πάντα ῥᾷον διαπράξῃ. Tod κέρδους ἀπεσχόμην, αἰσχρὸν νομί-
ov. Διὰ τί γιγνώσκων ὁ ἄνθρωπος τὰ κακὰ ὅτι κακά ἐστιν, ὅμως αὐτὰ
ποιεῖ; ‘Hrte@pevos ὑπὸ τῆς ἡδονῆς (Ρί. Prot. δῦ5). Οἴει σὺ ΓΑλκηστιν
ὑπὲρ ᾿Αδμήτου ἀποθανεῖν ἄν, μὴ οἰομένην ἀθάνατον μνήμην ἀρετῆς
περὶ ἑαυτῆς ἔσεσθαι; (Pl. Conv. 208). ἸΠαρελήλυθα συμβουλεύσων
1”Ay belonging to an infinitive understood : ἾΑρ᾽ ἂν ὀλίγα τοιαῦτα ἐν τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ
αὐτὸν διαπράξασθαι προςδοκῶτε ; ᾿Εγὼ μὲν γὰρ οὐκ ἂν οἶμαι (Lys. 27,1. Cf. § 199 ὁ).
CHAP. VI. |
[§
173:
174:
(424)
[3
174.]
156 The Participle. [ὃ 175.
ὑμῖν (Isoer. Archid. 1). Οἱ ξύμμαχοι πρέσβεις ἐς mrs i ἔπεμ-
ψαν Λύσανδρον αἰτήσοντας ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς (Xen. Hell. 2, 1, 6). Πείθε-
σθαι χρὴ τῇ πατρίδι κἂν εἰς πόλεμον ἄγη τρωθησόμενον ἢ ἢ ἀποθανού- —
μενον 7. Cu: bila ,(λλκιβιάδης ἀποκρινάμενος αὐτοῖς ἀπέπεμψεν, ὅτι τοὺς
πεντακισχιλίους οὐ κωλύει ἄρχειν, Thuc. 8, 80. ᾿Ανόητον ἐπὶ τοιούτους ἰέναι, ὧν κρα-
τήσας μὴ κατασχήσει τις, Thuc. 6, 11. The common object attached to the parti-
ciple as the nearest or first verb.)
Rem. The position, relation, or circumstances in which a person (or_thing)
is during an action, which in English is commonly expressed by when, is denoted
in Greek by ὦν, or the participle of a special verb (unless the purpose and qua-
lity in which the person appears in the action is to be denoted, in which case by
§ 19, the apposition is used without participle) : Ταῦτα ΠΣ ἔτι παῖς ὦν. ᾿᾽Απ-
εδήμουν τριηραρχῶν. Ἐπὶ τοιήνδε οὖσαν Σικελίαν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι στρατεύειν ὥρμηντο
(Thue. 6, 0). Ὧν is also added with explanatory appositions | and such as assign
the occasion or inducement: Ὃ πατήρ.. ὅτ᾽ ἤμελλε τελευτᾶν, τὴν οὐσίαν ἐνεχείρισεν
᾿Αφόβῳ τε καὶ Δημοφῶντι τῷ Δήμωνος υἱεῖ, ἀδελφιδοῖν 6 ὄντοιν (Dem. 27, 4; being, or,
they being ; who were —). Oi Θηβαῖοι ἠνώχλουν μὲν ταῖς πόλεσι ταῖς ἐν Πελοπον-
νήσῳ, Θετταλίαν δ᾽ ἐτύλμων καταδουλοῦσθαι, Μεγαρεῦσι δέ, ὁμόροις οὖσιν, ἠπείλουν
(Isoer. Phil. 53).
The relation of the participle to the principal action is more exactly denoted by
the ao of certain adverbs, partly to the principal verb, partly to the participle
itse
a) By τότε (τότε ἤδη), εἶτα. ἔπειτα (τηνικαῦτα), οὕτως, standing after the participle
and before the principal verb, it is marked with emphasis that the principal action
takes place only through, or not until after, the action expressed by the participle
(as consequence thereof) : ἔπειτα, εἶτα sometimes also denotes an antithesis (then,
Sor all that), especially in expr essions of censure and surprise : Ὃ ᾿Αναξίβιος τὸν Bevo-
ΠΟ τ ἐκέλευσε συνδιαβάντα τὸν "ΕἙλλήςποντον ἔπειτα οὕτως ἀπαλλάττεσθαι (Xen. An.
7,1,4; to go with him over the H., and then (not sooner) withdraw). Δέομαι᾽ ὑμῶν
dxpoucapevous διὰ τέλους τῆς πολ σῖτος τότε ἤδη ψηφί (ζεσθαι τοῦθ᾽ ὅ, τι ἂν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς
ἄριστον νομίζητε. εἶναι (Andoe. 1, 9). —Acwa μέντ᾽ ἂν πάθοις, ὦ βέλτιστε, εἰ ᾿Αθήναζε ᾿
ἀφικόμενος, οὗ τῆς Ἑλλάδος πλείστη ἐστὶν ἐξουσία τοῦ λέγειν, ἔπειτα σὺ ἐνταῦθα τούτου —
μόνος. ἀτυχήσαις (PL. Giorg. 401). (Kara for simple εἶτα : "Edy ῥητορικὸς γενύμενύς
τις Kata ταύτῃ τῇ δυνάμει καὶ τῇ τέχνῃ ἀδικῇ, οὐ τὸν διδάξαντα δεῖ μισεῖν, Pl. Gorg.
457.)
6) By ἅμα and μεταξύ it is denoted that the main action goes on with and during
(in the midst of) the action of the participle. The ΕΙΣ in point of signification,
belong, in the first instance, to the leading verb, but in the Greek idiom they usually
attach themselves more closely to the participle (Gua i ἰών, μεταξὺ ἰών, going the while,
in the midst of his going, as he goes): “O Κῦρος οὐ μόνον τῷ πορεύεσθαι τὴν ὁδὸν προς-
εἴχε τὸν νοῦν, ἀλλ᾽ ἅμα προϊὼν ἐπεσκοπεῖτο, εἴ τι δυνατὸν εἴη τοὺς πολεμίους ἀσθενεστέ- y
ρους ποιεῖν (Xen. Cyr. 5,2, 22; as he went on, he considered at the same time). To
τοῦ θεοῦ σημεῖον ἐν ters λόγοις πολλαχοῦ μ᾽ ἐπέσχε λέγοντα μεταξύ (Pl. Apol. 40;
in the midst of my speaking). So εὐθὺς yevspevor, ἀποβεβηκύτες, directly they were
born, immediately after landing.
¢) “Are (ἅτε δή), οἷον, ota δή with the participle denote that this assigns the
ground or cause (as being, Ke. = because): Ὃ Κῦρος, ἅτε παῖς ὧν καὶ φιλόκαλος καὶ
[PART II.
§ 176.] The Participle. 157
φιλότιμος, ἥδετο τῇ στολῇ (Xen. Cyr.1, 3,3). Mada χαλεπῶς πορευόμενοι of Λακεδαι-
povot, οἷα δὴ ἐν νυκτί τε καὶ ἐν φόβῳ ἀπιόντες, εἰς Αἰγύσθενα τῆς Μεγαρικῆς ἀφικνοῦν-
ται (Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 26). (In Herodotus also ὥςτε.) Sometimes ὥν in an apposi-
tion with dre, οἷα δή, ὡς is omitted: Τοὺς τῆς τραγῳδίας ποιητὰς eis τὴν πολιτείαν οὐ
παραδεξόμεθα ἅτε τυραννίδος ὑμνητάς (Pl. Rep. 8,568). Πάντες οἱ τοῦτο ἐπιτηδεύοντες
ἄκοντες ἐπιτηδεύουσιν ὡς ἀναγκαῖον ἀλλ᾽ οὐχ ὡς ἀγαθόν (Pl. Rep. 2, 968).
d) ‘Qs with the participle denotes the thought, opinion,
pretext, in, with, or under which the action is done: ᾿Αγανακτοῦσιν ὡς μεγάλων
τινῶν ἀπεστερημένοι (Pl. Rep. 1,329 = thinking themselves deprived). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
τὸν Ilepixdea ἐν αἰτίᾳ εἶχον ὡς πείσαντα σφᾶς πολεμεῖν καὶ Ov ἐκεῖνον ταῖς ξυμφο-
pais περιπεπτωκότες (Thuc. 2,59). Μῦθόν τινα Παρμενίδης φαίνεταί μοι διηγεῖσθαι
παισὶν ὡς οὖσιν ἡμῖν (Pl. Soph. 242; to children, as if we were such ; tous as if we
were children). ᾿Αρταξέρξης συλλαμβάνει Κῦρον ὡς ἀποκτενῶν (Xen. An. 9) ΟΣ
Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ἐποιοῦντο ὡς ῥᾳδίως ληψόμενοι βίᾳ τὸ χωρίον (Thue. 4, 5).
(Of the omission of ὦν, see under ὁ.)
supposition, purpose,
Rem. In denoting the purpose after verbs of motion (εἶμι, ἥκω, ἔρχομαι, πάρειμι,
πέμπω, ἄγω, and more special verbs of this kind, such as ἀποπλέω)
participle is used. See the examples, ὃ 174. (Ἦια ἐρῶν,
(lapuckevd(opat ὡς ἀπιών, Xen. Cyr.1, 3,13, and “Imma
πηλακιῶν τὸν “Δρμόδιον, Thuc. 6, 54. Also w
προςβάλλειν τῇ πόλει (Xen. Hell. 3, 1,17);
Cyr. 7, 5, 12). }
é) An antithesis is denoted by καίπερ (although, albeit) or simple καί (even) before
the participle (poetically πέρ or πὲρ ἔμπης after the participle), with sometimes ὅμως
(nevertheless) before the principal verb: Κἂν σύ, καίπερ οὕτω σοφὸς ὦν, εἴ τίς σε
διδάξειεν, ὃ μὴ τυγχάνεις ἐπιστάμενος, βελτίων ἂν γένοιο (PL. Prot. 318). Sometimes
ὅμως in connexion with καί attaches itself more nearly to the participle, although in
strictness it belongs to the principal verb (like ἅμα and μεταξύ, see under δ): Τῇ
ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ τετρακόσιοι ἐς τὸ βουλευτήριον ὅμως καὶ τεθορυβημένοι ξυνελέγοντο (Thuc.
8, 99). (Ὧν with καίπερ omitted: Τιγνώσκω σαφῶς, καίπερ σκοτεινός,
τήν γε σὴν
αὐδὴν ὅμως, Soph. did. BR. 1326.)}
the simple
I was going to say.)
PXOS παρεσκευάζετο προ-
ith the infinitive: παρεσκευάζετο
παρασκευαζόμενος πολιορκήσειν (Xen.
Of the manner in which a defining circumstance is annexed by means of the par-
ticiple, it is to be observed further :
a) A participle denoting the way and manner, the grownd or reason, &c. may
govern, or have with it, a relative or interrogative pronoun (or pronominal adjective
or adverb): *Ap’ οὖν τῇδε τῇ ἡμέρᾳ εἰλήφαμεν, ὃ πάλαι καὶ πολλοὶ ζητοῦντες πρὶν
εὑρεῖν κατεγήρασαν; (Pl. Theat. 202.) Ti, ἔφη 6 Ξενοφῶν, ἰδὼν τὸν Κριτόβουλον
ποιοῦντα τοιαῦτα κατέγνωκας αὐτοῦ; (Xen. Mem. 1, 3, 10.)
6) The Greeks often use a participle to denote the manner in which, the means
eee
* Rarer constructions: @) Οὐκ ἄν ποτε ἐξεῦρον ὀρθῶς τὰ μετέωρα πράγματα, εἰ μὴ
τὴν φροντίδα λεπτὴν καταμίξας εἰς τὸν ὅμοιον ἀέρα (Arist. Nub. 229. The participle
to denote a negative condition with εἰ prefixed); 2) Of ᾿Αθηναῖοι τῆς γῆς ἐκράτουν,
ὅσα μὴ προϊόντες πολὺ ἐκ τῶν ὅπλων (Thuc. 1,111; so jar as not —, = yet without
advancing far from the camp : ὅσον μή and ὅσα μή) ; ο) Ταῦτά σοι ἕνεκα τοῦδε ἐμήκυνα,
ὑποπτεύων, σέ, ὥςπερ καὶ αὐτὸς οἴει, ὠδίνειν τι κύοντα ἔνδον (Pl. Theat. 151; because
I suspected).
CHAP. VI.]
[§
175-]
176.
[§
176. ]
158 The Participle. [ὃ 176.
whereby, or generally the circumstances under which something takes place, where
in other languages this statement of the manner, means, or circumstance is put as the
principal proposition, and that which in Greek is the principal proposition becomes
the accessory definition (dependent sentence or expression with a preposition) ; this
happens especially where the statement of the circumstance is interrogative or
relative in form: Ti δεδιότες σφόδρα οὕτως ἐπείγεσθε; (Xen. Hell. 1,7, 26.) Τί ἂν
εἰπών σέ τις ὀρθῶς mposeimor; (Dem. 18, 22.) Οἶδα, ὅποι χρὴ ἐλθόντα λαβεῖν ἕκαστα
(Xen. icon. 8, 22; whither Imust σο ἐο take—). Οἱ λίαν φιλοσοφοῦντες τῶν λόγων
ἄπειροι γίγνονται, οἷς χρὴ χρώμενον ὁμιλεῖν τοῖς ἀνθρώποις (Pl. Gorg. 484; which one
must use in converse with men). Ruvehéyn Δημοσθένει τὸ στράτευμα, ὃ ἔδει ἔχοντα εἰς
τὴν Σικελίαν βοηθεῖν (Thuc. 7, 20). Οὐ διελογίσασθε, ὑπὲρ οἷα πεποιηκότων ἀνθρώπων
κινδυνεύσετε (Dem. 18, 98). --- Τὸν τοιοῦτον ἔξεστιν ἐπὶ κόῤῥης τύπτοντα μὴ διδόναι
δίκην (Pl. Gorg. 486; one can smite such a man on the cheek without being punished
for it). Οἱ ᾿Αργεῖοι πολλάκις ᾿Αθηναίους ἐκέλευον σχόντας μόνον σὺν ὅπλοις ἐς THY
Δακωνικὴν καὶ τὸ ἐλάχιστον μετὰ σφῶν δηώσαντας ἀπελθεῖν (Thue. 6, 105).
Rem. Especially we may note the expressions τί (ὅ,τι) παθών and τί μαθών,
where, with surprise and disapprobation, one asks (directly or indirectly) why a
person did this or that (most commonly παθών, denoting affection by some
external circumstance, or impulse generally [what possessed him to —], μαθών, some
notion which the person has taken into his head [what induced him to —]: Λέξον
δή μοι, τί παθοῦσαι, εἴπερ νεφέλαι γ᾽ εἰσὶν ἀληθῶς, θνηταῖς εἴξασι (ἐοίκασι) γυναιξίν ;
Arist. Nub. 341, what has come to them, what ails them, that they —.) (Depend-
ently, without express question, merely attached to the expression of surprise
or vexation implied in the principal sentence: Τί ἄξιός εἰμι παθεῖν ἢ ἀποτῖσαι, 6,
τι μαθὼν ἐν τῷ βίῳ οὐχ ἡσυχίαν ἦγον; Pl. Apol. 36, what do I deserve to suffer
because (God knows why —, or, for some crotchet or other that I had got into my
head —) I did not keep quiet. (Ti δῆτα ἔχων στρέφει; Pl. Phed. 236.)
c) The participle, (put as apposition to the subject of a preceding sentence,)
gives the character of an action or expression of some other person, mentioned in
that sentence, or asks what was the ground or cause of it: Soi, ὦ Σώκρατες, ἔφη 6
Θρασύμαχος, χαρίζομαι. Ev ye σὺ ποιῶν (Pl. Rep. 1, 351; τέ is well done of thee).
᾿Απορῶ, TL χρή ποτε εἰπεῖν ὄντως εἶναι τὸν σοφιστήν. Εἰκότως ye σὺ ἀπορῶν (Pl. Sovh,
231; no wonder thou art at a loss). Ὃ ἐμὸς πατὴρ τὸν ἄνδρα ἀπέκτεινεν. Ti λαβὼν
ἀδικοῦντα; (Xen. Cyr. 3,1,37; what wrong had he found him doing?) ρωτῶ, εἶ
δοκῶ ἂν ὑμῖν περὶ πλείονος τὴν Φιλίππου φιλίαν τῆς τῶν παίδων σωτηρίας ποιήσασθαι ;
ποίων κρατηθεὶς ἡδονῶν ; ἢ τί πώποτε ἄσχημον ἕνεκα χρημάτων πράξας ; (Ausch. 2,
152.) The speaker himself interposes a parenthetical εὖ ποιῶν, καλῶς ποιῶν in the
sense, with good reason, happily : Τοῦτο τοίνυν, εὖ ποιοῦν, ov συνέβη (Dem. 23, 143).
(A remark parenthetically interposed in a report of what some person has said:
Παρελθὼν Αἰσχίνης, ᾿Αγνοεῖτ᾽, ἔφη, ὦ βουλή, τὸ πρᾶγμα; καὶ τὸν αὐτόχειρα ἔχοντες
(λέγων τὸν ᾿Αρίσταρχον) μέλλετε καὶ ζητεῖτε; Dem, 21, 116. Apposition to the
subject οἵ ἔφη.) :
Rem. Certain participles are attached to the subject, to characterize the action
in respect of its circumstances or manner, almost with an adverbial signification,
especially ἀρχόμενος, at the beginning (ὅπερ ἀρχόμενος ἔλεγον, Pl. Theet. 174), ἀρξά-
μενος in the construction ἀρξάμενοι ἀπό τινος (Swxparovs), first S. and then the rest,
beginning with S., τελευτῶν, at last. (Oi Ἕλληνες κινηθῆναι οὐκ ἐδύναντο ἐκ τοῦ
χωρίου, ἀλλὰ τελευτῶντες καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕδατος εἶργον αὐτοὺς οἱ Θρᾷκες, Xen. An. 6,
[PART II,
§ 177.] The Participle. 159
1,8.) (In the language of common life: ἀνύσας ἄνοιγε, make haste and open!
Φλυαρεῖς ἔχων. See the Lexicon.)
d@) Sometimes several participles stand together, either attached, without con-
nexion among themselves, to the same leading verb in order to define the action on
several sides of it (by nearer and more remote circumstances), or so that one par-
ticiple attaches itself to another as its leading verb, especially participles put accord-
ing to the rules in ὃ 177 and 178: λδικοι ὄντες κερδανοῦμέν τε Kal λισσόμενοι (by
praying) ὑπερβαίνοντες καὶ ἁμαρτάνοντες (when we transgress and sin) πείθοντες τοὺς
θεοὺς ἀζήμιοι ἀπαλλάξομεν (Pl. Rep. 2, 366). Φανήσεται 6 θεσμοθέτης, πεισθεὶς
ὁποσῳδήποτε ἀργυρίῳ, καθυφεὶς τὸν ἀγῶνα (Dem. 21, 39; that he has given up the
suit, induced by —). (In the genitive absolute: Οἱ Θηβαῖοι ὕστερον παρεγένοντο, ἤδη
τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῶν μὲν διεφθαρμένων, τῶν δὲ ζώντων ἐχομένων, Thuc. 2,5; being alive in
prison. Τοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων κήρυκος, οὐδὲν ἐπισταμένου τῶν γεγενημένων, ἐλθόντος
οὐ πολὺ ὕστερον αὖθις περὶ τῶν νεκρῶν, ἀπέδοσαν οἱ Βοιωτοί, Thuc. 4, 101 ; without
knowing what had happened.)
6) Sometimes a participle of circumstance 15, less accurately (where one would have
rather expected a dependent sentence or a double genitive, § 181) attached in the
nominative to the subject of the principal sentence, although this cannot, quite
unchanged, be the subject of the participle. Namely, either (1) the passage begins
with the participle in the plural referred to a plural term (especially one that
has been the subject of discourse so far) or to several individuals, and then is carried
on in the principal sentence in reference to a part of the plural term or some of the
individuals (sometimes even with an extended reference to a larger plural than the
one just mentioned), or also (2) after a general statement concerning a plural, a
participle follows with an annexed partitive or less comprehensive subject. (1) ‘Qs
κραυγὴ καὶ κτύπος ἐγίγνετο, αἰσθόμενοι οἱ ἔνδον Tov θορύβου, κελεύσαντος τοῦ Ba-
σιλέως σκέψασθαι, τί εἴη τὸ πρᾶγμα, ἐκθέουσί τινες ἀνοίξαντες τὰς πύλας (Xen. Cyr.
7. ὅ, 28). ᾿Ενθαῦτα μαχόμενοι καὶ βασιλεὺς καὶ Κῦρος καὶ οἱ ἀμφ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὑπὲρ ἑκατέρων,
ὁπόσοι μὲν τῶν ἀμφὶ βασιλέα ἀπέθνησκον, Κτησίας λέγει, Κῦρος δὲ αὐτός τε ἀπέθανε καὶ
ὀκτὼ οἱ ἄριστοι τῶν περὶ αὐτόν (Xen. An. 1, 8,27). Καὶ πείσαντες [οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι] τοὺς
ξυμμάχους εὐθὺς ἐχώρουν ἐπὶ ᾿Ορχομενὸν τὸν ᾿Αρκαδικὸν πάντες πλὴν ᾿Αργείων (Thue.
5,61; aii, viz. the allies as well as the Athenians). (2) Πίστεις ἔδοσαν ἀλλήλοις of
Ἑλένην μνηστεύοντες, ἢ μὴν βοηθήσειν, εἴ τις ἀποστεροίη τὸν ἀξιωθέντα λαβεῖν αὐτήν,
νομίζων ἕκαστος τὴν ἐπικουρίαν ταύτην αὑτῷ παρασκευάζειν (Lsocr. Laud. Hel. 40)}.
Rem. Sometimes an irregularity in the case results, where the sentence begins
with a participle in the nominative, and then the construction is altered so that a
different case is required. See Anacoluthia, ὃ 216. (Of a different irregularity
in the case of the participle, see zbid. R. 2.)
a) With sundry verbs, mostly intransitive, a participle is (by way
of apposition) so constructed with the subject, that it belongs at the
same time to the verb which is predicated of the subject in relation
to the action (or state) expressed by the participle; the leading verb
Al ᾿Αττικαὶ νῆες παραγιγνόμεναι τοῖς Κερκυραίοις, εἴ πῃ πιέζοιντο, φόβον μὲν
παρεῖχον τοῖς ἐναντίοις, μάχης δὲ οὐκ ἦρχον, δεδιότες οἱ στρατηγοὶ τὴν πρόῤῥησιν τῶν
Αθηναίων, Thuc. 1, 49 (4, 73).
CHAP. VI.]
[§
176. ]
177.
[3
177.
160 The Participle. [$ 177.
being in itself incomplete or undefined, and the participle serving to’
complete it into an entire and definite predicate, in the same manner
as an infinitive is used as complement of the predicate. Such verbs
are those which denote continuance and perseverance, or weariness
and cessation, satisfaction or dissatisfaction (shame), superiority or
its opposite, the deing early or late, also being right or wrong —
(διατελῶ. διάγω, διαγίγνομαι, ἀνέχομαι, καρτερῶ, κάμνω, ἀπείρηκα, παύομαι, ἐκλείπω,
λήγω. χαίρω, ἀγαπῶ, ἥδομαι, poet. τέρπομαι, ἀγανακτῶ, αἰσχύνομαι, ἄχθομαι, μεταμέ
λομαι, χαλεπῶς φέρω, νικῶ, ἡττῶμαι, ἐλλείπομαι, ἄρχω, ὑπάρχω, φθάνω, ἀδικῶ, ἁμαρ-
> ~ / QO. » nr , 3
τάνω, εὖ, καλῶς ποιῶ. Σωκράτης οὐδὲν ἄλλο ποιῶν διαγεγένηται ἢ δια
σκοπῶν τά τε δίκαια καὶ τὰ ἄδικα (Xen. Mem. 4, 8, 4). ᾿Απείρηκα
΄ Xi 4 Κ 1 9 O δὲ ΄ θ > \ ais f
τρέχων (Xen. An. 5, 1, 2). ὑδὲν παυόμεθα εἰς TO αὐτὸ περιφερόμενοι.
(Pl. Gorg.517). Τοῖς καλῶς ἐρωτῶσιν ἀποκρινόμενος χαίρω (Pl. Prot.
918). Φαρνάβαζος τῆς Αἰολίδος χαλεπῶς ἔφερεν ἀπεστερημένος (Xen. Hell. 3,3, 13).
Οὐδὲ τὸν ἀδελφὸν ἠσχύνετο τὸν ἔτι ζῶντα οὕτως ὀλίγον φροντίζουσα τοῦ τεθνεῶτο
(Isocr. Alyin. 40). Ἔάν τις ἡμᾶς εὖ ποιῶν ὑπάρχη (first confers benefits upon us)
τούτου εἴς ye δύναμιν οὐχ ἡττησόμεθα εὖ ποιοῦντες (Xen. An. 2, 3,23). Ta τῆς πόλεω
οὕτως ὑπῆρχεν ἔχοντα (Dem. 18, 235; were in this posture). Οἱ Ἕλληνες φθάνουσιν.
ἐπὶ τῷ ἄκρῳ γενόμενοι τοὺς πολεμίους (Xen. An. 3, 4, 49). Ὃ πεζὸς στρατὸς τῶν
᾿Αθηναίων φθάνει ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὰς ᾿Επιπολὰς πρὶν τοὺς Συρακουσίους παραγενέσθαι
(Thuc. 6, 97). ᾿Αδικεῖτε πολέμου ἄρχοντες καὶ σπονδὰς λύοντες (Thuc. 1, 59).
᾿Αθηναῖοι τοὺς ἐκ τῆς νήσου δεσμώτας μετεμέλοντο ἀποδεδωκότες Λακεδαιμονίοις (Thue.
5, 86).
6) In the same manner the participle stands with the verbs ἀπά,
phrases τυγχάνω, λανθάνω (τινά). δῆλός εἰμι, φανερός εἰμι, φαίνομαι,
(show myself, am seen to—), which are used personally of the person
who accidentally, privately, or openly does or is something : "Etuyop
ὁπλῖται ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ καθεύδοντες ὡς πεντήκοντα (Thuc. 4, 113; sow
was that they were asleep —). "ἔλαθεν ἁφθέντα πάντα καὶ κατα-
φλεχθέντα (Thue. 4, 133). Λέληθα ἐμαυτὸν φίλτρον τι εἰδώς (Xem
Mem. ὃ, 3,11; without being myself aware of it, I have the knowledge
of —). Δῆλος εἶ καταφρονῶν μου (Pl. Theat. 189). κήδεταί τις μάλιστι
τούτου. ὃ τυγχάνει φιλῶν (Pl. Rep. 8, 412). Οἱ Θηβαῖοι φανεροὶ πᾶσιν ἦσαν avayKae
σθησόμενοι καταφεύγειν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς (Dem.18, 19). Ἢ ψυχὴ ἀθάνατος φαίνεται οὖσα (Pl.
Phed. 107; it appears that the soul —).
Rem. 1. When ὥν with an adjective is the participle, it is sometimes omitted,
especially with verbs denoting continuance, and with τυγχάνω : Σωκράτης ἀνυπό
Ontos καὶ ἀχίτων διετέλει (Xen. Mem. 1, 6, 2). Τίγνεται πόλις, ἐπειδὴ tuyxavet
ἡμῶν ἕκαστος οὐκ αὐτάρκης ἀλλὰ πολλῶν ἐνδεής (Pl. Rep. 2, 369). (Poetically
ἐν ἄγροις τυγχάνω, with a preposition, or with local dative, ἄγροις, Soph. El. 518.
With φαίνομαι, the omission of dy is the usual practice. Ψευδὴς φαίνεται ὁ Τωβρύας
(Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 4). =
1 ὅ0, τι, ὅπου, ὅπῃ, ὁπότε τυγχάνω, τυγχάνεις. &e., what (as it) may chance (wit
me, thee, &c.): Περιέτρεχον, ὅπῃ τύχοιμι (Pl. Conv. 173).
§ 178.] The Partiiple. 161
Rem. 2. With λανθάνω, δῆλος, and φανερός εἶμι, sometimes a sentence with ὅτε [3
follows : Οἱ πολέμιοι δῆλοι ἦσαν, ὅτι ἐπικείσονται ἐν τῇ καταβάσει (Xen. An. 5, 2, 26). 177-1
Also λανθάνει (τινά), δῆλόν ἐστι, φανερόν ἐ. ave put impersonally with ὅτι : Πᾶσιν
ἣν φανερόν, ὅτι μᾶλλον ἡσθήσεσθε τοῖς παρακαλοῦσιν ὑμᾶς ἐπὶ τὸν πόλεμον ἢ τυῖς
περὶ εἰρήνης συμβουλεύουσιν (1500). de Pac. 5 = φανεροὶ ἦτε ἡσθησόμενοι).
Rem. 8. Αἰσχύνομαι λέγων, Lam ashamed of saying it, (even) while I say τέ, αἰσ χύ-
νομαιλέγειν, I am ashamed to say (and therefore forbear to say). aivopathas the
infinitive in the sense seem (seem to myself): "Eyayé μοι φαίνομαι δύο καθορᾶν εἴδη
τῆς μαντικῆς (Pl. Soph. 235). (Λποκάμνω ποιεῖν τι, 1 give over doing something.)
*Apxouat (middle) has usually the infinitive, rarely the participle. Some other
verbs and phrases of kindred meaning occur now and then constructed thus with
the participle, e.g. πειρῶμαι βασανίζων τι (Pl. Phil. 21; make an attempt at testing
something), κύριός εἰμι ποιῶν τι (Thue. 5,34; have aright to do something), συμβαίνει
τι γιγνόμενον (and, without ὦν, μέγιστον κακὸν συμβαίνει ἡ ἀδικία, Pl. Gorg. 479),
μεστός εἰμι θυμούμενος (Soph. Uid. C. 108 = κάμνω, am tired out and sated).
Rem. 4. As δῆλός εἰμι, so, in the poets, and sometimes in prose, ἀρκῶ, ἱκανός,
κρείττων, βελτίων εἰμί are used personally with a participle instead of an impersonal
expression with acc. with inf. (ἀρκεῖ ἐμέ ---) : ᾿Αρκέσω θνήσκουσ᾽ ἐγώ (Soph. Ant.
547). Κρείττων ἣν ὁ πατήρ cov μὴ λειτουργήσας ἢ τοσαῦτα τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ἀναλώσας
(Lys. 26, 4).
Rem. 5. With some impersonal verbs and expressions, which denote the conse-
quence and advantage of an action, sometimes, instead of the infinitive, a participle
stands as apposition to the dative, so that the use or advantage during (after) the
action is denoted: ᾿Αθηναῖοι πέμψαντες ἐς Δελφοὺς ἐπηρώτων τὸν θεύν, εἰ πολεμοῦσιν
»ὕ [4 ld > ΄σ Ν
ἄμεινον ἔσται (Thue. 1,118; also λυσιτελήσει, συνοίσει). Ἡμεῖς ἡγανακτοῦμεν μεν
cent - ΄ ΄ > ar > > a con Or «
ἐπὶ τοῖς λεγομένοις, πλέον δ᾽ οὐδὲν ἦν ἀγανακτοῦσιν ἡμῖν (Dem. 35, 31). In the
same manner: Μεταμέλει μοι οὕτως ποιήσαντι, to have so acted ; of having so acted.’
Rem. 6. The verb φθάνω in negative, dubitative expressions is used of that
which, when it takes place, will not take place too soon ; and, in the second person,
(οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις, POdvorre) expresses a challenge or summons to do something
τ DAE ee N , ΄ " + Sp ῃ > , >
immediately: Οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις λέγων, εἴ τι ἤσθησαί pe φίλτρον ἐπιστάμενον (Xen.
Mem. ἢ, 3,.11).2. (More rarely in the third person, of that which, since it must
be done, may as well be done at once: Ei μὴ τιμωρήσεσθε τούτους, οὐκ ἂν φθάνοι
τὸ πλῆθος τούτοις δουλεῦον, Dem. 24, 143.)
a) A participle is likewise attached to the o4ject of certain verbs, ᾧ
to denote that the proper complete’ (/ogica/) object of the verbs is not 178.
the grammatical object, in itself, but that state or action of ἐέ whieh the
participle expresses ; so that the object and participle together have
the same meaning as the accusative with the infinitive after verba decla-
randi: Δείκνυμί τινα ποιοῦντά τι. If the subject of the leading verb
should also be its object, the participle is put in. the nominative and re-
1”Rouxas τὴν εὐδαιμονίαν οἰομένῳ τρυφὴν καὶ πολυτέλειαν εἶναι (Xen. Mem. 1,6, 10;
thou art like one who thinks ; thou seemest to think).
2 In the editions often incorrectly pointed as a question,
CHAP. VI.] M
[$
178. }
162 The Participle. [§ 178.
ferred to the subject: Δείκνυμι ποιήσας τι (that I have done something).
With the passive, or the forms used intransitively, the participle is re-
ferred to the subject: Δειχθήσομαι ποιήσας τι. Such verbs are those
which denote fo see, mark, know, experience, remember, show, prove, find
(find oneself’) signify (verbs of knowledge and experience) : (ὁρῶ, αἰσθάνομαι,
ἀκούω. πυνθάνομαι, μανθάνω, καταμ., οἶδα, ἐπίσταμαι, γιγνώσκω, μέμνημαι, ἐπιλανθά-
νομαι, Sno, δείκνυμι, ἐπιδ., ἀποδ., ἀποφαίνω, ἐξελέγχω, ἀγγέλλω, εὑρίσκω.) Ὁρῶ
τὸν πόλεμον ὑμῖν πολλῶν κακῶν αἴτιον γεγενημένον (5067. Phil. 2).
᾿Ἐπέδειξα Aloyivny οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἀπηγγελκότα ἀλλὰ φενακίσανθ᾽ ὑμᾶς
(Dem. 19, 177). Οἱ “ἄλληνες οὐκ ἤδεσαν Κῦρον τεθνηκότα (Xen. An.
1, 10, 16). Ανθρωποι καλοὶ κἀγαθοὶ ἐπειδὰν γνῶσιν ἀπιστούμενοι,
οὐ φιλοῦσι τοὺς ἀπιστοῦντας (Xen. Cyr. 7, 2,17). Φίλιππος πάνθ᾽
ἕνεκα ἑαυτοῦ ποιῶν ἐξελήλεγκται (Dem. ὦ, 8). Οἱ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων στρατ-
ηγοὶ τοῖς τε ἐπιχειρήμασιν ἑώρων οὐ κατορθοῦντες καὶ τοὺς στρατ-
L@tas ἀχθομένους τῇ μονῇ (Thuc. 7,41). Κλέαρχος ἤκουε Κύρου ἔξω
ὄντα τοῦ Ἑλληνικοῦ εὐωνύμου βασιλέα (Xen. An. 1, 8,19).} ᾿Απεφάνην συμφορᾶς μὲν
οὐδεμιᾶς αἴτιος γεγενημένος, πολλὰ δὲ κἀγαθὰ εἰργασμένος τὴν πόλιν (Lys. 25, 4).
Μέμνημαι ἔγωγε καὶ παῖς ὧν (even from my childhood) Κριτίᾳ τῷδε ξυνόντα σε (ΕΓ.
Charm. 150). Ἴσθι ἀνόητος ὧν (Xen. An. 2, 1, 19). Σκοπούμενος εὕρισκον οὐδαμῶς
ἂν ἄλλως, ὃ ἠβουλύμην, διαπραξάμενος, πλὴν εἰ γραφείη λόγος ὥςπερ εἰκὼν τῆς ἐμῆς
Seana Antid. 7). Τιρῶτος βασιλεῖ Κῦρον ἐπιβουλεύοντα ἤγγειλα (Xen. An.
Ὁ. 9. 19).
Rem. 1. But instead of the nominative referred to the principal subject, occa”
sionally a reflexive pronoun stands with the participle in the accusative (cf. ace.
with inf. for the nominative, § 160): Ἢ δεῖξον οὐ πεποιηκότα ταῦτα͵ σαυτὸν ἢ δίκην
ὕπεχε (Dem. 22, 29). From αἰσθάνομαι ἐμαυτὸν πεπρακώς comes. the construc-
tion συνέβη μοι αἰσθέσθαι ἐμαυτὸν πεπρακότι (Dem. 18, 46), by § 157,-b.
Rem. 2. Instead of an object with participle attached, the participle of an
impersonal verb or expression may also stand alone: ‘Op@ καὶ σοὶ τούτων δεῆσον
(Xen. Mem. 2, 6,29). Εἶδον οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἀδύνατον ὃν τιμωρεῖν τοῖς ἀνδράσιν
(Thue. 4,15). (Lots ξυμμάχοις παράδειγμα σαφὲς καταστήσατε, ὃς ἂν ἀφιστῆται,
θανάτῳ ζημιωσόύμενον, Thuc. 3, 40, = δείξατε.)
Rem. 3. Rarely (for the most part poetically) ὡς is prefixed to this participle:
‘Os μηδὲν εἰδότ᾽ ἴσθι μ᾽ ὧν ἀνιστορεῖς (Soph. Phil. 253).
Rem. 4. With these verbs also (cf. § 177, R. 1) the participle ὧν is sometimes
omitted, e.g. with ἀποφαίνω, οἶδα : Ei τις ἔχει ψευδῆ ἀποφῆναι, ἃ εἰρήκαμεν, λεγέτω
(Pl. Rep. 2, 366).
1’ Axovo τινὰ ἥκοντα, I hear (learn, am told) that some one is come, ἀκούω τινὸς
διαλεγομένου, 1 hear some one speak (hear him speaking), § ὅ8 ἃ. R. 3. ᾿Αριαῖος ἤσθετο.
Κῦρον πεπτωκότα (Xen. 4η.1,9, 91), A. perceived, became aware, that C. was fallen;
ἤσθησαι πώποτέ μου συκοφαντοῦντος; (Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 11.) hast thow (thyself as
present) ever perceived me acting the part of a sycophant (practising chicane) ? This
distinction, however, in the use of αἰσθάνομαι is not always observed. .
[PART Il.
$1 70.] The Participle. 163
Rem. 5. The verbs mentioned have also, some more frequently, e.g. oida’
others less frequently, a sentence with ὅτε (or ὡς mostly after a negation, see
§ 159, R. 3) with no difference in point of meaning, but only as the convenience
of the general form of the sentence may require: Τοὺς χειροτέχνας ἤδη, ὅτι εὑρή-
σοιμι πολλὰ Kal καλὰ ἐπισταμένους (Pl. Apol. 22). "Ηισθοντο οἱ Ἕλληνες, ὅτι
βασιλεὺς σὺν τῷ στρατεύματι ἐν τοῖς σκευοφόροις εἴη (Xen. An. 1,10,5). Οὐδ᾽ ἐκεῖνο
δύναμαι ἰδεῖν, ὡς οὐχὶ πάντες ἄνθρωποι τούτων τυχεῖν ἀξιώσουσιν (Dein. 23, 123).
Ὡς οὐ πεποίηκε Μειδίας, ἃ κατηγόρηκα, τοῦτο δεικνύτω (Dem. 21, 28. A challenge
which Demosthenes assumes will not be accepted). “Padiws αἰσθήσεσθε τούτους,
ὅτι εἰσὶ βίαιοι καὶ ἀσελγεῖς ἄνθρωποι (Dem. 43, 23; on τούτους, ὅτι, see § 191).
(Blending of two constructions : Γνοὺς δὲ ὁ Κλέων καὶ Δημοσθένης, ὅτι. εἰ καὶ ὁπο-
σονοῦν μᾶλλον ἐνδώσουσιν οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, διαφ θαρησομένους αὐτοὺς ὑπὸ τῆς
σφετέρας στρατιᾶς, ἔπαυσαν τὴν μάχην. Thue. 4,37. Cf. ὃ 159, R. 4.)!
Rem. 6. The verbs signifying to remark, learn, hear (also ἀγγέλλω), have also
often the accus. with inf., rarely those signifying to know: ᾿Ακούω καὶ ἄλλα ἔθνη
πολλὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι (Xen. An. 2, 5, 13). Πυνθάνομαι μέλλειν Δημοσθένην κατ-
ἀριθμεῖσθαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ὅσα πεπολίτευται (Asch. 3, δ4). (Εὖ νυν ἐπίστω τῶνδέ μ᾽
αἰσχύνην ἔχειν. Soph. ΕἸ. 0610.) Τιγνώσκω has the ace. with inf. (not the par-
ticiple) in the sense perceive, asswme, consider. Κῦρος ἀγῶνας κατέστησεν ἁπάντων,
ὁπόσα ἐγίγνωσκεν ἀσκεῖσθαι ἀγαθὸν εἶναι ὑπὸ στρατιωτῶν (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1, 22).
(Γιγνώσκω, give sentence that something shall be done,—see § 164.) ᾿Αποφαίνω,
ἀποφαίνομαι, declare (that something is; not to prove), has the ace. with inf?:
ἀπέφηναν τοῦτο δίκαιον τοῖς ἀρχομένοις εἶναι (Pl. hep. 338, EB).
Rem. 7. Σύνοιδά τινι ἠδικημένῳ (Dem. 21, 2) and (the meaning οἵ σύν almost
disappearing) Συνίσασι τοὺς πρὸ αὑτῶν τετυραννευκότας τοὺς μὲν ὑπὸ τῶν γονέων
ἀνῃρημένους, τοὺς δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν παίδων, τοὺς δὲ ὑπ᾽ ἀδελφῶν (Lsocr. de Pac. 113).
Σύνοιδα ἐμαυτῷ ἐψευσμένος and ἐψευσμένῳ.
6) So likewise a participle is attached to the object, to complete the
predicate, with the verbs παύω, cause a person to have done with some-
thing, περιορῶ, overlook (allow something to be done before one’s
eyes), and (more for the purpose of merely denoting a circumstance)
with εὑρίσκω, καταλαμβάνω, pope, find, catch a person doing some-
thing (passive ἁλίσκομαι), ποιῶ, represent in a poem, ἐγγράφω, lay an
information : Τὴν φιλοσοφίαν παῦσον ταῦτα λέγουσαν (Pl. Gorg. 482).
“ ἴον / \a@¢ ic f N la / Υ ~
Apa διψῶν τε πέπαυμαι καὶ ἅμα ἡδόμενος διὰ τοῦ πίνειν (PL. Gorg. 497).
Μὴ περιίδωμεν ὑβρισθεῖσαν τὴν Λακεδαίμονα καὶ καταφρονηθεῖσαν
(1506). Archid. 108). (ων with εὑρίσκω omitted: Ἐμὲ εὑρήσετε οὐ κακὸν οὐδ᾽
ἄχρηστον, Ise. 7, 41.) (Περιορῶ τι γίγνεσθαι, τοὺς Μαντινεῖς ἄρχειν τῆς ᾿Αρκαδίας,
Thue. 5, 29, = ἐῶ!)
; In a special manner (mostly, however, in the poets) a participle of the aorist is
joined to the verb ἔχω as apposition to the subject, to denote at once the
preceding action and the present state, almost as a mere periphrasis of the perfect :
1 Μέμνημαι, οἶδα, ὅτε (ἡνίκα) ----, I remember the time when —.
2 Μανθάνω ὀρχεῖσθαι, ἐπίσταμαι λέγειν, μέμνησο ἀπιστεῖν, &e., by ὃ 145, do not come
under this head.
CHAP. VI.] M 2
§
170.
(425)
164 The Participle. [ὃ 180.
Σοῦ δ᾽ ἔγωγε θαυμάσας ἔχω τόδε (Soph. Phil. 1302). Τὸν λύγον cou πάλαι θαυμάσας
ἔχω, ὅσῳ καλλίω τοῦ προτέρου ἀπειργάσω (Pl. Phed. 257).
a) A participle stands, with or without the article, and with or with-
out defining accessories, as attributive to.a substantive, with the sense
of an adjective or of a relative periphrasis: Πόλις κάλλει διαφέρουσα.
᾿Ανὴρ καλῶς πεπαιδευμένος. Oi πρέσβεις οἱ Tapa Φιλίππου πεμφθέντες.
Ἢ Μυσῶν λεία λεγομένη (the so-called booty of the Mysians; the
proverbial Mysian booty). At Αἰόλου νῆσοι καλούμεναι (Lhuc. 3, 88).
Ἔν τῇ Μεσσηνίᾳ ποτὲ οὔσῃ γῇ (Thue. 4, 3; in the land which was once
Messenian). Αἱ ἄρισται δοκοῦσαι εἶναι φύσεις (Xen. Mem. 4, 1, 3).
(On the position of the words when the participle, as attributive with the article,
has accessory definitions, see ὃ 9, R. 1.)
Rem. It should be remarked, however, that the participle perfect m Greek,
much more rarely than in Latin (doctus, eruditus, rectus), assumes the signification
of a pure adjective, merely denoting the property in general without reference to
the action by which it was prodaced. (Eppopevos.) On the other hand, the
participial constructions, instead of the relative periphrases used in Latin, are
rendered very frequent by the use of ὧν and δοκῶν.
b) A participle with the article (with addition of case and other
definitions) can likewise stand substantively instead of a relative peri-
phrasis of a person or thing (cf. § 14): Οἱ κρατοῦντες. Ἢν δὲ ὁ τὴν
γνώμην ταύτη νεϊπὼν Πείσανδρος (Thue. 8,68). "Εδει τὴν πολιτικὴν
σοφοὺς ποιεῖν τοὺς πολίτας καὶ ἐπιστήμης μεταδιδόναι, εἴπερ ἔμελλεν
αὕτη εἶναι ἡ ὠφελοῦσά τε καὶ εὐδαίμονας ποιοῦσα (Pl. Huthyd. 292).
3 , a / lel lal / ra τ 9 1
Adextéov τῶν τοιούτων τῷ σωφρονεῖν δυνησομένῳ (Xen. Conv. 4, 26).
Ilapa τοῖς ἀρίστοις δοκοῦσιν εἶναι (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 6). Τοῖς ᾿Αρκάδων
σφετέροις οὖσι ξυμμάχοις (Thuc. 5,64; those of the Arcadians who were —, partitively,
see $50 a). Τοὺς πῶς διακειμένους λάβοιεν ἂν οἱ τοιοῦτοι μαθητάς; (Lsocr. Antid. 222 ;
see 176 a, and 198 a.)
Rem. 1. On the other hand, it is more rare for a participle without the article to be
put substantively, to denote indefinitely persons of a certain kind, or who do some-
thing (cf. § 87 a): Πλέομεν ἐπὶ πολλὰς ναῦς κεκτημένους (Xen. Hell. 5, 1, 19).
Νόμος ἐστίν, ὅταν πολεμούντων πόλις ἁλῷ, τῶν ἑλόντων εἶναι τὰ χρήματα τῶν ἐν τῇ
πύλει (Xen. Cyr.7,5,73). Μετὰ ταῦτα ἀφικνοῦνται ἀγγέλλοντες (with the intelli-
gence), ὅτι 6 πατὴρ ἀφεῖται (is released ; Isocr, Trap. 11: so frequently, Ἥκουσιν,
ἧκον λέγοντες). (Ὅταν τις θεῶν βλάπτῃ, δύναιτ᾽ ἂν οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἰσχύων φυγεῖν, Soph. ΕἾ.
697. Elsewhere almost exclusively in the plural.) To denote a person as one
who can, shall, will do something, the article is usually put to the participle (of the
future, rarely of the present: persons who do), both adjeetively, and especially
Se Se —— -ςς σου ϑ
1 Tivas καλεῖν ἔδει ἑτέρους ; τούς, ὅτ᾽ ἐγώ, γεγονυίας ἤδη τῆς εἰρήνης, ἀπὸ τῆς ὕστέ-
pas ἥκων πρεσβείας, αἰσθύμενος φενακιζομένην τὴν πόλιν, προὔλεγον καὶ διεμαρτυρύμην
καὶ οὐκ εἴων προέσθαι Ἰπύλας οὐδὲ Φωκέας, λέγοντας, ὡς ἐγὼ δύσκολάς εἰμί τις ἄνθρωπος
(Dem. 6. 29). [
PART II.
Rerora | The Participle. 165
substantively: Οὐδὲ τοὺς δούλους ὑβρίζειν of Ἕλληνες ἀξιοῦσιν, ἀλλὰ νόμον δημοσίᾳ
τὸν ταῦτα κωλύσοντα τέθεινται (Dem. 21, 49). Ἢ χώρα πολλὴ καὶ ἀγαθὴ ἦν καὶ
ἐνῆσαν οἱ ἐργασόμενοι (Xen. An. 2, 4, 22; people to till it). “Ὁ ἡγησόμενος οὐδεὶς
(οὐκ) ἔσται (Xen. An. 2, 4,5). (Πολλοὺς ἕξομεν τοὺς ἑτοίμως καὶ προθύμως συν-
αγωνιζομένους ἡμῖν. Isocr. de Pac. 139.)
Rem. 2. The poets sometimes make a genitive case depend on a participle with
the article, as if it were a substantive, 6. g. ὁ ἐκείνου τεκών (Hur. 1.335). In prose
of προςήκοντες, relations, and τὸ συμφέρον, advantage, interest, are used quite as
substantives (τὸ τῆς νεὼς καὶ τῶν ναυτῶν συμφέρον, Pl. Pol. 296; τὰ μικρὰ συμφέροντα
τῆς πόλεως, Dem. 18, 28). The poets and Thucydides sometimes use a present par-
ticiple in the neuter, instead of an abstract verbal substantive, e.g. τὸ νοσοῦν =
ξ. / > ~ \ ΄σ > , » πη 5 =
ἡ νόσος. Ἔν τῷ μὴ μελετῶντι ἀξυνετώτεροι ἔσονται (Thuc. 1, 142; by want, or
omission, of practice) ; μετὰ τοῦ δρωμένου (Thuc. ὅ, 102; with action, when there
is doing). (Otherwise: τὸ δοξάζον τῆς ψυχῆς, that (part) of the mind which repre-
sents (images) ; TO κρατοῦν τῆς πόλεως. Partitive genitive, § 5v.)
c) Some few present participles, viz. διαφέρων, ἔχων with an adverb (e.g. κάλλιστ᾽
ἔχων), προςήκων, πρέπων, δέον, ἐξόν, συμφέρον, sometimes occur, as adjective predi-
cate-nouns, with εἰμί or γίγνομαι, occasionally also others in connexion with an
actual adjective: Ti mor’ ἐστὶν οὗτος ὁ βίος ἐκείνου διαφέρων; (Pl. Garg. 500.) Τοὺς
Λακεδαιμονίους od διὰ τὴν ἀρετὴν αὐτῶν ἐσώσατε, ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι συμφέρον ἦν τῇ πόλει σῶς
εἶναι (11)6ηι. 19, 75). Δεῖ πολὺ μὲν τοὺς ἄρχοντας ἐπιμελεστέρους γενέσθαι τοὺς νῦν τῶν
πρόσθεν, πολὺ δὲ τοὺς ἀρχομένους εὐτακτοτέρους καὶ πειθομένους μᾶλλον τοῖς
ἄρχουσι νῦν ἢ πρόσθεν (Xen. An. 2, 2, 80).
d) A participle of the present or aorist with εἰμί, as a periphrasis of the simple
tense of the verb (in like manner as the participle perf., under certain circumstances,
is joined with εἰμί) is a poetical licence of not very frequent occurrence; in the
prose passages where it does occur, there is apt to be a certain emphasis in the
several and distinct expression of the action (the participle) and its existence (εἰμί).
“Av ἢ θέλουσα (ἡ γυνή). πάντ᾽ ἐμοῦ κομίζεται (Soph. Cid. R. 580). Οὐκ εἰς ὄλεθρον ;
οὐ σιωπήσας ἔσει; (tbid. 1146.) ἸΤαντάπασι θαυμάσαιμ᾽ ἄν, εἴ τί με τούτων διαπέφευγεν.
Ἦν μὲν οὖν μετὰ πολλῆς ἡδονῆς καὶ παιδιᾶς τότε ἀκουόμενα (Pl. Tim. 20). “H τοῦτο
οὐκ ἔστι γιγνόμενον παρ᾽ ἡμῖν; (Pl. Phil. 39; or, is not this a thing that takes
place —?) "Hv yap ὁ Θεμιστοκλῆς βεβαιότατα φύσεως ἰσχὺν δηλώσας καὶ διαφερόντως
τι ἐς αὐτὸ μᾶλλον ἑτέρου ἄξιος θαυμάσαι (Thuc. 1,138; a man who, in ὦ pre-sminent
degree, manifested —). (With γίγνομαι in command and prohibition: Μή, ὦ ξένε,
ἡμῖν τήν ye πρώτην αἰτησάντων χάριν ἀπαρνηθεὶς γένῃ. Pl. Soph. 217.)
A subject with a participle, conceived as one notion, and put in the
genitive (genitiviconsequentia, double- genitive [usually,in English,‘gen-
tive absolute’]) is (in the manner assigned in § 66, b) attached to a sen-
tence, where a simple participle could not be annexed, to denote the rela-
tion of time of the principal action, its way and manner, circumstances,
ground or cause, &e., as the simple participle would do: Τῶν σωμάτων
θηλυνομένων καὶ ai ψυχαὶ πολὺ ἀῤῥωστότεραι γίγνονται (Xen. Cicon.
4, ἃ; if—). Οὐκ ἂν ἦλθον δεῦρο, ὑμῶν μὴ κελευσάντων. “Ὅλης τῆς
πόλεως ἐν τοῖς πολεμικοῖς κινδύνοις ἐπιτρεπομένης τῷ στρατηγῷ, μεγάλα
τά τ᾽ ἀγαθὰ κατορθοῦντος αὑτοῦ καὶ τὰ κακὰ διαμαρτάνοντος εἰκὸς γί-
CHAP. VI.]
[§
180. ]
181.]
166 The Participle. [$-181.
γνεσθαι (Xen. Mem. 3,1, 3; where the whole city is made over —, —if
he succeeds, &e.). Οἱ Θηβαῖοι ἠβούλοντο τὴν Τ]λάταιαν ἔτι ἐν εἰρήνῃ
τ a / / r a
TE καὶ TOU πολέμου μήπω φανεροῦ καθεστῶτος ἘΞ γεγενημένου) προκα-
ταλαβεῖν (Thuc. 2,2). (Agixero δεῦρο τὸ πλοῖον, γνόντων τῶν Κεφαλλήνων, aytt-
πράττοντος Ζηνοθέμιδος, ὅθεν ἐξέπλευσε τὸ πλοῖον, ἐνταῦθα καὶ καταπλεῖν αὐτό. Dem.
82, 14; when the Ceph. had determined, in spite of Z.’s resistance, —. A double-
genitive attached to another. Τί τῶν Φωκέων ἢ ἄλλου τινὸς ἀνθρώπων μετὰ τοὺς παρ᾽
Αἰσχίνου λόγους ἐξαμαρτόντος οὐκ ἀπέβη τὰ ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τότε ῥηθέντα; Dem. 19, Τῦ ;
for what offence of the Phocians —? See § 176, a.)
Rem. 1. The learner must observe, that as the Greek has the whole series of
active participles, the use of the passive double-genitive (as in Latin) is hereby
excluded, when the action spoken of is that of the subject of the principal sen-
tence: Ταῦτα εἰπόντες ἀπῆμεν, not τούτων λεχθέντων, which signifies, after this was
said by others.
Rem. 2. The relation between the principal sentence and the participial sentence
is more specifically marked, as is the case with the simple participle, by certain ad-
verbs: see ὃ 175. Πόθεν, ὦ Σώκρατες, ai διαβολαί σοι αὗται γεγόνασιν; οὐ yap δή που,
σοῦ γε οὐδὲν τῶν ἄλλων περιττότερον πραγματευομένου, ἔπειτα τοσαύτη φήμη τε καὶ
λόγος γέγονεν (Pl. Apol. 20). Ψήφισμα ἔγραψα πλεῖν ἐπὶ τοὺς τόπους, ἐν οἷς εἴη Φίλιπ-
πος, καὶ τοὺς ὅρκους τὴν ταχίστην ἀπολαμβάνειν, ἵν᾿ ἐχόντων τῶν Θρᾳκῶν τῶν ὑμετέ-
pov συμμάχων τὰ χωρία ταῦτα, τὸ Σέῤῥιον καὶ τὸ Μύρτιον καὶ τὴν ᾿Ἐργίσκην, οὕτω
γίγνοινθ᾽ οἱ ὅρκοι (Dem. 18, 27). Διονυσοδώρου μετα ξὺ ταῦτα λέγοντος ὁ Κλεινίας
ἔτυχεν ἀποκρινάμενος (Pl. Huthyd. 275). Especially frequent is the double-
genitive with ὡς, to express the thought and supposition or pretext under which
something is spoken or done (because, as though): Φυλλίδας καὶ Μελλων ἐκήρυττον
ἐξιέναι πάντας Θηβαίους, ὡς τῶν τυράννων τεθνεώτων (Xen. Hell. 5, 4,9). Οὐχ ὡς
τοῖς Ἕλλησι πολεμησόντων ἡμῶν εἶπον, ἃ εἶπον (Xen. An. 5, 6,3). Cf. ὃ 175 d.
Especially note the use of the double-genitive with os in connexion with verbs or
phrases denoting an opinion or utterance, to_assign the purport of the opinion or
utterance (to be of opinion, as though, i.e. that something should be done), usually
with the imperative, or at least in speaking of that which is to be thought or
spoken (often with emphatic οὕτως before the principal verb, after the genitive) :
‘Qs ἐμοῦ ye Kat ἀγωνιουμένου καί, ὁποῖος ἄν τις ὦ, κατὰ THY ἀξίαν τιμᾶσθαι ἜἸΞΙΙ το τς
οὕτως, ὦ Κῦρε, γίγνωσκε (Xen. Cyr. 2, 3,15). ‘Qs ἐμοῦ ἰόντος, ὅπη ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς,
οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε (Xen. An. 1, 8, 6). "Ao τι ὡς οὕτω σου νομίζοντος διανοώ-
μεθα; (Pl. Gorg. 472; are we not to assume that this is your opinion ὁ On ἄλλο τι,
see § 199 6) Εἴπατε καὶ περὶ τούτου, πότερα peveite καὶ σπονδαί εἰσιν ἢ ὡς πολέμου
ὄντος παρ᾽ ὑμῶν ἀπαγγελῶ (Xen. An. 2, 1, 21 ; or, whether I shall report —).
(Ὄψεσθε, ὥςπερ δούλων ἀποδιδρασκόντων εὑρημένων, τοὺς μὲν ἱκετεύοντας τῶν πο-
λεμίων, τοὺς δὲ φεύγοντας. Xen. Cyr. 4, 2, 21; just as when —.)*
Rem. 3. Sometimes a double-genitive and a simple participle referred to a case
(most frequently the subject) in the principal sentence, are connected by and, or by
μέν and δέ as co-ordinate definitions (e. ο΄. of time, cause, thought, &c.): Κλέων πάντα
διαπραξάμενος ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ καὶ ψηφισαμένων ᾿Αθηναίων αὐτῷ τὸν πλοῦν τῶν τε ἐν
1 νόμος οὐκ ἐᾷ περὶ τῶν ἀτίμων λέγειν, ἐὰν μὴ τῆς ἀδείας δοθείσης (Dem. 24, 46).
See § 175 e, foot-note 1 (a).
PART II.
δ 181.] The Participle. 167
Πύλῳ στρατηγῶν ἕνα προςελόμενος Δημοσθένην τὴν ἀναγωγὴν διὰ τάχους ἐποιεῖτο [ὃ
(Thue. 4,29). Οἱ Ἕλληνες στραφέντες παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς ταύτῃ προςιύντος βασιλέως 181.]
καὶ δεξόμενοι (Xen. An. 1, 10, 0).
Rem. 4. z) The subject-genitive in a double-genitive is sometimes omitted, when
it is a pronoun easy to be understood from the context and the preceding mention
of the same subject, and with no emphasis on it: Εἵποντο δὲ τοῖς Μοσσυνοίκοις τῶν
Ἑλλήνων τινές, οὐ ταχθέντες ὑπὸ τῶν στρατηγῶν GAN ἁρπαγῆς ἕνεκεν. Οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι,
προςιόντων, τέως μὲν ἡσύχαζον, ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐγγὺς ἐγένοντο τοῦ χωρίου, ἐκδραμόντες
τρέπονται αὐτούς (Xen. An. 5, 4. 10). (The pronoun of the first person omitted
in an assurance by the speaker himself attached to what goes before: ᾿Ερῶτα, ἔφη,
ὦ Κῦρε, ὡς τἀληθῆ ἐροῦντος, Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 9.)
6) Sometimes the double-genitive is a participle plural with an indefinite
subject of the third person understood (the people; one) (cf. ὃ 6 b): Οὐκ ἐξαιτού-
μενος, οὐκ ᾿Αμφικτυονικὰς δίκας ἐπαγόντων, οὐκ ἀπειλούντων, οὐκ ἐπαγγελλομένων,
οὐδαμῶς ἐγὼ προδέδωκα τὴν εἰς ὑμᾶς εὔνοιαν (Dem.18,322 ; not when I was demanded
to be given up, not when they were for bringing me to trial before the Amphictyons).
c) A double-genitive of participle without a subject is formed from impersonal
expressions with adjectives in the plural (ἕτοιμά ἐστιν, § 7 b. R. 2), or from a verb
put impersonally to which some general notion of things can be understood as its
subject (e. g. ἔχει, ἐπράχθη), usually in the plural, and from the verbs denoting
the state of the weather (ὃ 7, ἃ 1). (Comp. the double-accusative, § 182) : "Ere
ὄντων ἀκρίτων διαλλαγῶμεν (Thuc. 1,7). Οὕτως ἐχόντων (under such circumstances,
such being the case, more rarely οὕτως ἔχοντος), εἰκὸς τοῖς μὲν πολεμίοις ἐναντίους
εἰναι τοὺς θεούς, ἡμῖν δὲ συμμάχους (Xen. An. 3, 2, 10). Τοῦτον τὸν τρύπον
πραχθέντων, τῆς πύλεως γίγνεται τὰ χρήματα (Dem. 24, 12 ; such being the facts of
the case). ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἀνηγάγετο ἐπὶ τὴν Κύζικον, ὕοντος πολλοῦ (Xen. Hell. 1,1,16).
d) A passive participle neuter (usually plural, ef. c) of a verbum declarandi is (420)
sometimes put in the double-genitive, with a sentence with ὅτι added : Περικλῆς
ᾧχετο κατὰ τάχος ἐπὶ Kavvov καὶ Καρίας, esayyehOévrav, ὅτι Φοίνισσαι νῆες ἐπὶ τοὺς
᾿Αθηναίους πλέουσιν (Thuc. 1,116; but δηλωθέντος, ὅτι ---, 1, 74).
Rem. 5. The omission of the participle ὧν in the double-genitive is very rare:
Πᾶν ἐν ἡσύχῳ, πάτερ, ἔξεστι φωνεῖν, ὡς ἐμοῦ porns πέλας (Soph. Cid. C. 83).
(Νικίαν καὶ Δημοσθένην οἱ Συρακούσιοι ἄκοντος Τυλίππου ἀπέσφαξαν, Thuc. 7, 86,
and ἐμοῦ οὐχ ἑκόντος, Soph. Aj. 455, as if ἑκών, ἄκων were. participles.)
Rem. 6. The double-genitive is usually put only where the subject of the par- (428,
ticiple does not stand in the principal sentence in some other case to which the R. 5)
participle might attach itself. Sometimes, however, although the subject of the
participle does so occur, the double-genitive is nevertheless used, in order to give
more prominence to the participial sentence as a special circumstance : Διαβεβη-
κότος ἤδη Περικλέους στρατιᾷ ἐς Εὔβοιαν, ἠγγέλθη αὐτῷ, ὅτι Μέγαρα ἀφέστηκεν
(Thue. 1, 114). Τριῶν θυρῶν οὐσῶν, ἃς ἔδει με διελθεῖν, ἅπασαι ἀνεῳγμέναι ἔτυχον
(Lys. 12, 16). Σὺ μὲν ὡς φάσκοντος εἰδέναι περὶ Sv ἐρωτῶ, προςφέρῃ πρὸς ἐμέ (Pl.
Charm. 165; ἐμοῦ omitted agreeably with the concluding remark in R. 4, a).
Rem. 7. Sometimes a substantive takes a participle as apposition, and then, by
means of a preposition, especially ἅμα or σύν, is attached to a sentence as a defini-
tion of time: “Awa ἡλίῳ ἀνίσχοντι ἦλθε Ἱροκλῆς, ὁ Τευθρανίας ἄρχων (Xen. An. 2,
CHAP. VI.]
[ὃ
181. ]
δ
182.
168 The Partwiple. [ὁ 182.
1, 3). Ἅμα τῷ ἦρι εὐθὺς ἀρχομένῳ τοῦ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους οἱ ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ
᾿Αθηναῖοι ἄραντες ἐκ τῆς Κατάνης παρέπλευσαν ἐπὶ Μεγάρων (Thuc. 6, 94). Hi
ὀργὴ αὕτη ὑπό τε τῶν ἀγαθῶν (the advantages) πεπανθήσεται καὶ σὺν τῷ φόβῳ
λήγοντι ἄπεισι (Aen. Cyr. 4, 5, 21). (Πρὸ ἡλίου δύνοντος, Asch. 1, 12. "Ere
πέμπτῳ μετὰ Συρακούσας οἰκισθείσας, Thuc. 6,3. "Ent Κόδρου βασιλεύοντος, Lye.
84. Ἐπὶ χιύνι πεσούσῃ, Hat. 2, 22, after the falling of snow, after it has snowed.)
Instead of the double-genitive, the accusative (double-accusative
[accusative absolute]) of impersonal verbs is used (6. g. δέον, ἐξόν,
προςῆκον, παρέχον, μέλον, μεταμέλον, also δοκοῦν, δόξαν, as [when,
since] it is, was, decreed) or of passive verbs used impersonally
(with an infinitive added, e. g. προςταχθέν, εἰρημένον, γενόμενον
ἐπ᾿ ἐμοί, as it was im my power, &e.), or of impersonal expressions
of εἰμί and an adjective (e.g. ἀδύνατον ὄν). "The double-accusative
is also used of impersonal expressions (ἐμὲ ποιήσοντα) after_ws and
ὥςπερ, in the opinion, supposition, belief_that, or, as though: “Ὅταν
ἀναγκασθῇ τις δυοῖν κακοῖν τὸ ἕτερον αἱρεῖσθαι, οὐδεὶς τὸ μεῖζον
αἱρήσεται, ἐξὸν τὸ ἔλαττον (viz. αἱρεῖσθαι. Pl. Prot. 358). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
μετεμέλοντο, ὅτι μετὰ τὰ ἐν IlvAw, καλῶς παρασχόν, οὐ ξυνέβησαν
(Thue. 5, 14; a favourable opportunity having offered). ‘Os Κῦρος
ἐγένετο ἐν Μήδοις, συνδόξαν τῷ πατρὶ Kal τῇ μητρί, γαμεῖ τὴν Κυαξάρου
θυγατέρα (Xen. Cyr. 8, 5, 38). Προςταχθέν μοι ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου Μένωνα
τὸν στρατηγὸν ἄγειν εἰς “᾿ὑλλήςποντον, ὠχόμην ἀναγόμενος διὰ τάχους
(Dem. 50, 12; I put to seawith speed). Ot Συρακούσιοι παρεκελεύοντο
κραυγῇ οὐκ ὀλίγῃ χρώμενοι, ἀδύνατον ὃν ἐν νυκτὶ ἄλλῳ τῳ σημῆναι
(Thue. 7,44). κῦρος ἀντιπαρεσκευάζετο ἐῤῥωμένως, ὡς μάχης ἔτι δεῆσον (Aen. Cyr.
6, 1, 26). Οἶμαι τὸ πλῆθος ψηφιεῖσθαι, ἃ βουλόμεθα, ἅμα μὲν ὑμῶν συναγορευόν-
των, ἅμα δὲ καὶ αἰσχρὸν ὃν ἀντιλέγειν (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2, 20). Οἱ πατέρες τοὺς
υἱεῖς ἀπὸ τῶν πονηρῶν ἀνθρώπων εἴργουσιν, ὡς τὴν μὲν τῶν χρηστῶν
ὁμιλίαν ἄσκησιν οὖσαν τῆς ἀρετῆς, τὴν δὲ τῶν πονηρῶν KaTadvow (Xen.
Mem. 1, 2, 20). ᾿Απεβλέψατε πρὸς ἀλλήλους ὡς αὐτὸ ς μὲν ἕκαστος
οὐ ποιήσων τὸ δόξαν, τὸν δὲ πλησίον πιράξοντα (Dem. 14, 15). ἔνιοι
φίλους μὲν κτῶνται ὡς βοηθῶν δεόμενοι, τῶν δ᾽ ἀδελφῶν ἀμελοῦσιν,
ὥςπερ ἐκ πολιτῶν μὲν γιγνομένους φίλους, ἐξ ἀδελφῶν δ᾽ οὐ γυγνομένους
(Xen. Mem. 2, 3, 9)."
Rem. 1. After verbs that themselves express opinion, the double-accusative with
ὡς of personal verbs is very rarely put instead of the double-genitive with ὡς
(δ 181, R. 2); but where the notion of thinking is merely implied in the ὡς, the
double-accusative is even more usual than the double-genitive.
Rem. 2. It is very rare to meet with the double-accusative of a personal expres-
sion without ὡς (with ὄν or a participle which is commonly used impersonally, or
1 Hence τυχόν, properly, it having chanced, as it happened, is used quite as an
adverb, perchance, mayhap.
[PART II.
§ 183.] The Participle. 169
with the neuter of a pronominal word as subject), e.g. προςῆκον ἐμοὶ τοῦ κλήρου
μέρος (Ise. 5, 12). ἜἬἬδη ἀμφοτέροις μὲν δοκοῦν ἀναχωρεῖν, κυρωθὲν δὲ οὐδέν,
δ ‘ epee ς , ͵ ἢ \ , pina)
ὁπηνίκα χρὴ ὁρμᾶσθαι, of Μακεδόνες καταστάντες ἐς αἰφνίδιον φυγὴν ἐχώρουν ἐπ
οἴκου (Thue. 4, 125).}
: Rem. 3. Now and then in this construction the participle dv is omitted: “Apa
τὴν δίαιτάν μου φαυλίζεις ὡς ἧττον μὲν ὑγιεινὰ ἐσθίοντος ἐμοῦ ἢ σοῦ, ἧττον δὲ ἰσχὺν
παρέχοντα, ἢ ὡς χαλεπώτερα (viz. ὄντα) πορίσασθαι τὰ ἐμὰ διαιτήματα τῶν σῶν διὰ
τὸ πολυτελέστερα εἶναι; (Aen. Mem. 1, 6, 5.)
The Tenses of the Participte, present, perfect, and aorist, correspond
\7ith the same tenses of the indicative (so that the aorist 1s a praeter-
tum) : Ἢν μηδὲν φαίνωμαι κακόν ce πεποιηκὼς μηδὲ βουληθείς, οὐ καὶ σὺ
αὖ ὁμολογήσεις ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ μηδὲν ἀδικεῖσθαι; (Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 5, 135 that
have done thee no evil, neither wished I to do thee any.) Usually δείκνυμι
πεποιηκώς, δ. τινὰ πεποιηκότα, corresponding with πεποίηκα or πεποίηκεν as judg-
ment on the completed relation. For examples of the tenses generally, see the
preceding paragraphs. Hence after a verb of past time (since the par-
ticiple denotes the time in reference to the principal action) the par-
ticiple of the present answers to the imperfect, that of the perfect to
the plusquamperfect, that of the aorist to a more remote past (as
aorist, not as perfect) : Ταῦτα εἰπόντες ἀπῆλθον (= ἐπειδὴ ταῦτα εἶπον).
᾿Επέδειξα Αἰσχίνην οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἀπηγγελκότα ἀλλὰ φενακίσανθ᾽ ὑμᾶς
(Dem. 19, 177. = Οὐδὲν ἀληθὲς ἀπήγγελκεν ἀλλ᾽ ἐφενάκισεν ὑμᾶς.
he former said in gencral, the latter of a particular matter of fact).
(Ὁ τὴν γνώμην ταύτην εἰπὼν Πείσανδρος jv, Thuc. 8, 68, as a circumlocution =
εἶπεν. Tis ἣν ὁ βοηθήσας τοὺς Βυζαντίους καὶ σώσας αὐτούς ; τίς δ᾽ ὁ τῇ πόλει λέγων
καὶ γράφων καὶ πράττων ; Dem. 18, 88 = ἐβοήθησεν --- ἔλεγεν --- ἔγραφεν --- ἔπραττεν.)
Rem. 1. Sometimes, even after a verb of present time, the participle present
has the sense of the imperfect, where an anterior time is either plainly denoted by
the context or by the addition of τότε: Πρὸς μὲν τοὺς φίλους τε καὶ πρὸς τοὺς
πολίτας ταῦτα ὑμᾶς παῖδας ὄντας ἐδιδάσκομεν᾽ ὅπως δὲ πολεμίους δύναισθε κακῶς
ποιεῖν, οὐκ οἶσθα μανθάνοντας ὑμᾶς πολλὰς κακουργίας; (Xen. Cyr. 1, 6, 28.)
᾿Αγανακτοῦσιν ὡς μεγάλων τινῶν ἀπεστερημένοι καὶ τότε μὲν (viz. ὅτε νέοι ἦσαν) εὖ
ζῶντες, νῦν δὲ οὐδὲ ζῶντες (Pl. Rep. 1, 829). OF τε ἐν τῷ δικαστηρίῳ τότε δικά-
ζοντες καὶ τῶν ἔξωθεν παρόντων πολλοὶ ταῦτα συνίσασιν (Dem. 30, 92).2
Rem. 2. Sometimes, after ἃ verb in the aorist or historical present, an aorist
participle stands as apposition to the subject, not to denote an earlier but a con-
temporary (single and momentary) action (7 that, by —, and), so that the past is
specially denoted in the action of the participle, just as it would be ina verbum finitum
with and, &c.: Ed ἐποίησας ἀναμνήσας pe (Pl. Phed.60; you did well to remind me;
1 From δόξαν we have also δύξαν ταῦτα (Xen. An. 4, 1, 18) for τούτων δοξάντων
(Xen. Heil. 5, 2, 24).
2 Οἱ οἰχύμενοι, the departed, dead, from οἴχομαι (see § 110 a, R. 2), ὁ φεύγων, the
banished. Poetically, of θνήσκοντες, ἣ τίκτουσα, for οἱ θανόντες, ἡ τεκοῦσα.
CHAP. VI.]
[3
182.]
§
184. with ἄν is used in a hypothetical and potential signification, so that τὸς
170 The Participle. [ὃ 184.
ἐπ ἐπαξέλοιι didst remind me). ᾿Ἤδη πώποτε ἡ μήτηρ ἢ δακοῦσα κακόν τί σοι ἔδωκεν ἢ
λακτίσασα; (Xen. Mem. 2,2,7-) Κίρων ἐκδίδωσι τὴν θυγατέρα Ναυσιμένει πέντε
καὶ εἴκοσι μνᾶς ἐπιδούς (Ise. 8, 8). Ὃ Φρύνιχος πέμπει ὡς τὸν ᾿Αστύοχον, TOY
Λακεδαιμονίων ναύαρχον, κρύφα ἐπιστείλας, ὅτι ᾿Αλκιβιάδης αὐτῶν τὰ πράγματα
φθείρει (Thuc. 8,50; and gave him ἐο understand. Shortly afterwards: Ὃ ᾽Αλκι-.
βιάδης πέμπει εὐθὺς κατὰ Φρυνίχου γράμματα ἐς τὴν Σάμον ἀξιῶν αὐτὸν ἀποθνήσκειν).
Especially note, that with the aorists ἔλαθον and ἔφθην (or λανθάνω and φθάνω as
historical present) the participle annexed (by § 177) for a single, transient action,
is always put in the aorist, and only where an abiding condition (property) is
denoted, stands in the present. This aorist of the participle remains, even where the
principal verb is aorist without preterite signification (subjunctive, imperative, opta-
tive, or infinitive), and with the future indicative. Also with the aorist of περιορᾶν
(§ 178 b) and sometimes of ἐφορᾶν, in all the moods (περείδω, &e.) the participle |
stands in the aorist for a transient action : ἼἜλαθεν ἁφθέντα πάντα καὶ καταφλεχθέντα
(Thuc. 4, 133). Σμικρὸν ἔφθης pe ἐρόμενος (PI. Pol. 293). Ὃ πεζὸς στρατὸς τῶν
᾿Αθηναίων φθάνει ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὰς ᾿Επιπολὰς πρὶν τοὺς Συρακουσίους παραγενέσθαι
(Thue. 6, 97). Φοβούμεθα περὶ Κλεινίᾳ, μή τις POR ἡμᾶς ἐπ᾽ ἄλλο τι ἐπιτήδευμα
τρέψας αὐτοῦ τὴν διάνοιαν (Pl. Euthyd. 275). Βουλοίμην ἄν, ἄκοντος ἀπιὼν Κύρου,
λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ἀπελθών (Xen. An. 1, 3,17). Εὐλαβεῖσθε, ὅπως μὴ πέρα τοῦ δέοντος
σοφώτεροι γενόμενοι λήσετε διαφθαρέντες (Pl. Gorg. 487). Τοὺς ἀνθρώπους λήσομεν ~
ἐπιπεσόντες (Xen. An. 7,3, 43). Δέομαι ὑμῶν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί, βοηθεῖν ἡμῖν καὶ
μὴ περιιδεῖν ὑπὸ τῶν ἐχθρῶν ἀναιρεθέντας (Lys. 19. 64; not to allow us to bee
destroyed, ruined, transient action). —’EAdOopev ἡμᾶς αὐτοὺς παίδων οὐδὲν διαφέ-
ροντες (PL. Orit. 49). Οἶμαί σε πολλὰ μεριμνᾶν ὅπως μὴ λάθῃς σαυτὸν ἀγνοῶν Th
τῶν εἰς στρατηγίαν ὠφελίμων (Xen. Mem. 3, 5, 23). Αἰσχυνοίμην ἄν, εἰ mrepridorpe
τὴν χώραν, ἣν ἡμῖν οἱ πατέρες κατέλιπον, ταύτην τοὺς οἰκέτας τοὺς ἡμετέρους ἔχοντας —
(Lsocr. Archid. 8). (After ἔφθην an occasion for the present can rarely happen.)* —
Rem. 3. With the article, the participle of the aorist sometimes approximates —
to that of the perfect : Οἱ θανόντες. Ὃ τὰ ἔργα παρεσχηκώς, περὶ ὧν εἰσὶν οἱ Adyot,
δικαιότατ᾽ ἂν ταύτην ἔχοι τὴν αἰτίαν, οὐχ ὁ ἐσκεμμένος οὐδ᾽ ὁ μεριμνήσας τὰ δίκαια
λέγειν viv (Dem. 21, 192).
(The Participle with ἄν) The participle of the present and aorist j
corresponds partly with the imperfect and aorist of the indicative with
dv, partly, and that more frequently, with the present and aorist of the
optative with ἄν. (The aor. as in the opt. or inf. with the signification of ~
a dubitative future.) In this manner the participle may stand both
to denote a circumstance (§ 174), and also after the verbs mentioned”
in δ 177, 178, in cireumlocutions with the article, and in the double-
genitive or double-accusative. (By this means, the Greek has often a brevity —
and flexibility of expression unattainable by languages in which such a hypothetical
statement must necessarily be expressed by a finite verb.) a) (Corresponding
with indicat. with ἄν) : Ἡμεῖς ἐπεὶ ἠκούσαμεν, ὅτι ἐστί τι λοιπὸν ἔργον, δ΄
1 Λελήθαμεν ἀμφοτέρων εἰς τὸ μέσον πεπτωκότες (Pl. Theet. 180). Karareivas
(συντείνας) λέγω, ἐρῶ (Pl. Rep. 2, 358), as forcibly as I can; i.e. with exertion of
all my powers (after collecting them and bending them to the task). ἥ
[PART II, ἢ
δ 185.] Connexion of Sentences. ἘΠῚ
δεῖ ἐξεργάσασθαι, συνεσκυθρωπάσαμεν, οὐ φοβούμενοι, ἀλλὰ πεποιῆσθαι
ἂν ἤδη καὶ τοῦτο βουλόμενοι (Xen. Cyr. 6, 2, 21, = ὅτε ἠβουλόμεθ᾽ ἂν
καὶ τ. π.). Φίλιππος Ποτίδαιαν ἑλὼν καὶ δυνηθεὶς ἂν αὐτὸς ἔχειν, εἰ
ἐβουλήθη, ᾿Ολυνθίοις παρέδωκεν (Dem. 23, 107, = ἠδυνήθη ἄν). Εὖ
ἴσθι μηδὲν ἄν με τούτων ἐπιχειρήσαντά σε πείθειν, εἰ δυναστείαν μόνον
καὶ πλοῦτον ἑώρων ἐξ αὐτῶν γενησόμενον (Isocr. Phil. 133). — ὁ)
(Answering to the optative with av): Οἱ “Ἡρακλέους παῖδες τὰς μὲν
ἄλλας πόλεις ὑπερεώρων ὡς οὐκ ἂν δυναμένας βοηθῆσαι ταῖς ἑαυτῶν
συμφοραῖς, τὴν δ᾽ ἡμετέραν ἱκανὴν ἐνόμιζον εἶναι μόνην (1500). Paneg.
56, = οἰόμενοι οὐκ ἂν δύνασθαι = οὐκ ἂν δύναιντο). “O ᾿Αρίστιππος
ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν Κῦρον καὶ αἰτεῖ αὐτὸν εἰς δις χιλίους ξένους καὶ τριῶν
μηνῶν μισθὸν ὡς οὕτως περιγενόμενος ἂν τῶν ἀντιστασιωτῶν (Xen. An,
1,1,10). ἘΕὑρίσκω ταύτην μόνην ἂν γενομένην τῶν παρόντων κακῶν
ἀπαλλαγήν, ἢν ἐθελήσωμεν ἐκείνην τὴν δημοκρατίαν ἀναλαβεῖν, ἣν
Σόλων ἐνομοθέτησεν (Lsocr. Areop.16. On ἢν ἐθελήσωμεν in the con-
dition, see § 135, R. 1, a). Διακεκρίμεθα χωρὶς τάς τε καθαρὰς ἡδονὰς
καὶ τὰς σχεδὸν ἀκαθάρτους ὀρθῶς ἂν λεχθείσας (Pl. Phil. 52 = al
ἀκάθαρτοι ὀρθῶς ἂν λεχθεῖεν). Ἔγώ εἶμι (belong to; am one of those) τῶν
ἡδέως μὲν ἂν ἐλεγχθέντων, εἴ τι μὴ ἀληθὲς λέγω, ἡδέως δ᾽ ἂν ἐλεγξάντων, εἴ Tis τι μὴ ἀληθὲς
λέγοι, οὐκ ἀηδέστερον μέντ᾽ ἂν ἐλεγχθέντων ἢ ἐλεγξάντων (Pl. Gorg. 458). Ξενοφῶν
διαβὰς τὴν χαράδραν σὺν τοῖς λοχαγοῖς ἐσκοπεῖτο, πότερον εἴη κρεῖττον ἀπαγαγεῖν καὶ τοὺς
διαβεβηκότας ἢ καὶ τοὺς ὁπλίτας διαβιβάζειν, ὡς ἁλόντος ἂν τοῦ χωρίου (Xen. An. 5, 2,
8; in the hope that the place might be taken). ᾿Ἐλπίζω τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους καταπλαγέντας
τῷ ἀδοκήτῳ καταλῦσαι ἂν τὸν πλοῦν, ἄλλως τε Kal τοῦ ἐμπειροτάτου τῶν στρατηγῶν
ἄκοντος ἡγουμένου καὶ ἀσμένου ἂν πρόφασιν λαβόντος, εἴ τι ἀξιόχρεων ἀφ᾽ ἡμῶν ὀφθείη
(Thue. 0, 34.; especially as the most experienced of their generals takes the command
against his will, and might, or would, gladly catch at a pretext —). (Χρώμεθα τῷ
νόμῳ τούτῳ εἰδότες καὶ ὑμᾶς ἂν καὶ ἄλλους, ἐν TH αὐτῇ δυνάμει ἡμῖν γενομένους, Op @v-
τας ἂν αὐτό. Thuc.5, 105; double ἄν as with the infinitive, see § 173, R. 1.)}
Rem. The participle of the future with ἄν rests (in the Attic style) on passages
in which the reading is corrupt (λυπήσων or λυπήσας ἄν, not λυπήσων a)”,
(CIS GAN ea dy ΙΣ ΠῚ
Peculiarities in the connexion of Co-ordinate Sentences, and of
Principal and Accessory Sentences. Interrogative Sentences.
a) Co-orDINATE sentences (in prose) are connected copulatively
1 Οὐδὲ ταῦτα Τιμοκράτης ἁπλῶς καὶ ἀδόλως φανήσεται γεγραφώς, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἂν μάλιστά
τις ὑμᾶς ἐξαπατῆσαι βουλόμενος (Dem. 24, 79. Elliptical av, as § 199 ὁ). (Εἶναι τῶν
δυνατῶν ἂν κρῖναι, Pl. Rep. 9, 577, one of those who might be able; ἄν belonging to
the omitted ὄντων.)
[? Kriiger defends this construction.—Ep. ]
CHAP. VII.]
[§
184. ]
185.
172 Connexion of Sentences. [ὁ 185.
"5 by καί, and (τέ, and), τέ ---- καί, or, καί — καί, both — and, and (with
157 negation) by οὐδέ, and also not, οὔτε --- οὔτε, neither —nor. (Té after
the connected word or the first word of the second clause = que.)
Rem. 1. A single τέ for καί, by which the second member is joined to the first as
an addition, is poetical, and very rarely occurs in prose: Τισίαν δὲ Topyiav τε ἐάσομεν
εὕδειν (Pl. Phed. 267). Thucydides uses τέ to connect a new sentence which serves
to corroborate, continue, or enlarge upon the preceding one (almost 1 in the manner
of kai — δέ) : Καὶ μεχρί᾽ πε τ πολ τῆς “Ἑλλάδος τῷ παλαιῷ τρόπῳ νέμεται, περί τε
Λοκροὺς τοὺς ᾿Οζλας καὶ Δἰτωλοὺς καὶ ᾿Ακαρνᾶνας καὶ τὴν ταύτῃ ἤπειρον. Τό τε
σιδηροφορεῖσθαι τούτοις τοῖς ἠπειρώταις ἀπὸ τῆς παλαιᾶς λῃστείας ἐμμεμένηκεν (Thuc.
1,5). (On τέ --- οὔτε, οὔτε ---- τέ, see Negations.)
Rem. 2. By annexing a δέ to καί (καί --- δέ), the new member acquires pro-
minence as a special corroboration and enlargement of the preceding (and —
too, and also): Ta παρατιθέμενα ἀ ἀεὶ ἴσα αὐτῷ τε τῷ Κύρῳ καὶ τοῖς “καλουμένοις ἐ ἐπὶ
ὙΣποῦΣ ἦν" Ὁ τοὺς ἀμφὶ τὸ στράτευμα δὲ ὑπηρέτας ἰσομοίρους πάντων ἀεὶ ἐποίει
(Xen. Cyr. 2,1,51). “Hider Κῦρος ᾿Αρταξέρξην, ὃ ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεύ-
ματος. Kat πάντες δ᾽ of τῶν βαρβάρων ἄρχοντες μέσον ἔχοντες ἡγοῦνται (Xen. An.
1, 8, 22).
Rem. 3. By καί --- καί the two connected members are marked each by itself, as
several and co-ordinate members, more strongly than by the usual τέ — καί, by
which they are rather connected 80. as to form a whole: Καὶ ζῶν καὶ τελευτήσας
(Pi. Rep. 3, 414). Καὶ πρῶτον καὶ μάλιστα (PI. Rep. 3, 415). Kal αὐτοὶ ἐμάχοντο
καὶ τοῖς ΠΡ παρεκελεύοντο (Xen. Cyr. 3,3, 68). Κάλλιστόν τε καὶ ἄριστον. (Xen.
An. 2, 1,79); Κεραυνός τε ὅτι μὲν ἄνωθεν ἀφίεται, δῆλον, ὁρᾶται δ᾽ οὔτ᾽ ἐπιὼν οὔτε
κατασκήψας οὔτε ἀπιών, καὶ ἄνεμοι αὐτοὶ μὲν οὐχ ὁρῶνται, ἃ δὲ ποιοῦσι, φανερὰ ἡμῖν
ἐστιν (Xen. Mem. 4, 8,14). Té — τέ (ΞΞ καί --- καί) 15 frequent 1 in the poets, rare
in prose: ᾿Ελείποντο τῶν στρατιωτῶν οἵτε διεφθαρμένοι ὑ ὑπὸ τῆς χιόνος τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς
οἵ τε ὑπὸ τοῦ ψύχους τοὺς δακτύλους τῶν ποδῶν ἀποσεσηπέτες (Aen. An. A, 5, 12).
Μετὰ τὰ Τρωϊκὰ ἡ Ἑλλὰς ἔτι μετανίστατό τε καὶ κατῳκίζετο. Βοιωτοί τε γὰρ οἱ νῦν
ἑξηκοστῷ ἔτει μετὰ Ἰλίου ἅλωσιν ἐξ "Ἄρνης ἀναστάντες ὑπὸ Θεσσαλῶν τὴν Καδμηΐδα,
γῆν καλουμένην ᾧκισαν, Δωριεῖς, τε ὀγδοηκοστῷ ἔτει ξὺν Ἡρακλείδαις Πελοπόννησον
ἔσχον (Thue. 19). κα ie (eh que) is a poetical licence : Ἴσθι ee δοκῶν
ἐμοὶ καὶ ἘΠ ΤΣ τε το τοὔργον εἰργάσθαι θ᾽, ὅσον μὴ χερσὶ καίνων (Soph. Cid. 0. 841).
Rem. 4. Where τέ. — καί connects two single notions which have a common
article, the τέ is sometimes attached to the article instead of following the first of
the connected terms: τούς τε εὐοπλοτάτους ὅ ἔχων καὶ εὐειδεστάτους (Xen. An, 2, 3,35
having those who were both the best-armed and the best- looking); and so usually
with a common preposition : ἔν τε TO θερμοτέρῳ καὶ ψυχροτέρῳ (Pl. Phil. 24).
(Ἔν τοσαύτῃ τε ἀγρυπνίᾳ καὶ λύπῃ. Pi. Crit. 43.)
Rem. 5. Sometimes τέ is followed, not by καί, but by dé, alone or with another
particle (ἔπειτα δέ, ἅμα δέ, ἅμα δὲ καί, ἔτι δὲ καί, ὡςαύτως δέ, πολὺ μᾶλλον δέ), the
copulative connexion being abandoned, and an adversative put instead of it, either
because the latter member is intended to be made specially prominent, or because
it has become remote from τέ: Ἔπεμψεν ἡ ἡμᾶς ἡ τῶν Σινωπέων πόλις ἐπαινέσοντάς
τε ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ἐνικᾶτε Ἕλληνες ὄντες βαρί βάρους. ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ξυνησθησομένους, ὅτι
διὰ πολλῶν τε καὶ δεινῶν πραγμάτων σεσωσμένοι πάρεστε (Xen. An. 5,5, 8). Τιμαῖός
τε ὅδε, εὐνομωτάτης ὧν πόλεως τῆς ἐν ᾿Ιταλίᾳ Λοκρίδος, οὐσίᾳ καὶ γένει otras ὕστερος
PART II.
ped
͵
§ 186.] Connexion of Sentences. 173
ὧν τῶν ἐκεῖ. τὰς μεγίστας μὲν ἀρχάς τε καὶ τιμὰς ἐν τῇ πόλει μετακεχείρισται, φιλο-
σοφίας δ᾽ αὖ κατ᾽ ἐμὴν δόξαν. ἐπ᾽ ἄκρον ἁπάσης ἐλήλυθε: Κριτίαν δέ που πάντες ot
τῇδ᾽ ἴσμεν οὐδενὸς ἰδιώτην ὄντα ὧν λέγομεν (Pl. Tim. 20). "Ev τε τῇ τῶν ἐπῶν
ποιήσει πολλαχοῦ δὲ καὶ ἄλλοθι (Pl. ἜΝ 3, 394). (On the irregularity where
two members denoted by ré — καί, as co-ordinate, are not accurately connected,
see Anacoluthia, § 216, R. 1.)
Rem. 6. The copulative particle is omitted in oratorical recital, of several (short)
members. (Between two members the omission is rare, and poetical, e.g. Tov
τὸν κρατῆρα πλήσας θῶ ; Ὕδατος, μελίσσης" μηδὲ προςφέρειν μέθυ! Soph. td. C.
481; in prose, in certain particular set phrases of two contrasted words, e. g. ἄνω
ΕΠ ava kal κάτω.) Καί is omitted before εἶτα, ἔπειτα, in the sense and then,
marking continuation and further consequence (especially in conditional and
object- sentences) : Ei προησύμεθα, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, καὶ τούτους τοὺς ἀνθρώ-
πους, εἶτ᾽ Ὄλυνθον Φίλιππος καταστρέψεται, φρασάτω τις ἐμοί, τί τὸ κωλῦον ἔτ᾽ αὐτὸν
ἔσται βαδίζειν, ὅποι βούλεται ; (Dem. I, 12.) Φοβοῦμαι, μὴ πάντες περὶ τῶν ἰδίων
ἕκαστος ὀργιζύμενος κοινὸν ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς ἀγάγωσι τὸν πύλεμον, τὰ τῶν ᾿Αμφικτυόνων͵ δό-
γματα προστησάμενοι, εἶτ᾽ ἐπισπασθῶσιν € εκαστοι πέρα τοῦ συμφέροντος ἑαυτοῖς ἡμῖν
πολεμῆσαι (Dem. ὃ, 19).
6) A copulative connexion with καί (sometimes τέ ---- καί) is used
in Greek, where in a narration it is stated at what point the matter
stood, what had taken place, when a change or new event occurred :
Οὕτω δύ᾽ ἢ τρεῖς δρόμους περιεληλυθότε ἤστην (υὐθύδημος καὶ Διονυσό-
δωρος) K κα l elsepxeTau Κλεινίας (PL Buthy yd. 273). “Extaios ἥκων ἐτύγ-
χανον καὶ ἡ μήτηρ ἰδοῦσά με καὶ προςείπασα τὴν ψυχὴν ἀφῆκεν (Dem.
60, 60). Οἱ “Λακεδαιμόνιοι οὐκ ἔφθησαν πυθόμενοι. τὸν περὶ τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν
πόλεμον καὶ πάντων τῶν ἄλλων ἀμελήσαντ ες ἧκον ἡμῖν ἀμυνοῦντες
(Isocr. Paneg. 86. So often οὐκ ἔφθην ποιήσας --- καί, [ had not got
the start in doing it, when = I had not done it, before —).
¢) Kai also introduces the second term of a comparison with adjectives and adverbs
denoting likeness: Oi ἄλλοι ποιηταὶ οὐχ ὁμοίως πεποιήκασι καὶ “Opnpos,( Pl. Ton, 531;
have not composed). Ομοιός γ᾽, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, Σύλων νομοθέτης Kal Τιμοκράτης
(Dem. 24, 106. ILronical exclamation). Παραπλήσια ἐπεπύνθεσαν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐν
Συρακούσαις, καὶ ἔδρασαν αὐτοὶ ev πύλῳ (Thuc. 7, 71; also οἷάπερ ἔδρασαν). Cf.
§ 37, R. 2.1
A disjunctive connexion is denoted by ἤ, or, ἤ — %, either — or
(ἤτοι --- ἤ). (Εἴτε --- εἴτε, be it that — or that; εἴτε --- εἴτε καί.) ;
Rem. Ἤ, or else, is often used to connect a sentence which assigns what is to be
assumed and will be the consequence, in case a certain condition is not realized, or a
certain command is transgressed: Ti yap δήποτε τῷ μὲν Φιλίππῳ πάντα τἄλλα ποιεῖν
ἐξουσίαν “δώσομεν, ἃ ἂν τῆς ᾿Ἀττικῆς ἀπέχηται, τῷ Διοπείθει δ᾽ οὐδὲ βοηθεῖν τοῖς Θρᾳξὶν
ἐξέσται, ἢ πόλεμον ποιεῖν αὐτὸν φήσομεν ; (Dem. 8, 8; or else we shall say that he is
commencing a war.) When 7 in this manner is attached to an impersonal expression
ΟἹ Onxat in the signification @/so, even, and its various applications, see the Appendix.
CHAP. VII.]
187.
188.
174 Connexion of Sentences. τ [Ὁ 187, 188.
denoting necessity or duty with the infinitive, it is also followed by the infinitive
(in English we should use the future indicative: or else will), although the same
governing term cannot be repeated without alteration: Ξένους mposnket σοι ποὰ-
λοὺς δέχεσθαι καὶ τούτους μεγαλοπρεπῶς, ἔπειτα δὲ πολίτας δειπνίζειν καὶ εὖ ποιεῖν, ἢ
ἔρημον συμμάχων εἶναι (Xen. Uicon. 2, 5).
An adversative connexion of two members contradicting each other
is denoted by ἀλλά, so that either (by way of correction) an affirma-
tive clause is joined to a negative (οὐχ ἅπαξ, ἀλλὰ πολλάκις. οὐ μόνον͵
-᾿ολλὰ καί, or merely ἀλλά, οὐχ ὅπως --- ἀλλά, μὴ OTL — ἀλλά, 566
Negations), or that which is negatived is joined to the affirmative (in
English, and not, only not, in questions and irony: and not rather) :
Πρὸς τὴν τῶν προγόνων ἀρετὴν ἀλλ᾽ οὐ πρὸς τὴν τῶν τριάκοντα πονη-
ρίαν ἁμιλλητέον ἡμῖν ἐστιν (7506). Areop. 73). "Ex δὴ πάντων τῶν
εἰρημένων τίς μηχανή, ὦ Σώκρατες, δικαιοσύνην τιμᾶν ἐθέλειν, ᾧ τις δύνα-
pus ὑπάρχει ψυχῆς ἢ χρημάτων ἢ σώματος ἢ γένους, ἀλλὰ μὴ γελᾶν ἔπαι-
νουμένης ἀκούοντα ; (Pl. Rep. 2, 366; and not rather laugh when one
hears it praised.)* ᾿Αλλὰ yap ἴσως μετὰ μικρᾶς διαβολῆς ἢ φαύλων κατηγόρων
ἐκινδύνευον, GAN οὐ διὰ τῶν ἐῤῥωμενεστάτων καὶ λέγειν καὶ πράττειν (Andoc. 4, 37).
Rem. 1. Sometimes ἀλλά merely adds something that does not correspond with —
what goes before, but without setting it aside: Kal ὁ ᾿Αβραδάτας εἶπεν" ᾿Αλλὰ Ta ©
μὲν καθ᾿ ἡμᾶς ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ, ὦ Κῦρε, καλῶς exe” ἀλλὰ τὰ πλάγια λυπεῖ με (Ken. ~
Cyr..7, 1, 10). The use of ἀλλά (alone or with other particles), further than as ~
serving for the grammatical connexion of the sentence, must be learnt from the
Lexicon: in part the ἀλλά elliptically intimates a thought not expressed.
Rem. 2. With the adversative conjunctions may be reckoned the exceptive —
particle πλήν: Πάντες τὴν πόλιν ἐξέλιπον πλὴν οἱ τὰ καπηλεῖα ἔχοντες, Xen. An. ~
1, 2, 24, except, only not —; πλὴν εἰ, πλὴν ὅτι, πλὴν ὅσον. (ὃ 91, R. 2.)
By δέ is denoted something which is distinguished from what goes
before, but does not set it aside nor contradict it: ᾿υμπονήσετε ἐν τῇ
πόλει ἕκαστοι ἐν μέρει, TOV δὲ πολὺν χρόνον μετ᾽ AAAHAWY οἰκήσετε ἐν
τῷ καθαρῷ (in freedom and rest, Pl. Rep. 7,520). Δέῃ τι βοηθείας 5
ἢ μάτην ἐφοβήθης, οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι οὐκ ἔρχονται (Xen. Cyr. 2, 1,3; and ~
the enemy are not coming 9). Hence δέ serves as a particle of transi-
tion (adverb), to annex each successive term of the discourse which is
not connected with the preceding by another adverb (6. g. a con-
clusive, οὖν, a causal, yap), and does not commence a new series of
thoughts. Answering to a preceding μέν, it forms a partitive con-
1 But sometimes also καὶ οὐ (μή) and simply ov (μή), e.g. ἂν δὲ ποιῇ, μὴ λέ
ee ise) μ ply οὐ (μή), e.g ἢ; μὴ λέγῃ.
2 Occasionally, especially in poets, for ἀλλά: Οὐκ ἔπραξαν, ἃ ἠβούλοντο, ἀπῆλθον
δὲ διὰ τάχους (Lhuc. 6,79). (But never οὐ μόνον --- δέ, or the like.)
[PART IL
ὁ 188.] Connexion of Sentences. 175
nexion, by which two terms or clauses (or, with δέ repeated, several)
are made to stand out in opposition to each other. (Ὁ μὲν βασιλεύς
—, οἱ δὲ στρατιῶται---. Λέγεις μὲν εὖ, πράττεις δ᾽ οὐδέν. Νῦν wév—
τότε δέ —. ἸΙ]ολλὰ μὲν καὶ ἄλλα δύο δὲ μέγιστα. Hi μὲν νικήσεις, ----
εἰ δὲ οἱ θεοὶ ἄλλως βουλεύονται, ----. Opposed or contrasted accessory
definitions, denoted in two independent sentences by μέν and δέ, by
which particles, at the same time the two sentences are connected,
have often a different grammatical form: τῷ μὲν πρώτῳ ἔτει ---, ἐπεὶ
dé —. ΤΙρὶν μὲν τὴν μάχην γενέσθαι ---, νικήσας 6é—. In English,
the relation is denoted sometimes more strongly by ὀπή, however, but
then, sometimes more weakly by aud, or by the mere position of the
words and the accent.) Where μέν and δέ connect principal sentences,
they are often separated to a distance from each other by a number of
clauses attaching themselves to the first clause, in ea nee of
which the connexion becomes less apparent. See e.g. Xen. Anad. τι.
4, 2—5 (τοῖς μὲν πολλοῖς τῶν “Ελλήνων οὐκ ἤρεσκον - — Κλέαρχος δέ,
Cyr. vill. 2, 2—7)."
Rem. 1. Mev and δέ are placed after the word in which the opposition lies
(which word with δέ is always at the beginning of the sentence), or, where the
opposition lies in an entire dependent sentence or a relative peripbrasis, after the
conjunction or the relative (ἐπεὶ δέ, ἃς μέν, ὡς μέν). With a noun with the article
μέν and δέ come after the article, δέ also (more rarely) after the noun: τὰ μὲν
ἀνθρώπεια παρέντες, TA δαιμόνια δὲ σκοποῦντες (Xen. Mem. 1, 1,12. Usually τὰ
δὲ 6.). With prepositions, μέν and δέ are apt to come immediately after the pre-
position (πρὸς μὲν μεσημβρίαν. also with ὁ μέν --- ὁ δέ), e.g. ἐν μὲν apa τοῖς συμφω-
νοῦμεν, ἐν δὲ τοῖς οὔ. (Pu. Phed. 263.) (In the poets some anomalous positions
occur.) ( Hv δ᾽ ἐγώ, ἢ δ᾽ ὅς, after an entire sentence.)
Rem. 2. Especially note the use of μέν and δέ with the article (as demonstrative
pronoun ὁ μέν --- ὁ δέ, in later writers also ὃς prev — ὃς δέ) and demonstrative
adverbs of time and place (τότε pev — τότε δέ, ἔνθα pev — ἔνθα δέ) to denote an
indefinite and general antithesis: the one — the other; this — that (also ὁ μέν τις
— ὁ δέ τις), now — now, here — there. (Ὁ pev — οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, with definite
term in the second member. ᾿Αλγεῖ, τότε δὲ χαίρει, Pl. Phil. 35 = Tére μὲν ἀλγεῖ,
τότε δὲ χαίρει.) In Herodotus, when the opposition with μέν and δέ is between
two predicates of the same subject, in the second member an 6 referred to the
subject is inserted and the δέ attached to this: Γέλων ταύτην μὲν τὴν ὁδὸν ἠμέλησε,
6 δὲ ἄλλης εἴχετο (7, 163, = ἄλλης δ᾽ εἴχετο).
1 Rare constructions are: μεμνημένος, ὁρῶν δ᾽ οὔ (Pl. Theet.164. The first member
put absolutely). (2 παῖ Πηλέως, πατὴρ δ᾽ ἐμός. Eur. Hee.534.) (Καὶ σὲ μέν γ᾽ ἤδη
ἐάσω, τὸν δὲ λόγον τὸν περὶ τοῦ Ἔρωτος πειράσομαι, ὑμῖν διελθεῖν. Pi. Conv. 201 ; 5 μέν
made more prominent by γέ. Εἰ μὲν δὴ δίκαια ποιήσω, οὐκ οἶδα" αἱρήσομαι δ᾽ οὖν ὑμᾶς
καὶ σὺν ὑμῖν, ὅ, τι ἂν δέη, πείσομαι. Xen. 4η.1, 3, ὅ. See likewise the Lexicon for
4) μὲν οὖν, μέντοι, &e.) [They are given in the Appendix of this Translation. }
_ CHAP. VII.]
[8
188.]
176 Connexion of Sentences. [ὃ 188.
they do refrain).
σόφοις (Pl. Rep. 5, 475; the antithesis φιλοσόφους δ᾽ οὔ lies in what precedes).
Rem. 3. [Anaphora.] Often in the opposition of several members, the term (espe-
cially the verb) which is common to all 15 emphatically repeated with μέν and be,
instead of a copulative connexion : Πολλὴ ἀθυμία ny τοῖς Ἕλλησιν, ὁρῶσι μὲν τοῦ
ποταμοῦ τὴν δυςπορίαν, 6 ὁρῶσι δὲ τοὺς διαβαίνειν κωλύσοντας, ὁ ὁρῶσι δὲ τοῖς διαβαίνουσιν
ἐπικεισομένους τοὺς Καρδούχους ὄπισθεν (Xen. An. 4,3,7). Σὺν μὲν σοὶ πᾶσα μὲν ἡμῖν
ὁδὸς εὔπορος, πᾶς δὲ ποταμὸς διαβατύς, ¢ ἄνευ δὲ σοῦ πᾶσα μὲν διὰ σκότους ἡ ὁδός, πᾶς,
δὲ ποταμὸς δύςπορος, πᾶς δὲ ὄχλος φοβερύς (Xen. An. 2, 5, 9).}
Rem. 4. When the opposition denoted by μέν and δέ lies in a relative βθηΐθποθ,.
and to this a demonstrative reference is annexed (of —, οὗτοι, ὅπου ---, ἐνταῦθα),
often μέν and δέ, or one of them, is put twice, fir st with the relative, then with the
demonstrative : Πρωταγύρας λέγει, ὡς, οἷα μὲν ἕκαστα ἐμοὶ φαίνεται, τοιαῦτα μέν
ἐστιν ἐμοί, ΠΣ: σοί, τοιαῦτα δ᾽ αὖ σοί (Pl. Theet. 152). Οἱ μὲν ἂν τῶν σατρα-
πῶν τὸν ἀριθμὸν τὸν τεταγμένον τῶν μισθοφόρων ἔκπλεων ἔχοντες φαίνωνται καὶ
τούτους δοκίμοις ἵπποις καὶ ὅπλοις παρεσκευασμένους παρέχωσι, τούτους μὲν τοὺς
ἄρχοντας ὁ Βασιλεὺς καὶ τιμαῖς αὔξει καὶ δώροις μεγάλοις καταπλουτίζει, ods δ᾽ av
εὕρῃ τῶν ἀρχόντων καταμελοῦντας, τούτους χαλεπῶς κολάζει (Xen. icon. 4, 7 ; only
μέν repeated). The same takes place, when to a participle with the nominative a
demonstrative is afterwards annexed (by ὃ 100 6). Isocr. Paneg. ὃ 60.
Rem. 5. Sometimes μέν is put to denote the opposition to something following,
without a corresponding δέ to follow it, when either (a) this is considered super-
fluous because certain adverbs are used which themselves express an opposition to”
what goes betore (ἔπειτα, εἶτα after πρῶτον μέν, τέως μέν), or (Ὁ) the opposition is ©
more strongly marked by μήν, yet (ye μήν), or μέντοι, however, or (c) the second 7
member, by a less accurate formation of the sentence, follows in a different con-
struction, and is not expressly drawn out as opposition (anacoluthia), or (d) μέν.
refers to an opposition whieh is understood without being expressly mentioned ~
(ἴσως μέν, εἰκὸς μέν, οἶμαι μέν. ὡς μὲν λέγουσιν, ἐγὼ μέν, in opposition to some dife
ferent view or statement w hich is possible) : (a) ” "Eyoye μάλιστα ἐθαύμασα τοῦ
Σωκράτους πρῶτον μὲν τοῦτο, ὡς ἡδέως καὶ εὐμενῶς τῶν νεανίσκων τὸν λόγον ἀπεδέ-
ξατο, ἔπειτα ἡμῶν ὡς ὀξέως ἤσθετο ὃ ἐπεπόνθειμεν ὑπὸ τῶν λύγων (Pl. Phed. 89;
remarked what impression the discourse had made upon us). (b) Οἱ μὲν πάθον ὦ
αδηλον ἦν, εἰ ἀδίκως ἐτετιμώρηντο᾽ ἡ μέντοι ἄλλη πόλις ἐν τῷ παρόντι περιφανῶς.
ὠφέλητο ( (Thuc. 6, 60). (¢. Ken. Anab. 1, 10, 16.) (α) Εἰκὸς μέν, ἔφη. ovs ἄν τις
ἡγῆται χρηστούς, φιλεῖν, ous δ᾽ ἂν πονηρούς, μισεῖν (PZ. Rep. 1, 334). JAp ἂν ὀλίνα.
rotates eee ἐν τῇ ἀρχῇ διαπράξασθαι προςδοκᾶτε ; ἐγὼ γὰρ μὲν οὐκ ἂν οἶμαι,
(Lys. 26, 7).° (Other irregularities in the construction of the members denoted
by pev oa δέ, see under Anacoluthia, § 216, R. 1.)
Rem. 6. The particle δέ in the more ancient poetical language (Homer) is
frequently used with a certain emphasis (akin to δὴ) in the apodosis after relative
sentences or conjunctions. In Attic this is rare (especially in prose), and occurs
only where the apodosis after a conjunction or a relative adverb of comparison
(ὡς, ὥςπερ) is made to stand out with special emphasis by a demonstrative word
or a personal pronoun denoting an opposition to some other term, and in the same
manner after a participial construction containing an opposition to the leading
1 Bia μέν, ὅμως δ᾽ ἀπέχονται (Pl. Rep. 10, 607; they refrain perforce, but still
2 Τούτους οὖν πάντας φιλοσόφους φήσομεν ; Οὐδαμῶς, εἶπον, ἀλλ᾽ ὁμοίους μὲν φιλο:
[PART II.
δ 189.] Connexion of Sentences. 177
sentence: Εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ μὴ γιγνώσκω μήτε τὰ ὅσια μήτε τὰ δίκαια, ὑμεῖς δὲ διδάξατε με
(Xen. Hell, 4, 1, 33). ᾿Ἐπεὶ δὲ γῇ ἔκειτο τλήμων (Ioxaarn), δεινὰ δ᾽ ἢ ἦν τἀνθένδ᾽
ὁρᾶν (Soph. Cd. R. 1267 ; ; ef. Thuc. 5, 16). ᾿Επιτιμῶ ταῖς povapxias, ὅτι, δέον
τοὺς μονάρχους τὴν φρόνησιν ἀσκεῖν μᾶλλον τῶν ἄλλων, οἱ δὲ χεῖρον παιδεύονται τῶν
ἰδιωτῶν (Lsocr. Paneg. 71).
Rem. 7. Especially note the use of τὸ δέ (the article as pronoun) to attach a
sentence which, in opposition to some less correct statement which has μέν: been
made, says W hat i is the true state of the case (but in truth; whereas really): Οἴονταί
με ἑκάστοτε οἱ παρόντες ταῦτα αὐτὸν εἶναι σοφὸν, ἃ ἃ ἂν ἄλλον ἐξελέγξω: τὸ δὲ κινδυνεύει.
ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, τῷ ὄντι ὁ θεὸς σοφὸς εἶναι καὶ ἐν τῷ X χρησμῷ τούτῳ τοῦτο λεγεῖν,
ὅτι ἡ ἀνθρωπίνη σοφία ὀλίγου τινὸς ἀξία ἐστίν (Pl. Apol. 23). The expression
originates in the omission of a sentence merely intimated by τό (τὸ δὲ ὧδε ἔχει"
κινδυνεύει κιτιλ., Pl. Theat. 166).
a) The Greeks not unfrequently use two sentences connected by
μέν and δέ, when the scope of the discourse does not refer to each
sentence by itself, but to the connexion of the two and their con-
joint matter ; which relation would be more distinctly expressed by
making the sentence with μέν a subordinate sentence, appended by
a conjunction to that with 6é Two sentences connected in this
manner are put either interrogatively (inquirmg whether both can
subsist together; whether the one beside the other is probable),
or negatively (so that the negation of both precedes), or they are
joined in the infinitive, accusative with infinitive, or by εἰ (ὡς, ὅτι)
to a statement denoting something absurd or wrong. Sometimes in
this manner a clause which asserts something actual, and a hypo-
thetical clause with ἄν are connected, it being asked whether the
actual state of the case and the supposition accord and can be con-
ceived to subsist together: Τί οὖν ; οἱ μὲν apa νίκης. ἕνεκα πάλης καὶ
δρόμου ἐτόλμησαν ἀπέχεσθαι λεγομένου πρώγμωατος ὑπὸ τῶν πολλῶν
εὐδαίμονος, οἱ δὲ ἡμέτεροι παῖδες ἀδυνατήσουσι καρτερεῖν πολὺ καλλίονος
ἕνεκα νίκης ; (Pi. Legg. 8, 840.) “Ap ἐξ ἴσου οἴει εἶναι σοὶ TO δίκαιον
καὶ ἡμῖν (τοῖς νόμοις), καὶ ἅττ᾽ ἂν ἡμεῖς σε ἐπιχειρῶμεν ποιεῖν, καὶ σοὶ
ταῦτα ἀντποιεῖν οἴει δίκαιον. εἶναι ; ; ἢ πρὸς μὲν ἄρα σοι τὸν πατέρα οὐκ
ἐξ i ἴσου ἣν τὸ δίκαιον καὶ “πρὸς τὸν δεσπότην, εἴ σοι ὧν ἐτύγχανεν, ὥςτε,
ἅπερ πάσχοις, ταῦτα καὶ ἀντιποιεῖν, πρὸς δὲ τὴν πατρίδα ἄρα καὶ τοὺς
νόμους ἐξέσται σοι; (Pl. Crit. 50.) (By ἄρα, then, the thing inquired about
is denoted as the result of a reasoning and a consideration, sometimes i in one clause,
sometimes in both.) Εδει Αἰσχίνην, εἰ ἀδικοῦντά με ἑώρα τὴν πόλιν, τ ταῖς
ἐκ τῶν νόμων τιμωρίαις παρ᾽ αὐτὰ τἀδικήματα χρῆσθαι, εἰ μὲν εἰςαγγελίας
ἄξια πράττοντά μ ἑώρα, εἰξαγγέλλοντα, εἰ δὲ γράφοντα παράνομα, παρα-
νόμων γραφόμενον" οὐ γὰρ δήπου Κτησιφῶντα μὲν δύναται διώκειν Ov
ἐμέ, ἐμὲ δέ, εἴπερ ἐξελέγξειν ἐνόμιζεν, αὐτὸν οὐκ ἂν ἐγράψατο (Dem. 18, 14.
For it cannot be supposed (ov) that he can indeed prosecute Clesiphon, but would not
have impeached me, if — ; or, that if he can prosecute Ct., he would not also have im-
CHAP. VII. ] N
178 Connexion of Sentences. [$ 190.
[8 peached me. Τὰ this way the connexion of an affirmative and a negative clause is
189.] often negatived.)! Οὐ δεινόν, ἄλλοις μέν τισι θεῶν ὕμνους καὶ παιᾶνας
εἶναι ὑπὸ τῶν ποιητῶν πεποιημένους, τῷ δ᾽ "ἔρωτι, τηλικούτῳ ὄντι καὶ
τοσούτῳ θεῷ, μηδὲ ἕνα πώποτε πεποιηκέναι μηδὲν ἐγκώμιον; (PL. Conv.
1771.) Πάνυ θαυμαστὸν Ἰζύρῳ ἐδόκει εἶναι, εἰ οἱ μὲν βάναυσοι ἴσασι τῆς
ἑαυτοῦ τέχνης ἕκαστος τῶν ἐργαλείων τὸ ὄνομα, ὁ δὲ στρατηγὸς οὕτως
ἠλίθιος ἔσοιτο, ὥςτε οὐκ εἴσεται τῶν ὑφ᾽ ἑαυτῷ ἡγεμόνων τὰ ὀνόματα
(Xen. Cyr. 5, 8, 47. In the first member after the preteritum, the
indicative retained, in the second the optative put; see § 132 ὦ and ὁ).
Δεινὰ ἂν εἴην εἰργασμένος, εἰ, ὅτε μέν με οἱ ἄρχοντες ἔταττον, τότε μέν,
οὗ ἐκεῖνοι ἔταττον, ἔμενον (fact), τοῦ δὲ θεοῦ τάττοντος, ἐνταῦθα δὲ
φοβηθεὶς θάνατον λίποιμι τὴν τάξιν (should now desert, Pl. Apol. 28).
On the double μέν and δέ, see § 188, R. 4.
Rem. 1. In the same manner is denoted the prohibition of acting in two cases
so that the actions do not accord: Μὴ τοίνυν, ἂν μὲν εἴπῃ τις (brings forward, pro-
poses) παράνομα, ὀργιζόμενοι φαίνεσθε, ἂν δὲ ποιῇ, μὴ λέγῃ; πράως διάκεισθε (Dem.
21, 183).
Rem. 2. Sometimes some inaccuracy appears in the construction of the two
members when they ought to be dependent (e. g. od δεινόν, εἰ —), in case the first
is somewhat long, and the connexion is become less perspicuous, so that e. g. the
second member is added as an independent question or statement, or changed in
some other way (anacoluthia). See e.g. Lysias xii. ὃ 36. Xen. Cyrop. iv. 2, 46.
6) Sometimes, partly in an apodosis, partly (especially with ὥςτε) before that
which is the main thing to be affirmed or denied, a co-ordinate member with μέν
(and δέ following) is inserted, containing a remark by-the-bye of something which
obtains at the same time, which should more accurately have been attached by a
conjunction (while, whereas, although, as) or in a participial construction : ᾿Επεὶ εἶδον
of Ἕλληνες τό τε Φαρναβάζου ἱππικὸν ἔτι συνεστηκὸς καὶ τοὺς Βιθυνοὺς ἱππέας πρὸς
τούτους ἀθροιζομένους, ἀπειρήκεσαν μέν, ὅμως δὲ ἐδύκει καὶ ἐπὶ τούτους ἰτέον εἶναι οὕτως,
ὅπως δύναιντο (Xen. An. 6, 8, 30; they thought, although they were weary, yet —).
Οὕτω μοι δοκεῖς καλῶς λέγειν, ὦ Σώκρατες, ὥςτε πρύσθεν μὲν οὐ προςιέμην δανείσασθαι, —
εἰδώς, ὅτι, ἀναλώσας, 6, τι ἂν λάβω, οὐχ ἔξω ἀποδοῦναι, viv δέ μοι δοκῶ εἰς ἔργων ὦ
ἀφορμὴν ὑπομενεῖν αὐτὸ ποιῆσαι (Xen. Mem. 2, 7, 11; that although hitherto I
never took to borrowing, nevertheless I think that I—).
§ When the nature or quality of an action or a relation is first
190. denoted in a merely general way by a demonstrative pronoun in the
neuter (τοῦτο, τόδε, τοιόνδε, τοιοῦτον, ταὐτόν, as object or as subject to
γίγνομαι), by a demonstrative adverb, by an adjective of reference
(τοὐναντίον, τὰ ἀντίστροφα), or a similar expression, in order to be
then more precisely assigned in a new sentence, the latter in Greek —
is attached without any connecting particle, in the same mood, even in
the infinitive. (Apposition of an entire sentence.) Τί δέ ; οἱ κόσμιοι
1 Οὐχ ὁ μέν, ὁ δ᾽ οὔ (ἀλλ᾽ ἅπαντες). Denial of a partitive representation, because
the truth demands a universal statement.
[PART Il.
§ 191.] Connexion of Sentences. 179
᾽ “ » ShrN “ , ? ἣ \ y Ἢ ’
αὐτῶν οὐ ταὐτὸν τοῦτο πεπόνθασιν, ἀκολασίᾳ τινὶ σώφρονές εἰσιν; (ἐ ἰ.
Phed. 68.) Δέδοικα, μὴ τοὐναντίον, οὗ βούλομαι, ποιῶ, σφόδρα ἀκρι-
βῶς διεκνύναι πειρώμενος διοχχλῶ πάλαι τοῦτ᾽ αὐτοὺς ὑμᾶς εἰδότας (Dew.
19, 329). ‘Qs οἱ τὴν δικαιοσύνην ἐπιτηδεύοντες ἄκοντες ἐπιτηδεύουσι, μάλιστ᾽ ἂν
αἰσθανοίμεθα, εἰ τοιόνδε ποιήσαιμεν τῇ διανοίᾳ, δόντες ἐξουσίαν ἑκατέρῳ ποιεῖν, ὅ, τι ἂν
βούληται, τῷ τε δικαίῳ καὶ τῷ ἀδίκῳ, εἶτ᾽ ἐπακολουθήσαιμεν θεώμενοι, ποῖ ἡ ἐπιθυμία
ἑκάτερον ἄξει (Pl. Rep. 2, 359). Ἢ αὐλητικὴ οὐ δοκεῖ σοι τοιαύτη τις εἶναι, ὦ Καλ-
λίκλεις, τὴν ἡδονὴν μόνον διώκειν ; (Pl. Gorg. 501.) “Ορῶμεν, ὅσοι ἂν μακρότερον τῇ
φιλοσοφίᾳ ἐνδιατρίψωσι, τοὺς μὲν πλείστους καὶ πάνυ ἀλλοκότους γιγνομένους, τοὺς δὲ
ἐπιεικεστάτους δοκοῦντας ὅμως τοῦτό γε ὑπὸ τοῦ ἐπιτηδεύματος, οὗ σὺ ἐπαινεῖς, πάσχον-
τας, ἀχρήστους ταῖς πύλεσι γιγνομένους (Pl. Rep. 6, 437).
With declarative object-sentences, denoted by ὅτι or ὡς (see § 159,
R. 3), as also with dependent questions, it should be remarked, that in
Greek the subject of the object-sentence is often drawn (by an attrac-
tion) as object into the principal sentence, and then the accessory sen-
tence attached, whereby the object, which ¢2/¢ then was incomplete, is
fully and properly represented*. This attraction often takes place
although the principal verb (a verb of saying, thinking, or knowing) can-
not otherwise in itself be constructed with an object-accusative of the
kind denoted by the substantive, e. g. not λέγειν τινά for mepi twos. Ko-
pos ἤδει βασιλέα, ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεύματος (Xen. An. 1,
8,21). Τνώσῃ τὸν Ἡσίοδον, ὅτι τῷ ὄντι ἦν σοφὸς λέγων πλέον εἶναί πως
ἥμισυ παντός (Pl. Rep. 5,466). Φίλιππος ἔφηπυνθάνεσθαι τοὺς ‘Operas,
ὡς νοσοῦσι καὶ στασιάζουσιν ἐν αὑτοῖς (Dem. ὃ, 13). Οἶσθα Εὐθύδημον
ὁπόσους ὀδόντας ἔχει; (Pl. Luthyd. 894.) Τὰς τῶν πατέρων ἁμαρτίας
ἀφίετε διὰ τοὺς παΐδας, ods οὔπω ἴστε εἴτε ἀγαθοὶ εἴτε κακοὶ ἡβήσαντες
γενήσονται (Lys. 20, 54). (λνεμνήσθην τοῦ Κόννου, ὅτι μοι κἀκεῖνος χαλεπαίνει
ἑκάστοτε, ὅταν αὐτῷ μὴ ὑπείκω. Pl. Huthyd. 299.)
Rem. 1. Sometimes the subject of the accessory sentence is drawn into the
principal as the subject to a passive or intransitive verb, which otherwise should
stand impersonally : Περὶ rod μήθ᾽ ἑαλωκότος μήτ᾽ ἐγνωσμένου, πότερον δέδρακεν ἢ
οὐ καὶ πότερ᾽ ἄκων ἢ ἑκών, πάνδεινον γράφειν, ὡς ἐκδοτέον τοῖς ἐγκαλοῦσιν (Dem.
23,79; about a man —, of whom it is not yet known whether ---. (Οἱ Λακε-
δαιμόνιοι σχηματίζονται ἀμαθεῖς εἶναι, iva μὴ κατάδηλοι ὦσιν, ὅτι copia τῶν “Ἑλλήνων
περίεισιν, Pl. Prot. 342 = κατάδηλοι ὦσι σοφίᾳ --- περιόντες, by ὃ 177.) As the
subject of the accessory sentence becomes the accusative to the principal verb, so
it may sometimes become the objective genitive to a substantive: Ἦλθε τοῖς
᾿Αθηναίοις εὐθὺς ἡ ἀγγελία τῶν πόλεων, ὅτι ἀφεστᾶσιν (Thuc.1,61; the tidings that
the cities have revolted).
Rem. 2. A somewhat similar attraction sometimes takes place in sentences
= , ἘΞ . > . > aA c
with μή and ὅπως after verbs denoting fear and apprehension: Ἰσχυρῶς ἔδεισαν οἱ
Ἕλληνες τὸν Ἰάσονα, μὴ τύραννος γένοιτο (Xen. Hell. 6, 4, 32).
[} E.g. as in nosti Marcellum, quam tardus sit, the proper object is, not Mar-
cellum alone, but Marcellum quam tardus sit. |
- CHAP. VII.] N 2
193.
180 Connexion of Sentences. [ὃ 192, 193.
a) The particle ὅτι, which denotes a declarative object-sentence, 15
often also put before a person’s own speech, when it is given in orat.
recta and introduced by a verbum declarandi: ᾿Ηρώτησεν ὁ Κῦρος τὸν
2 , ” i " \ , / c \ 5 /
Ορόντην: "Ete οὖν av φίλος καὶ πιστός μοι γένοιο ; “O δὲ ἀπεκρίνατο
“ »Ὸ) > / 9 ae) / > δ 4 \ t πὶ
ὅτι. Οὐδ᾽ εἰ γενοίμην, ὦ Κῦρε, σοί γ᾽ ἂν ἔτι ποτὲ δόξαιμι (Xen. An.
1, 6, 8). Τῷ ταῦτα εἰπόντι ἐγὼ ἂν δίκαιον λόγον ἀντείποιμι, ὅτι: Οὐ
καλῶς λέγεις, ὦ ἄνθρωπε, εἰ οἴει κίνδυνον ὑπολογίζεσθαι τοῦ ζῆν ἢ
τεθνάναι ἄνδρα, ὅτου τι καὶ σμικρὸν ὄφελος (Pl. Apol. 28). (Α΄--
εκρινάμην, ὅτι οὔ, I answered, No.)
6) A report of a person’s speech commenced in the oratio obliqua
(in the infinitive, or with ὅτι or ὡς) often (even in a sentence dependent
on the oratio obliqua) passes suddenly into the oratio recta, so that
the words of the speaker are given in their own proper form : Κῦρος.
ἀπεκρίνατο, ὅτι ἀκούει, ᾿Α βροκόμαν ἐπὶ τῷ Εὐφράτῃ ποταμῷ εἶναι, ἀπ-
έχοντα δώδεκα σταθμούς: πρὸς τοῦτον οὖν ἔφη βούλεσθαι ἐλθεῖν: κἂν μὲν
ἢ ἐκεῖ, τὴν δίκην ἔφη χρήζειν ἐπιθεῖναι αὐτῷ, ἂν δὲ φεύγῃ, ἡμεῖς ἐκεῖ
πρὸς ταῦτα βουλευσόμεθα (Xen. An. 1, 3, 20). Μετὰ τοῦτον ἄλλος
ἀνέστη, ἐπιδεικνὺς μὲν τὴν εὐήθειαν τοῦ τὰ πλοῖα αἰτεῖν κελεύοντος, ἔπι-
δεικνὺς δέ, ὡς εὔηθες εἴη ἡγεμόνα αἰτεῖν παρὰ τούτου, ᾧ χλυμαινόμεθα
τὴν πρᾶξιν (Xen. An. 1, 3, 10). Λέγοντος ἐμοῦ ταῦτα ἀποκρίνεταί μοι
ΠΠολυκλῆς, ὅτε ὁ συντριήραρχος αὐτῷ οὐχ ἥκοι ἐπὶ τὴν ναῦν' οὔκουν
παραλήψομαι μόνος τὴν τριήρη (Dem. 50, 37; therefore [sad he] «1
(Polycles) will not undertake the trireme by myself, 1. 6. therefore he
would, &e.).
Rem. On the use of ὅτι in the signification, that, the circumstance that, see
§ 170 a. R., and below, § 197. On the sense because, see the Lexicon [and Appen-
dix]. Note also the breviloquentia, by which ὅτι and ὡς obtain the signification,
Sor proof that, to show that : Ὅτι δὲ οὕτω ταῦτα ἔχει, λέγε μοι τὸ τοῦ Καλλισθένους
ψήφισμα (Dem. 18,37). ‘Qs δ᾽ εἰκότα ποιοῦμεν, καὶ τάδ᾽ ἐννοήσατε (Xen. Hell. 2,
3, 34; consider also what follows).
The verbs δοκῶ, δοκεῖ μοι, οἶμαι are often put before a sentence or are inserted in it,
without grammatical connexion, to denote the thing said as opinion or conjecture ;
in the same manner we have οἴει (οἴεσθε) with a question, and εὖ ἴσθι (ἴστε) with an
assurance; also φημί, φασίν, εἶπέ μοι are inserted in the same way. ᾿Αγαθοὺς ἄρα
ἄνδρας οὐκ ἐβούλετο Περικλῆς ποιῆσαι τοὺς υἱεῖς ; Δοκῶ μέν. ἐβούλετο, ἀλλὰ μὴ ov διδα-
κτὸν ἢ (PL. Menon, 94; but I fear it is not ; see ὃ 1248. R.2). Νεώτερος πρεσβύτερον
οὔτε ἄλλο βιάζεσθαι ἐπιχειρήσει ποτὲ οὔτε τύπτειν, ὡς TO εἰκός" οἶμαι δέ, οὐδὲ ἄλλως
> , Dp YN ie yee \ a Geen 5 ” > ,
ἀτιμάσει (Pl. Rep. 5, 465).! ᾿Ανόνητα δὴ πονῶν ὁ ἀνὴρ οὐκ, οἴει, ἀναγκασθήσεται
τελευτῶν αὑτόν τε μισεῖν καὶ τὴν τοιαύτην πρᾶξιν; (PL. Rep. 6, 486.)
2mm. The expression δῆλον ὅτι, which originally introduces a declarative object- —
1 “Ounpos ᾿Ὠκεανόν τε θεῶν γένεσίν φησι καὶ μητέρα Τηθύν" οἶμαι δὲ καὶ Ἡσίοδος (viz.
φησίν. PL. Crat. 402), but more frequently where the verb is omitted in this manner:
οἶμαι δὲ καὶ Ἡσίοδον (viz. φάναι). Ταῦτα ἐγώ σοι ov πείθομαι, ὦ M'Anre, οἶμαι δ᾽ οὐδὲ
ἄλλον ἄνθρωπον οὐδένα (Pl. Apol. 25).
[PART II.
§ 194.] Connexion of Sentences. 181
sentence, is then also appended after a sentence with the sense of a mere adverb,
assuredly : ᾿Ἑλάττω ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ἀπεδήμησας ἢ οἱ χωλοί τε καὶ τυφλοὶ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι
ἀνάπηροι: οὕτω σοι διαφερόντως τῶν ἄλλων ᾿Αθηναίων ἤρεσκεν ἡ πόλις καὶ ἡμεῖς οἱ
νόμοι δῆλον ὅτι (Pl. Crit. 53, and, of course, we Laws likewise). (Δηλονότι.) The
expression εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι (οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, εὖ ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι) is usually inserted in the sentence before
the verb, so that the proper signification clearly appears (e. g. Ei rus ἔροιτο: Εἶπέ μοι,
τῆς νῦν οὔσης Ἑλλάδος ταυτησὶ ἔσθ᾽ ὅ, τι φκεῖτ᾽ ἂν ὑπὸ τῶν νῦν ἐχύντων “Ἑλλήνων,
εἰ μὴ τὰς ἀρετὰς ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν ἐκείνας οἱ Μαραθῶνι καὶ Σαλαμῖνι παρέσχοντο οἱ ἡμέτεροι
πρόγονοι ; οὐδ᾽ ἂν εἷς εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι φήσειεν, Dem. 19, 312); but 10 remains with the
infinitive and participle (with the signification of an adverb of assurance) ; 6. g. ὥςτε
πάντας ὑμᾶς εἰδέναι τὰ μετὰ ταῦτα καὶ ἐλεεῖν εὖ οἶδ᾽ ὅτι τοὺς ἀτυχεῖς καὶ ταλαιπώρους
ἀνθρώπους, Dem. 19, 309. (Μονώτατος γὰρ εἶ σὺ πάντων αἴτιος, καὶ τῶν κακῶν καὶ
τῶν ἀγαθῶν, εὖ ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι, Arist. Pl. 183.)
a) Conditional propositions are denoted by εἰ, ἐάν (ἤν, ἄν, see § 125,
R. 1); εἴπερ, ἐάνπερ, εἴγε (if that is: if at least ; wenn sonst, falls
dann, wenigstens wenn ') put the condition with a peculiar prominence.
A plurality of cases in which something equally holds good, are de-
by ” o τι 2 i - “4 9/7 Sul?
noted by εἴτε --- εἴτε [sive — sive] (εἴτ᾽ οὖν, or be it that), ἐάν Te — ἐᾶν
/
re, more strongly by εἴτε (ἐάν τε) Kat — εἴτε καί (e.g. εἴτε καλὸς εἴτε
πλούσιος εἴτε καὶ γενναῖός ἐστιν εἴτε καὶ τἀναντία τούτων, Pl. Menon, 11.
Edy τε καὶ ἀντιφιλῆται ἐών τε καὶ μισῆται, Pl. Lys. 212).
Rem. 1. More rare combinations are εἴτε --- ἤ, ei — εἴτε (the latter poetical).
On εἴ and εἴτε, as interrogative particles, see § 199 ὁ and e.
Rem. 2. Especially note the use of εἰ, εἴ πως, ἐάν πως, in the sense, whether per-
chance (= to try whether —). Διαλύσας τὸν ξύλλογον ὁ ᾿Αρχίδαμος Μελήσιππον
πρῶτον ἀποστέλλει εἰς Tas ᾿Αθήνας, ἄνδρα Σπαρτιάτην, εἴ τι ἄρα μᾶλλον ἔνδοιεν οἱ
᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὁρῶντες ἤδη σφᾶς (τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους) ἐν ὁδῷ ὄντας (Thuc. 2,12). Οἱ
Λακεδαιμόνιοι προθυμίᾳ τε πάσῃ ἐχρῶντο καὶ παρακελευσμῷ, εἴ πως ὠσάμενοι τοὺς
᾿Αθηναίους ἕλοιεν τὸ τείχισμα (Thuc. 4,11). Βούλει οὖν δεώμεθα τοῦ ἀντιλέγοντος
ἀκολουθῆσαι ἡμῖν, ἐάν πως ἡμεῖς ἐκείνῳ ἐνδειξώμεθα, ὅτι οὐδέν ἐστιν ἐπιτήδευμα ἴδιον
γυναικὶ πρὸς διοίκησιν πόλεως (Pl. Rep. 5, 465).
Rem. 3. In animated and concise discourse, the condition is sometimes ex-
pressed in an independent sentence, as an assumed position or as a question : Hapa
πᾶσιν ἀνθρώποις ὁρῶ διωρισμένα καὶ τεταγμένα πως τὰ τοιαῦτα : ᾿Αδικεῖ τις ἑκών"
ὀργὴ καὶ τιμωρία κατὰ τούτου. ᾿Εξήμαρτέ τις ἄκων: συγγνώμη ἀντὶ τῆς τιμωρίας
τούτῳ (Dem. 18, 274). Sometimes to one condition there is added another, οἵ ἃ
more special and precise character: Ei ἐτύγχανόν σε ἐρωτῶν, tis ἐστι τῶν ζωγρά-
φων Zevéis, εἴ μοι εἶπες, ὅτι ὁ τὰ ζῶα γράφων, dp’ οὐκ ἂν δικαίως σε ἠρόμην, 6 τὰ ποῖα
τῶν ζώων γράφων καὶ ποῦ ; (Pl. Gorg. 453; — and then thow shouldest say —.)
6) A negative condition is denoted by εἰ μή, which also indicates
. ‘a ' “ap ᾽ Ἀ , a
an exception: if not, except if, unless (et μὴ ἄρα, unless after all, unless
perchance, sometimes ironically; of a case which is possibly to be
> ? ae ° Yi i X lo)
excepted also εἰ μὴ εἰ, nisi si, εἰ μὴ dpa εἰ : ‘O χρηματιστικὸς τὴν τοῦ
[2 M. therefore rejects (I think correctly) Hermann’s ‘wide difference’ between εἴγε
as assuming the ¢rwth of the condition), and εἴπερ (as leaving it dowbtful).—T. K. A. |
if 5 |
CHAP. VII.]
194.
[3
194.]
182 Connexion of Sentences. [ὃ 194.
lal e \ xX δ ἴω / > Ν 2 / Λ 3 > δ᾽ Μ
τιμᾶσθαι ἡδονὴν ἢ τὴν τοῦ μανθάνειν οὐδενὸς ἀξίαν φήσει εἶναι, εἰ μὴ εἰ
τι αὐτῶν ἀργύριον ποιεῖ. Pl. ορ. 9, ὅ81}. Εἰ δὲ μή, without ἃ verb, denotes,
not only the opposite to an affirmative cancion preceding (?/ not), but to the pre-
ceding condition and discourse generally, even if that be negative (in the opposite
case) “otherwise : Ἴσως οὐδεὶς οὐδέν σε κακὸν ἐρεῖ, ἂν μή τινα λυπῇς" εἰ δὲ μή, ἀκούσει
πολλὰ καὶ ἀνάξια σαυτοῦ (Pl. Crit. 53, = = ἂν δέ τινα λυπῆς). Πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, ὦ Κῦρε,
μὴ οὕτω λέγε: εἰ δὲ μή. οὐ θαῤῥοῦντά μ᾽ ἕξεις (Xen. Cyr. 3, 1, 35). Conversely, | εἰ δέ
especially after εἰ μὲν βούλει (βούλεσθε) for εἰ δὲ pn: Λέγω πάλιν, ἃ ἅπερ τότε. εἰ μὲν
βούλεσθε, ὡς παίζων, εἰ δ᾽, ὡς σπουδάζων (Pl. Legg. 3, 688). (Εἰ μὴ διὰ τὴν ᾿Αρχι-
δάμου μέλλησιν, Thue. 2, 18, if it had not been for A.’s delaying ; but for that.)
Rem. When what seems to be the natural and desirable condition, what one
must expect and assume, and upon which the consequence follows as matter of
course, has first been put with εἰ μέν ; and then, by εἰ δὲ μή, its opposite, and what
Ww vould then follow, the apodosis to the first condition is often entirely omitted (e. g.
εὖ ἔχει, then is vt well, or generally, well and good) : Εἰ μὲν τοίνυν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης,
καὶ διαγιγνώσκειν σε τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς καὶ τοὺς κακοὺς ἐδίδαξεν: εἰ δὲ μή, τί σοι ὄφελος
ὧν ἔμαθες ; (Xen. Mem. 3, 1,9 ὃ .) ᾿Ελθόντων τῶν Λακώνων ἔλεξε Χαρμῖνος" Εἰ μὲν
σύ τι a ὦ Μηδόσαδες, πρὸς ἡμᾶς λέγειν: εἰ δὲ μή, ἡμεῖς πρὸς σὲ ἔχομεν (Xen.
AN ἢ. 1. VO):
ῶ W ith verbs which express a feeling of approbation and joy
(pride), or of disapprobation and surprise (shame), the Greeks often
use a sentence with εἰ, instead of an object-sentence with ὅτε (that, for
that, because), even when an actual fact is denoted, this being con-
sidered as the condition on which the feeling depends : Μὴ τοῦτο μεῖον
δόξητε ἔχειν, εἰ οἱ Κυρεῖοι, “πρόσθεν σὺν ἡμῖν ταττόμενοι, νῦν ἀφεστή-
serge ETL γὰρ οὗτοι KAK LOVES εἰσι τῶν ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν ἡττημένων (Aen. An. 3,
2, 17). Τηλικούτων κακῶν αἴτιος γεγενημένος Δημοσθένης οὐκ ἀγαπᾷ,
εἰ μὴ δίκην δέδωκεν, AAN εἰ μὴ καὶ χρυσῷ στεφάνῳ στεφανωθήσεται, ἀγα-
νακτεῖ (isch. 3, 147; D. does not think himself well off to have
escaped the punishment ; is not satisfied with having —). οἱ ἐπίτροποι
οὐκ ἠσχύνθησαν οὐδ᾽ ἠλέησαν τὴν ἐμὴν adeAdny, εἰ δυοῖν ταλάντοιν ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς
ἀξιωθεῖσα (accounted worthy of a dowry of two talents) μηδενὸς τεύξεται τῶν προςηκόν-
tov (Dem. 27, 65; nothing of what she has a right to). [So often after θαυμάζω, &e. |
a) Καὶ εἰ, even if, even in the case that : "Edy τοῦτο ποιήσῃς ἅπαξ ἢ dis, ἡ λύγξ, καὶ
εἰ πάνυ ἰσχυρά ἐστι, παύσεται (Pl. Conv. 185), εἰ καί (if even, wenn gleich) sometimes
more inclining to the affirmation of the condition, almost = although, but often only
distinguished | from καὶ εἰ by its less emphatic character: Εἴ τις ἦν ἠδικημένος, εἰ καὶ
τὸν ἄλλον χρόνον ἡσυχίαν εἶχεν, οὐκ ἂν ἠμέλησε τοῦ καιροῦ τοῦ παρόντος (Lsocr. de
permut. 33). (Εἰ τὰ μάλιστα, if afier all —.) (The concession of an opposite fact
is (properly speaking) expressed by καίπερ with the participle, see ὃ 175 e.)}
1 About sentences with conjunctions of time, there is nothing particular to be
remarked; nor, again, about sentences with causal conjunctions, ὅτι, because, ἐπεί,
ἐπειδή, as, since ; (ἐπεί also with the ground or reason following, in the sense, for ;)
ὅτε, then, ὅπου, ὅπου γε, when that is (ὡς, in that, for, with the reason annexed),
[Καίπερ (= quanguam) a verb. fin. Pl. Conv. 219 (καίπερ ... @pnv) and Theoph.
Char. 2 |
[PART IL.
§ 195.] Connexion of Sentences. 183
Relative sentences are sometimes less accurately joined to the principal sentence.
On this point it should be remarked :
a) A preceding relative sentence with a relative in the neuter, occasionally assigns
merely the action, opinion, or utterance, upon occasion of which something is remarked
in the principal sentence, so that the relative obtains the signification, as regards
this, that —: ‘O δὲ ὑμεῖς ἐννοεῖτε, ὅτι ἧττον ἂν στάσις εἴη ἑνὸς ἄρχοντος ἢ πολλῶν, εὖ
ἴστε, ὅτι ἄλλον μὲν ἑλόμενοι οὐχ εὑρήσετε ἐμὲ στασιάζοντα, ἐὰν δὲ ἐμὲ ἕλησθε. οὐκ ἂν θαυμά-
σαιμι, εἴ τινα εὕροιτε καὶ ὑμῖν καὶ ἐμοὶ ἀχθόμενον (Xen. An. δ, 9, 29). “A δὲ ἠπείλησας,
ὡς, ἣν ὑμῖν δοκῇ, Κορύλαν καὶ Tapdaydvas ξυμμάχους ποιήσεσθε ἐφ᾽ ἡμᾶς, ἡμεῖς δέ, ἢν
μὲν ἀνάγκη 7, πολεμήσομεν ἀμφοτέροις, ἢν δὲ δοκῇ ἡμῖν, καὶ φίλον ποιήσομεν τὸν Παφλα-
γόνα (Xen. An. 5, ὅ, 22). On δέ after ἡμεῖς, see § 188, R. 6. (Cf. ὅτι, § 170 ἃ. R.)
6) "Ostis, ὃς ἄν sometimes stands, (not only without an expressly corresponding
demonstrative, but also without its being possible for such a one to be understood
agreeably with the form of the principal sentence,) in the sense of εἴ τις, in general
expressions of opinion about a certain manner of acting (where also an infinitive or
ace. with inf. might be used): Παντάπασιν ἀπόρων ἐστὶ καὶ ἀνάγκῃ ἐχομένων καὶ
τούτων πονηρῶν, οἵτινες ἐθέλουσι OL ἐπιορκίας τε πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ ἀπιστίας πρὸς ἀνθρώ-
πους πράττειν τι (Xen. An. 2, ὅ, 21). Νόμιζε τὸ καλῶς ἄρξαι τοῦτ᾽ εἶναι, ὃς ἂν τὴν
πατρίδα ὠφελήσῃ ὡς πλεῖστα ἢ ἑκὼν εἶναι οὐδὲν βλάψῃ (Thuc. 6, 14). ᾿Εγὼ καὶ τοῦτο
ἡγοῦμαι μέγα τεκμήριον ἄρχοντος ἀρετῆς εἶναι, ᾧ ἂν ἑκόντες οἱ στρατιῶται ἕπωνται καὶ
ἐν τοῖς δεινοῖς παραμένειν ἐθέλωσιν (Xen. Cicon. 4, 19). (ὍΟ, τι put first, whatever,
so often as any thing: Hi ταῦτα ἐγὼ λέγω περὶ ὑμῶν ἄλλως γιγνώσκων, ἐμαυτὸν
ἐξαπατῶ" ὅ, τι γὰρ μὴ τοιοῦτον ἀποβήσεται παρ᾽ ὑμῶν, εἰς ἐμὲ τὸ ἐλλεῖπον ἥξει, Aen.
Cyr. 1, 5, 13.)
c) Sometimes a relative sentence which calls attention toa particular circumstance,
is annexed to a person who, though thought of during the speech, and given in the
context, is not expressly named: Πῶς οὖν ἄν τις μᾶλλον ἐλεγχθείη παράνομα εἰρηκὼς
ἢ τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον : ὃς (thow who) τὴν τιμωρίαν, ἣν οὐδὲ κατὰ τῶν ἐξεληλεγμένων
διδόασιν οἱ νόμοι, ταύτην κατὰ τῶν ἀκρίτων ἔγραψας (Dem. 23, 86). Καλοῦμαί σε (I
μ η ρίτων ἔγρ μ
sue thee for) τῶν δώδεκα μνῶν, ἃς ἔλαβες ὠνούμενος τὸν Ψαρὸν ἵππον. Ἵππον ; οὐκ
3 ΄ a ΄ τ ΡΣ ἃ a} a“ ς ΄,΄ 7 τ 7; 99 / sh ll
ἀκούετε; ὃν πάντες ὑμεῖς ἴστε μισοῦντα ἱππικήν (Arist. Nub. 1224; me, who, as ye all
know —; I to buy a horse, I, who —?2).
d) To a relative pronoun pointing in a general way to what goes before, a more
particular statement of the thing meant is sometimes appended by an infinitive, or
ace. with inf., as apposition to the relative, or by a conjunctional accessory sentence :
“Ὁ καὶ δεινότατον ἂν εἴη συμβαῖνον, τοὺς μὲν πολλὰ Kal μεγάλα ποιήσαντας ὑμᾶς ἀγαθὰ
μὴ τυχεῖν ταύτης τῆς δωρεᾶς, τὸν δὲ ὑπερπλήθη ἐξημαρτηκύτα φαίνεσθαι ἐξουσίαν παρ᾽
« “ “-“ ~ > ΄ ie or “ > ΄ ΄ Ω et > 29?
ὑμῶν τοῦ παρανομεῖν εἰληφότα (Dem. 26,7). Οὕτω ἐξηρτήμεθα τῶν ἐλπίδων, ὥςτ᾽ οὐὃ
οἱ κεκτημένοι τοὺς μεγίστους πλούτους μένειν ἐπὶ τούτοις ἐθελουσιν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀεὶ τοῦ πλέονος
ὀρεγόμενοι περὶ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων κινδυνεύουσιν ὅπερ ἄξιόν ἐστι δεδιέναι, μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς
, 5
ἔνοχοι γενώμεθα ταύταις ταῖς ἀνοίαις (Isocr. de Pac. 7).
Rem. In consequence of this, and by a breviloquentia, the relative pronoun in
the neuter (6, ὅπερ) occasionally comes to have merely the signification of a con-
necting particle (while, whereas): Διαφερόντως Téde ἔχομεν (we possess in a pre-
eminent degree the characteristic property), ὥςτε τολμᾶν τε οἱ αὐτοὶ μάλιστα kal, περὶ
ὧν ἐπιχειρήσομεν, ἐκλογίζεσθαι" ὃ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἀμαθία μὲν θράσος, λογισμὸς δὲ ὄκνον
φέρει (Thuc. 2,40; which in others is otherwise, since —, or simply, whereas, on
the contrary). (In the poets ὃ καί, ἃ καί, wherefore also.)
CHAP. VII.]
195.
§
106.
184 Connexion of Sentences. [ὁ 196.
e) The sentence annexed by the relative, has sometimes itself an accessory sen-
tence, or an accessory definition in the participle, to which the relative also belongs,
and to w hich it often attaches itself in point of case : Βούλου καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους μὴ τὰς
εἰθισμένας ὦ ἄγειν σοι δωρεάς. ἀλλὰ τοιαύτας, ais κἂν σφόδρα χρῇ καὶ μηδεμίαν ἡμέραν
διαλείπῃς, οὐ κατατρίψεις ἀλλὰ καὶ πλείονος ἀξίας ποιήσεις (1500), ad Nic. 54= ἅς,
κἂν σφύδρα αὐταῖς χρῇ, οὐ —). ᾿Ἐπέπληξέ τις, ὅτι τοὺς φύλακας οὐκ εὐδαίμονας ποιοῖ-
μεν, οἷς ἐξὸν πάντα ἔχειν τὰ τῶν πολιτῶν, οὐδὲν ἔχοιεν (Pl. Rep. 5, 466, = οἵ, ἐξὸν
αὐτοῖς π. ἐ. τ. τ. πολιτῶν, οὐδὲν ἔχοιεν). Sometimes the relative alone belongs to the
accessory sentence or par ticiple : οἱ “Αλεῖς, ots ἵνα διαλλάττωσι, κατασχεῖν τοὺς
πρέσβεις Φίλιππός φησι, τοιαύτης τετυχήκασι διαλλαγῆς, ὁ ὥςτ᾽ ἐξελήλανται καὶ ἀνάστατος
ἡ πόλις αὐτῶν γέγονεν (Dem. 19, 39). “Apa νῦν οὕτω τῇδε τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ελή ες ὃ
πάλαι καὶ πολλοὶ τῶν σοφῶν ζητοῦντες πρὶν εὑρεῖν κατεγήρασαν ; (Pl. Theat. 202.)
Rem. On relative sentences as expression of the purpose and definition or
cause, see ὃ 105 a, c, d, and ὃ 115 a, R.
a) The particle yap in an independent sentence often assigns a
relation or a circumstance which has been pointed at by a preceding
demonstrative pronoun (ὅδε, the following, τοσοῦτος, more rarely οὗτος)
or adverb (ἐνθένδε, hence = from this ; from the following circumstance,
ἐκεῖθεν), and which might equally well have been annexed in an acces-
sory sentence with ὅτι (or ὅσῳ after τοσοῦτον) : Δηλοῖ δέ μοι καὶ
τόδε τῶν παλαιῶν ἀσθένειαν οὐχ ἥκιστα: πρὸ γὰρ τῶν Τρωικῶν οὐδὲν
φαίνεται πρότερον κοινῇ ἐργασαμένη ἡ “EXXas (Thue. LS Oe Ὥς οἱ
περὶ τὸν Κλεόμβροτον τὸ πρῶτον ἐπεκράτουν τῇ μάχῃ, σαφεῖ τούτῳ
τεκμηρίῳ γνοίη τίς ἄν' οὐ γὰρ ἂν ἠδύναντο αὐτὸν ζῶντα ἀπενεγκεῖν,
εἰ μὴ οἱ πρὸ αὐτοῦ μαχόμενοι ἐπεκράτουν ἐν ἐκείνῳ τῷ “χρόνῳ (Xen.
Hell. 6, 4, 13). “Ors eyo τυγχάνω ὧν τοιοῦτος οἷος ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ τῇ
πόλει δεδόσθαι, ἐνθένδε ἃ ἂν κατανοήσαιτε' οὐ γὰρ “ἀνθρωπίνῳ ἔ ἔοικε τὸ ἐμὲ
τῶν μὲν ἐμαυτοῦ ἁπάντων ἠμεληκέναι, τὸ δὲ ὑμέτερον πράττειν ἀεὶ ἰδίᾳ
ἑκάστῳ προςιόντα ὥςπερ πατέρα ἢ ἀδελφὸν πρεσβύτερον (PL. Apol. 81).
(In English, namely, or omitted [or that substituted for it].)
Rem. Such a sentence is often added to the elliptical expressions τεκμήριον δέ,
σημεῖον δέ, μαρτύριον δέ (viz. τόδε ἐστίν), δῆλον δέ (viz. ἐκ τοῦδέ ἐστιν), Sometimes
also to κεφάλαιον δέ (the marie thing is), TO δ᾽ αἴτιον (the reason is): Kapes καὶ
Φοίνικες τὰς πλείστας τῶν νήσων ᾧκισαν. Μαρτύριον de Δήλου γὰρ καθαιρομένης
ὑπὸ τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ τῶν θηκῶν ἀναιρεθεισῶν, ὅσαι ἦσαν τῶν τεθνεώτων ἐν τῇ
νήσῳ, ὑπὲρ ἥμισυ Κᾶρες ἐφάνησαν (Thue. 1, 8). Μέγιστον δὲ τεκμήριον. τοῦ τρόπου
τοῦ Evayépov' τῶν γὰρ “Ἑλλήνων πολλοὶ καὶ καλοὶ κἀγαθοὶ τὰς ἑαυτῶν πατρίδας
ἀπολιπόντες ἦλθον εἰς Κύπρον οἰκήσοντες (Zsoer. Ewag. 51). Sometimes yap is
omitted : Kara τοὺς προτέρους νόμους πολλὰ καὶ δεινὰ περὶ τοὺς τριηραρχοῦντας
ἐγίγνετο" τὸ δ᾽ αἴτιον᾽ ἐν τοῖς πένησιν ἢν τὸ λειτουργεῖν (Dem. 18, 108).
6) With γάρ a remark is sometimes inserted parenthetically, which introduces the
principal sentence Sollowing, and serves to explain what is said in it: Kaprepas
γενομένης “γαυμαχίας, οὐκ ἔλασσον ε ἔχοντες ἐν τῷ ἔργῳ οἱ Χῖοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι (76n yap
καὶ ὀψὲ ἢν) ἀνεχώρησαν ἐς τὴν πόλιν (Thue. 8, 61). Sometimes (especially in
Herod. and Thucydid.) the principal sentence attaches itself very ae to the
PART II.
Ω δια
“ὦν i
ΟΣ =x Ὰ
«Δικ ς᾽»...
ΑΓ τ
a,
—. a, ave
ἢ πρὸ
§ 197.] Connexion of Sentences. 185
parenthesis, something in the parenthesis being necessary to be understood in the [8
principal sentence : Kal — ἦν γάρ, τι καὶ ἐν Συρακούσαις βουλόμενον τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοις 196. |
Ta πράγματα ἐνδοῦναι --- ἐπεκηρυκεύετο (viz. τὸ βουλόμενον τ. ᾽Δ. τ. π. ἐνδ., the party
which a. ὡς τὸν Νικίαν καὶ οὐκ εἴα ἀφίστασθαι (Thue. 7, 48). (Hence adda yap,
ἀλλ᾽ ov yap, but then, but then — not, as a transition to something new.)
A peculiar interchange and partial intermixture of different con- δ
structions takes place, where a circumstance appended to a preceding ma:
statement, is marked as the greatest, the utmost that is to be said
about it, or as being, in some other respects, the most remarkable
feature of the case. This may happen (1) so that the circumstance 15
alleged in a sentence with ὅτι as a matter of judgment or reflection
upon the case: To δὲ μέγιστον (viz. ἐστίν), ὅτι (the verb almost always
omitted) ; or (2) so that the characterizing adjective is put foremost,
as apposition to the sentence which states the circumstance: To δὲ
μέγιστον, οὐδ᾽ ἑώρακα πώποτε τὸν ἄνδρα. (Cf.§ 19, R. 3.) Instead of
the adjective in the apposition, there might, further, be a relative
sentence as a premised remark: Ὃ δὲ μέγιστον (viz. ΕΠ οὐδ᾽ ἑώρακα
πώποτε τὸν avopa'; but, by an interchange between this form and
the first, we have (3): Ὃ δὲ μέγιστον, ὅτι οὐδ᾽ ἑώρακα πώποτε τὸν
ἄνδρα, where, therefore, both sentences have the form of accessory
sentences and a principal sentence is wanting. Lastly, we have
either (4) the adjective alone (which is rare), or (5) the relative sen-
tence quite detached, as an intimation of that which is to follow, and
then follows an explanatory sentence with γάρ (as in § 196, a): To
δὲ μέγιστον' οὐδὲ γὰρ ἑώρακα πώποτε τὸν ἄνδρα, or Ὁ δὲ μέγιστον"
οὐδὲ γὰρ κ- τ. Χ. (1) Τὸ δὲ πάντων ὑπερφυέστατον, ὅτι ἐν μὲν τοῖς
ἰδίοις οἱ ἀδικούμενοι δακρύουσι καὶ ἐλεεινοί εἰσιν, ἐν δὲ τοῖς ε βθαιοις οἱ
μὲν ἀδικοῦντες ἐλεεινοί, ὑμεῖς δὲ οἱ ἀδικούμενοι ἐλεεῖτε (Lys. 27, 12). (2)
To δὲ πάντων δεινότατον, ὑμεῖς μὲν Δημοσθένην ov προὔδοτε οὐδ᾽ εἰάσατε
κριθῆναι ἐν τῷ τῶν “Ελλήνων συνεδρίῳ, οὗτος δὲ ὑμᾶς νῦν προδέδωκεν
(μοῖ. 3, 161). (3) Ὃ δὲ πάντων καταγελαστότατον, ὅτι τῶν γεγραμ-
μένων ἐν ταῖς ὁμολογίαις τὰ χείριστα τυγχάνομεν φυλάττοντες (1506.
Paneg. 176). (4) To δὲ μέγιστον καὶ περιφανέστατον πάντων" ὁ “γὰρ
ἀδικηθεὶς καὶ ἐπιβουλευθεὶς ὑ ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ, ὥς φησιν, οὐκ ἐτόλμησε τεττάρων
ἐτῶν ἐπισκήψασθαι εἰς ὑμᾶς (Lys. 3, 39; to make complaint to 4 you).
(5) * ‘0 δὲ πάντων σχετλιώτατον" οὺς γὰρ ὁμολογήσαιμεν ἂν πονηροτά-
τους εἶναι τῶν πολιτῶν, τούτους πιστοτάτους φύλακας ἡγούμεθα τῆς
πολιτείας εἶναι (Lsoer. de Pac. 53). (O δὲ πάντων μάλιστα ἀ ἀγανακτῆσαι ἔφη;
συντυχεῖν γὰρ ἀπιὼν ᾿Ατρεστίδᾳ παρὰ Φιλίππου πορευομένῳ καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ γύναια καὶ
1*Qu δὲ μάλιστα ἡμῶν Pe a ἵππους τε πολλοὺς κέκτηνται καὶ σίτῳ οἰκείῳ Ka‘
οὐκ ἐπακτῷ χρῶνται (Thue. 6, 20).
CHAP, vil. ]
186 Connexion of Sentences. [ὁ 198.
[5 παιδάρια ὡς τριάκοντα Baditew. Dem. 19, 305. The character of the circumstance
'97-] not expressed by a single adjective.)
Rem. As a sentence with ὅτι (in the third form), so a sentence with εἰ or with
a temporal particle may be connected with a. characterizing relative sentence : “O
be πάντων δεινότατον, ὅταν τις ἴδῃ τοὺς τὴν ἡγεμονίαν τῆς Ἑλλάδος ἔ ἔχειν ἀξιοῦντας
ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἕλληνας καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν στρατευομένους (Isocr. Plat. 45; but the
worst of all is, when —).
§ a) Of interrogative sentences, it is to be remarked, that in Greek a pro-
198. nominal interr ogative e may be ἘΠ ἰὴ toa participle, so that the question
424, relates to the circumstance expressed by the participle, see Participle,
3) §176a,and § 18] ἃ. In the same way an interrogative pronoun
ΤΙΝ stand im an accessory sentence with a conjunction ; or with the
word which characterizes a substantive notion with the article (an ad-
jective, a participle, or a preposition with a case) ,—to inquire with what
accessory definitions, or for what more precisely assigned descriptions
of persons or things something holds good. (In English the acces-
sory sentence or characterizing notion must be expressed as an interro-
gative principal sentence.) end οὖν, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, πότε, ἃ χρή,
πράξετε ; ἐπειδὰν τί γένηται ; (Dem. 4,10; literally, when what takes
place ? = what must take place, in order that you —? (before you
will — ?}) ,Βοηθούντων ἡ ἡμῶν εἰς τ οὐχ ἕτοιμον μάχεσθαι Λακε-
δαιμονίοις ; ἵνα τί γένηται ; E (And. 3,26; with a view to what result ’)
Oic@a τινας ἀνθρώπους ἀχαρίστους καλουμένους ; Καὶ μάλα, ἔφη ὁ
νεανίσκος. ἹΚαταμεμάθηκας οὖν, τοὺς τί ποιοῦντας τὸ ὄνομα τοῦτο
ἀποκαλοῦσιν ; (Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 1) Τοὺς πῶς διακειμένους λάβοιεν
ἂν οἱ τοιοῦτοι μαθητάς ; ([806». Antid. 222.)*
ὑπὸ τίνων εὕροιμεν ἂν μείζονα εὐεργετημένους ἢ παῖδας ὑπὸ γονέων ; (Xen. Mem.
2, 2, 3.) Ets τρόπος ὀρθὸς παντὸς ἐπαίνου, λόγῳ διελθεῖν, οἷος οἵων αἴτιος ὧν
Ἡ
ahd
ΐ
Rem. 1. Two interrogative pronouns may be connected in one sentence: Tivas
~-
τυγχάνει περὶ οὗ ἂν ὁ λόγος ἢ (PL. Conv. 195). ;
Rem. 2. On the construction of a demonstrative pronoun with the interrogative, x
see § 100 Ῥ.
Rem. 3. A sentence with οἷος, ὡς is added to expressions of praise, blame, or
wonder, to assign the reference to a certain quality of the person or thing men-
tioned, in the sense: wpon the reflection, or, considering, how, &e. (almost = ὅτι
τοιοῦτος, ὅτι οὕτως) : Kupos ἀπῇει κατοικτείρων τήν τε γυναῖκα, οἵου ἀνδρὸς στέροιτο,
καὶ τὸν ἄνδρα, οἵαν γυναῖκα καταλιπὼν οὐκέτ᾽ ὄψοιτο (Xen. Cyr. 7, 3; 13). Evdaipov
μοι Σωκράτης ἐφαίνετο καὶ τοῦ τρόπου καὶ τῶν λόγων, ὡς ἀδεῶς Kal γενναίως ἐτελεύτα
(Pl. Ῥλαά. 58).
a. Se fe
. , Ν ,
1 Hence ἵνα τί; (viz. γένηται) wherefore? to what end? ὅτι τί; (ὁτιὴ τί:) for
what reason? (lit. because what ἢ)
[PART 11.
§ 199. ] Connexion of Sentences. 187
Rem. 4. Note particularly the originally elliptic use of οἷος, and especially ὅσος,
with adjectives which denote a surprising, or, generally, a strikingly and uncom-
monly high degree, θαυμαστὸς ὅσος (marvellous how great, surprisingly great; ori-
ginally, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ θαυμάζειν δεῖ. ὅσος ἐστίν or ὅτι τοσοῦτός ἐστι»), ἄφθονος, ἀμήχανος,
ὑπερφυὴς ὅσος, ἀμήχανος οἷος. ἀφόρητος οἷος. Μόγις καὶ μετὰ ἱδρῶτος θαυμαστοῦ ὅσου
(Pl. Rep.1, 350). (ὑπερφυής τις ὡς μεγάλη βλάβη, Pl. Gorg. 477.) In the same
manner adverbs of the same kind take os after them: Θαυμαστῶς (ὑπερφυῶς) ὡς
χαιρω.
6) For the indirectly interrogative pronoun ὅςτις (also ὅς : Θεμι-
στοκλῆς φράζει τῷ ναυκλήρῳ ὅςτις ἐστὶ καὶ Ov ἃ φεύγει, Thue. 1, 137.
Av ἃς αὐτίας τὰ περὶ τὴν ἀκοὴν ξυμβαίνει παθήματα, λεκτέον, Pl. Tim.
67) ποῦ unfrequently the direct interrogative τίς is put in a more ani-
mated way: Αἱ γυναῖκες ἠρώτων αὐτούς, τίνες εἶεν (Xen. An. 4, 5, 10).
Οὐ πάνυ ἡμῖν φροντιστέον, τί ἐροῦσιν of πολλοὶ ἡμᾶς, ἀλλ᾽ 6, TL ὁ
ἐπαΐων περὶ τῶν δικαίων καὶ ἀδίκων (Pl. Crit. 48), and in the same
manner ποῖος, πόσος, πῶς, for ὁποῖος, ὁπόσος, ὅπως. Οὐκ οἶδα,
- fe , δ ΄ n ς
ὁποίᾳ τόλμῃ ἢ ποίοις λόγοις χρώμενος ἐρῶ (Pl. Rep. 3, 414).
Rem. “Ogos and οἷος, in exclamations of wonder, occur in the form of direct
interrogation : Ὦ πάππε, ὅσα πράγματα ἔχεις ἐν τῷ δείπνῳ! (Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 4.)
a) A direct question without any interrogative pronoun, ΟΥ̓ pronomi-
nal adverb, may stand in concise and animated expression, without a
particle to denote the question (e. g. with a single verb in the second
person), especially with an expression of doubt or wonder, or after
λέγε, εἰπέ μοι. Οὐκ οἶσθα, OTs ταῦτα λέγουσι μὲν πάντες, ποιεῖ δ᾽ οὐδείς ;
---Μὴ ἀποκρίνωμαι; (Pl. Περ. 1, 337; am I not to answer?) Ἐμὲ
μόνον οὐ γιγνώσκεις, ὦ Kipe, τῶν συγγενῶν ; (Xen. Cyr. 1, 4, 27.)
Εἶτα (and then) τούτων μὲν ἐπιμελεῖσθαι παρεσκεύασαι, τὴν δὲ μητέρα
οὐκ οἴει. δεῖν θεραπεύειν ; (Xen. Mem. 2, 2,13.) Tt οὖν; ἐν ταῖς odvy-
αρχουμέναις πόλεσι πτωχοὺς οὐχ ὁρᾷς ἐνόντας ; (Pl. Rep. ὃ, 552.)
Often such a question is attached by %, 07, sometimes as an expression
of the conjecture and opinion of the person asking: Τί μένομεν ; ἢ
οὐκ ἐπιστάμεθα, ὅτι βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι περὶ παντὸς ἂν ποιήσαιτο;
(Xen. An. 2, 4, 3.) Σὺ δέ, ἔφη ὁ Χαρμίδης, ὦ Συρακόσιε, ἐπὶ τῷ μέγα
φρονεῖς ; ἢ δῆλον, ὅτι ἐπὶ τῷ παιδί; (Xen. Conv. 4, 52.) (οὐ δή, οὐ
δήποτε, οὐ δή που, οὔ τί που, surely not? see in Lexicon [ΑΡΡϑπαὶχ ].) ~ An indi-
rect simple interrogative sentence must always be denoted as such.
ὦ) 1. A simple direct question is denoted by the particles ἢ (with
emphasis, sometimes doubt), dpa (apa ye), ap ov (also dpa alone of a
conjecture, especially dp’ οὖν : perchance — 2), μή (mostly expressive
of doubt, or at least uncertainty), dpa μή (stronger), μῶν (from μὴ
οὗν), μῶν ov, μῶν μή (strongly inclining to denial), and the elliptical
expression ἄλλο Te ἤ (is it any thing else than —, is the case otherwise
CHAP. VII.]
[§
198.]
199.
[§
99.)
188 Connexion of Sentences. [ὃ 199.
than —, ought not —), or, with 1 omitted, ἄλλο τι (ἄλλο τι ἢ OV —,
ἄλλο TL OU should perhaps’), and lastly οὔκουν (not then’). (See the
Rem.)—2. A simple dependent question is most generally denoted by εἰ,
Vie “hace (εἰ ἄρα, whether then, whether after all ; whether perchance),
and more emphatically by apa, whether then, rarely by μή, viz. after verbs
denoting look to, and consider ῷ 124, R. 1); with the same verbs also
ἐάν (whether, perchance, οἵ. ὃ 194 a, R. 2). (For the particulars of the
special meanings of these particles, see the Lexicon [and Appendix].) 7H καὶ
σχολὴ ἔσται, ὦ “πάτερ, σωμασκεῖν τοὺς στρατιώτας ; (Xen. Cyr. 1; 6; 17.) "Ap, ὦ
᾿Αντίσθενες, εἰσί τινες ἀξίαι φίλων ὥςπερ οἰκετῶν; (Xen. Mem. 2, ὅ, 2) ἾΑρά γε,
ὦ παῖ, ἐν τοῖς στρατηγικοῖς καὶ οἰκονομίας τί σοι ἐπεμνήσθη ὁ διδάσκαλος ; (Xen. Cyr.
1 0 12:) “Ap? οὐ (ap οὖν οὐ) πάντα, ὅσα ὑπὸ μυθολύγων ἢ ποιητῶν λέγεται, διήγησις
οὖσα τυγχάνει ἢ γεγονότων ἢ ὄντων ἢ “μελλόντων ; (Pl. Rep. 3, 392.) Εἰπέ μοι, εἰ
δεοίμεθα φίλου ἀγαθοῦ, πῶς ἂν ἐπιχειροίημεν σκοπεῖν ; ἄρα (ought not — ’) πρῶτον μὲν
ζητητέον, ὅςτις ἄρχει γαστρύς τε καὶ φιλοποσίας ; (Xen. Mem. 2, 6,1.) *Ap’ οὖν συμ-
βαίνει μέγιστον κακὸν ἡ ἀδικία καὶ τὸ ἀδικεῖν; (PI. Gorg. 479. On συμβαίνει, see ὃ 177
b, R. 3.) Μὴ τὸν ᾿Αχιλλέα οἴει φροντίσαι ὑπ τον καὶ κινδύνου ; (PI. Apol. 28) Μὴ
ἀρχιτέκτων βούλει. γενέσθαι ; (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 10.) Ἄρα μὴ ἄλλο τι τὸν θάνατον
εἶναι ἡγούμεθα ἢ τὴν τῆς ψυχῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ σώματος ἀπαλλαγήν ; (PL. Phed. 64.) "Ap"
οὖν, ἔφασαν, μὴ καὶ ἡμῖν ἐναντιώσεται ὁ ἀνὴρ περὶ τῆς τῶν στρατιωτῶν ἀπαγωγῆς ;
(Xen. An. is 6, 5.) ᾿Αλλὰ μῶν καὶ πρὸς ἡμᾶς τοῦτο τείνει ἐν τῷ παρόντι ; Παντάπασι
μὲν οὖν, ἢν δ᾽ ἐγώ (Pl. Rep. 5, 451). Τί δέ; οἱ τὴν ἡδονὴν ἀγαθὸν ὁριζόμενοι μῶν μὴ
ἐλάττονος πλάνης ἔμπλεοι τῶν ἑτέρων; (Pl. Rep. 6, 505.) Nov οὖν, ἐπειδή σοι ἡ
σοφία μόνη εὐδαίμονα καὶ εὐτυχῆ ποιεῖν τὸν ἄνθρωπον δοκεῖ, ἄλλο τι ἢ φαίης ἂν avay-:
καῖον εἶναι φιλοσοφεῖν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν νῷ ἔχεις αὐτὸ ποιεῖν ; (Pl. Huthyd. 282.) ἔΛλλο τι
οὖν, ἦν δ᾽ ἐγώ, μάθημα a ἀναγκαῖον πολεμικῷ ἀνδρὶ θήσομεν λογίζεσθαί τε καὶ ἀριθμεῖν
δύνασθαι; (Pl. Rep. 1, 622.) Φέρε γάρ, 6 ἀγαθὸς a ἀνὴρ καὶ ἐπὶ τὸ βέλτιστον λέγων, ἃ ἃ
ἂν “λέγῃ, ἄλλο τι οὐκ εἰκῇ ἐρεῖ ἀλλ᾽ ἀποβλέπων πρύς τι; (Ρί. Gorg. 503.) A. Οὔκουν
καὶ λῦπαι @savT@s αἱ μὲν χρησταί εἰσιν, αἱ δὲ πονηραί ; B. Πῶς γὰρ ov; (Pl. Gorg.
499, )—Ov« οἶδα, εἰ συγχωρήσετε. Ἠρώτησα, εἰ συνεξελθεῖν βούλοιτο. Σκοποῦμαι
τοῦτο, εἰ ἄρα, ὥςπερ τῶν οἰκετῶν, οὕτω καὶ τῶν φίλων εἰσὶν ἀξίαι (Xen. Mem. 2, 5, 2).
Ἢ ψυχή μου, διὰ τὸ ὑβρίσθαι καὶ ὀργίζεσθαι, ἀεὶ τοῦτο κυοῦσα διῆγεν (brooding over the
thought ys apa ποτε ἔσται ἀποτίσασθαι τὸν καὶ θεοῖς ἐχθρὸν καὶ ἀνθρώποις (Xen. Cyr.
5, 4, 35). ‘Opapev, μὴ Νικίας οἴεταί τι λέγειν καὶ οὐ λύγου ἕνεκα ταῦτα λέγει (Pl. Lach.
196). Ei τοῦτο μὴ ἱκανὸν δικαιοσύνης ἐπίδειγμα εἶναι σοι δοκεῖ, σκέψαι, ἐὰν τύδε μᾶλλον
ἀρέσκῃ: φημὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ τὸ νόμιμον δίκαιον εἶναι (Xen. Mem. 4, 4, 12). CH yap; Ls τέ
not so ἢ
Rem. From οὐκ οὖν comes οὐκοῦν as one word, denoting literally, not then, or,
therefore not, whence at least not, in which sense the word is not untrequently used
(in answers: 20) (οὐκοῦν -γε), and then the orthography is by most supposed to
be οὔκουν (οὔκουν εἰκός ye). This orthography ought then to be retained in the
interrogative signification likewise, which in many ; editions i is not the case. The
interrogative signification often passes almost into that of a simple affirmative
inference (therefor e), and then most commonly the note of interrogation is omitted,
and the particle is assumed = οὖν. In this case it is always written οὐκοῦν.
᾿Αλλ᾽, ὦ Χειρίσοφε, ἔφη ὁ ὁ Ξενοφῶν, δοκεῖ μοι βοηθεῖν ἐπὶ τοὺς καίοντας τὴν γὴν ὡς
ὑπὲρ τῆς ἡμετέρας. Ὃὧ δὲ Χειρίσοφος εἴπεν᾽ Οὔκουν ἔμοιγε δοκεῖ; ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡμεῖς, ἔφη,
1 Πῶς οὐ (δεινόν, πολλὴ ἀφροσύνη, κιτ.λ.): Ls it not —? Can one deny that it is —?
[PART II.
§ 200. ] The Negations. 189
καίωμεν, καὶ οὕτω θᾶττον παύσονται (Xen. An. 3, 5, 6)—A. ᾿Αλλὰ πρὸς τῷ μαθεῖν [8
καὶ ἀπότισον ἀργύριον. B. Οὐκοῦν ἐπειδάν μοι γένηται, εἶπον (Pl. Rep. 1, 337; 199.]
yes, when I have got any money: then shall it not be when — ¢ but surely not
till 1 have —?).
c) 1. A disjunctive direct question is denoted by πότερον (πότερα)---ἤ"
or, in concise and pointed discourse, without any particle in the first
member. 2. A disjunctive dependent question is denoted in the same
way or by εἰ — ἤ, εἴτε --- εἴτε. *Hy ἄρχων τις τύχη σοι καὶ ἁμάρτῃ, πότερον
ἐᾷς ἄρχειν ἢ ἄλλον καθίστης ἀντ᾽ αὐτοῦ; (Xen. Cyr. 8,1, 12.) Πότερά σοι δοκοῦσιν
οἱ ἀπεργαζόμενοι εἴδωλα ἄφρονά τε καὶ ἀκίνητα ἀξιοθαυμαστότεροι εἶναι 7) of ζῶα ἔμφρονά
τε καὶ ἐνεργά; (Xen. Mem. 1, 4, 4.) Οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ φαμὲν ἑκόντας ἀδικητέον εἶναι 7}
τινι μὲν ἀδικητέον τρόπῳ, τινὶ δὲ οὔ; (Pl. Crito, 49.) -"Apte, ὦ Τερψίων, ἢ πάλαι ἐξ
ἀγροῦ; (Pl. Τλοωί. 142.) Παυσανίας ἐβουλεύετο, πότερον μάχην ξυνάπτοι ἢ ὑπόσπον-
dav τόν τε Λύσανδρον καὶ τοὺς μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ πεσόντας ἀναιροῖτο (Xen. Hell. 3, 5, 22).
Δοκεῖ μοι χρῆναι παρὰ τῶν πρεσβυτῶν πυνθάνεσθαι, ὥςπερ τινὰ ὁδὸν προεληλυθότων,
ἣν καὶ ἡμᾶς ἴσως δεήσει πορεύεσθαι, ποία τίς ἐστι, τραχεῖα καὶ χαλεπὴ ἢ ῥᾳδία καὶ εὔπο-
pos (Pl. Rep. 1, 328). Ὃ Κλέαρχος ἐβουλεύετο, ΤΙρόξενον καλέσας, εἰ πέμποιέν τινας
ἢ πάντες ἴοιεν ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον ἀρήξοντες (Xen. An. 1, 10, 5). Νὺν ἔμαθον, ὃ
λέγεις: εἰ δὲ ἀληθὲς ἢ μή, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν (Pl. Rep. 1, 339). Δίδωμι ὑμῖν σὺν τοῖς
ἄλλοις Χαλδαίοις βουλεύσασθαι, εἴτε βούλεσθε πολεμεῖν ἡμῖν εἴτε φίλοι εἶναι (Xen. Cyr.
3, 2, 13).
Rem. 1. Sometimes ἄρα — ἤ is put where the question in the first member is
not yet denoted as disjunctive: «σκεψώμεθα τὸ διδόναι δίκην dpa μέγιστον τῶν
κακῶν ἐστιν, ὡς σὺ Sov, ἣ μεῖζον τὸ μὴ διδόναι, ὡς ad ἐγὼ ᾧμην (Pl. Gorg. 476).
(Ἤ --- ἤ for ei — ἤ in the Epic poets.)
Rem. 2. An affirmative answer is most simply expressed by vai, yes, more
strongly by πάνυ ye (yes, certainly ; to be sure), πάνυ μὲν οὖν [παντάπασι μὲν ody |
(of course; unquestionably), πάντως δῆ, πάντως δή που, μάλιστα, καὶ μάλα, σφόδρα
γε, ἔστι ταῦτα (it is so), φημί (1 say ‘yes ;’ so say I), or by repetition of the verb
or another emphatic word, with the predicate (‘Opodoyets ; “Opodoye), often with
the addition of μέντοι (Οὐ πολλὴ ἂν εἴη ἀλογία φοβεῖσθαι ; ἸΤολλὴ μέντοι) or yap
(Ἔλεγες ; Ἔλεγον γάρ) or ἀλλά (which gives emphasis to the affirmation : Ὅμο-
λογοῦμεν ταῦτα; ᾿Αλλ᾽ ὑπερφυῶς ὡς ὁμολογῶ) or by ἔγωγε with the verb understood
from the question (Λέγεις ; "Eywye. Δοκεῖ σοι; Ἔμοιγε). Sometimes the atlirma-
tion is expressed in the form of a question by Ti yap; ἀλλὰ τί; τί μήν ; (what
else? doubtless it is, must, &c.) πῶς yap ov ; (how should it be otherwise ? neces-
sarily) πῶς (τί) οὐ μέλλω ; (μέλλει; with verb understood from the question : how
(what) else should I (he), than — ἢ) τί yap ob μέλλει ; (καὶ πολλά, yes, and much
80; ἑώρων yap, yes, for I saw it.) An answer in the negative is denoted by οὔ, no,
ov δῆτα, οὐδαμῶς (as answer to a demand, μή, μὴ γάρ, μηδαμῶς), ἥκιστα, ἥκιστά γε,
πῶς; πόθεν; (whence should that come 3)
CBAPRTER, Vill
The Negations.
a) Tue simple negative particles in Greek are ov (οὐκ) and μή. §
The difference between them, expressed generally, is, that with ov it 200.
CHAP. VII1.]
[§
200. |
190 The Negations. [§ 201.
is stated absolutely, that something zs not, or does not (reality is denied
oljectively), while by μή is denoted merely a subjective representation
(a conception of the mind) in a negative form, without its being said
that something is or is not, the representation being put as a wish,
will, purpose, condition, or as a merely general representation of
persons, things, or actions of a certain kind. ‘This distinction, how-
ever, is not always accurately and precisely carried out, so that more
special rules must be given. (In some cases the usage is not fixed.)
ee Β © ; Ἃ ] 5 foo)
Whatever holds of οὐ and μή, applies also to all negative words formed
7 ies Φ PM, I PUNY BA SINE, 2) > lal
by composition with them, as οὐδέ, οὔτε, οὐδείς, οὐδαμῶς, &e., and
μηδέ, MITE, μηδείς, μηδαμῶς, Ke.
6) Οὐ is used in all principal sentences (affirmative or interroga-
tive) in the indicative (with or without ἄν), and in the optative with
av. In general ov is to be regarded as the simple mode of denial ;
which is also used in accessory sentences, whenever the following rules
do not assign that μή can or should be used (e. g. ov stands in
declarative object-sentences with ὅτε or ws, without regard to the
nature of the principal sentence: Μηδεὶς ὑπολαμβανέτω pe λέγειν,
ὡς οὐ χρῆν εἰςπρώττειν τοὺς ὀφείλοντας, Dem, 22, 51).
Rem. Mn, however, is used in a peculiar manner with the indicative of the future
in the prohibitive question with ov py, see § 124 a, R. 4. In some quite occasional
passages, w here μή is otherwise put in a principal sentence with the indicative or
optative with a ἄν, this irregularity rests in part, on some peculiar ity of the sentence.
Σχολῇ γὰρ av τι ἄλλο φθορὰν μὴ δέχοιτο, εἰ τό γ᾽ ἀθάνατον καὶ ἀΐδιον φθορὰν δέξεται,
Pl. Phed. 106, where μὴ δέχοιτο is put as one notion = escape, which is then
virtually negatived by σχολῇ, scarcely. (In the declarative object-sentences ov
is retained from the oratio recta.)
a) In principal sentences, μή is used only with the imperative, with
the subjunctive in demands ov re quirements, and prohibitions, together
with questions about what one zs to do [deliberative subj.], and with
the optative (or indicative) in wishes: Μὴ ὀργίζου, μὴ ὀργιζώμεθα, μὴ
ὀργισθῇς. Μὴ a ἀποκρίνωμαι ; Μὴ γένοιτο ταῦτα. Δειξάτω "Ἄφοβος,
μὴ διπλάσια μηδὲ τριπλάσιά μοι γεγενημένα, GAN αὐτὰ τὰ ἀρχαῖά μοι
πάντα ἀποδεδομένα (Dem. 27,59. Μή to δειξάτω). Μήποτε ὠφελον
λιπεῖν τὴν Σκῦρον (Soph. Phil. 969). (Μή, μηδαμῶς, in prohibition :
mo. see § 199, KR. 2.)
6) Μη is used in all sentences of intention [ final sentences], and in
object-sentences after verbs which denote a working, an endeavour, fear,
and apprehension (object-sentences of the action), with the subjunctive,
the pEeeate, and, in some cases, the future indicative. See the examples
to § 122, 128, and 124 with the Rems., together with § 131. When
[PART IL.
|
ἢ
Ὶ
4
Be
§ 202.] The Negations. ΙΟΙ
the object of a fear or apprehension (φοβοῦμαι, μή —, Opa, μή) is [8
itself negatively expressed, this last negative Is usually οὐ (vereor, ne 20
—non). Ov δέδοικα, μὴ οὐκ ἔχω, ὅ,τι δῶ ἑκάστῳ τῶν φίλων, ἂν εὖ
γένηται; ἀλλὰ μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ἱκανούς, οἷς δῶ (Xen. An. 1, 7, 7). ᾿Αλλὰ
μὴ οὐ τοῦτ᾽ 7 χαλεπόν, ὦ ἄνδρες, θάνατον ἐκφυγεῖν, Be) πολὺ χαλε-
πώτερον πονηρίαν (Pl. Apol. 39. See § 194. ἃ, R. 2)",
@) My is used in all conditional sentences with εἰ, ἐάν, εἴτε, ἐάν τε.
Ei μέν σοι δοκεῖ, ποίησον, εἰ δὲ μή (εἰ δὲ μὴ δοκεῖ), ἔασον. Ποιητέον
ταῦτα, εἴτε βούλει εὔτε μή. Ταῦτα διανοηθεὶς Κλεώνυμος, εἴτ᾽ ὀρθῶς
εἴτε μή, τὰς διαθήκας ταύτας διέθετο (5. 1,11).
Ou
bo
N
Rem. Sometimes, however, οὐ is found in a sentence with εἰ (ἐάν). This hap-
pens now and then where the negative, taken in close connexion with the verb,
forms a negative notion, which is emphatically opposed to the affirmative ; or where
the emphasis in the condition lies in some single word other than the verb:
Πάντως οὕτως ἔχει, ὦ Μέλητε, ἐ ἐάν τε σὺ καὶ "Avuros. οὐ pire ἐάν TE pire (Pl. Apol.
25). Εἰ “μὲν οὖν οὐ πολλοὶ ἦσαν, καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ἂν περὶ αὐτῶν ἠκούετε, νῦν δὲ συλλή-
βδην περὶ πάντων. (Lys. 13, 72; the emphasis on πολλοί). Μὰ Δία, τούτων ἐμεῦ
οὐδὲν ἴσον ἐστίν, εἴγε ἀφ᾽ ἡμῶν τῶν ἐν μέσῳ οὐδεὶς οὐδέποτε ἄρξεται (Xen. Cyr. 2, 2,
9)". But especially ov is frequently put in one or other of two sentences connected
(δ 189) by μέν and δέ, which are governed by εἰ, where this does not so much con-
cern each sentence by itself, or even in both of them: Δεινὸν ἂν εἴη, εἰ οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθη-
ναίων ξύμμαχοι ἐπὶ δουλείᾳ τῇ αὑτῶν χρήματα φέροντες οὐκ ἀπεροῦσιν, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἐ ἐπὶ
τῷ αὐτοὶ σώζεσθαι. οὐκ ἄρα δαπανήσομεν. (Thue. 1, 121). Εἶτ᾽ οὐκ αἰσχρόν, ὦ ἄνδρες
᾿Αθηναῖοι, εἰ τὸ μὲν ᾿Αργείων πλῆθος οὐκ ἐφοβήθη τὴν Λακεδαιμονίων ἀρχὴν ἐν ἐκεί-
νοις τοῖς καιροῖς, ὑμεῖς δ᾽ ὄντες ᾿Αθηναῖοι βάρβαρον ἄνθρωπον φοβηθήσεσθε; (Dem.
15, 23.) (Here μή is more rare.)
6) After conjunctions of ¢ézme with @ av (ὅταν, &e.), μή is always used ;
where the conjunctions have not av, it is used where a past instant
which has several times occurred [endefinite, frequency | 1s denoted (each
time, 80 often as, when), otherwise ov. Likewise usually (but not always)
μή is put with ὅτε, ὁπότε, and ὅπου, in the sense when, seeing that,
because : Tore κάλλιστα λογίζεται ἡ ψυχή, ὃ ὅταν μηδὲν τούτων αὐτὴν
παραλυπῇ, μήτ᾽ ἀκοὴ μήτε ὄψις μήτε ἀλγηδὼν μήτε τις ἡδονή (δέ. Phed.
65). ’ Aci, ὁπότε μὴ ἄλλο τι σπουδαιότερον πράττοιεν, ταύτῃ τῇ παιδιᾷ
ἐχρῶντο (Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 20). Ἢ ποὺ χαλεπῶς ἂν τοὺς ἄλλους πεί-
σαιμι ἀνθρώπους, ὡς οὐ ΠΕΡ Δεν, ἡ ἡγοῦμαι τὴν παροῦσαν τύχην, ὅτε γε
1 Rarely φοβοῦμαι, μή - μή: ᾿Εθαύμαζε Σωκράτης, εἴ τις φοβοῖτο. μὴ ὁ γενόμενος
καλὸς κἀγαθὸς τῷ τὰ μέγιστα εὐεργετήσαντι μὴ τὴν μεγίστην χάριν ἕξοι (Aen. Mem.
1,.2,:7).
2 εἰ μὴ Πρύξενον οὐχ ὑπεδέξαντο (Dem. 19,74; if they had not omitted to
receive P.).
CHAP. VIII.]
[§
202. |
bo
Om
LoS)
192 The Negations. [ὃ 203..
μηδ᾽ ὑμᾶς δύναμαι πείθειν (Pl. Phad. 84).' (On the contrary: Ἦν ποτε
χρόνος, ὅτε θεοὶ μὲν ἦσαν. θνητὰ δὲ γένη οὐκ ἦν. Pl. Prot.320, Ἕως μὲν οἱ σύμμαχοι
οὐκ εἶχον, ὅποι ἀποσταῖεν, ἔκρυπτον τὴν πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔχθραν. Aen. Hell. 8, 5, 10.
Emel μαχόμενοι οὐκ ἐδύναντο λαμβάνειν τὸ χωρίον, ἀπιέναι ἤδη ἐπεχείρουν. Aen. An,
5, 2, 5.)
2m. Causal sentences with ὅτι, διότι, because, ἐπεί, ἐπειδή, ὡς, then, have ov.
In relative sentences, μή stands (a) where the relative (pronoun or
adverb) has ἄν with it, and (4) where a certacn kind and class is denoted
generally by a circumlocution (he that —, those who —, such — as, if
one —, not merely indefinitely: people who —, things which —), and
therefore also with exceptions (ὅσοι μή). In relative sentences to an
indefinite and not general notion (any one, people, things, who or
which —) μή is commonly used where the relative-sentence expresses
(c) an effect or purpose (τοιοῦτος ὃς μή) or (d) serves to complete a
condition (εἴ τις, ὃς μή) or a representation expressed in the enfinitive,
which is put by the speaker as merely thought, not as actual. In
relative sentences to definite singular subjects, μή is put only some-
times (e), when a quality is expressly put prominently forward in
relation to the principal sentence as cause and ground or antithesis.
But this prominence is often wanting. In all other relative sentences
the particle is ob. (a) Μία κλίνη (one bier) κενὴ φέρεται ἐστρωμένη
τῶν ἀφανῶν, οἱ ἂν μὴ εὑρεθῶσιν εἰς ἀναίρεσιν (Thue. 2, 94). (ὁ) Ἃ μὴ
οἶδα, οὐδὲ οἴομαι εἰδέναι (Ρί. Apol. 21). Τοὺς νεκρούς, ἔνθαπερ ἔπεσον,
ἑκάστους ἔθαψαν: ods δὲ μὴ εὕρισκον, κενοτάφιον αὐτοῖς ἐποίησαν μέγα
(Xen. An. ὃ, ὃ, 9). Τί γάρ; ὅςτις δαπανηρὸς ὧν μὴ αὐτάρκης ἐστίν,
ἀλλ᾽ ἀεὶ τῶν πλησίον δεῖται καὶ λαμβάνων μὴ δύναται ἀποδιδόναι, οὐ
δοκεῖ σοι καὶ οὗτος χαλεπὸς φίλος εἶναι; (Xen. Mem. 2, 6,2.) His τὰ
πλοῖα τούς τε ἀσθενοῦντας ἐνεβίβασαν καὶ παῖδας καὶ γυναῖκας καὶ τῶν
σκευῶν ὅσα μὴ ἀνάγκη ἣν ἔχειν (Xen. An. ὅ, ὃ, 1). “H θάλασσα ἐπῆλθε
τῆς πόλεως μέρος τι καὶ ἀνθρώπους διέφθειρεν, ὅσοι μὴ ἐδύναντο φθῆναι
πρὸς τὰ μετέωρα ἀναδραμόντες (Thuc. 8, 89). (Ὅσον μή, ὅσα μή, καθ᾽
ὅσον μή, ὅ,τι μή, so far as — not)*, — (c) Ψηφίσασθε τοιαῦτα. ἐξ ὧν
μηδέποτε ὑμῖν μεταμελήσει (Andoc. 8, 41). ἹΚατοικίσαι τὴν πόλιν εἰς
τοιοῦτον τόπον, οὗ ἐπειςαγωγίμων μὴ δεήσεται, σχεδόν τι ἀδύνατον (PZ.
1 Tg γε δυςτυχέστατος εἶναι ἀνθρώπων οὐδαμῇ ἐκφεύγω, ὅτε δὴ προαγομένης μὲν τῆς
πόλεως ἐπὶ ταύτας τὰς συμφορὰς οὐδεὶς ἐμοῦ δυςδαιμονέστερος ἦν, μεθισταμένης δὲ πάλιν
εἰς τὸ ἀσφαλές, ἁπάντων ἐγὼ ἀθλιώτατος (And. 2, 9).
2 But: ἘἘπειδάν τις ἐγγὺς ἢ τοῦ οἴεσθαι τελευτήσειν, εἰξέρχεται αὐτῷ δέος καὶ φροντὶς
περὶ ὧν ἔμπροσθεν οὐκ eisyer (Pl. Rep. 1, 330, about things: not; about the, or, those
(definite) things, about all the things). Rare: Οἱ πολλοὶ τῶν ἱκετῶν, ὅσοι οὐκ ἐπεί-
σθησαν, ὡς ἑώρων τὰ γιγνόμενα, διέφθειραν αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἀλλήλους ar 3, 81).
PART II.
§ 204.] The Negations. 193
Rep. 2,370). Τοσοῦτον μέρος τοῦ λόγου διελθεῖν χρή, ὅσον μὴ λυπήσει
τοὺς παρόντας (Lsocr. Antid. 12). Ἦ καλῶς οὖν οὗτος ὁ ἔπαινος ἔχει,
τὸ ὁρῶντα τοιοῦτον ἄνδρα, οἷον ἑαυτόν τις μὴ ἀξιοῖ εἶναι ἀλλ᾽ αἰσχύνουτο
ἄν, χαίρειν τε καὶ ἐπαινεῖν ; (Pl. Rep. 10,605.)" (4) Αξιοι οὗτοί εἰσι
φθονεῖσθαι, εἰ λήψονται, ἃ μὴ προςήκει αὐτοῖς (156. 0, 01). Οὐχ ὁρᾷς,
ὡς σφαλερόν ἐστι τό, ἃ μὴ οἶδέ τις, ταῦτα λέγειν καὶ πράττειν ; (Xen.
Mem. 8, 7,10.) (e) Ταλαίπωρός τις σύ γε ἄνθρωπος εἶ καὶ οὐδὲ ᾿Αθη-
ναῖος, ᾧ μήτε θεοὶ πατρῷοί εἰσι μήτε ἱερὰ μήτ᾽ ἄλλο μηδὲν καλὸν καὶ
ἀγαθόν (Pl. Euthyd. 302). Πῶς ἂν ὀρθῶς ἐμοῦ καταγιγνώσκοιτε, © τὸ
παράπαν πρὸς τὸν ἄνθρωπον τουτονὶ μηδὲν συμβόλαιόν ἐστιν ; (Dem.
33, 34). Τῇ πόλει, ὑπὲρ ἧς τὰ ὅπλα μὴ τίθεσαι, μηδὲ συμβουλεύειν
ἀξίου (isch. 1, 29).°
a) In simple dependent questions the negation is commonly ex-
pressed by ov: ᾿Ηρώτησα, διὰ τί οὐκ ἔλθοι. Τ]ρωταγόρας ἐρωτᾷ, εἰ
οὐκ αἰσχύνομαι τἀγαθὰ δεινὰ καλῶν (έ. Prot. 541). But in questions
with εἰ it is also μή: Τηρητέον τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐν ἁπάσαις ταῖς ἡλικίαις, εἰ
φυλακικοί εἰσι τούτου τοῦ δόγματος καὶ μήτε γοητευόμενοι μήτε Brago-
μενοι ἐκβάλλουσιν (Pl. Rep. 3, 412). Also μή stands in dependent
questions denoting a purpose (how something caw take place), espe-
cially with ὅπως, see § 123, R. 1. Τῷ τῶν Ἱ]ερσῶν βασιλεῖ οὐδὲν
προυργιαίτερόν ἐστιν ἢ σκοπεῖν, ἐξ ὧν μηδέποτε παυσόμεθα πρὸς ἀλλή-
Nous πολεμοῦντες (1500). Paneg. 134). Οὐ σκοπεῖς, ὅ,τε μὴ λυπήσεις
τοὺς ἄλλους ποιῶν (Dem. 21, 135).
6) In the second member of a dependent disjunctive question
(whether — or not) the negative may be either od or μή. In a
dependent question denoting a distinction and separation (what —
and what not) μή is used when the verb is understood, but either ov
or μή when it is repéated: Σκοπῶμεν, εἰ πρέπει ἢ οὔ (Pl. Rep. 5, 451).
SKerréov, πότερον δίκαιον ἐμὲ ἐνθένδε πειρᾶσθαι ἐξιέναι, μὴ ἀφιέντων
1 Also τοιοῦτος, ὃς οὐ, where the representation of a consequence and purpose: is
not made, or not prominent: Τοιούτων δεησόμενοι πάρεσμεν, ἐν ois κίνδυνος οὐδεὶς
ἔνεστιν (Isocr. Plat. 2). With negative preceding it is always οὐδεὶς (μηδεὶς)
τοιοῦτος ὅςτις (ὃς) οὐ —, οὐδεὶς οὕτως ---, ὅςτις (ὃς) οὐ. Νόμον τίθεμεν, οἴκησιν καὶ
ταμιεῖον μηδενὶ εἶναι μηδὲν τοιοῦτον, εἰς ὃ οὐ πᾶς ὁ βουλόμενος εἴςεισιν (ΕἾ. Pep. 3,416).
\ a , “ a , > Ξ- “ . > a ” ΄
Μηδὲν τῶν σωμάτων οὕτως ἂν φαίην εἶναι φαῦλον, 6, τι γυμνασθὲν οὐκ ἂν. εἴη βέλτιον
(Isocr. Antid. 210).
2 Οἱ Κερκυραῖοι καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀναγκασθήσεσθαι ἔφασαν, Κορινθίων βιαζομένων, φίλους
ποιεῖσθαι, ods οὐ βούλονται (Thuc. 1, 28. Οὐ retained from the oratio recta).
3 But also: Θαυμαστὸν ποιεῖς, ὃς ἡμῖν (ταῖς οἰσί) ταῖς καὶ ἔριά σοι καὶ ἄρνας καὶ
τυρὸν παρεχούσαις οὐδὲν δίδως (Xen. Mem. 2, 7, 13). Οὔκουν δικαίως (γυναῖκα Karo
᾿Αμυνίαν), ἥτις οὐ στρατεύεται; (Arist. Nub. 692.)
CHAP. VIII. ] O
{§
204.]
194 The Negations. [ὃ 205.
᾿Αθηναίων, ἣ οὐ δίκαιον (Ρί. Crito, 48). Νῦν ἔμαθον, ὃ λέγεις" εἰ δὲ
ἀληθὲς ἢ ἢ μή, πειράσομαι μαθεῖν (Pl. hep. i, 339). Toor’ αὐτό, εἰ χαίρεις
ἢ μὴ χαίρεις, ἀνάγκη δή πού σε ἀγνοεῖν, κενόν γ᾽ ὄντα πάσης φρονήσεως
(Pl. Phil. 21). Οὐ δεῖ ὑ ὑμᾶς ἐκ τῶν τοῦ κατηγόρου λόγων τοὺς νόμους
καταμανθάνειν, εἰ καλῶς ὑμῖν κεῖνται ἢ μή, ἀλλ᾽ ἐκ τῶν νόμων τοὺς τοῦ
κατηγόρου λόγους, εἰ ὀρθῶς καὶ νομίμως ὑμᾶς διδάσκουσι τὸ πρᾶγμα ἢ
οὔ (Antiph. 5, 14).— Oi εἰδότες ἑαυτοὺς τά τε ἐπιτήδεια ἑ ἑαυτοῖς ἴσασι
καὶ διαγιγνώσκουσιν, ἅ τε δύνανται καὶ ἃ μή (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 26).
᾿Αλλά τοι περί γε φυλακῆς τῆς χώρας οἷδ᾽ ὅτι σοι ἤδη μεμέληκεν καὶ
οἶσθα, ὁ ὁπόσαι τε φυλακαὶ ἐπίκαιροί εἰσι καὶ ὁπόσαι μή. καὶ ὁπόσοι τε
φρουροὶ ἱκανοί εἰσι καὶ ὁπόσοι μή εἰσιν (Xen. Mem. 3, 6, 10). ‘O νομο-
θέτης διαῤῥήδην πο οὺς χρὴ δημηγορεῖν Kai ods οὐ δεῖ λέγειν ἐν
τῷ δήμῳ (Aisch. 1, 27).
An infinitive for simply, with and without article, and also an
. accusative with inf.) is negatived by μή (a). But in the accusative
(nominative) with the infinitive (4) the particle is usually οὐ after
φημί and the verbs which absolutely and without any special accessory
meaning denote to think (οἶμαι, ἡγοῦμαι, νομίζω, ὑπολαμβάνω, also
δοκῶ, ἀκούω). and sometimes with other verba declarandi et sentiendi
(e.g. λέγω, ὑπισχνοῦμαι, ἐλπίζω, εἰκὸς ἐστιν, ὁμολογῶ), but only when
the governing verb is not itself. in a form (imperative) or construction
(et, &c.) which requires μή for its negation; for then the infinitive
thereby governed is neg atived by μή Tel: (a) Αἰσχρὸν μὴ βοηθεῖν.
ΤΠαρεσκεύασμαι μηδενὶ ὑπείκειν. Δέομαι σοῦ μὴ περιορᾶν ἐμὲ ἀπολλύμενον.
Ταῦτα ὑμᾶς μὴ ἀγνοεῖν ἠβουλόμην. “Διεπραξάμην μηδένα ἡμῖν ἐναντιωθῆναι. Δέδοκται
τὰς ναῦς μήπω ἐκπλεῖν. Οὕτως ἀναίσχυντοί εἰσιν ὥςτε μηδενὸς ἀπέχεσθαι τῶν κέρδος
φερόντων (but_ ὥςτε οὐδενὸς ἀπέχονται). Πάντα ποιοῦσιν ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ δοῦναι δίκην.
Τὸ μηδεμίαν τῶν πόλεων ἁλῶναι πολιορκίᾳ, μέγιστόν ἐστι σημεῖον τοῦ διὰ τούτους πει-
σθέντας τοὺς Φωκέας ἀπολωλέναι (Dem. 19, 61). Ὃ ὑπὲρ τοῦ ταῦτα μὴ γενέσθαι ἀ ἀγών
(Dem. 18, 201). Σειρῆνες τοὺς Bvopdnens ἐπάδουσαι κατεῖχον ὥςτε μὴ ἀπιέναι ἀπ᾽
αὐτῶν (Xen. Mem.2,6,11). (ὦ) Πολλούς φασι γιγνώσκοντας τὰ βέλτιστα
οὐκ ἐθέλειν πράττειν (Pl. [γοί. 803). "Eye οἶμαι, εἰ τοιαύτην μὴ δύνασαι
φέρειν μητέρα, τἀγαθά σε οὐ δύνασθαι φέρειν (Xen. Mem. 2, 2, 10).
Εὐθύδημος ὑπέλαβεν οὐκ ἂν ἄλλως ἀνὴρ ἀξιόλογος γενέσθαι, εἰ μὴ ὅτι μάλιστα Σωκράτει
συνείη (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 40). Ξενοφῶν ἐδεῖτο τῶν στρατιωτῶν πάσῃ μηχανῇ μὴ
ἀπολείπεσθαι (to strive with all their might not to be left behind). Oi δὲ σφάττειν
ἐκέλευον" οὐδὲ yap ἂν δύνασθαι πορευθῆναι (Xen. An. 4, 5,16; supply ἔφασαν, con-
tained in ἐκέλευον). Κινδυνεύω (= δοκῶ) ἁπλῶς TE oe: (Xen. Mem. 4, 2, 39).
Φορμίων ἤλπιζεν οὐ μενεῖν τῶν Πελοποννησίων τὴν τάξιν (Thue. 2, 84). “Ὁμολογῶ οὐ
κατὰ Μέλητον καὶ Ανυτον εἶναι ῥήτωρ (Pl. Apol.17). Καὶ ταῦτα εἰκὸς οὐχ ἧττον
οὕτως ἔχειν (Pl. Soph. 254) — (6) Νόμιζε μηδὲν εἶναι τῶν ἀνθρωπίνων
1 After verbs more specially denoting an assertion or concession (6. 8: συγχωρῶ),
an assurance (μαρτυρῶ, ὄμνυμι), ἃ conviction (πείθομαι, γιγνώσκω, πιστεύω). οὐ 15 ἃ
[PART Il.
§ 206.] The Negations. 195
βέβαιον (Isocr. Dem. 42). Περικλῆς οὕτως ἐκύσμησε τὴν πόλιν, ὥςτ᾽ ἔτι καὶ νῦν [§
τοὺς εἰςαφικνουμένους εἰς αὐτὴν νομίζειν μὴ μόνον ἄρχειν ἀξίαν εἶναι τῶν Ἑλλήνων 205. |
ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἁπάντων (1500). Antid. 234, because νομίζειν as infinitive after
ὥςτε would have μὴ).}
Rem. 1. From the οὐ belonging to the infinitive treated of in the paragraph, we
must distinguish an ov which, though it stands with the infinitive, belongs, strictly
speaking, to the governing verb: Οὐκ ἐπὶ τούτῳ κάθηται 6 δικαστής, ἐπὶ τῷ κατα-
χαρίζεσθαι τὰ δίκαια, ἀλλ᾽ ἐπὶ τῷ κρίνειν ταῦτα, καὶ ὀμώμοκεν οὐ χαριεῖσθαι, οἷς ἂν
δοκῇ αὐτῷ, ἀλλὰ δικάσειν κατὰ τοὺς νόμους (Pl. Apol. 35; he has sworn, not that
he will —, but that —; ὀμώμοκε μὴ χαριεῖσθαι, he has sworn not to —). (Χρή —
οὐ — adda —, and χρή — μή — adda with slight difference.) (Οὐ φημὶ ἰέναι =
φημὶ οὐκ i., and οὐκ ἀξιῶ = ἀξιῶ μή, e.g. Οἱ Σάμιοι οὐκ ἠξίουν περιιδεῖν Θρασύ-
βουλον σφᾶς διαφθαρέντας, Thue. 8, 73.)
Rem. 2. When, agreeably with the Greek idiom (see § 209, b), the negation of
the preceding verb is repeated with the infinitive, οὐ is retained from the principal
verb: Ὃ νόμος οὐκ ἐᾷ εἰςιέναι, οὗ ἂν ἦ ὁ τετελευτηκώς, οὐδεμίαν γυναῖκα ἄλλην ἢ
τὰς προςηκούσας μέχρι ἀνεψιότητος (Dem. 43, 63).
Rem. 3. Even with an infinitive after ὥςτε, the negative is οὐ, when ὥςτε follows
after an acc. with inf. governed by φημί, οἶμαι, &Kc.: Οὕτω καταφρονεῖς τῶν δικαστῶν
καὶ οἴει αὐτοὺς ἀπείρους γραμμάτων εἶναι ὥςτε οὐκ εἰδέναι, ὅτι τὰ ᾿Αναξαγόρου βιβλία
γέμει τούτων τῶν λόγων; (Pl. Apol. 26.) 2
Rem. 4. Οὐ with the infinitive after other verbs than those mentioned, or after
those in a form and construction in which they ought themselves to have μή, is a
rare anomaly, for the most part occasioned by the circumstance, that the negation
is more strongly urged in reference to a single notion: Οὐκοῦν τιθῶμεν ἀπὸ
‘Opnpov ἀρξαμένους πάντας τοὺς ποιητικοὺς μιμητὰς εἰδώλων ἀρετῆς εἶναι, τῆς δ᾽
ἀληθείας οὐχ ἅπτεσθαι; (Pl. Rep. 10, 600.)
a) An adjective or participle without article as attributive or ἀρρο- ὃ
sition (therefore also in the double-genitive or double-accusative) is 206.
negatived by μή when the substantive notion to which it is attached
belongs, in this negative form, to a sentence or a single notion (e.g.
an infinitive) which should itself be negatived by μή; otherwise οὐ is
used. After ὡς, ὥςπερ, as though, when the principal verb is an im-
perative, μή 1s always used with the participle, but otherwise usually
et
rare exception. Examples of μή with infinitive after φημί, οἶμαι, &e.: Φαίην ἂν
ἔγωγε, μηδενὶ μηδεμίαν εἶναι παίδευσιν παρὰ τοῦ μὴ ἀρέσκοντος (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 99).
Ἔμοί τε ἔδοξε καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις πᾶσι τοῖς ἰδοῦσι, μήποτε φῦναι μηδὲ γενέσθαι γυναῖκα ἀπὸ
θνητῶν τοιαύτην ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίᾳ (Xen. Cyr. ὅ, 1, 7). Mixed: Ὅθεν δὲ αὐτὸ (τὴν πολι-
τικὴν τέχνην) ἡγοῦμαι οὐ διδακτὸν εἶναι μηδὲ ὑπ᾽ ἀνθρώπων παρασκευαστὸν ἀνθρώποις,
δίκαιός εἰμι εἰπεῖν (Pl. Prot. 315).
1 Οἶμαι δεῖν οὐ --- φημὶ χρῆναι οὐ (as after οἶμαι and φημί) and οἶμαι χρῆναι μή.
* Otherwise a very rare exception : Ἤδη γὰρ ἧπται καὶ κατείργασται πυρί (Ἴλιος) ;
Ωςτ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἴχνος γε τειχέων εἶναι (Hur, Hell. 108 = ἐστίν).
CHAP. VIII. ] 02
196 The Negations. ᾿ [δ 206.
οὐ, although the principal sentence would require μή: "Αθλιον μὴ
ὑγιεῖ ψυχῆ συνοικεῖν (Pl. Gorg. 4719). ᾿Απάγου τήν τε γυναῖκα καὶ τοὺς
παῖδας μηδὲν αὐτῶν καταθείς (Xen. Cyr. 8, 1, 37. Μή because of the
imperative). Otuai ce, ἐάν τι αἴσθῃ σεαυτὸν μὴ εἰδότα, ζητεῖν ποὺς
ἐπισταμένους (Xen. Mem. Ὁ, 5, 23. Because of ἐάν). Οὐχ οἱ μὴ
δόντες, ἃ μὴ δοκεῖ, δεινόν εἰσιν " obSey εἰργασμένοι, ἀλλ᾽ οἱ δόντες μέν,
πάλιν δὲ ὕστερον, μηδὲν ἐγκαλοῦντες, ἀφαιρούμενοι (Dem. 20, 117.
Because it would be οἱ μὴ ἀφαιρούμενοι, as οἱ μὴ δόντες. See age fol-
lowing §). Δόξω τὴν πόλιν ἐλαττοῦν, εἰ “Θηβαῖοι μὲν ἕξουσι Θεσπιὰς
καὶ Moves ἡμεῖς δὲ ἔξιμεν μηδεμιᾶς ἀ ἀνάγκης οὔσης ἐξ ὧν τυγχάνομεν
ἔχοντες (Isocr. de Pac. 17).—‘Os οὖν μὴ ἀκουσομένων ἡμῶν, οὕτως
διανοεῖσθε (Pl. Rep. 1, 327).— ΕΔ ὡς οὐ τὰ βέλτιστα ἐμοῦ πολιτευ-
σαμένου Κτησιφῶντος καταψηφιεῖσθε, ἡμαρτηκέναι αὐτοὶ δόξετε (Dem.
135-207).
Rem. Sometimes, however, a participle or adjective stands with οὐ, although
the principal verb requires μή, the representation being less closely attached to
the verb, but put more independently by itself, e. g. ome ἐστι περὶ τῶν δικαίων
ὑμᾶς ϑεστετν αὐτὸν οὐ τὰ δίκαια ποιοῦντα (Dem. 15,2 without oneself doing what
is just, where αὐτὸν ov τὰ δίκαια ποιοῦντα might be yee otherwise without a
negative), especially w here the participle contains an independent actual fact:
Εἰ dpa καὶ ἐδοκοῦμέν τι ἀνεπιεικέστερον πρᾶξαι οὐ μετὰ τοῦ πλήθους ὑ ὑμῶν εἰςελθόντες
(in coming into the city against the will of your people), τὰ ὅμοια οὐκ ἀνταπέδοτε
ἡμῖν (Thue. 3, 66).
6) My stands with the participle when this assigns a condition
with the principal verb (= εἰ μή with a verbum finitum) : Οὐδεὶς ἂν
τοῖς σοφισταῖς διελέγετο μὴ ὑπισχνουμένοις εἰς TA πολιτικὰ δεινοτέρους
ποιεῖν τοὺς συνόντας ee eae 232). Tis ἂν πόλις ὑπὸ μὴ πειθομένων
ἁλοίη; (Xen. Cyr. 8,1, ὁ; by men not obeying, i.e. by men if they do
not obey. Otherwise ; Λέγω ἐν οὐκ εἰδόσιν, among people who are
ignorant of it.) Μὴ δηλωθεισῶν τῶν αἰτιῶν πολλοῖς ἂν ἴσως ἄτοπος
ὁ λόγος εἶναι δόξειεν (1506». Antid. 1). (Té χρήσαιτ᾽ ἄν τις ἰσχυρῷ ἢ
ἀνδρείῳ, μὴ σώφρονι ; Xen. Cyr. ὁ, 1, 10 = μὴ ὄντι σώφρονι.)
Rem. 1. In other constructions, an adjective or participle without article is
regularly negatived by ov. (Γλαύκων ἐπεχείρει δημηγορεῖν, οὐδέπω εἴκοσιν ἔτη
γεγονώς. Xen. Mem. 9. 0:1 OF σοφισταὶ κατηγοροῦσι τῶν μαθητῶν, ὡς ἀδικοῦσι
σφᾶς αὐτοὺς τούς τε ΠΡ ΣῈ ἀποστεροῦντες καὶ ἄλλην χάριν οὐκ ἀποδιδόντες. Pl. Gorg.
519, by depriving them, and not —. Οἶδα, ὅτι οὐ γράψαντος ᾿Αθηναίων οὐδενὸς
πόλεμον Φίλιππος πολλὰ ἔχει τῆς πόλεως. Dem. 8, 58 ; without any one of the
Athenians having —. “Eyvov τῶν πολιτῶν τινας οὐκ εὐνοϊκῶς πρὸς ἐμὲ διακειμένους.
Isocr. Antid. 4. Αἰσθάνομαι οὐδὲν διαπεπραγμένος, ὃν ἡβουλύμην.) Now and then,
however, μή occurs exceptionally with a participle of the circumstance, or a par-
ticiple which, by δὲ 177 and 178, stands with the subject or object: Οὐχ ὁρᾷς, ὅτι
οἱ ᾿Αθήνησι ΕΠ πολλοὺς ἤδη μηδὲν ἀδικοῦντας ἀπέκτειναν ; (Aen. Mem. 4, 8,5.)
[PART Il.
§ 207.] The Negations. 197
Ἔξοιδα, παῖ, φύσει σε μὴ πεφυκότα Τοιαῦτα φωνεῖν μηδὲ τεχνᾶσθαι κακά (Soph. Phil.
79). (Αἰσχύνομαι μὴ ποιῶν ΞΞ εἰ μὴ ποιῶ.)
Rem. 2. δόξα ὀρθὴ δεινῶν πέρι καὶ μή (PL. Rep. 4, 430; = περὶ τοῦ, τί δεινὸν
καὶ τί μή, by § 204 b).
An adjective or participle with the article denoting generally a
certain kind and class is usually negatived by μή (a), vet sometimes
by od (4). But if it means some persons or things indefinitely of a
certain class (persons who —, things which —; see § 180 b, R. 1), or
individual definite persons or things which are characterized, then οὐ
is used (ὦ. (a) Αἱ μὴ καλαὶ ἐπιθυμίαι. Μένων τὸν μὴ πανοῦργον τῶν
ἀπαιδεύτων ἐνόμιζεν εἶναι (Xen. An. 2, 6, 36). Τῶν στρατιωτῶν οἱ μὴ
δυνάμενοι διατελέσαι τὴν ὁδὸν ἐνυκτέρευσαν ἄσιτοι καὶ ἄνευ πυρός (Xen.
An. 4. ὅ, 11). Τὰ ὁρατὰ καὶ τὰ μή (viz. ὁρατά. Pl. Phed. 19). Τῇ
πόλει πολλάκις μετεμέλησε τῶν μετ᾽ ὀργῆς καὶ μὴ μετ᾽ ἐλέγχου γενομέ-
νων (Isocr. Antid. 19). (τὸ μηδέν = τὸ μηδὲ ἕν, not τὸ οὐδέν.) --- (4) Νομί-
tere δημοτικωτέρους εἶναι τοὺς μεθύοντας τῶν νηφόντων καὶ τοὺς νοῦν
οὐκ ἔχοντας τῶν εὖ φρονούντων (Isocr. de Pac. 19). Tov οὐκ ὀρθῶς
χρώμενον τῇ ῥητορικῇ μισεῖν δίκαιον, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ τὸν διδάξαντα (Pl. Gorg.
407. But shortly before: Οὐχ ἡ τέχνη αἰτία τούτου, GAN οἱ μὴ χρώμενοι, οἶμαι,
ὀρθῶς). (ὁ) Οἶδα ἤδη ἀνθρώπους, τοὺς μὲν ἐκ διαβολῆς, τοὺς δὲ καὶ ἐξ
ὑποψίας, of φοβηθέντες ἀλλήλους, φθάσαι βουλόμενοι πρὶν παθεῖν,
ἐποίησαν ἀνήκεστα κακὰ τοὺς οὔτε μέλλοντας οὔτε βουλομένους τοιοῦτον
οὐδέν (Xen. An. ὃ, 5,5; to persons neither going nor wishing —, inde-
finitely). Οὐκ ἠσχύνοντο of τότε πολιτευόμενοι ἐπὶ τοὺς οὐδὲν πώποτ᾽
εἰς ἡμᾶς ἐξαμαρτόντας στρατιὰν ἐκπέμποντες (Lsoer.de Pac. 84; meaning
the Sicilians). Βοιωτοί. of πρόσθεν οὐδ᾽ ἐν τῇ ἑαυτῶν τολμῶντες ᾿Αθη-
ναίοις ἀντιτάττεσθαι, νῦν ἀπειλοῦσιν ἐμβαλεῖν εἰς τὴν ᾿Αττικήν (Xen.
Mem. ὃ, ὃ, 4). Αἱ οὐκ ὀρθαὶ πολιτεῖαι αὗται (Pl. Pol. 803)."
Rem. 1. (To §§ 201—207.) It is not uncommon ἴον οὐ to stand in sentences
which would require μή, when the negation concerns only a single part of the
predicate, e.g. the object or an adverb, whereby a negative antithesis is annexed
to the affirmative form, to make it more forcible (οὐκ — ἀλλά, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ, καὶ ov, ΟΥ̓
simply οὐ, οὐχ ὅπως --- ἀλλά, οὐ μήν, yet not, sometimes also od μόνον). But we
bd , ~ ~ ’ Ῥ͵ > , ΄
also find μή. ᾿Ανάγκη τὸν τοιοῦτον ζὴν οὐκ ἀνθρώπου βίον ἀλλά τινος πλεύμονος
(Pl. Phil. 21; of a mollusc). Χρὴ τὴν σώφρονα πόλιν τὸν ἐν τῷ συμβουλεύειν μὴ
τυχόντα τῆς ὀρθῆς γνώμης οὐχ ὅπως ζημιοῦν ἀλλὰ μηδ᾽ ἀτιμάζειν (Lhuc. 3, 42).
> ΄ a ἐπὶ A « ΄ ΄ r ΄
Ἐπαιδεύθην οὕτως ὑπὸ τῆςδε τῆς ἐμῆς τε καὶ ὑμετέρας πατρίδος τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις οὐ
, > lan > \ ἈΝ , Ἂ 26. lal Ν le ‘\ 3 ς , Zz: Y
μόνον ἀδελφοῖς. ἀλλὰ καὶ πολίταις καὶ ὁδῶν Kal θάκων καὶ λόγων ὑπείκειν (Xen. Cyr. 8,
7,10). Διαφέρει ἡ ἐμὴ τέχνη τῳ καὶ τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐπισκοπεῖν ἀλλὰ μὴ τὰ
Ud [4 ἃ] ῇ ΄ € ΄ 2’ > , , ‘ A , >
σώματα (Pl. Theet. 150). (Δέομαι ὑμῶν, ἐὰν ἐπιδείξω Μειδίαν τουτονὶ μὴ μόνον εἰς
1 Hence in Thucydides (3, 95): διὰ τῆς Λευκάδος τὴν οὐ περιτείχισιν, their not
having drawn a wall round L.
CHAP» VIII. |
[$
200. |
207.
[§
207.]
198 The Negations. [$ 208, 209.
ἐμὲ ἀλλὰ καὶ εἰς ὑμᾶς καὶ εἰς τοὺς νόμους ὑβρικότα, βοηθῆσαι καὶ ἐμοὶ καὶ ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς.
Dem. 21, 7. Here μὴ μόνον εἰς ἐμέ is an essential part of the condition.)
Rem. 2. Later writers (e.g. Plutarch, Lucian, Arrian) often use μή in different
kinds of accessory sentences where the older writers have οὐ, as in object-sentences
with ὅτι (διότι) or ὡς, and in causal-sentences with ὅτι, because, and ἐπεί. Also
they, much more frequently than the older writers, use μή with participles which
merely denote a circumstance, without having an occasion in the form of the sen-
tence (see ὃ 206 b, R. 1).
By οὐδέ or μηδέ (and — not, and — even not) a negative continua-
tion is added, often with intensive force (not even). (Ἀσωπὸς ποταμὸς
ἐῤῥύη μέγας καὶ οὐ ῥᾳδίως διαβατὸς ἢν. Thue. 2, 5.) The connexion of two or
more members into a whole is effected by ovre — οὔτε, μήτε --- μήτε.
(Ey θρασὺς οὔτ᾽ εἰμὶ μήτε γενοίμην. Dem. 8, 68.) A negative and an
affirmative clause are coupled by οὔτε --- τέ, μήτε ---- τέ, more rarely
by τέ --- οὔτε : "Ὥμοσαν of te” EXAnves Kat ὁ ᾿Αριαῖος καὶ τῶν σὺν αὐτῷ
οἱ κράτιστοι, μήτε προδώσειν ἀλλήλους σύμμαχοί τε ἔσεσθαι (Xen. An.
ἣν ἃ, θὴς
Rem. Where the negative closely coalesces with the verb into one notion, we
also find ré — od (μή) for οὔτε: ᾿Αλλὰ μὴν καὶ τοῦ σώματος αὐτός τε οὐκ ἠμέλει
τούς T ἀμελοῦντας οὐκ ἐπήνει (Xen. Mem. 1, 2, 4). Οὔτε --- οὔτε --- οὐδέ (οὐδέ γε,
οὐδ᾽ αὖ), neither — nor — no, nor yet (and also not). Instead of the regular dis-
tributive connexion by οὔτε --- οὔτε (unre — unre), the second member has occa-
sionally οὐδ᾽ αὖ (μηδ᾽ αὖ), and on the other hand also not, or δέ for τέ: Οὔτ᾽ ἄρα
ἀνθρώπους ἀξίους λόγου κρατουμένους ὑπὸ γέλωτος ἐάν τις ποιῇ (represents), ἀπο-
δεκτέον, πολὺ δὲ ἧττον, ἐὰν θεούς (Pl. Rep. 3, 388). Rare (poetical) connexions are
οὐ — οὐ, οὔτ᾽ — οὐ, or (where the verb is the same) the omission of the first οὔτε.
(Τροφήν τε οὐδεὶς ἐδίδου καὶ ai Φοίνισσαι νῆες οὐδὲ Τισσαφέρνης ἧκον. Thue. 8, 99.)
a) A simple negative (οὐ or μή), combined with a predicate into a
negative expression, is cancelled by a foregoing negative: Οὐκ ἐμοὶ
μόνῳ ov διεδέξατο ]ολυκλῆς τὴν ναῦν (Dem. 50, 68; succeeded to me
in the ship). Οὐδὲ τὸν Φορμίωνα ᾿Αντίμαχος οὐχ ὁρᾷ (Dem. 36, 46 ;
and A. sees Ph. very well). Μὴ οὗν, ὅτι καὶ Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ Φωκέας
ἐξηπάτησε Φίλιππος, διὰ ταῦθ᾽ ὧν ὑμᾶς Αἰσχίνης ἐξηπάτησε, μὴ δότω
δίκην (Dem. 19, 77; let not Afsch. escape the punishment).
Rem. 1. There are, however, some passages in which (by a kind of anacoluthia)
an ov is inserted after an interposed sentence, merely to repeat the negative
which stands immediately before the interposed sentence: ‘Opas, ὅτι ἣ σωφροσύνη
οὐχ ὥςπερ ἡ ἀνδρεία καὶ ἡ σοφία ἐν μέρει τινὶ ἑκατέρα ἐνοῦσα ἡ μὲν σοφήν, ἡ δὲ
ἀνδρείαν τὴν πόλιν παρείχετο, οὐχ οὕτω ποιεῖ αὕτη, ἀλλὰ OL ὅλης ἀτεχνῶς τέταται
(Pl. Rep. 4, 432). Οὐδ᾽ ἃς προςεδύκων κἀλογιζύμην ἐγὼ πρώτας παρέσεσθαι δεῦρο,
τὰς ᾿Αχαρνέων γυναῖκας, οὐχ ἥκουσιν (Arist. Lys. 61).
Rem. 2. οὐ μὰ τὸν Δί᾽, οὐ — (in answers): No, by Zeus, not —. (Also, without
further addition, merely: Οὐ pa τὸν Δί᾽, οὐ μὲν δή.)
[PART II.
§ 210] The Negations. 199
6) A composite negation, which follows after another, simple or
composite, with the same predicate, does not cancel the former, but
continues it, either heightening and confirming it (e.g. οὐ — οὐδέ,
non — ne — quidem, οὐδέ — οὐδέ, neque — ne — quidem, ov μέντοι
οὐδέ, οὐ μὴν οὐδέ, yet also not), or distributively (e. g. οὐδείς --- οὔτε
— οὔτε) or repeating it with the indefinite pronominal notion (pro-
noun or adverb), often several times (e.g. οὐδέ --- οὐδεὶς οὐδέν, οὐδεὶς
οὐδενὶ οὐδέν) : Μὴ λανθανέτω σε μηδὲ τοῦτο (Xen. Cyr. 5, 2, 36). Te
δὲ σύ; πῶς ποιήσεις ; οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ τὸν σὸν ἑταῖρον δεῖ παρελθεῖν (PL.
Phad. 378). Κλέαρχος ἐπὶ μὲν τοὺς πολεμίους οὐκ ἦγεν" ἤδει γὰρ
ἀπειρηκότας τοὺς στρατιώτας" οὐ μέντοι οὐδ᾽ ἀπέκλινε, φυλαττόμενος, μὴ
δοκοίη φεύγειν (Xen. An. 2, 2,16). "EE οὗ τὴν πόλιν οἰκοῦμεν, οὐδεὶς
οὔτε κίνδυνος οὔτε πόλεμος περὶ τηλικούτων τὸ μέγεθος ἡμῖν γέγονε,
περὶ ὅσων νυνὶ βουλευσόμενοι συνεληλύθαμεν (1506». Archid. 1). “Avev
τούτου οὐδεὶς εἰς οὐδὲν οὐδενὸς ἂν ὑμῶν οὐδέποτε γένοιτο ἄξιος (PL.
Phil, 19).
Rem. This last repetition of the negative with the several pronominal words is
only used where the negative is emphatically urged as universal; otherwise it is
said: Οὐδεὶς πώποτε κάλλιον θάνατον ἤνεγκεν ἢ Σωκράτης (Xen. Mem. 4, 8, 2).
Οὔτε τῶν πολιτῶν τῶν Φλιασίων οὐδεὶς πάνυ τι ἐπιχωριάζει τὰ νῦν ᾿Αθήναζε οὔτε τις
ξένος ἀφῖκται χρόνου συχνοῦ ἐκεῖθεν (Pl. Phed. 57).
With sundry verbs which contain a negative notion, and are con-
structed with the infinitive or acc. with inf., μή is attached to the
infinitive, to give prominence to the negation (only the affirmative
part of the verb being in the speaker’s thoughts). (Μή with tis
becomes μηδείς.) Such verbs are those which denote a denial and a
contradiction (ἀρνοῦμαι, ἐξαρνοῦμαι, ἔξαρνός εἰμι, ἀντιλέγω), a prohibi-
tion (ἀπαγορεύω, ἀπεῖπον, ἀποψηφίζομαι, ἀποχειροτονῶ), ἃ desisting
from or a retracting of an opinion or resolution (ἀπογιγνώσκω, ἀπο-
δοκεῖ, μεταγυγνώσκω, ἀνατίθεμαι, also ἀπεύχομαι), an acquittal (ἀπολύω,
ἀφίημι). a shunning or hindering and holding back or freeing from
something (εὐλαβοῦμαι, φυλάττομαι, κωλύω, διακωλύω, ἐμποδών εἰμι,
ἐναντιοῦμαι, εἴργω, ἀπέχω, ἀφαιροῦμαι, ἀποστερῶ, σώζω, &c.), lastly, ἃ
doubting of something (ἀπιστῶ, ἀπροςδόκητός εἰμι). Tav ἀποκτεινάν-
των Kvdpova οἱ μὲν ἄλλοι ἠρνοῦντο μὴ αὐτόχειρες γενέσθαι, εἷς δὲ
ὡμολογήκει (Xen. Hell. ἢ, 5, 1). ᾿Αστυάγης ἀπηγόρευε μηδένα βάλλειν
πρὶν Κῦρος ἐμπλησθείη θηρῶν (Xen. (γ».1,4., 14). Μαντινεῖς ἀπεψη-
φίσαντο τοῖς ἱεροῖς χρήμασι μὴ χρῆσθαι (Xen. Ποίέ. 1,4, 33). “Γιμόθεος
᾿Αριοβαρζάνει ἀπέγνω μὴ βοηθεῖν (Dem. 1ὅ, 9). Παυσανίας κριθεὶς
ὑπὸ τῶν Σπαρτιατῶν ἀπελύθη μὴ ἀδικεῖν (Thuc. 1, 128). Εὐλαβεῖσθε
ταῦτα μὴ πολλῶν ἐναντίον λέγειν (PL. Luthyd. 804). Οἱ διακωλύσαντε:;
CHAP. ΥὙΠΠ].]
[§
200. |
210.
[§
210,
ὃ
21
200 The Negations. [ὁ 201
ταῦτα μὴ γενέσθαι τίνες ἦσαν; (Andoc. 8,21.) Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι οὐ παρ-
ἤσαν ταῖς ναυσίν, ἀπιστοῦντες τὸν Σιτάλκην μὴ ἥξειν (Thue. 2, 101).
Rem. 1. Μή, however, is sometimes omitted (e.g. ᾿Οκνήσουσι, μὴ ἀποδόξῃ ἡμῖν
Tas σπονδὰς ποιήσασθαι, Xen. An. 2, 3, 9: εὐλαβοῦμαι ἐμπεσεῖν, Pl. Rep. 10, 608),
especially with verbs denoting a holding back, &c., and with κωλύω and its com-
pounds, this is the most usual. On the genitive of the infinitive of the verbs
which denote holding back, &c., with or without μή, see § 156, R.3. With
ἀντιλέγω, μεταγιγνώσκω. ἀνατίθεμαι the omission of μή gives a different sense:
μεταγιγνώσκω ποιεῖν, resolve, with abandonment of my former purpose, to do.
Rem. 2. Verbs which denote denial, contradiction, and doubt, may also be fol-
lowed by an οὐ in a sentence with ὡς, which οὐ belongs to the affirmative part of
the principal verb (ἀρνοῦμαι ὡς οὐ = ἀρνοῦμαι μή, λέγω, ὅτι od): Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι
οὐδαμοῦ ἀντεῖπον, ὡς οὐκ ἀδικοῦσι τοὺς ἡμετέρους (τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων) ξυμμάχους
(Lhuc. 1, 86).
a) After a principal verb, either directly negative or denying in the
i, form of interrogation, the negative (both the usual one and the super-
fluous one mentioned in the preceding paragraph) is usually put
twice by μὴ ov, the principal negative being repeated: Οὐδεὶς οἷός
T ἐστὶν ἄλλως λέγων μὴ οὐ καταγέλαστος εἶναι (PI. Gorg. 509: can
help being ridiculous). ᾿Αδύνατα ἣν (= οὐ δυνατόν), ᾿Αθηναίων ᾿Ὥρω-
πὸν ἐχόντων, μὴ οὐ μεγάλα βλάπτειν τὸ χωρίον τὴν Εὔβοιαν (Thue.
8, 60). Et ἀληθῆ ταῦτα, τίς μηχανὴ μὴ οὐχὶ πάντα καταναλωθῆναι εἰς
τὸ τεθνάναι; (Pl. Phad. 72 = οὐδεμία μηχανή.) Τίνα οἴει ἀπαρνή-
σεσθαι (= οὐδεὶς ἀπαρνήσεται) μὴ οὐχὶ ἐπίστασθαι τὰ δίκαια; (Pl. Gorg.
401.) (Ἤττων εἰμὶ καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου ὑμῶν, ὥςτε πολλοῦ δέω μὴ οὐ δύο γε φεύγειν. Pl.
Euthyd. 297. Ἰπολλοῦ δέω as denial.) Οὐδὲ τὸ χρηματίζεσθαι Εὐθύδημος καὶ
Διονυσόδωρός datov διακωλύειν οὐδὲν μὴ οὐ παραλαβεῖν τὴν σφετέραν
σοφίαν (Pl. Huthyd. 304, hinder not the receiving). Bi γενησόμεθα ἐπὶ
βασιλεῖ, τί ἐμποδὼν μὴ οὐχὶ πάντα τὰ δεινότατα παθόντας ὑβριζομένους
ἀποθανεῖν ; (Xen. An. 8, 1,18.) Οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο κρύπτειν τὸ μὴ οὐχ
ἡδέως ἂν καὶ ὠμῶν ἐσθίειν τῶν Σπαρτιατῶν (Xen. Hell. 3,3, 7).
Rem. Rarely μή alone (Οὐ δυνήσονται μὴ πείθεσθαι τοῖς Θηβαίοις, Xen. Hell. 6,
1, 1), except with article prefixed (τὸ μή, see § 156, R. 4); for here, after a
denial, both τὸ μή and τὸ μὴ οὐ are used. With the genitive of the infinitive (τοῦ
pn) οὐ is not added. (ςτε μὴ od after a principal verb negatived.)
6) In the same manner μὴ ov stands with the infinitive after
expressions denoting a disapprobation of an action thought of (there-
fore a demand that it should be forborne), e. g. δεινόν, αἰσχρόν,
’ / “
αἰσχύνη ἐστίν, ἀνόητον, πολλὴ avoid ἐστιν, also αἰσχύνομαι: Laow
' ᾿Αμφιςβητῶ, maintain (in controversy with a different opinion), e. g. ἀμφ. τὴν
ἐμὴν τέχνην μείζονος ἀγαθοῦ αἰτίαν εἶναι, ἀμφ. μὴ ἀληθῆ σε λέγειν.
[PART IL.
δ 202,,213.] The Negations. 201
αἰσχύνη ἣν μὴ οὐ συσπουδάζειν (Xen. An. 2,3, 11). Πολλὴ ἄνοια μὴ
οὐχὶ ἕν τε καὶ ταὐτὸν ἡγεῖσθαι τὸ ἐπὶ πᾶσι τοῖς σώμασι κάλλος (PL.
Conv. 210. More rarely simple μή: Zod προθύμου ὄντος αἰσχρὸν γίγνεται ἐμέ
A pre μὴ posure XPow yty
γε μὴ ἐθέλειν, Pl. Gorg. 458.)
c) Μὴ ov is also sometimes put (but in Attic prose rarely) with participles, or
other accessory definitions denoting an exception from the negative or quasi-nega-
tive statement of the principal sentence: Αἱ πόλεις πολλαὶ καὶ χαλεπαὶ λαβεῖν αἱ τῶν
Φωκέων μὴ οὐ χρύνῳ καὶ πολιορκίᾳ (Dem. 19, 123). More usually: Οὐ yap nv
πρᾶξαι μηδὲν μὴ διδόντα δῶρα (Thuc. 2, 97). (In the poets here and there with
the participle merely in the sense without (doing, &c.) where the preceding prin-
cipal verb is negatived: [Οὐ γὰρ ἂν μακρὰν ἴχνευον αὐτύς, μὴ οὐκ ἔχων τι σύμβολον
(Soph. Gid. 1. 221). Ἥκεις γὰρ οὐ κενή γε. - - μὴ οὐχὶ δεῖμ᾽ ἐμοὶ φέρουσά τι,
Cid. C. 5611.
Of special negative expressions, which at the same time denote relations of con-
nected sentences and clauses, the following are to be remarked : (1) οὐ μόνον, not only
(ἀλλά), (2) μὴ ὅτι, not to say; not merely (μὴ ὅτι ἰδιώτης τις ἀλλ᾽ ὁ μέγας βασιλεύς) ;
when a negative follows in the predicate common to both members, μὴ ὅτι denotes
(not to say not, i. 6.) not only not (non modo): ᾿Απατούριος μὴ ὅτι δικάσασθαι ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽
ἐγκαλέσαι μοι ἐτόλμησεν (Ise. 10, 1); the common negative may also be put first
(οὐ — pr) ὅτι, GAN οὐδέ) : TO ἱμάτιον ἢ ἄλλο τι, ὧν κέκτησαι. οὐδενὶ ἂν μὴ OTL προῖκα
δοίης ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ἔλαττον τῆς ἀξίας λαβών (Aen. Mem. 1, 6, 11). After a negative
clause μὴ ὅτι is (not to say, i.e.) much less (non modo) : Οὐδ᾽ ἀναπνεῖν, μὴ ὅτι λέγειν
τι δυνησόμεθα (Xen. Conv. 2, 26).2 (3) For μὴ ὅτι, in the sense not only and not
only not sometimes, but more rarely, οὐχ ὅτι is used: Τῇ τῶν Σκυθῶν βασιλείᾳ ἀδύ-
vara ἐξισοῦσθαι οὐκ ὅτι Ta ἐν TH Εὐρώπῃ, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἐν ᾿Ασίᾳ ἔθνος ἕν πρὸς Ev οὐκ ἔστιν
(see ὃ 209 a, R. 1), 6, re δυνατὸν Σκύθαις ὁμογνωμονοῦσι πᾶσιν ἀντιστῆναι (Thue. 2,
97). Οὐχ ὅτι στρατηγὸς GAN οὐδ᾽ 6 τυχὼν ἄνθρωπος (Dem. 23,155). (4) In the
sense not only not, we have also οὐχ ὅπως : Οὐχ ὅπως εὖ ποιήσας, avd ὧν εὖ ἔπαθες,
ἀξιοῖς ἡμᾶς ἀποπέμψασθαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἀποπορευομένους ἡμᾶς οὐδὲ καταυλισθῆναι, ὅσον δύνα-
σαι, ἐπιτρέπεις (Xen. An. 7, 7, 8).
Rem. For particular constructions of the negative particles with adverbs of
time or of place (e.g. οὔποτε, οὔπω, οὐκέτι, &c.), or with words which serve for
transition, or to give a certain emphasis to the denial (e. g. οὐ γάρ, οὐ yap ἀλλά,
5; , > “ >? > a ey = Ay
οὐ μήν, οὐμενοῦν, οὐδήπου, ov δῆτα, οὔτι), see the Lexicon [and Appendix]. (So
for μόνον ov, ὅσον ov, only not, i.e. nearly, almost.)
The word οὐδείς (μηδείς) and some verbs and phrases of denial (e. g. ἀπαυδῶ)
are sometimes by a less accurate turn of the sentence so put that in a subsequent
adversative member the affirmative notion contained in them (πάντες, ἕκαστος,
κελεύω, Ke.) is understood. λέγουσί τινες, ὅτι οὐδεὶς ἑκὼν δίκαιος, ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ ἀναν-
δρίας ἢ γήρως ἤ τινος ἄλλης ἀσθενείας ψέγει τὸ ἀδικεῖν (Pl. Rep. 2, 366).3
[1 But see Schneidewin im Z. and on v.13. Comp. App. 296.—H. B.]
* Also (with a single noun): μή τί ye (“Akpoe πεττευταὶ τοσοῦτοι οὐκ ἂν γένοιντο,
μή τι δὴ βασιλεῖς ye, Pl. Pol. 292).
3 ᾿Αμελήσας, ὧνπερ οἱ πολλοί (viz. ἐπιμελοῦνται), χρηματισμοῦ τε καὶ οἰκοδομίας Kai
στρατηγιῶν (Pl. Apol. 36).
CHAP. VIII. ]
[ξ
211}
202 Ellipsis. Anacoluthia. [ὃ 214.
CEPA Re Xe
Certain particular Irregularities of Construction.
(APPENDIX TO THE FIRST AND SECOND PARTS.)
§ (The Verb understood.) In co-ordinate connected sentences, or in
214. accessory sentences of the same kind which mutually correspond, the
verb is often understood, to be supplied in one sentence from the
other: Σὺ μὲν τιμῆς, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἡσυχίας ἐπιθυμοῦμεν. Οὐδὲ ταῦτα οἱ
παραγενόμενοι πάντα, πλὴν τὸ καθ᾽ ἑαυτὸν ἕκαστος οἶδεν (Thuc. 7, 44).
‘Tkavov τοῦτό μοι τεκμήριον, ὅτι ὡς ἀληθῶς μοι εὔνους εἶ, καὶ μήν, ὅτι
γε οἷος παῤῥησιάζεσθαι, αὐτός τε φὴς καὶ ὁ λόγος, ὃν ὀλίγον πρότερον
ἔλεγες, ὁμολογεῖ σοι (Pl. Gorg. 487).
Rem. 1. Sometimes merely the infinitive of the preceding verb is understood
atter a new verb: Τῇ αὐτῇ ἰδέᾳ ἐκεῖνά τε εἶχον οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ τὰ ἐνθάδε νῦν Tete
ρῶνται (Thuc. 6,76). Οὔτε πάσχοντες κακὸν οὐδὲν οὔτε μελλοντες (Lsocr. Panath.
103).
Rem. 2. In some constructions, especially where the opposition between the
other clauses of the sentence makes it plain how the words must be connected,
the principal verb may be understood from the leading sentence in the accessory
sentence (even the infinitive or participle, as in §§$ 177, 178, may be thus under-
stood from the verb finite in the principal sentence), rarely vice versd, i.e. from
the accessory in the principal sentence: ᾿Αργεῖοι πολεμοῦσι μέν, ἐξ οὗπερ THY πόλιν
οἰκοῦσι, πρὸς τοὺς ὁμόρους, ὥςπερ Λακεδαιμόνιοι" τοσοῦτον δὲ διαφέρουσιν, ὅσον ἐκεῖνοι
μὲν πρὸς ἥττους αὑτῶν, οὗτοι δὲ πρὸς κρείττους (Lsoer, Phil. 61). Φιλεῖν οἴεσθε δεῖν,
oustrep ἂν καὶ ὁ βασιλεύς (viz. φιλῇ. Lsoer. Nic. 60). ᾿Ανεχώρησαν καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι,
ἐπειδὴ καὶ τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους εἶδον (viz. ἀναχωροῦντας, Thuc. 3,16). Ei δή τῳ
σοφώτερός του φαίην εἶναι, τούτῳ ἄν (viz. σοφ. εἶναι φαίην), ὅτι οὐκ εἰδὼς ἱκανῶς
περὶ τῶν ἐν ἽΑιδου οὕτω καὶ οἴομαι οὐκ εἰδέναι (PL. Apol. 29).}
Rem. 3. Sometimes the verb is understood, from the preceding sentence, in a
sentence which is not grammatically connected with it, as in an appended remark
in hypothetical form with ἄν (ὃ 139 6), or in an explanation and statement of the
reason with γάρ. Τοὐναντίον ὑπομνήσω ὑμᾶς ἢ of πολέμιοί σφισιν αὐτοῖς παρακελεύ-
ονται" οἱ μὲν γάρ, ὅτι περὶ πατρίδος ἔσται ὁ ἀγών, ἐγὼ δέ, ὅτι οὐκ ἐν πατρίδι (Thue.
6, 68).
Rem. 4. Sometimes in two connected (or opposed) sentences, the verb of the
first member supplies to the second a verb of kindred meaning capable of being
comprehended under the same general notion (zeugma): Πλάτων ὅδε, ὦ ἄνδρες
1 Σύ νύν μ᾽, ἀδελφέ, μή τις ᾿Αργείων κτάνῃ, Hur. Or. 1037; κτάνε from κτάνῃ.
[PART IL
§ 215.] Ellipsis. Anacoluthia. 203
Cal “-“ 4
᾿Αθηναῖοι, καὶ Κρίτων καὶ Κριτόβουλος κελεύουσί με τριάκοντα μνῶν τιμήσασθαι,
᾿ αὐτοὶ δὲ ἐγγυᾶσθαι (viz. βούλονται, Pl, Apol. 38).
(Ellipsis of the Verb.) a) The verb ἐστίν or εἰσίν (third person in
the indicative) is often omitted in short and pithy sayings, not only
in the principal sentence, but also in simple and concise accessory
sentences, e. g. declarative object-sentences, interrogative sentences,
relative sentences (especially with ὅσος). Note in particular the fre-
quent omission of ἐστίν with the gerundive (see § 84a), and with
adjectives in the neuter, and certain substantives with which it forms
an impersonal expression to which an infinitive is attached, e.g.
ὥρα, ἀνάγκη, ἐλπίς, οὐ σχολή. Οὐκ ἀσφαλεῖς ai μεγάλαι εὐτυχίαι.
“Opa, εἴ σοι βουλομένῳ ἃ λέγω (Pl. Rep. ὃ, 358. On βουλομένω col
ἐστιν, see § 38d). "Ἔνιοι τῶν πρεσβυτῶν τὸ γῆρας ὑμνοῦσιν, ὅσων
κακῶν σφισιν αἴτιον (Pl. Rep. 1, 329). ᾿Απὸ τῶν ἡρώων ἀρξάμενοι,
ὅσων λόγοι λελειμμένοι, μέχρι τῶν νῦν ἀνθρώπων (Pl. Rep. 2, 366).
ΑΛξιον καὶ τῶν προγόνων τῆς ἀρετῆς μεμνῆσθαι. Οὐ σχολὴ κάμνειν
(Pl. Rep. 2, 406). ριτωνία, Πελοπόννησος, νῆσοι, ὅσαι ἐντὸς Πελοποννήσου καὶ
Κρήτης, Thuc. 2,9. ᾿Αλκιβιάδης ἠρώτα, ὅπου ᾿Αγάθων, Pl. Conv. 212. Omission of
ἔστι in the sense zs in respect of place, 7s to be found, lies, &c.) (On οὐδεὶς ὅςτις οὐ,
see 105 b, R.)
Rem. 1. In the first or second person εἰμί is rarely omitted, viz. in quite simple
principal sentences : Σοὶ οὐκ ὀλίγοι τῶν νέων πλησιάζουσι, Kai δικαίως: ἄξιος yap τά
T ἄλλα καὶ γεωμετρίας ἕνεκα (Pl. Theat. 143, for thou art worthy). (With the
adjective ἕτοιμος it occurs more frequently : Λεκτέον, ἐπειδὴ καὶ σὺ ἕτοιμος ἀκολου-
Gew, Pl. Pol. 277.)
Rem. 2. The subjunctive third person singular 7 is now and then omitted after
the relative with av: Παρὰ τούτων κομίζονται, ὧν ἂν αὐτοῖς χρεία (Pl. Rep. 2,
370).
6) Other verbs are omitted only in proverbs and similar expressions, where the
object or some other accompanying definition points to the verb to be supplied :
γλαῦκ᾽ εἰς ᾿Αθήνας (ἄγειν). “Avw οἱ ποταμοί. Also a verb denoting to do, or to be
done, to happen, is omitted in certain frequent forms of interrogation with τί, 6. g.
᾿Αλλὰ τί; (βούλει ποιῶ), and especially Τί δέ, ei —; as also an imperative which
denotes in general an action or speech, with μὴ οὕτω, μή poe οὕτω, and with μή μοι
with an accusative (§ 32). (Mn, πρὸς σὲ γονάτων, ὃ 77,3 ἃ.)
Rem. 1. Especially note the omission of the notions of doing, or being done,
with οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ (Ovs φαμεν μανθάνειν, οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ ἀναμιμνήσκονται, Pl. Phed.
76), whence this expression is sometimes used quite adverbially in the sense only,
mereiy. (Τί ἄλλο ij —, what else than —? Ado τι if — ἄλλο tt —, see § 199 b.)
Rem. 2. Quite distinct from the ellipsis of a single word in definite form, in
the Greek as in other languages, are the phrases (derived from the language of
common life) in which originally an entire clause of the thought present to the
mind is omitted, but intimated by a single particle referring to it, or by some
CHAP. IX.]
[§
215.]
TG:
204 Ellipsis. Anacoluthia. [ὃ 216.
other word, or by the general form of the speech; as in Greek by τὸ δέ (δ 188,
R. 7), by the use of ἀλλά in the beginning of a speech, or in certain construe-
tions with other particles (οὐ yap ἀλλά, &e.), by ὡς with the indicative future in
replies with assurance (‘Qs οὔτις ἀμφὶ τῷδ᾽ ὑγρὰν θήσει κόνιν, Hur. Phen. 1664 ;
think, say, do, what thou wilt ; for —), ἕο. Of such ellipses the Lexicon must
supply the explanation.
(Anacoluthia.) Anacolutha, or sentences which deviate from the
strict continuation, in reeular grammatical connexion, of the form in
which they set σας are not rare in the Greek ΠῚ though more
frequent and harsh in certain authors who either (as Plato). imitate
the freedom of oral discourse, or (as Thucydides) write, on the whole,
in an embarrassed and perplexed style. They are caused, partly, by
the circumstance, that instead of the form for which the beginning
was calculated, in the further progress of the sentence, some ouhee
form is chosen as being more convenient and more impressive, or is
induced through the use of other expressions; partly, by the inter-
vention of side-remarks and parentheses, especially when these are
carried to a greater length than usual, whereby the connexion of the
discourse is obscured, or its continuation in the same form rendered
difficult. Where the anacoduthon is caused in this last way, 1. 6. by
an interruption through interposed matter, the last part is often
attached to what goes before by repetition of some words from the
beginning, or by repetition, in a different grammatical form, of what
has been already said—often, at the same time, by the particles ody
(then; as I was saying), δή (well then) or δέ, sometimes not so.
᾿Επεὶ δὲ θορύβου τε ἤσθετο Ξενοφῶν καί, σημαινόντων ἀλλήλοις τῶν
περὶ Σεύθην, κατέμαθεν, ὅτι τούτου ἕνεκα τὰ πυρὰ κεκαυμένα εἴη τῷ
Σεύθῃ πρὸ τῶν προφυλάκων, ὅπως οἱ μὲν φύλακες μὴ ὁρῷντο, ἐν τῷ
σκότει ὄντες, οἱ δὲ προςιόντες μὴ λανθάνοιεν, ἀλλὰ διὰ τὸ φῶς καταφα-
νεῖς εἶεν ---, ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἤσθετο, προπέμπει τὸν ἑρμηνέα κτὰ. (Xen. An. 7,
2, 18 sqq. Repetition without change, merely because of the nume-
rous interposed clauses. The δέ of the commencement repeated with
10.) Τὰ δ᾽ αὖ τῶν στρατιωτῶν ὁπότε ἐνθυμοίμην ὅτι TOV μὲν ἀγαθῶν
πάντων οὐδενὸς ἡμῖν μετείη, εἰ μὴ πριαίμεθα. ὅτου δ᾽ ὠνησόμεθα, ἤδειν
ἔτι ὀλέγους ἔχοντας, ἄλλως δέ πως πορίζεσθαι τὰ ἐπιτήδεια ἢ ἢ ὠνουμέ-
νους, ὅρκους ἤδη κατέχοντας ἡμᾶς, --ταῦτ᾽ οὖν λογιζόμενος ἐνίοτε τὰς
σπονδὰς μᾶλλον ἐφοβούμην ἢ νῦν τὸν πόλεμον (Xen. An. 3, 1, 20.
Repetition with change, and οὗν). Tatra τε εὖ λέγεις, ὦ νἀ καὶ
τὰς πρώτας ὑποθέσεις, καὶ εἰ πισταὶ ὑμῖν εἰσιν, ὁμῶς ἐπισκεπτέαι
1 Repetition of a conjunction alone: Δέδοικα, μή, ἂν ἅπαξ μάθωμεν ἀργοὶ ζῆν καὶ
ἐν ἀφθόνοις βιοτεύειν καὶ Μήδων δὲ καὶ Περσῶν καλαῖς τε καὶ μεγάλαις γυναιξὶν ὁμιλεῖν,
μὴ ὥςπερ οἱ Λωτοφάγοι ἐπιλαθώμεθα τῆς οἴκαδε ὁδοῦ (Xen. An. 3, 2, 25).
[PART II.
§ 216.] Ellipsis. Anacoluthia. 205
σαφέστερον (Pl. Phed. 101. Plato began as if he meant to say ἐπι- [ςξ
σκεπτέον. but then he has been led to say ἐπισκεπτέαι. because of the 216]
clause εἰ καὶ πισταί εἰσιν). Βουλόμενος δὲ Κῦρος κατάσκοπόν Twa
πέμψαι ἐπὶ «Λυδίας καὶ μαθεῖν ὅ,τι πράττοι ὁ ᾿Ασσύριος, ἔδοξεν αὐτῷ
ἐπιτήδειος εἶναι ᾿Αράσπας anbeiv é ἐπὶ τοῦτο (Xen. Cyr. 6, 1,31). Κακῶν
δ᾽ αἴτιον φάναι θεόν τινι γίγνεσθαι, ἀγαθὸν ὄντα, Siaparyeréov παντὶ
τρόπῳ μή TE τινα λέγειν ταῦτα ἐν τῇ αὑτοῦ πόλει, εἰ μέλλει εὐνομήσεσθαι,
μή τέ τινα ἀκούειν (PL. ep. 2 2, 380 ; properly φάναν ought to have
been followed merely by οὐκ ¢aréov, or a similar expression, but the
whole is repeated and its sense developed more in detail). Katavody
δὲ ὁ Κῦρος, ὡς εὖ μὲν αὐτῷ εἶχον οἱ στρατιῶται πρὸς τὸ δύνασθαι στρα-
τιωτικοὺς πόνους φέρειν, εὖ δὲ τὰς ψυχὰς πρὸς τὸ καταφρονεῖν τῶν
πολεμίων, ἐπιστήμονες δ᾽ ἦσαν τὰ προςήκοντα τῇ ἑαυτῶν ἕκαστος ὁπλί-
σει, καὶ πρὸς τὸ εὖ πείθεσθαι δὲ τοῖς ἄρχουσιν ἑώρα πάντας εὖ παρ-
εσκευασμένους, - ἐκ τούτων οὖν ἐπεθύμει τι ἤδη πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους
πράττειν (Xen. Cyr. 3, 3,9; after κατανοῶν it ought properly to have
@one on in the participle thus: καὶ πρὸς τὸ εὖ 7. ἘΞ ὁρῶν, but this
is detached from the form with which the period commenced, and is
put as a new principal sentence, whence the resumption is made by
the words ἐκ τούτων οὗν). Ἔπειτα δέ --- ἀναμνήσω γὰρ ὑμᾶς καὶ τοὺς
τῶν προγόνων τῶν ἡμετέρων κινδύνους, ἵ ἵν᾽ εἰδῆτε, ὡς ἀγαθοῖς τε ὑμῖν
προςήκει εἶναι σώζονταί τε σὺν τοῖς θεοῖς καὶ ἐκ πάνυ δεινῶν οἱ ἀγαθοί:
ἐλθόντων μὲν γὰρ Περσῶν ΄παμπλήθει στόλῳ ὡς ἀφανιούντων αὖθις τὰς
᾿Αθήνας, ὑποστῆναι αὐτοῖς ᾿Αθηναῖοι τολμήσαντες ἐνίκησαν αὐτούς
(Xen. An. 3, 2, 11; the sentence commenced by ἔπειτα is quite aban-
doned, and its purport attached by the words yap tena ear yap)
to the parenthetic sentence. Cf. Pl. Rep. 4, 428 where after
ὥςπερ εἰ the corresponding demonstrative clause doce not simply
follow).
Rem. 1. A particular kind of anacoluthon consists in an inaccurate use of the
co-ordinate connexion by τέ — καί, οὔτε — οὔτε, μέν --- δέ (besides the lesser
deviations assigned in § 185 a, R. 5, § 188, R. 5, and § 208, R. 1). Sometimes,
namely, there are attached to the first member such interposed sentences and
remarks, that the connexion of the speech is broken, and the second member is
then given in a different form : Οὔτε τοὺς πονηροὺς ὁρῶ φίλους ἀλλήλοις δυναμένους
εἶναι" πῶς γὰρ ἂν ἢ ἀχάριστοι ἢ ἀμελεῖς ἢ 7) πλεονέκται ἢ Ὦ ἄπιστοι ἢ ἀκρατεῖς ἄνθρωποι
δύναιντο φίλοι γενέσθαι ; Οἱ μὲν οὖν πονηροὶ πάντως ἔμοιγε δοκοῦσιν ἀλλήλοις ἐχθροὶ
μᾶλλον ἢ φίλοι πεφυκέναι. ᾿Αλλὰ μήν, ὥςπερ σὺ λέγεις, οὐδ᾽ ἂν τοῖς χρηστοῖς οἱ
πονηροί ποτε συναρμύσειαν εἰς φιλίαν πῶς γὰρ, κτλ. (Xen. Mem. 2, 6,19; after
* So, not unfrequently, a sentence begins with a participle in the nominative
referred to the properly acting subject, though afterwards this comes to stand in a
different case, especially with. δοκεῖ, ἔδοξεν (e. e.g. Pl. Apol. 21).
CHAP) 1Χ.]
206 Ellipsis. Anacoluthia. [§ 216.
Οὔτε τοὺς πονηροὺς, κτὰ., we should expect οὔτε τοῖς χρηστοῖς τοὺς πονηρούς oY
some similar form). In this manner it is not uncommon for the co-ordinate con-
nexion of two members to be broken, which members should belong to a preceding
principal sentence, and then the second member enters as a principal sentence
(sometimes with no particular inducement in the connexion of the sentence, but
with the view of adding something to the second member, or to give it an easier
form) ; especially in this manner after a circumstance denoted by a participle the
second member follows as verbum finitum : Τενομένης ἐκκλησίας ἐλέχθησαν τοιοίδε
λόγοι ἀπό Te ἄλλων, τῶν μὲν πιστευόντων τὰ περὶ τῆς στρατείας τῆς τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων,
τῶν δὲ τὰ ἐναντία λεγόντων, καὶ Ἑρμοκράτης ὁ Ἕρμωνος παρελθὼν αὐτοῖς ἔλεγε
καὶ παρήνει τοιάδε (Thuc. 6, 32; we should expect ἀπό τε ἄλλων — καὶ ad’ Ἕρμο-
κράτους τοῦ Ἕρμωνος). Ἐπεὶ παρεσκευάζετο ἤδη Κῦρος ὡς ἀπιών, παρῆν ὁ Ταδάτας
ἄλλα τε δῶρα πολλὰ καὶ παντοῖα φέρων καὶ ἄγων καὶ ἵππους δ᾽ Hye πολλούς,
ἀφελόμενος τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ἱππέων (Xen. Cyr. 5, 4, 29). Οἱ Βοιωτοὶ ἐστράτευσαν ἐπὶ τὸ
Δήλιον καὶ προςέβαλον τῷ τειχίσματι, ἄλλῳ τε τρόπῳ πειράσαντες καὶ μηχανὴν
προςήγαγον, ἧπερ εἷλεν αὐτό, τοιάνδε (Thuc. 4, 100). Οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι νύσῳ ἐπιέζοντο
κατ᾽ ἀμφότερα, τῆς τε ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ταύτης οὔσης, ἐν 7 ἀσθενοῦσιν ἄνθρωποι
μάλιστα, καὶ τὸ χωρίον ἅμα, ἐν ᾧ ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο, ἑλῶδες καὶ χαλεπὸν nv (Thue. 7,
47 = kai τοῦ χωρίου --- ἑλώδους ὄντος). (Often in poets, e.g. δυςχλαινίᾳ τ᾽ ἄμορ-
hos ὀμμάτων τ᾽ ἀπὸ φόνου σταλαγμοὶ σὴν κατέσταζον γένυν, Hur. Hee. 240, and in
Herodotus.) (Εὐφρονίου υἱὸς ὅδε ἐστίν, ἀνδρός, οἷον καὶ σὺ τοῦτον διηγεῖ, καὶ
ἄλλως εὐδοκίμου καὶ μέντοι καὶ οὐσίαν μάλα πολλὴν κατέλιπεν. Pl. Theat. 144 =
καταλιπόντος. ‘Transition from an adjective to an independent sentence.)' Some-
times, where a leading term common to both members precedes them both, the
connexion is disturbed by the insertion of a new leading term instead of this in the
second member: Οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐς τὴν Ῥόδον τὴν γνώμην εἶχον πλεῖν, ἐλπί-
ζοντες νῆσόν τε οὐκ ἀδύνατον καὶ ναυβατῶν πλήθει καὶ πεζῷ προςάξεσθαι, καὶ ἅμα
ἡγούμενοι αὐτοὶ δυνατοὶ ἔσεσθαι, Τισσαφέρνην μὴ αἰτοῦντες χρήματα, τρέφειν τὰς
ναῦς (Thue. 8, 44; where it might have been simply said: ἐλπίζοντες νῆσόν τε
mposageo Oa καὶ αὐτοὶ δυνατοὶ ἔσεσθαι. So frequently in Thucydides. Often the
new leading term is necessary, so that the partition by ré — καί or pev — δέ ought
properly to have been applied to the two leading terms, not to the accessory
definitions, e.g. here ἐλπίζοντές te — καὶ ἅμα ἡγούμενοι. Hence τέ seems to be
transposed.) Ἔν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἐκκλησίᾳ μετέγνωσαν ᾿Αθηναῖοι (the Athenians changed
their mind and determined ; ὃ 210, R. 1), Κερκυραίοις ξυμμαχίαν μὲν μὴ ποιή-
σασθαι (to make indeed no public offensive and defensive alliance with the C.),
ὥςτε τοὺς αὐτοὺς ἐχθροὺς καὶ φίλους νομίζειν (εἰ γὰρ ἐπὶ Κόρινθον ἐκέλευόν σφισιν ot
Κερκυραῖοι ξυμπλεῖν, ἐλύοντ᾽ ἂν αὐτοῖς αἱ πρὸς Πελοποννησίους σπονδαί) ἐπι-
μαχίαν δὲ ἐποιήσαντο, τῇ ἀλλήλων βοηθεῖν (Thue. 1, 44).
Rem. 2. Sometimes an anacoluthon is caused by the circumstance that the
writer, as he proceeds, has in his thoughts an expression, the sense of which is
contained in what goes before, though the expression itself is not there used, and
continues the passage conformably with this (the construction πρὸς τὸ σημαινόμενον,
according to the thing signified, not according to the words, especially in poets and
in complicated prose): Καὶ περὶ Πύλον ὑπ᾽ ἀμφοτέρων κατὰ κράτος ἐπολεμεῖτο.
᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν δυοῖν νεοῖν ἐναντίαιν ἀεὶ τὴν νῆσον περιπλέοντες τῆς ἡμέρας (τῆς δὲ
* Οἱ ξύμμαχοι ᾽Ορχόμενον ἐπολιόρκουν, βουλόμενοι ἄλλως τε προςγενέσθαι σφίσι καὶ
ὅμηροι ἐκ τῆς ᾿Αρκαδίας ἦσαν αὐτόθι ὑπὸ Λακεδαιμονίων κείμενοι (Lhuc. 5, 61, = καὶ
ὅτι ἦσαν).
[PART II.
§ 216.] Ellipsis. Anacoluthia. 207
νυκτὸς ἅπασαι περιώρμουν)" Πελοποννήσιοι δ᾽ ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ στρατοπεδευόμενοι
καὶ προςβολὰς ποιούμενοι τῷ τείχει (Thue. 4, 23 ; as if ἀμφότεροι ἐπολέμουν preceded).
Καὶ τοῖς Συρακουσίοις. κατάπληξις οὐκ ὀλίγη ἐγένετο, εἰ πέρας μηδὲν ἔ ἔσται σφίσι τοῦ
κινδύνου" ὁρῶντες οὔτε διὰ τὴν Δεκέλειαν τειχιζομένην οὐδὲν ἣ ἧσσον στρατὸν ἴσον τῷ
προτέρῳ ἐπεληλυθότα τήν τε τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων δύναμιν πανταχύσε πολλὴν φαινομένην
(Thue. as 42). ἯἩ οἰμωγὴ ἐκ τοῦ Πειραιῶς διὰ τῶν μακρῶν τειχῶν ἐς ἄστυ διῆκεν, 6
ἕτερος τῷ ἑτέρῳ παραγγέλλων ast ἐκείνης τῆς νυκτὸς οὐδεὶς ἐκοιμήθη. οὐ
μόνον τοὺς ἀπολωλότας πενθοῦντες ἀλλὰ πολὺ ἔτι μᾶλλον ἑαυτοὺς τὰ ἔσχατα
πείσεσθαι νομίζοντες (Xen. Heil, 2, 2,3 = πάντες διηγρύπνουν). ἽὍτῳ γὰρ ὦφθην
εὐτυχοῦσ᾽, αἰδώς μ᾽ ἔχει, ἐν τῷδε πότμῳ τυγχάνουσ᾽ , ἵν᾿ εἰμὶ νῦν (Eur. Hee. 970 = ἘΞΞΞ
αἰδοῦμαι). οὐ λειπτέον τὴν. τάξιν ἀλλὰ καὶ ἐν πολέμῳ καὶ πανταχοῦ ποιητέον ἃ ἂν
κελεύῃ ἡ ἡ πόλις καὶ ἡ πατρίς, ἢ πείθειν αὐτὴν 7) τὸ δίκαιον πέφυκε ( (ΕἸ Crito, 51, as
if ποιεῖν δεῖ, ποῦ ποιητέον, had preceded). ᾿Εννέπω σε ἀφ᾽ ἡμέρας τῆς νῦν mposavday
μήτε τούςδε μήτ᾽ ἐμέ, ὡς ὄντι γῆς τῆςδ᾽ ἀνοσίῳ μιάστορι (Soph. Cid. [. 350, as if it
had first been said ἐννέπω σοι, I command thee, not σέ, I command that thou).
Rem. 3. Now and then an interchange takes place between a remark to a
leading sentence inserted with ὡς, and a principal sentence with object. sentence
annexed : Ὡς ἐγώ, ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου χθὲς ἥκοντος πλοίου, ἤκουσά τινος, ὅτι
Κλέανδρος ὁ ἐκ Βυζαντίου ἁ ἁρμοστὴς μελλει ἥξειν πλοῖα ἔχων καὶ τριήρεις (Xen. An.
6, 2, 18 = either ‘Qs — ἤκουσά τινος, Κλέανδρος μέλλει ----, or [Ηκουσά τινος, drt —
without ὡς).
CHAP. IX,
[§
216. ]
PART Til:
THE ORDER AND POSITION OF WORDS AND SENTENCES.
§ a) Tue position of words in Greek, as in Latin, is, in detail, less
217. tied down to fixed and definite rules than in English and other
(431, modern languages, and rests, in great measure, on the emphasis
544.) which is meant to be laid on the several words according to the
sense of the passage, and at the same time on the consideration of
euphony. The simplest order is, that the subject, with all that
belongs to it, stands first, and then the predicate, viz. either the verb
last, with all remaining definitions (object, &c.) between, or the verb
first, and then the other definitions: Τισσαφέρνης διαβάλλει Κῦρον
πρὸς τὸν ἀδελφόν. These definitions are arranged among themselves
according to their importance and their connexion with the verb.
Interrogative sentences begin with the interrogative pronominal word
or particle, accessory sentences with the conjunction or the relative
word.
δὴ) For the sake of emphasis, a deviation from the simple order of
the words takes place, such that the word which expresses the most
important notion is advanced to the beginning, or sometimes kept
back to the end of the sentence: "Eanyayovto δὲ τοὺς Θηβαίους Kat
ἀνέῳξαν τὰς πύλας Πλαταιέων ἄνδρες, Navereldys τε καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ
(Thuc. 2, 3). Παρεσκευάζοντο δὲ καὶ οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι (Thuc. 2, 7).
Kindred or opposed terms are made to stand out prominently by
juxta-position.
Rem. 1. One or more words conveying a notion on which there is a special
emphasis may also stand before the interrogative word, as also before a relative
which refers to a demonstrative following, and before a conjunction if the subordi-
nate sentence begins the period: Περὶ δὲ τοῦ πολέμου τί ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; Περὶ δὲ τοῦ ᾿
πολέμου ἃ ἔλεγες, ὁμολογῶ ἀληθῆ εἶναι. Οἱ δὲ τῶν ᾿Αργείων ἄνδρες, ἀκούσαντες,
ἐπειδὴ ἀνήνεγκαν τοὺς λόγους ἔς τε τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὸν δῆμον, ἐψηφίσαντο ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ
ἄνδρας εἵλοντο. δώδεκα (Thuc. 5,28). But in prose the verb may never stand
before the relative or conjunction. Ξ
[PART III.
§ 217—219.] Order and Position of Words and Sentences. 209
Rem. 2. Between two connected words, sometimes a third is inserted which is
less prominent, or which belongs at the same time to both: Διὰ τὴν Δαρείου
τελευτὴν καὶ ᾿Αρταξέρξου.
a) A genitive or an adjective to a substantive without article
stands first with some emphasis, and because of the opposition :
εὔζωνος ἀνήρ, τῆς πατρίδος σωτήρ, otherwise usually afterwards :
ἀνὴρ ἀγαθός. For the order of the adjectives, of the genitive, and
other additions to substantives with the article, see the doctrine of
the article (Part I. Chap. II.). Sometimes the definitions belonging
to a substantive are detached from it by the circumstance, that the
substantive itself, or its definitions, are drawn off, with emphasis, to
the beginning or end of the sentence, provided no obscurity or
ambiguity is thereby occasioned, especially with the verb in the
middle place: "Epa, ἃ παρὰ σοφωτάτων ἤκουσά ποτε ἀνδρῶν Kal ἐμπει-
ροτάτων. Τούτων τῶν ἀνδρῶν οὐδὲ τὰ ὀνόματα οἶδα. (τῶν βαρβάρων
τινὲς ἱππέων. Xen. An. 2, δ, 82. Τῶν ἀφ᾽ Ἡρακλέους τινὶ πεφυκότων. Isoer. Phil. 76.
Other peculiarities of position in the partitive genitive may be seen in § 50 a, R.)
δὴ) Adverbs belonging to the verb stand either next to it (before it, if it closes the
sentence), or, in case of special emphasis, in the beginning or at the end of the sen-
tence; sometimes they are inserted without emphasis between other accessory
definitions which are made prominent. Adverbs belonging to adjectives usually
stand before them; adverbs of degree, and οὕτω, rarely stand after them (πεφυκὼς
οὕτως, Pl., βελτίων στολύ, ὕστερον οὐ πολλῷ, γενναῖος πάνυ, καλὸς λίαν. P/.). (Mada
γέ τινες ὀλίγοι, Pl. Rep. 7, 5981. Mada καὶ ἄνδρες ἄλκιμοι, Xen. Hell. 6, 2, 37.)
c) On the placing of prepositions, see ᾧ 80.
a) The indefinite pronoun τίς and the indefinite correlative adjec-
tives (ποιός, ποσός) and adverbs (πώς, &c.) can never begin a sentence.
4) The particles dpa, αὖ, δέ, δή, γάρ. μέν, μήν, viv, οὖν, τέ, τοί,
τοίνυν, which in various ways connect sentences, form transitions, or
give prominence to particular notions, never stand at the beginning
of a sentence, but always after one or more words, to which, in part,
they closely adhere; so dv. See the Lexicon [and Appendix], and
on δέ, τέ, μέν, ὃ 185, R. 4, and ὃ 188, R. 1; on the position of ἄν,
δ 139. So γέ always after the word to which it gives prominence
(limiting and restrictive), or after the first of several, when it thus
belongs to a set of words taken together (κατά ye τὸν σὸν λόγον, PI.
Gorg. 471: εἴπερ γε, ὦ φίλε, ἄδικος, Pl. ibid.).
Rem. But in the parenthetic insertion of φημί (see c) the words mentioned
under a and ὦ are sometimes put first, the interposed matter coalescing, so to say,
with the rest of the sentence: Ti οὖν, ἂν φαίη ὁ λύγος, ἔτι ἀπιστεῖς ; (Pl. Phed.
87.) “Edo€e, πού φησι, τῇ βουλῇ ἢ τῷ δήμῳ (Pl. Phed. 258).
PART III.] Ρ
210.
210 Order and Position of Words and Sentences, [ὃ 220.
c) The verb φημί is put, when a person’s own words are reported,
by preference after one or more words of the speech reported : Kai ὁ
Σωκράτης, Iva τοίνυν, ἔφη. μὴ ἀμφίβολον ἢ, ὁρίσατέ μοι, μέχρι πόσων
ἐτῶν δεῖ νομίζειν νέους εἶναι τοὺς “ἀνθρώπους (Xen. Mem, 1, 2, 35.
More rarely : Kat ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη: “να --- for eiev:"Tva —). When
to the φημί thus used its subject is given, this stands by preference
after it: Τί οὖν, ἔφη ὁ Σωκράτης, ποιητέον σοι δοκεῖ ; more rarely
ὁ Σωκράτης ἔφη. (Separated: Ki δὲ μὴ ταύτῃ γε, ἔφη, πείθῃ, ὦ
Σιμμία, ὁ Σωκράτης, cKewrat, ἐὰν τῆδέ TH σοι σκοπουμένῳ συνδόξη. ί.
Phed. 73.)
Rem. The position of the words in poetry has various freedoms for which no
rules can be given in this place.
In Greek, as in Latin, accessory sentences of every kind may be
inserted into every principal sentence, by which means, as also by
the position of the relative clauses before the demonstrative, a mani-
fold and diversified variety is obtained in the structure of the period :
in which the main thing to be considered is, that every accessory
sentence should be inserted in its proper place, i.e. precisely where
the thought or statement contained in it naturally presents, itself to
one’s mind, and, especially in the historical style, ‘that the succession
of time and the causal connexion of the several parts of the action
and of the circumstances, should be carefully observed.
Rem. When a dependent sentence, especially interrogative, is drawn to the
beginning, either by a pronoun referring to what goes before, or by the emphasis
and an antithesis, either the whole leading sentence, if it be short, or some words
of it, may be inserted before the interrogative word or the conjunction : Ta τῶν
πολεμίων, σαφῶς, ὅπως EXEL, ἐρῶ.
[PART III.
ee Paps ING LX,
ON THE USE AND MEANING OF THE PARTICLES.
THE office of the particles is either (1) adverbial, i.e. as they are used to denote
certain modifications, qualifications, or affections of the assertion, or of one or more
of its terms (viz. affirmation and denial; absoluteness and conditionality ; concession
and opposition; confirmation and limitation; parity and disparity, &c.), or (2)
conjunctional, as they serve for connexion of sentences or terms of sentences. The
two uses at so many points run over into each other, that it will be more convenient;
for the purpose of this Appendix, to comprise the subject under one general view.
As the principal uses of conjunctions have been already described in Chapter VEE.
the adverbial, which is also the original, use will here principally come under con-
sideration.
καί, connected by its origin with the form κο- of the relative and interrog. pro-
noun, is therefore cognate with que and te, which are forms of the same pronoun,
but as indefinite. Hence the primary force of the combination Te — kal is any-
where (some-where), any-how, &e. — where, how (so), &e.: of kai — καί, where, how,
&e. — where (there), how (so). Of καί, as conjunction, see ὃ 185. As adverb,
etiam, also, too, it denotes increase by accession.
The adverbial καί corresponds to another καί sometimes expressed, but as often
left to be understood. Καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης ταῦτα ἔλεξεν, Socrates, too, said this, i.e. καὶ
οἱ ἄλλοι (or the like) καὶ ὁ 3., originally where the others, there S. So in οὐ μόνον
ἀλλὰ kai —, the full construction is οὐ μύνον, ἀλλὰ | Kal —,] Kat —, not only —, but
[where —,]| there —.
In ὥσπερ (or other relatives) kat —, kal —: εἴπερ καὶ --- καὶ —: the original
parataxis καὶ — καί is taken into the syntactic form, 1. 6. καὶ ὁ 3. καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι,
united with ὥσπερ of ἄλλοι, οὕτως ὁ 3., gives the form καὶ ὁ 3. ταῦτα ἔλεξεν, ὥσπερ
καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι, S. also said this, as did also the others.
Where both clauses are expressed, the καί is often omitted in one or other: the
first, when in conceiving the first clause the speaker has not the second cl: ause
or its καί distinctly present to his thoughts; thus, ὁ 5. ταῦτ᾽ ἔλεξεν, ὥσπερ καὶ vi
ἄλλοι : the second, when he means to make the first more weighty than the other,
καὶ 6 3. ταῦτ᾽ ἔλεξεν, ὥσπερ οἱ ἄλλοι. Often, also, the καί seems to be drawn over by
a kind of attraction from the clause in which the thought would rather seem to
demand its presence, to the other: thus, στρατεύονται μεθ᾽ ὧνπερ καὶ οἰκοῦσι, for
with those they live with, they also take the field ; 6 Σωκράτης, εἴπερ τις καὶ ἄλλος,
where we should say, καὶ ὁ 3., εἴπερ τις ἄλλος. --- [πὰ like manner it is often with-
APPENDIX. | P2
2
τὸ
i)
§
N,
Nee
iis
bo
i)
912 Appendix on the Particles. [§$ 224.
drawn from the (preceding) temporal or conditional secondary sentence to the (fol-
lowing) primary, to denote immediate sequence : it may then be rendered imme-
diately, forthwith: Αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ δείπνησε --- καί οἱ πλησάμενος δῶκε σκύφον, Od.
14, 112, after he had supped —, he also (forthwith) Jilted the cup and presented
it to him. So in BO. εἰ — καί, and ὅτε — καὶ τότε. ‘Qs δὲ ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ
ἐχώρουν εὐθύς, Thuc. 2, 93, for ὡς καί, simulatque: simulae decretum est ab iis
continuo discesserunt. (In these instances the original relative and demonstrative
force of καί is distinctly perceptible.)
As the relative clause is often omitted, e.g. καὶ 6 3. ἔλεξεν (viz. ἅπερ οἱ ἄλλοι), so
is often the demonstrative clause: Πῶς tite ἔφη, τῷ τ σώματι ἁρμόττοντα
τὸν θώρακα εὔρυθμον ποιεῖς ; Ὥσπερ καὶ ἁρμόττοντα, ἔφη ( se. οὕτω καὶ εὔρυθμον), Xen,
Mem. 3, 10, 11.
In the single clause, it depends upon the nature of the unexpressed clause whether
the καί heightens aggravates) or lowers (extenuates): even = alter all, in addition
to all the Test, or even = but (so much as) independently of all the rest. In
rendering this particle it is sometimes necessary to add to, or even substitute for,
the literal rendering of the καί, some other particle or adverb. Thus:
a) really, indeed : Ἥνπερ καὶ φρονῶν φαίνῃ, ὅσαπερ λέγεις πρὸς ἡμᾶς, if you make
it ae that (besides professing] you also (really) entertain the sentiments 4 you pro-
Jess (or, that you do’ entertain).
6) even him- (her-, it-) ) self: aye —: and that —: Καὶ ἂν Aut πατρὶ μάχοιτο.
So καὶ λίην, καὶ κάρτα, καὶ πάνυ, καὶ πολύς, Kal πᾶς.
c) still, yet, with comparatives and in some other cases: καὶ μᾶλλον, yet more, καὶ
ἀμείνονας ἵππους. still better. horses, » πολλοῦ γε καὶ δέω, I still want much of = far
from it: καὶ ἄλλοτε, καὶ πάλιν, καὶ τρίς, &e. ., ἔτι καὶ νῦν, καὶ ὀψέ (ate though it be,
yet still), καὶ ἔπειτα, καὶ δή : καὶ ὥς, καὶ οὕτως, still even so, for all this.
ad) even already (without going further): ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἀρκέσει καὶ ταῦτα, this already (of
itself) τοῦ suffice. καὶ αὔτως (Hom, ) even (already) as tt is. To this head may also
be τὸς : καὶ πρίν, καὶ χθές, καὶ πάλαι, καὶ πρότερον, καὶ αὐτίκα, καὶ ἄρτι, καὶ ἤδη,
καὶ δη.
e) onl . but (so much as): Εἰ πώποτ᾽ ἔκλεψα τῶν σῶν ἄξιόν τι καὶ τριχός, worth but
a hair. ᾿Οκνῶ καὶ λέγειν, I fear but (even) to say it.
J) Often it is best rendered by the emphatic present or past (do, did), or emphatic
auxiliary : εἰ δέ τις καὶ οἴεται, but if a man does think. Τί γὰρ ἄν τις καὶ ποιοῖ ἄλλο;
why, what else should’ ore do ? Espedl ally the καί following an interrogative: Πῶς
καὶ διώλετ᾽, εἰπέ, how did’ he perish? “Ti χρὴ λέγειν asks, What is one to say 7 not,
Whether there is any thing to say: but τί γρὴ καὶ λέγειν not only asks what, but
doubts whether anything at ‘allis to be said (fully: qaed dicendum est, si omnino aliquid
dicendum est ?)” Or, more strongly, at all, on earth: Ti χρὴ καὶ προσδοκῶν, whut on
earth is one, or, what is one at all, to expect ? "Ἔστιν ἄρα δικαίου ἀνθρώπου βλάπτειν
καὶ ὁντινοῦν ἄνθρωπον: Plat. Rep 1,335, B, any human being at all, be who it may?
Ἵνα καὶ ἴδῃς ὅσα καὶ εἴδη ἔχει ἡ κακία, ib. 4, AB, C, how many forms (after all). In
——____ = -- - - =
+ Hermann ad Vig. p. 837, 320. But Kriiger says, that the καί emphasizes the
term to which it is prefixed, as being the par ticular point about which one requires
to have full information Similarly Klotz: ‘si dico τί χρὴ καὶ λέγειν ; proprie hoc
quero, guid sit dicendum etiam si solum de dicendo cogitemus.”
[APPENDIX.
§ 225—228.] Kal. TE. 213
like manner, the frequent combination ἵνα καί, especially with εἰδῶ, ἴδης, &e., may be
explained, that if there is anything (or, as there is something) to know, 7 may
know tt.
In καὶ yap, nam etiam, the καί belongs to the next following word, from which it is
separated by the necessity of placing γάρ second in the sentence : Καὶ yap πρὸς
τούτους αὐτῷ ἐπεποίητο συμμαχίη, Hdt. 1,77, for with these also. Καὶ yap νῦν
ὁμολογῶ, i. 6. καὶ νῦν, Plat. Gorg. 467, B. Sometimes it is namque, and then the καί
is not idle, but denotes the reciprocal correspondency of the clauses: ἀκούσατε, ἔφη,
καὶ yap ἄξιον, for, let me also tell you, it is worth hearing.
In εἰ καί, the καί is even, and refers not merely to the εἰ, but to the whole con-
cessive sentence =efs?, quamquam: Ei καὶ μητρὶ διαφορὰν ἔχει, if vt even be that he has
a quarrel with their mother, if it be ever so much the case that —: in καὶ εἰ, the καί
refers only to the condition, = etiamsi. Kei μὴ πέποιθα, even if (for all that) Thave
no confidence. Ei τι καὶ ἀγροικότερον εἰρῆσθαι, Pl. Gorg. 486, C, if it be even some-
what rude (as it is), i.e. though I own it is somewhat rude: but καὶ εἰ ἀγροικότερόν
τι εἰπεῖν ἐστιν, tb. 509, A, even if it be somewhat rude (which I do not allow). —
Both forms are abbreviated into the participial construction: thus, τὰ αὐτὰ ἂν
ἔπραξε καὶ πρώτη λαχοῦσα, Pl. Rep. 10, 620 = εἰ καὶ or καὶ εἰ πρώτη ἔλαχεν. See
§ 175, e.
re, also, so, denoting parity of the term appended. See § 222, and for the use as
conjunction, § 185.
The adverbial use of this particle is almost entirely confined to the ancient epic
style, having disappeared, except a few traces, from the later language. Its meaning
is so faint that, for the most part, it does not admit of being rendered otherwise than
by an exaggerated analogy : it does little more than intimate the correspondency of the
clauses which it accompanies. In its origin, re is cognate with enclitic τις : in its
use, it almost exclusively accompanies other particles which connect protasis and
apodosis or other parallel members, and sometimes appears in both, oftener only in
one. Te — τε, wny-where, -how, -way, -time, &e.... some-where, -how, ὅσο. :
hence it is the slightest possible intimation of as — so, alike — alike: Kpaurvérepos μὲν
γάρ τενόος, λεπτὴ δέ τε pitts, 11. 23,591, as on the one hand the mind is more rapid,
so also on the other is the counsel slight. Ἐἴπερ τε νοήσῃ, ἀλλά τε οἱ βράσσων τε νόος
λεπτὴ δέ τε paris, 11. 10, 224, although in-any-wise he has the wit, yet likewise slower
alike (on the one hand, μέν om.) the wit, scanty alike on the other hand the counsel.
Οὐ μὴν of τύγε κάλλιον οὐδέ τ᾽ ἄμεινον, yet is this not for his honour, and (as not for his
honour) so not for his good either. “Os κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ᾽ ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ,
whoso obeys the gods (as he obeys them) so do they hear him. _Insentences correlated
by demonstr. and relative, re is used only when the dem. and rel. do not come close
together, or when the dem. is not expressed: in other combinations it is frequent:
thus we have, εἴπερ te — ἀλλά τε, or simply τε: εἴπερ — τε: and εἴπερ τε with
second clause omitted. Mev re — δέ τε or ἀλλά τε (sometimes the μέν τε, some-
times the second re, omitted), also (μέν omitted) re — δέ τε: δὲ --- τε: τε — δέ:
re —airdp. Again, ἢ τε, so surely: καί te (as —) so also: yap τε, for (as —)
so: and sometimes ἦτε, or Are — ire.
Hence the usage of τε attached to relative words in dependent sentences to give
force and clearness to the correlation: thus, ὅςτε, he, or, that, who (Hom., lyr. poets,
and lyrical parts of Tragedy, sometimes Herodot.), also ὅςτις. τε, οἷος τε, ὅσος TE
(just such, or so great, as), ὥστε, 50 as, 80 that, ὡςεί τε, ἅτε. ὅπως Te, ἠὔτε. ὅτε τε (then
when), ὅθι τε, ἵνὰ τε (there where). Of these the Attic prose has retained οἷός TE
APPENDIX. ]
τὸ
Nw
Wim
ioe)
214 Appendix on the Particles. [ἢ 229.
εἰμι, Γ amin such sort as to—, in a condition to — : ὥστε, ὡσεί Te, ἔστε (ἐς ὅτε) quoad,
are, quippe, ep ᾧτε, on condition that (Herod. also ἐπεί τε, postquam). Corresponding
forms in Lat. (re = que, — pe) are namque (yap Te, comp. καὶ γάρ, etenim), atque
(= ad-que καί te), quippe (are), also quisque with its adverbial forms, as wbique, &e.,
uterque, usque, and the suffix —cumque.
δέ, on the othen hand (comp. μέν, on the one hand, § 232).
Opposition is denoted by the particles which originally denote on the other hand,
viz. ad or αὖτε, and αὐτάρ (= αὖτ᾽ ἄρα), which, shortened, is ἀτάρ. Synonymous
with these is δέ, which, both as adverb or mere particle, and as conjunction, in virtue
of its origin (cognate with the second numeral δύο, the δείς in οὐδείς, and the pro-
noun of the second person), means in the second place. For the conjunctional use,
see δὲ 188, 189. The adverbial use appears in
4) καὶ δέ, and on the other hand, and also (moreover). In Homer the particles
usually stand together ; in Attic, the word that has the emphasis comes between.
Καὶ δ᾽ ἄλλῳ νεμεσᾶτον, and of another also ye take it amiss. Kai σὺ δ᾽ αὐθάδης ἔφυς,
Eur. El. 1122, and thow too art self-willed (not Mgisthus only). Καὶ of τε ἄλλοι
.... Unnperour,.... καὶ ἡ τῶν Θηβαίων δὲ mds .. . ξυνέπεμπε, Xen. Hell. 5, 2,37,
and Thebes also —.
Rem. Kai being both and and also, the Greek was obliged to have recourse to
δέ to express and also.
δ) in the demonstrative sentence or theapodosis of a condition: Οἵη rep φύλλων yeven,
τοίη δὲ καὶ ἀνδρῶν, as is the nature of the leaves, so 7s, on the other hand (also) thaé
of man. Ot δ᾽ ἄρα Mnbeovnr . . ἐνέμοντο, . .. τῶν δὲ Φιλοκτήτης ἦρχεν, Il. 2, 716,
(comp. of δ᾽ "ἌΑργισσαν ἔχον .. -. τῶν αὖθ᾽ iyeusveve . . . Ἰϊολυποίτης, vb. 738). Ἐγὼ
ἐν ods ἂν τῶν λύγων ἀλγῶ κλύειν. Λαερτίου παῖ, τοὺς δὲ καὶ πράσσειν στυγῶ, Soph.
Phil. 86, 1 also, on the other hand, hate to do. — Ai δέ κε λίσσηαι ἑτάρους... οἱ δέ
σε... δεόντων, Od. 12, 54, let them. on the other hand (or, however), bind thee.
"ANN εἰ σύγε ἸΤαυσανίαν aiveis, ἐγὼ δ᾽ ᾿Αριστείδαν ἐπαινέω, I, on the contrary, praise
A. ᾿Αλλ᾽ εἰ μηδὲ τοῦτο βούλει ἀποκρίνασθαι, σὺ δὲ τοὐντεῦθεν λέγε, do thou, however,
say. So, especially in Attic, δέ after an abbreviated protasis in the form of a par-
ticiple: Θαυμάζω σου, εἰ ἐκείνους ῥᾳδίως χειρούμενος, τούτοις δὲ μηδένα τρύπον οἴεε
δυνήσεσθαι προσενεχθῆναι, Xen. Mem.3,7,8,that although—, yet—. Cf. § 188, R. 6.
When in an alternative, two protases, each with its apodosis, are opposed to each
other, the form may be μὲν — μέν (prot. and ap.), δὲ --- δέ (prot. and ap.), or also
μὲν --- δέ, δὲ --- dé: thus, ds μέν τ᾽ αἰδέσεται κούρας Aids. ..., τὸν δὲ μέγ᾽ @vnTay....,
ὃς δέ κ᾽ ἀνήνηται. . " λίσσονται δ᾽ ἄρα ταίγε Δία, []. 9, 509, whoso reverences the
virgins, him they benefit (might also be τὸν pev..) —: bet whoso repulses them, then
they pray, &c. For Attic instances, see § 188, Rem. 4.
δ) in the combination οὐδέ, μηδέ, also not, not even. Here the particle δέ stands for
itself and also for καί. as καί cannot follow οὐ and μὴ in this sense. Its usage, there-
fore, exactly agrees with that of καί ; so that οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not so too, not so ether, stands
on the same footing with καὶ ὥς, οὐδὲ γάρ, neque enim, with καὶ yap, etenim, οὐδὲ μὲν
οὐδέ, neque vero etiam, with καὶ μὴν καί, et vero etiam, οὐδὲ yap οὐδέ, for also not, or for
not even, with καὶ yap καί. The particle sometimes puts the things on a par (also
not), sometimes exalts the latter (not even), ἐπεὶ οὐδὲ ἔοικε, because it is also not seemly
(therefore must it also not be). Ta yap πεπρωμέν᾽ οὐδ᾽ ὑπερβαίην ποτ᾽ av, Hur. Ton,
1388, that which is fated for me can LT also not escape. Οὐδέ vv τοῦπερ φείσατο, [7. 24,
235, not even him did he spare; οὐδ᾽ ὄναρ, not even in a dream, Οὐδὲ yap οὐδέ τις
[APPENDIX.
ὃ 230—232.] dé. ev. nv. 205
ἄλλος, Od. 8, 32, etenim ne alius quidem. Οὐδὲ μὲν οὐδὲ Τρῶας aynvopas εἴασ᾽ “Ἕκτωρ
evdew, Il. 10,299. Not, however, the T. either (any more than the others) —.
Not the Trojans moreover (either) did H. suffer to sleep.
μέν, on the one hand, indeed.
This particle, bearing the same relation to the first numeral (eis) μία, that δέ
bears to the second and 1 to the dels in οὐδείς (not οὐδ᾽ εἷς) means therefore in the first
place, and a μέν is usually followed by a corresponding dé. But as the δέ has not
always a preceding μέν, so μέν not always a following δέ. This, however, is always
implied in the thought. Φιλοτιμίᾳ μὲν ἐνέχεται, δεινῷ κακῷ, Hur. Iph. A. 637. ambi-
tion indeed (in the first place, as far as that goes) he is’ liable to (the suppressed
opposition being, but what ot the rest, but what then?) Καὶ ὁπόθεν ποτε ταύτην τὴν
ἐπωνυμίαν ἔλαβες τὸ μανικὸς καλεῖσθαι, οὐκ οἶδα € ἔγωγε᾽ ἐν μὲν γὰρ τοῖς λόγοις ἀεὶ
τοιοῦτος εἶ, for in your discourse (to begin with that, = = it must be owned, at any
rate), &e. (P1.) Λέγεται δὲ καὶ ὅδε ὁ Novos! ἐμοὶ μὲν ov πιθανός, Hdt. 3, 3, to me for
my part (but what others may think I know not). Οὔτοι δὴ cee ἀλλὰ δοκεῖ
μέν μοι ἥξειν τήμερον, Pl. Crito, 43. D, it seems to me, for my part. So οἶμαι μέν,
ἡγοῦμαι μέν, δοκῶ μέν, οὐκ οἶδα μέν. Παρεγένου μὲν τῇ μάχη. Pl. Charm. 153 Ὁ,
you were present surely (or, I suppose) —? (suppressed: but if not, I have no
more to say.)
Rem. In Homer and Ionic, μέν is frequently used in the same sense as the
cognate form μήν. μάν, § 231: in the later dialects, only so in the combinations
μέντοι, μὲν οὖν, μὲν δή.
μήν Dor,, and Ep. μάν.
This particle, cognate with μέν, involves the same primary notion “ first and fore-
most,” “ to begin with,” but more strongly expressed, as here the whole statement
stops at the μέν, as if the one thing were all: it insists upon one thing (the first) to
the exclusion of the rest. Hence it is confirmative and concessive, and also oppo-
sitive and adversative (as Lat. vero). Accordingly, it stands in hortatory addresses
and exclamations: εἰ δ᾽ ἄγε μήν, πείρησαι, but come now, do’ _try (im the first place,
now, for once) ; ἔπου μήν. do’ follow : in questions, τίνος μὴν ἕνεκα μανθάνετε τοξεύειν ;
to what end (let me ask you one thing) do’ 4 you learn — ? especially ri μήν; thus,
ot τὸ παράπαν ἡδονὰς οὔ φασιν εἶναι. “TL μήν i.e. τί μὴν ἄλλο φασὶν. αὐτὰς εἶναι ; ;
what else, I pray (for one thing), do they affirm them to be? ‘Opas οὖν ἐκείνην τὴν
ὑψηλοτάτην πλάτανον ; “τί μήν; Pl. Phil. 44, what else, I pray, do I but, see it? =
to be sure I do: in argumentative assertions with latent interrogation, σώφρων μὴν
(I suppose I may assert this one thing) 6 ὅ γε τοιοῦτος καὶ οὐδαμῇ φιλοχρήματος, Pi.
Rep. 485, and adversatively, ταῦτ᾽ ἐπιεικῶς μέν ἐστιν ὑπό τι ἄτοπα. δηλοῖ pny —,
this is indeed somewhat strange ; : it shows, however —. ov μὴν ἐρεῖς. γε: but then
surely you don't mean to say —: im asseverations, ὧδε yap ἐξερέω, καὶ μὴν τετελεσ-
μένον ἔσται, and be sure of one thing = assuredly; so ἦ μήν, the usual formula of
swearing, ἐπομνύω σοι, ἢ μὴν ἐγὼ βούλεσθαι, verily and truly (for one thing, come
what will) : in announcing the coming of a new person: ὅδε μὴν Αἵμων, here, however,
comes H.! (The notion however, which often renders μήν, is given by the suppressed
opposition, “for one thing, however it may be with the rest,” or the like.)
καὶ μήν, καὶ μήν γε, the καί adverbial. Καὶ μὴν χάριν γ᾽ ἂν ἀξίαν λάβοις ἐμοῦ (well,
be sure of one thing —): “kai μὴν μάλιστα τοῦτ᾽ ἀφικόμην, ὅπως ---᾿ (well, sure
enough =) Soph. Cid. 1. 1004, ὅ. Adversatively : ἀλλ᾽ ἐκδιδάσκει πάνθ᾽ ὁ γηράσκων
χρόνος. “kai μὴν σύ y οὔπω σωφρονεῖν ἐπίστασαι," θέ, sure enough. — καὶ μὴν
APPENDIX. |
iS)
Φ umm
ἜΣ
216 Appendix on the Particles. [§ 233, 2343
πάρεισιν οἵδε, Soph. E71. 1412. καὶ μὴν ὁρῶ τάλαιναν Ἑὐρυδίκην, Ant. 1165 (announc-
ing the arrival of a new person). καὶ μὴν Τάνταλον εἰςεῖδον, then or moreover (for
one thing) —, Od. 11, 582 (comp. Attic καὶ μενδή, ὃ 236 ¢.) — καὶ μὴν καί, and (for
one thing) moreover.
ἀλλὰ μήν: ἀλλὰ μὴν κεκραξόμεσθά γ᾽ ὁπόσον ἡ φάρυγξ ἂν ἡμῶν χανδάνῃ, well
then, we will cry (if that be all), expressive of readiness to do something which
one is challenged to do: ἀλλ᾽ ἐστι μὴν οἰκητός, Arist. tt. 258, well, it is’ inhabited
( see that for one thing, sure enough) : εἰ εἰσὶ βωμοί, εἰσὶ καὶ θεοί: ἀλλὰ μὴν (atgui)
εἰσὶ βωμοί᾽ εἰσὶν ἄρα θεοί, but there aré altars. ἀλλ᾽ οὐ phy, — but not —, be assured
of that, especially 1 in hasty rejoinders : τῆς δ᾽ ἑκοῦσα παιδὸς οὐ μεθήσομαι. “ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽
ἐγὼ μὴν τήνδ᾽ ἄπειμ᾽ αὐτοῦ λιπών, no, nor will IL; be assured of that —. (Bor ἀλλὰ
μὴν δῆ, Which often occurs in some copies of Plato, the critical edd. restore ἀλλὰ
μὲν On.)
γε μήν, quidem certe, see under ye, ὃ 250.
Rem. In Homer, μέν is often used in precisely the sense of μήν: thus 7 μέν:
οὐ (μὴ) μέν : οὐδὲ μέν = ἀλλ᾽ οὐ μήν : καὶ μέν.
δή.
This particle, related to δέ as μήν is to μέν, insists upon the δέ to the exclusion of
the μέν : its general force therefore = ‘leave all that is before (or intermediate)
and come to that,” “come to that at once, and stop there.” Hence its very frequent
use in emphatic statements of place, time, degree: in peremptory determinations and
conclusions, urgent | de mands, Impatient questions, in putting something as generally
acknowledged (= ‘“‘everybody has come to that conclusion”), and in the expres-
sion of irony and derision. Except in the epic style, δὴ τύτε, δὴ γάρ, it never begins
a sentence, and it is usually attached almost like a suifix to the word which it
qualifies: comp. τόσος δή with τοσόςδε, αὐτὸς δή with i(s)dem, πρὶν δή with pridem,
aye δή with agedum.
1) With numerals, demonstratives, local and temporal adverbs, words of dimension,
superlatives. τρεῖς δή, three’ (not short of, and not beyond) : ἕκτον δὴ τύδ᾽ ἦμαρ, this
is now the sixth day (it has come to that), πάντως and πάνυ δή. πολλοὶ and πολλάκις
δή. --- ἐκεῖνος, οὗτος. οὕτω, ἐνταῦθα, ὧδε δή: Ta αὐτὰ δὴ ταῦτα : so the personal pro-
; κ᾿ ΄ - ΄ , ͵ γυπῶν De (jos) »” 3. ὙΠ ;
nouns, σὲ δή, thee there — : νῦν δή, τότε δή (Hom. δὴ τύτε, δή ῥα τότ᾽): ἔτι. οὐκέτι, πάλαι,
πρὶν, ἀεὶ, τέλος, Oe δῆ δαρόν τε δὴ Xpdvov, — ἐν βραχεῖ δή. ---- πλεῖστα, κράτιστοι δή.
2) With relative, interrogative, indefinite pronouns. ὃς, οἷος δή. τίς δή, who'ever ?
(= when are we ever to get at him? who on earth?) πῶς, ὅσος δή ; — ἄλλος δή,
alius nescio quis. δή τις, quidam nescio quis. δή που, somew here or other. ὅςτις
δή and δήποτε. δή που, surely (= that somehow), and οὐ δή που, surely not, see
under mov. — ὡς and ἵνα (final) δή. precisely m order that. ὡς (as) δή with irony
us if forsooth (so very certain is that !), ἅτε, ofa δή.
3) With particles of assev eration and negation. ἢ δή, verily (= that, whatever
comes before it), comp. ἦ μήν (= this, whatever comes after it). ov δή, not (that ἢ),
μὴ δή (do not think of that ἢ), μή τι δή (cf. nedum), and μή τί γε δή, to say nothing
of —, much less ; — (= only not that ἢ).
4) With nouns: τότε δὴ ὁ Κῦρος λέγει" Ὦ Κυαξάρη, ὥρα δὴ ἐξαπαντᾶν, Xen.
ἐπειδὴ δοκεῖ λήθη τις εἶναι κανάπαυλα δή, Soph. Phil, 866, ἃ cessation at last (it has
come to that). Often with irony, τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους φίλους δὴ ὄντας, Thuc. 6, 80,
friends forsovth (so likely that !). εἰσήγαγε τὰς ἑταιρίδας δή, the pretended con: -ubines
[ APPENDIX.
§ 235—237.] δή. δῆτα. 21
(that, to be sure, was what everybody would acknowledge them to be!). Comp.
δῆθεν.
5) With verbs: ἄγε δή. θώμεθα δὴ φύρτιον. ἐπεὶ προθυμεῖ, χρὴ λέγειν. ἄκουε δή,
well then, hear. οἶσθα δὴ τὸ πᾶν, there thou knowest the whole. σύμπεμψον τοίνυν
μοί rwa., “ λαβὼν δὴ ἴθι, ἔφη, ὅντινα ἐθέλεις," také then (without more ado: as matter
of course: come to that at once). With irony, δεδιὼς περὶ αὐτοῦ, μὴ διαφθαρῇ
δὴ ὑπὸ ᾿Αλκιβιάδου, Pl. Prot. 320.
With the whole sentence: νῦν δ᾽ ad μόνα δὴ νὼ λελειμμένα, since it has come to this,
that we are left alone! ὁ μὲν χρόνος δὴ διὰ χρόνου προὔβαινέ μοι, Soph. Ant. 58,
denoting the slowness of the passage of time.
Ein conclusions: ἐκ δὴ τούτων —, from this then it follows (comp. μήν of the steps
__ ofan argument). In resumption after interruption : ἐν τούτῳ δὴ ἄν τις γενύμενος, PL.
‘Men. 240, well then (to come back at last to that point) if one be in —. Both uses
are exemplified in det δὴ (of course then it is necessary) πρᾳύτερόν Tas ἀποκρίνεσθαι.
δημοκρατία δή (Well then —). In enumerations, denoting the accession of some
weightier consideration, ὑγίεια καὶ ἰσχὺς καὶ κάλλος καὶ πλοῦτος δή (denique), Pl. Men.
87: so καὶ τὸ δὴ μέγιστον : or something special, ἄλλος τε καὶ δὴ Kal —.
καὶ δή, in replies: βλέψον κάτω. “καὶ δὴ βλέπω. well, I am’ looking (that
already): ταῦτα δή, there, ’tis done! in the supposition of a fictitious case, καὶ δὴ
τεθνᾶσι, well, they are dead (suppose it).
μήν and δή exclude each other, therefore this combination never occurs in good
authors; but μὲν δή is frequent, especially in dismissing a consideration : elev"
τὰ μὲν δὴ τόξ᾽ ἔχεις, the bow thow hast (enough of that). τοιαῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα, hee
hactenus. ἀλλ᾽ ἦλθε μὲν δὴ τοῦτο τοὔνειδος τάχ᾽ ἂν ὀργῇ βιασθέν, but in fact — οὐ, it
may be enough to say that (one consideration, μέν, and there an end, δή). Hence μὲν
δή approaches nearly to μήν, and Plato renders Homer's καὶ μὴν Τάνταλον εἰςεῖδον
by καὶ μὲν δὴ καὶ Τάνταλόν γε εἰςεῖδον, Prot. 315, and moreover (the enumeration
begun with μέν cut short by δή). So od μὲν δὴ λήξω, Soph. El. 103 = ov μὴν λήξω.
βασιλικοὶ μὲν ἄνδρες, οὐ μὲν δὴ ἐπιστήμονές γε (where Stallb. would read μέντοι for
μὲν δή), Pl. Phed. 266. καὶ μὲν δὴ χαλεπὸν ἐπιχειροῦμεν, Pl. Pol. 287 ( porro etiam).
ἂν μὲν δὴ καὶ ὑποπίῃ, Pl. Lys. 89, jam si adeo. μάλιστα μὲν δὴ (in fact, or, and that
one consideration enough) — ἔπειτα μέντοι (but then), Soph. Phil. 350.
δῆτα.
This more emphatic form of δή (comp. ἔπειτα from ἐπεί; τηνικαῦτα from τηνίκα), not
found in Hom. and Dor., rare in Herodot., is frequent in Attic, where it accompanies
all the parts of speech.
In replies: ξυμβύλαια δὲ λέγεις κοινωνήματα, ἤ τι ἄλλο ; “ κοινωνήματα Ora” (just
so, that is the very thing !), Pl. Rep. 1,333. In earnest iterations : οἴκτειρε δ᾽ ἡμᾶς...
“oixreipe δῆτα, yes, do pity, Eur. El. 678. ἰώ. “ἰὼ δῆτα, (it is’) alas ! indeed,
Soph. Cid. 541. &s μ᾽ ἀπώλεσας θανών. ἀπώλεσας δῆτ᾽, how hast thou undone me!
1 The particle belongs to the whole sentence, but attaches itself to μόνα. So in
Esch. Eum. 3. (First Geea, and after her, Themis) ἣ δὴ (μέ satis constat) τὸ
μητρὸς δευτέρα τύδ᾽ ἕζετο μαντεῖον, it belongs to the sentence as a whole, but more closely
to τὸ μητρός. Fully expressed, the meaning is: “ who succeeded to the oracle which
— everybody knows that — was her mother’s before her, and to which therefore —
as everybody must see — she had the fullest right.” Miller on the Lum. § 91, n.
APPENDIX. |
[$
Ξ
34:
2,
bo
Oo
N
Odeon
36.
218 Appendix. δαί. δῆθεν. δήπουθεν. θήν. [§ 238—242.
yes, undone indeed ! Soph. El. 116ὅ. σκόπει δῆτα. only look! In wishes: ἀπόλοιο
δῆτα, oh that thou mightest but per ish! In questions : τί δῆτ᾽, ἐπειδὰν an quid tum
demum dicetis, quum — ἢ τί δῆτα κλαίεις ; what are you weeping , for ? τίς ἄρα ῥύσεται,
τίς ἄρ᾽ ἐπαρκέσει θεῶν ἢ θεᾶν ; ποτέρα δῆτ᾽ ἐγὼ ποτιπέσω βρέτη δαιμόνων ; am I then
(and. what avails that)? Asch, Sept. 93. οἶσθα δῆτά γε; thou dost’ » surely, know ?
ἤδησθα γὰρ δῆτ᾽, I suppose you knew (ironically). ἦ δῆτα, Yes, verily. τῷ δῆτα,
minime vero. μὴ δῆτα δράσης ταῦτα, only not this! dre δῆτα, Just when. καὶ δῆτ᾽
ἐτόλμας. and, forsooth, you had the audacity, Soph. Ant. 445.
δαί (Attic).
This particle occurs only in the combination τί dai ; πῶς Sai ; and is used in forcible
transitions, with indigné ation, wonder, or other emotions: what then? how so? τί
δαὶ τἄλλα ; what then say you to the rest? It occurs only in the familiar Attic style.
—O6e, —Oev.
The first only as a suffix in εἴθε, “ would that,” “if but’? = in this (or, in that)
case. The second as a suffix of case, οὐρανόθεν, from heaven, ἐντεῦθεν, thence, Ke. :
hence, in composition with δή,
δῆθεν.
This particle (not used by Hom.), originally = fiom that (as the terminus a quo)
is almost always ironical (= something which all the world acknowledges, to set out
with !), forsooth, in pretence, of course (derisively). τοῦτο τὸ ἄγος ot Λακεδαιμόνιοι
> r > ᾿ς - γᾶ τς ~ j SYr4 ε > ν
ἐλαύνειν ἐκέλευον, δῆθεν τοῖς θεοῖς πρῶτον τιμωροῦντες, Thuc. 1,127. ὡς ἐκπεφευγὼς
τοὺς ἐχθροὺς, οἵ μιν... ἠθέλησαν ἀπολέσαι δῆθεν (as he pretended), Hdt.1, 11. τῆς
ἐκεῖνος οὐδαμὰ βλάστας ἐφώνει, δῆθεν οὐδὲν ἱστορῶν, Soph. Tr. 381.
δήπουθεν.
See above, 5) τις, and δήπου, under wov: hence this (Attic) particle originally = ἘΞ
from that in anywise, or, surely ; therefore, I should hope, or, surely. ἐγὼ δὲ, ἢν
ἱππεύειν μάθω. ὅταν μὲν ἐπὶ τοῦ ἵππου γένωμαι. τὰ τοῦ ἱπποκενταύρου δήπουθεν διαπρά-
ξομαι, Aen. Cyr. 4, 3, 20. ἑστάναι yap ἐξέσται δήπουθεν αὐτῷ, Dem. οὔτε yap
μαγείρῳ μαχαίρας οὐδὲν ἔστ᾽ ὄφελος δήπουθεν, ἥτις μὴ τέμνει, Pl.
θήν.
This stronger form of θέν (§ 239) is Homeric and Doric (Sicilian). In Hom.
always ironical, = δήπου. especially with } ἦ OU, οὐ μέν θην — ye, yet surely, yet surely
at least not. In Theocritus é ἐγὼ θήν, L for my part, τὺ θήν, thou for thy part, and
= denique. πείρᾳ θὴν πάντα τελεῖται, Adoniaz. 63.
ἤδη.
As δή to δέ, so is ἤδη to ἠδέ (which answers to ἡμέν, as on the one hand, so on the
other hand\ It denotes, therefore, the absence of an interval, chiefly with refer-
ence to time, ¢his (that) instant, immediately.
(z) As temporal particle, it answers to Lat. jam, now, in the senses, forthwith,
henceforth, already, at last, still, the now being either that of the speaker, or of the
person, &c. spoken of, not, as νῦν, simply “at this present time.” Thus ἤδη ἀπῆλθεν,
he went away just now ; ἤδη dmehpruder, is just gone; ἤδη ἀπελεύσεται, will go directly.
1 The ἤ = as, so, not ἢ, verily, but the original of 7, or, than, whence also ἦμος
and ἠῦτε, when.
[APPENDIX.
§ 243—246.] ἤδη. νῦν: vy, val, μά. %. 219
νῦν ἤδη, ἤδη νῦν, now this instant. ποιήσας δε τοῦτο, Ta ἄλλα ἤδη ἤρχετο διοικεῖν, [ὃ
anon, without more ado, Xen. Ποῖ]. 7.1, 12. ἤδη οὐκ εἴχομεν, we were not yet (ere- 242.}
while) able ; ἤδη οὐχ ἕξομεν, we shall henceforth not (or. no more) be able. λόγοι
RAN
ἔσφηλαν ἤδη (ere now = full oft) καὶ κατώρθωσαν βροτούς, Soph. El. 408. ἤδη ποτ᾽
εἶδον (in my time), ἤδη πάλαι (this long while).
(6) In the other instances, the temporal signification, though less strongly
marked, is still discernible: ἀπὸ ταύτης ἤδη Αἴγυπτος, at this point immediately
Egypt begins. δῆλον δὴ τοῦτό ye ἤδη καὶ παιδί (even to a child): so obtos —, τότ᾽ —,
ἐνταῦθ᾽ —, οὕτως ἤδη. τὰ δὲ παννυχίδων ἤδη —, and then the vigils ; vigilias demum st
commemorem, Soph. E71. 92.
Rem. δήν, jam div, evidently connected with δή, ἤδη, denique, dudum, donee.
vov. §
This is the Latin nunc, at this present time (the now of the speaker). Hence it 243-
usually occurs in connexion with the present, or present-perfect, or future, the
latter in the sense, as the case is now, he, We. will —, or, he is now going to—. With
the proper past (imperf. or aorist indic.) either the sense is present, as νῦν δ᾽ εἰς
τὸ κείνου Kpar ἐνήλαθ᾽ ἡ τύχη, but as it is now, destiny has —; or the immediate past is
denoted, ἐν ᾧπερ viv ἐκάμνομεν, Hur. Hee. 1144. νῦν ἐμέλλομεν, we were now about
to —. νῦν δὴ ἔλεγον, just now: viv δὴ λέγω or λέξω, nunc cum maxime, at this very time.
νῦν, igitur, jam vero, further serves to denote transition or argument: μὴ νῦν
ἀτίμα θεούς, then do not —, Soph. Aj. 1108. εἰ viv ἐπίστω, if then thou knowest,
Soph. Phil. 1224. In the formula of adjuration: πρὸς νῦν σὲ γονάτων, πρὸς viv θεῶν,
now by —.
This νῦν is reduced to an enclitic (our unemphatic “now”); but, as a single ἃ
word, only in the poets; in Ionic prose μέννυν, in Attic τοίνυν. Homer has it, 2 44.
ο΄. δεῦρύ hither then, Il. 23, 485.} :
e.g. δεῦρό νυν, hither then, Il. 23, 485.
Connected, if not identical, with enclit. νυν is the enclit. νυ of Homer, used in
asseveration with somewhat of irony: οὐ νύ τ᾽ ἀοιδοὶ αἴτιοι, nempe, scilicet, Od. 1,348.
θνητὸς δέ νυ καὶ σὺ τέτυξαι, but I suppose, Il. 16, 622. So ἐπεί νυ, ἢ pa νυ, μή νυ
τοι, οὔ νυ τι. Also καί νύ κεν in apodosis with preet. indic. to an hypothesis also
with pret. indic., and doubtless —. In questions: τί νυ οἱ τόσον ὠδύσαο, Zev, Od.
1, 62, why art thou —? τί νυ σ᾽ ἔτρεφον, Il. 1, 414, why did I—?
vn, val, μά. §
vn (cf. ne) asseverates, but only in affirmative sentences: νὴ τὸν Ata. , 245.
This lengthened becomes vai, yea, verily (cf. δή, δαί) : often followed by μά, as
vat μὰ τὸν Ala, a stronger form of νὴ τὸν Δία. The μά in itself is neither negative
nor affirmative, but simply = “by ;” but unless the vai is expressed, μά must always
have a negative expressed or implied, either preceding or following: οὐ pa τὸν A.,
or μὰ τὸν A., οὐ ---- μὰ τὴν τέλειον THs ἐμῆς παιδὸς δίκην, ΓἌτην, Epwiv θ᾽ —, ov
μοι φόβου μέλαθρον ἐλπὶς ἐμπατεῖν, Asch. 41]. 1354.
ij. : §
This particle (always adverbial) expresses assurance: ἢ = ἀληθῶς, ὄντως, Hesych., 2 46
indeed, surely. ἢ μὴν, § 231, a strong asseveration, assuredly (come what will, &c.). E
1 Kriiger says, that in Aristoph. the v is long (but still to be written νυν encl.,
not νῦν), in the Tragic poets long or short.
APPENDIX. |
[§
. 246.]
220 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 247, 248.
ἦ mov, assurance with a mixture of doubt, real or pretended (hence ironically of
self-evident conclusions), or confident conjecture, sane opinor, surely. ἀλλ᾽ ἢ (often
falsely written ἀλλ᾽ ἢ), at profecto. ἢ pa, ἦτοι. See under ῥα, τοι.
The same particle used interrogatively, asks a question with confidence or conjec-
ture. In Hom. without other particles, when the speaker answers his own question
by another: τίπτε τόσον --- €Bdnoas —; ἢ μήτις σευ μῆλα --- ἐλαύνε: ; ἢ μήτις σαυτὸν
κτείνειν; Od. 9, 405. Frequent in Attic, especially in Tragedy : ἢ τολμήσατε ; aye,
did ye dare? ἢ κεῖνος ὥμοσεν ; then did he swear? With other particles: ἢ δή;
ergo revera? 7 ταῦτα δῆτ᾽ ἀνεκτά; then is’ this to be borne? ἢ που, num forte ἢ
expects an answer in the negative, 7 που τετύλμηκ᾽ ἔργον αἴσχιστον τύδε; do you mean
to say that —? Kur. Med. 695. Ἢ pa Att. dpa; ἢ yap; See under pa, yap.
πέρ.
Etymologically connected with πέρι, “through and out at the other end,” περᾶν,
&e., comp. περί, Lat. per, this enclitic particle has for its fundamental meaning the
notion, throughly, thoroughly, throughout. Hence
a) (In Homer) its meaning sometimes seems to be confined to the word which
it accompanies (cf. pergratus perque jucundus) : μίνυνθά περ οὔτι pada δήν, I1. 13, 573,
a very little while, = just alittle while: πρῶτόν rep, ὕστατόν περ, quite or just first,
last : yewopevdy περ, just = precisely at the birth, Il. 23,79. ἀλλὰ καὶ αὐτοί περ
πονεώμεθα, ourselves precisely (and not others), Z/. 10,70. οἴκαδέ περ σὺν νηυσὶ
νεώμεθα, home just that (and nothing else), 71. 2, 236. τόδε πέρ μοι ἐπικρήηνον
ἐέλδωρ, just this (and only this) prayer, 11. 8, 242. ὁ δὲ πείσεται εἰς ἀγαθόν περ, to
what is good if to nothing else = at any rate, 71. 11, 789.
b) (also in Hom.) for all that: ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ὡς ἑτάρους ἐῤῥύσατο ἱέμενός περ, though
quite desiring, all eager as he was, Od.1,6. ἀγαθός περ ἐών, all brave as thou art. οὐδὲ
θεοί περ -- δύνανται, not the gods either for all that (they be gods), Od. 3, 236.
μῆτερ, ἐπεί μ᾽ ἔτεκές ye μινυνθάδιόν περ ἔοντα, τιμήν περ μοι ὄφελλεν ᾿Ολύμπιος
ἐγγυαλίξαι, all short-lived as I am, (yet) honour, if nothing else —, 71. 1, 353.
c) With relatives and conjunctions (th7s usage is Attic as well as epic): ὅσπερ,
just what, precisely who, the same that; docosmep,just so great as; οἷος περ, just of
the same kind as; also with ὡς, οὗ, οἷ, ὅθεν, 7, ὅπου, ὅτε, ἔνθα, ἕως, ἐπεί. ἐπειδή, Ke.
εἴπερ, if the case be just so, if really (εἴπερ εἴργασται τόδε, ἴσμεν γὰρ οὐδὲν τρανές,
Soph. Aj. 22): sometimes, if ever so much; ἐάνπερ, if indeed and provided only that:
εἴπερ, ἐάνπερ καί, albeit that even; ὅτανπερ, when (provided only it be so).
ad) The -Attic poets sometimes allow themselves the use of wep as in Homer:
yevvaids περ ὦν, all noble as thou art; but in this sense καίπερ with the participle is
usual (rarely with indic.), ὃ 175, 6. (Sometimes καὶ --- περ with the emphatic word
between. μῶν καὶ θεός περ ἱμέρῳ πεπληγμένος ; Adsch. Aj. 1125.)
γε (Dor. γα).
This is also enclitic, and connected in its origin with qui in quidem, and our yea.
Its (original) meaning may often be conveyed by yea, with repetition of the word
to which it is attached: thus, ὡς δ᾽ ὅτ᾽ ἀνὴρ χαλκεὺς πελέκυν ev ὕδατι. Barty... τὸ
yap αὖτε σιδήρου ye κράτος ἐστίν, for that in the case of steel’ (yea, of steel) is
strengthening, 1. 6. of steel indeed (tor in the case of other things it may be weak-
1 Elmsley, Heracl. 55, Med. 678, 1275, and Stallbaum, Pl. Lys. 207 Ὁ), deny the
interrogative use of ἢ που, which Hermann, Opuse. iii. 161, has vindicated.
[APPENDIX.
ᾧ 249.] περ. γε. 221
ening). πῶς οὐχὶ Σίμων ἐνέπρησεν, ἀλλὰ τὸν αὐτοῦ ye νεὼν βάλλει ; his own temple
(that, of all things!). εἰ δὲ μὴ ἑκόντες γε, ἀλλ᾽ ἄκοντες, if not willing (yes, if not
that), yet —. ἔγωγε ταῦτα ποιήσω, I’ (yes, I: if none other).
(2) When the force of the particle is confined to the one word which it accom-
panies, this force can often be rendered in English by added emphasis, sometimes
by indeed, at least. In general, any word admitting of emphasis may be followed by
ye. Especially pronouns, personal and demonstrative: ἔγωγε (the accent retracted),
σύγε, οὗτός γε, ἐκεῖνός ye, ὃδε ye, αὐτός ye: relatives and correlatives, és ye, ὅσος ye,
τόσος ye, τοσοῦτός γε (ois ye rare in Attic) : pronominal adverbs, ὧδέ ye, ὥς ye, ὥστε γε,
ὥσπερ γ᾽ : νῦν ye: interrogatives, rare in Attic, but not unknown, τίνος γ᾽ ὑπ᾽ ἄλλου 5
by whom’ else? Eur. Hec. 774, τίνα γ᾽ . . εἶπας; Troad.241. πῶς γ᾽ ἂν ψέγοις ;
how indeed? Soph. Gid. C. 9811; negative particles, od — ye, οὐ δή που — γε: μή
mo γε: conditionals, εἴγε (in Trag. most usually ei — ye), certe si, at least if, if indeed,
if (that is), &e.: εἴπερ ye, if” really, if really’ —With nouns of every kind, if with
article, the ye often attached to it: thus, τό γ᾽ ἄκον πρᾶγμα, the involuntary’ deed (as
certainly it was), Soph. Cid. Col. 981: and often to the preposition, ἔκ ye τῆςδε γῆς,
_ the emphasis on τῆςδε, Soph. 7». 798: and with verbs, with various kinds of emphasis,
παῦσαί ye, do cease ! χρῆ ye, oportet nempe ! behoves, forsovth, aye? ζῶν ἢ θανών ye,
living or even dead. ap’ oid ye; thou knowest, aye? ἢ paiverai ye; is he mad even?
But in all these cases, it should be considered in each particular instance whether
the ye is limited to one word, or whether its use comes under the following head:
(6) It approaches to the nature of a conjunction, where, attached to one of two
sentences or members of a sentence, it virtually belongs to both.
In a reply, containing something additional to the preceding expression, the ye
is placed as near as may be to the beginning, with the emphatic word first: εἴπω τι
δῆτα κἄλλο; “Ὅσον ye χρήζεις,᾿ yes, (and) as much as you wish, Ud. T. 804. τί
μέλλεις κομίζειν —; “ μαθοῦσά γ᾽ —,” why delayest thou to carry —? “yes, ({ will
carry) when I have learnt —,” Cid. T. 680. Ὑροίαν σ᾽ ἑλεῖν δεῖ. “ οὐδέποτέ y”
(take Troy!) Never! Phil. 987. στεῖχε ---. “μήπω ye πρὶν ἂν —” (yes, go:) not
yet, at least (however, though) until —, Phil. 1409.
Frequent in replies with secondary predicate (participle) ; 6. δ. καλῶς γ᾽ ἐγὼ ποιῶν,
“aye, and well too for me to do so,” Pl. Rep.5,474. ὀρθῶς γε σὺ λέγων, Lach. 192.
ταύτην γ᾽ ἰδὼν θάπτουσαν, yes (I did it) because 1 saw, Soph. Ant. 400. In
explanatory additions: κλῦθι --- εἰ ἐτέον ye σός εἰμι, if, namely (or, that is) Iam —.
In enumerations : γενναῖοι ἢ σοφοὶ ἢ τίμιοι ἢ γέροντές γε ἢ νέοι, yes, or old, Pl. Hipp.
Δα). 801. πρακτέον καὶ γυμναστέον καὶ ἐδεστέον γε καὶ ποτέον, Crito, 47.
καί γε (only Attic), e¢ quidem: ἀλλὰ παρῆσάν τινες, καὶ πολλοί γε, Pl. Phed. 58.
καὶ ταῦτά y ἄλλα, Soph. Phil. 38. κρεῖσσον κἀμέ γ᾽, ὦ πάτερ, θανεῖν, even “me too,
Trach. 1226. καὶ — γε πρός, yes and — to boot. καὶ κατακτενῶ γε πρός, Kur. Phen.
619. νὴ τὸν Δί᾽ ἐς κόρακάς ye, καὶ σαυτόν ye πρός, Arist. Pac. 19. τὸν ἀδίκως γε
ἀποκτείναντα (sc. ἄθλιόν φημι), καὶ ἐλεεινόν γε πρός, Pl. Gorg. 469.
δέ ye: εἰ ἡμέρα ἐστὶν φῶς ἐστιν᾽ ἡμέρα δέ γέ ἐστιν, διιί' itis day. ἐγὼ δέ γ᾽ ἄνδρ᾽
ὄπωπα. Soph. Aj. 1150 (in rejoinder to 1140, ἤδη ποτ᾽ εἶδον ἄνδρ᾽ ἐγώ, aye, but I too).
οὐδέ γ᾽ ἐς θυμὸν φέρω, no, not even.
δον Ὁ ἀὈτὐϑσσαν Ὁ Φ5Φ5ΦὅΦἝΦΟ - .." 009 πετῸ- ο -ς...
1 “The particle does not increase the force of the interrogation, but the natural
force of the interrogative word.” Klotz.
APPENDIX. ]
[§
248. ]
249.
249. ]
[Ὁ
κι
bo
Sign
B22 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 250—252. )
In εἴ ye, stquidem, the ye influences the whole clause; in εἰ — ye it distinguishes —
the interposed word, Τίνι ἄλλῳ τις ἂν εἴη σοφός, εἴ γε μὴ ἐπιστήμῃ ; Pl. πρώτη θά-
νοις ἄν, εἰ δίκης γε τυγχάνοις, Soph. The same remark applies to ἐπείγε, quandoquidem.
γε μήν: ὅρα γε μήν, look to it, however, Soph. Cid. Ο΄. 587. λόγῳ γε μὴν εὔκλειαν,
in word at least, however, Soph. El. 973. τοξικὴν γε μήν, archery, at least, for one
thing, Pl. Conv. 197. Eis ye μὴν δικαιοσύνην, In respect, however, of justice, Xen. —
An. 1,9, 16: where ye pny expresses an opposition more strongly than δέ, but with —
transition to something new: 1b. § 20, φίλους ye μὴν ὅσους ποιήσαιτο: 7, 6, 15, Ἐπεί
γε μὴν ψεύδεσθαι ἤρξατο Σεύθης.
ye δη, qui-dem, ἐπεί γε δὴ --- ἐκτησάμην, since it has come to this that —. ὥσπερ
yap —, ταύτῃ ye δὴ —, in this way, sure enough, Pl. Rep. 330.
ye μὲν δή, preceded by ἐπεί, Soph. Trach. 484 (ἐπεί ye, guandoquidem), ὅρα ye μὲν
6n,! Hl, 1242 (cf. γε μην).
ye τοι (see under τοι), αὐ least though (thus much at least is certain, that —).
ταύτης δὲ (sc. τῆς) ἀπορίας καὶ σύ μοι δοκεῖς κεκοινωνηκέναι᾽ μεταβαλλόμενος γέ TOL ἄνω
καὶ κάτω οὐδ᾽ ὁτιοῦν παύει, Pl. Alc. 2,17. Therefore often preceded by δοκεῖ, and the
like: τὸν ἄνδρ᾽ ἔοικεν ὕπνος .. . ἕξειν" κάρα yap ὑπτιάζεται τόδε. ἱδρώς γέ Tol νιν πᾶν
καταστάζει δέμας, at any rate a sweat —, Soph. Phil. 823. apa γε πρὸς τὸν θεὸν
, ΄ ‘ec / A > 37 , ΄ > ,
προσευξύμενος TOPEVEL 5 Πάνυ μεν ουν. φαίνει γε τοι ἐσκυθρωπακέναι -- 1 guessed
as much : for sure enough you seem, Pl. Alc. 2 init. ᾿Ἐπιθυμεῖ Σωκράτης ἀκοῦσαι
Γοργίου; "Ew αὐτό γέ τοι τοῦτο πάρεσμεν = (Like enough,) for to be sure —.
— Φορᾶς γέ τοι φθόνησις ov γενήσεται, the carrying indeed, as fur as that goes, Soph.
Trach. 1212. ᾿Αλλὰ --- γέ τοι, after a condition: ἐγὼ δὲ σὸς, Kei μὴ σὸς. ἀλλὰ — σός
γέ τοι καλούμενος. certe tamen. Ei δ᾽ ἐν πᾶσι τούτοις ἡττῴμεθα, ἀλλὰ τό γέ τοι πῦρ
τοῦ καρποῦ κρεῖττόν ἐστιν, Xen. An. 2, 5, 19. — Often with δή added: thus (in
answer to a question), φασί γέ τοι δή οἱ τούτων κύριοι, yes, at least this is quite cer-
tain that —, Pl. Crito, 44. κείνου γέ τοι δὴ παῖς ἐκλήζετο, Soph. Gad. T. 1171.
ye μέντοι, yet — at least. τούς γε μέντοι ἀγαθούς, yet the brave withal, Xen. An.
1 dle
TOL.
This enclitie, derived from ro — (connected with tamen and though), is originally
demonstrative, and by individualizing restricts and excludes.
The original demonstrative force appears especially in rousing exclamations: σέ
τοι, σὲ κρίνω. vai oe, thee there (thee only), Soph. El. 1445, so Aj. 1228: and other
pointed allocutions, σύ rot, σύ τοι κατηξίωσας, thou’, thou alone —, Phil. 1095: and —
with emphatic pronouns, ἐγώ τοι, ἔγωγέ τοι, I, for my part. ἐγώ τοι οὐκ ἀμφισβητῶ,
I’, be sure of that —, Pl. Hipp. Maj. 369. ταῦτά τοι, this and this only. ταῦτά τοί
σ᾽ ἔχθει πόλις, therefore, and reason enough that, — Hur. Androm. 212. It is fre-
quent in replies, in the sense be swre of that ! never fear! ᾿Αλλὰ --- ταχύ τοι ἀποκρι-
vovpat, Xen. An. 6,4 (al. 6), 34. εἰρήσεταί rot, it shall be spoken (rely upon that !),
Hur. Ion, 760. ὅρα κατ᾽ ὄρῴνην μὴ φύλαξιν ἐντύχῃς. “Φυλάξομαί τοι," Hur. Hipp.
567. — ἴσθι τοι τίσουσά γ᾽ ἀξίαν δίκην, be sure though, Soph. Ll. 290.
This particle is especially frequent in gnomes, maxims, and general reflexions,
in the sense, sure enough that ! Μήτι τοι δρύτομος μέγ᾽ ἀμείνων, ἠὲ Bindu, 11. 23, 315.
" Ellendt adopts Blomfield’s ὅρα ye μέντοι on the ground that μὲν δή de rebus adhue ;
Saciendis non dicatur : which is not true. τ
[APPENDIX.
§ 253, 254.] γε μήν, GC. τοι. 223
τοῖς τοι δικαίοις χὠ βραχὺς νικᾳ μέγαν. Soph. (hd. C. 884. κάρτα, τοι φιλοίκτιστον
γυνή, Aj. 577. ἡδύ τοι ἀνδρεῖόν τι καὶ καλὸν νῦν εἰπόντα καὶ ποιήσαντα μνήμην ---
παρέχειν ἑαυτοῦ. Xen. An. 0, 3 (al. 5), 24. 77 τοι τῆς διανοίας ὄψις ἄρχεται ὀξὺ βλέ-
πειν, ὅταν ἡ τῶν ὀμμάτων τῆς ἀκμῆς λήγειν ἐπιχειρῇ, Pl. Conv. 219.
καί Tot, properly “and that” (an accession qualified by though, or “also this” viz.
*to be considered”): hence especially frequent in the corrective sense, tamen certe,
or attamen, and quamquam. ἀλλὰ κἀμέ roe (me also, though) ταὐτὸν τόδ᾽ ὄψει δρῶντα
κοὺ μέλλοντα ἔ ἔτι. καί τοι σ᾽ ἐάσω. yet, or, however, I will let thee go, Soph. Phil. 1255.
καίτοι. τί φημι; quamquam quid loquor, what am 1 saying though ! 2 ὦ Θάνατε, Θάνατε,
νῦν μ᾽ ἐπίσκεψαι μολών" καίτοι σὲ μὲν κἀκεῖ προσαυδήσω ξυνών" σὲ δ᾽ —, 41. 854.
᾿Αλλὰ ἰόντων (Well, let them go) —, καίτοι ἔχω γε αὐτῶν καὶ τέκνα ---, Fea yet (=
take this also into the account). With sec ondary predicates : οὐδέ μοι ᾿ἐμμελέως τὸ
Thurrdketov νέμεται. καίτοι σοφοῦ παρὰ φωτὸς εἰρημένον, quamvis a viro sapiente dictum,
Pt. Prot. 339. The force is explained by resolving καί rou into καὶ — εἰρημένον, καὶ
(οὐδ ὥς (= TOs, οὕτως). A stronger expression of this sense is καὶ ταῦτα: τοιαῦτα
-- sani, καὶ ταῦτα τηλικοῦτος, and that too mau Soph. El. 014: even with the finite
verb, though rarely, καὶ ταῦτα κούφως ἐκ BO ἀρκυστάτων ὥρουσεν, Asch. Eun.
112 Placed at the end of the sentence: Νῦν γοῦν ἐπεχείρησας, οὐδὲν ὧν καὶ
ταῦτα, being nothing worth (yet), even so (for all that!), Pl. Rep. 341.
In καίτοι ye, the ye belongs to the whole sentence: καίτοι ye ὀφειλόμενόν που ἐστι
τοῦτο ὃ παρακατέθετο. and 4 ‘yet to be sure (it is true that —), Pl. Rep. 331 fin. In
καίτοι — γε, the ye belongs to the interposed word: καίτοι τοσοῦτόν γ᾽ οἶδα, though
indeed thus much at least I know, Soph, did. T. 1455.
Often followed by ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως, which, again, illustrates the original force of καΐτοι
= καὶ ὥς (ras): καίτοι οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐκ ἀληθὲς εἴρηκα ὧν προεῖπον" @AN ὅμως —, = yet
Sor all that: the thing is even so (καὶ rs), yet even so (ὅμως), Pl. Huthyph. 3.
καίτοι φασὶν ΠΡ => enGein eis ἔχθραν" ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως ----, Dem. Mid. 41, Butt.
μέντοι = for one thing, this’. In rousing exclamations, like rou: οὗτος, ὁὲ λέγω
μέντοι, σὲ τὸν τεθνηκότα. --- Usually it may be rendered however, to be swre, with an
opposition to something preceding : ἔπειτα μέντοι, anon how ever (though). μάλιστα
μὲν δὴ --- ἔπειτα μέντοι, Soph. Phil. 350. τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ὦκνει ---, ἔπειτα μέντοι
εἶπεν, Pl. Charm. 159. In affirmative answers (§ 199 c, R. 2): φαμέν τι εἶναι
δίκαιον αὐτὸ ἢ οὐδέν ; “ φαμὲν μέντοι, νὴ Ala,” we affirm it, to be sure (true enough
that), Pl. Phed. 65. ov πολλὴ ἂν ἀλογία εἴη; ὁ “πολλὴ μέντοι νὴ Ata,” ib. 68. — Ei
yap ῥέοι TO σῶμα καὶ ἀπολλύοιτο -- , ἀναγκαῖον μέντ᾽ ἂν εἴη —, to be sure, it would be
necessary, ib. 87. Σὸς μέντοι Sipavidns πολίτης" δίκαιος εἰ teendew τῳ ἀνδρί, to be sure,
S.is your countryman, you are bound to stand up for him, Pl. Prot. 339 fin. Δῆλον ὅτι
Σεύθης — ἀπαιτήσει με, καὶ ἀπαιτήσει μέντοι δικαίως, and for the matter of that.— , Xen.
An. 7, 6, 17. So An. 4, 6, 15, 16, ἐπιδείξασθαι τὴν παιδείαν καὶ φυλάξασθαι μέντοι
(withal) μὴ ληφθῶμεν κλέπτοντες ... ᾿Αλλὰ μέντοι (well, for the matter of that, 1. 6.
talking of stealing) καὶ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς ἀκούω τοὺς ᾽Αθ. δεινοὺς εἶναι κλέπτειν τὰ δημόσια —
kal τοὺς κρατίστους μέντοι (and 4 your best men withal). —In questions with ov, nonne ?
having the force of an affirmation : of ἀντίδικοι τί δρῶσιν ; οὐκ ἀντιλέγουσι μέντοι; ; they
oppose each other, to be sure, don't they? Pl. Phed. 261. οὐ τῶν καλῶν μέντοι ἡ
σωφροσύνη ἐστί; Pl. Charm. 159.
1 Stallb. Pl. Phaed. 266, says, that a preceding μέν requires μέντοι to follow, not
μὲν δή.
APPENDIX. |
to
WN
254.
224 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 255—257.
εἶ καὶ μέντοι = καὶ μὴν together with καίτοι (corrective): P/. Alc. 1, 113, ἐμε δὲ
ὉΠ 0} aitia μάτην. καὶ μέντοι καὶ εὖ λέγεις. and yet, to be sure, you do’ say well. Similarly,
ἀλλὰ μέντοι, οὐ μέντοι (ov not interrogative), ov μέντοι οὐδέ ---. Comp. οὐ μὴν ἀλλὰ
- with ov μέντοι ἀλλὰ (kai), yet no! ὑπεέ -- = attumen, verumtamen. Βούλει οὖν ---
ἐπιχειρήσωμεν —; “᾿Πάνυ μὲν οὖν. οὐ μέντοι ἀλλ᾽ ἔγωγε ἐκεῖνο ἂν ἥδιστα --- ἀκού-
cup,’ not so, though; but —, Pl. Meno, § 22 init.
ye μέντοι is a frequent combination, where both particles severally claim the second
place in the sentence: thus, τούς ye μέντοι ἀγαθοὺς εἰς πόλεμον ὡμολόγητο διαφερόντως
τιμᾶν, Aen. An. 1, 9,14, the sentence being compounded of τούς ye ay. and τοὺς
μέντοι ay. Sooitpai ye μέντοι, ἔφη. But when the first word does not admit ye, but
does admit μέντοι, the order is changed: thus, λέγουσι μέν tu οὐ μέντοι ye ὅσον
οἴονται, Pl. Rep. 329. οὐ μέντοι ταχύ γε ἀπαγγελῶ, Xen. An. 2, 3, 9.
On γέ τοι, see ὃ 251.
ἤτοι, comp. of ἢ and τοι, is epic :? verily, assuredly : ὦ φίλοι, ἤτοι κλῆρος ἐμός :
often ἤτοι μέν. Sometimes in oppositions: ἤτοι Νεστορίδην --- Τηλέμαχον δ᾽ —,
Od. 1δ, θΘ. ἤτοι ᾽Οδυσσεὺς ὕστερος, αὐτὰρ Τηλέμαχος πρόσθ᾽ ἡγεμόνευεν, 24, 154.
man
iS)
wn
σι
In the alternative ἢ --- 7, the Attics often add τοὶ to the first 7. ἤτοι κλύουσα
παιδὸς ἢ τύχη mapa, Soph. Ant. 1182, Trach. 149. ἤτοι ὅλου τοῦ εἴδους ἢ μέρους
ἑκάστου, Pl. Parm. 131. Often with γε added : ἤτοι θεούς γε ἡγούμεθα ἢ θεῶν παῖδας,
Apol. 27. ἤτοι ἐπιστάμενοί γε --- ἢ ὕστερον, Phed. 76. In Hep. 344, E, ἔοικας --
ἤτοι ἡμῶν γε οὐδὲν κήδεσθαι, the first 7 is suppressed, the sense being, or (656) tn that
case, you do not care for us at all,
§ οὔτοι, not — though, surely not: οὔτοι --- ye: ovtdpa: usually at the beginning of
a sentence, or preceded by ἀλλά.
μήτοι (the prohibitive μή), do not — though: μήτοι τις ἡμᾶς --- θορυβήσῃ, Pl. Rep.
438. μήτοι --- ye: μήτοι ye in aposiopesis, Xen. Cyr. 2, 3, 24. Ma A’, ἔφη ὁ
ταξίαρχος, μήτοι ye ἐν μιᾷ ye ἡμέρᾳ, not in one day though: often (in the same sense
μή τι ye) = nedum, αὐτοὺς ἐποίει, μήτοι καὶ ἀλλήλους ye, — ἀδικεῖν, not to say one
another, Pl. Rep. 352. μήτοι θεούς ye, — εἰ δ᾽ οὖν θεούς, μήτοι τόν ye μέγιστον τῶν
θεῶν, ib. 388. Sometimes μήτοι γε δή.
pa and ἄρ (Epic), ἄρα.
Wes
Soe
a) pa enclitic, dp the same inverted, and also dpa,‘ are often attached (in epic
poetry) to relatives and demonstratives, particles and conjunctions, at the beginning
of a sentence or clause of a sentence, with a notion of progress or sequence, which is
μὴ)
1 Not simply καὶ μήν, as Buttm. in 1].
2 But Soph. Gd. C. 1366, ἢ τὰν οὐκ ἂν ἢ =H τοι ἄν, and El. 498, ἢ roe or 7 τοι,
3 The supposed derivation from ἄρω (Kihner, Nagelsb., Stallbaum) explains some
of the facts (see 771. 14, 511, and the preceding vss.) ; more satisfactory is that (cf.
Hartung) which connects the simple pa (ἄρ) with the verbal root, denoting easy or
sudden motion, which appears in ῥέω, pea, and ῥάδιος, rapio, repente (applied to
mental action in veor, ratus), rite, and with the suffix in comparatives and comparative
words, δεινότερος, πότερος, alter(o), δεῦρο, ultro, intra, ἡμέτερος, longer, other, either,
hither, our, &c. nostr(o). On this view, a-pa is the pronominal root ἀ --- (ἀ-πό, ἀ-νά,
a priv., d-rap, ἄ-τερ, &c.) compounded with pa.
4 But in numberless passages, a slight alteration will give pa or dp where the
edited text has dpa, ap’.
[APPENDIX.
ὁ 258.] pa. apa. 225
sometimes perceptible, but often so slight that the particle might as well be absent,
and seems only intended to help the metre or to close an hiatus. Thus we find,
indifferently, ὡς ἔφαν and ὡς ap’ ἔφαν, never ὥς ῥ᾽ ἔφαν or ὥς ῥ᾽ ἔφατ᾽ : ὡς ἔφατ᾽. οἱ δ᾽
>” eae Sitch nts. em ὁ Zi “5 Ὁ eq ef \ eS A ἊΣ ἐν 5
ἄρα and ὡς ἔφατ᾽, οἱ δέ: οἱ δ᾽ ὅτε δή ῥ᾽ ἵκοντο and οἱ δ᾽ ὅτε δὴ σχεδὸν ἦσαν : τῶν μὲν ἄρ
> , “ oe) , εἰ ae ὙΑΡ I) , ἐφ᾽ - Cie ”
Αμφίμαχος and τῶν μὲν ᾿Οδυσσεύς : οἵ τ᾽ ap ᾿Αμύκλας εἶχον and οἵ τ᾽ ἔχον Αἴγιναν :
δὴ τότε and δή ῥα τότ᾽. --- Qs ἔφατ᾽- ἔδδεισεν 6€ —, καί ῥ᾽ ἀκέουσα καθῆστο, with reter-
ence to the preceding command, ἀλλ᾽ ἀκέουσα κάθησο, 1]. 1, 565-8. τίς τ᾽ ἄρ σῴφωε
θεῶν ἔριδι ξυνέηκε μάχεσθαι; and who then —, with ref. to διαστήτην ἐρίσαντε, Il. 1,
6. 8. — It frequently appears in one member of an alternative: 7 pa — 7, — εἴτ᾽
dpa — εἴτε, οὔτ᾽ apa — οὔτε ; or correlation, τόσσον --- ὅσσον ἄρ᾽, ἣμος — τῆμος ἄρ᾽:
ey? ΄ « ΄ 2 ΄ > , > > Di αν, er ς > ah
or opposition, μέν pa — δέ (ἀλλά, αὐτάρ) : οὐκ ---- ἀλλ᾽ apa. Also ὅττι pa, ἐπεί pa,
οὕνεκ᾽ ἄρα, ὅτε pa, ὅτε and τότε δή pa. yap pa. ἢ pa (verily): οὐκ and οὐδ᾽ dpa, εἰ
Ἄν He
μὴ ἄρ᾽.
6) This use is less frequent with other words: it is found, however, in primary
sentences after some monosyllabic verbs: 7 pa, so spake he; βὴ ῥ᾽ ἴμεν and αὐτὰρ ὁ
Bn ῥ᾽ ἰέναι, 11. 21, 205 (even not at the beginning of a sentence, μετὰ δὲ κλειτοὺς
΄ mene, ΄ ΄ » . 5 Ν
ἐπικούρους Bn pa μέγα ἰάχων, 111. 17, 215): more frequently in apodosis, αὐτὰρ
> ee ~ εν» draws eS ee aS GES Ti. 10. 357 leh > \
ἐπειδὴ —, βῆ ῥ᾽ ἴμεν, and ἀλλ᾽ ὅτε δὴ pa —, γνῶ ῥ᾽ ἄνδρας, Il. 10,357. αὐτὰρ ἐπειδὴ
~ ΄ “Ὁ, ἱ θά Til. 18. 609 dae \ La Ἂς (mek DA eee) 99°97
τεῦξε σάκος ---, TEVE ἄρα οἱ θώρηκα, L/. 18, 609. αὐτὰρ ἐπεὶ --- εἴατ᾽ dip’, Il. 22,127.
οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ οὖν ---, στῆσαν ἄρ᾽, Il. 24, 349. Similarly, ἤτοι ὅγ᾽ ὡς εἰπὼν, κατ᾽ ap ἕξετο,
71. 1. 10] : and with the participle, τὸν δ᾽ ὡς οὖν --- κινήσας pa κάρη. Il. 17. 198.
Rarely with substantives : Αἴας ¢a πρῶτος, Il. 14,511. ἀσπὶς ἄρ᾽ ἀσπίδ᾽ ἔρειδε, 71.
. “1.5 a wc > “ a » ς
10, 201. With preposition: τοῦ δ᾽ ὡς οὖν ---, μετ᾽ ἄρα ὃμωῇσιν ἔειπεν, Od. 17, 493.
c) ἄρα {not pa) denotes subjective consequence, so then —! why, then —! it
appears, or, turns out ! always with a feeling of surprise, of finding oneself mistaken
and, agreeably or disagreeably, undeceived. This use is known to Homer: Ἕκτορ,
εἶδος ἄριστε, μάχης ἄρα πολλὸν edeveo, 71]. 17, 142. σχέτλιε, Πηλέος vie, χόλῳ ἄρα σ᾽
ἔτρεφε μήτηρ, Ll. 10, 203, οἷσιν ἄρα Ζεὺς ἐκ νεότητος ἔδωκε καὶ ἐς γῆρας τολυπεύειν,
Il. 14, 85. νηλεὲς, οὐκ ἄρα colye πατὴρ ἦν ἱππότα ΙΤηλεύς, &e., Il. 16, 33. — So
Hdt. 1,111, πυνθάνομαι --- ὡς ἄρα Μανδάνης τε εἴη παῖς, that after all (or, who
would have thought it !) — In this sense, ἄρα is very frequent in the Attic writers
of poetry and prose. οὐκ ἐνενοήσαμεν ὅτι εἰσὶν ἄρα τοιαῦται φύσεις, οἵας ἡμεῖς οὐκ
φήθημεν, Pl. Κερ. 375. ὦ παῖδες, ὡς ἄρα ἐφλυαροῦμεν, ὅτε ---, how, as it now appears,
we did trifle —! Xen. Cyr. 1,.4.11. ἐμοὶ. ὦ ἄνδρες, θυομένῳ --- οὐκ ἐγίγνετο τὰ ἱερά.
καὶ εἰκότως ἄρα οὐκ ἐγίγνετο᾽ ὡς γὰρ ἐγὼ νῦν πυνθάνομαι ---, and with good reason, as
the result has shown, Xen. An. 2, 2, 3. μάτην ἄρ᾽ ἡμεῖς, ὡς ἔοικεν, ἥκομεν, why then it
appears —, Soph. El. 102. ὅτ᾽ οὔκετ᾽ εἰμί, τηνικαῦτ᾽ ἄρ᾽ εἰμ᾽ ἀνήρ, Aid. Ο΄. 394. οὕτω
κοινόν τι ἄρα χαρᾷ καὶ λύπῃ δάκρυά ἐστιν ὶ Xen. Hell. 7,1,32. Hence the use of the
imperfect, ὅδ᾽ ἢν ἄρα -- this then is he —! (he was so all along, as it now turns out),
Soph. Phil.966, kat ἐνενόησα τότε dpa καταγέλαστος ὦν, ἡνίκα ---- ἔφην --.. οὐδὲν εἰδὼς
ἄρα τοῦ πράγματος ---- ἐγὼ μὲν γὰρ ὑπ᾽ ἀβελτερίας ᾧμην ----. τὸ δὲ apa, οὐ τοῦτο
ἦν —, ἀλλὰ ---. εἰ δὲ ψευδῆ, οὐδὲν ἄρ᾽ ἢν mpaypa, .... ἀλλὰ γὰρ ἐγὼ οὐκ ἤδη dpa —,
Pi. Conv. 198 C—E. Sometimes in the middle of a sentence: πολλὰ καὶ ἀγαθὰ τὴν
πόλιν πεποιηκότες ἄρα ἀδίκως ὑπ᾽ αὐτῆς ἀπόλλυνται, ὡς ὁ τούτων λόγος, Pl. Gorg. 519.
ὡς δὲ ταῦτα γελοῖά ἐστι, κατάδηλον ἔσται, ἐὰν μὴ πολλοῖς ὀνόμασι χρώμεθα ἄρα, ἡδεῖ τε
καὶ ἀνιαρῷ καὶ ἀγαθῷ καὶ κακῷ, Pl. Prot. 355.
On ἄρα in sentences with μέν --- δέ, see ὃ 189 a.
In interrogations it denotes surprise, perplexity, or.impatience : τίς dpa ῥύσεται ;
τίς ἄρ᾽ ἐπαρκέσει θεῶν ἢ θεῶν; Eur. ' ᾿
APPENDIX. | Q
258,
[§
- 258. ]
bo
261.
226 Appendix on the Particles. [ὁ 259—261.
In exclamations, ὅρα, τίς ἄρ᾽ jv; (in disappointment at not finding the person
who was expected;) Soph. Cid. C.118, πῶς πότε --- πῶς ἄρα; Phil. 684, ὡς οὐκ
ἄρ᾽ 70n —! how ignorant, it seems, I was! El. 1176. So εἰ and εἰ μὴ dpa —, if (or,
unless), which I do not expect, &c.: ποταμὸς δ᾽ εἰ μέν τις καὶ ἄλλος dpa ἡμῖν ἐστι
διαβατέος, οὐκ οἶδα, if it should turn out that there is —, Xen. An. 2, 4,6. εἴτε --
εἴτ᾽ apa, whether — or (should such unexpectedly be the case). With as, “that,” it
is often ironical: ὡς ἄρα οἱ πρόγονοι μεγάλα εὖ παθόντες οὐδένα ἐτίμησαν, that it
should seem forsooth —, Dem.
Peculiarities: ταῦτα δὴ καὶ of ἄλλοι πάντες ἄρα ξυνέφασαν, Pl. Conv. 177. The
force may be expressed by, they could but assent: ταῦτα ἀκούσας ὁ Κῦρος ἐπαίσατο
" dpa (in his surprise) τὸν μηρόν. Xen. Cyr. 7,3, 6. Σακῶν δὲ ἰδιώτης ἀνὴρ ἀπέλιπεν
apa (to the surprise of everybody) τῷ ἵππῳ τοὺς ἀλλοὺς ἐγγὺς TO ἡμίσει τοῦ δρόμου, Xen.
Cyr. 8,3, 25. ὥστε ἐπεὶ ἐδεδειπνήκεσαν, καὶ τὰ πάντα πολλὰ ὄντα διαπεπόμφει ὁ
Κῦρος ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης. εἶπεν ἄρα ὁ Ῥωβρύας" ᾿Αλλ᾽ ἐγὼ. ὦ Κῦρε, πρόσθεν μὲν ἡγούμην
— (said in his surprise, or, could not help saying), Xen. Cyr. 8, 4, 7. In some
places, the sense as 76 turned out subsides into in fact, or, it should be remarked
that: “Σάκᾳ δὲ... οὐδὲν δίδως ;” ὁ δὲ Σάκας dpa —, now Sacas, it should be observed,
was, &e. (or, it would turn out upon enquiry, that —). So, in explanation of a
preceding speech, οἱ δ᾽ dpa τῶν βασιλέων οἰνοχύοι....., Xen. Cyr. 1, 3, 9.
yap, (nam) namely, for.
Being a form of ye with the suffix pa, dp, this particle denotes an affirmation (ye)
which is explanatory (pa) of something else: sometimes the notion of explanation
predominates, sometimes the affirmation.
a) It is little more than merely explanatory = namely, after demonstratives and
short sentences, such as σημεῖον δέ, δῆλον δέ δείκνυμι δέ, σκέψασθε δέ, &e. (in which
there is always a demonstrative, e.g. ἐνθένδε, ἐντεῦθεν, &e. implied.) See examples
in ὃ 196, and R., to which add- οὐκοῦν τοσοῦτον μὲν ἡμῖν εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν πεπέρανται ;
ὃ γάρ ἐσμεν, ἐπιεικῶς ὡμολόγηται, Pl. Ale. pr. 132, thus much, namely —. δοκεῖ
τοίνυν μοι. ἔφη, χαριέστερον εἶναι μῦθον ὑμῖν λέγειν. Ἢν yap ποτε. where the demon-
strative is not expressed: ¢o tell you a story. Namely —, Pl. Prot. 320.
6) The affirmative force predominates in replies: ἔλεγες ; ἔλεγον yap, why yes, T
did. ai μητέρες τὰ παιδία μὴ ἐκδειματούντων. Μὴ γάρ, ἔφη (Pl.), why yes (you say
true): they ought not = why no.
c) Very often, especially in Herodot. and Thucyd., the explanatory clause with
yap is premised to the thing explained: see § 196 ὁ, and on the ellipsis in ἀλλὰ γάρ,
ἀλλ᾽ ov yap, see under ᾿Αλλά. --- On καὶ γάρ, see under Kai, ὃ 225.
4) The γάρ in interrogations may be referred to a) = “is this, namely, what you
mean to say?” or 6) = “ aye, is it so?” In many places it may be referred to a
preceding assertion: thus, ὄλωλε yap ; = ὄλωλεν ; οὕτω yap λέγεις. --- To this head
belong the interrogative replies equivalent to assertions : πῶς yap ; for how can it be
so? =‘how so? by no means: πῶς yap οὐ; for how can it be not so? = to be sure,
undoubtedly : ἢ yap; οὐ yap; is it not so? (which are sometimes inserted in the
middle of a sentence (especially by later Atticists): καλήν ye (οὐ yap ;) τὴν ἀμοιβὴν
ἀποδώσομεν.
Ti γάρ ; sometimes, like φοτα ?, is a formula of transition to ἃ new question. Οὐκοῦν
πρῶτον μὲν ἀναβατικωτέρους ἐπὶ τοὺς ἵππους ποιήσεις αὐτούς ; Δεῖ γοῦν. ἔφη. Τί yap;
ἐάν που κινδυνεύειν δέῃ, πότερον ---; Xen. In reply to a preceding question, it is a
form of assent, ἄλλο understood (cf. τί μήν under μήν, ὃ 231) = “ (yes;) for what
[APPENDIX.
§ 262—264.| yap. dpa. οὗν. 227
(else is it, if not as you say)?” It may be rendered, why not ? certainly, undoubt-
edly, or, after a negative assertion or question, certainly not. τοῦτο μὲν ἄρα παντὶ δῆλον,
ὅτι οὐκ αἰσχρὸν τὸ γράφειν λόγους. Τί yap; why should it be ? = of course it is not.
Μενέλαε, προςφθέγγει νιν ἀνόσιον κάρα ; “τί γάρ ; φίλος μοι πατρός ἐστιν ἔκγονος."
In γὰρ ἄν, οὐ γὰρ ἄν, there is sometimes a reference to a suppressed condition: οὐ
φιλεῖς pe, ὦ θύγατερ, οὐ yap ἂν ἐμὲ ἀπεκρύπτου τὰ σὰ πάθη, for (if you did) you would
΄ > a 2 , wae \ x e \ , ; 5
not —. τούτου ἐνδεᾶ ἐφαίνετο" Bia γὰρ ἂν εἷλον τὸ χωρίον, for (had it been other-
wise —), Thue.
Ρ
apa.
This (Attic) particle represents the Epic ἢ fa, or rather ἢ ἄρα, and is described
by ancient grammarians as σύνδεσμος ἀπορηματικός, denoting perplexity together
with surprise ; most commonly in interrogations, but sometimes also in exclamations.
In questions, the meaning is, surely it should seem (or, tt turns out, &c.) ὃ or, aye,
then — ? or, I wonder whether — ? the interrogative force residing, not so much in
the particle itself, as in the tone of the utterance : τί φῶ; dp ἔστιν ; ap οὐκ ἔστιν ;
ἢ γνώμη πλανᾷ ; καὶ φημὶ κἀπόφημι, κοὐκ ἔχω τί φῶ, Soph. Cid. C.315. ap ᾽Οδυσσέως
κλύω ; can it be that —? Phil. 964. “Apa, ἔφη, ὦ ἄνδρες, νῦν μὲν καιρὸς διαλυθῆναι 5
T should think it would be time —? Xen. Cyr.7,5,40. Sometimes in the middle of
a sentence : "ASpnrov ἐν δόμοισιν apa κιγχάνω ; I wonder whether —? Eur, Ale. 499.
Very often it introduces an interrogation dependent on a preceding verb, but always
in the form of oratio recta: σκεψώμεθα ἄρα λύπη ὑπερβάλλει τὸ ἀδικεῖν ; (as if it were
el dpa), Pl. Gorg. 475. δεῖ dpa — σκοπεῖν, ἄρα τεχνικός ἐστιν —; Pl. Lach. 185.
ἐπισκέψασθαι, apa ἃ νῦν δὴ διήλθομεν --- ἁρμόττει ; Pl. Rep. 402. (Cf. § 199.c, R. 1.)
In ἄρά ye, the interrogator believes, or pretends to believe, that the thing is as he
says: Ὁ δὲ δὴ ἀὴρ dpa ye... ὅτι αἴρει Ta ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, ἀὴρ κέκληται, I should say
that —? Pl. Crat. 410. —Ap’ ovv — ; I presume, then — ? either where no answer
is expected, but the speaker passes on to some further view of the subject, or where
the question is grounded on what goes before (according to the two leading uses of
οὖν, ὃ 264, a, b).
Ap οὐ —; expects an affirmative, dpa μή —; a negative answer. dp’ οὐ μωρόν
ἐστι; = can it be, that it is not foolish ? meaning, that it would be surprising if the
thing were not so. dpa μὴ δοκεῖς ; surely you do not imagine ? = can it be, that
there is reason to apprehend your imagining? (Cf. § 199 b.)
In the poets, dpa sometimes occurs in exclamations, in the same sense as ἄρα:
οἴμοι ταλαίνης ἄρα τῆςδε συμφορᾶς, Soph. El. 1110. τοιοῖςδε χρησμοῖς apa χρὴ
πεποιθέναι, 25οὐ. Choeph. 281.
οὖν, Lonic ὧν.
This word is explained (by Hartung) as accusative adv of ads, a Cretan and
Laced. form of αὐτός. Hence its original force = “ the same,” “all one.” (Others
make it = ἐόν, dv, so that the primary sense is wt nune est.)
a) Originally οὖν appears only as an adjunct to pronouns and conjunctions. In
Homer it occurs only so; chiefly with ἐπεί and ὡς (also οὔτ᾽ ody, and your) : ait (the
cranes) ἐπεὶ οὖν χειμῶνα φύγον καὶ ἀθέσφατον ὄμβρον, κλαγγῇ ταίγε πέτονται, at what
A
same time, i.e. no sooner have they —, Il. 3,4. τὸν δ᾽ ὡς οὖν ἐνύησε, 2b. 21 and 90,
1 Or, possibly, εἰ ἄρα, when, as is most usual, it is interrogative. Cf. the instances
where it depends on a verb of considering, &c.
APPENDIX. | Q-2
to
oO)
N
L$
264.]
Ln
266.
228 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 265, 266.
and frequently : atr’ (the fawns) ἐπεὶ οὖν ἔκαμον —, ἑστᾶσι, Ll. 4, 348. In Attic
writers, ὅςτις, ὅςπερ, ὅσος. ὁποῖος, &Ke., οὖν, with ghee adverbial forms 6 ὅπῃ. ὥςπερ. &e.
οὖν, all 1 in the sense of the Lat. —ewnque: e.g. γυναῖκα πιστὴν δ᾽ ἐν δόμοις εὕροι
μολὼν οἵανπερ οὖν ἔλειπεν, such exactly (περ), whatever that might be (Clytemn. is
speaking of herself), “Exch. Aq. 565. πῶς λέγεις; ἔστι yap ὁτιοῦν πρᾶγμα ὁτῳδὴ
ὁπωςοῦν ἔχοντι ἄμεινον ἀγνοεῖν ἢ γιγνώσκειν ; fully, anything, no matter what it may
be, to any person soever, no matter in what condition, Pl. Alc. 2,143. ὅπερ οὖν
οὐδεὶς ἂν οἰηθείη, Just what (wrthout more ado about it, without question), 20:
τοῦδέ σοι μέλειν ἐφίεθ᾽ ἁνὴρ κεῖνος, ὥσπερ οὖν μέλει, Soph. 4). 970. εἰ δ᾽ ἔστιν, ὥσπερ
οὖν ἔστιν, Pl. Phedr. 242, with the same notion of indifference, not caring to argue
the point further.?
6) In its consecutive use, οὖν = thus, then, accordingly, such being the case:
ἔδοξεν οὖν μοι. Hence fr equent i in resumptions, after interposed matter, κατανοῶν δὲ 6
Κῦρος os ...., ἐκ τούτων οὖν (1 say, or, so then) ἐπεθύμει, Xen. Cyr, 8, 3, 9. — In
poetry, often between the preposition and its noun, ἐν οὖν ῥοπῇ τοιᾷδε, Soph. Tr. 82.
In Herodot. ὧν (οὖν) 15 frequently placed between a preposition | ord its verb:
thus, ἤν τις ψαύσῃ παριὼν ὑὸς, αὐτοῖσι ἱματίοισι κατ᾽ ὧν ἔβαψε ἑ ἑωυτόν, 2, 47. (On the
death of any person of note) τὸ θῆλυ γένος πᾶν TO ἐκ τῶν οἰκίων τούτων κατ᾽ ὧν
ἐπλάσατο τὴν κεφαλὴν πηλῷ, 7b. 85. (In embalming) παρασχίσαντες παρὰ τὴν λαπά-
pny, ἐξ ὧν εἷλον τὴν κοιλίαν πᾶσαν, ib. 80. (In making boats) νομεῦσιν οὐδὲν χρέωνται,
ἔσωθεν δὲ τὰς ἁρμόνίας ἐν ὧν ἐπάκτωσαν τῇ βίβλῳ, 2. “96. (In sacrificing) καὶ ἔπειτα
βρόχῳ περὶ ὧν ἔβαλε τὸν αὐχένα, 4, 60: usually, as in these instances, with the aorist,
in descriptions of a customary process : the force seems to be, without more ado,
str gig letwoay 5 ;* comp. the Homeric οὖν in the relative member,
With ἀλλά, ἀτάρ, δέ, it has a force resembling that of 6 ὅμως: but, however (= all
one for that), ἀλλ᾽ οὖν τοσοῦτόν γ᾽ ἔσθι, Soph. Ph. 1289. ἔστω © οὖν ὅπως ὑμῖν
φίλον, Cid. C1 1207 καὶ ἐλέχθησαν λόγοι ὦ ἄπιστοι μὲν ἐνίοισι “Ἑλλήνων, ἐλέχθησαν δ᾽
ὧν, but spoken es were’, all the same, Hdt. εἰ δ᾽ οὖν, φιλεῖ yap τοῦτο μὴ ταύτῃ
ῥέπειν, with aposiopesis, viz. ἄλλῃ ῥέπει, Soph. Ant. 722.
In alternatives, εἴτ᾽ οὖν — εἴτε, the οὖν implies that, whichever side be taken, it
comes to the same thing: οὐκοῦν δαιμόνια μὲν ys pe καὶ νομίζειν καὶ διδάσκειν, εἴτ᾽
οὖν καινὰ, εἴτε παλαιά: Bye οὖν δαιμύνιά γε νομίζω κατὰ τὸν σὸν λέγον, Pil. Apol. 27
(comp. ἤτοι — ἤ, § 255): with οὖν in the second member, λέγοντες εἴτ᾽ ἀληθὲς, εἴτ᾽
ἄρ᾽ οὖν ματήν, or, for aught L care —, Soph. Phil. 345: in both members, καὶ τοῦτο
τοὔνομα ἔχοντα, εἴτ᾽ οὖν ἀληθὲς εἴτ᾽ οὖν ΕΙΣ ἀλλ᾽ οὖν δεδογμένον γέ ἐστι τὸν Σωκράτη
διαφέρειν τινὶ τῶν ἄλλων ἀνθρώπων, Pl. Apol. 34 fin. So οὔτ᾽ (μητ᾽) οὖν : οὔτε γὰρ
θρασὺς, οὔτ᾽ οὖν προδείσας εἰμί, Soph. Cid. C. 90. μήτ᾽ ἄροτον αὐτοῖς γῆς ἀνιέναι τινὰ
μήτ᾽ οὖν γυναικῶν παῖδας, ab. 279. Homer also has οὔτ᾽ οὖν: ἔνθ᾽ οὔτις τὴν νῆσον
ἐσέδρακεν. ὀφθαλμοῖσιν, οὔτ᾽ οὖν κύματα μακρὰ --- εἰσίδομεν, Od. 9,147. νῦν δ᾽ ἐπεὶ ---
ἱκάνεις, οὔτ᾽ οὖν ἐσθῆτος δευήσεαι οὔτε τευ ἄλλου, Od. 0, 192.
1 Buttmann zz Z. explains it as answering to ἃ γάρ in the independent form of
sentence : τοῦτο yap οὐδεὶς ἂν οἰηθείη, and similarly Homer's ἐπεὶ οὖν ἔκαμον = aide
γὰρ, ἐπεὶ ἔκαμον. But this will hardly explain the other facts.
Not as Stallb. zn Z., οὖν, hic quoque nativam servat ratiocinandi et concludendi
potestatem, which, in fact, is not the native force of the particle.
5 Compare the cognate αὐτίκα and αὕτως = αὔτως. Hartung says that it denotes
a cool, offhand way of going to work; but this is evidently not always the case.
[ APPENDIX.
§ 267—269.] οὖν. 229
γοῦν = γε οὖν (therefore placed like ye), yes, without more ado: ἔχεις διδάξαι δή
μ᾽. ὅποι καθέσταμεν ; ; —‘ τὰς γοῦν ᾿Αθήνας οἶδα, τὸν δὲ χῶρον ov,” ᾿ Soph. Cid. C. 24
(the feeling of certainty with indifference). τούτω δ᾽ ov πάλιν αὖτις ἀποίσετον
ὠκέες ἵπποι ἄμφω ἀφ᾽ ἡμείων, εἰ γοῦν ἕτερός ye φύγησιν, Hom. LI. 5, 259, with the
γοῦν in the condition (cf. ὃ 264 a), where the Attics would place it in the apodosis,
comp. εἰ καὶ τυραννεῖς, οὐ ων τὸ γοῦν to” ἀντιλέξαι, Soph. Aid. T. 408.
“γὰρ, οὖν, with adverbial γάρ, in answers, denotes assent with indifference : φημὶ
γὰρ οὖν. οὐ γὰρ οὖν, Pl. passim. With γάρ, “ for,” as in ov τήν γε μὴ θιγοῦσαν, εὖ
>
yap οὖν λέγεις, Soph. Ant. 772, for, of course: οἰκουμένη γὰρ οὖν στέγη πυρὸς μέτα
πάντ᾽ ἐκπορίζει, Phil. 298.
μῶν = μὴ οὖν; eae (without more ado) not —? μῶν. ᾽Οδυσσέως ἐπησθόμην ;
surely not Ulysses? (ΞΞ 1 hope not.) With οὐ: μῶν οὐχ ὁρᾷς ; surely it cannot he
that you do not see this? Cid. C.1729. But the separate force of the particles
having become obscured, so that μῶν has subsided into a mere particle of interroga-
tion, the Attics also say μῶν οὖν; = = num igitur ? and μῶν μὴ "τ Μῶν δοῦλος ὧν
(ἄρχει. σου 6 παιδαγωγός) : then, “μῶν μὴ καὶ οὗτοί σου ἄρχουσιν οἱ διδάσκαλοι; and
μῶν μή τι ἠδίκηκας τὸν πατέρα ἢ τὴν μητέρα; Pl. Lys. 208.
οὔκουν, = not, all one for that; assuredly not, by no means. When the οὐκ is
asser tive, and the ody illative, not therefore, it should be written οὐκοῦν, or rather οὐκ
οὖν; but in thie sense the combination 1 is rare: 1t is more frequent, w hen the odk is
interrogative, e. g. οὐκ οὖν μ᾽ ἐάσεις ; wilt, thou then not let me alone? and then itis
usual to write ΠΝ as also when the οὖν is not illative, and the combination repre-
sents assuredly not, but in an interrogation, wilt thou not assuredly (or, without more
ado) let me go? (In both these cases it would be better to write οὔκουν; see
§ 199b, RK.) But this negative interrogation is virtually a strong affirmation, and is
often used as such, and then it is written οὐκοῦν : e. 5. οὐκοῦν ὅταν δὴ μὴ ae
πεπαύσομαι, prop. shall I not — have done? = Aye, no doubt —, I shall have done:
Soph. Ant. 91, with a bitter irony which sometimes accompanies this use of the
particle. Hence οὐκοῦν οὐκ —3 Is it not then (or, not assuredly) the case that --
not 3 2 οὐκοῦν οὐκ ἂν εἴη τὸ μὴ λυπεῖσθαί ποτε ταὐτὸν τῷ χαίρειν ; “πῶς γὰρ ἄν 3” ΞΞ
as it not then the case, that the absence of grief will not be identical with rowing,
or, well then, to be sure, the — will not be —? Pl. Phil. 360, where the second οὐκ
is assertive. Sometimes also, where it is interrogative, οὐκοῦν καὶ 7 σωφροσύνη ---
ap οὐ τούτοις μόνοις προσήκει; Pl. Phedo, 68.
μὲν οὖν, prop. for one thing, with the same adjunct notion of indifference, ἠέ zs
all one, it makes no difference, &c. (But from this must be distinguished the cases
where μέν is followed by a corresponding δέ, and the οὖν 15 illative, ¢ on the one hand
therefore —.) Hence in affirmative answers, πάνυ μὲν οὖν = quite, Sor one thing
(however it may be with the rest) decidedly (80) : SO κομιδῇ μὲν οὖν, παντάπασι μὲν
οὖν. With Attic urbanity, this formula of assent is used with a corrective force =
immo vero: ἐγὼ ov φημί ; φημὶ μὲν οὖν ἔγωγε, I deny: ? RY; rather (= for one thing,
decidedly) L assert it, Pl. Gorg. 466. ᾿Εγὼ σοὶ οὐκ ἂν δυναίμην ἀντιλέγειν ----. “ οὐ
μὲν οὖν τῇ ἀληθείᾳ ---- δύνασαι ἀντιλέγειν," nay, rather say, you cannot gainsay Truth,
Pl. Conv. 201. In this sense, μὲν οὖν _is sometimes used in continued discourse :
δείσασα γὰρ γραῦς οὐδέν" ἀντίπαις μὲν οὖν, Aisch. Hum. 38. μάταιος ap’ jv, οὐδαμοῦ
μὲν οὖν φρενῶν, Bur. Hipp. 1009. — It is often used in continuation of a preceding
statement : ὃ μὲν οὖν (now what = = as far as that goes, enough said) ἐγώ φημι τὴν
ῥητορικὴν εἶναι, ἀκήκοας sees σῶς μὲν ουν (however, or now) ἄτοπον πεποίηκα sae
. APPENDIX. |
to
Οὶ
NI
No
i)
bo
N
SI “my
μ-
230 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 270—272.
ἄξιον μὲν οὖν (however) ἐμοὶ συγγνώμην ἔχειν ἐστί... .. ἐὰν μὲν οὖν (then, on the one
hand) καὶ ἐγὼ — μὴ ἔχω —, ἐὰν δὲ ἔχω —, Pl. Gorg. 465.
τοινυν.
This particle is compounded either of enclitic τοι (§ 252) (for that matter), or the
stronger form τῷ, in that case, with νυν (δ 243). Its use is in transitions and infer-
ences: then (to proceed), then (in brief), well then, why then (especially: in lively
replies). In the beginning of a speech: ἐγὼ μὲν τοίνυν, L, for my part, sure enough,
Xen. An.5,1,2. In continuation: "Ete τοίνυν τάδε ὁρᾶτε, moreover now —, ib. § 10.
συνεπόμνυμι μηδὲ ἃ οἱ ἄλλοι στρατηγοὶ ἔλαβον εἰληφέναι, μὴ τοίνυν μήδε (nay, for that
matter, in short, not even) ὅσα τῶν λοχαγῶν ἔνιοι, Xen. An. 7, Θ, 19. In answers:
ἄπειμι τοίνυν, well then (to cut the matter short) I am going, Soph. Gad. C. 444. In
unwilling reply : τῶν Λαΐου τοίνυν τις ἢν γεννημάτων ; well then (if you must needs
have it), tb. 1167.— τὰ λῷστα τοίνυν ταῦτά μ᾽ ἀλγύνει πάλαι, why then (to dispose of
that matter briefly) this which you call ‘ best’ has been troubling me all along,
tb. 1067.
ToLyap.
The position of this particle in the beginning of a sentence shows that its first
element is not the enclitic ror, but the ancient τῷ, in that case, therefore. Hence,
τοίγαρ = ergo, proinde. It is used in expressions of assent: why (γάρ) then (τῷ),
τοίγαρ ποιήσω, Soph. Tr. 1249: in inference, Soph. Aj. 666 (after citing a proverb),
τοίγαρ τὸ λοιπὸν εἰσόμεσθα, why then (such being the case) —. The rendering in each
instance varies with that of ydp: thus often in the beginning of a reply, yes, (and)
therefore: e.g. τοίγαρ δι’ ὀρθῆς τήνδε ναυκληρεῖς πόλιν, Soph. Ant. 994.
τοιγάρτοι is the same with addition of τοι enclitic, why therefore to be sure. τοιγάρ-
τοι νῦν, ἅτε μέγιστα ἠδικηκὼς τῶν ἐν Μακεδονίᾳ, ἀθλιώτατός ἐστι πάντων Μακεδύνων
(ironically, after a recital of wicked acts), yes, and therefore no doubt —, Pl. Gorg.471.
Tovyapovy, why then, such being the case : ἀλλὰ θεοῖς γ᾽ ἔχθιστος ἥκω. “τοιγαροῦν
τεύξει taxa,” why then for that very reason (they are the more likely to grant thy
request), Soph, Cid. T. 1519. ὀρθῶς ἔλεξας" τοιγαροῦν τὸ σὸν φράσον, such then
being the case, tell me, Phil. 341. ξύμφημι κἀγώ" τοιγαροῦν σώζου τόδε. Frequent in
prose: e.g. (Cyrus never left a man’s zeal in his service unrewarded) Τοιγαροῦν
κράτιστοι δὴ ὑπηρέται παντὸς ἔργου Κύρῳ ἐλέχθησαν γενέσθαι, accordingly, and reason
good this —, Xen. An. 1, 9, 18. (He never broke promise) καὶ γὰρ οὖν (and
therefore in fact) ἐπίστευον αὐτῷ ----. Τοιγαροῦν ἐπεὶ ---, accordingly, (it is no wonder
that) when —, 7b. 1, 8, 7—9.
που.
This enclitic particle (an adverbial form of τις, quis, κος, whence Ion. κου, κως,
* &c.) properly = somewhere. Apart from the notion of place, it means, somehow,
im some sort or degree ; in conjectures, = perhaps, I suppose, used in conversation
when the speaker puts something in a half-questioning manner (swreZy), intending
to build something on the aflirmative answer of the person addressed: τὸ γάρ
που κακῶς ποιεῖν ἀνθρώπους τοῦ ἀδικεῖν οὐδὲν διαφέρει, for, 1 presume — (it being
possible that the other would say there was some difference), ΡΖ. Crito, 49.
Also when, with a degree of uncertainty, a speaker repeats another’s words: thus
(Socr. having proposed a definition of σχῆμα, Meno 5805), Ὅτι σχῆμά πού ἐστι, κατὰ
τὸν σὸν λόγον, ὃ ἀεὶ χρόᾳ ἔπεται, because figure, I take it —, Pl. τη. 75. Hence
with Attic urbanity, it is used in matter of certainty, especially to intimate that,
before the speaker proceeds with his argument, he waits for the other to affirm the
[APPENDIX.
§ 273—275.] τοίνυν. Tolyap. που. ποτέ. ἀλλά. 231
point, or call it to mind: ὁ γὰρ σκυτοτόμος τέμνει που τομεῖ καὶ σμίλῃ καὶ ἄλλοις [ὃ
ὀργάνοις (I suppose you will grant, or, remember that), Pl. Ale. pr. 51. Οὔ Ti Tov 272.)
olee —; You do not, I trow, at all imagine (“ mirantis et indignantis,” Stallb.). Cf.
οὐ δήπου. (Sometimes it is put before an interposed φημί, or the like, to which it
belongs : ἔδοξέ πού φησι, It says, I suppose, “ It seemed good, §e.,” Pl. Phedr, 258.)
The same, with greater emphasis, is δήπου (we may say that’ at once, I suppose). §
Ἐγὼ γάρ που ἀπεκρινάμην τὸ διὰ παντὸς ὀρθῶς ἔχον᾽ ὀρθῶς δὲ δήπου ἔχει τὸ κατὰ τὴν ᾿
τέχνην γιγνόμενον, my answer, I presume you perceive, was as to what is done rightly 273.
(in wrestling) αὐ all points: and rightly done — surely you will grant this — is
what is done by strict rule of art, Pl. Ale.pr.107._ τῶν Λαΐου δήπου τις ὠνομάζετο,
I suppose we may be pretty sure that —, Soph. Cid. T. 1042. —
Sometimes in a direct interrogation, distinct from the latent interrogation of the
particle itself: καὶ ἔστι δήπου τὸ δίψος δίψος rod; Pl. Rep. 439; even when the
interrogation is virtually negative: καὶ τούτου γε δήπου τις ἂν ἐπιθυμήσειεν ; equiva-
lent to οὐ yap δήπου τούτου γέ τις ἐπιθυμήσειεν, Pl. Conv. 200. In οὐ δήπου (ye), the
negation is expressed interrogatively: od δή πού σέ ye — ἄγουσιν, surely they are
not —? Soph. Ant. 381. οὐ yap δήπου σοῦ ye —, Pl. Apol. 20. (“ οὐ δήπου est sus-
picantis : οὔ τί που mirantis et indignantis,” Stall.)
Stronger still is δήπουθεν (see ὃ 240); used when the speaker, with a kind of
defiance, disputes the possibility of an opposite assertion: ἑστάναι yap ἐξέσται δήπου-
θεν αὐτῷ, for I presume there can be no doubt that —, Dem. Mid. ο. 26.
Rem. Cf. μέν in interrogation: Ἕλλην μέν ἐστι, καὶ ἑλληνίζει; Pl. Men. 82,
where μέν assumes the fact as unquestionable: ποὺ in the same question would
mean, that the speaker waits for the other’s assent. (Buttm. in 1. and Jndew,s. v.)
ποτέ (enclitic). | §
This temporal adverb of τις (quis, kos, Ion. κοτέ), at some time ; once (ποτὲ μέν --- 274.
ποτὲ δέ, one while — another while, modo — modo, or ἐνίοτε, or ἄλλοτε δέ) : at any
time, ever. With other designations of time: νῦν ποτε, ἤδη ποτέ, πάλαι ποτέ, πρίν
ποτε, πρόσθε πού ποτε, πώποτε, ἔτι ποτε. The notion of time is less prominent in
the following: μέθες μέθες pe. “moi pebd;” μέθες ποτέ, do’ let me go (utique, in any
wise), Soph. Phil.816. τίσασθε, τίσασθ᾽ ἀλλὰ τῷ χρόνῳ ποτέ, αὐ last,tandem aliquando,
or simply by the emphasis, do’ avenge me! So μόγις οὖν ποτε ἡμῖν ἄνθρωπος ἀνέῳξε
τὴν θύραν, at last. Ἐκκάλυπτε νῦν ποθ᾽ (ποιυ. αὐ last) ἡμῖν ovstwas λέγεις λύγους,
Eur. Iph. A. 872. Κἀπειδὴ ἀφίκετό ποτε ὁ Ἵππαρχος.
In interrogations, it expresses impatience for an answer (¢andem), or wonder, or
emotion in general. τί ποτε λέγεις ; what do’ yousay? τί ποτε πέπονθας ; what (im
the world) ails you? πῶς ποτε δράσεις ; = how will’ you do it? τί ποτε (Hom.
τίπτ᾽), what can’ be the reason that —? ποίῳ ποτ᾽ ἐχρήσαντο τεκμηρίῳ ; Xen. And
so in indirect questions: ᾿Εθαύμασα ὅτῳ ποτὲ τρόπῳ τοῦτ᾽ ἐγένετο : and with indefinite
pronouns, ὅςτις more, who-ever, &c.: and with εἰ, εἴποτε, if ever, and if perchance.
With δή. ὅςτις δήποτε, whosoever, ὅπου δή ποτε. So εἰ δή ποτε. τί δή Tore ; τοῦτο
πέπρακται νυνὶ ὅπως δή ποτε, no matter how : and with οὖν. ᾿Ἐμισθώσατό με ὅςτις δή
ποτ᾽ οὖν, Asch. Οὐ δή ποτε in negations interrogatively expressed, surely never — ’
ov δή ποθ᾽ ἡμῖν ξυγγενὴς ἥκεις ποθέν; surely it can never be that —? Soph. El. 1202.
Cf. οὐ δή που.
"Αλλά. §
This adverbial form (distinguished by its accent from pl. neut. ἄλλα) derives its 27 5.
APPENDIX.]
2
[§
75°]
232 Appendix on the Particles. L$ 275.
force from the proper signification of ἄλλος = “what there is else remaining after
the removal or eaclusion of some :” i.e. the notion introduced by ἀλλά is presented as
being exclusive of some other preceding notion; or ἀλλά corresponds to a preced-
ing ov, expressed or understood.
4) οὐκ ἐγώ, ἀλλὰ σύ. οὐκ ἐάσομεν, ἀλλὰ κωλύσομεν : the second notion excludes
the first, to which it stands in direct opposition.
6) αἰσχρὰν γυναῖκ᾽ ἔγημας, ἀλλὰ πλουσίαν. σοφὸς σὺ μάντις, ἀλλὰ τἀδικεῖν φιλῶν.
Here the first notion is not expressly excluded, and the ἀλλά introduces, not its
direct opposite, but something different. But here also ἀλλά has, in fact, its proper
force with reference to a suppressed od; for in this form of sentence the speaker
implies, that the first notion, which he concedes, is πο the point, but the second is.
In the full expression of the thought, there is an opposition by μέν and δέ, with an
ov in the δέ clause, to which od the ἀλλά corresponds. Thus, τὸ σῶμα δοῦλον, ἀλλ᾽
ὁ νοῦς ἐλεύθερος, the body is enslaved — this indeed (μέν) I grant, but (δέ) not this is
the point — but (that) the mind is free. Often, to mark the concession more strongly,
the μέν is expressed in the first clause: τοῦτο τὸ πρᾶγμα ὠφέλιμον μέν ἐστιν, ἀλλὰ
δύσκολον, Which, however, is by no means simply equivalent to ὠφ. μέν ἐ.. δύσκολον
δέ, nor does the ἀλλά correspond to the μέν. but to the negation in the suppressed
δέ clause. In μέν --- δέ, it is intimated that both considerations are taken into the
account: in ey — adda, the former is conceded only to be set aside. When the
second member is negative, the μέν must be expressed, ὠφέλιμον μέν, GAN οὐ καλόν:
without μέν, this would = advantageous, and not handsome ; see c. — The first also
may be negative, e.g. οὐκ ἀρνοῦμαι μέν, ἀλλ᾽ (ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως) ἐρωτῶ ; but then the ἀλλά
corresponds, not to the expressed, but to the implied negation, viz. noé my not-
denying is the point, but my asking.
c) But the Greek often introduces with ἀλλά a negation in direct opposition to
a preceding affirmation: thus, ἐκεῖθεν ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐνθένδε ἡρπάσθη, Pl. Phedr. 229. See
other exx. in § 187, to which add: Χαραδριοῦ τινα αὖ σὺ βίον λέγεις, ἀλλ᾽ od νεκροῦ
οὐδὲ λίθου, Pl. Grorg. 494. κινδυνεύει τὸ ἑκόντα ἐπὶ τὸ ἄρχειν ἰέναι, ἀλλὰ μὴ ἀνάγκην
περιμένειν, αἰσχρὸν νενομίσθαι, coming forward to rule instead of (and not rather)
waiting till one is forced, Pl. Rep. 347. τίς μηχανὴ ---- δικαιοσύνην τιμᾶν ἐθέλειν, ἀλλὰ
μὴ γελᾶν ἐπαινουμένης ἀκούοντα ; 1b. 366. φιλοσόφους ἀλλ᾽ οὐ φιλοδόξους κλητέον, ib.
480. ἔπειτ᾽ ἀπὸ ταῤῥοῦ τοὺς θεοὺς ὑπερφρονεῖς, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς ; Arist. Nub. 226.
The natural expression would be οὐκ ἐνθένδε ἀλλ᾽ ἐκεῖθεν, &Kc., but to give greater
emphasis to the affirmation by more forcible repudiation of its opposite, which is
assumed as having been asserted, or likely to be so, the order is inverted, so that the
ἀλλά seems to belong, ina manner, to the preceding clause, and to look backward
rather than forward: thence (quite another thing that!), xo¢ hence. But the true
explanation (which reduces this to the form a) is this: ἐκεῖθεν ἡρπάσθη" οὐκ (ὡς od
λέγεις, or, ὡς φόμεθα, or the like) ἐνθένδε, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐνθένδε, thence —not as people might
suppose, “ hence” — but “not hence.’ This explanation accounts for the irony
which commonly appears in this use. Comp. ὑμεῖς ---- μάλιστ᾽ ἂν οὕτως --- εὐδοκιμοῖτε
kal οὐκ ἐπαινοῖσθε ---' ἡμεῖς τ᾽ αὖ μάλιστ᾽ ἂν οὕτως εὐφραινοίμεθα οὐχ ἡδοίμεθα, Pl. Prot.
337, followed in each instance by an explanation: τὸ μὲν γὰρ evdokipety...., τὸ δὲ
ἐπαινεῖσθαι...., ἄς. Here is no irony: had such been the case, the full form
would have been, εὐδοκιμοῖτε καὶ οὐκ ἐπαινοῖσθε ἀλλ᾽ ovk-erawvoicbe, = “ and the case
would be, not a being praised, but a not being praised ;” whence, the negative state-
ment being suppressed, the form would be εὐδοκ. ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐπαινοῖσθε.
Rem. This use of ἀλλ᾽ od must be distinguished from the but not —, which is
[APPENDIX.
§ 276—270. | ἀλλά. 233
opposed to a preceding μέν ; see b: e.g. profitable indeed, but not handsome,
ὠφέλιμον μέν, GAN οὐ καλόν, which is better expressed, οὐ μέντοι (or μὲν δὴ) καλόν
γε.
οὐ μύνον --- ἀλλὰ καὶ ---, not only —, but also — (the ἀλλά in direct opposition to
ov, the καί = καὶ —, kal —), sometimes with the addition πρὸς τούτῳ, OF TOUTOLS.
When the καί is omitted, the notion contained in the first member is entirely put
aside. Thus, in od μόνον ἐκινδύνευσεν, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἔπαθεν, not only was he in danger, but
he (both was in danger, and) also suffered, an equal stress is laid on both notions :
but in the same sentence without καί, on arriving at the second notion, we think it
so important, that we reject the intention with which here also we set out, viz. of
putting the notions (ἐκινδ, and ἔπαθε) on the same level by (kai —,) kal —.
a) When ἀλλά follows conditional clauses with εἰ, εἰ μή, &ec., it may be rendered
by yet, yet at least = saltem, certe. This case comes under 4, viz. the ἀλλά refers to
a suppressed apodosis with μέν --- δέ. Ei σῶμα δοῦλον, ἀλλ᾽ ὁ νοῦς ἐλεύθερος : the
suppressed apodosis is ἔστω μὲν δοῦλον, to which ἀλλά refers in the manner explained
above. So εἰ μὴ πάντα, ἀλλὰ πολλά ye ἴστε. - (Comp. st mihi bona republica frui non
licuerit, at carebo mala.) This ἀλλά is often followed by οὖν (even so, all one for that,
&e.; see ὃ 266). Εἰ καὶ μὴ καθ᾽ Ἑλλάδα τεθράμμεθ᾽, ἀλλ᾽ οὖν ξυνετά μοι δοκεῖς λέγειν
(Eur.). ἣν καὶ τὴν φύσιν καταδεεστέραν ἔχωσιν ἀλλ᾽ οὖν ταῖς γ᾽ ἐμπειρίαις .. . προ-
έχουσιν (Lsoc.).
Rem. ἀλλά γε, in direct combination, perhaps never occurs (in fact this would
= no yes); but ye, as in the preceding instances, heightens the antithetic word.
δὴ) By an ellipsis of the conditional clause, ἀλλά comes to stand in the middle of
a sentence: αὐτή ye νοῦν oxés ἀλλὰ τῷ χρόνῳ ποτέ (Soph.), the suppressed clause
being, εἰ μὴ πρότερον. So, frequently, ἀλλὰ νῦν γε, ἀλλὰ νῦν γ᾽ ἔτι (Dem). βούλο-
μαι αὐτὸν διδάξαι, ἄν πως ἀλλὰ νῦν γε παιδευθῇ (Lys.). ὦ θεοὶ πατρῷοι ξυγγένεσθέ γ᾽
ἀλλὰ νῦν, Soph. El. 411. In like manner ἀλλ᾽ οὖν : τοὺς πρώτους χρόνους ἀλλ᾽ οὖν
προσεποιοῦνθ᾽ ὑμῖν φίλοι εἶναι (.2Π56}.), (Uf they were not really so) at any rate they
pretended.
Often ἀλλά stands at the beginning of a speech, either in opposition to something
advanced or supposed to be advanced by another, or to some unexpressed thought
of the speaker: viz. in quick, abrupt replies; in starting an objection, or in approba-
tion and assent (§ 199 ο, R. 2), in exclamations, exhortations, &c., especially when
the discourse is suddenly interrupted and something new is introduced. Ἐὐριπίδη,
Εὐριπίδιον, ὑπάκουσον, εἴπερ πώποτ᾽ ἀνθρώπων τινί. “ ἀλλ᾽ ov σχολή (I hear,) but —.
GAN ἐκκυκλήθητ᾽ (If 50.) why then, do’ let yourself be rolled out (on the eccyclema).
«ἀλλ᾽ ddvvatov.” ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως, Nay, do though! ἀλλ᾽ ἐκκυκλήσομαι, καταβαίνειν δ᾽ οὐ
σχολή, Why then, I will ---, Arist. Ach. 404. τίνα καὶ ἀναβιβάσωμαι δεησόμενον ὑπὲρ
ἐμαυτοῦ ; τὸν πατέρα ; ἀλλὰ τέθνηκεν. ἀλλὰ τοὺς ἀδελφούς ; ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐστίν. ἀλλὰ τοὺς
παῖδας; ἀλλ᾽ οὔπω γεγένηνται, My father? Nay, but he’s dead. Well then, my
brothers? Why, I have none. My children then 7 — (Andoc.). In Xen., Cle-
archus begins a speech with, ANN dere μὲν Κῦρος ζῆν, ἐπεὶ de τετελεύτηκεν ---, Well,
T would Cyrus were alive —. And the same author even begins his Sympos. with
"ANN ἐμοὶ δοκεῖ ----, where the ἀλλά refers to considerations which he has been turning
over in his mind; Well, after all, it does seem to me —.
GAN dpa: εἰπέ μοι, ἔστι σοι ἀγρός ; “ οὐκ ἔμοιγε. ἀλλ᾽ ἄρα οἰκία προσόδους ἔχουσα;
(you don’t say so!) well then —?
ἀλλ᾽ ἢ; a question with surprise or perplexity, the ἀλλά denoting difference from
APPENDIX. |]
Poa)
277.
2709.
7 us
279-]
i)
oo
O
234 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 280, 281.
what the enquirer expected: ἀλλ᾽ 7 δόλον τιν᾽, ὦ ξέν᾽, ἀμφί μοι πλέκεις ; why how
(7s this) ? — Asch. Choeph. 214. ἀλλ᾽ ἢ, τὸ λεγόμενον, κατόπιν τῆς ἑορτῆς ἥκομεν καὶ
ὑστεροῦμεν; (Pl.) οὗτος, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ παραπαίεις ; (Luc.) :
In ἀλλὰ δή, δῆτα, μέν, μὲν δή. μέν τοι, τοι, μήν, both particles have their distinct
force, which is not affected by their concurrence in the same sentence.
ἀλλὰ — γάρ (comp. § 196 b) is often elliptical, the sentence to which ἀλλά belongs
being left to be gathered from the context. ᾿Αλλ᾽, ἡδὺ γάρ τοι κτῆμα τῆς νίκης λαβεῖν,
τόλμα, where the sentence is completed by τόλμα (Soph.). ἴσως ᾿Ἐρινύς ἐστιν ἐκ
τραγῳδίας, βλέπει γέ τοι μανικόν τε Kal τραγῳδικόν. “ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἔχει yap δᾷδας,"
i.e. ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ Ἔ.., οὐκ ἔχει γὰρ 6. (Arist.). ἀλλ᾽ ἔστ᾽ ἔμοιγ᾽ υἱὸς καλός τε κἀγαθός"
ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐθέλει γὰρ μανθάνειν, where ἀλλὰ — γάρ seems to be a mere co.loquialism
= attamen, as the context contains nothing from which the sentence with ἀλλά
may be completed (e.g. but what's the use of that?). In familiar discourse, the
two particles may come together: εἰ ἐγὼ Φαῖδρον ἀγνοῶ. καὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι:
ἀλλὰ γὰρ οὐδέτερα ἔστι τούτων, εὖ οἶδα ὅτι οὐχ ἅπαξ ἤκουσεν (Pl. = ἀλλὰ Φαῖδρον
οὐκ ἀγνοῶ: οὐ γὰρ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐπιλέλησμαι: οὐδέτερα ἔστι τούτων).
In the combinations οὐ μὴν ἀλλά, οὐ μέντοι ἀλλά, and (much less frequent) οὐ γὰρ
ἀλλά, there is always an ellipsis (§ 215 b, R. 2), which may sometimes be supplied
* by repeating the preceding verb to od μήν, &e. ὁ ἵππος πίπτει εἰς γόνατα, καὶ
μικροῦ κἀκεῖνον ἐξετραχήλισεν᾽ ov μὴν (supply ἐξετραχήλισεν) ἀλλὰ ἐπέμεινεν ὁ Κῦρος
μόλις πως, the horse came down on his knees, and was within a little of throwing C.
over his head ; not [that he did throw him], however, but C. managed somehow to
keep his seat (Xen.). μὴ σκῶπτέ μ᾽, BAP’, οὐ yap GAN ἔχω κακῶς = ov γὰρ ὥστε
σκώπτειν, for it is no jeering matter this, but I am indeed in a miserable condition.
But sometimes the notion of opposition is too vague to be supplied, and the combina-
tion may be regarded as a colloquialism, od μὴν (and μέντοι) ἀλλά = veruntamen
> A Ξ' > UL is, 1 \ μὴ Bi > “ Ul 2 X i
attamen, ov yap ἀλλά (etenim: nearly = καὶ yap). τούτων ἀληθῆ μέν ἐστι τὰ πολλά,
> \ > >,» > ς ΄ > ΄ c , τ .
οὐ μὴν ἀλλ᾽ ἴσως οὐχ ἡδέα ἀκούειν (Dem. where only ἡδέα could be supplied).
ἀλλ᾽ 7. The union of these two particles after negations, direct or implied, is
explained by a union of two constructions. Οὐδένα ὁρῶ ἀλλὰ σέ, may be strengthened
by the insertion of ἄλλον, .7 see none other, but (1 see) thee. But this sense may also
be expressed, with a slight difference, by οὐδένα ἄλλον ὁρῶ ἢ σέ, I sce none-other-than
thee; and with omission of the ἄλλον, οὐδένα 6p ἢ σέ. The two forms combined
(which was the more natural by reason of the affinity which the particle ἀλλά, in
respect of its origin, has for ἢ) result in the forms, οὐδένα ἄλλον ὁρῶ ἀλλ᾽ ἢ σέ, L see
none other except that (I see) thee: in which, if we would express the force of both
particles, we must say, J see none other than thee, but (I see) thee, or, I see. none
other, but I see (thee, and none other) than thee; and with omission of ἄλλον,
οὐδένα ὁρῶ ἀλλ᾽ ἢ σέ. The combination originating in this simplest form of sentence
finds its way into more complex enunciations.
In the neuter, it may often be doubted whether the wording is οὐδὲν ἀλλ᾽ ἤ =
ἀλλὰ ἤ or οὐδὲν ἄλλ᾽ ἤ = ἄλλο ἤ.
In the ellipsis of the verb (γίνεται, or the like) to οὐδέν (§ 215 b, R. 1), there is
no doubt that the word is ἄλλο: thus, ovs φαμεν μανθάνειν οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἢ ἀναμιμνή-
σκονται (Pl. = οὐδὲν ἄλλο ποιοῦσιν 7) —) : whence οὐδὲν ἄλλ᾽ ἢ (not ἀλλ᾽ ἢ) προσκυ-
νεῖν ὑπελάμβανον, whether it be, 7 (did) nothing other than suppose him to be praying,
or, I supposed him to be (doing) nothing other than praying. In many cther cases, the
form ἄλλο is easily supposable: e.g. in ἐγὼ γὰρ δι’ οὐδὲν, ἄλλ᾽ ἢ διὰ σοφίαν τινὰ τοῦτο
[ΑΡΡΕΝΘΙΧ.
§ 282, 283.] ἀλλά. GAN Hand GN ἤ. ἤ. 2535
τὸ ὄνομα ἔσχηκα (Ῥ].), it is as natural to suppose the word to be ἄλλο, by none other
thing than by —, as that it is ἀλλά. Only where an ἄλλος is expressed in the first
member, it may seem more natural to assume the form to be ἀλλ᾽ 7: thus, οὐδὲν
ἄλλο σκοπεῖν, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ τὸ ἄριστον (Pl.). Madvig, however, conceives the true reading
to be, in all cases, ἄλλ᾽ ἤ; see ὃ 91, R. 2. To the examples there cited, add: οὐδὲν
γὰρ. ἔστ᾽ ἀλλ᾽ (ἄλλ᾽, Brunck) ἢ κοάξ, Arist. Ran. 227. ἀργύριον μὲν οὐκ ἔχω, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ
μικρόν τι, Xen. An. 7,7,53. ὡς δ᾽ οὐχὶ φιλεῖ σ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἔστ᾽ εὔνους, τοῦτ᾽ αὐτό σε πρῶτα
διδάξω, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ διὰ τοῦτ᾽ αὖθ᾽ ὁτίη σου τῆς ἀνθρακιᾶς ἀπολαύει, Arist. Hq. 779. μηδαμοῦ
ἀλλόθι --- ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἐκεῖ (PL). μηδαμῶς ἄλλως --- ἀλλ᾽ ἢ --- (Isoer). In questions
implying negation: τίς ἂν εἰς ἄλλο τι ἀποβλέψας ἢ δειλὴν ἢ ἀνδρείαν πόλιν εἴποι, ἀλλ᾽
# εἰς τοῦτο τὸ μέρος; Pl. Rep. 429. τίνος ἕνεκα κἄν τις --- fan ἀλλ᾽ ἢ τῶν τοιούτων
ἡδονῶν ἕνεκα; Pl.
Sometimes ἀλλ᾽ ἤ results from confusion of οὐκ --- ἀλλά with the elliptical οὐδὲν
ἄλλο (γίγνεται, ἄς.) if. Thus, οὐ δ᾽ οἵδε γ᾽ εἷλκον οὐδὲν ᾿Αργεῖοι πάλαι, ἀλλ᾽ ἢ κατεγέ-
λων τῶν ταλαιπωρουμένων = οὐδὲ εἷλκον ἀλλὰ κατεγέλων, and οὐδὲν ἐποίουν ἄλλο ἢ
κατεγέλων, Arist. Pac. 476. μή μοι μυρίους μηδὲ διςμυρίους ξένους, μηδὲ τὰς ἐπιστολι-
μαίους ταύτας δυνάμεις, ἀχλ᾽ ἢ τῆς πόλεως ἔσται, Dem. Phil. 45, 19, which Kriiger
explains as a union of the two constructions, an army must consist, not of merce-
naries, nor —, but of citizens, and, not of mercenaries, &c., nor of other than
citizens, = μηδὲ λέγε ἄλλας δυνάμεις ἢ τῆς πόλεως.
ἀλλά without ἤ : οὔτι μοι αἴτιος ἄλλος, ἀλλὰ τοκῆε δύω (Hom.). ἔπαισε δ᾽ αὐτόχειρ νιν
οὔτις ἀλλ᾽ ἐγώ, Soph. Gid. 1. 186. (ἀλλ᾽ ἤ is colloquial, therefore does not occur in
Tragedy.) ἐν δὲ τῷ μέσῳ ἄλλη μὲν πόλις οὐδεμία οὔτε φιλία, οὔτε “Ἑλληνίς, ἀλλὰ
Θρᾷκες καὶ Βιθυνοί, Xen. An. 6, 2 (al. 4), 2. μηδένα ἕτερον εἶναι τὸν Νικομήδου φονέα
ἀλλ᾽ ᾿Δρίσταρχον, Dem. Mid. 554. And in interrogation: ἢ ἔχετέ τι ἄλλο τέλος
λέγειν, εἰς ὃ ἀποβλέψαντες αὐτὰ ἀγαθὰ καλεῖτε, ἀλλὰ (Steph. ex conj. ἀλλ᾽ 77) ἡδονάς
τε καὶ λύπας, Pl. Prot. 354.
ἤ without ἀλλ᾽ : τί ποιῶν ἢ εὐωχούμενος ἐν Θετταλίᾳ; PI. Crito, 53 E. ἀλλὰ τί
οὖν τούτων ἐστὶν αἴτιον, ἢ ὅτι —; Xen. Cicon. 3,3. σκοπῶ εἰ ἄρα τι ἐστὶ τοῖς θεοῖς
ἔργον, ἣ ἀνθρώπους θεραπεύειν, Xen. Mem. 4. 8, 9 (meaning, that he inclines to think
that the gods have no (other) work than —).
7, or, than.
The original force of this particle (radically cognate with ve, ve-2, and possibly a
mutilated form of the relative—comp. the use of the Lat. gwam in comparison), is
how, in what manner, as, in correlation (comp. ἢ pev — ἢ δέ, ἠδέ, ὃ 242), but always
with the notion of other-ness : i) ἐγώ, ἢ σύ, prop. other-how I, other-how thou. Hence
In alternatives : ἤ -- ἤ is both aut — aut and vel — vel : ἢ ἀμφαδὸν ἠὲ κρυφηδόν.
ἢ τέον ἢ Aiavtos — γέρας, ἢ ᾿Οδυσῆος. Often the first ἤ is omitted, then ἤ = aut
etiam, usually with a descensus a majore ad minus, viz. to something conceived as
less likely: ἕξομεν κλέος καλῶς θανόντες ἢ καλῶς σεσωσμένοι, having nobly died,
or — if that be possible — nobly saved, Eur. Or. 1145. ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐκεῖνος ᾧετο δεῖν
ἀποθνήσκειν ἢ νικᾶν, aut, si fieri posset, vincere. — In Attic, the disjunction is often
rendered stronger by rou (usually followed by a ye) attached to the first ἤ, rarely to
the second: ἤτοι ὅλου τοῦ εἴδους ἢ μέρους (Pl.). ἤτοι ἐπιστάμενοί ye — ἢ ὕστερον
ἀναμιμνήσκονται (Ῥ1.). ἤτοι πρότερόν γε ἢ ὕστερον (᾿].). And without the first 7:
ἔοικας, ἣν δ᾽ ἐγώ, ἤτοι ἡμῶν γε οὐδὲν κήδεσθαι, Like enough, said I (viz. that you do
think so), or else (sure enough) you don’t care for us, Pl. Rep. 344 (Stallb. 2m 7.).
When the first member of the alternative is not expressed, 7 = or (else), alias,
alioquin. αὐτὴ μὲν ἐκμοχθοῦσα κερκίσιν πέπλους, ἢ γυμνὸν ἕξω σῶμα (= as I must
APPENDIX. |
[§
281.]
282.
283.
284.
285.
§
280.
236 Appendix on the Particles. [ἢ 284—286.
either do this, or else —), Eur. El. 306. τοῦτο δὲ οὔτ᾽ ἀπόλλυσθαι οὔτε γίγνεσθαι
δυνατόν, ἢ (supply ἀναγκαῖον, or else needs must —) πάντα τε οὐρανὸν πᾶσάν τε γένεσιν
συμπεσοῦσαν στῆναι, Pl. Phedr. 245. (Cic. renders it, vel concidat omne celum
omnisque natura. See further, § 186, R.)
In alternative (double) questions, Hom. has 7 — ἤ —; (rare in Attic poetry):
in later writers, especially Attic, πότερον --- ἤ —; or the particle is omitted in the
first clause, see § 199 ὁ: and on dpa — ἤ —; tb. R.: also on ἄλλο τι ἤ, ἄλλο τι ἢ
οὐ, ib. Ὁ. On ἤ --- ἤ for ei — ἤ, in dependent questions, 7b. c, R. 1. Sometimes,
after a question put quite generally and indefinitely, a second is put with 7 (am) with
corrective or restrictive force = or, which I suppose is nearer to the truth —?
πόθεν ἥκει ; ἣ δῆλον ὅτι ἐξ ἀγορᾶς ; (Pl.) ἀλλὰ τίς σοι διηγεῖτο; ἢ αὐτὸς Σωκράτης,
Pl. Conv. 173 (Stallb. zz 1. and Elmsl. on Soph. Cid. C. 66).
Rem. When the second member of the disjunctive question is negative, this is
expressed by ἢ οὐ, if the predicate, and by ἢ μή if only a part of the sentence,
is negatived.
In comparison, after comparatives, and words implying comparison or opposition,
ἄλλος, ἕτερος, ἐναντίος, &e., ἤ = than (quam, Germ. als, both illustrating the con-
nexion of # with the relative: our “than” is demonstrative, = “then”); see
§ 89, sqq. On μᾶλλον ἢ od, ὃ 89, R. 2, ef. Herm. on Soph. Aj. 1260, where it is
explained, that the last of the exx. above given (Thue. 3, 36) is equivalent to οὐ τοὺς
αἰτίους ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον τὴν πόλιν ὅλην. --- (This union of two constructions resembles
that which we have noticed above in οὐδεὶς ἄλλος — ἀλλ᾽ ἢ.)
ov and μή.
For the distinction and use of these particles, see ὃ 200 sqq., and the §§ there
referred to (cf. Index) :! on οὐδέ, μηδέ, οὔτε, μήτε, see ὃ 208. 216. 229 ο.
All the applications of μή may be derived from the prohibitive.
Μὴ τύπτε, μὴ τύψῃς. It is not, on the whole, indifferent which form is used.
“Μή with imperative, enjoins the giving over something that a person is doing (or
thinking of doing): with aor. subj., the not beginning it is ordered. Moreover, the
present is used of a continued act, as μὴ βάλλετε : the aor. of a quickly transient,
momentary act, μὴ βάλῃς, when a single throwing of the weapon is in question.”
Hermann. ad Viger. § 268, p. 809. The reason why the imperative phrase (in second
pers.) must always be μὴ τύπτε, not μὴ τύψον, is, because the direct actual prohibi-
tion of a thing prohibits it, not as a single momentary act, but once for all. In μὴ
τύπτε, μή expresses the prohibiting, τύπτε the act prohibited: in μὴ Towns, there is
an intermediate verbal notion, viz. an imperative: 6. @. μὴ λέγε, μὴ ἐννόει, μὴ βούλου,
or the like (or rather, the μή itself is the expression of such a verbal notion, “I will
not have it,” &c.), on which the subjunctive, as a form of the future, is dependent :
e.g. “do not let the thought come into your mind, that you will strike.” And because
1 Οὐ appears to be cognate with αὖ, ἀ-πό, ab, aut, haud, therefore primarily
denotes separation or removal, reversal or contrast. Μή, although it coincides to ἃ
considerable extent with me, appears to have a different origin from that particle
(Sanscrit md, Persian me, both prohibitive). It seems to stand on the same line with
the pronoun of the first person, pe, and with μά, peis, μέν, &c.: but perhaps its
peculiar force, as the particle of subjective denial, is best derived from the dabial
expression of rejection, dislike, impatience, &c., possibly with some notion of the
first pers. pronoun in it, “ Z will not have it,” or the like.
[APPENDIX.
§ 287—289.] ov. Μη: 237
such a form of prohibition is more distinctly related to the future, therefore (cf.
§ 128) the subj. aor. is used, not the subj. present. (Besides, μὴ τύπτῃς would be a
circuitous way of expressing what is better said by μὴ τύπτε) But μὴ τυψάτω is
allowable, ὃ 142, R. 1, though rare: for here, as in μὴ τυπτέτω, the verb has relation
to a suppressed imperative, just as we are obliged to express the third pers. impera-
tive by the verb let: μὴ (let — not) τυπτέτω (strike).
The construction of μή with the indicative and subj. in independent sentences is
always to be referred to this principle of an unexpressed imperative. Thus in the
question μὴ γράψεις ; “do not say (think, &e.), you will write” = “ surely you will
not write?” (μή introduces a question to which we wish, but are not confident of
receiving, an answer in the negative: with μῶν, we express a confidence that the
answer will be,“no”). But λέξεις δὲ μηδὲν τῶν ἐμοὶ δεδογμένων, Hur. Med. 804: but
you will (not) tell—do not think of it! —aught of what I have resolved upon ; an asser-
tion having the force of an express prohibition. ’AAN οὖν mpopnvicers ye τοῦτο μηδενί,
Soph. Ant. 84, with the same emphasis of entreaty or dehortation expressed by the
following μηδενί, do not think of doing so(no, not) to anybody! The principle is the
same for the subjunctive, which is in its origin only another form of the future:! but
in the usage of the language, μηδὲν λέξης, μηδενὶ προμηνύσῃς has come to be merely
the expression of a prohibition, as above explained; whereas the fut. indic. asserts
that which will be. Καὶ τἀμὰ τεύχη μήτ᾽ ἀγωνάρχαι τινὲς θήσουσ᾽ ᾿Αχαιοῖς μήθ᾽ ὁ
λυμεὼν ἐμός, Soph. Aj. 569 (“admodum notabilis hee ratio particula cum fut. indic.
posite,” Hilendt.; but the explanation is obvious on the principle here given, viz.),
“and as for my arms, do not imagine (that) either —:” it is an emphatic negation. —
So with subj. μὴ δοκῶμεν, and let us not think, where μή = the imperative “ do not
let.” ὦ Eeivot, μὴ δῆτ᾽ ἀδικηθῶ, Soph. did. C. 172.
With the proper optative, e.g. μὴ viv ὀναίμην, Soph. Gad. T. 644. μὴ δῆτα ---
ἴδοιμι ταύτην ἡμέραν, 2b. 830, the suitableness of μή, as expression of not wishing, 18
obvious.
With the adj., as also infin. and particip. of the verb, “ μή; non reapse negat sed
jubet cogitari negatum,” Frank. Diss. de Partic. negant,1.,p.8. Τὸ μὴ καλόν, “ the
(do not call, think it, &c.) good :” αἰσχρὸν (τὸ) μὴ βοηθεῖν (if one does not —), μὴ
βοηθῶν, 6 μὴ βοηθῶν. See ὃ 205, 6. For μή with inf. after verbs of denying, &c.,
see § 210. Comp. under μὴ ov.)
In sentences dependent on verbs denoting fear, anxiety, consideration, &e. (see
§ 124, and R. 1, 2), the μή is evidently in its place as the expression of not wishing,
and has the same force as.in the independent sentence. φοβοῦμαι μὴ εὑρήσομεν:
without φοβοῦμαι, (do) not (say) we shall find, i.e. 1 hope we shall not: in φοβοῦμαι,
the nature of the unwillingness is expressed: J am afraid (we shall). And so with
the subj., δέδοικα μὴ ἐπιλαθώμεθα. Φροντίζω μὴ κράτιστον 7. — Hence the absence of
δέδοικιι, &e., is not necessarily elliptical. Μὴ ἀγροικότερον ἢ τὸ ἀληθὲς εἰπεῖν, do not
say it is, = I fear it may be. — In the usage of the language, φοβοῦμαι μὴ ἔστι 15,
LT fear itis: φοβοῦμαι μὴ 7, [fear it may turn out to be: φοβοῦμαι μὴ ἔσται, L fear (1
think with fear) ἐέ certainly will be. — The same principle holds for the optative
1 Thus, Od. 16, 437, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται, οὐδὲ γένηται (cf. Pl. Rep. 472,
οὔτε yap γίγνεται, οὔτε γέγονεν, οὐδὲ οὖν μή ποτε γένηται) ὃς κεν Τηλεμάχῳ σῷ υἱέϊ
χεῖρας ἐποίσει : comp. Od. 6, 201, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνὴρ διερὸς βροτύς, οὐδὲ γένηται, ὅς
κεν Φαιήκων ἀνδρῶν ἐς γαῖαν ἵκηται.
APPENDIX. |
290.
202.
238 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 290—293.
under the same circumstances, ὃ 131, e. g. ἔδεισαν μὴ προσαγάγοιεν = the preteritive
enunciation of φοβοῦνται μὴ προσαγάγωσιν.
With ὁρᾷν, and the like, μή seems to have more interrogative force. ὋὉρῶμεν, μὴ
Νικίας οἴεται, you do not say N. thinks? (surely he does not think ?) let us see whether
he does. “Opa μὴ τίθης, see whether you are putting : ὅρα μὴ τιθῆς, see whether it may
not turn out that you are putting: ὅρα μὴ θήσεις, see whether you will be putting.
In sentences of intention, ὃ 122, iva, ὅπως, &e., μή, and object-sentences after
verbs of endeavour, &c., ὃ 123, the μή has the same force as in the prohibitive sen-
" tence, e.g. τὴν γέφυραν λῦσαι ὡς μὴ διαβῆτε, the primary sentence being, “ My
διαβῶσιν, let them not cross.”
The use of μή in conditional (εἰ μή), ὃ 202, temporal (ὅταν, ὁπότε pn), and, gene-
rally, relative sentences (ὅς, ὅσος, &c., ds av, &e., μη), ib. and 203, is determined by
the thought, “ no notion of,” “not to be supposed,” or the like. Thus, εἰ μὴ δώσου-
ow = “in case there be no notion of their giving ;” but εἰ οὐ δώσουσιν, “in case of
their not-giving:” i.e. the difference is the same as that between μὴ δώσω = don’t
suppose I shall give,and οὐ δώσω, I shall not give: of which the former is obviously
more suitable to the hypothetical form of statement with εἰ, ἐάν. Hence also with
ὅς, ὅσος, Ke., ὅτε, ὁπότε, Kc., the principle is that μή is used when there is room for
supposition in each case that the thing does (will, &ec.) occur, or that it does (will,
ὅς.) not, but the supposition of its occurrence is negatived. Thus, ὃς οὐκ οἶδεν,
“‘a person who (as matter of fact) knows not,” 6s μὴ οἶδεν, “who (as matter of
necessary supposition) knows not:” in the one case, the εἰδέναι is denied directly ;
in the other, there is implied a previous consideration, μὴ οἶδεν, “ do not suppose he
knows,” whence ὃς μὴ οἶδεν, “ the sort of person that does not know:” ἃ μὴ οἶδα,
οὐδὲ οἴομαι et évat, “ what I know not,” = “if there are things that I do not know,”
or, “say I do not know them.” And just so with ὅτε and other adv. forms of the
relative. — With ἄν (ὃς ἄν, ὅταν, &c.) the negation is necessarily μή, in virtue of
the notion of contingency conveyed by that particle.
In § 124, R. 4, the use of οὐ μή with second pers. fut. indic. denoting peremptory
prohibition, is distinguished from that (td. R. 3) which, with subjunct. or also fut.
ΤΠ indic., expresses a strong negation in the form of an assertion. In the latter, the py
is usually explained as referring to a suppressed verb or verbal notion, 6. g. δέδοικα,
δέος ἐστί, which is negatived by od: comp. the full expression οὐ yap ἢν δεινὸν μὴ
ἁλῷ ποτε, Hdt. 1,84, with καὶ τῶνδ᾽ ἀκούσας οὔ τι μὴ ληφθῶ δολῷ : while the former,
e.g. οὐ μὴ ληρήσεις, is explained as, “ will you not not-trifle Ῥ᾿᾿ = “ will you not have
done with your nonsense?” But both phrases are referable to the same origin, and
(considered in themselves) admit alike of the interrogative or of the assertive notion,
i. e. on the one hand, od μὴ ληρήσεις may be, “no, don’t think vou will (shall) talk
nonsense,” a union of οὐ ληρήσεις, with μὴ ληρήσεις (= μὴ ληρήσῃς) : on the other,
ov τι μὴ ληφθῶ (= ληφθήσομαι), “shall I not-be-taken?” i.e. “shall I not be safe
from being taken?” (Cf. Herm. Cens. Elmsl. in Hur. Med.) In the practice of
the language, however, the ov μή of prohibition with second pers. is best understood
interrogatively ; in other cases, ov μή is assertive. Thus, in the exx. given in § 124,
R. 4, and Hur. Bacch. 340, οὐ μὴ προσοίσεις χεῖρα, βακχεύσεις δ᾽ ἰών, μηδ᾽ ἐξομόρξει
μωρίαν τὴν σὴν ἐμοί; where the groundwork of the sentence is οὐ βακχεύσεις ; will
you not go, play the Bacchanal? into which μὴ προσοίσεις χεῖρα, do not imagine you
shall lay your hand upon me, is inserted, and μηδ᾽ e€., &e., is added as opposition. But
in Soph. id. C. 173, οὔτοι μή ποτέ σ᾽ ἐκ τῶνδ᾽ ἑδράνων, ὦ γέρον, ἄκοντά τις ἄξει, the
[APPENDIX.
§ 294, 295.] οὐ μή. μὴ οὐ. 230
interrogative form is evidently not intended, and the sense is, “70, assuredly ! do not
imagine, do not fear, &c. (= μή) that any shall carry thee off, ὅο. The usage of
the language would rather require ἄξῃ (ἀγάγῃ), but the thought prominent at last in
the speaker's mind is οὐκ ἄξει : hence the future indic. = “do not imagine that the
thing shall be ; ἐξέ shall not be.” So Cid. C. 848, οὔκουν ποτ᾽ ἐκ τούτοιν γε μὴ σκήπ-
Tpow ἔτι ὁδοιπορήσεις —, where, though the verb is in the second person, οὐ — μή is
assertive, not prohibitive ; you shall not have these — do not imagine it — as props
in your wayfarings, and the assertion is stronger than with ὁδοιπορήσῃς. Soph. El.
1052, ἀλλ᾽ εἴσιθ᾽" οὔ σοι μὴ μεθέψομαί ποτε, οὐδ᾽ ἣν σφόδρ᾽ ἱμείρουσα τοῦτο τυγχάνῃς,
the fut. indic., as in the preceding instance, because the action is negatived for all
future time. Arist. Ran. 508, μὰ τὸν ᾿Απόλλω, οὐ μή σ᾽ ἐγὼ περιύψομαι ἀπελθόντα,
an asseveration beginning in the usual form, μὰ τὸν ᾿Α. οὐ, and strengthened by the
prohibition of imagining the contrary.1—In the dependent sentence, ἐθέσπισεν — ὡς
ov μή ποτε πέρσοιεν, Soph. Phil. 607, represents οὐ μὴ ποτε πέρσουσι of oratio recta.
So ace. c. inf., σαφῶς yap εἶπε Τειρεσίας, οὐ μή ποτε σοῦ τήνδε γῆν οἰκοῦντος εὖ πράξειν
πόλιν, Hur, Phen. 1606.
The usage of μὴ ov is derived from that of μή prefixed to a verb negatived
by ov.
In the independent sentence, this combination does not occur with the indicative,
i.e. not μὴ οὐ γράφεις ; you do not say you are not writing? but only μῶν οὐ : thus,
ἐν οἷς Ti χρῆν ποιεῖν ἐμέ; μῶν οὐχ ὅπερ ἐποίουν; Soph. Ud. C.1727. But with the
subjunctive in ἃ form of sentence which may be considered as elliptical (cf. § 289),
we have μὴ οὖν, ἔφη, οὐ δύνωμαι eyo... ἐξηγήσασθαι; you do not say I am not
to be able —? Xen. Mem. 4, 2,12. ἡμῖν δὲ... μὴ οὐδὲν ἄλλο σκεπτέον ἢ, where
the supposed ellipsis is ὅρα, Pl. Crito, 48. —~ In the dependent sentence, δέδοικα μὴ
οὐκ ἀποθάνῃ, ἐδεδ. μὴ οὐκ ἀποθάνοι, δέδοικα μὴ οὐ τέθνηκεν, require no further ex-
planation.
With the inf., see § 211, comp. ὃ 210. Here observe that (1) οὐκ ἀρνοῦμαι οὕτως
εἶναι represents the simple assertion οὕτως ἔστιν, with negation of denial, οὐκ ἀρνοῦ-
pa. (2) In ἀρνοῦμαι μὴ οὕτως εἶναι, there is a union of ἀρνοῦμαι οὕτως εἶναι with μὴ
οὕτως ἔστιν, you do not say that it is so? or with φημὶ μὴ οὕτως εἶναι : the phrase is
therefore stronger than (1), viz. = both J deny that it is so, and, I have no notion
that it is so; and, the whole phrase being negatived, οὐκ a. μὴ οὕτως εἶναι = I do
not deny that τέ is so, and, I would not have you imagine that it is not so, which is
equivalent to contendo ita esse. (3) Lastly, οὐκ ἀρνοῦμαι μὴ οὐχ οὕτως εἶναι may be
referred to a union of οὐκ ἀρνοῦμαι οὕτως εἶναι and μὴ οὐχ οὕτως ἔστιν, you do not say
ππππ -π-πππππππππ ἕππππππ-͵--͵οιᾳΨ,σπ--ς-οσι-σοῪπ τς τ ----:.-- - ἼὙΘΘΘΘΘ Ὁ
1 The pres. subj. is rare: οὐ μὴ δύνωμαι (Xen.), and οὐ μὴ οἷός 7 ἧς (Ῥ1.), are not
conclusive instances, since these verbs have no aor., and, besides, δύνασθαι and οἷόν
τ᾽ εἶναι have in themselves the future signification which is required in this phrase.
In Soph. Gid. C. 1023, the text is uncertain: obs οὐ μή ποτε χώρας φυγόντες τῆςδ᾽
ἐπεύχωνται, al. ἐπεύξωνται, for the ἐπεύχονται of the MSS. Ellendt receives ἐπεύ-
χωνται, in the sense, “are now giving thanks to the gods,” viz. “because Theseus
surmises the persons to be already taken: with ἐπεύξονται or ἐπεύξωνται, he would
imply, that they would be taken ;” and so Hermann in 1. ; but Schneidewin reads,
ods ov δή ποτε, and ἐπεύχονται. As regards the principle, there is no reason why the
vulg. should not be retained, viz. μή and ἐπεύχονται, “ they are not — never imagine
it ! — giving thanks —.”
APPENDIX. |
293.]
294.
295.
[§
295.]
240 Appendix on the Particles. [§ 296, 297.
that it is not so? In this construction, the leading verb must be expressly or
virtually (by interrogation) negatived, or must contain a negative notion, δεινόν,
αἰσχρόν, αἰσχύνη. &e. (cf. § 511 b): thus, οὔτε μὴ μεμνῆσθαι. δύναμαι αὐτοῦ, οὔτε
μεμνημένος μὴ οὐκ ἐπαινεῖν (Xen. Apol. fin.), where μὴ “μεμνῆσθαι is the necessary
Infinitive form of οὐ μέμνημαι, and μὴ οὐκ ἐπαινεῖν of μὴ οὐκ ἐπαινέσω : you do not
imagine I am not to praise him? Impossible (not to do 50).}
With the participle, μὴ ov (rare in Attic prose, ὃ 211 ὁ) will be found to involve the
same relation to μὴ ov with the indicative = = you do not suppose, ὅτ, that — not —?
Thus, OUK ἂν ἀξιόπιστος εἴην μὴ οὐχὶ πρότερον αὐτὸς φανεὶς οἷός εἰμι: with ou only,
this sentence, reduced to its simplest form, is οὐ mp. φανείς ----, οὐκ a&., “a person
not first showing himself what he is, is a person not worthy of credit :” with μή only,
οὐκ a. ἂν εἴην, μὴ mp. φανείς : both expressions are united upon the basis of the
expression μὴ ov mp. ἐφάνην, you do notsuppose I have not first showed myself ? so that
the whole is not simply = without first showiny myself, which would be sufficiently
expressed by μή alone, but together with this, as at 15 not to be supposed that I should
not. So Soph. did. T. 13, δυτάλγητος γὰρ ἂν εἴην τοιάνδε μὴ οὐ κατοικτείρων ἕδραν,
without οὐ,2 the sense would be, εἰ μὴ κατοικτείροιμι, with it Susahy. must be
resolved into a negative expression, and we have then οὐ κατοικτείρων, οὐκ εὐάλγητος :
οὐκ εἴην ἂν εὐάλγ. μὴ κατοικτείρων : and, as the basis of their union, μὴ οὐ “κατοικτείρω,
you do not imagine that 1 do not tak ve pity | ? Soph. Cid. C.359, ἥκεις yap « ov κενή γε,
τοῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ σαφῶς ἐξοῖδα, μὴ οὐχὶ δεῖμ᾽ ἐμοὶ φέρουσά τι: the negation is οὐ κενή, and this
is taken up and enlarged upon in the last clause, which, however, is formed as if the
negation were ov x ἥκεις: thou comest not empty — (not) without being the bearer — I
am sure it cannot be otherwise — of some terror to me. — With ellipsis of the {par-
ticiple, ai πόλεις Aas καὶ χαλεπαὶ λαβεῖν αἱ τῶν Φωκέων, μὴ οὐ χρόνῳ καὶ πολιορκίᾳ
(Dem. in § 211, ο). The ellipsis is ἁλοῦσαι, or the like, and χαλεπαὶ λαβεῖν = οὐκ
εὐάλωτοι, and the explanation 1 is the same as in the former instances. — With the
gen. absolute : : εἰνάτῃ δὲ οὐκ ἐξελεύσεσθαι ἔφασαν μὴ ov πλήρεος ἐύντος τοῦ κύκλον,
Hdt. 6, 106. The elements are, οὐ πλ. ἐστιν ὁ k., οὐκ ἐξελευσόμεθα: οὐκ ἐξ. μὴ πλ.
ἐόντος τοῦ κι : μὴ ἐξελευσόμεθα, οὐ TA. ἐ. τοῦ k., “do not imagine we shall go out
with the moon not at the full.”
ἄν, and enclitic κε, κεν (not Attic).
“Av is probably cognate with the preposition ἀνά (Hermann, de Part. “Av, Opuse.
t. iv., makes ἐβουλόμην ἂν εἰ ἐδυνάμην = ἐβουλόμην ava τοῦτο εἰ ἐδυνάμην, secundum
hoc); and κε, κεν with κατά, therefore also with καί (Hermann), and pre-eminently
with the enelitic τις in the form kos (κου = που, κως = tows). — In the earlier
1 «© Per μή certo, per μὴ ov dubitantius negatur,’ Hermann. ad Vig. p.797. But
in many places, the meaning is rather that of wondering or indignant repudiation of
the opposite notion, e.g. οὐδ᾽ ἐθέλω προλιπεῖν τόδε, μὴ οὐ τὸν ἐμὸν στοναχεῖν πατέρ᾽
ἄθλιον, Soph. El. 1951; 1 will not forego or desert this sad duty — you do not
imagine that I should not bewail, &c.? Hence (as H. also suggests) its force may
be rendered by mirum foret, ni —.
2 Omitted by Schneidewin on grounds which seem to be insufficient, since,
according to the explanation in the text, the οὐ before κατοικτ. does not serve for
ss ey external correlation ” to the ov involved 1 in the primary clause. In Cid.
T. 221, ov yap ἂν μακρὰν ἴχνευον αὐτός, μὴ οὐκ ἔχων τι σύμβολον, the μή is better
omitted (with Schn.), since (Ed. does not mean to allege that he has a clue, and
οὐκ ἔ. τι σ. carries on the notion of αὐτός, “ left to my self alone.”
[APPENDIX.
§ 298, 290.] ἄν. κεν. 241
(not Attic) Greek, κεν and ἄν often appear in correlation (cf. re — καί, § 222), the
former in the protasis, the latter in the apodosis, εἴπερ γάρ κε BAeto —, οὐκ av — πέσοι
βέλος. IZ. 13, 288, but often so that the apodosis stands first: thus, αὐτὸν δ᾽ ἂν πύματόν
με κύνες πρώτῃσι θύρῃσιν ὠμησταὶ ἐρύουσιν, ἐπεί κέ TIS — ἐκ θυμὸν ἕληται, I7. 22, 66.
ὡς ἂν ἔπειτ᾽ ἀπὸ σεῖο ---- οὐκ ἐθέλοιμι λείπεσθ', οὐδ᾽ εἴ κέν μοι ὑποσταίη θεὸς αὐτός, I. 9,
444. The force of kev — ἄν is, in some (or, any) way (sort, case, Ke.) —, in that
way (sort, case, &c.). More frequently κεν appears in both clauses (ef. re — τε, § 227):
εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι = if in any way — then in some way. ὁ
δέ κεν κεχολώσεται ὅν κεν ἵκωμαι. But the one or the other particle is often omitted :
αἴ κ᾽ αὐτὸν γνώω νημερτέα πάντ᾽ ἐνέποντα, ἕσσω μιν χλαῖναν. And very often the pro-
tasis or condition to which ἄν or κεν refers, is not expressed. Thus, πληθὺν δ᾽ οὐκ
ἂν ἐγὼ μυθήσομαι οὐδ᾽ ὀνομήνω, viz. (εἴ Ke —) ‘if I try,” or, “if another can :” καί κέ
τις ὧδ᾽ ἐρέει, viz. “(if in any wise so be,) then may-hap —.” “Av, and in apodosis
κεν, always thus looks back to a supposition expressed or understood.
But ἄν, though it properly belongs to the apodosis, is often drawn into the pro-
tasis, viz. with the particle εἰ in ἐάν, ἤν, with ὅς, and its adverbial forms (ὃς ἄν, ὅταν,
ὡς ἄν, &e.); also εὖτ᾽ ἄν, ἐπεὶ ἄν, and ἐπήν, Ke. In all these cases, the ἄν, together
with its verb, is apodosis to a suppressed condition: thus, ὄψεαι ἢν ἐθελῃσθα = thou
shalt see, if, when the time comes, then thou shalt be willing (i.e. if in the event it
shall appear that thou art willing). So with the relative forms. Ovs ἂν ἴδῃς κάλε-
σον, = whom, if so and so (e.g. it there be any to be seen), you shall see... ὡς ἂν
ἐγὼν εἴπω, πειθώμεθα = in what way (whatever the way may be,) I shall speak,
or, in what way (supposing that I speak,) I shall speak : i.e. the groundwork of the
sentence is, if [ speak, I shall speak so (εἴ κ᾿ εἴπω, τὼς ἂν εἴπω), and this thrown into
the relative form becomes ὡς ἂν εἴπω. So ἐκ yap Ορέσταο τίσις €ooetal. ... , ὅπποτ᾽
ἂν ἡβήσῃ : the groundwork, “when the time shall come (ὅτε kev —), τότ᾽ ἂν HBnoy,”
in the relative form, ὅπποτ᾽ ἂν ἡβήση. Or, as all relatives imply correlation, the
relative with ἄν may be explained as condensed from demonstr. with ἄν together
with relative with κεν, viz. τότ᾽ ἂν (ἔσσεται) ὅτε κεν ἡβήσῃ. So Ll. 15, 232, τόφρα
yap οὖν οἱ ἔγειρε μένος μέγα, Opp ἂν ᾿Αχαιοὶ φεύγοντες νῆάς τε καὶ “ENAnstovtoy
ἵκωνται = τόφρα ἂν (ἐγερεῖς) .. . ., pa κεν ἵκωνται. ---- Hence, where ἄν appears in
the protasis, the apodosis rarely (perhaps never) has kev: i.e. it would be difficult to
produce a sentence of the form ἢν δὲ μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι. In νῦν γάρ
x’ ἝἝκτορ᾽ ἕλοις, ἐπεὶ ἂν μάλα τοὶ σχεδὸν ἔλθοι, L1. 9, 304, the κεν in the first clause
corresponds with an unexpressed εἴ κε θέλοις, εἴ κεν ἔλθοι, or the like, not with ἐπεὶ
ἄν in the latter clause, which resolves itself into some such correlation as διὰ τοῦτο
ἂν (sc. ἕλοις) ὅτι κεν μ. σχ. ἔλθοι.
Sometimes ἄν and κεν appear in the same clause: thus, ἵσταντο φάλαγγες. ἃς οὔτ᾽
ἄν κεν "Apns ὀνόσαιτο μετελθών, οὔτε κ᾿ ᾿Αθηναίη, Il. 18, 127, where ἄν (see next
paragraph) is attracted by οὔτε, and the sentence may be resolved either into ταὶ ἂν
ἔσονται (ai φ.) ἃς οὔτε κεν "Ap., οὔτε κ᾿ AO., or, independently of the relative, οὔτε, εἴ
κεν ΓΆρης ἔλθοι (or ἐθέλοι, ὅζο., or εἴ kev” Apn λέγοις, Ke.),”Apns ὀνόσαιτο ἄν. (See
other instances under ὄφρα.)
With respect to position in the sentence, κε never recedes far from the beginning.
Ei δ᾽ ᾿οδυσεὺς ἔλθοι —, αἶψά ke — ἀποτίσεται, Od. 17,540. ἀλλ᾽ ἤτοι viv μέν κε
νεμεσσηθεὶς ὑποείξω, 11. 15,211. καί κέ τις ὧδ᾽ ἐρέει, 11. 4, 176 (not καί τίς χ᾽ ὧδ᾽ ἐρέει,
like μαθὼν δέ τις ἂν ἐρεῖ, Pind. Nem. 7, 681). But ἄν, besides its attraction by the
relative or conditional word, though its proper place is with the predicate, usually
1 Hermann remarks, that ἢ κε μέγ᾽ ὠμώξειεν ὁ Πελοπίδης ᾿Αγαμέμνων, Hdt. 7, 159,
APPENDIX. | R
[§
297-]
208.
299.
[9
290.]
242 Appendix on the Particles. [ὁ 300.
attaches itself to the emphatic word of the clause. Thus, πατρὸς δὲ καὶ μητρὸς οὐκέτι
μευ ζωόντων, ἀδελφεὸς ἂν ἄλλος οὐδενὶ τρόπῳ γένοιτο, Hdt. 3, 119 (see ὃ 139 b).
Hence it likes to attach itself to words by which the simple form of the sentence is
altered, such as οὐκ, οὔτ᾽, οὐδ᾽, οὔποτε, Ke., τίς, τί, πῶς, dpa, &Ke., adverbs of time,
place, manner, such as ἐνταῦθα, τότε, τάχα, ἴσως, εἰκότως, ῥᾳδίως, ῥᾷστα, μάλιστα,
μόλις, σχολῇ, ἡδέως (ἄσμενος), σφόδρα, καί (kav, etiam, vel), &c., and the inferential
οὖν, τί οὖν ἄν τις εἴποι ---, the principle being the same in all, viz. that that term of
the apodosis which is to have the greatest prominence in reference to the conditional
sentence (expressed or unexpressed) draws the ἄν after it, because ἄν has the same
reference. For other remarkable attractions (hyperbaton) of ἄν, see ὃ 139 b, R.
For the usage of the particle”Av. see the Index. — In the cultivated Attic prose,
the use of ἄν with fut. indicative (Homer, Pindar, and lyrical parts of Tragedy) is
rejected, partly in consequence of the rejection of κε, partly because the provinces
of the indicative future and the subjunctive are more clearly discriminated (whence
also the omission of ἄν with the subj. in conditional and relative sentences, which is
frequent in the early and extra-Attic Greek, is rare in Attic, e. g. εἰ ποιήσῃς, ὅτε λέξῃ-ς).
Thus, αὐτὸν δ᾽ ἂν πύματόν pe κύνες πρώτησι θύρησιν ὠμησταὶ ἐρύουσιν, ἐπεί κέ TLS —
ἐκ θυμὸν ἕληται, Il. 22, 66, an apodosis with ἄν, followed by its protasis with κε:
here the Attic, rejecting the κε, gives the protasis in the different form, ἐπειδὰν ἕληται"
consequently, the ἄν of the apodosis falls away. In the elliptical sentence, πληθὺν
δ᾽ οὐκ ἂν ἐγὼ μυθήσομαι, where ἄν points to an unexpressed εἴ ce —, e.g. “if I shall
try,” the Attic retaining dy for the like reference uses the optative. In the passages
(of Attic prose) where ἄν appears with fut. indic., there is some negligence of con-
struction. Thus, Pl. Apol. 29, ὡς εἰ Siahevéoipny, ἤδη ἂν ὑμῶν οἱ υἱεῖς ἐπιτηδεύοντες
& Σωκράτης διδάσκει πάντες παντάπασι διαφθαρήσονται (so all the best MSS.): the
writer meant to say, ἤδη ἂν ὑμῶν οἱ υἱεῖς ἐπιτηδεύοιεν ... . . καὶ 7. 7. διαφθαρήσονται,
but, changing the construction, puts the participle in place of the finite mood. The
other two undoubted instances in P/., are Rep. 615, οὐχ ἥκει, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο ;
Phedon. 61, οὐδ᾽ ὁπωςτιοῦν ἄν σοι ἑκὼν εἶναι πείσεται: In both, the irregularity is
caused by the aptness of ἄν to attach itself to οὐδ᾽ and οὖν. So Thue. 2, 80, ῥᾳδίως
ἂν σχόντες --- κρατήσουσι, the adv. ῥᾳδίως drawing ἄν after it, as if the writer had
-meant to say, σχοῖεν, καὶ σχόντες κρατήσουσι. Just so Xen. Cyr. 6, 1, 45, ἄσμενος ἂν
ὃ χ ’ X patn A
πρὸς ἄνδρα οἷος σὺ εἶ ἀπαλλαγήσεται = ἡδέως ἄν, “ he would gladly come forward (or
the like), and will —.” Jb. 7, 5, 21, πολὺ ἂν ἔτι μᾶλλον ἢ viv ἀχρεῖοι ἔσονται =
πολὺ iv — τοῦτο γένοιτο --- ὅτι —. Asch. de f. leg. 196, οὕτω yap ἂν μάλιστα pe-
μνήσομαι καὶ δυνήσομαι εἰπεῖν, = ἂν εἴη, 6r1 —. And in questions: τί mor ἂν ἐκ
τούτων ἐρεῖ; Hur. Bacch. 595. ἄρά γε τοῦτ᾽ ἂν ἐγώ mor ἐπόψομαι; Arist. Nub.
A65. τί ποτ᾽ ἂν ἐρεῖ; “ΖΠεολ. Ctes. 155: here the ἄν does not belong to the verb,
but to an unexpressed optative, λέγοις, φαίης, or the like, followed by ὅτι.
With imperf. and aor. indic., ἄν is always = “in that case,” with reference to a
preceding “if':” εἰ ἐβουλόμην, ἔλεγον av. — οἱ μὲν ὄνοι, ἐπεί τις διώκοι, προδραμόντες ἂν
εἱστήκεσαν (precurrere et deinde restitare solebant, Porson: instead of the vulg. av-
εἰστήκεσαν, for which others ἕστασαν without ἄν), Xen. An. 1, 5, 2, so often as —, (in
that case) they would — (ἄν rei fieri solite): cf. Soph. Phil. 287—295, which is the
locus classicus for this usage.
So in all the usages of dy with optative; μένοιμ᾽ ἄν (viz. εἰ θελοις, or the like).—
was suggested by reminiscence of ἢ κε μέγ᾽ οἰμώξειε γέρων ἱππηλάτα ἸΙηλεύς : else the
speaker would have said, ἢ μέγ᾽ ἂν dp.
[ APPENDIX.
Te Pe
§ 301, 302.] ἄν. 243
But ἄν with subjunctive always accompanies a conditional or relative word; and
: J : =i : 2 eae
here the “in that case” refers to a latent condition, as explained above, whence it
closely accompanies, or even coalesces with, the conjunction or relative. When
with the temporal particles, ἐπεί, ἕως, μέχρι οὗ, &e., the ἄν is omitted, the event is
put by itself without the “in that case,” or “if so be,” involved in ἄν. ἴἙσπεισται
μέχρι οὗ ἐπανέλθωσιν οἱ πρέσβεις (Th.), ἐν τῷ φρονεῖν γὰρ μηδὲν ἥδιστος βίος. ἕως τὸ
χαίρειν καὶ τὸ λυπεῖσθαι μάθῃς (Soph.). (On πρίν, πρὶν ἄν with subj., see § 306.)
It follows from the foregoing principles, that ἄν cannot appear in the indicative
or optative protasis, unless the protasis be itself in some respect conceived as
apodosis to some other proposition. Thus, ἔδωκας ἂν, ἃ ἂν ἤθελες αὐτός, “ you would
have given what (if so and so) you would have wished.” ὁπόταν ἥκοι ἐπὶ τὸ δεῖπνον,
λέγοιμ᾽ av (Xen.) = ὁπότε (if so and so, ἥκοι ἄν.) λέγοιμ᾽ ἄν. (This, however, may be
considered as indirect form of ὁπόταν ἥκῃ, λέξω : comp. the ex. of opt. with ἐπειδάν in
a depend. sentence which has passed from the subj. into the opt., ὃ 132 b, ἢ.) With
ei, the ἄν will usually follow the verb: Ei λῷον καὶ ἄμεινον εἴη ἂν τῇ πόλει οὕτω κατα-
σκευαζομένῃ (Dem.): here the basis of the sentence is, λ. καὶ a. εἴη ἂν τῇ π. οὕτω
κι, = εἰ οὕτω κατασκευάζοιτο, and this whole assertion is made conditional with εἰ.
So from the assertion δοῦλον ἀκρατῆ (= εἰ ἀκρατὴς εἴη) οὐ δεξαίμεθ᾽ av, we have the
condition εἴ ye μηδὲ δοῦλον ἀκρατῆ δεξαίμεθ᾽ ἄν. ᾿Αγαπητόν, εἰ καὶ ἐξ ὑποβολῆς
δύναιντ᾽ ἂν ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ εἶναι (Xen.), the fundamental assertion being καὶ εἰ ὑποβολὴ
εἴη, ἐξ ὑ. δύναιντ᾽ dv. — Ei τοίνυν τοῦτο ἰσχυρὸν ἂν ἦν πρὸς ὑμᾶς τεκμήριον...
κἀμοὶ γενέσθω τεκμήριον, Dem. ὁ. Timoth. 1201, “if this, had it been alleged, would
have been —.” — Οὐ yap ἂν καλῶς ἔχοι, εἰ ὅτι τελέως ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς ἐγένετο, διὰ τοῦτο
οὐδὲ μειόνων γ᾽ ἂν τυγχάνοι ἐπαίνων (Xen.) ; here the assertion μειόνων γ᾽ ἂν τυγχάνοι,
εἰ καὶ δικαίων μὴ τυγχάνοι, negatived by οὐδέ, is put hypothetically with εἰ. Οὗτοι δ᾽
εἰ μὲν εἶχον χείρον᾽ ἂν ἡμῶν, οὐδὲν ἂν ἦν δεινόν (Dem.), i.e. εἰ εἶχον, χείρον᾽ ἂν ἡμῶν
εἶχον, and εἰ χείρον᾽ ἡμῶν εἶχον, οὐδὲν ἂν ἦν δεινόν.
With the final particles, ὡς, ὅπως (poet. éppa) ἄν with subj., refers to a condition
implied either in the protasis or in the apodosis. Thus, ὡς ἂν μάθῃς, ἄκουσον, ut
discas, audi (i. 6. ut discas, si forte discas, Herm.) ; or, and this more frequently, wt
discas, disces autem si audias. This will be evident upon reducing ὡς ἂν μάθης to its
original correlation: ὥς κεν ἀκούσεις, TOs ἂν μαθήσῃ. --- ναυκλήρου τρύποις μορφὴν
δολώσας, ὡς ἂν ἄγνοια προσῇ. Soph. Ph. 129 = ‘that it may be so, as, if I do this, it
will be so;” therefore almost equivalent to so shall —) ἐάσωμεν... ἕκηλον αὐτόν.
ὡς ἂν eis ὕπνον πέσῃ, 1b. 815 = “ that he may —, as he will, if we leave him quiet.”
ὡς ἂν σκοποὶ viv ἦτε τῶν εἰρημένων, Ant. 215 =“ (you say well: do it then;) so
shall ye be —.” Creon not only insists that they shall make this their object (re),
but that it shall result (ἔσεσθε).Σ ἴσθι πᾶν τὸ δρώμενον, ὅπως ἂν εἰδὼς ἧμιν ἀγγείλῃς
σαφῆ, “ acquaint yourself with all that is doing, that you may —,” and, “so shall
you —.” — With the optative, ὡς ἄν, ὅπως av = quomodo, or ut. προμηθοῦνται
ὅπως ἂν εὐδαιμονοίης, derived from the direct interrogation πῶς ἂν (εἰ δυνατὸν εἴη)
εὐδαιμονοίης; ---- Ἵνα with ἄν, subj. or opt., is never final, ὃ 122, πατρὶς γάρ ἐστι πᾶσ᾽
ἵν᾽ ἂν (ubicumque) πράττῃ τις εὖ, Arist.
1 T cannot assent to M.’s statement, ὃ 122, note, that ἄν does not perceptibly alter
the meaning.
2 Comp. ὅπως with fut. in the phrase ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε ἄνδρες ἄξιοι τῆς ἐλευθερίας,
Xen. An. 1, 7, 3.
APPENDIX. | Rez
[§
300.
30
Is
244 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 303—306.
ὄφρα (Hom.).
The derivation is either the relative form ὅ-φι with pa, or ὃ πάρα, and the
meaning, wntil that, while that; but ὄφρα also assumes the force of a final particle,
the point of time to be reached being conceived as the goal or intent of the action.
In this sense, 6dpa ἴδω, ὄφρα rubagiuny expresses the same thing as ὡς, ὅπως, ἵνα.
The appearance of κε and ἄν with this particle results from the correlation ὅφρα
κε —, τόφρ᾽ ἂν (or ke) —. Ὧγε δ᾽ ἄρα Ζεὺς συνεχὲς, OPpa κε θᾶσσον ἁλίπλοα τείχεα
θείη, ΤΙ. 12, 25 (as the direct expression of the purpose would be τύφρ᾽ ἂν (or κεν)
tow, ὅφρα κε θείω). So, 6ppa κε τερπόμενος om ἀκούης Seupynvoriv, Od. 12, 51, “ (let
them bind thee = they shall bind thee the while, τόφρ᾽ ἂν (or κεν) δήσουσι) that
thou the while mayest hear, &c.” Μή μέ πω ἐς θρόνον tle, διοτρεφὲς, ὄφρα κεν Ἕκτωρ
κεῖται (vr. κῆται) ἐνὶ κλισίησιν ἀκηδής, .11. 24, 553. In this correlation, the ἄν is
often attracted to the relative clause, especially when the demonstrative clause is
imperative: μνήσασθε δὲ θούριδος ἀλκῆς pp av ἐγὼν ᾿Αχιλῆος ἀμύμονος ἔντεα δύω.
So τὸν ξεῖνον δύστηνον ἄγ᾽ ἐς πόλιν, ὄφρ᾽ ἂν ἐκεῖθι δαῖτα πτωχεύῃ. Ina few passages,
where the correlation is expressed, we have 6pp ἂν μέν kev —, τόφρ a: Υἱ7: opp ov
μέν κεν Opa... Topp ἀναχωρείτω, Zl. 11, 187, and 2b. 202. opp ἂν μέν κεν Sovpar
ἀρήρῃ, Topp αὐτοῦ μενέω, Od. ὅ, 361, and opp av μέν κ᾿ ἀγροὺς ἴομεν ----, τόφρα ----
καρπαλίμως ἔρχεσθαι, vb. 6, 259."
ἕως. τέως.
The earlier form is probably os or jos (comp. ἧμος). Its correlative i is τέως, but
also τόφρα is so used, réppa γὰρ ἂν ποτιπτυσσοίμεθα μύθῳ... .. ἕως kK ἀπὸ πάντα
δοθείη, Od. 2, 77. ἕως (jjos) ὃ ὃ ταῦθ᾽ ὥρμαινε, τόφρα οἱ ἔγγυθεν ἦλθεν — Νέστορος υἱός,
Ji. 18, 15. Sometimes ἕως in Homer is demonstrative, e. g. ὡς Ἕκτωρ elias μὲν
ἀπείλει, in the same sense as τέως μὲν (for, a while) noeyaCoy, fe ἐπεὶ δέ ---, Xen.: and
sometimes in Attic prose, τέως is used for €ws. (Buttmann, Index ad Dem. Mid.)
ἔστε.
Comp. Homer's εἰς ὅτε, εἴσοκε, and Lat. usque. The Attics use it instead of ὄφρα,
and in the sense wsque with a preposition, ἔστε ἐπὶ τὸ δάπεδον (Xen).
Rem. The same sense is expressed by ἕ ἕως οὗ, μέχρις ob, ἄχρις οὗ. These two
prepositional adverbs, in which there is no per ceptible difference of meaning, are
derived from μακρός, ἀκρός (“to the length of where,” “up to where”). Hom.
has also μέσφα (related to μέσος) in the sense of μέχρι, 11. 8, 508.
πρίν.
This particle, whether explained as a locative form of the root προ, or as an ancient
comparative (πριον-, comp. pre us and pris in pr iscus, &c. ), is properly an adverb (and
so used especially in poetry : ὧν πρὶν οὐκ ἀκήκοας. ὃς πρὶν @XETO. ἐν τῷ πρὶν χρόνῳ,
&c.), and is still in fact such even when it is usedasa conjunction i in the connexion of
sentences, and ranks, as such, with the temporal particles ὅτε, ἐπεί, ἕως, &e. (δ 127.138.)
: Thier sch holds, that ὄφρα with κεν, ἄν, is not final, “ in order that,” but “ while,”
“until Ἢ ’ but i in several of the passages cited, an intention is clearly implied. Rost
makes ap; av to be = ut, si forte, and odpa κε to imply that the event is confidently
expected. Quite an erroneous distinction. The difference at most is that between
(ipa ke — τόφρα κε, and ὄφρα κε --- Topp’ ἄν (§ 297) ; and opp’ ἂν δύω is “ so shall (or,
may) I the while put on,” ὄφρα δύω, “ while that I put on.”
[APPENDIX.
ee eee Py ee
§ 307.] ὅφρα. ἕως. ἔστε. πρίν. ὡς. 245
Thus, in Homer, οὐδ᾽ ὅγε πρὶν λοιμοῖο βαρείας κῆρας ἀφέξει, πρίν γ᾽ ἀπὸ πατρὶ φίλῳ
δόμεναι ἑλικώπιδα κούρην, I/. 1, 97, with correlation, nov will he sooner hold off —,
sooner there must be a giving —: the first πρίν looking forward, = “before the
giving ;” the second looking back, = “ before the holding off.” ἥμεθ᾽ arufsuera ... ,
πρίν γ᾽ ὅτε δή με σὸς vids ἀπὸ μεγάροιο κάλεσσεν, Od. 23, 43: here the πρίν properly
belongs to the first clause, we sat — before, and then indeed, which in the relative
form becomes — before (the time) when at last, or πρὶν ἢ ὅτε. So with ὅταν :
ὄμοσον μὴ μυθήσασθαι, πρίν γ᾽ ὅταν... γένηται. = μὴ πρὶν μυθήσασθαι, ἢ ὅταν, or
ἀλλ᾽ ὅταν. ---- In good Attic authors, we find πρὶν ἄν with subj., πρίν with opt., only
after a negation expressed or implied, probably because this form of sentence 15
conceived as resting on the correlation of mpiv — πρίν, which necessarily involves a
negation of one clause. This correlation is sometimes even expressed: e.g. οὐκ
ἀποκρινοῦμαι πρότερον... . πρὶν ἂν πρῶτον ἀποκρίνωμαι 6 τι ἐστίν (Pl.) = “1 will
not answer sooner...., (but) before (doing so) I will first answer,” combined with
the form οὐκ ἀποκρινοῦμαι πρίν, ἢ (or ἀλλ᾽) ὅταν ἀποκρ. So (εἰ) μὴ avein... . πρὶν
ἐξελκύσειεν εἰς τὸ τοῦ ἡλίου φῶς, which is the indirect form of οὐκ ἀνήσει (πρίν, or
πρότερον), πρὶν (ἀνιέναι) ἐξελκύσει, and οὐκ ἀνήσει πρὶν (ἢ ὅτε) ἐξελκύσει. Or, the
πρίν may be conceived to belong to the latter clause, but with relation to the first,
as in Homer's τὴν δ᾽ ἐγὼ οὐ λύσω" πρίν μιν καὶ γῆρας ἔπεισιν, “I will not let her go:
before (ere, sooner than, that shall be) old age shall come upon her.” With the
indicative, an affirmative sometimes precedes, but this is comparatively rare (mostly
confined to Trag. and Thuc., who usually has πρὶν δή, πρίν ye δή). Thus, of Λακεδαι-
μόνιοι ἡσύχαζον, πρὶν δὴ ἡ δύναμις τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων σαφῶς ἤρετο (Thuc.) —a phrase con-
tracted from ἡσύχαζον πρίν, καὶ. τότε δή —, or Ho. πρὶν ἢ ὅτε δῆ. Παραπλήσια...
ἔπασχον, πρίν γε δὴ οἱ Συρακύσιοι ἔτρεψαν (Thuc.). Here no correlation is implied:
but in the negative sentence, οὐκ ἰέναι ἤθελεν πρὶν ἡ γυνὴ αὐτὸν ἔπεισεν (Xen.), the
form may be either οὐκ ἤθελε πρίν, πρὶν ἔπεισεν, or οὐκ 70. πρίν, ἢ (or ἀλλ᾽) ὅτε ἔπεισεν.
So πρίν with inf. may follow either a negative or an affirmative assertion, according
as there is or is not correlation. Οὐδέ τις ἔτλη πρὶν πιέειν, πρὶν λεῖψαι, 11. 7, 480, the
elements being, “ they will not drink first, (but) first they will make a libation,” “ they
will not drink before (libation made), before (drinking, there must be) libation :”
but στῆτ᾽ αὐτοῦ πρὶν πεσέειν = στῆτ᾽ αὐτοῦ πρὶν ἢ πεσεῖτε, I. 6,82. (Both forms,
infin. and subj., are united by #, “or,” after a negation, in .7{. 14, 504.)
Rem. In Attic, # is rarely expressed after πρίν; and ἄν with the subj. is some-
times omitted, as also with μέχρι ov, ἕως, especially in Trag. and Thue. οὐ χρὴ
ἀρχῆς ἄλλης ὀρέγεσθαι, πρὶν ἣν ἔχομεν βεβαιωσώμεθα (Thuc.), the thought being,
“before (we do that), let us (= I counsel, that we first) make sure what we have.”
Μὴ στέναζε, πρὶν μάθης, Soph. Phil. 917, “before (you groan), (I advise you to)
learn,’ combined with μὴ στ. πρὶν μαθεῖν: but πρὶν ἂν μάθῃς would be, “ποῦ
sooner, but when, if so be, you shall have learnt.” — On the other hand, ἄν is
sometimes inserted with optative: ἀπαγορευόντων μὴ ἀποκτείνειν τὸν ἄνδρα πρὶν
ἂν ἐγὼ ἔλθοιμι (Antiph. 5, 113), as indirect form of μὴ ἀπόκτεινε πρὶν ἂν ἐγὼ ἔλθω.
ε
ως.
This adverbial form of the relative ὅς, the same as wt (i.e. quut from qui), derives
its various usages partly from the correlation tas (ὥς, οὕτως) ---- ὡς, in the manner —
in which, so — as; partly from the corresponding interrogative form πῶς; (κῶς;
from κός = tis; quis ?) and indirect interrogative ὅπως.
a) as, sicut, quemadmodum, in comparison, οὕτως ὡς ἔχω, just as Iam. πρέπει ὡς
τύραννος (sc. πρέπει) εἰσορᾶν (Soph.): ἐχίδνης ids ὡς (sc. δαίνυται) ἐδαίνυτο (Soph.) :
APPENDIX. |
307.
2
Pe)
[§
07.]
246 Appendix on the Particles. {$3072
and frequently in Homeric similes, ὡς δὲ —, ds —, and as —, so. Strengthened by
περ, 6.5. ἡ ψυχὴ ἐκβαίνουσα ὥσπερ πνεῦμα ἢ καπνὸς διασκεδασθεῖσα οἴχεται. ---- In
wishes and asseverations, as in Engl., “so heaven help me, as —:” οὕτως ὀναίμην
τούτων ὡς ἀληθῆ ἐρῶ, cf. ita me dii ament ut ego letor (Ter.). — With ὁ αὐτός, ἴσος,
&e., the same as, for ὅς. τὸ αὐτὸ σχῆμα ὥσπερ τὸ πρῶτον (Aen.). τοῦτον δὲ εἶναι τὸν
πλάστην τὸν αὐτὸν ὥσπερ τότε. Similarly, πιστὸς ὥς τις καὶ ἄλλος implies the com-
parison, as faithful as —.
6) As, ut, in the sense quantum, quantum quidem, in interposed sentences of a
limiting or restrictive kind (where the speaker qualifies a statement by remarking,
that he puts it, or wishes it to be understood, in that way in which it holds, is allow-
able, &c., under the circumstances described in the parenthetic clause): e.g. “he
will come to-day, as I hear, ὡς ἀκούω: as they say, ὡς λέγουσιν : as it seems, ὡς Eotkev.”
The correlation is, e.g. I speak this (so) as I hear, &e. Σὺ δ᾽, ὡς ἔοικας, νομίζεις. ---
Of the same kind is the ὡς with inf. in the phrases ὡς εἰπεῖν, ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν (where
we use the demonstrative, “so to say”), = οὕτω λέγω ὡς ἔξεστιν εἰπεῖν, or the like:
ὡς συντόμως εἰπεῖν, ὡς συνελόντι εἰπεῖν. Llliptically, ὡς πλήθει, ut summatim dicam
(P1.), —and ἐπίσταμαι ἰδιώτας ὄντας ὡς πρὸς ἡμᾶς ἀγωνίζεσθαι, and ἢ ὡς with inf. after
a comparative. So ὥς γ᾽ ἐμοὶ κριτῇ, for which we have also ὥς γ᾽ ἐμοὶ χρῆσθαι κριτῇ,
ὥς γ᾽ ἐμοὶ ἀκροατῇ : ---- ὡς ἐμῇ δόξῃ (Xen.). — ὥς γε ἐντεῦθεν ἰδεῖν : ὥς γε οὑτωσὶ δόξαι
(Ρ1). So ὡς with a preposition and its case, πυργοὶ μὲν. ὡς ἀπ᾿ ὀμμάτων πρόσω
(Soph.). ὡς ἐκ τῶν δυνατῶν, ὡς ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων (Lhuc.): ἄπιστον τὸ πλῆθος
λέγεται ἀπολέσθαι ὡς πρὸς τὸ μέγεθος τῆς πόλεως (Thuc.). To the same head may be
referred the ὡς which we should express by for. Thus, ἢν δὲ οὐδὲ ἀδύνατος, ὡς
Λακεδαιμύνιος, εἰπεῖν (Thuc.), for a Lacedemonian. πιστὸς ὡς νομεὺς ἀνήρ (Soph.
Nd. 7.1118), faithful, for a herdsman, that is (viz. considered as a mere herdsman,
as far as such a person is likely to be faithful). φρονεῖ yap ὡς γυνὴ μέγα, she has, for
a woman, a high spirit. (Here the force of the particle will be perceived by substi-
tuting an interrogation with πῶς ; e.g.“ for how should a Lac. be δυνατὸς εἰπεῖν 3” —
πῶς ἂν γυνὴ dpovot μέγα; &c.) And with the same construction, the dative:
μακρὰν yap ὡς γέροντι προὐστάλης ὁδόν (Soph.), long, for an old man. ταχεῖαν, ὡς
ἐμοὶ, σκέψιν ἐπιτάττεις (Pl.). — ‘Qs τὰ πολλά, ὡς ἐπὶ TO πολύ, ὡς ἐπὶ TO πλῆθος, and
the like, may be explained in the same way.
c) As, in the sense quasi, tanquam, also quippe, utpote. In this use of ὡς with
nouns and participles, there is involved a notion of cause, as when we say, “ as the
case is so and so, therefore —:” i.e. the relation is partly that which is expressed
by “how —? as —,” partly by “why —P? because —.” This use of ὡς also differs
from a), as the things are not compared in their own nature, but put together as like
in some thought, feeling, or purpose of the speaker or some other person. Thus,
ὡς πολεμίους ἐφυλάττοντο ἡμᾶς, as (they thought us) enemies, (therefore) they were
on their guard against us (so as they would be against enemies). εἴπερ ὡς φίλοι
προσήκετε, if, as (you wish to be) friends. (therefore) you are come (in the way that
friends do come). ὡς φύλακα συνέπεμψεν αὐτόν, as (he wished him to be) ὦ guard,
(therefore) he sent him with (us) (so as one sends a guard). ὁ δ᾽ ὡς ἀνὴρ γενναῖος
οὐκ οἴκτου μετὰ κατήνεσ᾽, as (he was) a noble-spirited man, (therefore) he complied (in
the way in which such an one acts). Especially with the participle (as, indeed, in
the case of subst. and adjj., the participle ὦν, ἐσύμενος, &c., may always be supplied).
Thus, ἀγανακτοῦσιν ὡς ἡπατημένοι, as (they think themselves) deceived, (therefore)
they are indignant (in the way that people are, who find themselves deceived).
παρεσκευάζετο ὡς μαχούμενος, as (he said to himself) he would fight, (therefore) he
made ready (as one does who is going to fight). ἠτιῶντο ὡς πείσαντα, as (they said)
[ APPENDIX.
§ 307.] ὡς. 247
he had been the mover, (therefore) ὥς. See ὃ 176 ἃ. ((Ατε, ἅτε δή, in the same
connexion, denotes the objective reason, § 175 c.) Hence with the gen. absol.
ὡς ἠπατημένων ἡμῶν ἠγανάκτουν, as (they said) we were deecived, they were indignant
(so, as in the case of our having been deceived); see § 181, R. 2: and the ace.
absol., see § 182, with R. 1. — In like manner, os with the finite verb, in the sense
as = “as assured that —,” especially followed by a negation. δέομαι οὖν σου παρα-
μεῖναι ἡμῖν, ὡς ἐγὼ οὐδ᾽ ἑνὸς ἤδιον ἀκούσαιμι ἢ σοῦ. And so with fut. indic. ὡς οὔτις
ἀμφὶ τῷδ᾽ ὑγρὰν θήσει κόνιν, Kur. Cf. § 215 Ὁ, R. 2. ὡς, ἂν σοὶ πειθώμεθα, οὔτε ὁ
γεωργὸς γεωργὺς ἔσται, = since, or for —, Pl.
As if, with the finite verb, in the ironical ὡς δή —, e.g. ὡς δὴ σὺ βραχέα ταῦτα δ᾽
ἐν καιρῷ λέγεις (Soph.), as if forsooth —! This might also be referred to the sense
how, see under e. Comp. ota δή —, ἅτε δή.
With εἰς, ἐπί, πρός ¢. ace.: e.g. παρεσκευάζετο ὡς ἐς μάχην (Thuc.), ἀνάγεσθαι
ἔμελλεν ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίαν (Xen.). Here the sense quasi is unsuitable, and it is
better to understand the phrase in the same manner as ὡς μαχούμενος, with the inten-
tion of going to —. In the same way, κατέλαβε τὴν ἀκρύπολιν ws ἐπὶ τυραννίδι = ὡς
τυραννήσων. --- ᾿Ἀπαγγέλλετε τῇ μητρὶ χαίρειν, os ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ = ὡς ἀπαγγέλλων, οὐ
ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ. '
Ὡς with numerals, ἔδωκεν ὡς μυρίας δραχμάς (Lys.), some ten-thousand drachme,
scarcely differs from εἰς : thus, in the enumeration Xen. An. 1, 2, 3, ὁπλίτας εἰς πεν-
τακοσίους καὶ χιλίους ..., ὅπλ. ὡς TevTakocious ..., (ἄνδρας) εἰς ἑπτακοσίους. It
is usually referred to the sense gvasi, but is rather to be explained as ὅσον : comp.
the particles in the phrases, “ ow many?” “as many as,” and ἕως, ὧδε, usque.
Rem. Ὡς with the aceus. (but only of personal objects, or objects conceived as
persons) is distinct from the preceding os εἰς, ὥς. Itisa pronominal form (lie
Lat. guo, comp. wsque), denoting the direction whither, the terminus ad quem of a
motion, and used quite as a preposition. αἰεὶ τὸν ὅμοιον ἄγει θεὸς ws τὸν ὅμοιον
(Hom.), like to like. οὐχ ἥκει πρὸς σὲ κηρύσσων ὅδε, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἐμέ (Hur). πορεύεται
ὡς βασιλέα (Xen.). ἥκοντος ὡς τὴν Μίλητον, and as” ABvdov (Thuc.).
d) With superlatives, especially adverbs, ὡς τάχιστα = quam celerrime. Cf. ὅτι
(= ὅ,τι) τάχιστα : both combined, ὡς ὅτε σμικρόταται. Comp. also ἀπέχθειαι ---- οἷαι
χαλεπώταται, Pl. χωρίον οἷον χαλεπώτατον, Xen. Here the full construction is ὡς
δυνατὸν, or οἷόν τε, or δύνανται, Ke., τάχιστα. See § 96. Also with some positives :
ὡς ἀληθῶς = ὡς οἷόντε ἀληθῶς, as true as possible. So ἤγγειλαν ws ἐτητύμως (Soph.),
and ὡς ἠπίως ἐννέπειν (Soph.),! and ὡς τάχος = “in what way speed _is possible.”
So ὡς ἀτεχνῶς, ὡς πάνυ, ὡς μάλα. ὡς αὕτως (ὡσαύτως), ὡς ἑτέρως. Hence we may
explain ὡς ἕκαστοι as representing ὡς ἕκας (ἑκάς). ἶ
e) how, quomodo (and quantopere). In the sense of ὅπως, in indirect interroga-
tion: thus, (πῶς ἔχει τὸ πρᾶγμα ;) αὐτὸς ἂν εἴποι ὡς ἔχει τὸ πρᾶγμα, how the affair
stands. ὡς δ᾽ οἶδα ταῦτα τῇδ᾽ ἔχοντ᾽, ἐγὼ φράσω (Soph.), how 1 know —. And in ex-
clamations: ὡς ἀστεῖος ὁ ἄνθρωπος, (see,) how polite the man is —! ὡς οὐδὲν ἄρα
ἴσμεν, (to think) how ignorant we are! ὥς μ᾽ ὑπῆλθέ τις φύβος (Soph.). So εὐδαί-
pov μοι Σωκράτης ἐφαίνετο --- ὡς ἀδεῶς καὶ γενναίως ἐτελεύτα (Pl.), when I thought
how fearlessly —, though this may also be explained as § 198 a, R. 9. ἃ πρὸς τὸν
1 Not as Ellendt 5. v. ὡς explains, = οὕτως ὥστε ἐτητύμως ἀγγελθέντα (ἠπίως εἰρη-
évov) δοκεῖν.
eer Xen. An. 2, 5, 39, οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθε —, οἵτινες ὀμόσαντες ἡμῖν —, τοὺς ἄνδρας
αὐτοὺς οἷς ὥμνυτε ὡς ἀπολωλέκατε, an anacoluth.: ὡς either = (to think) how —! or
ὅτι τοιούτως, that you have so —.
APPENDIX: |
ῳ
-ι
[§
307. ]
248 Appendix on the Particles. [ὁ 308, 309.
Θυέστην ὡς ὠμὰ διεπράττετο, Pl. Crat. 395, may be explained as a parenthetic excla-
mation, how ruthless 1} θαυμαστὰ yap τὸ τόξον ὡς ὀλισθάνει, Soph., whence the
adverbial phrases θαυμαστῶς ὡς, ὃ 198 a, R. 4. —In wishes, ὡς ὄλοιτο ! how (I wish)
he might perish! unless this is rather to be referred to the ancient use of ὥς
demonstr. = οὕτως. But comp. πῶς ἄν in wishes, ὃ 129, R. 1. — Possibly, ὡς δή
ironical: how much forsooth it is the case that — ! but see under ὁ.
J) In object-sentences, ὃ 123, ὡς for ὅπως with fut. indic. ἐπιμελεῖσθαι ὡς ἔσονται,
how they shall be: with subj., ἐπιμελοῦνται ws ἔχῃ οὕτως, prop. how it may be so (the
latter usage is rare). — In final sentences with subj. and opt., ὃ 122, 131, a,b. τὴν
γέφυραν λύσει ws μὴ διαβῆτε = either (considering, planning, Ke.) how you shall not
cross, or with the notion of intention as explained under 6. So Κῦρος φίλων wero
δεῖσθαι ὡς συνεργοὺς ἔχοι, Xen. On ὡς ἄν, see ὃ 302: but as ἄν with opt., ra βασί-
λεια οἰκοδομεῖν ws ἂν ἀπομάχεσθαι ἱκανὰ εἴη, = in the manner in which —, § 137.—
With the past tense of the indic., ὡς is used in the same manner as ἵνα, see ὃ 131 Ὁ,
R. 3, to denote an unattained result: τί μ οὐ λαβὼν ἔκτεινας εὐθὺς, ws ἔδειξα μήποτε
ἐμαυτὸν ἀνθρώποισιν ἔνθεν ἢν γεγώς, (so) as I should never have shown —, = so had
I never shown, approx. to the final that I might never —. See under iva.
g) To the same head belongs the use of ὡς instead of ὅτι after verba declarandi et
sentiendi, § 159, R. 3, as we sometimes in the like case use how, or how that (and in
vulgar Engl. as how). μαθὼν τὸν Σμέρδιος θάνατον ὡς κρύπτοιτο γενόμενος καὶ ὡς
ὀλίγοι ἦσαν οἱ ἐπιστάμενοι αὐτὸν Περσέων, when he learnt the death of S., how (that)
the fact of its having taken place was concealed, and how (that) few —. With verbs
of fearing, considering, &c., ὡς with fut. indie. is rare: μὴ δείσητε ὡς οὐχ ἡδέως Kabev-
δήσετε (Xen.).
Δ) When ὡς with inf. denotes effect or consequence (more commonly ὥςτε), it
may be explained as representing the correlation τοσοῦτος --- ὅσος, τοιοῦτος --- οἷος.
Thus, edpos ὡς δύο τριήρεις πλέειν ὁμοῦ, a breadth (so great, or such) as for two triremes
to sail abreast : aud ἢ ὡς with inf. after a comparative, μείζω ἢ ὡς (ὥστε) φέρειν. So
μείζονα ἡγησάμενος εἶναι ἢ ὡς ἐπὶ Πισίδας τὴν παρασκευήν (Xen., suppl. εἶναι). In
Herod. and Att. poets, sometimes also in Xen., ὡς for ὥστε occurs with the finite
mood, with the correlation οὕτω — ὡς, τοιοῦτος — ὡς expressed: see the exx. in
§ 166 ο, R. 2. — ‘Qs also occurs (and ὥςπερ) where we should expect # after a com-
parative, μᾶλλον ὥς μοι προσήκει (Lys.). The full construction is ἢ ὡς. Thus, pada-
κώτεροι γίγνονται ἢ ὡς κάλλιον αὐτοῖς (P1.).
2) Lastly, ὡς = ὅτε, ὡς ἴδεν, when he saw, ut vidit: and hence, like other tem-
poral particles, it denotes cause, see c. ‘Croesus, as it was summer, did so and so,”
ws θέρος ny (Xen.).
The comparative ὡς is strengthened with περ, ὥσπερ, just as: οὕτως, τοιοῦτος, ὁ
aités, ἴσος --- ὥσπερ. On the ellipsis ὥσπερ (ὡς) ἂν ei —, see ὃ 139 ὁ.
Rem. On os, in the sense ὅτι οὕτως, see under e.
ὥς, demonstr. thus, so. Frequent in Hom. és épar’, &e., and in comparisons, ὡς
δ᾽ —, ds —, and as — so. Also οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not even so, which is also used in Attic
prose. Plato has also ὡς — ὥς : ὡς πρὸς ἀστρονομίαν ὄμματα πέπηγεν, ὡς πρὸς
ἐναρμόνιον φορὰν ὦτα (κινδυνεύει) παγῆναι, Rep.530: and ds φήσομεν, ib. 415, Stalld.,
so we shall say. ὡς οὖν ποιήσετε καὶ πείθεσθέ μοι, ἰώ. νοΐ. 588, thus then ye shall do—.
ὥστε = ὡς with the particle τε, ὃ 227.
' Heindorf. iz ἢ. and in Pheedon., p. 152, explains it, “ perguwam seva,” which is not
amiss, though many of his exx. are of a different kind. (It may also come under d.)
[APPENDIX.
}
a
§ 310.] ὥς. ὅπως. 249
a) It is used in comparisons by Hom. and the Tragedians, πάντες ὥςτε τοξόται
roéevere, Soph., and now and then in the older Attic prose.
6) In the sense (so) that, it refers to a preceding οὕτως, or the like, expressed or
understood. ἡ δ᾽ ὧδε τλήμων, ὥστε τῷ μιάστορι ξύνεστι, Soph. ὥστ᾽ οὐδὲν αὐτοῖς
προύργου θύειν — μάτην (Pl.) = quocirca, igitur, i.e. the case is such that —. θνητὸς
δ᾽ ᾿Ορέστης, ὥστε μὴ λίαν στένε (Soph).
c) With infin. ἔχεις ἔγκλημα ὥστε Ovpode bat, such as (is reason enough = ἀρκούν-
τως ὥστε) to be angry, ὃ 152. — So that, see ὃ 166, ἃ, b. (In the passage cited in
§ 144, R. 1, ἀδύνατον ὑμῖν ὥστε Πρωταγόρου τοῦδε σοφώτερον ἑλέσθαι (βραβευτὴν τῶν
Σ ύγων), ὥστε is not superfluous: this construction occurs only with ἀδύν. and the
like, and implies the looking out, &c. for a way so as to—: 1. 6. it is impossible for
you to be in such a condition as to—: it combines ἀδύνατον ἑλέσθαι and οὐκ ἔσεσθε
οἷοί τε ἑλέσθαι.)
d) With the participle, in Herodot. where the Attics have ὡς, or ἅτε: ἦν γὰρ
ἀδύνατος, ὥςτε σηπομένου τοῦ μηροῦ. --- Cf. § 166, note.
ὅπως.
This is properly the dependent interrogative adverb corresponding with πῶς, how,
as ὁ-πόσος with πόσος, ὁ-πότε with πότε &e. Thus, ἔστω δ᾽ οὖν ὅπως ὑμῖν φίλον
(Soph.): the direct interrogation is πῶς ὑμῖν φίλον ; indirect or dependt. (σκέψασθε)
ὅπως ὑ. p.: hence, (say for yourselves,) how you like to have it, (and) so let it be =
so be it, as you like. In most of its usages it coincides with os, differing from it
(originally) only as implying a question how ?
a) As correlated to ὧδε, οὕτως. Frequent in poetry, but less so in prose. Ὅπως
ἕκαστος ὑμῶν — βούλεται, τοῦτον τὸν τρόπον φερέτω τὴν ψῆφον (Lsocr.) = ὅντινα
τρόπον. χρὴ τοὐμὸν σῶμα θάπτειν οὕτως ὅπως ἂν ἡγῇ νόμιμον εἶναι (P/.) Ποίει ὅπως
ἄριστόν σοι δοκεῖ εἶναι (Xen.). Like ὡς in comparisons, it frequently follows the
a >
term compared: Ἔρωτι — ὅςτις ἀντανίσταται, πύκτης ὅπως ἐς χεῖρας, οὐ καλῶς
φρονεῖ (Soph.).
6) The sense ὅτι, after verba declarandi, &c., is even more rare (viz. like ὡς,
especially after a negative verb of this kind: od λέγω ὅπως), and where it does
occur, the sense is still that of a depend. interrogation : τοῦτον ἔχοι τις ἂν εἰπεῖν
ὅπως οὐ δίκαιόν ἐστιν ἀποθνήσκειν ; (Xen.) = πῶς ov 6., “ how it is not just —? can
any one say how?” τοῦτ᾽ αὐτὸ μή μοι φράζ᾽ ὅπως οὐκ εἶ κακός (Soph.), don’t tell me
(that you are not a villain); how are you not a villain? Comp. § 159, R. 3.
c) The force of ὅπως is just the same in οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως —, there exists not the way
in which, = it cannot be but that —, ὃ 102 b, R. 2: 122, R. 2, and in the ellip-
tical οὐχ ὅπως --- ἀλλά —, “1 say not how —” = not only —, but —, ὃ 212. — It
should be observed, however, that this phrase (and οὐχ ὅτι) is sometimes nod only,
sometimes not only not. Thus, οὐχ ὅπως ἔτρεσεν, ἀλλ᾽ (or ἀλλὰ καὶ) ἔφυγεν, should
prop. = 7 say not how he was frightened (he was frightened, and not only that) but
he also fled. “ οὐχ ὅπως ἔφυγεν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲ ἔτρεσεν --- : here the negation in οὐδέ extends
to both members, he did not — I say not, flee — but (not) eventremble. "Edvyev, οὐχ
ὅπως ἔτρεσεν, he fled, (I say not how =) much more, he was afraid ; fugit, nedum
extimuerit. But in the usage of the language, ody ὅπως in the first clause 1s often non
solum non, even when the adversative clause is positive: thus, οὐχ ὅπως χάριν αὐτοῖς
ἔχεις, ἀλλὰ Kal — κατὰ τουτωνὶ πολιτεύῃ (Dem.), you not only are not grateful to them,
but you even —, viz. because the first clause is, to say nothing of your being grateful —
(you are not grateful, and not only so) but —: in other words, οὐχ ὅπως has become a
APPENDIX. | ;
[§
309. |
[9
310. |
ΘΠ itp
250 ; Appendix on the Particles. [δ 311.
phrase of negation, asif it were one word, like οὔπως. On the other hand, in ody ὅπως
τοὺς πολεμίους ἐτρέψαντο οἱ “Ἕλληνες, ἀλλὰ καὶ THY χώραν αὐτῶν ἐκάκωσαν (Xen.), the
οὐχ ὅπως is not treated as a negation of ἐτρ., but retains its proper force, 7 say not
how they routed —; they not only did that, but also —. With the infinitive: μὴ ὅπως
ὀρχεῖσθαι, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ὀρθοῦσθαι ἐδύνασθε, not only not to dance, but not even to stand
upright (Xen.). (τοὺς Θηβαίους) ἡγεῖτο οὐχ ὅπως ἀντιπράξειν — ἀλλὰ καὶ συστρατεύ-
σειν (Dem.), that they would not only not act against him, but would even join with
him in the expedition: = that far from acting against him, &c.
d) With the superlative, ὅπως ἄριστα : to be explained in the same way as ὡς; viz.
ὅπως δυνατόν ἐστι, &c. (“ how can it be best done ¥”’)
6) After such verbs as σκοπεῖν, βουλεύεσθαι, μηχανᾶσθαι, σπουδάζειν, φροντίζειν,
and the like: to see how, &c.: see the rules and exx. in the §§ referred to in the
Index. Hence the ellipsis, ὅπως οὖν ἔσεσθε, (see then) how ye shall be. — Also after
verbs of fearing and of prohibition, § 124 b, e. g. δέδοικα ὅπως μὴ γενήσεται, TD fear
(considering with myself) how it shall not be. ᾿Απείρηταί μοι, ὅπως μηδὲν ἐρῶ —,
the prohibition being, ὅρα ὅπως μηδὲν ἐρεῖς.
J) As final particle, ὅπως and ὅπως μή with subj. and opt., ὃ 122 and131b. εἰς
καιρὸν ἥκεις ὅπως ἀκούῃς = your intention being how you may hear. On ὅπως ἄν with
subj., see under "Av, ὃ 302. It results from the proper interrog. signification of
ὅπως that this particle (not ὡς or ἵνα) can be used with fut. indic. in the final sense,
see the exx. at end of ὃ 122. (To do so and so) ὅπως paxotvrar = with this view
and intention, how they shall fight.
g) Its use with histor. tenses of indic. to denote an unattained result is rare.
᾿Εχρῆν σε Πήγασον ζεῦξαι ὅπως ἐφαίνου τραγικώτερος = that you might have appeared,
prop. how you would have —. See the expl. under iva.
o
iva.
The root is either the pronoun of the third person ¢ or 7, or perhaps more
probably the relative 6- with the vowel lightened (attenuated) into νι. The original
meaning is “where,” “in which (or, what) case,” &c. (comp. ἐν in ἔνθα, where,
and the first element of z-de, un-de, last of alio-guwin.)
a) ubi and quo. ἵν᾽ οἴχεται, where (whither) it is gone, Hom. Od. 4, 821: and
demonstratively, ἵνα yap σφιν ἐπέφραδον ἠγερέεσθαι, for there (= it was there that) —,
fl. 10,127. This use is almost entirely confined to the poets. ἱκόμην ἵν᾽ ἱκόμην.
οὐδ᾽ ὁρᾶς ἵν᾿ εἶ κακοῦ, Soph. (ἵνα with gen.) With ἄν: σε προσθέσθαι πέλας χώρας
θέλουσι, μηδ᾽ ἵν᾿ ἂν σαυτοῦ κρατῇς, Soph., and not where (if they place thee) thou shalt
be thine own master. (Brunck and Elmsl, κρατοῖς, wrongly, since i” ἄν is never
final = ὅπως ἄν.)
6) With subj. and optat. it forms sentences of intention, that, in order that. ἐξαύδα,
μὴ κεῦθε νόῳ, ἵνα εἴδομεν (= εἰδῶμεν) ἄμφω, prop. in that case (or, as the case in
which) we shall both know it. See ὃ 122.131. ἵνα τί; ellipsis, § 198 a, note.
c) More frequently than ὡς, it is used with the historical tenses of the indicative
to denote an wnattained result, i.e. something which would be (or would have been)
attained on the supposition made by the speaker (in the form of a wish, a question
implying a wish, or of a declaration of what should be, or should have been). Here,
“1 wish he had come, in which case (=so that) I should (might) have seen him,”
implying, “ but he did not come, so I did not see him.” See the exx. in ὃ 131 b, R. 3.
Thus, “ he does (did) so and so, iv’ 7 (εἴη) τυφλός, as the case wherein he may (as
[APPENDIX.
§ 312.] iva. TU. 251
he purposes) be blind;” but “he should have done so, &c., ἵν᾽ 7 (imperf. indic).
τυφλός, as the case in which he would have been blind.” The force of the latter
clause rests upon the convertible proposition, “ where this (e. g. the doing) is, there
that (e.g. the being blind) is,’ and “ where that is, there this,” so that the one
being denied, the other is also denied.
The absence of ἄν from the relative clause is explained by the kindred meaning
of the two particles, ἵνα and ay: comp. εἰ ἐβουλύμην λέγειν, ἤκουσας ἄν, “if I had
wished to speak, you would in that case have heard,” with ἐβουλόμην ἂν λέξαι, ἵνα
ἤκουσας, “I wish I had spoken, ὅη which case you would have heard.” Where ἄν does
occur in the relative clause, it is drawn in by some other consideration: thus, καίτοι οὐ
προσῆκεν ἀλλ᾽ εὐθὺς λέγειν — iva μᾶλλον ἂν ἐπιστεύετο ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν (Iseus), the ἄν
attaches itself to μᾶλλον as a set phrase (see ἄν, ὃ 299).
oe
οτι. ᾽
This is the Lat. guod, our that: not originally the neut. of ὅςτις, but the ancient
form of neut. ace. of ὅς; ὅτ, covered with the vowel . Hence Hom. has indifferently
6 and ὅτι.
_ @) that, after verba declarandi, sentiendi, Ke. οὐκ ἀΐεις 6 με βάλεν Αἴας ; Hom.
prop. hear you not this — which (= that) Ajax has wounded me? λέγει (ἀκούει, οἴεται,
ἄς.) ὅτι νοσεῖς : ἔλεγεν ὅτι ἐνόσουν, ὅτι νοσοῖμι. ὃ 159, R. 3,4; 178 a, R.5. On the
moods in object-sentences with ὅτι, see § 108. 130 a,b; 137. On the difference
between ὅτε and-@s (ὅπως), ὃ 159, R. 3. “Ὅτι and ὡς are very rare after verbs
denoting a purely subjective or uncertain view (e. g. οἴεσθαι, δοκεῖν. νομίζειν, φάναι =
‘to declare one’s own opinion :’ but we find φάναι ὅτι, Pl. Gorg. 487 ; ὡς, Dem. A, 48,
Aen. Hell. 6, 3,7; οἴεσθαι ὡς, Xen. Mem. 3, 3, 14. In later writers, δοκεῖν ὅτι,
Polyb.28,9,14; ἐλπίζειν ὅτι, Arr. An.1,4,7. Cf. Thue.8,54. νομίζειν ὡς, Thue.
3, 88). But after λέγειν, to tell (with reference to the substance of the narrative),
and εἰπεῖν (with reference to the expression), ὅτι and ὡς are not uncommon.” KA7riiger.
Also, it follows from the original meaning of ὡς, that this particle is preferred to ὅτι
where the “as” or “how” is of more importance than the “that:” hence, πείθειν
ὡς, to get one to believe, and ἀκούειν, πυνθάνεσθαι, ἀγγέλλειν, to bring a report, ἀπο-
δεικνύναι, &e. ws; and after verbs of calumniating, reproaching, accusing, &e.
On ὅτι in the sense (the circumstance) that —, (inregard) that —, § 170 a, R.:
(to prove) that —, § 192 b, R. To δὲ μέγεστον ὅτι, ὃ 197. And on μὴ ὅτι (= μὴ
” “ > er > sper ς “ Fs
εἴπω ὅτι), οὐχ OTL (= οὐκ ἐρῶ ὅτι), see ὃ 212, and cf. under ὅπως, § 310 ο.
Rem, We also find, οὐ μόνον ὅτι : thus, καὶ μὴν ὑπεραποθνήσκειν ye μόνοι ἐθέλουσιν
οἱ ἐρῶντες, οὐ μόνον ὅτι ἄνδρες, ἀλλὰ καὶ γυναῖκες (non modo — sed etiam, Pl.). Like-
Wise οὐχ ὅσον and οὐχ οἷον : οἱ μὲν οὐχ ὅσον οὐκ ἠμύναντο, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἐσώθησαν,
Thuc., which might have been expressed by οὐχ ὅπως. or by μὴ (οὐχ) ὅτι, ἡμύ-
2 - > ~ U > ἃ \ , 2 > >» > ‘ ,
ναντο. Οὐχ οἷον ὠφελεῖν δύναιντ᾽ ἂν τοὺς φίλους, ἀλλ᾽ οὐδ᾽ αὐτοὺς σώζειν, Polyb.
6) because, for διὰ τοῦτο ὅτι, whence also διότι. ἄρα τὸ ὅσιον, ὅτι ὅσιόν ἐστι, φιλεῖται
ὑπὸ τῶν θεῶν, ἢ, ὅτι φιλεῖται, ὅσιόν ἐστι; Pl. Διὰ τί δὲ ἄλλο ἄλυποι ἀλλήλοις εἰσὶν οἱ
ἐμπλέοντες, ἢ διότι ἐν τάξει ---- κάθηνται; Xen.
Rem. The poets have in the same sense, οὕνεκα = οὗ ἕνεκα, i.e. τούτου ἕνεκα,
ὁ —, and ὁθούνεκα = ὅτου ἕνεκα.
With the superlative, though written as the conjunction, ὅτι τάχιστα, the word is
6 τι, ace. neut. governed by δύναμαι, or nom. neut. subject to δυνατόν ἐστι, or the
like. — Also in the elliptical ὅτι μή (eacept), the full construction is οὐδὲν 6 τι μή.
APPENDIX. |]
311.]
[§
--
bo
315.
310.
“52 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 313—316.
ὅτε, when.
This adverbial form is not a compound with re, but its second syllable is an ancient
case suffix: cf. guwm, quando. Like other temp. adverbs, it is also used in a causal
sense, ὃ 127, R. 1, whence ὅτε μή = quando non and si non.
On μέμνημαι, ὅτε, see § 178 a, R. 5, and note. — With μέν and δέ, sometimes —
sometimes, the accent contorms itself to that of ποτέ, viz. ὁτὲ μέν --- ὁτὲ δέ.
The correlative of ὅτε is τότε, then. The corresponding interrogative πότε, when ?
indef. ποτέ, at some (any) time, ὃ 274, and relative (depend.) interrogative, ὁπότε.
Hence ὁπότε, as implving the question when? is indefinite. Cf. παρήγγειλεν ὑπο-
μένειν ὅτε οἱ πολέμιοι ἐπικέοιντο (Xen.), and εἰώθει γοῦν ὁπότε δεῦρ᾽ ἐμβάλλοι, when-
ever —, Xen.
a
ὅπου, where.
As ὅτε, πότε; Ordre, ποτέ (encl.) of time, so ov, ποῦ, ὅπου, πού (encl.) of place.
The correlative (τοῦ being lost) is ἔνθα, demonstr. or ἐνταῦθα. ---- In prose, ὅπου has
taken the place of οὗ, as the simple relative where. — Sometimes, but rarely, it is
since, siquidem, quandoquidem : and then the apodosis is often ἤπου, in the sense,
if —, then surely. ὅπου yap ᾿Αθηνόδωρος καὶ Καλλίστρατος ---- οἷοί τε γεγόνασιν, ἧπου
(;
- ἡμεῖς --- ἂν δυνηθείημεν (Lsocr.), if A. and C. have been able, surely we should be
able.
ἐπεί (ἐπειδη).
Properly a particle of time, when, after, postquam, but, like most particles of time,
also denotes cause, s¢nce, quoniam, quandoquidem. ἐπεὶ τάχιστα, as soon as ever. —
Both are also sznce (ea quo) of time. Ov πολὺς χρόνος ἐπειδὴ χιτῶνας λινοῦς ἐπαύ-
σαντο φοροῦντες (Thuc.). With ἄν : ἐπειδάν, ἐπάν, ἐπήν ; the first by far the most
frequent, and the second somewhat more so than the third.
In the sense “ for if not,” “for otherwise,” “for if so” (where εἰ δὲ μή, or εἰ δέ after
a negat. proposition might have been used), there is an ellipsis: since (if you doubt
at, or, if you think so, &e.)-—. Νόσον yap 6 πατὴρ ἀλλύκοτον αὐτοῦ νοσεῖ, ἣν οὐδ᾽ ἂν
εἷς γνοίη πότ᾽ οὐδ᾽ ἂν ξυμβάλοι εἰ μὴ πύθοιθ᾽ ἡμῶν, ἐπεὶ τοπάζετε, Aristoph.
εἰ, Uf.
This is an ancient dative of the pronoun of the third person, ἴ or ἵ, comp. Lat. sé
(stbi). Its original force is “in this that,” “in the (case, hap, event) that,” “on the
(condition) that.”?
For the use of εἰ, ἐάν, ἤν, in conditional propositions, see the Index.
From such expressions as σκέψαι ei —, consider if —, results the sense whether in
1 This (the reflexive) pronoun is closely connected with the relative pronoun,
so that, in point of sense, the conditional particle may be said to be directly
derived from the relative. Thus in Sanskrit, from relat. yas, yd, yat, ὅς, ἥ, ὃ,
we have yadi = ὅτε, “when,” and yadi = “if;” andin German, “ wenn” is both
when and if. Accordingly, the usages of the relat. (and interrog.) and of the con-
ditional particle very often run over into each other. Thus, ὅτε and ὅπου approach
to the sense of condition: εἴ τις is more nearly = és τις than “if any: θαυμάζω
εἰ represents 6. ὅτι (see § 194 c); the εἰ of wishing may also be expressed by
ὡς and πῶς (the relat. wtinam), and the interrogative εἰ (whe-ther) by πότερα.
[APPENDIX.
S317,, 318.] ὅτε. ὅπου. ἐπεί. εἰ. εἶτα. ἔπειτα. 258
depend. interrogation, ὃ 199 b. εἰ (ἐάν) is thus used only in indirect, and, indeed, [ὃ
properly only in double questions, denoting a wavering between two considerations : 310.]
but often only one member is expressed, the other being present in the mind of the
speaker. Where both are expressed, the second is introduced by 7, ὃ 199 c.
Σκέψαι εἰ ὁ Ἑλλήνων νόμος κάλλιον ἔχει, whether it be not (Xen.). δέομαι ὑμῶν τούτῳ
τὸν νοῦν προσέχειν εἰ δίκαια λέγω ἢ μή (= μὴ δίκαια) Pl. Comp. πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι...
πύτερον ἕψονται Κύρῳ ἢ ov (= οὐχ ἕψονται). ---- The same thing is expressed by
εἴτε --- etre, § 199 c. In poetry we also find etre —- ἤ, ei — etre, and — εἴτε with the
first etre omitted.
Rem. Eire --- εἴτε is also conditional, viz. where several cases are put condi-
tionally, both if — and if: but here also in English we use the interrogative
whether — or. See ὃ 194 ἃ.
The use of εἰ in wishes, εἰ yap ὥφελον πρότερος ἰδεῖν, is elliptical: 7f it were so, it §
would be well. Thus we say, O if tt were so! (i.e. how happy I should be !) — 217.
Hence with suffix θε, ὃ 299, εἴθε, utinam. See exx. in § 129, and R. 2.
εἴ ye (= si quidem) if at least, if, that is (ei — γέ when the γέ distinguishes the
interposed word, εἴ ye when its influence extends to the whole clause). Οὐδείς, εἴ
γε σὺ ἀληθῆ λέγεις, nobody, if, that is (or, if, at least) what you say is true.
εἴπερ is εἰ strengthened by πέρ. It calls attention to the condition, and so adds
emphasis to it. The force of πέρ may be rendered in the condition by always sup-
posing that —, in the apodosis by, then it quite follows that —.
καὶ el, is even if: the καί emphasizes the condition, marks it as improbable, ex-
treme, or as the most unfavorable that can well be conceived. In εἰ καί, the καί
gives emphasis, not to the condition, but to the thing supposed. καὶ εἰ λέγω, even
supposing I say, i.e. go so far as to suppose that I say. εἰ καὶ λέγω, supposing I
even say, i.e. suppose I go so far as to say. For (see § 222) καί adverbial implies
a correlation cai — καί : therefore the first is καὶ (Gos), καὶ ef λέγω ; the second, εἰ
καὶ (ἄλλως), καὶ λέγω. This is the principle of the distinction, but in practice the
difference is often so slight, that no reason appears why one form should be chosen
rather than the other. | ὃ
τὺ »
εἰτα. ἐεπειτα. §
These particles, perhaps, are related to εἰ, ἐπεί, as δῆτα to δή, τηνικαῦτα to τηνίκα; 31 8.
and thus they may be considered as denoting the demonstrative apodosis of a sup-
pressed condition (7f) or relative (when). Thus Ellendt remarks that εἶτα may
sometimes be explained by a sentence with εἰ or εἰ καί. Soph. Phil. 1337, ἀλλ᾽
εἰκάθω δῆτ᾽ ; εἶτα πῶς.ὁ δύσμορος εἰς Pas — εἶμι ; i.e. (and if I yield) then how — ἢ
Others make εἶτα cognate with ἔτι (corresponding forms in Sanskrit atz, ἐξα), and
S23 ce 7.9 . . .
ἔπειτα = ἐπ᾿ εἶτα (Kiihner). — In Latin, the sense is expressed by deinde :—
a) In enumerations, πρῶτον (μέν) ---, εἶτα, ἔπειτα (δέ) —. (Ὁ) In the usage
with participles, see ὃ 175 a (comp. 181, R. 2). (ὁ) In interrogations, expressed
with vehemence or indignation: as in the ex. given above. Ev ἴσθι, ἔφη, ὅτι, εἰ
νομίζοιμι θεοὺς ἀνθρώπων τι φροντίζειν, οὐκ ἂν ἀμελοίην αὐτῶν. >. "Erect οὐκ οἴει
φροντίζειν ; (Xen.) It may be explained = post talia (Gronov.), quum ita sit, ergo:
the Lat. uses deinde in the same way: gue nunc deinde mora est, aut quidjam, Ture,
APPENDIX. | :
254 Appendix on the Particles. [ὃ 319.
retractas? Virg. in.12,889. Hercules solus domat. Cur deinde latebras aut fugam
vecors petam? Sen. Here. 1407. — Often κάτα, κἄπειτα, which are more emphatic :
κἄπειτα τοιοῦτον ὄντα οὐ φιλεῖς αὐτόν; (Xen.) — Eira, ἔπειτα, and then, § 185 a, R. 6.
ἔτι.
This particle is cognate with Lat. et, at, prep. ad, at-que = ad-que. Its meaning
is, further (on), yet, still. Comp. also Lat. item. ταῦτα μὲν οὖν πάντα ὁμοίως ἀμφο-
τέρων eotiv’ ἀλλὰ τὸ μάχεσθαι οὐκέτι (οὐκ ἔτι, non item) ἀμφοτέρων (Xen.). ἀνεστρά-
i fe 5 \ 7 \ \ 3oe2 A ve ΄ ε , > ,
φησαν οἱ ἀμφὶ βασιλέα, πεζοὶ μὲν οὐκέτι, τῶν δὲ ἱππέων ὁ λόφος ἐνεπλήσθη (Xen.).
‘
INDEX
Bie:
A privativum ; adjectives so compounded,
with the genitive, 63 a, R. 1, and c.
ἀγαπᾶν with accus. and dative, 44 a, R.
ἀγγέλλειν τινὰ ποιοῦντα and ποιεῖν, 178 a,
len, OF
ἀδικεῖν, to have done wrong, 110 a, R. 2.
-atos, adjectives in, as adverbs, 86 a, R.
αἰσθάνεσθαι ὁ. g., 58 a, R. 3; τινὰ πεπ-
τωκότα and τινὸς συκοφαντοῦντος, 178
a, note.
αἰσχύνεσθαί τινα ποιεῖν τι, 145, R. 1,
note; λέγοντα and λέγειν, 177 b, R. 3.
αἴτιος with the simple infinitive, with the
genitive of the infinitive, and with
the accusative and infinitive, 164, R. 3;
τὸ δ᾽ atruovy — yap, 196 a, R.
ἀκούειν with gen., 58 a, R.3; in the sense
to obey, with gen. and dat., 58 Ὁ, and R.
ἀκούειν τί τινος, 60 a.
ἀκούειν τινὰ ἥκοντα. τινὸς διαλεγομένου,
178 a, note; ἀκούω τινὰ ἥκειν, 178 a,
R. 6. ᾿Ακούειν and ἀκοῦσαι added to
adject. and phrases, 150 a, R. 2; ef.
151, R. 1.
ἅλις c. g., 49 b.
ἁλίσκομαι ποιῶν, 178 Ὁ.
le
ἀλλά (ἀλλ᾽ ov), 187 with R.; in answers
199 ο, R. 2; ἀλλὰ yap, ἀλλ᾽ οὐ yap,
196 Ὁ; ἀλλά with the verb repeated
as answer, 199 c, R. 2; ἀλλὰ ri; ibid.
[App. 275—28z2. |
ἄλλος. Οἱ ἄλλοι, we (you) others, the rest
of us (you), 6 a, note; 6 ἄλλος ὑμέτε-
pos and ὁ ἄλλος ὁ ὑμ., 10, R. 5; ἄλλος
constructed as comparative, 91 (οὐδεὶς
ἄλλος πλήν, R. 2); ἄλλων pleonastic
with the superlative, 96, R. 3. ”AdAo
τι ij, ἄλλο τι, ἄλλο τι ἢ οὐ, ἄλλο τι οὐ in
questions, 199 b, οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἤ, τί ἄλλο
7, 215 Ὁ, R. 1; ἄλλ᾽ ἤ after a nega-
tion, 91, R. 2. [Cf. App. 281, 282. ]
ἀλλότριος ὁ. g. and ὁ. d., 62, R.
ἅμα with partep., 175 Ὁ; ἅμα ἡλίῳ ἀνίσ-
χοντι, 181 ἃ, R. 6
ἄμεινόν μοι ἔσται ποιήσαντι, 177 Ὁ, R. 5.
ἀμφί, construction, 72.
ἀμφότερον, ἀμφότερα, as predicate, 1 Ὁ,
R. 5; as apposition to the predicate,
10; ae
ἄν in general, 107; ἄν c. imperf. and
aor., sometimes ὁ. plusqtiamperf. in-
dic., 117 a; in object and other ac-
cessory propositions, 117 b, R. 1; ¢.
aor. of that which might have hap-
1 The numbers refer to the paragraphs and remarks: ΤΠ. = marginal note.
The
particular words which come under a general rule (especially of case-government)
: Ξ : TE S Η
are, except in a few instances, not specified in this Index; e.g. for ἀΐσσειν χεῖρα
(22
mms
R. 2), ἐβασίλευσα, became hing (111, R. 4), see in Index IT. “ intransitive verbs”
and “aorist of verbs denoting office and public station ;’
and so in other instances.
256
pened, ibid., R. 2; 6. aorist or 1m-
perfect, which was wont to happen,
ibid., R. 3; omitted with the imper-
fect indic., 118; ἄν with the future
indic., poetical, 118, R. 3. "Ἂν with
ὡς and ὅπως in final sentences, 122;
with relative words and conjunctions
with the subjunctive, 126,127; omitted,
126, R. 2,127, R. 2; different from av
with opt. in a relative sentence, 126,
R. 3; ἄν retained in a relat. sentence
which has passed from the subj. into
the opt., 132 b, R. Αν with the opt.
in hypothetical sentences, 135; po-
tential, in principal and accessory sen-
tences, 136, 137 (123, R. 3); whether
omitted, 138, R. 2. “Av c. inf. 173
(separated from the inf. and repeated,
ibid. R. 1); not Ὁ: fut. infin., 173,
R. 2. “Ay ὁ. partep., 184 (not ὁ. fut.,
R.). “Av belonging to two verbs,
put once or twice, 139 a; to be un-
derstood from the preceding clause,
ibid. Position of dv; detached from
verb and repeated, 139 Ὁ, with R.,
note (173, R. 1, 219 b, R.). Trans-
posed (οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ἄν, εἰ), 139 b, R. Kay
= ἄν — καὶ εἰ, ibid. ellipt. with verb
omitted, 139 6. [App. 297—302.]
ἀνά c. ace. and poet. ὁ. dat., 28 a, with
R., note.
ἀναγκάζειν τινά τι, 25, Π2:
ἀνακῶς ἔχειν τινός, 63 ο, R. 2.
ἀναμιμνήσκειν τινά τι and τινός, 25, with
νι 1
ἀνέχεσθαί τινος (ποιοῦντός τι), 60 a, R. 1.
ἀνηκουστεῖν τινος, 58 b.
ἀνὴρ τῶν ῥητόρων, 51 a; ἀνήρ with an-
other substantive, 87 b, R. 2.
ἀνθ᾽ ὧν, because, 103, R. 3.
ἄνθρωπος with another substantive, 87 Ὁ,
R. 2.
ἀνιέναι ὀργῆς, 51 Ὁ.
ἀνύσας, 170 ο, R.
ἄξιος (ἀξίως, ἀξιοῦν) c. gen., 63 e; ἀξιόν
τινι, ibid., R. 1; ο. inf., 149, with R.
ἀπό instead of the partitive genitive,
50 a, R. 2; approximating to the da-
tive of the means or instrument, 39 a;
instead of ὑπό with the passive, 78, R.
ὁ ἀπό instead of ὁ ἐν --- ὁ παρά τινι,
L[udex 7.
79 b. Verbs compounded with ἀπό
with the genitive (or ἀπό), 57 b, R.
ἀποδέχεσθαί τινος (τινος Aéyovtos), 60, R. 1.
ἀποκρύπτειν, ἀποκρύπτεσθαι, 82 d.
ἀπολαύειν τινός, τί τινος, 57, note.
ἀποστερεῖν τινά τι, τινα τῶν πατρῴων,
25, and R. 1.
ἀποφαίνειν, ἀποφαίνεσθαι with ace. ¢. inf.,
_ 178 a, R. 8.
dpa, ap’ ov, dp οὖν, 199 b, in depend.
questions, ibid.; dpa — 7, 199 c, R. 1.
[| App. 262, 263. ]
dpa in sentences connected by μέν --- δέ,
189 a. [App. 257—259.]
ἀρέσκειν ὁ. dat. and gen., 36 a, R. 1.
ἀρκεῖν with a participle, 177 b, R. 4.
ἄρχειν, ἄρχεσθαι, 82 ἃ, R. 2; ἄρχομαι
λέγειν, rarely λέγων, 177 b, R. 3; ἀρ-
᾽χόμενος, in the beginning, ἀρξάμενος
ἀπό τινος, 176 ο, R
ἀσπίς (μυρία), 18 ο.
ἅτε, ἅτε δή with participles, 175 ὁ.
αὐξάνειν τινὰ μέγαν, 24 ἃ, R.
αὐτός, 6, with dative, 37, R. 2; αὐτοῖς
ἀνδράσιν, men and all, 42, R.2 Ὁ αὐτὸς
αὑτοῦ with comparatives, 90, R. 3.
ἀφαιρεῖσθαί τινά τι, τί τινος, ἀφαιρεῖν τινί
τι, 25 and R. 1.
B.
Βασιλεύς anarthrous, 8, R. 2, Ὁ.
βελτίων εἰμί with participle, 177 Ὁ, R. 4.
βούλει, βούλεσθε ποιήσωμεν, 123, R. 5.
βουλεύειν, βουλεύεσθαι, 82 ἃ, R. 2.
βουλοίμην ἄν, 136; ἠβουλόμην ἄν, 117 b,
R. 2 (118, note).
iN
Τάρ connecting a sentence to a demon-
strative pronoun or adverb, 196 a, after
τεκμήριον δέ, &e., δῆλον δέ, ibid., R.
(omitted, ibid.), serving to insert a re-
mark as parenthesis, 196 Ὁ; after τὸ
δὲ μέγιστον, and similar expressions,
197; in answers, 199 ο, R. 2. [App.
260, 261.]
γέ, position, 219 b. [App. 248—251.]
γῆ omitted, 87 b, R. 1.
© ee ΦΉΨΙ | te el
»
i lal Ψεο
Index 1. A ty/
γίγνεσθαι with an adverb (χωρίς), 1 Ὁ,
R. 6; conforming itself to the predi-
eate noun, 4; γίγνεσθαί τινι, 38 a;
with partitive genitive (y. τῶν τριά-
κοντα τυράννων), 51 ¢; with the geni-
tive of the material or the origin, 54.
γιγνώσκειν with participle and infinitive,
178 a, with R. 6.
γνώμη omitted, 87 b, R. 1.
[γοῦν, App. 267.]
ans
[Aai, App. 238. ]
δέ, μέν --- δέ, 188; position, R. 1; ὁ
pev — ὁ δέ, &e., R.2; μέν --- δέ--- δέτηῃ
anaphora, R. 3; δέ ---- δέ (both in the
relat. and in the demonstrative clause),
R. 4; in apodosis, R. 6. Sentences
connected by μέν --- δέ instead of a
primary and an accessory sentence,
189 aand b. Δέ in resumption, 216.
[App. 229. ]
δεῖν. Δεῖ μοί twos and poet. δεῖ μέ τ.;
δεῖ με ποιεῖν, rarely δ. μοι π.. 90 ἃ, note.
Πολλοῦ, μικροῦ δέω, δεῖ, δ 7 a,note. Πολ-
λοῦ, μικροῦ δεῖν, 108 Ὁ. Δεῖ to be un-
derstood from a preceding gerundive,
216, R. 2. Τριάκοστον ἔτος ἑνὸς δέον,
τριάκοντα ἔτη ἑνὸς δέοντα, 57 a, note.
δεικνύναι τινὰ ποιοῦντα, δείκνυμι ποιῶν
and ἐμαυτὸν ποιοῦντα, 178 a, R. 1.
δή [App. 234—236] in resumption, 216.
[δῆθεν, App. 239. ]
δῆλός εἰμι ποιῶν, 177 Ὁ; δῆλός εἰμι. ὅτι
and δῆλόν ἐστιν, ὅτι, ibid., R.2. Δῆλον
ὅτι added by way of assurance, 193, R.
Δῆλον δέ with following γάρ, 196 a, R.
[δήν, App. 242, R.]
[δήπου, δήπουθεν, App. 273 and 240. ]
[δῆτα, App. 237.]
dud, construction, 69; different from the
dative instr., 39 a; διὰ βραχέων, 87 a,
R. 2. Verbs compounded with διά,
with two accusatives, 28 a, R. 3.
διαιρεῖν, διανέμειν τι μέρη τρία, 24 c.
διαμάχεσθαι, διαπράττεσθαι with accus. c.
inf., 164.
διαφερόντως τινός, 63 ο, R. 2.
διαφέρων εἰμί, 180 ο.
διδάσκειν, διδάσκεσθαί τινα, 82 a, R. 2.
διδόναι, offer, 113, R. 1.
δίκαιός εἰμι ποιεῖν, 165 a, R.
δίκην τινός, 31 ἃ, R.
δοκεῖν (δοκεῖς μοι δοκῶ μοι, and simply
δοκῶ, δοκῶ μοι κατακείσεσθαι, δοκεῖ μοι
with acc. ὁ. infin., δοκῶ σε εἶναι), 161,
R. Δοκῶ, δοκεῖ μοι without gram-
matical connexion with the sentence,
193. Δοκεῖν ἐμοί, 168 Ὁ.
δόξαν ταῦτα, 182, R. 2, note.
δρᾶν τινά τι, 25, R. 3.
δυοῖν θάτερον, 19, R. 3.
E.
Ἔάν and ei, 125, R. 1; ἐάν (iv), ἐάνπερ,
ἐάν τε, 194 a; ἐάν πως, whether per-
chance, ibid., R. 2; ἐάν in dependent
sentences after σκοπεῖν, 199 Ὁ. [[Ἐάν,
App. 298. |
ἑαυτοῦ with comparative, 90, R. 3; with
superlative, 95, R. 2; ἑαυτῷ added to
the verb in the middle, 82 a, R. 1.
ἐγγύς with genitive and (poetically) da-
tive, 55, R. 1.
ἐγκαλεῖν τινι ἀδικίαν, 61 a, R. 2.
ἔδει for ἔδει ἄν, 118 a.
εἰ [App. 316] with indic., 108 and 117;
with opt., 135 (cf. R. 1 a and b); in
sentences of comparison, ibid., R. 2;
with an opt. and an indic,, ibid., R. 2,
with subjunctive in the Ionic poets ;
125, R. 2. Εἰ, εἰ γάρ, ete [ App. 317 |
in wishes, 129 (εἰ yap ὦφελον, R. 2).
Ei, εἴπερ, εἴγε, 194a[ App. 317), εἰ μή
(εἰ μὴ dpa, εἰ μὴ εἰ), 194. Ὁ; εἰ δὲ μή, Uf
otherwise, ibid. ; εἰ δέ for εἰ δὲ μή, ibid.
Εἰ μέν without following apodosis εἰ δέ,
ibid., R. Eipy (ἐὰν μή) with partici-
ples, 175 e, note, and 181 a, R. 2, note.
Ei as interrog. particle, 199 b (App.
316]; ei — 7,199 c; εἰ, εἴ πως, whe-
ther perchance, 194 ἃ, R.2. Εἰ for ὅτι
(θαυμάζω, εἰ), 194. ο, [| App. 316, note. |
Ei καί and καὶ εἰ, 194d. [App. 226.
317.]
εἰδέναι, see οἶδα.
εἴθε in wishes, 129 [App.317]; εἴθε ὦφε-
λον, 129, R. 2; εἴθε otherwise with
indic., ibid.
εἶναι with an adverb, 1 b, R. 6; con-
forming itself to the predicate noun
(gerundive, &c.) in gender and num-
5
258
ber, ibid., R. 4; ἔστιν with a plural
subject following, ty a5 ΕΣ note.
Εἶναι c. d., 38 ἃ. Ἔστι μοι Ἄρα
&e., 38 d. With partitive genitive
Gar αἰσχρῶν, &e.),51¢. Ἔστι δικαίου
ἀνδρός ---, τὴν a; with descriptive gen..,
54 Ὁ; ὁ. originis et materia, d4 ο.
Ἔστιν Bs —, ἔστιν οἵ — (οὕς, &e. —,
οἵτινες —), ‘102 b, R. 1; gor ov,
ὅπως — οὐκ ἔστιν πὼς ov, ibid., R. 2.
Εἰμί, ἐστίν, εἰσίν omitted, 215 a with R.
Εἶναι redundant with ἑκών and other
expressions, 151, R. 2. Ἦν, véd.
εἰπεῖν τινά τι (κακῶς), 25, R. 8; εἰπεῖν
as limiting infin. without ὡς, 151, R.1.
els with names of persons, 28 a, R. 1;
παρεῖναι, καθέζεσθαι cis —, 79 a; εἰς
with adverbs of cae 81; ἐς διδα-
σκάλου, et sim., 47, R. 2
εἶτα with participles, 175 a (kara) and
181, R. 2; for καὶ εἶτα, 185 a, R. 6.
[App. 818
εἴτε --- εἴτε (καί), 186. 194 ay in depend.
questions, 199 c; εἴτε --- ἤ, ef — εἴτε,
194a,R.1. [App. 257. 266. 316, R. ]
ἕκαστος with and without article, 11,
R. 2; to be supplied from οὐδείς, 213.
ἑκὼν εἶναι, 151, R. 2.
ἔλαττον with or without
92.
ἐλέγχειν, with ace. ὁ. inf, refute and
prove, 159, R. 2.
ἕλκειν Twa ποδῶν, 57 a, R
ἐλπίς, ἐλπίζειν with aorist inf. without
ἄν, 172 a, R.
ev nearly in the sense of the dat. instrum.,
39, R.; in statements of time, 45 a and
66 a, R. 2; ἐν διδασκάλου, 47, R. 2;
ev τοῖς with the superl., 96, R. 2;
verbs compounded with ἐν in the infin.
of the intention (ἐνευδοκιμεῖν), 148,
ἐναντίος with gen. and dat., 37, R. 1.
ἐναντιοῦσθαί τινι ποιεῖν τι, 140, R. 1.
ἕνεκα after its case, 80 b; its significa-
tion expressed by the mere gen. of the
infin. or of the ace. c. infin., 170 ο, R. 3.
ἐνθάδε, ἐνταῦθα na, 79 a; ἐνθένδε, ἐκεῖθεν
with the art., instead of ἐνταῦθα, ἐκεῖ,
79 ἢ.
ἐξ of the occasion, source, &c., 39, R.;
7, and with gen.,
[udex 1.
ex διδασκάλων, 47, R. 2; ἐξ instead of
partitive genitive, 50 a, R. 2; instead
of ὑπό with passive, 78, R; ; ὁ ἐξ instead
of ὁ ἐν, 6 παρά, 79 Ὁ; ἐκ τοῦ φανεροῦ,
87 a, R. 2. Verbs compounded with
ἐξ, followed py ἐξ, or by the genitive
alone, 57 b, R
ἔξαρνός εἰμί τι, 22 b, note.
ἔξεστί μοι ποιεῖν, rarely με ποιεῖν, 165 a.
ἑξῆς, ἐφεξῆς εἶναι, κεῖσθαί τινι, δδ, R. 1.
ἔοικας οἰομένῳ, 177 Ὁ, R. 5, note.
ἐπεί, ἐπειδή with aorist and plusquamper-
fect, 114 c; ἐπειδή with acc. 6. infin.
in oratio obliqua, 169 b; ἐπεί, for, ibid.,
R. [App. 315.]
ἔπειτα after participles, 175 a (181 a,
R. 2); for καὶ ἔπειτα, 185 a, R. 6.
[App. 318. |
ἐπί, construction, 73; after verbs of re-
joicing, &e. at something, 44 a; ἐπὶ
Κόδρου βασιλεύοντος, ἐπὶ χιόνι πεσούσῃ,
1911.8. Εἰ: 7:
ἐπιβαίνειν γῆς τινος, 59 ὁ.
ἐργάζεσθαί τινά τι, 25, Rao!
ἐρωτᾶν τινά τι, περί τινος, 25, R. 2.
ἔστεΐ App. 305 | with the aor.,114¢, R. 1.
ἔστιν (ἔστιν οἵ, &e.), see εἶναι.
εὐδαίμων τοῦ τρόπου, 61 Ὁ.
εὐθὺς γενόμενος, 175 b.
εὑρίσκειν τινὰ ποιοῦντά τι, 178 Ὁ.
ἔφην as aorist, 113, R. 2.
ep ᾧ, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τε, 108, R. 3; with infin.,
152. 166 b; with the fut. indic., 166,
note.
ἔχειν τι, ἔχεσθαί τινος, 57, note; ὡς ἔχω
(καλῶς ἔχω) with gen., 49 b, R. 2;
ἔχειν with ae governing the gen.,
63 c, R.2; ἔχω, οὐκ ἔχω 6, τι ‘with
subjunctive, 121; with the fut. indic.,
R. 1; «ἔχων, Fi 174 b; θαυμάσας
ἔχω, 170; ; ἔχων (καλῶς) as adjective
atter εἰμί, 180 c; ἔχων (ληρεῖς), 176 ec,
R., τί ἔχων —; 176 b, R.
ἐχρῆν, χρῆν without ἄν, 118 a.
ἕως (ἕως περ) [App. 304] with aorist,
114 ¢, R. 1.
H.
Ἤ [ App. 283—285 ] with comparatives,
89; ἢ κατά, ἢ ὥςτε, 90, R. 4; after
words denoting an opposition: tovvav-
Index I.
riov ἤ, 91, R. 1; inserted and omitted
after πλέον, ἔλαττον, 92.
i, ἢ — ἤ, ἤτοι ---- 7, 186 [App. 283 and
255]; 7, 07 else (sometimes with an
infin. not quite accurately used), R. 1
[App. 283]; 7 — ἤ for et — ἤ in de-
pend, questions, 199 ο, R.1. [App.
284. |
ἦ interrogatively, 199 b. [App. 246.]
ἡ ῥᾷστα, 96.
5 (subjunctive) omitted, 215 a, R. 2.
ἠβουλόμην ἄν, 117 Ὁ, R. 2; ἄν omitted,
118, note.
ἡγοῦμαί τινος and τινί different, 58 Ὁ, R.
[ἤδη, App. 242.]
jew as aorist, 113, R. 2; 7a ἐρῶν, 175 ἃ,
Rt
ἥκειν with adverbs and the genitive (εὖ
ἥκειν τινός), 49 b, R. 2; ἥκω as pert.,
110 a, R. 2; ἧκον as aorist, 113, R. 2.
ἥκιστα, ἥκιστά γε in answers, 199 ὁ,
2
ἥλικος, attraction, 106.
ἡμέρα omitted, 87 b, R. 1.
ἦν, where the present might have been
used, 113, R. 3; ἦν instead of ἦν ἄν,
118 aandb. [ἦν ἄρα, App. 257 c.]
[ἤτοι, App. 255. ]
8.
Θαυμάζειν τινά τινος, θαυμάζειν τινός,
61 b, R. 1; τοῦτό σου θαυμάζω, 53;
θαυμάζω, εἰ, 194¢. [App. 316, note. |
—6e, —Gev [ App. 239], ἐξ οὐρανόθεν, 60,
R. 4
[Onv, App. 241.]
νήσκοντες, of, = οἱ θανόντες, 183, R. 1,
note.
θύειν τὰ Λύκαια, 26, R. 2.
I.
Ἰέναι ἐροῦντα, 175 ἃ, R. 1; ἰέναι τοῦ
πρόσω, 51 b, R.
ἱερός τινος, 62; ἱερόν omitted with the
genitive, 47, R. 2.
ἵνα [App. 311] with subjunctive, 122.
131 Ὁ; with optative, 131 a; with in-
dicative of the intention of an action
which has not resulted, 131 b, R. 3;
iva τί; 189 a, note. [iv ἄν, App. 302. ]
ἵππος, cavalry, 18 c.
259
K.
Kai [ App. 222—226)], cai — καί, ré —
καί, 185 a with R. 1 and 3; kai — τέ,
R. 3, kai — δέ, ibid., R. 2; καί omitted
before εἶτα, ἔπειτα, ibid., R. 6; καί (τέ
— καί) in statements of time (when),
185 Ὁ; καί after adjectives and adverbs
of likeness and equality, 185 ¢ [καὶ δή,
App. 236; καί ye, ib. 249; καί τοι, ib.
253]; καί, καίπερ with participles,
175 e; καὶ ov, 187, note. Kai εἰ and
ei καί, 194 ἃ. [App. 226. 317.] Καὶ
pada, kal πολλά in answers, 199 ὁ,
R. 2. [καὶ ταῦτα, App. 253. |
καινότερος in a sense approaching to the
positive, 93.
καλεῖν τινά TL, ὄνομά TL, ὄνομά τί τινι,
24 b, R. 1.
κάμηλος in the sing., of a multitude, 18 c.
κἂν εἰ, 199 b, R.
κατά, construction, 70; verbs com-
pounded with κατά, denoting a dis-
tinction, 23 b; verbs compounded
with, with gen., 59 a; also used in the
passive, 56, R. 2.
kara for εἶτα with participles, 175 a.
κατέαγα τῆς κεφαλῆς, 51 b, R.
κατήκοος with gen. and dat., 63 ο, R. 1.
[κέ, κέν, App. 297 sqq.]
κεφάλαιον δέ--- yap, 196 a, R. [ App. 260. |
κοινός with gen. and dat., 62, R
κρατεῖν τινος and τινά, 58 b with R.
κρείττων εἰμί with participles, 177 Ὁ, R. 4.
κύριός εἰμι ποιῶν τι, 177 Ὁ, R. 3.
A.
Aayxavew, to become Hy lot, 20, R. 1,
λαμβάνειν τι. λαμβάνεσθαί τινος, 57 a,note.
λαμβάνειν τινὰ τῆς ζώνης, 57 a, R.
λανθάνειν with participle, 177 b; with
ὅτι, ibid., R. 2; ἔλαθον, λήσω with the
aorist of the participle, 183, R. 2.
λέγειν τινά τι, κακῶς, 25, R. 3; λέγειν,
to tell a person to, 140, ἢ. 1. Λέγω,
I mean, with the foregoing case, or
with accus., 19, R. 4.
λοιδορεῖν τινα, λοιδορεϊσθαίτινι, 82 ἃ, RK. 1.
λοιπόν, τό, and τοῦ λοιποῦ, 66 ἃ.
52
260
M.
Ma with accusative, 28 b.
μαθών, τί μαθών, 170 18%
μάλα separated from its adjective, 218 Ὁ ;
μάλα (καὶ pada), μάλιστα in answers,
199 ὁ, R. 2.
μᾶλλον, redundant with comparatives, or
omitted after certain verbs, 99 ¢; μαλ-
λον ἢ ov, 89, R. 2 [App. 285]; μᾶλλον
ἤ in comparison of different qualities,
93 a.
Μαραθῶνι, 45 Ὁ.
μαρτύριον δέ--- γάρ. 190 a, R. [ App. 260. ]
μέλει, μέλω, construction, 58 a with R.
μέλλειν (μέλλω, ἤμελλον, ἠμέλλησα), perl-
phrastic, 116; εἰ μέλλω, 6 μέλλων, ibid.
μεμνῆσθαι, construction, 58 a, R. 2.
μέμφεσθαι. construction, Θθ τας Ἐν Ἰ-
pev | App. 230], 188 with R. (μένγε, note) ;
omitted, ibid. note, and R. 2 (χαίρει,
τότε δ᾽ ἀλγεῖ) ; position, ibid., R.1; μέν
— pév — δέ — δέ, ibid., R. 4; μέν with-
out following δέ, ibid., R. 5; pev — δέ
instead of the connexion of a primary
with an accessory sentence, 189 a and
b; μέν — δέ inaccurately connected
(anacoluth.), 216, R.1. [μὲν δή, App.
236. 250. μὲν οὖν, ib. 269. ]
μένει σε πυθέσθαι, 145, R. 1.
μέντοι | App. 254 with the verb repeated
in answers, 199 ο, R. 2.
μέρος, TO ἐμὸν μέρος, 31 ὁ.
μεστός εἶμι with participle, 177 b, R. 5.
μετά, construction, 74.
μεταμέλει μοι with participle, 177 Ὁ, R. 5.
μεταξύ with participles, 175 b, 181 a,
R. 2
[App. 245. ]
μετατίθεσθαι τοῦτο εἶναι, 159, R. 2.
μετέχειν μέρος, μετέχειν τινός, 57 a, note.
μέχρι (App. 305]; μέχρι ὀψέ, 81. Μέχρι
with aorist in the indic., 114 ο, R. 1;
μέχρι instead of μέχρι ἄν, 127, R. 2.
μή (App. 286 sqq.] with subjunctive in
final sentences, 122; after δέδοικα, φυ-
Adrropa, &e., 124 a (with the fut.
indic., ibid., R. 1; with the present
after ὁρῶ, ibid.) ; elliptically with the
subjunct. present, 124 a, R. 2; with
optative, 131; with the imperative
present, aorist subjunct. in prohibi-
Index I.
tions, 142 and R. [App. 286.1 My
(μηδείς, &c.) and οὐ different, 200 sqq.
Mn very rare in a principal sentence
in indic. [ App. 287] or optat. with ἄν,
200, R.; μή with the imperat. and
prohibitivesubjunct.,201 a[ App.286];
in final and object-sentences, 201 b;
φοβοῦμαι pn — ov, ibid.; rarely py —
py, note; μή in conditional sentences,
202 a, after temporal particles with av
or without ἄν, of the action so often
as occurring, with ὅτε, ὁπότε, ὅπου in
causal signification, 202 b; in relative
sentences, 203; in depend. interrog.
sentences after εἰ and ὅπως, 204 a;
in the second member of a disjunctive
question, 204 b; with the infin., 205 ;
with adjectives and participles without
the article. 206 a and b, with R. 1;
with adject. and partic. with the art.,
207 [ App. 288]; in later writers, where
the earlier have ov, 207, R.2. My with
infin. after verbs of negative meaning,
210 with R. 1 and 156, R. 3,4. My
in prohibitions of two members, 189 a,
R. 1. Μή (ἄρα μή) interrog., 199 Ὁ.
[App.287.] Μὴ οὕτω, μή μοι without
a verb, 215 b. Μὴ οὐ [App. 294---
296] with infin. after a negative verb,
211 a with R.; after expressions of
disapprobation, &c., ibid. b; with par-
ticiples, ibid. 6. Μὴ ὅτι (μὴ 6r.— GAN
οὐδέ, οὐ — μὴ OTL — ἀλλ᾽ οὐδέ), 212.
[App.312.] Μή τί γε. 212, note. [Μή-
τοι γε, App. 256.] Οὐ μή, see ov.
μηδέ, μήτε ---- μήτε, μήτε --- τέ, 208, μήτε
— μηδ᾽ αὖ, μήτε --- δέ, ibid., R. 1.
[μήν, App. 231 sqq. 236. 260.]
μηχανή, τίς pnx. with ace. ὁ. infin., 165 a.
μικροῦ δεῖ and simply μικροῦ, 57 a, note.
μόνος, Where in English we should use
εν adverb, 86 ἃ; μόνος τῶν ἄλλων, 96,
Bs
μυρία (ἀσπίς, &e.), 18 ¢.
μῶν, μῶν ov, μῶν μή, 199b. [ App. 267.]
N.
ΓΝαί, νή, App. 245.]
νεώτερος in the sense of the positive, 93.
νικᾶν Ἴσθμια, 26, R. 2; νικῶ, have con-
Index 1.
quered, 110, R. 2; ἐνίκησε μολεῖν, 145,
ἘΠῚ:
νομίζειν with dative, 44 Ὁ.
[νῦν, viv, νύ, App. 243, 244. |
oO.
Ὃ τὴν πορφυρίδα, the man with the —,
πε δὲ 1858 R. 2:
6, ὅπερ, ὃ καί, ἃ καί as connecting particle,
19 ἃ, R.
ὅδε, here, 100 ο.
ὁδός omitted, 87 b, R. 1; ὁδόν, 31 ἃ, R.
ὄζειν μύρου, 60, R. 2.
οἶδα with partep., ὅτε or ὡς, 178 a and
R. 5 (rare with acc. ὁ. infin., R. 6).
Οἶδα, εὖ ἴσθι extra structuram, 198; εὖ
οἶδ᾽ ὅτι, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι added for assurance,
ibid., R. Οἶσθ᾽ ὃ δρᾶσον, 141, R. 1.
οἰκεῖός τινος and τινί, 62 with R.
οἰκία omitted with the gen., 47, ΠΝ, 2.
οἶμαι δεῖν with nominative and infin.,
160, R. οἶμαι, οἴει extra structuram,
193; οἶμαι δέ, καὶ σύ and οἶμαι δὲ καὶ
σέ, 193, note.
οἴχομαι with signification of perfect, 110
_a, R. 2.
οἷος with the superlative, 96, R. 1; at-
traction with οἷος, 106; οἵῳ σοὶ ἀνδρί, |
106, R. 2; οἷος, τοιοῦτος οἷος instead
of ὥςτε with infin., 1666; οἷός re, οἷόν
re, ibid, R. 1; οἷος = ὅτι τοιοῦτος,
198 a, R. 3; οἷος with adjectives
(ἀμήχανος οἷος), ibid., R. 4; in ex-
clamations of wonder, 198 b, R. Otov,
ota δή with participles, 175 e.
ὀλίγον with comparatives, 43, R., ὀλίγου,
as adverb, 57 a, R., note; without ἄν
with aorist indic., 118, R. 2.
ὅλος, the article with, 11, R. 4.
ὅμοιος with dative instead of καί, 37, R.
2; ὅμοιος, ὁμοίως καί, 185 ὁ.
ὁμοῦ, adjectives compounded with, with
dat. and gen., 37 with R. 1.
ὅμως with partep. transposed, 175 e.
ὄνομα, τό, ὁ Μακάρτατος, τὸ ὄνομα Σωσίαν,
49 a, note. :
ὄνομα τίθεσθαί τινι, ὄνομα Σωσίαν τ. τινι,
24 b, R. 1.
ὀνομάζειν εἶναι, 24 Ὁ, R. 2.
ὅπως | App. 310], 123, R.1; (and ὅπως
261
μή) with subjunctive in final sentences,
122. 131 Ὁ; in object-sentences, 123 ;
with optat., 131 a; with the fut. indic.,
122, 123 with R. 1; with in dic. of an
action intended, but which has not
resulted, 131 b, R. 3; ὅπως (ὅπως μή)
with the fut. indic. instead of the im-
perative, 123, R. 4; ὅπως μή with
subjunctive and indic. (for μή) after
verbs of fearing, 124 b; ὅπως μή ellip-
tically with the fut. indic., 124 ῬΈΕΙ.
Ὅπως (interrogatively) after verbs
such as μηχανᾶσθαι, 145, R. 2; after
σπουδάζειν, and the like, 164, BR. 2;
ὅπως μή after verbs denoting a _pro-
hibition, or a challenge, 146, R. 2
(124 b); ὅπως after negatived verdba
declarandi, 159, R. 3. Ὅπως ἄν in
final sentences, 122 [App. 302]. Οὐκ
ἔστιν ὅπως, 102 Ὁ, R. 2. 122, R. 2.
“Ores with superlatives, 96.
ὁρᾶν μή with subjunct. and indic., 124
with R. 1; the infinitives ὁρᾶν, ἰδεῖν
after adjective phrases and intransitive
verbs, 150 a, R. 2.
és and és ἄν, 126, R. 1; ὅς in causal re-
lative sentences, 105 ἃ (ὅς ye); inter-
rog. = ὅςτις, 198 Ὁ; ὃς ἄν [ App. 298]
instead of εἴ τις, 195 b; referring to
a plural antecedent, 99 d.
ὅσος, attraction, 106; after adjectives
(θαυμαστὸς ὅσος), 198 a, R. 4; in ex-
clamations of wonder, 198 Ὁ, R.; ὅσον
= τοσοῦτον ὥςτε with infin., 166 c;
ὅσον μή, ὅσα μή, With the partep., 175
e, note.
ὅσαι ἡμέραι, ὁσημέραι, 106, R. 3.
ὅςτις as simple relative pronoun, 105 (a
man to —, ἔστιν ὅςτις, οὕτως --- ὅςτις,
in causal signif.); for εἴ τις, 195 b;
referring to a plural antecedent, 99 d.
"Osris βούλει, 103, R. 2, note; ὅ,τι
(ὅτι) with the superlative, 96. [App.
312 b. 6 re μή, ibid. ]
ὅτε [ App. 313] in causal signif., 127, R.1;
μέμνημαι, ὅτε, 178 a, R. 5, note.
ὅτι (App. 312] and ds after verba decla-
randi, &e., 159, R. 3; a statement be-
gun with ὅτι, carried on with the infin.,
ibid., R. 4. Ὅτι after the verbs to know,
&e., 1788, R.5. Ὅτι, the circumstance
262
that, as regarding the fact that, 170
a, R. Ὅτι before oratio recta, 192 a;
ὅτι, for proof that, 192 Ὁ, R. To δὲ
μέγιστον, ὅτι and ὃ δὲ μέγιστον, ὅτι,
197. “Ort τί, 198 a, note.
Οὐ (οὐκ, οὐδείς, &c.) [App. 286 and note]
different from μή, 200 sqq. (see μή);
φοβοῦμαι, pn — ov, 201 b; ov after εἰ,
202 a, R.; in causal sentences, 202 b,
R.; in relative sentences, 203; οὐδεὶς
τοιοῦτος ὅςτις ov, ibid., note; in depend.
interrog. sentences, 204 a and b; with
the infin. after φημί and verbs of opi-
nion, sometimes also others, 205 and
ibid., note; with the infin., but belong-
ing to the principal verb, ibid., R. 1;
or repeated, R. 2; after ὥςτε, R. 3;
otherwise irree., R. 4; οὐ with adjec-
tives and participles without the article,
206 a and b, R. 1; with the art., 207 ;
in sentences which would else require
μή, as neg. of a single portion of the
predicate, 207, R. 1; ἡ ov περιτείχισις,
207, note.
Οὐ (οὐκ) redundant after μᾶλλον 7, 89,
R. 2 [App. 285]; belonging to two
clauses connected by μέν — δέ, 189 a
and note; redundantly repeated, 209 a,
R. 1; redundant in sentences with ὡς
after negative verbs, 210, R. 2. Οὔ
(od δῆτα), πο, 199 ο, R. 2 (od pa τὸν AC,
ov, 209 a, R. 2); οὐ δή, od δήποτε, οὔ
τί που interrog., 199 a. Ov μόνον,
οὐχ ὅτι, οὐχ ὅπως, 212 [App. 310 ο,
312 and R.]. Οὐ μή (οὐδεὶς μή) [App.
293] with subjunctive (indic. fut.) ne-
gatively, 124 a, R. 3; with the indic.
fut. in prohibition, 124 a, R. 4.
οὐδαμῶς ὅπως (ws) ov, 105 b, R.
οὐδέ, 208 (cf. οὔτε).
οὐδεὶς ὅςτις ov (οὐδένα ὅντινα ov), 105
bys Ε:
οὐδὲν μᾶλλον, 43, R. (οὐδέν adverb.) ;
ον ἦ, 93 ο; οὐδὲν ἄλλο ἤ, 215 b,
pli;
οὐδέτερον, οὐδέτερα as predicate, 1 b, R. 5.
οὐκοῦν, οὔκουν. 199 b with R. [ App. 268. |
οὖν [| App. 264 sqq.] in resumption, 216.
οὕνεκα, ὁθούνεκα, 159, R. 3.
οὔτε — οὔτε, οὔτε — τέ, TE — οὔτε,
208; τέ — οὐ for οὔτε, 1014., R. 1;
Index TI.
ovre — οὔτε ---- οὐδέ (οὐδ᾽ av), οὔτε ---
οὐδ᾽ αὖ, οὔτε, --- δέ, οὐ — οὐ, οὔτε ---
οὐ, οὔτε the first time omitted, ibid.
Οὔτε — οὔτε, the connexion resolved,
PINGS its ie
otros, here, 100 c; redundant, 100 e;
τρίτον ἔτος τοῦτο, 90, R.
οὕτως with participles, 175 a (181 a,
2)
ἀφ λιο ξένειν ἀσεβείας, ἀδικίαν, γέλωτα, 61
a and R. 2.
[ὅφρα, App. 303. |
Il.
Παθών, ti παθών, 176 b, R.
πάντως in answers, 199 ο, R. 2.
πάνυ ye, πάνυ μὲν οὖν in answers, 199 ¢,
R. 2.
παρά, construction, 75; instead of ὑπό,
78, R.
παρασκευάζεσθαι ποιήσοντα, ὡς ποιήσοντα,
ποιεῖν, 175 d, R. 1.
mas with the article and without it, 11,
R. 4 (of πάντες, in all); ἐς πᾶν κακοῦ
ἰέναι, ἐν παντὶ κακοῦ εἶναι, 49 Ὁ, R.;
τῷ παντὶ κρείττων, 43.
παύειν and παύεσθαι (ἐπαυσάμην, ἐπαύ-
aOnv), 82 Ὁ; παύειν τινὰ ποιοῦντά τι,
178 b.
πείθειν, πείθεσθαι, ἐπείσθην, 82 c, R. 2;
πείθεσθαί τινος for τινί, 58 Ὁ, R., note.
πειρᾶσθαι ποιοῦντα for ποιεῖν, 177 Ὁ, R. 3.
πέρ [ App. 247] with participles, 175 e.
περί, construction, 76; put after its case,
80 Ὁ; περί or simple genitive after
certain verbs, 58 a, R. 1.
περιορᾶν Twa ποιοῦντά τι, 178 Ὁ (and zr.
τι γίγνεσθαι = ἐῶ) ; περιϊδεῖν with the
aorist of the participle, 183, R. 2.
--πλάσιος, adjectives in, constructed as
comparatives, 91.
πλέον with or without 7, and with gen.,
92 (πλείους #). Πλέον οὐδέν ἐστί μοι
ἀγανακτοῦντι, 177 Ὁ, R. ὅ.
πλήν, οὐδὲν ἄλλο πλήν, 91, R. 2; as ad-
versative conjunction, 187, R. 2.
πλησίον εἶναι with the dative for the
genitive, 55, R. 1. Ἴ
ποιεῖν τινά τι (εὖ), 25, R. 3; εὖ, καλῶς
ποιῶν, with good reason, 170 ο | App.
248 b]; ποιεῖσθαι ὅπλα, to cause to be
Index I.
made for oneself, 82 a, R. 2; ποιεῖσθαι
θήραν, and the like, 82 c, R. 1; ποιεῖ-
σθαί τι περὶ πολλοῦ, ὀλίγου, 65 a, R.
ποῖος with the article, 11, R. 5.
πολλά as adverb, 88 a.
πολλαπλάσιος, construct. as compara., 91.
πολύ with compara., 43, R.; and πολλῷ
sometimes put after the adject., 218 b.
πόῤῥω (σοφίας, &c.), far gone, advanced,
in any thing, 50 b (different from
πόῤῥω, far from).
[ποτέ, App. 274. ]
πότερον (πότερα) --- 7, 199 ο.
[πού, App. 272 sq. ]
πράττειν, πράττεσθαι, 82 a, R. 2.
πρίν (ov — πρίν) with indic. aor., 114 ¢,
. 1; πρὶν ἄν with subj., 127, πρίν
with opt., 138; πρίν with infin., 167
(πρὶν 7, ibid., R.). [App. 306. ]
πρό, verbs compounded with, with gen.,
59 b.
προκαλεῖσθαί τινά τι and εἴς τι, 25, R. 2.
πρός, construction, 77 (πρὸς δέ, adverb.
71, 2).
mposnker pot ποιεῖν and με ποιεῖν, 164 a;
mposnkev without ἄν, 118 a.
προτεραῖος as comparative, 91.
πρότερον ἤ with infin., 167, R. 1.
Πυθοῖ, ᾿Ισθμοῖ, 45 Ὁ.
πυκνά as adverb, 88 a.
πυνθάνεσθαί τί τινος, 60 a; πυνθάνεσθαί
4 γιγνόμενον and γίγνεσθαι, 178 a and
"Ὁ.
mas; πόθεν; negatively, 199. ο, R. 2;
πῶς yap ov; πῶς ov μέλλει in answers,
199 ο, R. 2; πῶς οὐ (δεινόν ;), 199 b,
note. πῶς ἄν in wishes, 129, R. 1.
=
Σημεῖον δέ ---- γάρ, 196 a, ἢ. [App. 260.]
στέργειν τι and τινί, 44. ἃ, R.
συγγιγνώσκειν τῇ ἐπιθυμίᾳ τινός and (but
rarely) τινὶ τῆς ἐπιθυμίας, 61 b, R. 1.
συμβαίνει γίγνεσθαί τι, 104, and τὶ γιγ-
νόμενον, 177 Ὁ, R. 8.
συμβουλεύειν, συμβουλεύεσθαι, 82 ἃ, R. 2.
συμφέρον, τό, substantively, 180 b, R. 2.
σὺν τῷ φόβῳ λήγοντι, 181 a, R. 7; verbs
compounded with σύν, with the dative,
36 b and R. 2; adjectives with dative
and genitive, 37 with R. 1.
263
συνειδέναι τινὶ ποιοῦντί TL, τινὰ ποιοῦντα,
5 ~ a ΄ »"»
ἐμαυτῷ ποιοῦντι and ποιῶν. 178 a, R. 7.
συνελόντι, συνελόντι εἰπεῖν, 38 ὁ and 151.
συντέμνοντι εἰπεῖν, 98 0.
συντριβῆναι τῆς κεφαλῆς, 51 b, R.
σφόδρα γε in answers, 199 ὁ, R. 2.
T.
Τάδε of persons, 98 a, note. τὰ νῦν τάδε,
100 e, R.
ταῦτα, therefore, καὶ ταῦτα, and that, 100
6, R. [App. 253.]
ταὐτὸν τοῦτο, likewise, 19, R. 3.
τέ [ App. 227,228]. τέ --- καί, 185 a and
R. 3; τέ alone, 185, R. 1; τέ --- τέ,
ibid., R. 3; position of τέ, ibid., R. 4;
ré — δέ (τέ ---- ἔπειτα δέ. Ke.), ibid.,
R. 5; anacoluth. with re — καί, 216,
R. 1; τέ transposed, ibid.; τέ — οὔτε,
208; τέ — ov instead of οὔτε, ibid.,
Red.
τεθνάναι τῷ φόβῳ τοὺς Θηβαίους. 22b, note
τεκμήριον δέ ---- γάρ, 190 ἃ, R. [ App. 200.
τελευτῶν, at last, 170 ο, R.
τίκτουσα, ἡ, = τεκοῦσα, 183, R. 1, note.
τιμᾶν, τιμᾶσθαί τινι with gen.,61 a, R. 1.
τιμωρεῖν τινι, τιμωρεῖσθαί τινα, 82 6.
τίς (interrog. pron.) instead of ὅςτις in
depend. questions, 198 Ὁ; ri as predi-
cate to a plural subject, 97 Ὁ. Ti οὐ
—,; instead of the imperative, 141,
R. 8. Ti γάρ [App. 261]; τί μήν
[App. 231]; τί γὰρ οὐ μέλλει; Im an-
swers, 199 ο, R. 2. Ti μαθών; ri
παθών; 176 b, R.
ris (indefinite pron.) understood from
the infin., 144, R. 2; τί adverbial,
(μᾶλλόν τι), 43, R. Τῶν τις ἱππέων,
218 ἃ.
τὸ δέ elliptically, 188, R. 7.
τὸ μή, τὸ μὴ οὐ with the infin., 15
τοιοῦτος with the article, 10, R. 3.
τότε with participles (τότ᾽ ἤδη), 175 a.
τοὐναντίον, 19, R. ὃ.
τρέπειν, τρέπεσθαι, ἐτρεψάμην, ἐτραπύμην,
82 Ὁ and d, R. 2.
τρόπον and τρόπῳ, 31 ἃ, 41.
τυγχάνειν with participle, 177 Ὁ (ὧν
omitted, R. 1); ὅ,τι τυγχάνω, ὅπου
τυγχάνω, ibid., R. 1, note. τυχύν as
adverb, 182, note.
6, BR. 4.
264
γῆ:
Υἱός omitted, 47, R. 1.
ὑπακούειν τινί and τινός, ὅ8 b, R.
ὑπέρ, construction, 71; verbs com-
pounded with ὑπέρ, with double ac-
cus., 28 a, R. 3; with gen., 59 b (imep-
opav τινα).
ὑπεύθυνος τῆς ἀρχῆς, and the like, 63 d.
ὑπήκοος, 63 C, Ra
ὑπό, construction, 78.
ὑστεραῖος as comparative, 91.
ὕστερον ἤ with infinitive, 167, R.
Φ,
Φανερός εἰμι ποιῶν τι, 177 Ὁ; φανερός,
ort, ibid., R. 2.
φαίνεσθαι with participle, 177 Ὁ (ὦν
omitted, R. 1); with infin., R. 3.
φεύγειν, to be an exile, 110 8. Ἢ ὩΣ
φημί, φασίν, extrastructuram, 193; posi-
tion of φημί, 219 ὁ (ἄν φαίη, b, R.).
φθάνειν ἤ for PO. πρίν, 167, R.; φθάνειν
ποιοῦντά τι, 177 a; οὐκ ἂν φθάνοις
ποιῶν, 177 b, R. 6; ἔφθην with the
aorist of the participle, 183, R.; οὐκ
ἔφθην ποιήσας — καί, 185 b.
φίλος as adjective and substant., 37, R. 1.
Χάριν as preposition, 31 4, R.
χιλία (ios), 18 ο.
χρῆσθαί τινι φίλῳ, 19, R.1; χρῆσθαί τινί
το πὶ Jee Le
We
Ψῆφος omitted, 87 b, R. 1.
Q.
"Ὧν or some other participle, where in
Engl. when, 174 b, R.; omitted after
ἅτε, οἷα δή, ὡς, 175 c; with καίπερ,
ibid. e; with τυγχάνειν and other
verbs, 177 b, R. 1; ὄντα omitted with
Index 1.
ἀποφαίνειν and other verbs, 178 a,
R. 4; ὄντος in the gen. absol., 181 a,
R. 5, ὄντα in the aceus. absol., 182,
R. 3.
ὡραία γάμου, 63 b.
ὡς [App.307]. ὡς (ὥςπερ) placed before
the preposition (ὡς περὶ μητρὸς τῆς
χώρας), 80 ἃ, R. ὡς, ὡς τάχιστα, tem-
poral particle [ App. 307 ἃ 7 with aorist
or plusquamperfect, 114. ο.
ὡς with subjunctive in final sentences,
122. 131 b; with optative, 131 a; in-
stead of ὅπως in object-sentences, 123,
R. 6; after verbs of fearing, 124 b,
R. 2: ὡς ἄν with subjunctive in final
sentences, 122 [with note, and App.
302]; ὡς with potential optative with
ay of intention and aim, 137. ‘Qs and
ὅτι after verba declarandi et opinandi,
159, R. 3.
‘Qs (ὥς ye) with the infinitive in a restric-
tive sense (ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν), 151. ‘Qs
instead of ὥςτε, so that, 166 ο, R. 2.
‘Qs with participles, 175 d (rare after
οἶδα, 178 a, R. 3); with gen. absol.,
181 a, R. 2; with ace. absol., 182 with
R.1. ‘Qs = ὅτι οὕτως, 198 a, R. 3; ὡς
with adverbs (θαυμαστῶς os), ibid.,
R.4. ‘Qs with superl. [and some posi-
tives], 96 [App. 307 d]. ‘Qs ἂν εἰ,
139 ὁ. ‘Qs elliptically with the fut.
indic., 215 b, R.2. [és with numerals,
App. 307 6. ὡς eis, &e., ibid.]
[ὡς as preposition, App. 307 ¢, R.]
[@s, demonstrative, App. 308. }
"Qsrep with acc. absol., 182; ὥςπερ ἂν εἰ,
139 ¢.
"Qsre[ App. 309] with theinfin. in general,
152; so that with infin., 166 a and Ὁ (on
condition of, in order to) ; with indic.,
ibid. a; redundant with infin., 144, R.1,
145, R. 3, 146, R. 2 (156, R. 8); ἢ
ὥςτε after the comparative, 150 c¢;
with acc. ὁ. infin. after verbs of effect-
ing, 164, R. 1. "Qsre (so that) with
partep. after a preceding partep., 166,
note. Ὥςτε with participles = ἅτε,
175: 6.
ὦφελον, εἴθ᾽ ὠφελον, 129, R. 2.
NDE ke LE
A.
Accusative, 21; with verbs which in
Engl. do not take the acc. object, 22
a and Ὁ; in phrases having the signi-
fication of a transitive verb, ibid. b,
note; with verbs which in composi-
tion acquire transitive signification,
23 a (with verbs with κατά, ibid. b);
double-accus., the one as apposition to
the object, 24 (with verbs denoting
distribution by parting into, 24 c);
double-ace. of the object, 25; accus.
of the same etymol. or of cognate
meaning, after intransitives, 26 a (νικᾶν
Ἴσθμια, R. 2); with adjectives, 31 b,
R.; accus. of the same etymol. to-
gether with an object-accus., 26 b;
with a passive, ibid. Accus. of a pro-
noun or of a neuter adjective after
intransitives,27 aandb. Accus. with
prepositions, 28 (68 sqq.); with verbs
of motion without preposition, 28 a,
R. 2; double accus. with verbs com-
pounded with διά and ὑπέρ, ibid., R. 3;
aceus. of the extension and distance,
29; of time, 30; of the part in respect
of which, 31 with R. (40, R.); of the
part of the body, and along with it the
object-accus. of a person, 31, R. 2;
adverbial accus., 31d; put elliptically,
32 with R. 1. Accus. retained with
verbs which are predicated passively
of the object of reference, 35, R. 3.
Accus. absol. (or double-accus.), 182.
Adjective; position with the article, 9
with R. 2. Adjectives with the accus.,
31 b; with the dative, 37 (with the
dat. and the gen., ibid., R. 1); with
the gen., 62, 63, 64 (adjectives com-
pounded with a@ priv., 63 a, R. 1;
compound, with the sense of fulness,
63 a, R. 2; in ικός, 63 ¢; compound,
with the gen. of the substantive notion
involved in them, 63 d, R.); in the
gender of the partitive gen., 50 a, R.
3. Adjectives where in English ad-
verbs, 86 a (adjectives in atos and
other adjectives of time and _ place,
ibid., R.). Adjective in apposition to
a substantive with the article, 12 and
86 Ὁ; with the article in the mace.
and neuter put substantively, 87 a (τὸ
βαρβαρικόν, and the like in ικόν) ; in
the neuter for abstract substantives, 87
a, R. 1; with a preposition instead of
the adverb, 87 a, R. 2; certain ad-
jectives quite as substantives (with a
gen., &c.), 87 b (in the fem., ibid. and
R. 1). Adjectives in the neut. plur. as
adverbs, 88 a with R.; singular, 88 b.
Adverbs in the form of the dat. fem.,
42, R. 1; of place and time, with
partitive gen., 50 b; adverbs (prepo-
sitions) with the gen., 63 c, R. 2;
adverbs of rest after verbs of motion,
79. Position of, 218 b. Adverbs
with εἶναι, 16, R. 6.
of place with the partitive gen.,
50 b; interchanged with each other,
79 a and b; attraction after the rela-
tive adverbs of place, 103, R. 2, note.
Local adverbs from names of cities,
28 a, R. 2 and 45 b.
266
Affirmation, forms of, in answers, 199 ec,
“Ὡς
Affirmative notion to be supplied from
the negative, 213.
Anacoluthia in general, and forms of,
216; more special kinds of, with ré —
καί, pev — δέ, οὔτε --- οὔτε, ibid., R.1;
(with ré — καί, 185, R.5; with μέν ---
δέ, 188, R. 5, 189, R. 2); as construc-
tion πρὸς τὸ σημαινόμενον, ibid., R. 2;
where the substant. is detached from
its sentence by a relative sentence,
101 a, R.; with ὅτι, ὡς, and accus. c.
infin., 159, R. 4; in participial con-
structions, 176 e and R.; where the
negative is repeated, 209 a, R. 1.
Index IT.
tent, weight, &c., ibid., R. 2; to cha-
racterize the whole sentence, 19, R.
3, and 197 (τὸ δὲ μέγιστον). Apposi-
tion of the part to the whole as ob-
ject, 32, R. 1. Apposition partitively
instead of a partitive gen., 50 b, R. 4.
Apposition of an entire sentence, 190.
Article, in general, 8; where in Engl. a
possess. pronoun, 8, R. 1; omitted
with certain words, 8, R. 2; position
of, with substant. having an adject. or
partep., 9a; put to the following ad-
jective, 9 a, R. 3; connecting adverbs
or prepositions with substantives, 9 b;
with substant. governing a gen., 10
with R. 2, and (gen. of a pron.) 3;
Anastrophe of the preposition, 80 b.
Answer, affirmat. and negat., 199 ο, R. 2.
Aorist indic., 111; peculiar usage of,
with possess. pronouns, ibid., R. 4;
with substantives to which two speci-
fications are appended, ibid., R. 6.
ibid., R. (of that which is wont to
happen, a; ἐγέλασα, nveca, &c., instead
of the present, b; in negative ques-
tions instead of the imperative, ο, cf.
143, R. 3; of verbs denoting office,
public dignity, aor. of first attainment,
d); sometimes not very different from
the present, 112, R. 1; with ἐπεί, &c.,
114 ¢, with ἕως, éste, πρίν, μέχρι, ibid.,
R. 1; instead of the plusquamperf.,
114 ¢, R. 2 (retained in oratio obliqua
from oratio recta, 130 b, R. 2); with
ἄν, 117 a and Ὁ (instead of the im-
perf., a, R. 1; of that which might
have been, b, R. 2). Aor. subjunct.,
128 a; with μή prohibitive, 142 { App.
286]. Aor. optat. with signif. of past
time, 134 ἃ. and Ὁ ; without this signif.,
ibid. 6. Optat. of aor. and fut., 134 ο,
R. Aor. imperat., 141. Aor. infin. as
preterite, 172 a; without this signif.,
ibid. Ὁ; with ἄν, answering to aor.
indic. and optat. with ἄν, often ap-
proximating to the signif. of a fut.,
173; without dy instead of the fut.
after ἐλπίς, &c., 172 a, R. Participle
of the aor., of a simultan. single and
momentary action (especially with
ἔλαθον and ἔφθην), 183, R. 2. Par-
ticiple of the aor. with ἄν, 184.
Apposition to the subject or object, 19
with R. 1 (as); in statement of ex-
Article with demonstr. pronouns and
adjectives, 11 with R. 2 and 3; when
omitted, R. 1; with πᾶς and ὅλος,
R. 4; with ποῖος, R. 5; with nume-
rals, R. 6; with substantives having
an adject. in apposition, where in Engl.
the indef. art., 12; with prop. names,
13 a and b; before the gen. of the
name of the father, 13 a, R. With
adject. and partep. put substantively,
14 a (180 b, R.1); with an adverb or
a prepos., substantively, 14. Ὁ; put ad-
verbially, ibid., R. 2. The art. go-
verning the gen.,14¢; with the infin.
and ace. ὁ. infin., 15 a and b (154 and
170); belonging to an entire depend.
sentence, 15, R. 1, 2; with omission
of the substant. or adject. to be re-
peated, 16 a; omitted with the second
of two connected words, 166; ellip-
tically, with a substant. understood, 17.
Asyndeton, 185 a, R. 6; where a whole
sentence attached, 190.
Attraction of the case with ὡς, ὥςπερ,
καθάπερ, 20, R. 3; with the compara-
tive, 89; of gender with the demon-
strative pron., 98 a; of the case of the
relative pron., 103 with R. 1; rarer
instances of, R. 2 and note, R. 3 (at-
tracted relat. pron. neut. nearly in the
sense of ὅτι) ; attract. of relat. adverbs
of place, ibid., R. 2, note. Relat. ad-
Index I. 267
verbs by attraction after prepositions,
passing into pronouns and forming con-
junctions, ibid., R. 3. Attraction with
οἷος, ἥλικος, 106, R. 2; with οὐδεὶς
ὅςτις ov, 105 b, R.; with ὥςτε, 166, n.
Attraction of subject of a depend. sen-
tence to the primary, 191 with R. 1.
C.
Causal conjunctions, 194 d, note.
Cities, names of, in dat. without ἐν in
statements of place, 45 b.
Collective, sing. with verb plur., 3 a.
Comparative with 7 and the same case,
or an entire sentence, or the nomina-
tive by itself, 89; -with πρό, παρά,
ibid., R. 1; with gen., 90 with R.1;
with gen. of a pronoun, and therewith
7, ibid., R. 2; with αὐτός, αὑτοῦ, 90,
R. 3; with the genitives ἐλπίδος, λό-
you, &e., 90, R. 4; with ἢ κατά (μεί-
(ov παρά, πρός, ἢ ὥςτε), 90, R. 4;
two comparatives connected by 7, 93
a; comparat. of a tolerably high de-
gree, 93 Ὁ; comparat. instead of the
positive of certain adjectives (in the
neuter), ibid. Comparative instead of
the superlative, in speaking of two, 94.
Conditional sentences, simple in indic.,
108; hypothet. in indic., 117 (indic.,
with ἄν in the primary apodosis) ;
in the optat., 135 (the apodosis in
optat. with dy); both forms (indic.
and optat.) used interchangeably, 135,
R.1land2. Conditional conjunctions,
194 a; the condition expressed as in-
depend. sentence without conjunction,
194 a, R. 3; more specific condition
annexed to a condition, ibid.
Conjunctions formed of a preposition and
a relative pronoun, 103, R. 3; copu-
lative conjunctions, 185 ; disjunctive,
186; adversative, 187; adversative
and partitive, 198; causal, 194 d,
note. Temporal, ibid. The conjunc-
tion omitted in attaching a sentence
to ταὐτόν, &e., 190; the conjunction
repeated after an interposed sentence,
216, note.
eo οοΝς πρὸς TO σημαινύμενον, 216,
+ ede
Dz.
Dative, 33; commodi and incomm., 34
with R. 1; dat. comm. to a substant.,
34, R. 2; of the object of reference
to verbs governing the accus., 35 a
and b; to verbs which take the gen.,
ibid. b, R. 2 (the object of reference
of active made into subject of the
passive verb, 35, R. 3); to intransi-
tive verbs, 36 a, and (to verbs com-
pounded with a preposition) b; in-
terchangeable with a prepos., 36 a,
R. 2, b and note. Dative governed
by adjectives, 37; in some, alternating
with gen., R. 1; to ὅμοιος, ἴσος, in-
stead of καί with nominative, R. 2.
Dative to verbal substantives, 37, R.
3; to εἰμί, ὑπάρχω, 38 a; with a
partep. in statements of time, ibid. b;
dat. of a partcp. of the situation in
which any thing appears, 88 ὁ; ἔστι
μοι βουλομένῳ, and the like, 38d; dat.
to the predicate instead of the gen.,
38 6; dat. ethicus of pron., 38 f; dat.
instead of ὑπό with the passive, 38 g.
Dat. of the means (instrumentalis),
39 (different from διά, ame, ἐξ, ev, R.) ;
dat., ix respect of, 40 (different from
accus., R.); dat. of the efficient cause,
41; dat. modi, 42 (of certain substant.,
adverbially, R. Land 2; ofthe military
force with which, R. 3); of the mea-
sure of difference, 43; with verbs de-
noting an affection (at or upon some-
thing), 44 a with R.; with χρῆσθαι, Ὁ;
dat. in statements of time, 45; of the
place, poet., 45 Ὁ. Dat. denoting cir-
cumstance or appurtenance, attached
to a substant., 45 Ὁ, R. Dat. or accus.
with infin. to a dat. as subject, 158 b.
Dat. governed by the principal verb
with annexed infin. or acc. 6. infin.,
162. 164, R. 3.
Demonstrative, see Pronoun, demonstr.
Dependent sentences in oratio obliqua
after a preterite, 132 a—d; appended
to a dubitative optat. with ἄν, 138
with R. 1; in the indic., where other
languages have a different mood, 140.
Depend. sentences accessory to an
268
accus. c. infin., sometimes absorbed |
into the same form, 169 a and b.
Depend. and primary sentence alter-
nating, 197 and 216, R. 3. Instead
of the depend. sentence, a co-ordinate
connexion by pev— δέ, 189 a and Ὁ.
Peculiarities in the manner of attach-
ing dependent sentences of different
kind, 191 sqq.
Deponens, medium or passivum, 82 b,
R. 1; depon. pass. from an original
purely passive signification, 82 ο, R. 2;
perf. med. of deponents used actively
and passively, 83 b; passive aor. of
depon. med., ibid.
Dual of the subject with the verb in the
plural, 1a, R.2; with a partcp. in the
plural, 1 b, R.1; in the femin. with a
partep. in the masc., 1 Ὁ, R. 2.
E.
Ellipsis of the substantive to adjectives
and possessive pronouns, 47 Ὁ with B.
1; of the verb, see Verb. Ellipsis of
an entire member of the thought, in-
timated by a particle, or in some other
way, 215 b, R. 2.
F.
Feminine in the dual with a partep. in
the masculine, 16, R. 2.
Final sentences in the subjunct., 123 with
R., and 131 Ὁ; in the opt., 131 a; in
the indic., in speaking of an action
which has not taken effect, 131 b,
R. 3.
Future in the med., with the other
tenses actively formed, 82d. Fut. in
the indic., 115 a (in relative sentences
expressing purpose and destination,
R. 1); with ὅπως, ὅπως μή, 122, 123
with R. 1 and R. 4; with μή, 124,
R. 1; fut. in presenti and in preeter-
ito expressed by μέλλω, 116; (in
preterito not denoted, 130 b, R. 2).
Optat. fut., 134 a with R. Infin. fut.
after ὑπισχνοῦμαι, and the like, 171 a,
R. 2; for the present after certain
verbs, ibid., R. 3.
Futurum exactum, 115 Ὁ (for the simple |
future in certain verbs, ibid.).
Index 11
G.
Genitive, 46; possessivus and conjunc-
tivus, 47 (εἶναί τινος, ποιεῖν τί τινος) ;
with omission of υἱός, γυνή, R. 1; of
οἰκία, ἱερόν, R. 2; governed by a pro-
noun in neut., 47, R.3; by the article,
14 c; objective, 48; for preposi-
tions (πρός, eis, rarely περί, ἐν), ibid.,
R.; definitivus, 49 a. Gen. generis,
49 b; with adverbs to the verbs ἔχειν
and ἥκειν, ibid., R. 2; partitive gen.,
50 a (position of words, R. 1); go-
verned by an adjective in the gender
of the genitive, 50 a, R. 3; by ad-
verbs of place and time, 50 b; with-
out a governing word, 51; of the
name of a country, governed by name
of a particular place, 51 Ὁ; with εἶναι,
γίγνεσθαι, γράφειν, τιθέναι τινά, eyypa-
φεσθαι, &e., 51 c; instead of the ac-
cusative, somewhat of, 51 d; in cer-
tain phrases with the signification of ἃ
prece of, ibid., R. Two genitives to
one substantive, 52. Possessive gen.
governed by a pron. or ἕν, or by an
entire sentence (something in, on the
part of somebody), 53; gen. in the
signification of (περί), 53, R. Gen.
with εἶναι (ἀνδρὸς ἀγαθοῦ), 54 a; de-
scriptive, 50 b with R.; of the origin
and material, with εἶναι, ποιεῖν, 54 ¢;
with prepositions and analogous words
and combinations, 55; as object to
verbs, 56 with R. (to verbs of attach-
ing and adhering to, 57 a; of the part
laid hold by, R.; of separation and
privation, 57 Ὁ; with some, inter-
changeably with ἀπό and ἐξ, R.; of
caring for and remembering, 58 a; of
ruling, 58 b; with verbs compounded
with κατά, 59 a; with πρό, ὑπέρ, Ὁ).
Gen. in the sense from (mapa), 60 a
(with passives, especially participles,
poet., 60, R. 3; of the place from
which, poet., 60, R. 4). Gen. with
verba accusandi, &e.,161 a (of the
punishment, θανάτου, R. ); with verbs
of praising, lamenting, &c. on account
of, 61 b with R. 1 (εὐδαίμων with
gen.); in exclamations, 61 b, R. 2.
LS ———<<“ ——_— - ΕΣ κ᾿
Index I. 269
Possess. gen. with adjectives (οἰκεῖος),
62. Objective gen. with adjectives,
63 a—e. Gen. with the compara-
tive and with comparative verbs (πλεο-
vexteiv, &e.), 64. Gen. of the price,
65 a (of the object of the price, b).
Gen. in specifications of time, 66 a
with R.; double-genitive or gen. ab-
solute, 66 b and 181. Gen. with the
comparative, where usual, 90; put less
accurately, R. 1. The gen. attracted
into the relative clause, 101 b. Gen.
of the infinitive, see infin. Gen. or
accus. with the infin. to a gen. as sub-
ject, 158 Ὁ. Gen. governed by ἃ par-
ticiple as substantive, 180 b, R. 2.
Position of the gen., 10 (of personal,
demonstr., and reflex. pronouns, ibid.,
3), 218 a,
Gerundive as adjective, 84 a; of in-
transitive verbs impersonally with ἔσ-
tiv, ibid. b; also of transitive verbs
impersonally, ibid. c. Gerundive cor-
responding to the active and med.,
ibid., R. Gerundive impersonally,
with the dat. or the accus. of the
acting person, δῦ.
I.
Imperative (present and aor.), 14] a and
b; interrogatively, ibid. a, R. 1; other
forms of speech used instead of it, 141,
R. 3; imperative and accus. 6. infin.
in same sense, 168 a, 1.
Imperfect, 113 ; of that which was about
to happen, ibid., R. 1; approximating
to the signification of the aor., R. 2;
with ἄν, 117; for the aor., 117 a,
R. 1; without av in hypothetical sen-
tences, 118. Imperfect in depend.
questions, and declarative object-sen-
tences after a preterite instead of the
present in oratio recta, 130 b; like-
wise in depend. sentences of oratio
obliqua, 132 b and d.
Impersonal expression, 7 a and b; of
adjectives, 7 b, R. 2; in the gen. absol.,
181 a, R. 4, ὁ and ἃ; impersonal ex-
pressions passing into personal, see
Personal Expression.
Indefinite pronoun, see Pronown.
Indicative, 108; in sentences where in
other languages a different mood, 140;
retained instead of the optat. in de-
pend. questions and declarative object-
sentences after a preeterite, 130 b (in-
dic. and optat. alternating and com-
bined, R. 1; indic. with ἄν does not
pass into the optat., ibid., R. 8). In-
dic. retained instead of optat. in de-
pend. sentences in oratio obliqua, 132
a, R. 1, and b and d.
Infinitive, 143 with R: as subject with
and without article, 144; as comple-
ment to verbs, 145 (more harshly, and
in particular phrases, with a substant.
which might have a gen., R. 1); with
verbs denoting an influence, 146 (with
certain verbs because of a special and
derived signification, R.1); after verbs
of declaring and opining, 147; infin.
to denote the purpose, 148 a, Ὁ, ὁ
(the object of the principal verb, sub-
ject of the infin. or object of the same,
or denoting means and material) ;
infin. with adjective of ability, capa-
bility, &e., ἄξιος, 149; with adjectives
(and phrases, R. 2), to denote the
reference in which the quality is as-
cribed to its subject, 150 a and b;
with 7 after a comparative, 150 ce.
Infin. with ὡς, ὥς ye limiting and re-
stricting, 151; with ὥςτε, οἷος, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ Te,
πρίν, 152 (see Accus. ὁ. infin.). Infin.
suppletory and extra structuram, 153;
Infin. for the imperative, 141, R. 2.
Active infin., where other languages
have the passive, 148 b (rarely passive,
R.) and ο, 149, R., 150 a (passive
rare, R.1). Infin. with the article in
the nominative, 144; in the other
cases, 154 a; in the accus., Ὁ, ¢ (in-
stead of the simple infin., b, R.); in
the dative, 155; in the gen., 156 (in-
terchangeably with the simple infin.,
R. 1 and 2; with verbs of negative
meaning, with μή and without μή, R.3);
accus. of the infin. with μή and μὴ οὐ
(τὸ μή, TO μὴ ov) after verbs of with-
holding, &., 156, R. 4. Gen. of the
infin. in signif. in order to, 170 ¢, R.
Infin. in apposition, with the article
270
and without it, 157. Case of the pre-
dicate-noun or apposition with an infin.
referred to a preceding subject, 158.
Infin. in exclamations (accus.), 168 a,
3. Infin. after 7, or else, where in
Engl. indic. fut., 186, R.
Infinitive, accus. with, after verba decla-
randi et opinandi, 159 (with some,
by reason of a pregnant signification,
R. 2; relation to ὅτι and ws, R. 1 and
3); accus. or nominat. with the infin.,
160 and 161; instead of it, the simple
infin. attaching itself to the preceding
case, 162. Accus. 6. infin. not imme-
diately governed by a verb, and re-
ferred to an indirect intimation of a
declaration or opinion, 163 a and b.
Aceus. ὁ. infin. with verbs of willing
and effecting, 164 (χαίρειν λέγω τινί
and τινά, R. 3); with judgments ex-
pressed impersonally, 165 a; as appo-
sition to a demonstrative pron., ibid. b.
Accus. ¢. infin. after ὥςτε, ἐφ᾽ ᾧ τε, οἷος,
106 ἃ, b, c; with πρίν, 167 (πρὶν 7,
πρότερον, ὕστερον 7, R.). Accus. ¢.
infin. without governing verb, in com-
mands, entreaties, exclamations, with
ὡς, ὅσον, and without os restrictively,
168 aandb. Accus. c. infin. in rela-
tive and other depend. sentences, 169
a and Ὁ. Accus. 6. infin. or partep.
after certain verbs, 178 a, R. 6. Accus.
c. infin. with the article in the nomi-
native and accus., 170 a; in the dat.,
b; in the gen., c (with the significa-
tion of ἕνεκα, R.).
Infinitive, nominative with, 160, 161;
after οἶμαι δεῖν, and the like, 160, R.
—, tenses of the, 171,172. See
Present, Perfect, Future, Aorist, In-
fin. with ἄν (pres., aor.,rarely perf.), 173.
Interrogative partieles in simple ques-
tions, 199 Ὁ; in disjunctive, ibid. ὁ.
pronoun, see Pronoun, in-
terrog.
sentences, of that which is
to be, in the subjunctive, 121 (indie.
fut., ibid. R. 1). Indic. present first
person, R. 2; depend. in indic., 108.
130; in the optat. after a preeterite,
130 a (in the indic. or subjunctive,
Index IT.
ibid. b); in the dubitative optat. with
ἄν, 137; questions in the optat. with
ἄν, denoting a wish, 129, R. 1. In-
terrog. sentences in the participial
form, 176 a, 181 a; with the interrog.
pronoun in the accessory sentence, or
in a circumloc. with the article, 198 a.
Direct questions without particle,
199 a; attached to the preceding
sentence by ἢ, ibid.
Intransitive verbs, used transitively, 22
b with R. 2.
M.
Middle, signification, 82 (action in refer-
ence to the subject itself, a; intransi-
tively and reflexively, b; more special
active signification with reference to
the subject, ὁ; difference between the
act. and midd. evanescent, 4). Act.
and midd. form in intransitive verbs,
82 ἃ, R.2; midd. form in compound
verbs, 82 a, R.; midd. and passive
form alternating in deponents, 82 b,
R. 1. Fut. midd. (rarely aor. 2)
in passive signification, 83 a; perfect
midd. of transitive deponents, 83 b.
Moods in Greek, in general, 107.
N.
Negation referring to two members con-
nected, 189 a, note, and R. 1. A
simple negation cancelled by a preced-
ing neg., 209 a (exception, R. 1); a
composite neg. continuing and con-
firming the preceding neg., 209 b.
Redundant neg. with infin., 210; can-
celled neg. with infin. (μὴ od), 211 a.
An affirmative to be understood from
the neg., 213. See the particulars
under ov, οὐδέ, οὔτε, μή, μηδέ, μήτε, Ke.
Neuter plur. with verb singular, 1 a
(exceptions, R. 1); neut. (sing.) of
the predicate to a subject masc. or
fem., 1 b, R. 3. Neut. plur. in im-
personal expressions (ἀδύνατα ἦν), 1 Ὁ,
R. 4. Neut. sing. and plur. of adjec-
tives put substantively, 87 a.
Nominative preceded by as, ὥςπερ, καθά-
mep, with verb understood, 20, R. 3;
after the comparative in a different
Index 17. 27%
case, 89; nominative with infin., see
Infinitive.
O.
Object-sentences with ὅτι, ὡς in the
indic., 108 and 130 b; in the optat.,
130 a; in the optat. with ἄν, 137;
the subject attracted to the principal
sentence, 191. Object-sentences with
ὅπως, ὅπως μή, μή, In the subjunctive
(fut. indic.), 123, 124. 131 b; in the
optat., 131 a; the subject attracted to
the principal sentence, 191, R. 2.
Optative, 119 with R.; in wishes, 129;
with ὅτι, ὡς, and in depend. questions
after a preeterite, 130 a (indic., b); in
the continuation of such sentences
with οὖν, ὥςτε, yap, 180 b, R. 4; in
final and object-sentences with ὅπως
after a preterite, 131 a (subjunctive,
b); (optat., indic., subjunct. in final
and object-sentences depend. on a sen-
tence of the same kind, 131 b, R. 4) ;
optat. in depend. sentences of oratio
obliqua after a principal verb in the
preterite, 132 a and d (indic. or sub-
junct., ibid. b); optat. put less accu-
rately in a depend. sentence to an
infin. after a present, 132, note ; optat.
in relative sentences, and after tem-
poral particles, denoting frequent re-
currence, 133; in conditional sen-
tences, 135; optat. and indic. in de-
pend. sentences to the optat. with ἄν,
138. Tenses of the optat., 134. (See
Perfect, Aorist, Future.) Optat. with
ἄν (present, aorist, sometimes perfect),
135; as potential and dubitative mood,
136; also in depend. sentences, 137.
Oratio obliqua continued in the optat.,
130 b, 4; in the infin., 163 a; de-
pend. sentences in oratio obliqua inthe
indic., 140; in the optat. (indie. or
subjunct.),132a—d. Oratio obliqua
suddenly passing into the oratio recta,
192 b
P.
Participle, 174; denoting the relation of
time, manner, &e., 174b; its relation
to the principal action indicated by
various particles, 175 (τότε, εἶτα, &e.);
of intention, with verbs of motion,
175 ἃ, R.1; governing a relative or
interrog. pronoun, 176 a; partep. in
Greek, where other languages would
employ a principal sentence, 176 b.
The partep. serving to annex a cha-
racterizing remark, 176 6: certain
participles used adverbially, ibid., R.
Partcp. annexed to another partep.,
176 d; not in strict agreement with
subject of principal verb, 176 e; (ana-
coluth. of case, ibid., R. and 216, note.)
Passing by anacoluth. into a verbum
Jinitum, 216, R. 1. Partep. in apposi-
tion to the subject serving to complete
the predicate, mostly with intransitive
verbs (διατελῶ ποιῶν), 177 a and b
(with ἄμεινόν ἐστι, and the like, b,
R. δ); im apposition to the object
(subject in the passive) with transitive
verbs, 178 a and b (to the subject,
when this is at the same time object :
δείκνυμι ποιῶν, sometimes ἐμαυτὸν ποι-
ovvra, a and R. 1); alternating in
certain verbs with ὅτι, ὡς, 178 a, R. 5,
or with accus. ὁ. infin., ibid., R. 6.
Partep. attached to ἔχω, 179. Partep.
as attributive, 180 a; substantively,
ibid. Ὁ (rarely anarthrous, R. 1; ὁ
ποιήσων, one that shall, can, &c. do,
ibid.) ; witha gen., poet., 180 b, R. 2;
in the neuter instead of an abstract
substantive, ibid. Some few present
participles used as adjectives with εἶναι,
180 c; present or aor. of the partep.
with εἰμί, γίγνομαι, in periphrasis,
180 d. Partcp. in the gen. absol.,
181; particles therewith, relation to
the simple partcp., ibid., R. 1—3.
Subject of the gen. absol. omitted,
ibid., R. 4 a and b. Gen. absolute
formed from impersonal phrases, ibid.,
R. 4,¢; froma passive with a sentence
beginning with ὅτι, ibid., R. 4, ἃ; with
ὄντος omitted, ibid., R. 5; gen. absol.
instead of a simple partep., ibid., R. 6.
Partep. with a substant. governed by
a preposition instead ofthe gen. absol.,
ibid., R. 7. Partep. in the accus.
absol. from impersonal phrases, and
NO
after ὡς, ὥςπερ, 182 with R. (ὦν |
omitted, R. 3.) Tenses of the par-
ticiple, 183. (See Present, Aorvst.)
Partep. with ἄν, 184 (not the future,
R.). Position of the partep. with the
article, 9 a, and R. 1. Partcp. of
certain impersonal verbs used per-
sonally with the infin., 165 a, R.
Particles which cannot begin a sentence,
219 b.
Passive used impersonally, 7 b, and R.;
formed in a certain connexion from
verbs not transitive, 26 a, and 27 a
(6 βεβιωμένος σοι Bios, td σοι πεπρεσβευ-
μένα) ; predicated of the object of
reference, 35 b, R. 3; formed from
verbs which govern the dat., 36 a,
R. 4; from verbs which govern the
gen., 56, R. 2; passive, where some-
times in English, and oftener in Ger-
man, the reflexive expression is used
(ηθροίσθην). 82 Ὁ; as deponent, 82 b,
ἩΡ ΓΟΥ ὩΣ !
Perfect, in the indic., 112; of certain
verbs as present, 112, R. 2; subjunc-
tive, 128 b with R.; optative, 134;
with dy, 135, 136; perfect infin. of
the entirely finished action or state
effected, 171, R. 1.
Period, structure of, 220.
Person, first plural instead of singular,
1a, R.3; third plural without de-
finite subject, 6 b; singular of certain
verbs impersonally, 7 a; second per-
son of an indefinite subject, 6 Ὁ. En-
allage of person, by transition from
oratio obliqua into oratio recta, 192 b.
Personal expression in Greek, where in
other languages impersonal, 7 b, R. 3,
165 a, R. (δίκαιος), 177 b (δῆλος,
φανερός), ibid., R. 4 (ἀρκῶ, βελτίων
eii), 191, R. 1.
Plural of the verb in speaking of two,
1 a, R. 2; of the substantive, 1 a,
R. 2; of the first person in speaking
of one individual, ibid., R. 3; of ad-
jectives in the neuter instead of the
singular, 1 b, R. 4. Plural of the
verb to a singular collective, 3a; to
a singular subject with μετά, σύν, 3 ὁ.
Sudden transition from the plural into
72 Index I.
the singular,6 a, R. Plural of certain
substantives, where in English the
singular, 18 a and b. ;
Plusquamperfectum (simple and compo-
site), 114; plusquamperf. and (more
frequently) aor. with ἐπεί, &c., 114 ¢;
of certain verbs in the signification of
the imperfect, 112, R.2; with ay, 117.
Position of the adjective and the gen. to
substantives with the article, 9, 10;
position with the partitive gen., 50,
R. 1; with the prepositions, 80; the
ordinary position of words in the sen-
tence, 217 a; rhetorically modified,
ibid. b; special remarks (on indefinite
pronouns, particles, φημί), 219.
Possessive pronoun, see Pron. Poss.
Predicate to several connected subjects,
2 with RR.; conforming itself to the
natural quality of the subject, 3; after
an inserted apposition,5; after a clause
appended by 7, 5, R.; the verb con-
forming to the predicate noun,4. The
predicate noun to a partep., taking its
ease from the partep., 20, R. 2. A
demonstrative pronoun instead of the
predicate noun, 1 b, R. 5, and 24 ἢ,
Rad:
Prepositions ; their constructions and
significations, 60 sqq. Prepositions to
denote the acting person with the
passive (ὑπό, παρά, πρός, ἐξ, ἀπο),
78 ἃ. Prepositions of rest with verbs
of motion, and conversely, 79 a. The
prepositions separated from their case,
80a with R., by μέν and δέ, 188, R.1;
put after their case, 80 b; other posi-
tions, ibid., c. and d; repetition, ibid.,
d, R. Position, in a comparison by
ὡς, ὥςπερ, ibid. The preposition of
the demonstrative inaccurately re-
peated with the relative, 103, R. 2,
note; omitted with the relative, 103,
R. 4; breviloquentia and attraction
(ἀφ᾽ ἧς ὠμέσατε ἡμέρας), 103, R. 2,
note.
Present, indic. of that which is still going
on, 110 a, R. 1; of certain verbs in-
stead of perfect, ibid. R. 2; present
for future, ibid., R. 2; historical pre-
sent, 110 b with RR.; present indic.
Index IT. 273
in deliberative questions, 121, R. 2;
present and imperfect indic. instead of
present optat. after a preeterite, 130 b,
132 b, d. Present infin. instead of
future, 171 a, R. 2; of a more remote
past after the imperfect (ἔφην), 171 Ὁ,
R. 1; as imperfect even after a prin-
cipal verb in the present or future,
ibid., R. 2. Partep. of the present as
imperfect even after a principal verb
in the present or future, 183, R. 1.
Principal sentence, wanting in expres-
sions such as ὃ δὲ μέγιστον, ὅτι, 197
with R.; by anacoluth. after a remark
with ὡς, 216, R. 3.
Pronoun in the neuter instead of a pre-
dicate noun, 1 b, R. 5, and 24 b, R.1;
accus. of a pronoun in the neuter,
where no accus. of a substantive, 25 b,
R. 2, 27 a and R. Gender of the
relative and demonstrative pronoun,
where there are several substantives,
97 a; pronoun in the neuter plural,
97 b. The pronouns referring to a
substantive not expressed, but implied,
99 b.
, demonstrative, together with
the article, 11 and R. 1; position in
the gen. with the article, 10, R. 3.
Pron., demonstr., attracted in gender
to the following substant., 98 a (ex-
ception, R.); in the neuter after
masce. or femin. substant., 99 a; in the
plural after εἴ τις, 99 d; as object
with an adjective in apposition (ταῦτα
ἀληθῆ λέγω, herein, &e.), 100 a; with
an interrog. pron., ibid. b; as object
omitted, ibid. d; redundant, ibid. e;
before the relative omitted, 102, 103
(its place supplied by the attraction,
102 a, R.). Pron., demonstr., ex-
plained by a sentence in apposition,
190; by a sentence with γάρ, 196 a.
Pronoun, indefinite, with ἔστιν before
the relative omitted, 102 b; before re-
lative adverbs of place and time, ibid.,
R. 2; never stands first in the sen-
tence, 219 a; understood from an
infin., 144, R. 2. 4
, interrogative, in apposition to
a demonstrative, 100 b; governed by
a partep., 176 a, 181 a; in a depend.
sentence, or in a periphrasis with the
article, 198 a; two in one sentence,
198 a, R. 1; direct (ris) for indirect,
198 b (motos for ὁποῖος, &e.).
» personal, as subject, omitted,
6 a; position of the gen., 10, R. 3;
in the gen. = a possessive pronoun,
67 a.
, possessive, with a gen. in ap-
position, 67 a; instead of an objective
gen., 67 b.
, relative, after ἤ (with compa-
rative), used or omitted, 91, R. 1; in
the neuter to several substantives ot
a different gender, 97 a; in the plural
to a substant. in the dual, 97 a, R;
in the plural to a substant. in the
singular, 99 ¢; mascul. or fem. to a
neuter term denoting a person, 99 e,
The antecedent drawn into the relat.
clause, 101 a and b (so a gen. or an
adjective, ibid. b); draws the fore-
going substant. to itself, in case, 101 a,
R. The accus. of the relative after a
dat. or gen. passes into the same case
(by attraction), 103 (exceptions, R.) ;
relative in the nominative neuter at-
tracted to the dat. or gen., 103, R. 2.
Attracted relative in the signification
of ὅτι, 103, R. 3. Rare and anomalous
cases of attraction, 103, R.,note. The
relative with a preposition as conjunc-
tion, 103, R. 3. <A relative in the
nominat. or accus. in the second mem-
ber, to be understood from a different
case preceding, 104 a; for the rela-
tive in the second member a demon-
strative, ibid. Ὁ. The relative attached
to a person not expressiy named, 195 e.
A more specific statement attached to
the relative in the infin. or ina depend.
sentence, 195 d. The relative pro-
noun attaching itself to a sentence
dependent on the sentence which it
connects, or to a partcp., 195 e.
Relative in the neuter, in the sense
as regards the circumstance that (or,
the thing which &c.), 195 a.
Proper names, use of the article with,
13.
Ἔ
274
R.
Relative sentences in the accus. c. infin.,
169 a.
s.
Sentences, connexion of, peculiarities of
the, 185 sqq.
Shall; this notion not expressed, but
involved in the construction of accus.
c. infin. in certain connexions, 164,
166 b, 170 ο.
Singular of the verb (ἔστιν, ἦν, γίγνεται)
to a (following) subject in the plural
(mascul. or femin.), 1 b, R. 2, note;
of certain substantives, where a multi-
tude is denoted, 18 ce.
Subject, suddenly changed without no-
tice, 6 a, R.; omitted in the gen.
absol., 181 a, R.4aandb. The sub-
ject of the depend. sentence attracted
as object into the primary sentence,
191.
Subjunctive and optative in general, 119
with R. Subjunct. in exhortation and
demand, 120 a; with μή in prohibi-
tion, 120 b, and 142 (the first person,
in entreaty, 120, R.); in questions,
what is one to—? 121; in sentences
of intention (final), 122; in object-
sentences with ὅπως and ὅπως μή, 1233.
with μή after δέδοικα, &e., 124 a; with
édv, 125; with relative words with
av, 126 (without ἄν, R. 2); with, }
temporal conjunctions with ἄν, 127
(without ἄν, R. 2). Tenses of the sub-° |
junc., 128 (see Aorist, Perfect). Sub-
junct. retained instead of optat. after a
primary sentence of past time, 191. Ὁ. -
Substantives poetically put for adjec-
tives, 87 b, R. 2.
Superlative, as predicate, without article,
8, R. 8. Superl. of a very high de-
gree, 95; with a partitive gen., not
referring to the subject of the superl.,
95, R. 1; with αὑτοῦ, 95, R. 2; with
Index 77.
πολλῷ, μακρῷ, ὡς δυνατόν, Ke., ws, ὅτι,
&e., 96 [App. 307 41; μάλιστα ἀνοητό-
τατος, ibid., R. 1; superl. with οἷος,
ibid. ; with ἐν τοῖς, ibid., R. 2; with
a redundant ἄλλων to the partitive
gen., and in some sort instead of the
comparative, 96, R. 3, and note.
ΠΤ:
Temporal adverbs, with ἃ partitive gen.,
50 b.
conjunctions with and without
js % dy, 127 and R. 1.
Tenses of the indic., 109 sqq.; of the
subjunctive, 128; of the optative, 134;
of the infinitive, 172; of the participle,
183. The tenses in preterito not de-
noted in oratio obliqua after a preete-
rite, when the indie. is retained, 130 b,
Rea:
Time, specifications of, in the accus., 30;
in the dat., 45 a; in the gen., 66..
Transitive verbs in Greek, where the
English verbs are intransitive, 22 a;
by composition with a preposition,
23 a.
Vi;
Verb, the, understood from a co-ordinate
sentence, 214 with R. 1; from the
principal or accessory sentence, ibid.,
R. 2; from a sentence not grammati-
cally connected, R. 3. The verb ellip-
tically omitted, 215 a (εἰμί) and Ὁ (other ~
verbs). The verb and its kinds, 82
sqq- The verb (εἶναι, γίγνεσθαι) con-
forming to the predicate noun, 4.
W.
Wishes, different forms, 129 with R. 1
and 2.
De
Zeugma, 214, R. 4.
THE END.
GILBERT AND RIVINGTON, PRINTERS, ST. JOHN’S SQUARE, LONDON.
ee
ae οτάτος.
Ἂ
Υ̓
erat log
koirddy yates Sei pevtaw Ot tes δὲν" «
ᾧ' ογεὶ
: Ceol
{- 8
rt
1
εν
y=
ee ν eet0-
Areca [= ers 8 ant
τοῦς hla weve oie nae
for’. ΩΣ axnres
Ὁ Ae τ ἢ
; solvation of
δι Ὁ ceria ponnesicnsy. Poe
Ἂ shed . τὰ κ᾿ NE peat es,
See a Se ΦΌΩΣ “At the Vers + ἔστεν. wie
subjert ee the: phate
saad the acmaecipnee 5 <4 Be ΠΗ δ νιν Ἢ
1, "- ΨΥ =a)
Ue. on
τον {δι
ees
T oertaln st
~tads 18: denot
ines ae
uae τῶ, wil
eit
ζ %
ae ξεν
ts mie re
φ χὰ
)
Ms 56h
Noe err een = seo
in ut astans,
in: sentences
Paik hth suid tan rsbaoyt
7]
ae
md : » aye
fe Ο ; L Giraot μέρ L2y-|.. Bapbenoe,
πον ee hes the ineipa
tte 12% τς ἈΚ, «τα ἐτῷ Oban aan, ἢ aes ae τ, ρώτα τε eas
a ee 426 : (wit Ok BY, a yA Se ¥ “ἢ ν » ee 9
tenfi ovat peMnehtons with Re, $y tical conitted, 2
é —fwinheass ae 13: dBRL eee Sui : anaes) Bin
ἢ
j 28 (see Aare ἜΣ SR re ΠΑ fae: "ἂν 5 ἢ-
yotetore shared jesbend oPontat = πῇ ster:
primary BOWLER pal. fy πῶς TBE
ἈΝ mabsta rninves poctieall ly Bek For - atte.
eee ss. tives 87 ὌΣ i ἐν =
~ ves ae 8s “atl Saba wcthout rt oe x
Super! οὐ ὃ. ery ἘΞ ae ate
"with ἣν partifive yen. nett ce a Pin
a sabe, ofthe | weak: hee
ga ae ᾿ς πὰ Ἢ πὐτϑῦ, my ἕω Sxl: eragrane
} Rags Tuc cat Glee
ὌΡΟΣ ssniog ts. the Bri
ee | Ὁ
—
τι, πὸ ee τὰ ee eee ρὰ τ ee ee
ὩΣ
Sa ate saree
THE FOLLOWING SCHOOL BOOKS
By THE LATE Rey. T. K. ARNOLD
ARE PUBLISHED BY MESSRS. RIVINGTON,
3, Warertoo Puace, Part Mat.
ARRANGED UNDER NUMBERS FOR PROGRESSIVE TUITION.
Keys to those works to which + is prefixed may be had by Schoolmasters and Tutors.
1,
‘
ie
“1
5.
LATIN. PRICE
+ Henry’s First Latin Book ....... eUnauhauutceusucnasaentssrnesextsasintaceesecesers
+ Supplementary Exercises to ditto, by Hill... oe τς :
+ Second Latin Book, and Practical Grammar.
+ First Verse Book ...
Companion to the First Verse Book (additional Exercises) .
Historie Antique Epitome........... ee aeoneas
A First Classical Atlas (companion ‘to the “Historie Antique Epitome) oon
BE A Ἐα Ovidiane, Part I. (From the Elegiac Poems)... ooStoScochosnecn
, Part II. (From the Metamorphoses)...
t Practical Intro Introduction to Latin Prose Composition, Part ἘΣ
Cornelius Nepos, with Critical Questions and Imitative EXerciseS.......ss.seesesereeee
Viren nets, Lib. I.—VI.. scot Reena cenusesdes rss
VirGILiit ANE1s, with English ‘Notes, from Diibner... as
HorAtTit OPERA, with English Notes, from Diibner
Ecloge Horatiane. Pars ie (Carmina)... ..s00. OD
+ Practical Introduction to Latin Verse Composition supesuehcessasth'saeesenenssee
GRADUS AD PARNASSUM.. I ccnccnderccscocecscnsaneceseeb cdevevscucconaceneeescossuve
ICERO, WITH ENGLISH iene Selected Orations .....
—— Selected Epistles ...........s00» pat
The Tusculan Disputations .........s..eseseeereeee
———$—_— _—__———\———— Dee Senectute ........
Eciocz Historic#; or, Selections from the Roman Historians, "Cesar, Sallust,
Livy, Curtius, TE TACLELAS ac wascksgccuisven-eesuts ceeevs dvoxonove noes once emcee ee ἘΠΕ ΡΩΝ ΟΣ
Saxtust: Jugurthine War...
Tacitus. Annales, Books XI. ἘΞ.
Practical Introduction to Latin Prose Composition, ‘Part ἯΙ
Latin Word-Building ; with eeanolonieay oe:
+ Longer Latin Exercises, Part I.. ἘΞ a eae
Part ul. pesca nsetiseneasauaenesnaasesscusvcvesuarusesNinderasanssaesners
28
_
Rook CHeOUNANW FP DUNN μῦθον ὁ
He ee ὦ οὐ οὐ
GREEK.
+ The First Greek Book.. Rvcnnssudrectstarsnaerehanaaphideandesned ede onshenaceene tnrnTnnnTaenions
The Second Greek Book.. as
The Third Greek Book (from "Xenophon’ Ἢ Cyropedia) . ont ΣᾺ
The Fourth Greek Book (Xenophon’s Anabasis, Books Iv. “VIL. he τ
Practical Introduction to Greek Accidence ......
t Greek Prose Composition. "Part I.
Greek Construing ..
oe Grammar (intended as a sufficient Grammar of reference for the higher
orms) . deuscunsoneashisennabanectsedosen
Elementary “Greek Reader, from. Homer. “By Dr. “Ahrens gue oe
XxENOoPHON: Anabasis complete (Hertlein) .......... σξὰ ἐπ ΝΣ sees
The Olynthiac Orations ...
DEMOSTHENES {mre Oration on the Crown i with πῶς Not oes and ‘Gram-
The Philippic Orations...... Matical References .0ι 6... νον ee
:
—
me RWW O BD on Or He ὦν οὐ ὧν
Aoaans ooocs:
oon ofcao AMRoo οοῶφςοςς
SeSOAoCrA PROASCAAS
REV. T. K. ARNOLD’S WORKS (continued).
GREEK CLASSICS, with ENGLISH NOTES (continued). PRICE
8. ἃ.
JESCHINES.—The Oration against Ctesiphon .....- 966 ..ο οθο οοοοοουσο σου οοοοοοσοοοοο ρον...» 4. 0
Complete Edition ... ... «ὐν νον νον Meciaasionciscsiasinepiseeinae'susie ecco JA
ἘΟΜΕΕΙ Sitio, I.—IV., with ‘Critical Introduction .............0 sel eG
{τ, ib. 1 —III., for Beginners ...-.....sseee0+-e- peaeeas oo ok (ὦ
HomeEnRric LExIcon, Greek and English (Crusius’ 8) .. gen cue cos ceslosuseccscecoccoscs ececsreseseseO ne
The Ajax (Schneidewin) . SCOHECCOCCUSEEDOSCEUCKOODOMGOConMooSubconemectonson ΤΟ
The Philoctetes (Schneidewin)... Bo, & ih
SopHocLess The Cdipus Tyrannus (Schneidewin) . 4 0
[zee Q&dipus Coloneus (Schneidewin) .. cael)
The Antigone (Schneidewin) ............- ἈΝ Ὁ Τὴ
The five Plays in One VOLUME... .....cccccscessessecpsscosseasesseccecscesesseusl LOMO
The Hecuba .... 3.0
The Hippolytus 3.0
EvuRIPIpDEsS< The Bacche ...... 3:10
The Iphigenia! in Tauris...... 60 ὃ Roce ane 3. 0
MheuMed cas ecccccacsecreccaccacseucessccacnsccnessserssvcssiterarsisasereissscesseaenaaveaee mame
The five Plays Ἔ OUCH VOMIMICMescusascrcsrscnscsssrscesecessteransace Feoomecn 153 ἢ]
THUCYDIDES.—Bo0K First...cceseeeoeeee sucisuetetnccelenceanensmsntonsictvisesitcriesslentassereieasttescee ites 6
——— BOORISCCOMGlereceverce-teceresecseeneecencerrsescrsascenra=s 6
Heropotus.—Ecloge Herodotez, Part I. (Schweighzuser) 6
Ecloge Aristophanice, Part I. “ἢ The Clouds”? ...cccssssesseese 6
-----. -- Part Il. ‘‘ The Birds”.. neaseisesideacnecncnteenestensians 6
The FIRST HEBREW BOOK. .csscccccsscsccsecccssscrcccesscvosccesccese cose
Key to ditto.. cco oo
The SEconD HEBREW Book (Genesis) ἘΠῊΝ
Copious anp CRITICAL ENGLIsa-LATIN LEXICON Pick the ‘Rev. ibe Ke “ARNOLD
and the Rev. J. E. ἘΣΡΟΤΕΙΝ: onoere ABO CODOCOCARCLOOZ0OCL OXDCOSELORLCOCONIAC COEEE CROCCO HAN
An Abridgment of the Above....
Classical Examination Papers .........
Henry’s English Grammar for Beginners «.
English Grammar for Classical Schools ..
Spelling turned Etymology, Part I.. ao
----.-- ------ , Part II. (Latin οἱ vid ἃ English) .
The First GERMAN Books Gocco ¢ragcecaseDaNcooned
Key to the above ode
Second German Book: a By mtax. and. Etymological Vocabulary...
Key to ditto.. Dueucasiestaneces suvievecsssernasssea-sterses τι toOneccO0)
German Vocabulary .. “00s on
The First FRENCH Book . on
Key to the above, by M. Delille
French Vocabulary ...... 5 Beelone
Zumpt’s Annals of Ancient Chronology... CCC CEO CC LUCLUCLDCCOCLECD Se CLC COICUOLONO MECC OCECOGLC
το ὦ
τῷ
ὧν τῷ τ ὧν ἢ. κα σὺ Ὁ ὧΥ μὮ' ὃ Ὁ. τὰ "πὶ
seeneee
SAMARDSCAAVWAMAMWOARSD Φ σ5 σ»
HANDBOOKS.
RoMAN ANTIQUITIES...) (BosEsEN) {
GRECIAN ANTIQUITIES J
ANCIENT GEOGRAPHY AND HIsTory...
Mepi@vaL GEOGRAPHY AND ae (CRUZ) enc sccececoceucuce cavccucstvcursceuaaetrenes {
MoprerRnN GEOGRAPHY AND HIsToRY...
GREEKISYNON YM ES ((BI/LON)) sescersescncrcncisenecdacessiessacsccciansleseacslescedsacciauneeseusiece teens
LaTIn SYNONYMES (DépERLETN) © -poeepote
HEBREW ANTIQUITIES. By the*Rev. H Browne .. eee ἐδ ἀπεκεῖ
HANDBOOK OF THE RELIGION aND MyTHOLOGY OF THE. "GREEKS. “From the
German of H. W. Stoll (with Plates) .... ise caaslehe,deansiedecesteeeeniene
The ATHENIAN STAGE. From the German of Witzschel... Seiccnapeanhecesdenapeeataeee
me ον WHR σὺ ὧν HR σὺ Go Co
oc Φ ς σ; 5 σ: ὁ) Οὐ σ᾽
By Professor Piffert and Rev. Dawson W. Turner:
The FIRST ITALIAN BOOK, on the plan of Hexry’s First Latin Book. 5s. 6d.
KEY to ditto. 15. 6d.
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
ἀρ 62) «
φόνον eee
ΡΟΣ
ΡΟΝ
sae et as
Seateees seve
sesso
ee
Ὁ"
"Ἢ
a
rest
πος δεν,
es oot.
cnastevocssseew tet
Sade owe see Oe,
“sg dombw ee
“2.
γον,
fase ov
δ at
+s
saiedesel
TA
Sy
ἜΑΡ ass
eetove?
Ly
err]
teow eee’
Jaeoevew
set = - By Ee 3
eee nets BRE Peaen te ee Te
Bie Sener abet Cee =
be SAS meee i no wot Ξ ῃ WL
ταν τ σνν τὸ : ᾿ : epee es
arte ae a sere : : Se a ete
- μι SF - Σ ᾿ Pome ee
3 : ; Soto
eon teee
Set δε δέκα,
ee τα
atten A Tt brent
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11